J.  Henry  Senger 


HOSSFELD'S 

NEW    PRACTICAL     METHOD 


FOR   LEARNING   THE 


GERMAN  LANGUAGE. 


HOSSFELD'S 

NEW     PRACTICAL     METHOD 


FOR   LEARNING  THE 


GERMAN  LANGUAGE. 


BY 


CH.  BRENKMANN, 
ft 

PROFESSOR  OF  THE  GERMAN  LANGUAGE. 


CONTENTS. 

1. — A  complete  Grammar,  with  explanatory  Exercises  and  Vocabulary 

2.— A  German  Reader  (Prose  and  Poetry). 

'3. — One    hundred   pages    of   English-German    Dialogues    and  of 

Commercial  Correspondence. 
4- — A  Supplement,  containing  the  Conjugation  of  German  Verbs  and 

an  Alphabetical  List  of  Irregular  Verbs. 
5. — A  separate  Key. 


THE  NEW  YORK 
SCHOOL  BOOK  CLEARING  HOUSE, 

No.  65  DUANE  STREET. 
NOW  PUBLISHED  BY 
Arthur  Hinds  4  Go.  4  Cooper  tortfcrt*  N.  Y,  City, 


IN  MEMORIAM 


Uniform  with  this  Work. 

HOSSFELD'S  FRENCH  METHOD. 
UOS^FELD'S  SPANISH  METHOD. 
H>>-SFELD'S  ITALIAN  METHOD. 


KEYS   TO   EACH   SEPARATE. 


i, 


CONTENTS. 

(See  also  Index,  page  V.) 

-* t 

page 

Preface          ... 1 

The  German  Alphabet             4 

German  Alphabet  for  writing       ...                    . .          ... .  5 

Pronunciation  of  the  vowels               ...         ...         ...  Q 

„            Exercise      7 

„            of  consonants               ...         ...         ...  8 

„            Exercise 9 

Remarks  on  pronunciation,  and  emphasis  in  pronunciation        10 
Division  of  Syllables,  Capital  letters,  Signs  of  punctuation        11 

Parts  of  Speech  and  their  definition              11 — 12 

Gender,  number,  case         12 

Exceptions  to  the  rules  of  the  declension  of  substantives  13 — 17 

Table  of  the  declension  of  the  article,  etc.          18 

Table  of  terminations  of  the  four  declensions          ...  19 

The  article  and  the  noun. — Definite  Article.  —  First  de- 
clension of  nouns        20 

Declension  of  the  definite  article. — Second  declension  of 

nouns          ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  24 

Declension  of  the  indefinite  article. — Third  declension 

of  nouns           ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  28 

Fourth  declension  of  nouns     32 

Nouns  with  prepositions                ...         ...         ...         ...  36  &  40 

Declension  of  proper  nouns 44 

986682 


II 


Determinative  adjectives.  —  Demonstrative  adjectives.  — 

Verbs  used  with  negations  .........  48 

Possessive  adjectives.—  Remarks  on  regular  verbs   ...  52 

Interrogative  adjectives      ...............  56 

Qualifying  adjectives.—  Their  declension      ......     60,  64  &  68 

Irregular  verbs.  —Remarks  on  their  conj  ugation  ...  68 

Remarks  on  the  declensions  of  adjectives     ......  72 

Comparison  of  adjectives  ...         ...         ...         ...  76 

„  „        (irregular).  —  Place  of  some  words          80 

Pronouns.  —  Personal  pronouns     ...        ...         ...         ...  84 

Reflective  pronouns.  —Place  of  personal  pronouns  ...  88 

Possessive  pronouns  ...............  .  92 

Demonstrative  pronouns         "  ............  96 

I  nterr  ogati  ve  pronouns      ...............  1  00 

Relative  pronouns        ...............       104  &  108 

Indefinite  pronouns  ...............  112 

Remarks  on  pronouns  ......  '      ......  116 

Numerals      .....................  120—122 

Indefinite  Numerals     ...............  126 

Verbs.  —  Conjugation  of  verbs.—  Auxiliary  verbs.  —  Aux- 

iliary verbs  of  mood  ............  130 

Regular  verbs  ...............       131  —  133 

Irregular  verbs        ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  138 

Compound  verbs.  —  Separable  verbs  ......       142  &  146 

Verbs  sometimes  separable,  sometimes  inseparable       ...146&  150 
Classification  of  verbs.  —  Transitive  verbs.  —  Passive  verbs         154 
Reflective  verbs       ..................          158 

Intransitive  verbs         ...  ......  162 

Impersonal  verbs  ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  166 

Adverbs.  —  List  of  adverbs       ...         ...         ...         ...       170  —  171 

Remarks  on  the  adverbs  and  their  position        ......          172 

Remarks  on  the  adverbs.  —  Their  comparison  ...  176 

Prepositions.  —  Lists  ...............  180  —  181 

Remarks  on  prepositions         ............       182  &  186 

Conjunctions.  —  Co-ordinative  conjunctions        ......  190 

Subordinative  conjunctions     ......  L  94  &  1  98 


Ill 

page 

Remarks  on  conjunctions  (adverbs  &  prepositions) 

198,  202,  206,  210  &  214 

Interjections      214 

Gender  of  nouns      218—221 

Formation  of  nouns  by  derivation     ...         ...         ...       221 — 223 

On  the  regular  verbs          223 

Division  of  words  into  syllables         224 

SYNTAX 225 

The  article  and  the  noun        226 

Qualifying  adjectives         ...230&234 

Pronouns  and  determinative  adjectives         238  &  242 

Numerals      242,246  &  250 

General  remarks  on  determinative  adjectives,  pronouns 

and  numerals         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  254 

Auxiliary  verbs  of  mood  258—260 

On  Saffen  and  to  like 264 

On  tenses  and  moods  of  verbs       268 

The  infinitive  and  the  present  participle      272 

Government  of  verbs         276&280 

On  the  passive  voice. — On  e§,  there  ...     .    ...  284 

Remarks  on  verbs. — Inversion     288 

Position  of  the  object  and  the  negation  ntdjt  in  a  sentence        289 

APPENDIX  294 

On  the  article  and  the  noun  294—296 

On  the  preposition  and  the  genitive  of  nouns     297 —298 

On  the  qualifying  adjective     ...  298 

On  the  declension  of  adj ectives 298—299 

On  the  pronouns,  determinative    adjectives    and   nu- 
merals                299—303 

On  the  verbs  304—307 

Agreement  of  verb  and  subject  307 

On  separable  verbs  ...         ...         ...         ...         ...          308 

Ontohave          308 

Ontobe        309 

On  to  do  309—310 

OntomaJce  ...310—311 


IV 

page 

On  to  get  311—312 

On  the  cases  (vocative,  nominative,  genitive,  dative  and 

accusative)        312—318 

Verbs  governing  the  accusative  in  German  and  a  pre- 
position in  English  319 

Kemarks  on  the  prepositions  about,  by,  in          319 — 320 

Verbs  with  prepositions  320 — 325 

Adjectives  with  prepositions         326 — 328 


Instructions  how  to  correspond  in  German  with  the  aid 

of  Hossf eld's  Commercial  Correspondent        ...        329 — 344 


Conjugation  of  the  German  Verbs,  see  Supplement  at  the  tnd  of 
the  book. 


INDEX. 


page 

A 

Abbreviations        ...  xn 

Slber(but)        198 

About         319 

Accusative        .,.         ...       318 

Adjectives  (Demonstrative)  48 

„          (Determinative) 

48,238,254,299 
„  (Interrogative)  56 
„  (Possessive) 

52,  238,  299,  302 
„         (Qualifying)  230,298 
.  /declension  60,64,68,72,298  | 
.§,  I  apposition  230 

<)  I  used  as  nouns  230 

,eP<  governingthe  accusative  318 
l&j         „    the  dative  234,315 
„    the  genitive  234, 31 3 
*         „  prepositions  234,326 
Lists  of  170, 171 

Eemarks  on     172, 176, 198 
Position  of  80, 172 

of  interrogation  not 
used  in  direct 
questions  198 

Adverbial  expressions  in 

the  genitive 313 

—-in  the  accusative  318 


page 

After  210 

All  126,246,254,301,302 

All  that       ...         ...  301 

Alphabet  (German)     ...          4 

„        (German     for 
writing) 5 

9lnbertf)alb,  etc.  (one  and 
a  half,  etc.) 242 

Another      126,250 

Any       126,246,250 

Anybody,  anything     ...       112 

Appendix 294 

Apposition        ...  122,226,230 
Article  (Definite)  ... 

20, 24,  126,  226,  294,  295,  301 
Article  (Indefinite)  28,226,294 

As          206 

As  ...  as  (not  so  ...  as)    80,  206 

At          ...         182 

At  all  ...     172,303 

Any  at  all         246 

(to)  Ask      89,262 

(to)  Avoid        112 


(to)  Be  ... 
Before 


154,  259,  284,  309 
206 


VI 


Besides  202 

Both  ...         126,254,302 

But        198 

By 155,186,210,319 


Cases     12,312 

Comparison(of  adjectives)  76, 80 
„          (of  ad  verbs)       176 
Conjunctions  (Co-ordinative) 
190 

„  (Subordinative) 

194, 198 

„  (Remarks  on)  198 


Could 


258 


bafc     210 

$amtt,  baran,  etc.          84,116 

Dative  315 

Declensions  (Tables  of)    18,  19 

3>eht(thy)        52 

£erfel&e,  etc.  ...48,96,116 

Divers  302 

(to)  Do        ...         133,146,309 
2>u(thou)          52,84 

Xiirfen  (to  be  allowed) 

64, 130,  260 

E 

@  (elided)         52,  60,  72,  76,  84 

Each  126,302 

Each  other       ...  112,238 

Either         250 

Either  ...  or     190 

Emphasis  (or  stress  in 
pronunciation)  ...  10 


Enough  126 

(to)  Enter 72 

®3          ...         84,166,238,284 

<£ucf)  84 

Suer  (your)  ((£mO        ...52,  302 

Every 126,246 

Everybody,  everyone    112,126 
Everything       126 


Few  (a)       126 

Fond  (to  be  fond  of)   ...       176 

For  186,202 

Former  (The) 300 

From  186 

G 

@ana  (all,  the  whole  of,  etc. )  246 
Gender        ...         ...  12 

„       of  nouns         218 — 220 
„       (words  having  a 
double  gender)  ...  221 

Gender  of  pronouns  and 
adjectives  referring  to 
nouns  ...  254,303 

Genitive      297,313 

„       of  personal  pro- 
nouns ...  84,303 

(to)  Get       264,311 

Gentlemen  300 


£mben  (to  have) 

20,28,36,40,44,130 
Half  (the)         ...  122,246 

(to)  Have    ...        258,264,308 
He  (him,  her)  who      ...       108 


VII 


Her,  hers,  his 
$odj  (high) 
However 


page 
52,92 

72 
190,  214 


If 206 

3fjr  (your),  if)r(you,  their)  52,84 

In          186,320 

Sitbent        210 

Infinitive  without  §u 

130,  272,  304 

„        with  §u  133,272,305 
„        with  um  . . .  §11      304 

„         used  as    sub- 
stantive        ...         ...       272 

Infinitive  with  an  ac- 
cusative after  verbs 
expressing  a  know- 
ledge, wish,  command  305 

Infinitive  after  words  of 
interrogation  . . .  305 

Interjections          ...  214 

Inversion          288 

It     84,116 

It  is  I,  etc 84 

Its 52,92 

Just       172 

K 

®6nnen  (to  be  able)  56, 130,  258 


Ladies,  ladiesand  gentlemen  300 
Saffen  (to  let,  to  leave,  etc.)  264 
Last  (The  last  but  one,  etc.)  242 

Latter  (The)     300 

Lest  214 


page 

Letters  (Capital)  ...       11 

(to)  Like  i 176,261 

Little  (A)          ...  126,302 

Soben  (to  praise)  32,  36,  40, 44 
Longer  (Any,  not  any 

longer)          250 

Lort  (To  be  lost)    ...  307 

M 

Madam 300 

(to)  Make 264,310 

Many     80,126,302 

Many  (a),  many  a  man  126 
May,  might  ...  260,304 

(to)  Meet     85,162 

Mine  (of  mine,  etc.)  92,  238 
2Bogen(may,  to  like)  64, 130, 260 
Moodsof  verbs  130, 132, 133, 268 
More  ...  80,126,250 

Most      80,126 

Much  ...  80,126,302 
SKilff  en  (to  be  obliged)  56, 1 30, 258 
My  52 

N 

Negations  (Verbs    used 

with  negations)  ...  48 
Neither  (not  ...  either)  250 
Neither  ...  nor  ...  190 

9Kd&t  (not)  (Position  of)  48,  289 
No  (not  any,  not  a)  53, 126 
Nobody  (not  anybody)  112 

Nominative      312 

None  (no  one)        ...  126 

Nothing  (not  anything)  112 
Not  only  ...  but  also  190 


VIII 


page 

Nouns  (Declension  of) 

20, 24,  28,  32 

,,        (Declension    of 
proper)    ...          44,230,295 

Nouns    (Exceptions    to 

rules  of  declension)  13 

Nouns  with  double  plural      17 

, ,      (Use  of  the  plural 
of  synonomous  words)        17 
Nouns  (Plural  not  used 
in  the  singular)       ...       296 

Nouns  (used  in  the  sin- 
gular or  plural)  296 

Nouns  formed  by  deri- 
vation   

Nouns    (Derivative    or 
Compound)        ...  296 

Nouns  expressing  meas- 
ure, number,  weight 

226, 295, 296, 318 

Nouns  in  apposition    ...       226 
„      (Genitive  of)  297 

„      in  the  Dative  and 
Accusative  (position)  80,  289 

Nouns  in  the  Accusative     318  I 

Number  12 

Numbers  (Cardinal  used 
substantively)    ...  300 

Numbers  (Ordinal  in  ap- 
position)      ...         ...       122 

Numerals 

120,  126,  242,  254,  299 


Object  (position)         ...      289 
Of  40,100,122,226,297 

O^ne  (without)  ...      116 

Dljne  bofc 210 

On  186 


page 

One  ...  72,112,122,126 

One  another  (each  other)  112 
One's  (one's  self)  ...  88,  242 

Only      172 

Other  (The)  ...48,96,126 
Other  (some  or  other)  246 
Our,  ours  52,92 

Own  (of  his,  of  her  own, 
etc.)  238 

P 

Participle  (Past) 

52, 131, 154,  307 
„             „     of  aux- 
iliary verbs  of  mood   64, 130 
Participle(Present)  210,272,305 
Participles  used  as  ad- 
jectives           72,230 

Parts  of  Speech     ...  11 

(to)  Pass  262 

Passive  voice  154,  284,  313,  314 

People         112 

Possessive         ...     20,238,242 
Prepositions(Nouns  with)  36,40 
„          (Lists)      ...       180 
„          (Remarks  on) 

182, 186, 198,  319 

„          (Position)          186 

Pronouns    84,116,238,254,299 

„        (Correlative)         108 

„        (Demonstrative)     96 

„        (Indefinite)  112 

„        (Interrogative)     100 

„         (Personal)  84,238,303 

„  „  (Position)88,289 

„        (Reflective)      88,238 

(Relative)      104, 254 


IX 


page 

Pronouns  (Use  of  pro- 
nouns by  a  monarch)        302 

Punctuation  (Signs  of)          11 
(to)  Put       266,270 

s 

Same  (The)      48,96 

„      (The  very)   ...  300 

©ein(tobe)  24,28,36,40,44,130 
Self  (myself,  etc.)  ...       88,112 

(to)  Send  146 

Several        126 

Shall 60 

She  who      ...         ...  108 

Should  ...  259, 304 

<3ie(you)    84 

Since     206 

Sir 300 

©0          214 

©often  (shall,  ought)  60,130,259 

Some     126,246,302 

Somebody,  some  one     112,126 

Something        112 

Still  202 

Subject  (Position) 

80,  133,  190,  194,  288 

„       (Agreement    of 
verb  and  subject)  307 

Subjunctive 

133,138,206,214,268,304 

Substantive  (see  Noun) 
Substitutes  of  the  article  60, 64 

Such  48.96 

Such  as  300 

Sundry        302 

Syllables  (Division)        11, 224 
Syntax         225 


page 

T 

(to)  Take          ...          266, 270 

Tenses  of  verbs      ...     1 30, 268 

That  (those)       48, 96, 108, 116 

„     (relative)       ...  104 

„     (conjunction)      ...       210 

„     which  ...  108 

„     (those,  they)  who        108 

Their,  theirs          ...         52,92 

Then     202 

The  one      242 

The  ...  the       210 

There  (e§) 284 

There  is,  there  are      . . .       166 

They  84,112 

Them 84,116 

(to)  Think 146,266 

This  (these)        48,96,116,171 
Though  (although)  206 

Thy,  thine        52,92 

To    ...         40,56,133,182,210 

Together  172 

Too 202 

Two(beibe)      302 


Um  ...  gu 

Unless  ... 


210,  304 
214 


302 


Various       

Verb  (Agreement  of  verb 

and  sub]  ect) 307 

Verbs  (List  of)         see  Part  14 

„      (Classification)  154 


page 

Verbs  (Transitive)  154,280,318 
„  (Passive)  154,284,313,314 
„  (Reflective)...  158 

„  (Intransitive)  162, 318 
„  (Impersonal)  166, 317 
„  (Conjugation)  ...  130 
„  (Auxiliary)...  130 

„      (Auxiliary  of  mood) 

56,  60,  64,  130,  258 

Verbs  (Compound)  142  j 

„      (Separable and  in- 
separable)   142, 146, 150, 308 

Verbs  (Regular)  52, 131, 223 
„  (Irregular)  68,138 

„      (Tenses  and  moods) 

130,  268 

„      governing  the  Nom- 
inative    ...  24,276,312 
Verbs  governing  the  Gen- 
itive            276,314 

Verbs  governing  the  Da- 
tive ...  276,280,316 

Verbs  governing  the  Ac- 
cusative ...  24,280,318  : 

Verbs  governing  the  Ac- 
cusative in  German  and 
a  preposition  in  English  319 

Verbs  governing  preposi- 
tions    280,320 

Verbs  (Position)    36, 40, 64, 80, 
104, 133, 190, 1P4, 198, 288 

Verbs  (Remarks)  288,  304 


Vocative     312 

Vowels  (Pronunciation)  6 

w 

SBer  (which  of)  ...  242 

SBerben  (to  become  ...  130 
What,  what  kind  (sort) 

of  ...  56,100,242,300 

Whatever,  whatsoever  303 
Whatever  (any  whatever)  246 

When 202 

Which  ...  56,100,104,300 
Who,  whose,  whom  100, 104 
Whoever,  whosoever  303 

Whole 126 

SBiebielte  (3>er)  ...  301 

Will  60 

With  186 

Without  ...  181,210 

SBotten  (to  be  willing,  to 

wish)  ...  60,130,259 

SSomtt,  toorcm,  etc.  100, 116 
Would  259 


Yes  (bod&) 
Yet  ... 
Your 
Yours 


..       288 

170,  202 

52 


PREFACE. 


THE  success  attending  the  publication  of  HOSSFELD'S  Methods 
for  acquiring  the  modern  languages  (first  issued  by  THE  SOCIETY 
FOR  PROMOTING  KNOWLEDGE  OF  FOREIGN  LANGUAGES,  LONDON), 
has  been  almost  phenomenal.  One  million  copies  of  the  series, 
comprising  the  German,  French,  Spanish  and  Italian  Methods, 
have  been  issued  to  meet  the  demand  during  the  eight  years  of 
their  publication. 

To  meet  the  requirements  of  a  school  method  as  well  as  of  a 
practical  method  for  those  who  desire  to  study  privately  (either 
with  or  without  an  instructor),  the  publishers  have  issued  the 
New  Practical  Method  for  Learning  the  German 
Language. 

The  book  is  divided  into  63  lessons,  each  of  which  generally 
consists  of  4  pages. 

The  first  page  is  devoted  to  Grammar  ; 

The  second  contains  Exercises  on  the  Rules  and  Verbs  given 

on  the  opposite  page  ; 

The   third  gives   Questions  on  the  same  Rules,  destined  for 
pupils  who  are  preparing  for  an  examination  where 
they  will  have  to  answer  similar  questions  ;  and  also 
Conversations  in  which  these  rules  are  illustrated  ; 
The  fourth  page  consists  always  of  a  graduated  Reading  Exer- 
cise,  which  must  not  only  be  read  aloud,  but  also 
translated  with  the  help  of  the  indications  given  either 
between  the  lines,  or  at  the  end  of  the  page. 
In  this  order  of  study,  the  German  language  is  taught  as  it 
is  actually  spoken  and  used,  and  not  as  many  of  the  German 
grammars  make  it  out  to  be.    The  reading  matter  is  well  selected, 
familiarizing  the  pupil  with  such  idioms  as  are  most  essential. 
The  lessons  are  carefully  graded,  beginning  with  short  and  distinct 


Xll. 

sentences.  Lists  of  idioms  are  dry  and  soon  forgotten  by  the 
pupil ;  but  when  framed  in  useful  conversation  or  pleasant 
anecdotes  they  make  a  stronger  impression  on  the  mind,  and 
remain  fixed  in  the  memory. 

The  Reading  Exercises  are,  at  first,  accompanied  by  inter- 
linear translations,  giving  a  clear  idea  of  German  thought  and 
expression,  in  direct  contrast  with  the  English.  The  interlinear 
translations  are  gradually  superseded  by  references  to  footnotes, 
giving  only  the  translation  of  the  new  and  hitherto  unused  words, 
or  their  derivatives.  This  method,  while  interesting,  is  stimulat- 
ing to  the  student  to  exercise  the  knowledge  already  gained. 
The  entire  work,  including  ten  pages  of  contents  and  a  convenient 
index,  and  an  appendix,  contains  over  375  pages.  The  appendix 
comprises  the  principal  rules  already  given  in  the  Exercises, 
supplemented  by  others,  which,  while  of  no  vital  importance, 
are  useful  and  very  convenient  for  those  who  desire  to  study  the 
language  thoroughly.  It  contains  also  sixteen  pages  of  forms  for 
commercial  correspondence,  together  with  the  conjugations  of  the 
German  verbs,  and  a  list  of  irregular  verbs. 

We  specially  recommend  to  Instructors  the  use  of  the  Keys, 
printed  on  single  leaves  of  strong  paper — one  lesson  on  each  leaf. 
One  of  these  leaves  is  to  be  given  to  each  pupil  after  the  exercises 
have  been  worked  out,  so  that  he  may  himself  see  and  correct 
the  mistakes  (if  any)  he  has  made.  This  having  been  done,  the 
corrected  exercises  and  the  key  should  be  returned  to  the 
instructor  for  revision. 

The  correction  by  the  pupil  himself  has  been  proved  to  be 
one  of  the  most  successful  features  of  this  method  ;  it  compels 
him  to  go  a  second  time  over  his  work,  and  by  this  means  the 
mistakes  he  has  made  are  vividly  brought  before  him.  As  a 
result,  the  same  mistakes  are  less  likely  to  recur,  and  the  teacher 
will  be  spared  a  long,  tedious,  and  relatively  fruitless  work. 


Explanation  of  the  Abbreviations  used  in  this 
book. 


A.,  Ace.,  Accus., — Accusative. 

Adj .  — Adj  ective. 

Adv. — Adverb. 

Conj . ,  — Conjunction. 

D.,  Dat— Dative. 

Decl. — Declension  or  declined. 

D.  1.— Declined  like. 

Ex.  — Ex-ample(s). 

F.,  Fern. — Feminine. 

G.,  Gen.,  Genit—  Genitive. 

Gen. — Gender. 

Imp.  — Impersonal. 

Intr. — Intransitive. 

Irr.  — Irregular. 

M.,  Masc. — Masculine. 


N.,  Neut.— Neuter. 

N.,  Nom. — Nominative. 

P.— Page. 

Perf.— Perfect. 

PL,  Plur.— Plural. 

Pres. — Present. 

Refl — Reflective. 

Reg. — Regular. 

S.— See. 

Sing.  — Singular. 

Subj .  — Subj  unctive. 

Trans. — Transitive  or  Translate. 

*  before  a  verb,  like  *gel)en,  *font' 

men,  etc.,  means  that  the  verb  is 

conjugated  with  |ein. 


German  Grammar 


The  following  Works  are  issued  for  use  in  conjunction  with 
this  Grammar,  and  will  be  found  of  great  assistance  in 
facilitating  the  study  of  the  German  Language  : — 

KEY  to  the  Exercises  in  Hossfeld's  German  Grammar  6d. 

HOSSFELD'S  GERMAN  READER,  on  an  entirely  new  plan  2s. 
This  book  contains  a  selection  of  letters  written  by  the 
most  eminent  personages  of  this  century :  Prince 
Bismarck,  Count  Moltke,  the  late  German  Em- 
perors, Baron  Stein,  and  others.  A  new  feature 
in  this  work  is  the  letters  written  by  eminent  women 
whose  names  are  household  words  in  Germany. 

HOSSFELD'S  ENG. -GERMAN  COMMERCIAL 
CORRESPONDENT;  or,  the  art  of  composing  any 
mercantile  letter  in  either  German  or  English  (vide 
page  327  of  this  Grammar) 2s. 

HOSSFELD'S  GERMAN  DICTIONARY,  766  pages      ...     2s. 

GERMAN    EXERCISES    AND    IDIOMS,  by  Prof.  Carl 
Mengel,  containing  the  Idioms  and  Exercises  thereon      2s.  6d. 
This  Work  will  be  found  indispensable  to  students 
wishing  to  gain  more  than  a  superficial  knowledge  of 
the  German  Language. 


FIRST     DIVISION. 


ELEMENTARY. 


THE  GERMAN  ALPHABET 


follows  : 

21  a— A  a  ah  9*  «— N  n  enn 

$  b— B  b  beh  O   o— 0  o  oh 

(£  c — C  c  tseh  $  ^ — P  p  peh 

2)  b — D  d  deh  C  q — Q  q  kooh 

6  c— E  e  eh  91   r — R  r  airr 

5  f— F  f  eff  8  f  §— S  s  ess 
©  g— G  g  gheh'  $    t— T  t  teh 
£  Jj — H  h  hah  U    u — U  u  ooh 
3  t— I    i  ee  $   to— Y  v  fow 
3  i— J  J  y°tt  28  to— W  w  veh 

6  I— K  k  kah  3:    j— X  x  iks 

fi     I— L  1      ell  g)   9— Y  y      ipsillon 

9)1  m — M  m    emni         3    % — Z  z      tsett 

KOTE.— The  student  will  observe  that  the  outlines  of  several 
of  these  letters  are  very  similar;    we  recommend  him  to 
take  particular  notice  of  the  distinguishing  differences  be- 
tween— 
S3  $,-(£  <£,-9Z  $R,-£)  O,-b  $,-f  f,-»  tj,-r  j. 

The  FotoeZs  are: 

a,  c,  i,  o,  11,  9, 

All  the  .remaining  letters  of  the  Alphabet  are  Consonants. 
Tht: Modified  Vowels  are: 

$  fl,  6  5,  ft  u.    Old  form  %t,  De,  Ue. 
The  Double  Vowels  are: 

aa,  ee,  oo. 
The  Diphthongs  are : 

,  -5K  ai  (a^),  @i  ei  (ety),  ?lu  ail,  ®ii  eii,  $n  au. 
The  Compound  Consonants  are : 

c&,  c^l/  rig,  cf,  pf,  p^,  qu,   fdj,  jp,  ft,   §,  ti^.  bt,  JL 
The  Double  Consonants  are: 

ff,  E,  mm,  rr,  &c. 


GERMAN  ALPHABET  FOR  WRITING. 
Seutfdje  S<f)mBf<f|rift. 


^x 

21  a,  A  a        33  b,  Bb      ®c,  Cc        $b,  Dd        ®e,  Ee 


,  Gg          fi^  Hh 


i,  Jj 


,  Kk        81,  Ll  3Rm,  Mm 


£)o,0o    ^5p,Pp    Qq,  Qq. 


St,  Tt        Uu,  Uu        SD,  Vv 


,  Yy 


,  ch      d,  ck        ff,  flf 


ff/  ss         ft;  st         ^  sz        §r  tz         a,  a       5,  o        ft,  tf 


6 

PRONUNCIATION. 


Simple  Vowels. 

o  sounds  like  a  in  far  —  Saben,  £ragen,  rar;  —  but  it  has  a 
shorter  sound  in—  balb,  SSIatt,  fallen. 

C  has  an  open  and  a  close  sound; 
if  open  it   sounds   like   a  in  rare—  ber,  toer;  but  shorter  in 

SBett,  gelb; 

i/  ctose  like  ey  in  abbey—  bett,  tten;  but  starter  in  benn,  toenn; 
it  sounds  like  e  in  father  or  e  in    begin,  when  occurring  in 
a  final  syllable  or  in  an  unaccented  prefix  ;    as  in  —  jftafe, 
Saben,  g-abel,  labenb,  Sitter,  bebanfen,  ©efeE,  entfom; 
it  is  mute  after  i  (vide  i). 

t  (tj)  if  long  sounds  like  ee  in  been  —  mir,  SBter,  fiieb; 
if  short  like  i  in  mill—  23ttb,  Sftttte,    SBinb,  SDtyrte. 

0  if  long  sounds  like  o  in  tone  —  £of,  lobett,  Xott  ; 
if  short  like  o  in  rocfc—  (Mb,  fommen,  ©onne. 

u  if  long  sounds  like  oo  in  moon  —  SBrjiber,  gut,  rufen; 
y  slwrt  like  u  in  full—  SBruft,  Gutter, 


Simple  Vowels  Modified. 

&  t/  £0710  sounds  like  ea  in  &ear  —  SBar,  93a'ber,  Saben; 
if  short  like  a  in  7iam  —  ^amme,  SDMnner,  fallt. 

5  ^  Zon^f  sounds  similar  to  the  e  in  her  —  lofen,  $6mgin, 
if  short  similar  to  the  u  in  but—  ©otter,  &6IIe,  fonnen. 

ii  having  no  equivalent  in  the  English  language  must  be  heard 
from  the  master.  The  easiest  way  to  get  at  the  sound  is  to  pro- 
nounce the  ee  in  been  with  rounded  lips  : 

it  is  long  in—  SSiigel,  £iite,  SSriiber,  iiber, 

it  is  short  in—  fiiHen,  ©iinbe,  $litte,  miiffen, 

Double  Vowels. 

an  &  oo  sound  like  the  simple  a  or  o,  but  always  long;  as  in 

—  ^aar,  ©aal,  93oot,  ©oole. 
ec  follows   the  same   rule,  but  has  only  the   sound  of  ey  in 

abbey;  as  in—  9Keer,  ©ee,  Seele. 

Compound  Vowels  or  Diphthongs. 

at  (015),  ct  (el))  sound  like  i  in  wine,  but  ei  is  a  little  closer 
than  oi;  as  in  —  SOZain,  9ftai,  €>aite,  ©ette,  bein,  Site. 

Oil  sounds  similar  to  ou  in  house;  as  in  —  blew,  £>cw3. 

an  &  en  sound  similar  to  oy  in  boy;  as  in—  SBrdute,  §aiite,  neu, 
©aule,  freuen,  ^eute. 


7 

Pronunciation  Exercise. 

REMARKS    ON    PRONUNCIATION. 

The  Emphasis  (or  Stress)  is  on  the  first  syllable  except  the  word  be- 
gins with  one  of  the  prefixes 

be,  ge,  er,  fcer,  ger,  crop,  ent 

in  which  case  the  second  syllable  has  the  stress. 

All  vowels  have  a  long  sound  except  when  followed  by  two  ormore  con- 
sonants, when  they  become  short  ;  vowels  followed  by  I)  or  tlj  are  long. 

Vowels  before  $  or  6  are  sometimes  long,  sometimes  short. 

Words  with  the  simple  Vowels  a,  e,  i  (tj),  0,  ». 

9?ar,  gfafl,  n>en,  toenn,  roer,  tyeE,  (£nte,  begegnen,  SBter,  SOfttte, 
•ton,  @olb,  SBruber,  SSutter,  Sftgrte,  enben,  bir,  tnatt,  Sautter, 
©lag,  enttant,  S3itb,  93afl,  (£rnte,  tief,  Sftonne,  SBagen,  nun, 
tragen,  SReft,-  SReft,  ^>of,  balb,  lefen,  labenb,  Sitter,  ^amm,  SfJegel, 
[Ratte,  23ogen,  ©igrup,  rufen,  @efeH,  mtr,  £err,  9tegen,  Sloje, 
fomtnen,  gut,  ^type,  fagen,  93ritte,  SSIott,  beben,  Steb,  loben, 
^)orn,  ©ra§,  ^Berg,  £>oje,  ©unft,  @ott,  gett,  gabel,  £unb,  ©egel, 
jKab,  ^tnb,  S3ruft,  ©onne,  S3ett,  Saben,  SBrob,  ^rogen,  tabeln. 

Words  with  the  modified  Vowels  ft,  fl,  il. 


S3or,  ®amme,  lofen,  |>5Ue,  SSiigel,  fiitten, 
Saber,  fouuen,  fiir,  ©iinbe,  Berber,  pten,  briitten,  ©otter,  fa'flt, 
triibe,  ^a'ube,  fRitge,  £utte,  Dfen,  Scanner,  ^ouigin,  §iite,  Sftobel, 
banbigett,  ©emiife,  Ubel,  ©arten,  Soffel,  $ul[e,  Saben,  iiber. 

Words  with  the  double  Vowels  aa,  ee,  PO« 


$aar,  Sfteer,  S3oot,  £eer,  9^oor,  Slat,  Soo§,  ^Raa,  ®!ee,  Sootfe, 
Saal,  ©eele,  SBaare,  ©oole,  2JJoo^,  SSeere,  2la^,  S3eet,  baar, 
See,  §aar. 

Words  with  the  compound  Vowels  or  Diphthongs 
at  (at)*),  et  (ct)*),  a«,  ait,  ett, 

(Saite,  ©ette,  blau,  SSraute,  l^eute,  SSein^  Sate,  au§,  f$retge, 
betauben,  freuen,  Saib,  taub,  9M3,  ^aifer,  SSaum,  bein,  ^aute, 
Eaiifen,  ©tie,  SSatern  (SSatjern),  ueu,  gtiufte,  bet,  leugnen,  9JJatn, 
©eift,  (Me,  Srauer,  9^ai,  getle,  Jain,  Saub,  SSeil,  greube, 
SSauer,  lletn,  faum,  fetn,  ©ciule,  laufen,  SWaig,  ^etm,  Seuie,  rein, 
|>at,  9taum,  tnetn,  braun,  S^atn,  |>eu,  SD'laibaum,  ^au3,  ireue, 
^aume,  5luge,  S3e^,  Member,  SWet)er,  Saute. 

(*)  ot)  and  et)  oecur  only  in  a  few  proper  names. 


8 

Simple  Consonants. 

Consonants  are  in  general  pronounced  as  in  English,  except  : 
<  before  a,  e,  t,  9,  sounds  like  is—  (Bfar,  dentner,  Stcero,  ©qttnber 
g  sounds  always  like  g  in  garden  —  ©arten,  ©eorg,  Iteaen,  $5- 

Tttgin  ;  but  g  after  t  sounds  slightly  like  d)  (vide  dj),  if  the 

9  is  not  followed  by  a  vowel—  ferttg,  gerttgfeit,  Stontg. 
tj  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  or  syllable  is  aspirated  like  h  in 

home  —  Ijaben,  erljeben,  lebljaft,  gretljett  ; 

it  is  mute  after  a  vowel,  —  $8af)n,  leljren,  rolj. 
\  sounds  like  y  in  yes—  ja,  Scrfob,  jung. 
f  is  never  silent  before  n  —  $nabe,  $me. 
f  sounds  like  the  s  in  see,  son  —  @ie,  <5oljn,  93afe. 
$  (s  final)  like  the  ss  in  glass  —  £au^/  liSpetn. 
t  followed  by  i  and  another  vowel  (in  words  derived  from  the 

Latin)  is  pronounced  as  ts  —  Nation,  patient;  but  it  retains  its 

proper  sound  in  words  ending  in  tie  —  2lri[to!ratic/  Siplotnatte. 
D  sounds  like  /—  SSater,  ^utoer,  oergeffen. 
to  sounds  like  v  in  velvet—  SBetn,  tuer,  ertoarten. 
3  sounds  like  ts—  £erj,  Qtit,  511, 


Compound  Consonants. 

rf)  has  the  sound  of  the  Scotch  ch  in  loch  —  Sorf),   55ud), 
it  sounds  like  k  at  the  beginning  of  words  —  Sfytor, 

ifjg  sounds  like  x—  gud)§,  2a^^,  2Bod)§. 

ag  sounds  always  like  ng  in  singer  —  finger,  fi^9^^/  long, 

pf  sounds  like  j?  and  /  pronounced  in  one  sound  —  $opf, 

p^  is  pronounced  like  /—  ^Ijo&pfjor,  ^^otogra^^. 

qu  is  pronounced  like  Tcv  in  English  —  Qua(,  quer,  bequem. 

f^  sounds  like  sh  in  ship  —  ©cfitff,  ^ifd),  l^errfdjen. 

f^  and  ft  at  the  beginning  of   a  word  or  its  root  sound  like  a 
slight  shp  and  sht  —  (Spiel,  fpredjen,  SSorfptel,  oerfpredjen, 
fteljen,  ftawten,  entfte^en,  erftaitnltd); 
but  otherwise  fp  and  ft  sound  as  in   English  —  tft,  berften. 

$  (called  ess-tsett)  has  the  sound  of  ss  and  is  used  instead  of 
ff  at  the  end  of  a  word  or  syllable,  before  t,  and  after 
compound  vowels  —  ^Iiift,  mi^Hd),  beftwfjt,  fietfjen. 

ttj  and  bt  sound  always  like  t  —  Xfjcm,  rotfj,  ratfyen,  ©tabt,  tobten. 

tj  stands  instead  of  z  after  a  simple  vowel  — 
Pafc,  ftafce,  fdjafcen,  fifeen. 

Double  Consonants. 

If,  tt,  mm,  rr,  &c.,  are  pronounced  like  the  simple  /,  I,  m,  r, 
<fcc.,  but  cause  the  preceding  vowel  to  have  a  short  sound 
—  £amm,  ©djiff,  !onuen,  ftatt,  ooU. 


9 

Pronunciation  Exercise. 


Words  with  the  Simple  Consonants. 

Sofar,  (Sicero,  ®arten,  liegen,  ®onigtn,  ®omg,  Kjaben,  lebljaft, 
gretyeit,  SBaljtt,  erpfjen,  ja,  %a.m,  tetbe,  ®nie,  ©te,  SBafe, 
,  Nation,  Slriftofratte,  SBater,  ©etoatter,  SBein,  erfoarten, 
,  Beit,  gefunb,  forgen,  <$la3,  Setter,  |>abe,  ®efimbf)eit,  toer, 
jfoet,  faumig,  (Sitrone,  ^noten,  Sube,  Sob,  ^a^n,  SBanb,  ©eorg, 
Centner,  toentg,  fc^eu,  @an§,  |>erBft,  &olj,  portion,  Snatt,  3^^n, 
©t)Unber,  gertig!eit,  Dergeffen,  balb,  Better,  9f?u^tn,  jeber,  geben, 
5lb§ug,  SBurnt,  9lofe,  (Station,  jung,  ^nabe,  diplomatic,  ^elb, 
§u,  ^utoer,  geliebt,  ge^en,  ®eber,  S^ge,  Sa^r,  me^ren,  fneten, 
©o^n,  roi),  er^eben,  ^alb,  erga^Ien,  woflen,  ©uppe,  tjerloren, 

,   SD'Je^t,   SSenetianer,    grob,   nrilb,   ©epr,   3^e 
igt,    ^>onig,   Subel,    SBttte,    patient,    fertig,    2ljt, 
»erfertigen. 

Words  with  the  Compound  and  Double 
Consonants. 


Sort),  toadjen,  {£§hta,  2Ba^,  ginger,  fltcfen,  ©acf,  ^opf,  ?pferb, 
?J$f)o3pf)or,  dual,  @c^i[f,  ©piel,  SSorfpiel,  ftaunen,  erftaunlid^,  ift, 
Itlpeln,  gtufe,  bettm&t,  X^ait,  ©tabt,  ^Ia^,  ft|en,  Samm,  ftatt, 
,  fetc^t,  ^Sftege,  STfc^e,  X^or,  fing,  ©pafe,  ©pafe,  ra&t, 
fRiB,  ft|t,  briicfen,  SSttc^,  fteden,  SSerftecf, 
fjerrjdjen,  rotf),  (Sta^d^en,  nic^t,  rauc^ern,  berften,  fte^en,  entfte^en, 
^ei^en,  fc^d^en,  §ec^t,  gac^er,  nac^fc^Iagen,  ^Pfarrer,  pfeifen, 
ifjeil,  SSerrat^,  tntfc^en,  gu^,  gu^boben,  Stetj,  ©prac^e,  2Iu§jprad^e, 
letc^t,  S^Ior,  ftngen,  Dn!e(,  ^flange,  ^^otograp^,  bequem,  $feil, 
pfennig,  |>ang,  SSKufee,  juc^en,  9H£$,  Xifc^,  boH,  tniBIic^,  S)rad^e, 
f,  5Tnget,  ^o§,  ©a|,  fafc,  ©torf,  ©pagterftocf,  padfen, 
,  leiidjten,  tang,  gu(^§,  tobten,  td^,  Xeid),  becfen,  quer, 
ratten,  lonnen,  begotten,  ^ned^t,  SSejud^,  tron!,  Shrift,  boc!j, 


!Rod,  Sodjer,  Sidjt,  pfliirfen,  S)mg,  lleberflufe,  fcpfcen, 
mufc,  SRifce,  toic^ttg,  SljaoS,  pfanben,  i^affen,  ©pro^,  ©taff, 
©enufj,  crtuad^en,  ©ebtd^t,  ^!u§,  ^Pfetfe,  fd^ted^t,  ped^fd^njarg, 
^flafter,  ©tid^,  S^uB,  Said),  Xa£e,  SKaffe,  rtec^en,  fpannen>  gladfjS/ 
bai  pngen,  X^ee,  ^forte,  Stenft,  ftopfen,  reic^en,  ^5a^,  linger, 
$ferc^,  ©ac^e. 

German  Granmar  1* 


10 

REMARKS  ON  PRONUNCIATION. 


b  and  b  at  the  end  of  a  word  or  syllable  (when  not  followed 
by  a  vowel)  sound  more  like  p  and  t  as  in  —  Ijalb, 
Sanbfdjirfj,  93ab,  lebljaft. 

Consonants  and  vowels  in  words  of  French  derivation  keep  their 
original  pronunciation ;  as  in — (Sauce,  $age,  journal,  Ser* 
fciette,  Gljocolftbe,  &c. ;  but  it  is  well  to  dispense  with  the 
nee  of  such  words  where  possible. 

ie,  tet,  ten  in  some  names   of   persons,   plants,    countries   and 

their  derivatives,  are    pronounced    as    separate     syllables, 

thus— t*e,  i*el,  t*en;  as  in— ^ulie,  £amel,  9lfagte,  ©panien, 

&c.,  also  in  gomilie(*),  $ktie,  Slrie,  SBeftte,  §urie,  SReltquie,  etc. 

The  following  words  must  always  be  pronounced  short : 

ab,   am,  an,  bi§,   be§,  im,  in,  man,  *ob,  wn,  fcom,  bon,  toaS, 

toeg,  gu,  gum,  and  a  few  others. 


Emphasis  (or  Stress)  in  Pronunciation. 

The  Emphasis  (or  Stress)  in  words  of  more  than  one  syl- 
lable is  always  on  the  first—  geber,  gfeuer,  $inte,  englifd), 
frfjreiben,  frewen. 

Except  when  the  first  syllable  is  one  of  the  following  un- 
accented prefixes  —  be,  ge,  er,  Der,  get,  emp,  ent;  in  which  case 
the  second  syllable  has  the  stress  ;  as  in  —  93efud),  ©efatyr,  erleben, 
berberben,  gerBred^en,  Smpfang,  entloufen. 

In  compound  words  there  is  more  stress  on  the  first  word 
than  on  the  second  ;  as—  £utmadjer,  £au§tpre,  ©onnenftraljten, 


On  the  second  syllable  are  accented  all  words  formed  with 
bo,  Ijer,  Ijin,  too,  and  a  preposition;  as—  bamtt,  Ijerfcet,  ^inauf, 
ttJOjti,  also  all  adverbs  beginning  with  511,  as—  guritrf,  sugleidj, 
jnnnber,  &c. 

Words  ending  in  ei  have  the  stress  more  on  this  syllable; 
as—  Slrgewci,  SRettetei. 

Words  of  foreign  ongrin(t)  have  generally  the  stress  on  the 
Jast  syllable;  as-SKonar^,  ^otnr,  ©otbat,  ^^ilofo^^,  &c. 

Verbs  in  tren  and  teren  have  the  stress  on  the  i  and  ie; 


(*)  The  nouns  in  which  the  «  after  t  is  sounded,  have  the  stress  on  the  vowel  pie- 
ceding  ie. 

(f)  We  shall  always  indicate  where  the  stress  is  required  in  words  of  foreign  deri- 
vation by  printing  the  vowels  in  thick  letters  or  in  italic*. 


11 

Division  of  Syllables. 

Syllables  are  formed  in  German  pretty  much  on  the  same  rules 
as  in  English ;  they  commence,  if  possible,  always  with  a  consonant, 
and  if  there  are  two  consonants  they  are  divided. 

Capital  Letters. 

In  German  as  in  English  capital  letters  are  used  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  sentence.  Further,  all  words  used  as  nouns  begin  with  a 
capital  letter,  and  also  the  pronouns — @te  (you),  and  gfr  (your); 
but  tc!)  (I)  only  takes  a  capital  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence. 

Signs  of  Punctuation. 

These  signs  are  the  same  as  in  English,  except  the  hyphen, 
which  is  marked  in  German  thus  (•). 

Parts  of  Speech. 

There  are  ten  parts  of  Speech  in  the  German  language 
viz:  the  Article,  bag  (^efdjledjtgttort;  the  Noun,  bag  ^attpttoort; 
the  Adjective,  bag  @Hgenfc|aftgtoort;  the  Pronoun,  bag  ^itrtoort; 
the  Numeral,  bag  3al:)ltt)ort ;  the  Verb,  bag  geittoort;  the  Adverb, 
bag  Umftanbgfoort;  the  Preposition,  bag  SSortoort;  the  Conjunc- 
tion, bag  SBinbetuort,  and  the  Interjection,  ber  (£mpftnbimgglaut. 

DEFINITION  OF  THE  PARTS  OF  SPEECH. 

The  ARTICLE  (bag  ®e[rf)tedjtgh)ort)   is   a  word  put   before 
nouns  to  limit  or  define  their  application;  as, 
the  man,  ber  SKcmn;  the  woman,  Me  gratt;  the  house,  ba3 
a  man,  ettt  SDlann;  a  woman,  cine  fjrau;  a  house,  eitt 

A  NOUN  (ein  §aitpt»ott)  is  the  name  of  anything  which 
exists,  or  which  we  can  conceive  to  exist,  whether  material  or 
immaterial;  as,  man,  Sftamt;  house,  £>aug;  virtue,  Xugenb. 

The  ADJECTIVE  (bag  ©igenfrfjaftgtoort)  is  a  word  added  to 
a  noun,  either  to  mark  its  quality  or  to  distinguish  it  more 
accurately;  as, 

the  good  child,  bag  gute  ®tnb; 
the  man  is  tall,  ber  Sftann  tft  grof?. 

A  PRONOUN  (em  f$ftrtoort)  is  a  word  used  instead  of  a 
noun;  as,  he  (John)  is  rich,  cr  (Soljaim)  tft  reid). 

The  NUMERAL  (bag  gdjftuort)  is  a  word  used  to  indicate 
quantity;  it  is  generally  used  with  the  noun  like  an  adjec- 
tive; as,  the  three  pears,  bie  brei  SSimen;  How  many  ap- 
ples have  you?  S&ie  triele  2fyfef  ^aben  <5ie?  I  have  two,  tdj 
|abe  stoet. 

The  VERB  (bag  ^drtoort)  is  a  word  by  which  we  affirm — 
1.  What  anything  does;  2.  What  is  done  to  it;  3.  In  what 
etate  it  exists;  as, 

the  boy  plays,  ber  ®nabe  fotelt; 

the  boy  was  beaten,  ber  tnoBe  ttwrbe 

the  boy  sleeps,  ber  ®nabe  fd)laft. 


12 

An  ADVERB  (ein  UntftanbStport)  is  a  word  which   modifies 
a  verb,  an  adverb,  or  an  adjective ;  as, 
he  writes  well,  er  fdfjretbt  gut; 
he  will  be  here  soon,  er  tmrb  fialb  Ijter  fein; 
my  sister  is  much  prettier,  metne  ©djroefter  ift  triel  fdjoner. 

The  PREPOSITION  (ba§  SSortoort)  serves  to  show  the  relation 
of  a  noun  or  pronoun  to  some  other  word  in  the  sentence ;  as 
the  book  is  on  the  table,  ba3  SSudj  ift  ttuf  bent  £ijd)e; 
he  sat  behind  me,  er  foJ3  Winter  nttr. 

A  CONJUNCTION  (ein  Stnbenjort)  is  a  word  which   serves 
to  connect  the  different  parts  of  an  enlarged  sentence ;  as, 
John  and  Jacob  went  out  yesterday,  Solemn  itttb  %atob  gin* 

gen  geftern  cm3; 

I  cannot  come,  because  I  am  ill,  idj  !ann  ntrf)t  fommen,  ttctt 
icl)  franf  bin. 

The  INTERJECTION  (ber  SmpfinbungSlaut)  is  a  word  which 
expresses  any  sudden  desire  or  violent  emotion;  as, 

Hush !  you  will  wake  the  child,  ©titt !  ©ie  toerben  bo3  ®inb 

aiiftoecfen; 
.alas!  all  is  lost,  adj!  5Ifle3  ift  ber  (or  en. 

Gender. 

In  German,  as  in  English,  there  are  three  genders,  the 
'•masculine,  the  feminine  and  the  neuter. 

Words  referring  to  males  are  generally  masculine  and  those  re- 
ferring to  females  are  generally  feminine,  but  words  representing 
inanimate  objects,  which  in  English  are  neuter,  may  be  in  German, 
either  masculine,  feminine  or  neuter,  but  no  fixed  rules  can  be 
given  to  determine  the  gender. 

"We  earnestly  advise  students  never  to  use  a  noun  without  as- 
certaining the  gender,  and  to  fix  it  in  the  mind  by  placing  the 
proper  article  before  it.  Those  who  act  upon  this  advice  will  save 
themselves  much  trouble  which  the  learning  of  genders  would 
otherwise  cause. 

Number. 

There  are  two  numbers  in  German — the  singular  which  is  used 
:for  one  person  or  thing — the  plural  which  is  used  for  more  than  one. 

Case. 

The  German  Declensions  have  four  cases:  the  Nominative, 
Genitive,  Dative,  and  Accusative ;  three  of  them,  viz.,  the  Nom- 
inative, Genitive  (called  also  Possessive),  and  Accusative  (called 
also  Objective),  are  employed  as  in  English :  that  is  to  say,  the 
Nominative  points  to  the  subject  of  the  verb,  the  Accusative  to  its 
object,  and  the  Genitive  indicates  possession.  The  Dative  is  gener- 
ally equivalent  to  the  English  objective  with  the  preposition  to 
preceding. 


13 

Declension  of  Nouns  or  Substantives. 

In  the  German  language  substantives  are  declined,  and  this  declen- 
sion is  generally  based  upon  the  gender  and  the  termination  of  the  word 
to  be  declined. 

We  divide  the  German  Nouns  or  Substantives  into  four  Classes  or 
Declensions, (*)  as  is  shown  in  the  following  classification  into  Declen- 
sions, exceptions  included. — The  pages  13  to  17  are  intended  for  refer- 
ence only,  as  all  the  principal  rules  are  given  again  in  the  lessons,  to- 
gether with  numerous  exercises  on  them.  The  exceptions,  however,  are. 
not  repeated  in  the  Grammar  to  the  lessons,  as  we  hold  that  if  this  be 
done  the  principal  rules  can  neither  be  sufficiently  treated,  nor  the  ex- 
ceptions mastered,  and  it  is  our  practice  to  bring  the  usual  exceptions- 
hereafter  in  the  vocabulary,  this  being  the  best  plan  to  acquire  them, 
thoroughly  and  with  the  least  trouble. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 

1.  The  inflection  of  the  cases  of  a  noun  is  based  on  the  nominative1 
of  the  singular ;  thus,  if  the  noun  take  a  termination  in  the  singular 
or  plural  this  termination  is  added  to  the  nominative  of  the  singular. 

2.  In  the  dative  of  the  plural  all  declinable  German  words  which, 
do  not  end  in  »  in  the  plural,  add  n. 


FIRST  DECLENSION. 

THE  FIRST  DECLENSION  comprises  all  feminint  nouns;  they  do*1 
not  change  in  the  singular,  in  the  plural  they  add  en ;  those  ending  in 
e,  el,  er  add  n  only,  and  those  in  in  double  the  n  before  adding  en. 

Exception  1.  Feminine  nouns  in  ntfK**)  and  f  at,  of  which  there  are 
only  a  few,  and  seldom  used  in  the  plural,  add  e  only  in  the  plural,  and- 
ehange  the  fj  into  ff;  as, 

tie  8enntnifj,  the  knowledge    Plural :  Me  fienntntffe 
bic  ZruBfal,  the  affliction  „       bie  Xrii&fale 

Exception  2.— 3)ie  Sautter,  the  mother,  and  bie  Softer,  the  daughter, 
are  in  the  plural  bie  SJliittet,  bie  Sodjter. 

Exception  3.  The  following  feminine  nouns  (mostly  of  one  syllable); 
and  their  derivatives(t)  add  e  in  the  plural,  and  modify  the  vowel: 


die  Ausflucht,  the  evasion 
die  Axt,  the  axe 
die  Bank,  the  bench 
die  Braut,  the  bride 
die  Brust,  the  breast 
die  Faust,  the  fist 
die  Feuersbrunst,  the  con- 
flagration 

dieFrucht,  the  fruit 
die  Gans,  the  goose 
die  Gruft,  the  vault 


die  Hand,  thehand 

die  Haut,  the  skin 

die  Kluft,  the  cleft 

die  Kraft,  the  strength 

die  Kuh,  the  cow 

die  Kunst,  the  art\ 

die  Laus,  the  louse 

die  Luf  t,  the  air 

die  Lust,  the  desire 

die  Magd,  the  maid-servant 

die  Macht,  the  power 


die  Maus,  the  mouse 
die  Nacht,  the  night 
die  Nuss,  the  nut 
die  Sau,  the  sow 
die  Schnur,  the  string" 
die  Stadt,  the  town,  city 
die  Wand,  the  wall 
die  Wurst,  the  sausage 
die  Zunft,  the  guild 
die   Zusammenkuuft,    tf-.- 
meeting 


Plural:  bie  SluSfludjte,  bie  Slejte,  bie  93raute,  etc. 
The  Plurals  of  bie  Slngft,  the  anxiety  (anguish) &  bie  SRptlj,  the  need,, 
occur  in  the  dative  in  some  expressions  like :  in  SJngften,  in  Sfiotfien. 

(*)  This  division  into  classes  or  declensions  is  quite  arbitrary,  as  some  grammari- 
ans take  2,  some  3,  4,  5,  or  even  7  declensions.  Therefore  a  student  must 
not  only  know  to  which  declension  a  word  belongs,  but  carefully  learn  how 
words  of  such  gender,  and  such  termination  form  their  cases. 

(**)  According  to  a  new  orthography  the  nouns  in  ni§  are  spelled  now 
sometimes  ni§,  plural  as  above  niffe. 

(t)  Derivatives  are  declined  like  the  nouns  from  which  they  are  derived;  this  & » 
of  course  the  case  in  all  the  following  rules  add  exceptions. 


14 

SECOND   DECLENSION. 

THE  SECOND  DECLENSION  comprises  all  masculine  and  neuter 
nouns  ending  in  el,  en,  er,  and  the  neuters  in  e  and  lein;  they  add  * 
in  the  genitive  singular,  and  do  not  change  in  the  plural  except  in  the 
dative,  when  those  ending  in  «,  «Z,  er,  add  n. 

EXCEPTION  1.  The  following  nouns  (all  masculine  except  ba§  ftlofter,) 
modify  their  vowels  in  the  plural : 


der  Acker,  the  field 
der  Apfel,  the  apple 
der  Boden,  the  ground 
der  Bruder,  the  brother 
der  Faden,  the  thread 
der  Garten,  the  garden 
der  Graben,  the  ditch 
der  ~Haf en,  tb»  port, harbour 


der  Hammel,  the  wether 
der  Hammer,  the  hammer 
der  Handel,  the  bargain 
der  Laden,  the  shop 
das  Kloster,  the  cloister 
der  Kragen,  the  coUar 
der  Magen,  the  stomach 
der  Mangel,  the  want 


der  Mantel,  the  cloak 
der  Nagel,  (he  nail 
der  Ofen,  the  stove 
der  Sattel,  the  saddle 
der  Schnabel,  the  beak 
der  Sch  wager,  thebrother-in 
der  Vater,  the  father   [-law 
der  Vogel,  th*  bird 


Plural :  bit  Sriibet,  bie  ©arten,  bie  Ccfen,  etc. 

EXCEPTION  2.    The  following  masculine  nouns  (and  two  neuter 
nouns  in  e)  add  n  in  the  plural : 


das  Ange,  the  eye 
der  Baier,  the  Bavarian 
der  Bauer,  the  peasant 
das  Ende,  the  end 


der  Gevatter,  the  godfather  I  der  Pantoffel,  the  slipper 
der  Hammer,  the  lobster        der  Pommer,    the   Pomer- 
der  Kaffer,  the  Kaffir  \     anian 

der  Muskel,  the  muscle        \  der  Stachel,  the  sting 
\  der  Tetter,  the  cousin 

Plural:  bie  ffogen,  bie  SJoieti 


THIRD  DECLENSION. 


THE  THIRD  DECLENSION  comprises  1.  all  masculine  nouns  ending 
in  e  which  add  n  in  all  cases  of  the  singular  and  plural  ;  2.  all  mascu- 
line nouns  of  foreign  origin  (accented  on  the  last  syllable),  referring  to 
persons,  which  do  not  end  in  Z,  nt  r;  they  add  en  in  all  cases  of  the  sin- 
gular or  plural. 

lake  the  nouns  under  Number  2  are  declined  :— 

a.  All  other  masculine  nouns  of  foreign  origin  ending  in  ant  and  graph 
(i.  e.  those  referring  to  animals  and  things)  and  all  masculine  nouns 
in  ar,  which  are  names  of  nations  ;  as, 

bet  eiepfiant,  the  elephant,  ber  Xelegraplj,  the  telegraph,  bet  SBogtjat,  the 
Magyar,  etc: 

Plural:  bie  eiepfianten,  bie  Selegrafcijen,  bie 


&.  The  following  masculine  nouns  of  foreign  origin  which  do  not  belong 
to  those  under  2  and  a  : 


der  Komet,  the  comet  der  Tyronn,  the  tyrant 

der  Planet,  the  planet  der  Uhlan,  the  uhlan 

der  Rebell,  the  rebel  der  Vasall,  the  vassal 

der  Subaltern,  the  subaltern    der  Veteran,  the  veteran 
and  a  few  more  which  are  seldom  used. 

Plural:  bie  (Eorfaren,  bie  Rometen  etc: 


der  Corsar,  the  corsair 
der  Husar,  the  hussar 
der  Janitschar,  the  Janis- 
nary 


15 

c.  The  following  masculine  nouns  mostly  of  one  syllable : 

tier  Aim,  the  ancestor  !  der  Held,  the  hero 

der  Bar,  the  bear  der  Hirt(*),  the  herdsman 

der  Christ,  the  Christian        der  Mensch,  the  man 
der  Fink,  the  finch  der  Mohr,  the  negro 

der  Fiirst,  the  prince  der  Narr,  the  fool 

der  Geek,  the  fop  der  Ochs,(*)  the  ox 

der  Graf,  the  count  j  der  Pfau(**),  the  peacock 

and  a  few  more  which  are  seldom  used. 

Plural:  bie  ifljnen,  bie  SJoren,  etc. 

EXCEPTION  1.  The  following  masculine  nouns  in  e  (formerly  end- 
ing in  en)  add  in  the  Genitive  singular  ns  instead  of  n : 


der  Prinz,  the  prlnee 
der  Schultheiss,  the  mayt\ 
der  Spatz,  the  sparrow 
der  Steinmetz,    the    stone- 
cutter 

der  Thor,  the  fool 
der  Vorfahr,  the  ancestor 


der  Friede,  the  peace 
der  Funke,  the  spark 
der  Gedanke,  the  thought 


der  Glaube,  the  faith 
der  Haufe,  the  heap 
der  Name,  the  name 


der  Same,  the  seed 
der  Schade,  the  damage 
der  Wille,  the  will 


Genitive  sing.:  be§  gfriebenS,  be3  ftuntenS,  etc. 

EXCEPTION  2.  $er  «&fe,(t)  the  cheese,  follows  the  second  declen- 
sion. 


FOURTH  DECLENSION. 

THE  FOURTH  DECLENSION  comprises  all  masculine  and  neuter 
nouns  which  do  not  belong  to  the  second  and  third  declensions  (i.  e. 
most  nouns  not  ending  in  e,  el,  en,  er,  lein,  and  all  foreign  masculine 
and  neuter  nouns,  except  the  masculines  referring  to  persons,  which  do 
not  end  in  I,  n,r.)\  they  take  es  or  s  in  the  genitive  and  generally  e  in 
the  dative  of  the  singular ;  in  the  plural  they  add  e,  except  in  the  da- 
tive plural  where  they  add  en. 

In  the  plural  those  of  the  above  nouns  which  contain  one  of  the 
vowels  a,  o,  u,  au  modify  these  vowels  (i.  e.  change  them  into  a,  o,  u, 
au};^  but  in  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  these  vowels  are  only  modi- 
fied if  in  the  last  syllable.  Those  neuter  nouns  which  modify,  further 
add  er  instead  of  e. 

Foreign  nouns  accented  on  the  last  syllable  very  rarely  modify. 

EXCEPTION  1.  The  following  masculine  nouns  do  not  modify  in  the 
plural : 

der  Lachs,  the  salmon 
der  Laut,  the  sound 
der  Leichnam,    the  corpse 
der  Luchs,  the  lynx 
der  Molch,  the  salamander 
der  Monat,  the  month 
der  Mond,  the  moon 
der  Mord,  the  murder 
der  Park,  the  park 
der  Pfad,  the  path 
der  ~Pfropf,the  graft,stopper 
der  Pol,  the  pole 
der  Puls,  the  pulse 
der  Punkt,  the  point 
and  a  few  more  which  are  seldom  used. 

Plural:  bie  5Krme,  bie  S3efudje,  etc. 
bet  @aol,  the  saloon,  is  in  the  plural  bie  ©die. 

(*)  Hirte  and  Ochse  are  also  used. 

(**)  Der  Pfau,  plural  die  Pfc°w,  follows  as  well  the  4th  Declension, 
(t)  der  Kas  can  also  be  used. 


der  Arm,  the  arm 
der  Besuch,  the  visit 
der  Dachs,  the  badger 
der  Docht,  the  wick 
der  Dolch,  the  dagger 
der  Dom,  the  dome 
der  Erfolg,  the  success 
der  Gemahl,  the  spouse 
der  Grad,  the  degree 
der  Halm,  the  helm, 
der  Herold,  the  herald 
der  Huf,  the  hoof 
der  Hund,  the  dog 
der  Kuckuk,  the  cuckoo 


der  Ruf,  the  call 

der  Rumpf,  the  trunk,  body 

der  Salm,  the  salmon 

der  Schuft,  the  mean  fellow 

der  Schuh,  the  shoe 

der  Stoff,  the  stuff 

der  Strolch,  the  stroller 

der  Tag,  the  day 

der  Takt,toe  timefinmusicj 

der  Thron,  the  throne 

der  Verhau,  the  abattis 

der  Verlust,  the  loss 

der  Versuch,    the    experi- 

der  Zoll,  the  inch      [ment 


16 

EXCEPTION  2.   The  following  neuter  nouns  do  not  modify,  and 
therefore  add  only  e  in  the  plural : 
das  Brod,  the  bread  das  Jahr,  the  year 

das  Eiland,  the  island  das  Joch,  the  yoke 

das  Garn,  the  yarn  das  Loth,  the  plummet 

das  Gebot,  the  bidding  das  Mahl,  the  meal,  repast 

das  Geschoss,  the  shot  das  Mai,  the  time  fin  count- 

das  Gespann,  tht  team  das  Pfund,  the  pound  \ingj 

daa  Gesuch,  the  request          das  Pult,  the  desk 

Plural:  bit  ©ebote,  tie  galjre,  etc. 
Also  the  few  neuter  nouns  in  fat,  very  seldom  used  in  the  plural,  do 
not  modify;  as,  bo§  gdjidfal,  the  fate,  plural:  bic  6c!jtcffale.    £)a§  (£fco:     the 
choir,  and  boS  glofe,  the  raft,  are  in  the  plural  bie  Gljore,  bic  glofce. 

EXCEPTION  3.  The  following  masculine  nouns  add  in  the  plur* 
cr,  and  modify : 


das  Rohr,  the  reed 

das  Boss,  the  horse 

das  Salz,  the  salt 

das  Schaf,  toe  sheep 

das  Schrot,  f/i«  smaZZ  shot 

das  Tau,  tA«  co&Ze 

das  Thor,  the  gate 


der  Geist,  the  spirit 
der  Gott,  the  god 
der  Irrthum,  We  error 
der  Leib,  tin  body 


der  Mann(*),  the  man 
der  Rand,  the  edge 
der  Reichthum,  the  riches 
der  Wald,  the  forest 
Plural:  bie  ©eifter,  bie  ©ortet, 


der  Wurm,  the  worm 
der  Vormund.  the  guardian 
has  the   plural  die  Vor- 
m under  or  die  Vormunde 
etc. 


EXCEPTION  4.  The  following  neuter  nouns,  (having  none  of  the 
vowels  a,  o,  u,  au,)  add  er  in  the  plural: 
|  das  Geschlecht,  the  sex 
das  Gespenst,  the  spectrt 
das  Glied,  the  limb 
das  Kind,  the  child 
das  Kleid,  t he  dress 
das  Lied,  the  song 
das  Nest,  the  nest 


das  Augenlid,  the  eye-lid 
das  Bild,  the  picture 
das  Brett,  the  board 
das  Ei,  the  egg 
dasFeld,  the  field 
das  Geld,  the  money 
das  Gemiith,  the  mind 


das  Reis,  the  twig 
das  Regiment,  the  regiment 
das  Rind,  the  black-cattle 
das  Schild,  the  signboard 
das  Schwert,  the  sword 
das  Stift,  tht  ecclesiastical 

foundation 

I  das  Weib,  the  woman 
Plural:  bie  Jtugentiber,  bie  SBretter,  etc. 
Sol  SIoS,  the  carrion,  ba§  (Spital  ($ofpital),  the  hospital,  are  in  the 
plural— bie  $]er,  bie  Spitaler  (fcofoitoler). 

EXCEPTION  5.   The  following  masculine  nouns  of  foroign  origin 
modify  their  hist  vowel : 


der  Admiral,  the  admiral 
der  Altar,  the  altar 
der  Canal,  the  canal 


der  Cardinal,  the  cardinal 
der  Choral,  the  choral 
der  Corporal,  the  corporal 


der  General,  the  general 
der  Morast,  the  morass 
der  Palast,  tht  palace 


Plural;  bie  SlbmirSIe,  bie  Stltore,  etc. 
EXCEPTION  6.  The  following  nouns  are  declined  thus: 

SING.  N.  der  Fels(en)  G.  des  Felsens    D.dem  Fels(en)  A.  den  Fels(en) 

den  Felsen        die  Felsen 
dem  Herzen       das  Herz 
den  Herzen       die  Herzen 
dem  Herrn         den  Herrn 
den  Herren       die  Herren 
dem  Sporne        den  Sporn 
den  Sporen        die  Sporen 

A  small  number  of  masculine  and  neuter  n»uns  add  in  the  Genitive 
•angular  s  (or  es),  and  in  all  the  plural  cases  en,  but  do  not  modify ;  viz : 

1.  All  masculine  nouns  of  foreign  origin  ending  in  or  accented  on 
the  syllable  preceding  or;  (in  the  plural  the  accent  passes  overtoor);  as, 

ber  25oftor,  the  doctor;  bet  $rofeffor,  the  professor; 
Gen.  sin»:  be3  S)oftor§,  be§  ^rofcftorS 

Plural:         bie  Softoren,  bie  $rofefforen 


PLOR. 

»"-*          & 
the  gentleman  SING. 
(Mr.,  Lord)     PLUR. 

«-*-      IS. 

die  Felsen 
das  Herz 
di«  Herzen 
der  Herr 
die  Herren 
der  Sporn 
die  Sporen 

der  Felsen 
des  Herzens 
der  Herzen 
des  Herrn 
der  Herren 
des  Spornes 
der  Sporen 

(*)  Most  compound  words  in  mann  denoting  a  profession  form  their  plural  by 
changing  mann  into  leute  ;  as,  d er  Kaufmann,  the  merchant ;  der  Hauptmann, 
the  captain ;  Plural :  die  Kauf  leute,  die  Hauptleute ;  also  der  Edelmann,  th* 
nobleman ;  die  EdellenU. 


17 

2.  The  following  masculine  and  neuter  nouns : 


das  Bett,  the  bed 
der  Damon,  the  demon 
der  Dora,  the  thorn 
der  Fasan,  the  pheasant 
der  Forst,  the  forest 
das  Hemd,  the  shirt 
das  Insekt,  the  insect 
das  Juwel, 


das  Inieresse(*\th*  interest 
der  Kapcran,  the  capon 
der  Konsul(*),  the  consul 
der  M.a.st,themastfofashipJ 
der  Nachbar(*),  the  neigh- 
der  Nerv,  tte  nerve     [hour 
der  Obelisk,  tAe  obelisk 
das  Ohr,  Me  ear 
i  are  seldom  used. 


der  Schmerz,  the  pain(**). 
der  See(*),  the  lake 
der  Staat,  the  state 
das  Statwt,  the  statute 
der  Strahl,  the  ray 
der  Ungar,  the  Hungarian 
der  Unterthan,  the  subject 
der  Tribwn,  Me  tribune 


and  a  few  more  whic 

Gen.  sing:  be§  93ette§,  be§  ®orn§,    be§  gafanS,  be§  ®ottfutS. 
Plural :       bie  SBetten,  bie  SDornen,  bie  ^afauen,  bie  Konfiiln. 

3.  Masculine  nouns  in  us  and  neuter  nouns  in  um  (taken  from  the 
Latin)  change  in  the  plural  these  terminations  into  en,  and  those  in  us 
remain  in  the  genitive  singular  unchanged ;  as, 

ber  (SIooul,  the  globe ;  bo»  ©tymnafhtm,  the  gymnasium. 
Plural :  bte  ©loBen,  bie  ©tymnafien. 

4.  ba8  Jtapttat,  the  fund ;  bo§  Mineral,  the  mineral ;    baS  Material, 
the  material;  are  in  the  plural  bie  $apitulien,  bie  9JMner«Iien,  bie  Uftaterialten. 

NOTE  :  All  nouns  taken  from  other  languages  which  have  retained 
their  original  form  unchanged,  may  be  declined  as  in  their  own  lait- 
that  is  especially  the  case  with  nouns  belonging  to  modern 

as, 

er  55orb,  the  lord ;  ber  SBanquiec,  the  banker ;  bo§  (Safino,  the  casino. 
Plural:  bic  2orb§,  bie  SBanquterS,  bie  GaftnoS 

5.  The  following  nouns  (and  a  few  more)  have  two  significations 
indicated  by  the  termination  of  the  word  in  the  plural : 


das  Band 
die  Bank 
das  Gesicht 
der  Laden 
das  Land 


Bander,  ribbons 
Banken,  banks 
Gesichte,  visiont 
Laden,  shutters 
Lander,  separate  countries 


Bande,  ties 

Banke,  benclies 

Gesichter,  faces 

Laden,  shops 

Lande,  the  various  parts,  provinces,  off- 
districts  of  the  same  empire 
das  Lickt  Lichte,  candles  Lichter,  lights 

der  Ort  Oerter,  places  (towns)  Orte,  places  (spots) 

der  Strauss  Strausse,  nosegays  Strausse,  ostriches 

das  Wort  "Worter,  single  words  Worte,  connected  word$ 

der  Zoll  Zolle,  tolls  Zolle,  inches 

S)a8  ®en!mal,  the  monument;  ba§  ®emo^  the  apartment;  ba£ 
®etoanb/  the  garment ;  ba§  X$at,  the  valley,  have  besides  their  regular 
plural  forms:  Senlmfiler,  ©enwdjer,  ©ettjonber,  2;pter,  also  the  plural 
forms:  Denlmote,  ©emadje,  OJetnanbc,  S^ale,  used  in  poetry. 

6.  The  following  words  have  no  plural,  therefore,  when  the  idea- 
of  plurality  is  implied  the  plural  of  synonymous  words  must  be  used : 


SINGULAR. 

der  Bund 
der  Dank 
die  Ehre 
das  Lob 
der  Lohn 
der  Rath 
der  Streit 
der  Tod 
las  Ungltick 
las  Vergntigen 
der  Zank 
der  Zwist 

SYNONYMOUS 
WORD. 
das  Biindniss 
die  Danksagung 
die  Ehrenbezeugung 
die  Belobung 
die  Belohnung 
der  Rathschlag 
die  Streitigkeit 
der  Todesfall 
der  Ungliicksfall 
die  Vergniigung 
die  Za'nkerei 
die  Zwistigkeit 

the  alliance 
the  thanks 
the  honour 
the  praise 
the  reward 
the  advice 
the  contention 
the  death 
the  misfortune 
the  pleasure 
the  quarrel 
the  dispute 

PLWRAL. 

die  Biindnisse 
die  Danksagungen 
die  Ehrenbezeugunge» 
die  Belobungen 
die  Belohnungem 
die  Rathschlage 
die  Streitigkeiten 
die  Todesfalle 
die  Ungliicksfalle 
die  Vergnugungem 
die  Zankereien 
die  Zwistigkeiten 

(*}  They  add  in  the  plural  n  only. 
(**)  Old  Genitive  singular  form  :  des  Schmerzens. 
(t)  Such  nouns  usually  retain  their  original  pronunciation. 

18 

The  following  table  of  Declensions  of  the  article,  etc.  13 
intended  for  reference  only,  as  we  shall  treat  of  them  again  in  our 
grammar  lessons. 

Declension  of  the  Definite  Article. 


SINGULAR.  Masc.     Fern. 
Nominative    ber         bte 
Genitive         beg         ber 
Dative  bent        ber 

Accusative     ben         bte 
The  words 
btefer,  this 
tnandjer,  many  a 
and  a  few  others,  have 
Article,  viz: 


Neuter 
bo§,  the 
beg,  of  the 
bent,  to  the 
bog,  the 


PLURAL  of  all  Genders 
bie,  the 
ber,  of  the 
ben,  to  the 
bie,  the 


tteldjer,  which 
jeber,  each,  every 
similar    terminations 


jener,  that 

to  the   Definite 


PLURAL  of  all  Genders 
e 

er 
en 

e 

PUURAL  of  all  Genden 
btef*e,    these 
btef*er,   of  these 
btef*en,  to  these 
btef*e,    these 

Declension  of  the  Indefinite  Article. 

Neuter 
tin,  a  or  an    1 

etn*eg,  of  a  No 

etn*em,  to  a     i  plural, 
ein,  a  or  an    j 

The  following  eight  words  are  declined  in  the  Singular 
like  the  Indefinite  Article,  and  in  the  Plural  they  take  the 
same  terminations  as  the  words  btejer,  toetdjer  &c. 


SINGULAR.  Masc. 

Fern.             Neuter 

N.           er 
G.           eg 
D.           em 
A.          en 

e                    t§ 
er                eg 
er                em 
e                 eg 

EXAMPLE. 

SINGULAR.  Masc. 

Fern.                Neuter 

N.       btef»er 
G.       bteHl 
D.       bief*em 
A.       btej*en 

btef*e       bte 
btefer      bte 
bief*er      bie 
btef*e        bie 

*eg,    this 
*eg,    of  this 
*em,  to  this 
*e£,    this 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Nominative 

eiu 

ettt-c 

Genitive 

etn-^eg 

ein*er 

Dative 

etn^em 

etn^er 

Accusative 

etu*en 

etn-e 

ntetn, 
betn, 
fetn, 
unfer, 


SINGULAR.  Masc. 
N.     ntetn 
G.     mein*e§ 
D.     mein*em 
A.      mein*en 


my 
thy 
his, 
our 


euer 


j  your 

its  i^r,    her,  their 

fetn,  no,  none 
EXAMPLE. 

Fern.  Neuter  PLURAL  of  all  Genders 

metn-e        ntetn,        my  metn-e,    my 

metn*er  metn*e§,  of  my  metn^er,  of  my 
member  metn^em,  to  my  mein*en,  to  my 
metn^e  metn,  my  mein-e,  my 


19 


Table  of  terminations  of  the  four  Declensions. 


First  Declension. 

Third  Declension. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

N.— 

—  en  or  n 

N.  — 

—  n  or  en 

G.— 

—en  or  n 

G.  —  n  or  en 

—  n  or  en 

D.— 

—  en  or  n 

D.  —  n  or  en 

—  n  or  en 

A.— 

—  en  or  n 

A.  —  n  or  en 

—  n  or  en 

Second  Declension. 

Fourth  Declension. 

N.— 

— 

N.— 

-e,  "-e    or  "-er 

G.-« 

— 

G.—  e3  or  § 

-e,  "-e    or  --er 

D.— 

—  n 

D4_  generally  t 

-en,  "-en  or  "-em 

A.— 

— 

A.— 

-e,  "-e    or  •  --er 

Examples:—          FIRST 

SINGULAR. 

N.  bie  SBiene        the  bee 
G.  ber  Siene       of  the  bee 
D.  ber  SSiene       to  the  bee 
A.  bie  SBiene        the  bee 


DECLENSION. 
PLURAL, 

bie  93iene*n        the  bees 
ber  Siene*n        of  the  bees 
ben  9Siene*n        to  the  bees 
bie  93iene*n        the  bees 


SECOND 


f.  ber  SJSfarrer      the  parson 
'-.  be3  $pfarreiv3  of  the  parson 
>.  bent  ^farrer     to  the  parson 


G.  v  ^^ 

D.  bent  r\»'"'*'' 

A.  ben  $farrer 


to  the  parson 
the  parson 


DECLENSION. 

bie  ^5farrer      the  parsons 
ber  ^farrer     of  the  parsons 


ben  $farrer*n  to  the  parsons 
bie  $farrer      the  parsons 


THIRD 

N.  ber  Sotoe         the  lion 
G.  be3  Sotoe^n      of  the  lion 
D.  bemS6tt)e*n      to  the  lion 
A.  ben  £otoe«n      the  lion 


DECLENSION. 

bie  £ott>e*n         the  lions 
ber  £ott>e*n        of  the  lions 
ben  S6toe*n         to  the  lions 
bie  £6toe*n         the  lions 


FOURTH 

N.  ber  ©tutjl       <Ae  cfcair 
G.  be§  @tu|t*c8  o/  the  chair 
D.  bent  @tu|l*e    to  the  chair 
A.  ben  (Stufyl      <^e  c/iair 


DECLENSION. 

bie  @tii^t*e         <A«  chairs 
ber  @tii^t*e        of  the  chairs 
ben  (Stiil^ett       to  the  chairs 
bie  (5tiif)l*e         the  chairs 


General  Rule. — All  German  nouns  belong  to  the  Fourth  Declension 

with  the  exception  of— 

ill  Feminine  Nouns  (which  belong  to  the  first  declension), 

Ull  Masculine  and  Neuter  Nouns  ending  in  el,  en,  er,  and  neuters  in  e, 

and  lein  (which  belong  to  the  second  declension). 
All  Masculine  Nouns  ending  in  e,  and  masculine  Foreign  Nouns  accented 

on  the  last  syllable,  referring  to  persons,  and  not  ending  in  I,  n.  r 

(which  belong  to  the  third  Declension). 


20 

First  Lesson.  ®rftc  ScfttoiL 

The  Article  and  the  Noun. 

The  Definite  Article  the  is  translated  by 

ber  before  a  masculine  noun  in  the  singular;  aa, 

ber  Cnlel,(*)  the  uncle       ber  ©(fclftffel,  the  key 
bie  before  a  feminine  noun  in  the  singular ;  aa, 

bie  Xante,  the  aunt       bie  llljr,  the  watch 
ba$  before  a  neuter  noun  in  the  singular ;  as, 

ba§  Simmer,  the  room       bal  ©eBaube,  the  building 
bie  before  any  noun  in  the  plural ;  as, 
bie  Dnlet,  the  uncles    bie  Xanten,  the  aunts    bie  Simmer,  the  roornr 

The  FIRST  DECLENSION  of  Nouns 
comprises  all  feminine  nouns. 

RULES  :  1.  Feminine  nouns  do  not  change  in  the  singu- 
lar, in  the  plural  they  add  en;  as, 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

N.  &  A.  bie  grail,  the  woman 


G.  ber  §rau,  of  the  woman 

D.  ber  grail,  to  the  woman 


the  women 
iu=en,  of  the  women 


raii= en,  to  the  women 

2.  Feminine  nouns  ending  in  e,  el,  er,  add  in  the  pluraJ 
it  only;  as, 

N.  <k  A.  bie  Xante,  the  aunt  I    bie  Xante=n,  the  aunts 

G.  ber  Xante,  of  the  aunt  ber  Xante«n,  of  the  aunts 

D.  ber  Xante,  to  the  aunt  '    ben  Xante=n,  to  the  aunts 

3.  Feminine  nouns  ending  in  in   double    the    n   in   the^ 
plural,  before  adding  en;  as, 


bie  ®5nigin=n=en,  the  queens 
ber  £5mgin--n=en,  of  the  queens 
to  the  queens 


N.  &  A.  bie  SSnigin,  the  queen 
G.  ber  Sonigin,  of  the  queen 

D.  ber  ftonigin,  to  the  queen 

NOTE  : — The  English  Possessive  the  boy's  book,  the  girl's  bonnet 
is  usually  translated  the  book  of  the  boy,  the  bonnet  of  the  girl,  etc. 

The  auxiliary  verb(f)  Ijo&en,  to  have. 
SINGULAR.        Indicative  Present.        SINGULAR. 


1st  Person  id)  fjaBe,  I  have 
2nd  „  bii  Ijaft,  thou  hast 

3rd  „  masc.  er  Ijat,  he  has 
3rd  „  fern,  fie  fjat,  she  has 
3rd  „  neuter  e3  Ijat,  it  has 

PLURAL. 

1st      „  hrir  IjoBen,  we  have 

2nd  6ie  IjaBen, 

tyr  fi,aBt, 
3rd      „  fie  IjaBen,  they  have 


IjaBe  id),  have  1? 
I)  aft  bii,   hast  thout 
^at  er,     has  he? 
Ijat  fie,    has  she? 
fiat  e§,    has  it? 

PLURAL, 
IjaBen  nrir,  have  we? 


Ija&en  [it,    have  they? 


(*)  "We  indicate  the  gender  of  nouns  by  either  placing 

ber  before,  or  m.  (masculine)  after  a  masculine  noun 
bie        ,,        ,,    f.    (feminine)  after  a  feminine  noun 
ba3       ,,        ,,    n.    (neuter)  after  a  neuter  noun 

(t)  The  verbs  being  of  the  utmost  importance  we  shall  give  a  part 
of  them  in  each  lesson,  independently  of  the  other  rules. 


21 

The  Vocabulary 

is  to  be  learned  by  heart  as  these  words  will  not  be  given  again. 


aunt,  Xante  f. 
brush,  SJfitfte,  f. 
building,  ©ebaube 
door.  Satire  f. 
fork,  ©a&el  f. 
key,  ©cfitiiffei  m. 
knife,  2tteffer  n. 


newspaper,  Seitung  f. 
no,  netn 

potato,  8ortoffel  f. 
queen,  ®5nigin  f. 
room,  Simmer  n. 
sister,  ©djraefter  f. 
spoon,  Soffel  m. 


teacher,  Setter  m. 
teacher  f.,  fiefiierin  f. 
uncle,  Onfel  m. 
watch  (clock),  Ufa  f. 
who,  tter 
woman,  grou  £ 
yes,  jc 


Exercise  No.  1. 

1.  Decline  the  following  nouns  in   the   singular  and  plural 
as  shown  in  the  examples  on   the  preceding  page  :    bte   ttljr,  —  bte 
SSitrfte,—  Me  Xfjiire,—  bte   @a&el,—  bte  ^artoffel,—  bte   ©djfoefter; 
and  afterwards  translate: 

The  teacher,  —  the  spoon,  —  the  sister,  —  the  fork,  —  the  knife,  —  the 
building,  —  the  teachers,  (*)—  the  sisters,  —the  knives(*),—  the  watch,  the 
watches,  —  the  brush,  the  brushes,  —  the  fork,  the  forks,  —  the  sister, 
the  sisters,  —  the  teacher  (f.),  the  teachers  (f.),  —  of  the  woman,  of  the 
women,  —  to  the  aunt,  to  the  aunts,  —  the  potato  (Ace.),  the  potatoes 
(Ace.),  —  the  aunt's  key,  —  to  the  watch,  to  the  watches,  —  the  uncle,  — 
the  newspaper  (Ace.),  the  newspapers  (Ace.),  —  of  the  sister,  of  the 
sisters,  —  to  the  queen,  to  the  queens,  —  the  room,—  to  the  brush,  to  the 
brushes,  —  the  woman,  the  women. 

I  have,  —  has  he?  —  we  have,  —  thou  hast,  —  have  they?  —  you 
have,  —  she  has,  —  have  we?  —  it  has,  —  have  you?  —  they  have,  — 
hast  thou?  —  he  has,  —  have  I?  —  has  she? 

2.  £oben  ©te  bie  Uljr?    $a,  tcf)  Ija&e  bte  Ufcr.     Set  Dnfel 
fjat  gtoei1  SSiirften.    %tf)  gab2  e3  ber  gran.    SBer  fjat  bte  geitungen? 
|>aft  bit  bte   ®abeln?      ^ein,  aBer3  id)  §a6e  bte  fioffel.      S)er 
(Sdpffet  geprt4  ber  Xante.      SBir  faljen5  bte  Se^rertnnen.     3)a3 
©ebaube  geprt4  ben  ©djtoeftern  ber  Xante.    2Ber  ^at  bte  ®artoffeln? 


Who  has  the  newspapers?  Have  you  two1  watches?  No,  but8  I 
have  two1  brushes.  We  saw5  the  teacher's  (f.)  aunt.  The  building 
belongs4  to  the  queen.  Hast  thou  the  fork  ?  Yes,  I  have  the  fork. 
Who  has  the  knife  ?  The  teacher  has  two1  sisters.  Who  gave*  it  to 
the  woman  ?  Has  the  uncle  the  newspapers  ?  The  spoon  belongs4  to 
the  woman's  sister.  Have  you  the  potatoes!  No,  but3  1  have  the  forks. 
The  building  has  two1  doors. 

(*)  The  plural  of  this  noun  is  the  same  as  the  singular, 
1  jwei,  two    2  gab,  gave    3  abet,  but    4  geljort,  belongs    5  fallen,  flaw 


Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  What  is  the  translation  of  the  definite  article  the  in  German  I 

2.  "When  is  the  translated  der,  when  das,  and  when  die  t 

3.  How  are  feminine  nouns  declined  in  the  singular  ? 

4.  How  are  feminine  nouns  declined  in  the  plural  ? 

5.  How  are  feminine  nouns  ending  in  e,  el,  er,  declined  in  the  plural  ? 

6.  How  are  feminine  nouns  ending  in  in  declined  in  the  plural? 

7.  How  is  the  English  Possessive  like :   the  uncle's  knife,  the  aunt's 
forks,  etc.  usually  translated  into  German? 

8.  How  can  you  recognise  when  a  noun  is  masculine,  when  feminine,, 
and  when  neuter! 


Conversation. 


Good  morning. 

Good  day. 

Good  evening. 

Has  the  uncle  the  brush? 

No,  (madam,)  but  (aber)  he  has 
the  knife. 

Have  you  the  aunt's  watch? 

Yes,  (sir,)  I  have  the  aunt's  watch 
and  (und)  fork. 

Who  has  the  newspaper? 

The  teacher  has  the  newspaper. 

Have  you  the  potatoes? 

Yes,  I  have  the  potatoes  and  the 
forks. 

Did  you  see  (sahen  Sie)  the  teach- 
ers (f.)\ 

Yes,  I  saw  (sah)  the  teachers  and 
the  women. 

Who  has  the  knife? 

The  aunt  has  the  knife. 

Does  the  building  belong  (gehdrtj 
to  the  queen? 

No,  it  belongs  to  the  queen's  sister. 

Has  the  room  two  (zwei)  doors  ? 
No,  theroomhasthreefdmjdoors. 

Have  yon  two  lady-teachers  ? 
No,  but  I  have  two  gentlemen- 
teachers. 

Hast  thou  the  aunt's  brushes? 
Yes,  I  have  the  aunt's  two  brushes. 


©uten 
(Suten  Xag. 
©uten  Slbenb 

tat  ber  Dnfel  bie  93urfte? 
etn,  after  er  Ijat  ba3 


taben  ©ie  bie  ttljr  ber  Xante? 
a,  id)  Ijabe  bie  U^r  unb  bie 
©abel  ber  Xante. 
2Ber  Ijat  bie  fettling? 
25er  Setter  i)at  bie  Beirmtg. 
£aben  @ie  bie  ftartoffeln? 
3a,  id)  Ijabe  bie  $artoffeln  unb 

bie  ©abeln. 
©aljen  @te  bie  Seljrerinnen? 

8a,  i$  falj  bie  Seljrerinnen  unb 

bie  grauen. 
SSer  Ijat  ba3  HReffer? 
£te  Xante  §at  ba3  2Reffer. 
®eb,6rt    ba§    ©ebaube  ber  So* 

nig  in? 
S^ein,  e§  gefjort  ber  @d)roefter 

ber  ^ontgtn. 

£at  bag  3tntmer  gniet  X^uren? 
•Ketn,    ba^    3ininicr    ^at   brei 

Xfjiiren. 

(Ste  gtoei  Se^rertnnen? 
aber  id)  ^abe  atoei  Seljrer. 


aj!  bu  bie  S3urften  bet  Xante  ? 
o/  i^  Ijabe  bie  g»ei  Siirften 
ber  Xante. 


23 

Reading  Exercise  No.  1. 

OTer  $nfang  ift   fcfjtoer.       2Sa§  fja&en  @tc  in  ber 


All  commencement  is      difficult  What       have        you     in     the 

§cmb?      Sdj  fjaBe  eine  bentfcfje  3ettmtg.      2Ba§  ift  ba§? 

hand  I       have       a       German       newspaper  What      is       that 

SSem  gefiort  bie§?       @tnb  fie  reidj?      (Sinb    @ie   arm? 

To  whom  belongs     this  Are     they     rich  Are        you       poor 

(£§  ift  fatt.    Sft  e§  toarm?    2Ber  ift  ba?    @nten  Sftorgen. 

It    is      cold         Is       it       warm  Who     is  there          Good       morning 

<$nten  $n>enb,    ®nten  £ag*    28o  tt)aren  <5ie  geftern?    3$ 

Good      evening          Good       day        Where     were       you    yesterday        I 

fjafce  meitten  Dnfel  fiefudjt.    9Jlit  @ped  fcingt  man  9Jlanfe, 

have         my          uncle       visited          With     bacon    catches      one       mice 

Unfere  ®a|e  fjat  einen  SSoget  gefangen»       @prec|en  @ie 

Our  cat       has         a  bird  caught  Speak         you 

$)entfcfj?      3a,   ein  toenig.      ^iinnen  @ie  mid)  fcerftefjen? 

German  Yes       a        little  Can         you        me        understand 

3a,  fefjr  gut.    2Ba§  tt)iinfd§en  <5ie?    SBitte,  geben  @ie  mir 

Yes      very    good       What  want          you  Pray         give     (you)  to  me 

meinen    §nt?      3$    banle    3*)nen.      ^e^en    @ie    ^euie 

my  hat  I         thank        to  you  Go       you  to-day(this) 

Sftacljmittag  au§?     ^ein,  i§  Bleibe  ba^eim,     S)a§  ^Better 

afternoon        out  No        I       remain    at  home  The      weather 

ift  §n  fait,    §eute  ift  e3  fe^r  toarm.    SBtetotel  U^r  ift  e§? 

is    too    cold         To-day     is     it     very       warm        How  much  o'clock  is     it 

(£§  ift  gefjn  .U^r.      SSarnm  fommen  @ie  fo  f^at?      2}iein 

It     is       ten    o'clock  Why  come        you     so     late  My 

SSruber  ftmr  §eute  in  bem  Beater*      SBttte,  ne^men  @ie 

brother       was     to-day    in       the          theatre  Pray  take       (you) 

Pa&.      SSergeffen   <5ie   nicfjt,   ^eute   5lbenb   jn   fommen. 

(a)  seat  Forget          (you)       not        to-day      evening       to  come 

•ilftorgen  5lbenb  toerbcn  roir  ba§  (Concert  Befuc^en*      §aft 

To-morrow    evening        shall        we       the        concert  visit  Hast 

bn  fdjon  §n  SJltttag  gegeffen?     ^ein,  tt)ir  effen  ni(^t  Dor 

thou  already    to        noon  eaten  No         we        eat        not    before 

ein  Ufjr.      S23a3  fiir  SSetter  fatten  @ic  auf  S^rer  9Jeife? 

one    o'clock       What  for  (kind  of)  weather  had       you      on         your      journey 

(Seftern  5T6enb  Ijafce  ic§  meinen  9tegenf(^irm  t)ertoren» 

Yesterday    evening     have      I  my  umbrella  lost 


ft* 

Second  Lesson.  3toette  Selnon, 

The  Article  and  the  Noun  (continued). 

Declension  of  the  Definite  Article. 
SINGULAR  Ma&z.        Feat.  J¥~^er    PLURAL  of  all  Genders 

Nominative         ber  bie  bo§,  the  bie,  the 

Genitive  be§  bet  be§,    of  the  bet,  of  the 

Dative  bem  bet  bem,  to  the  ben,  to  the 

Accusative          ben  bie  bo§,  the  bie.  the 


The  SECOND  DECLENSION  of  Nouns 
comprises  all  masculine  and  neuter  nouns  ending  in  el,  «K*  <jr.  and 
tne  neuters  in  e  and  lein. 

KULE. — Masculine  and  neuter  nouns  ending  in  el,  en,  e> 
and  the  neuters  in  e  and  letn,  add  §  in  the  genitive  singular 
an  I  do  not  change  in  the  plural,  (except  in  the  dative  plural, 
when  those  ending  in  el,  er,  e  add  n(*)j  as, 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 


N.  bet  DnTel,      the  uncle 
G.  be§  Dnfel'S,  of  the  uncle 
D.  bem  Dnlel,    to  the  uncle 
A.  ben  Dnlel,      the  uncle 

N.  baS  SBeitdjen,    the  violet 

•G.  be§  SSeildjen'S,  of  the  violet 

D.  bem  93eild)en,   to  the  violet 

A.  ba§  SSeildjen,    the  violet 

N.  ber  ^farter,     the  parson 
G.  be»  $farrer«8,  of  the  parson 
D.  bera  ^forret,    to  the  parson 
A.  ben  ^farrer,     the  parson 


bie  DnTel,      the  uncles 
ber  Dnfel,      of  the  uncles 
ben  Dnfel=n,  to  the  uncle* 
bie  Dntel,      the  uncles 

bie  SSeildjen,  the  violets 
ber  SBeildijen,  of  the  violets 
ben  SSeildjen,  to  the  violet* 
bie  SSeildjen,  the  violets 

bie  ^farrer,     the  parsons 
ber  Starrer,    of  the  parsons 
ben  Spfarrer^to  the  parsons 
bie  Spfarrer,    the  parsons 


NOTE. — Most  verbs  require  the  noun  which  follows  them  in  the 
accusative  (if  the  noun  is  not  the  subject  of  the  sentence).  This  rule  must 
be  observed  with  masculines  in  the  singular  where  the  article  differs  in 
the  nominative  and  accusative ;  as, 

Srf)  §a6e  ben  6tfjluffel,  I  have  the  key 

2>er  Cnfel  fal)  ben  Seljrer,  the  uncle  saw  the  teacher 

The  verb  to  be  and  a  few  others  make  an  exception  to  this  rule  and 
require  the  following  nouns  in  the  nominative  case ;  as, 

S5er  Dnlel  ift  ber  fieljrer,  the  uncle  is  the  teacher 


The  auxiliary  verb  fetn,  to  be. 

Indicative  Present. 


'•.a)  din,  I  am 

bu  btft,  thou  art 

er  (fte,  e§)  ift,  he  (she,  it)  is 

toir  finb,  we  are 

Sie  finb  (iljr  fetb),  you  are 

pe  finb,  they  are 


bin  id),  am  I? 
bift  bu,  art  thou? 
ift  er  (fie,  eS),  is  he  (she,  it)> 
Inb  nnr,  are  we? 
"nb  @ie  (feib  iljr),  are  you? 
b  fie,  are  they? 


O  In  the  dative  of  the  plural  all  declinable  German  words,  vrbiek  4t  iot  end  in 
n  in  the  plural,  add  n. 


and,  itnb 
but,  after 
cake,  ftut 
carriage,  SSagett 
cherry,  ®irfrf)e  f. 
dish,  ©cfjiiffelf. 


25 

girl,  SDtabcfjen  n. 
needle,  ftabel  f. 
parson,  ^Sfarrer  m. 
pen,  geber  f. 
picture,  ©cmalbe  n. 
plate,  Seller  m. 


gimlet,  83ol)rer  m.  '  pupil,  ©filler  m. 


pupil,  ©djiilertn  f. 
rose,  9?ofe  f. 
sail,  (Seget  n. 
violet,  SSeitdjen  n. 
where,  too 
window,  genfter  n. 
young-lady,  grauletnn. 


Exercise  No.  2. 

1.  Decline  in  the   singular   and  plural:    ber    ©c&luffel, — Me 
Sfabd,— bag  Sftabdjen,— ber  <3d)uler,— bte  geber,— bag   @emalbe, 
—bag  graulein,— bie  SRofe,— ber  Seller ;— and  afterwards  trans- 
late : 

The  spoon,  the  spoons,  —the  sail,  the  sails, — the  carriage,  the  car. 
riages, — the  girl,  the  girls,-  -the  pupil,  the  pupils, — the  window,  the 
windows, — the  picture,  the  pictures, — the  young-lady,  the  young-ladies, 
— of  the  key,  of  the  keys, — of  the  violet,  of  the  violets, — of  the  plate, 
of  the  plates, — of  the  building,  of  the  buildings, — to  the  sail,  to  the 
sails, — to  the  cake,  to  the  cakes, — to  the  teacher,  to  the  teachers, — to 
the  young-lady,  to  the  voung-ladies, — the  uncle  (Ace.),  the  uncles 
(Ace.), — the  girl  (Acr  ;,  the  girls  (Ace.), — the  gimlet  (Ace.),  the  gim. 
lets  (Ace.), — the  picture  (Ace.),  the  pictures  (Ace.), — the  pens, — of 
the  rose, — the  p?r&on  (Ace.), — to  the  pupils  (f.), — of  the  room, — to 
the  needles, — to  the  knives, — the  cherries  (Ace.), — to  the  key. 

Am  I? — we  are, — are  you? — thou  art, — is  he? — they  are, — 
is  she? — you  are, — is  it? — have  I? — are  we? — she  has, — have 
we? — they  have,— I  am, — have  you? — you  are, — has  he? — you 
have, — he  is, — are  they? — it  has, — is  it? 

2.  SSer  tjat  ben  ©cpffel?    ^ter1  ift  ber  ©dpffet,   aber  too 
•ift  bag  2ftefjer?    2Ber  faty2  ben  DnM?    3)er  Dnfel  ift  ber  ^farrer. 

faBen  @ie  bie  ^irfcfien?    3>ie  Sfiiire  beg  ©eMiibeg  ift  gefdjloffen3. 
er  SBagen  gefidrt4  ben  ©cfiiilern  beg  Dnfelg.     $at  bag  9Rabc^en 
bie  SBetfcnen?     @inb  bie  Xpren  unb  genfter  off  en5?    SBo  ift  ber 
®ncfien?    %$  W  ben  SSofirer.    3d)  bin  bie  ©djuterin  beg  gran- 
leing. 

I  saw2  the  parson.  Is  the  window  of  the  room  open5?  The  pic- 
ture belongs4  to  the  uncle.  Where  are  the  plates  and  the  dishes?  Who 
has  the  givulet  ?  Here1  is  the  gimlet,  but  where  are  the  needles  ?  He 
is  the  aunt's  teacher.  The  doors  of  the  building  are  shut.8  Are  you 
the  young-lady's  pupil  (f.)1  The  cake  belongs4  to  the  woman's  girl. 
Where  are  the  spoons  and  the  forks?  Has  the  teacher  (f.)  the  cher- 
ries? I  saw2  the  parson's  carriage.  Here1  is  the  newspaper.. 


1  Ijier,  here    2  fat),  saw    3  gefrfjloffen,  shut    4  8elj5rt,  belongs    5  offeu,  open 


26 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  How  are  the  Nominative  and  Accusative  of  the  definite  article  the 
translated  in  the  masculine,  how  in  the  neuter,   and  how  in  the 
feminine  and  plural  ? 

2.  How  are  the  Genitive  and  Dative  of  the  definite  article  translated 
in  the  masculine  and  neuter,  how  in  the  feminine,  and  how  in  the 
plural  ? 

3.  What  terminations  do  masculine  and  neuter  nouns  add  ending  in  el, 
en,  er,  and  the  neuters  in  e  and  lein  in  the  singular,  and  in  which 
case  or  cases  of  the  singular  ? 

4.  Are  these  nouns  the  same  in  the  plural  as  in  the  singular? 

5.  Which  of  these  nouns  take  n  in  the  dative  plural? 

6.  What  is  the  general  rule  for  all  declinable  German  words  in  the 
dative  plural  ? 

7.  In  what  case  do  nouns,  which  are  not  the  subject  of  the  sentence, 
stand  after  a  verb? 

8.  With  what  nouns  must  this  rule  be  observed,  and  why? 

9.  What  verb  requires  the  following  noun  in  the  nominative? 


Conversation. 


Where  is  the  key? 
Here  (hier)  is  the  key. 
Who  has  the  gimlet  ? 
The  uncle  has  the  gimlet. 
Have  you  the  pen? 
No,  the  aunt  has  the  pen. 
Are  you  the  teacher? 
No,  I  am  the  pupil. 
Who  saw  ( sah)  the  parson's  car- 
riage? 
I  saw  the  carriage  and  the  parson. 

Has  the  girl  the  roses? 

Yes,  she  has  roses  and  violets. 

Areyoutheyoung-lady'spupilf/J  / 

No,  I  am  the  pupil's  sister. 

Are  the  windows  open  (offen)l 
The  windows  are  shut  (geschlossen), 

but  the  door  is  open. 
Do  the  cakes  belong  (gehoren)  to 

the  girl's  teacher  (f.JI 
No,  the  cakes  belong  to  the  girl. 

Have  you  the  dishes  and  the  plates? 
No,  I  have  onlv  fnur )  th«  platan 


SBo  ift  ber  ©dpffel? 
£ter  ift  ber  ©djliiffel. 
SSer  Bat  ben  SBoBrer? 
3>er  Dnfel  §at  ben  SSofirer. 
|»oben  @te  tie  geber? 
9Mn,  bte  Xante  Ijat  bie  geber. 
©tnb  @te  ber  SeBrer? 
9Zetn,  id)  Bin  ber  (Scfiiiler. 
SSer  fafj  ben  SBagen  be3  $far- 

rerS? 
Srf)   faf)   ben   SSagen  unb  ben 

^farrer. 

£at  bag  SRabdjen  bie  SRofen? 
%a,  fte  Jjat  Otpfen  unb  SSeilcfien. 
©tnb    @ie    bte   ©cplerin   be3 


•ftetn,  id}  Bin  bie  ©djtoefter  ber 

(5d)ulertn. 

©tnb  bte  genfter  off  en? 
£>te  genfter  ftnb  gefdjloffen,  aBer 

bie  Spre  ift  off  en. 
®eB5ren  bie  ^uc^en  ber  Sefirertn 


unb 


bte  $ud)en   geBoren   bem 
^dbd^en. 

£aBen   @te  bte  ©djuffetn 
bte  Setter? 

id)  BaBe  nur  bte  Setter. 


27 

Reading  Exercise  No.  2. 

tft  nid&t  m&  (Mb,  ttm*  glfinji      Deffnen   ©ic 


It      is      not          all         gold       what      glitters  Open         (you) 

ba§  genfter.    Sftacjjen  @ie  bte£f)iire§u.     2330  tootynen  @ie? 

the       window       (make)  Shut  (you)  the     door  (too)     Where     reside        you 

SSir  toofjnen  in  biefem  pBfdjen  §aufe.     28ann  §aben  <3te 

We         reside       in       this  pretty          house  When       have      you 

biefen  ffiod  gefauft?     2Bo  tft  3$re  @c$toefter?     @ic  gtng 

this       coat        bought         Where    is      your  sister  She    went 

mit  bet  Xante  fpa§teren.     $)ie  £age  luerben   ftinger   unb 

with    the       aunt          walking  The       days        become        longer       and 

Me  S^la^te  !iir§er*    5)a§    SBetter   tuar      tjorgeftern      fe^r 

the      nights       shorter         The       weather       was  the  day  before  yesterday  very 

fd)Bn.      3n   ©nglanb    ftrirb    eg    nid^t    fo    fait    all    in 

beautiful        In         England     becomes      it         not        so       cold        as        in 

S)eutfrf)tanb.     3$  §aBe  fcergeffen   §anb[c^u^e   511   laufen. 

Germany  I        have       forgotten  gloves  to          buy 

28ie  ijeifeen  Me  fieBen   Sage  ber  SBodfje?       @ie   ^etgen: 

How   are  called  the      seven       days     of  the      week  They     are  called 

(Sonntag,     Sftontag,     S)ien£tag,     SJlitttood^,     S)onner§tag, 

Sunday  Monday  Tuesday  Wednesday  Thursday 

greitag,  (SamStag  (©onnabenb).      SBie  bide  donate  §at 

Friday  Saturday  How      many        months        has 

ba§   Sa^r?      ®a§    ga^r    §at    5rt)5lf    donate:     Sanuar, 

the         year  The        year        has       twelve         months  January 

Sefcruar,    gjtarj,     ^rii,     Wai,     %nmf     %nli,    Slngtift, 

February          March  April  May  June  July  August 

©eptemBer,   October,    -ftofcemBer,  December.     Sefen  @ie 

September  October  November  December  Bead      you 

aid  $)entfrf)?      3<*/  siemlic^  bteL    Sefen    <Sie  aud^  lant? 

much    German  Yes         pretty       much         Read        you      also      aloud 

ga,  immer;  benn  lante§  Sefen  ift  bie   Befte   UeBung,   unt 

Yes       always         for         loud      reading     is      the       best        practice  in  order 

eine  gute  3ln§fyradje   gn    Belommen.        Sefen    @ie   btefe 

a       good      pronunciation      to  get  Bead       you       these 

©etten  redjt  oft  burc^.     @nbe  gut,  OTe3  gut» 

very   often  through         End     well       all       well 


23 
Third  Lesson.  Sritte  Sefttoit 

The  Article  (concluded},  &  the  Noun  (continued}. 

The  Indefinite  article  a  or  an  is  translated  by 

eitt  before  a  iMsculine  noun  in  the  singular;  as, 

ein  CnTrt,  an  uncle    ein  ©djliifiel,  a  key 
fine  before  a  feminine  noun  in  the  singular  ;  as, 

cine  Xante,  an  aunt    cine  Uljr,  a  watch 
eilt  before  a  neuter  noun  in  the  singular  ;  as, 
ein  Simmer,  a  room    ein  ©e&aube,  a  building 

Declension  of  the  Indefinite  Article. 

Masc.       Fern.  Neuter 

Nominative  ein  ein*e  ein,     a  or  an 


Genitive  ein=e§        eimer  ein=e§ 

Dative  etn=em       ein=er  ein 

Accusative  ein--en        ein*e  ein, 


,     a  or  an  ^ 
=e§,  of  a        v        No 
--em,to  a  plural 

,     a  or  an  J 


The  THIRD  DECLENSION  of  Nouns 

comprises  all  masculine  nouns  ending  in  e,  and  all  masculim 
nouns  of  foreign  origin(*)  (accented  on  the  last  syllable) 
referring  to  persons,  which  do  not  end  in  I,  n,  r 

RULES  :  1  .  Masculine  nouns  ending  in  e  add  n  in  all 
cases  of  the  singular  and  plural;  as, 

Singular.  i                         Plural. 

N.  bet  SnaBe,      the  boy,  |  bie  ®na6e--n,  the  boys 

G.  be!  8nabe=n,  of  the  boy,  '  ber  8na6e=n,  of  the  boys 

D.  bem  £na6e--n,  to  the  boy  i  ben£na6e--n,  to  the  boys 

A.  ben  Enabe=n,  the  boy  !  bie  £nabe=n,  the  boys 

2.  Masculine  nouns  of  foreign  origin  (accented  on  the 
last  syllable),  referring  to  persons  which  do  not  end  in  lt  nt  r,  add 
en  in  all  cases  of  the  singular  and  plural;  as, 


N.  ber  (Bolbflt,       the  soldier 
G.  be§  <5olbat--en,  of  the  soldier 
D.  bem  £olbat--en,  to  the  soldier 
A.  ben  Solbat--en,  the  soldier 


bie  Solbat=en,  the  soldiers 
ber  @olbot--en,  of  the  soldiers 
ben  Solbat=en,  to  the  soldiers 
bie  £olbat=en,  the  soldiers 


Imperfect  of  the  Auxiliary  verbs 
Ijafceit,  to  have  fciit,  to  be 


idj  fiatte,  I  had 

bn  ftatteft,  thou  hadst 

er  (fie,  e§)  Ijatte,  he  (she,  it)  had 

ttrir  fatten,  we  had 

Sic  fatten  (il^r  Ijattet),  you  had 

^te  gotten,  they  had 


id)  ft  or,  I  was 

bu  ftiarft,  thou  wast 

er  (fie,  el)  mar,  he  (she,  it)  wai 

foir  roaren,  we  were 

6ie  njaren  (i^r  roaret),  you  were 

fte  ioarcn,  they  were 


(*)  Nouns  of  foreign  origin  are  nouns  mostly  taken  from  the  Latin  and  Greek,  and 
in  most  cases  they  can  be  recognised  by  the  same  or  nearly  the  same  spelling 
as  in  English,  and  the  accentuation  on  their  last  syllable. 


the  advocate,  ber  Slbbofat 
„  agent,  ber  SIgent 
,,  boy,  ber  Jhtobe 
„  customer,  ber  ®unbe 
„  Englishman,  ber  ©ng= 

I8nber 
,,  Frenchman,  ber  gran- 

8<>fe 
„  hare,  bet  £afe 


29 

the  hunter,  ber 
„  manufacturer,       ber 

gobrtfant 
„  monarch,     ber   2tto» 


„  nephew,  ber  Sfteffe 
„  niece,  bie  SKtdjte 

only,  nur 

or,  cber 


the  photographer,       ber 


„  president,  ber^raftbent 
,,  Russian,  ber  fRitffe 
,,  sailor,  ber  9Jlatrofe 
„  soldier,  ber  ©olbat 
„  student     (collegian), 
ber  ©tubent 


Exercise  No.  3. 

1.  Decline  in  the  singular:  ein  ®unbe,— em   genfttr,— etne 
•ifttdjte, — em   SSftdbdjen, —  eine  ?$ran, —  ein  SIgent; — also  in   the 
singular  and  plural:   ber   9£effe, — ber  ^fcotograplj), — ber   £afe, — 
bet  (Stubent; — and  afterwards  translate: 

The  sailor,  the  sailors, — the  Russian,  the  Russians, — the  advocate, 
the  advocates, — the  manufacturer,  the  manufacturers, — of  a  Frenchman, 
of  the  Frenchmen, — of  the  president,  of  the  presidents, — to  the  hare, 
to  the  hares, — to  an  agent,  to  the  agents, — a  nephew  (Ace.),  the  ne- 
phews (Ace. ), — the  photographer  (Ace. ),  the  photographers, — a  niece 
(Norn.  <k  Ace.), — a  window  (Norn.  &  Ace.), — to  a  pen, — to  a  sail, — to  a 
newspaper, — to  a  violet, — to  a  hunter,  to  the  hunters, — a  soldier  (Ace.), 
the  soldiers  (Ace.), — of  a  rose, — of  an  Englishman, — to  a  customer,  to 
the  customers, — of  the  monarch,  of  the  monarchs, — of  a  young-lady,  of 
the  young-ladies, — a  student  (Ace..),  the  students  (Ace.), — a  needle 
(Ace.),  the  needles  (Acc.j, — a  boy  (Ace.  )t  the  boys, —  a  picture,  the 
pictures. 

Was  I  ? — she  had, — we  were, — had  you  ? — they  had,  — were  you? — 
she  was, — had  he  ? — thou  hadst, — you  are, — she  was, — we  had, — was  it? 
—are  they? — you  have,— we  are, — you  were, — have  I? — are  you? — thou 
art, — have  they? — hadst  thou? — was  he? — you  had, — they  were. 

2.  £at  ber  9ftatrofe  eine  (Sdfjroefter?    S)er  ©olbat  tft  ber  -fteffe 
eine§  2lb&o!aten.    SSir  finb  ©tiibenten.    S)er  $dger  Bradjte1  etnen 
£afen.    ©afien  (Sie2  ben  ga&rtfanten?    %$  fafc.3  nur  ben  Stgenten 
be§  gabrilanten.      (B  tft  ba3   ®emalbe  eine3   9ftabd)en3.      S5er 
Sftonarrf)  fdjrieb4  bent  ^rtijtbenten.    S5er  f£r£m50fe  tft  ein  ^fjoto* 
grapl).    2)te  SRofen  gepren5  enter  Sftc&te  be3  Diuffen.    ©atyen  @te2 
bte  ®naben  ober  bie  2ftabrf)en?    3d)  fa^  ben  Steffen  be§  ^farrerS. 

Are  the  soldiers  Englishmen  or  Russians?  The  teacher  is  the  stu- 
dent's uncle.  The  photographer  is  a  customer  of  the  manufacturer. 
Did  you  see2  the  monarch?  I  saw3  only  the  president.  Have  you  ar 
aunt?  Who  brought1  the  cake?  It  was  the  picture  of  a  young-lady. 
The  advocate  wrote4  to  the  Frenchman's  agent.  Who  saw3  the  sailors  ? 
We  are  the  photographer's  customers.  I  saw3  a  sail.  The  needles  be- 
long5 to  the  boy's  sister.  I  brought1  the  gimlet  and  the  knives.  Where 
are  the  forks  and  the  plates? 

1  bradjte,  brought    2  jofjen  @te,  did  you  see?     8  falj,  saw     4  fdjricfc,  wrote 
5  Qdjou'ii,  belong 


30 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  What  is  the  translation  of  the  indefinite  article  a  or  an  in  German? 
•2.  When  is  a  or  an  translated  ein,  and  when  einef 

3.  How  are  the  Nominative  and  Accusative  of  the  indefinite  article  trans- 
lated in  the  masculine,  how  in  the  neuter,  and  how  in  the  feminine? 

4.  How  are  the  Genitive  and  the  Dative  of  the  indefinite  article  translated 
in  the  masculine  and  neuter,  and  how  in  the  feminine? 

5.  What  termination  do  masculine  nouns  in  e  add  in  the  Genitive, 
Dative  and  Accusative  singular,  and  in  all  cases  of  the  plural? 

6.  Which  nouns  take  a  similar  termination  in  all  these  cases,  and  what 
is  the  termination  ? 

7.  On  which  syllable  have  nouns  of  foreign  origin  usually  the  accent  ? 

8.  What  similarity  have  these  nouns  in  general  with  the  corresponding 
nouns  in  English  ? 

Conversation. 

Have  you  a  niece  ? 

Yes,  I  have  a  niece  and  a  nephew. 

Are  you  the  manufacturer's  agent? 

No,  I  am  a  customer  of  the  manu- 
facturer. 

Are  the  students  Frenchmen? 

No,  they  (it)  are  Russians. 

Is  that  (dies)  the  president  T 

No,  he  (it)  is  only  the  president's 
advocate. 

Did  you  see  (sahen  Sie)  the  sol- 
diers? 

Yes,  we  saw  (sahen)  the  soldiers 
and  the  sailors. 

Were  you  a  customer  of  the  photo- 
grapher? 

Yes,  I  was  a  long  time  (lange 
Zeit)  his  (sein)  customer. 

Has  the  manufacturer  a  nephew  ? 

No,  but  he  has  a  niece. 

Have  you  a  knife  or  a  fork? 

I  have  a  knife. 

Did  you  bring  (brackten)  the  hare? 

No,  the  hunter  brought  (brachtt.) 
the  hare. 

Does  the  watch  belong  (gehort)  to 
the  Frenchman  ? 

No,  the  watch  belongs  to  the  En- 
glishman. 

Are  you  the  student's  teacher! 

No,  I  am  his  uncle. 


©ie  eine 
3d,   id)   f)abe  eine   -fttcfcte  unb 

einen  Sfteffen. 
©tnb  ©ie  ber   SIgent  be3   ga- 

brifanten? 
9?ein,   id)   bin   ein  ®unbe   be3 

fyabrifanten. 

©inb  bte  ©tnbenten  grangofen  ? 
9£etn,  eg  finb  fRiiffen. 
3ft  bteg  ber  ^raftbeitt? 
Sftetn,  eg  ift  nur    ber  2lbt>ofat 

beg  $ra[tbenten. 
©af/en  ©ie  bte  ©olbaten? 

3a,  toir  fafien  bte  ©olbaten  unb 

bie  Patrol  en. 
SSaren    ©ie    ein    ®unbe     beg 


go,    idj    tear    lange   gdt  fetn 
ftimbe. 

t  ber  gctfaifant  einen  -fteffen? 
ein,  aber  er  fiat  eine  9?tcf)te. 
aben  ©ie  ein  2fteffer  ober  eine 
@abel? 

d)  babe  ein  SOleffer. 
'rad)tcn  ©ie  ben  Jpafen? 

ber    %&%&    bradjte    ben 


bte  U^r  bent 


3?ein,  bte  Ufir  geprt  bent  Sng- 

lanber. 
©inb     ©ie     bet    Setter     bef 

©tubenteii? 
Sf?ein,  id)  bin  jetn  £5n!el. 


31 

ReaMttg  €*ern0e  Mo.  3. 

Translate  this  and  the  following  anecdotes.  The  words  which  the  student 
has  already  learnt  are  omitted  and  indicated  by  a  .  and  those  which 
are  the  same  in  English  as  in  German  are  indicated  by  a  — 

ttnterfdjteb  jtotfcfjen  (gbelmamt  nub  93<wer, 

(Distinction  between  nobleman  and  peasant.) 

$ie   ©befteute   in   S)entfrf)tanb   ftmren    friiljer    fefjr 

noblemen       in  Germany  .  formerly      very 

ftotj  cwf  iljre  ©eBurt     (£in  (Sbetmcmn  madfjte  eine  SReife 

proud    on     their        birth  .  nobleman          made         .        journey 

§n  ^ferbe.    @r  rttt  toomttS   unb  fein  Wiener  Ijinter  ifjm, 

on  horse  (back)     .      rode     in  front         .          his       servant       behind      him 

2Mb  fafjen  fie  auf  einem  ®ird$ofe  triete  <Sd)dbel  liegen. 

soon        saw        .       on  .  churchyard     many        skulls  lie 

©huge  ttmren  toeifj;  akr  bie  meiften  toaren  fc^tDarj.     ®er 

some  .          white          .         .         most  .  black 

(Sbetmamt  rtef  feinen  Wiener   unb   fagte:    33etrac(jte   biefe 

nobleman      called       his         servant         .  said  look  at  these 

©d^abel  genan.     5)u  totrft  einen  Unterfdjteb  finben.    ®ie 

skulls        carefully  .       wilt  .  distinction  find 

toetgen  finb  bie  ©cfjcibet  toon  ©bctleutcn  unb  bie  fc^rtjarjen 

white  (ones)  .          .          skulls         of          noblemen          .          .        black  (ones) 

bie  (Scfjcibel  toon  SBurgern  unb  SSauern.    S5er  SDiener  iiatte 

skulls          of        citizens         .         peasants  .          servant 

nicfjtS  §u  anttoorten,  nnb  fie  ritten  njeiter.      S^ad^  einer 

nothing     to  reply  .          .        rode     farther  (on)         after        one 

(Stunbe  fdjen  fie  einen  (Satgen.     ®a    toaren   cmdj   einige 

hour          saw        .  .  gallows          there  .  also        some 

©djcibet,  after  affe  toaren  toetfj.    ®er  Wiener  rttt  jn  feinem 

skulls  .         all  .          white  .        servant    rode    to       his 

Jjerm   unb   fagte:    SBetrad^ten   <5te   biefe    (Sd§dbel   genan. 

master         .  said  look  at          (you)     these         skulls        carefullj 

2We  finb  toetfj  nnb    ba^er  nnr  (Sc^dbet   toon    ©bettenteiu 

all         .        white        .        therefore       .  skulls  of  noblemen 


§ier  gie&t  e§  tueber  SBiirger  noc§  SSanern, 

here     gives       .     neither     citizens       nor       peasants 


Fourth  Lesson. 


SSierte  Seftton. 


The  FOURTH  DECLENSION  of  Nouns 
comprises  all  masculine  and  neuter  nouns  which  do  not  belong 
to  the  second   or   third    declension    (i.  e.    those   not  ending  in 
e,  el,  en,  er,  kin,  and  all  foreign  masculine  and  neuter  nouns, 
except  the  masculines  referring  to  persons  which  do  not  end  in 

l>  n>  r-) 

RULES:  1.  Masculine  and  neuter  nouns  (the  above  ex- 
cepted)  take  es  or  s  in  the  genitive  and  generally  e  in  the  da- 
tive ol  the  singular ;  in  the  plural  they  add  e,  except  in  the 
dative  plural  where  they  add  en;  as, 


N  ber  £ifdj,      the  table 

G.  be*  £ifd)=e§,  of  the  table 

D.  bent  %\W-t,  to  the  table 

A.  ben  Zifrf),     the  table 

N.  bo§  $ferb,      the  horse 

Q.  be§  $ferb=e8,  of  the  horse 

D.  bem  9Bferb--e,    to  the  horse 

A.  ba?  $ferb,       the  horse 


bie  Stfdj«e,  the  tables 
ber  Ztfrfhe,  of  the  tables 
ben  £iid)=en,to  the  tables 
bie  Zifrf)«e,  the  tables 

bie  $ferb=e,  the  horses 
ber  $ferb=e,  of  the  horses 
ben  $ferb=en,to  the  horses 
bie  $ferb=e,  the  horses 


2.  Those  of  the  above  nouns  which  contain  one  of  the 
vowels  a,  o,  u,  au  modify  such  vowel  in  the  plural  (i.  e.  change 
a  into  a,  o  into  o,  u  into  u,  au  into  au)  besides  adding  e.  The 
Neuter  nouns  which  can  modify,  further  add  er  instead  of  e. 

NOTE. — Nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  can  only  modify  if  a,  of 
u  or  au  occur  in  their  last  syllable. 

bie  2Sorb,5ng=e,  the  curtains 
ber  SSorb,ang=e,  of  the  curtains 
ben  S3orb,ang=en,to  the  curtains 
bie  83orljcing.-e,  the  curtains 

bie  £fiuf*er,  the  houses 
ber  ^fiu[=er,  of  the  houses 
ben  |>aui=ern,to  the  houses 
bie  |>auf=er,  the  houses 


N.  ber  SSortjong,         the  curtain 

G.  beS  83orb,ang--(e)§,  of  the  curtain 

D.  bem  83orb,ang--(e),    to  the  curtain 

A.  ben  SSorbang,         the  curtain 

N.  ba§  £aii§,      the  house 

G.  be§  £aui=e§,  of  the  house 

A.  bem|iouf--e/    to  the  house 

A.  bo§  |>au§,      the  house 


Foreign  nouns  generally  do  not  modify;  as,   bol   3ftetoH, 
the  metal;  Plural:  bie  SRetaffe. 

NOTE  1.  —  The  e  may  be  omitted  in  the  terminations  of  the  Genitive  aad  Dative 
singular  in  words  of  more  than  one  syllable,  and  also  in  many  nou:  s  c*  »ne  syllable, 
especially  those  ending  in  Z,  m,  n,  r.  In  the  Genitive  es  must  be  used  in  nouns  ter- 
minating with  a  hissing  sound  like  s,  st,  z,  &c. 

2.  —  Words  with  the  double  vowels  aa  and  oo  in  general  do  not  modify. 

3.  —  Nouns  ending  in  6  and  i§  change  in  taking  a  termination  6  or  §  into  ff  . 


The  Regular  verb  lobett,  to  praise. 


Indicative  Present. 
id)  Iofce(*),  I  praise  (I  am  praising) 
bu  lobft,  thou  praisest 
er  (fie,  e§)  lobt,  he  (she,  it)  praises 
roir  loben,  we  praise 
6ie  loben  (tljr  lobt),  you  praise 
fie  lob »n,  they  praise 


Imperfect. 

id)  IoBte(*),  I  praised  (I  was  praising) 
bit  lobteft,  thou  praisedst 
er  (fie,  eg)  lobte,  he  (she,  it)  praised 
hut  lobten,  we  praised 
Sie  lobten  (ib,r  lobtet),  yon  praised 
fie  lobten,  they  praised 


(*)  The  above  is  the  only  form  existing  in  German  to  render  the  Present  and  Im- 
perfect, and  it  is  also  used  to  form  the  Interrogative ;  as,  lobe  ich,  do  I  craiM? 


the  book,  bo§  93u* 
castle,  ba?  ©djtofj 
chair,  ber  @tuf)l 
coat,  ber  tRoof 
curtain,  ber 


duke,  bee 


33 

the  glass,  ba§  ©Ia§ 
hat,  bonnet,  ber  £1 
horse,  ba<3  ^Sferb 
house,  ba§  Dentil 
king,  ber  Sontg 
leaf,  bo§  SBIatt 
,  pencil,  ber  SBIeiftift 


I  the  present,  boS  ®efdjenl 

1    „  roof,  ba§  Sad) 

„  ruler,  ba§  Sineat 

„  ship,  ba3  ©djiff 

„  table,  ber  STtidj 

„  tree,  ber  SBaum 

„  village,  baS  S)orf 


Exercise  No.  4. 

1.  Decline   in   the  singular  and  plural:   bet  ®5ntg,  —  ba§ 
©cijtff,—  ber  |mt,—  bag  Sorf,—  ber  SSaum,—  bag  23Iatt,—  ber  &er- 
§09,  —  bag  (SJejdjen!,  —  bet  SSIeifttft,  —  bag  Sineal;  —  and  afterwards 
translate: 

The  king,  the  kings,  —  a  present,  the  presents,  —  of  a  curtain,  of  the 
curtains,  —  of  the  glass,  of  the  glasses,  —  to  the  coat,  to  the  coats,  —  to  a 
castle,  to  the  castles,  —  a  tree  (Ace.),  the  trees  (Ace.),  —  a  house  (Acc.)t 
the  houses  (Acc.J,  —  to  a  table,  to  the  tables,  —  to  the  present,  to  the 
presents,  —  of  a  horse,  of  the  horses*  —  the  hat  (Ace.),  the  hats  (Ace.), 
—  the  duchy,  the  duchies,  —  the  pencil,  the  pencils,  —  to  the  ruler,  to  the 
rulers,  —  of  the  roof,  of  the  roofs,  —  to  a  chair,  to  the  chairs,  —  to  the  vil- 
lage, to  the  villages,  —  the  ship  (Ace.),  the  ships  (Ace.),  —  the  duke 
(Ace.),  the  dukes  (Ace.),  —  to  the  book,  to  the  books,  —  of  the  leaf,  of 
the  leaves. 

Does  she  praise?  —  we  praised,  —  he  was  praising,  —are  they  prais- 
ing? —  you  are  praising,  —  were  they  praising?  —  dost  thou  praise?  —  did 
you  praise?  —  I  am  praising,  —  were  we  praising  ?—  did  I  praise?  —  you 
are  praising,  —  were  they  praising?—  do  you  praise?  —  they  praise. 

2.  $ie  S3aume  f>a6en  flatter.      SSer  fafi1  ben  ®ontg?     $cr 
SUJatrofe  fa!)1  bte  ©eget  ber  ©djiffe.     3d)  {,atte  stoet2  £mte.     28o 
ftnb  bte  gebern  unb  bte  SSIeiftifte?    2)er  2lgent  faitfte3  bie  $ferbe 
beg  ^farrerg.    §aben  @ie  bte  ©tiifile?    Sic  Xpre  beg  fioufeS  ift 
gefdjloffen.4      S)tc  gtoei2  ©djloffet  gepren5  bent  §er5og(e).      sJSer 

at  bie  Stneate  ber  $naben?    ©in  ^unbe  beg  Dnfelg  faufte3  einen 
©inb  bie  SSotpngc  gritn6?     ©a^en  ©ie7  bie  2)dc^er  ber 


Are  the  monarchs  kings  or  dukes?  The  presents  belong5  to  the 
teacher's  pupils.  Has  the  woman  a  curtain  ?  Have  you  the  glasses? 
Who  saw1  the  advocate's  carriage  and  horses?(*)  Two2  villages  belong5 
to  the  manufacturer.  "Who  bought3  the  coats?  The  duchies  belong5  to 
the  dukes.  Are  the  windows  of  the  room  shut4?  Where  are  the  boy's 
books?  Did  you  see7  the  roof  of  a  castle  ?  I  bought3  a  pencil,  a  pen 
and  a  ruler.  The  leaves  of  the  trees  are  green.6  The  aunt  bought3  a 
table  and  two2  chairs. 

(*)  The  article  if  standing  with  nouns  of  different  gender  and  number  must  always 
be  repeated  in  German. 

1  faf),  saw    2  jttm,  two    3  faufte,  bought    4  gefdjtoffettx  shut    5  ge!j5ren,  belong 
6  griilt,  green    7  fafjen  Sie,  did  you  see? 


(jrammar 


34 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  What  terminations  do  the  masculine  and  neuter  nouns,  not  be- 
longing to  the  second  or  third  declension,  take  in  the  singular  and 
plural  ? 

2.  If  any  of  these  nouns  contain  one  of  the  vowels  a,  o,  u,  CM,  what 
is  done  with  these  vowels  ? 

8.  If  such  a  vowel  occur  in  a  noun  of  more  than  one  syllable,  when 
are  these  vowels  to  be  modified  only  ? 

4.  Do  neuter  nouns,  which  modify  in  the  plural,  take  the  same  termin- 
ation as  those  neuters  which  do  not  modify*  If  not,  what  termin- 
ation, do  they  take? 

5  Do  foreign  nouns,  which  have  the  accent  on  the  last  syllable,  also 
modify? 

6.  With  what  nouns  may  the  e  in  the  Genitive  and  Dative  singular 
termination  be  omitted? 

7.  When  must  the  full  Genitive  termination  es  be  used? 

8.  Are  the  double  vowels  aa  and  oo  generally  modified  ? 

9.  How  are  &  or  §  of  nouns  ending  in  §  or  is  changed,  when  the  noun 
takes  a  termination  ? 

1  ")„  How  many  forms  are  there  to  render  the  Present  and  the  Imperfect 
in  German? 

11.  What  is  the  literal  English  translation  from  the  German  of  the  1st 
person  singular  of  the  Present  and  Imperfect  of  to  praise,  used  af- 
firmatively and.  interrogatively? 

Conversation. 


Wliere  are  the  books  and  the  news- 
papers ? 

Here  (hier)  is  a  book  and  a  news- 
paper. 

Have  the  trees  (any)  leaves? 

Yes,  they  have  (leaves). 

Are  the  leaves  green  (griln)  t 

Yes,  they  are  (green). 

Have  you  a  pencil? 

Yes,  I  have  a  pencil  and  a  ruler. 

Is  the  manufacturer's  village  large 

(gross). 

No,  it  is  small  (Hein.) 
Have  you  the  coat  and  the  brush  ? 
I  have  only  the  coat. 
Where  is  the  uncle's  hat? 
Here     are    the     uncle's  and  the 

agent's  hats. 

Did  the  uncle  buy  (kaufte)  a  table? 
No,  the  aunt  bought  a  table  and 

two  (zwei)  chairs. 
Did  you  see  (sahen)  the  ships? 
No,  I  saw  (sa.li)  only  the  ships' 

sailors. 


SSo   fhtb   Me   SBudjer   unb   bit 

gettungen? 
$ter   ift    em    S3udj   unb   eine 

Betrung. 

£oben  bie  93cmme  flatter? 
Sa,  fie  baben  flatter. 
Sinb  bie  flatter  grim? 

§,  fie  ftnb  grim. 
Ben  ©te  etnen  93leifttft? 
,  id)  fcabe  einen  23Ietfttft  unb 
etn  Sineat. 
3ft  bag  S)orf    be3    gabrtfanten 

grofc? 
Stein,  e§  ift  Hein.         fSurfte? 

§iben  ©te   ben   SRocf  unb  bie 
ft  Ijabe  nur  ben  SUodE. 
o  ift  ber  £ut  beg  Dnfefe  ? 
£ier  ftnb  bie  £iite  be$  DnfelS 

unb  be§  STgenten. 
ftaufte  ber  Dnfd  einen  Zffflfl 
9Mn,   bie   Xante   foufte  einen 

Sifd)  unb  gtoet  6tii6Ie. 
©o^en  @te  bie  ©djiffe? 
SRein,  id)  fa^  nur  bie  2ftatrofen 
ber 


35 

C£*mt0c  ttn  4. 


9Ber  tft  cm  $err  in  Gmgfanb? 

(Who      .         .   gentleman     .       England?) 


Berttjjmte  ^ttofo^  «n^   83u(fjbruifer  SBenjcmthr 

celebrated     philosopher         .  printer 

tn  nwr  nacij  ©uropa  gefommen;  er  Ijatte  einen  -fteger 

to         Europe  come  .  ..  .         negro. 

<al3  Wiener,    granflin  tear  Befanntftcf)  fefjr  ttrifsBegterig  unb 

as        servant  .          as  is  known      very       inquisitive1 

retfte   better  in    gan^    ©ngtanb    umljer,  um  bie    ^dbrifen 

travelled  therefore  in(the)whole-          —  -  about     in  order     .    manufactories 

unb    cmbere    9Jler!lt)iirbig!eiten    511    fe^en.       @'ctn    SDtener 

other  curiosities  to         see  his          servant 

fieglettete  i^n  tntmer  unb  faf)    be^tjalb   au$     alle§.     @ie 

accompanied    him      always       and     saw       therefore       also  all 

famen  enblirf)   nai^   Sonbon  jurtid.     S)en  folgenben  ^ag 

came       at  last         to  —  back  .  following         day 

fagte  ffranftin  §n  bem  9^eger:   -iftun  $a\t  bu  ganj  (Snglanb 

said  to      the        negro         now          .         .(the)whole(of)    — 

gefefjen.    2Bie  gefaftt  e§  btr  benn?  —  3)er  Sieger   fd^iitteltc 

seen  how      pleases      .  tothee    then  .          negro  shook 

ben  ®opf  unb  fagte:  —  (Smgtanb  tft  etn  fefjr  fonberBare§  Sanb. 

head       .         said  .       .      very          strange          countrj 

OTe£  orBeitet  §ter.    ®ag  SSaffer  unb  ber  9^auc^   arBetten. 

all          works        here  .  water          .  .       smoke  work 

3)ie  $ferbe,  bie  Drfjfen  unb  fogar  bie  §unbe  arbeiten.  ®te 

oxen  .         even        .         dogs          work 

banner,    bie   Bremen   unb   bie   ®inber   arBeitett.      5ltteg 

men  .  .  children          work  all 

arbettet,  bocij  etne8  arBettet  nid^t.     S)a§   @djtoetn  arBettet 

works         yet         one         works         not  .  pig  works 

ntdjt.     ®a§   @c^n)ein  t^ut  uid§t§   afe   cffcn,  trtnfen   unb 

not  .  pig  does     nothing     than        eat          drink 

fdjlafen.    2)a§  ©c^mein  aHcin  tft  ein  §etr  in  ©ngtanb. 

sleep  .  pig  alone       .        .  gentleman  in  — 


36 

Fifth  Lesson.  gftnftc  Seftioiu 

Nouns  with  Prepositions. 

The  case  of  a  Noun  or  any  declinable  word  is  governed 
by  the  ^receding  preposition,  verb  etc.,  and  until  a  complete 
explanation  is  given,  we  shall  always  indicate  the  case  re- 
quired by  such  a  word. 

Prepositions  being  of  frequent  occurrence,  we  give  already 
in  this  lesson  the  most  usual  ones,  indicating  the  case  they 
govern.  They  have  to  be  learnt  by  heart,  and  the  student 
should  well  note  which  case  they  require. 

In  the  following  lessons  other  usual  prepositions  are  given 
in  the  vocabulary,  the  case  they  govern  being  indicated;  a 
complete  list  will  be  found  in  the  Chapter  on  prepositions. 

Prepositions  governing  the  Genitive  are: 

ttwf)rcni>,  during;  lucflen,  on  account  of;  as, 
rofib,renb  be§  ©etoitterf,  during  the  thunderstorm 
Prepositions  governing  the  Dative  are: 
au£,  out  of;  mit,  with;  Don,  from;  as, 

mit  bem  ®naben,  with  the  boy 
Pr  "positions  governing  the  Accusative  are: 
'ford),  through;  fur,  for;  ofytc,  without;  as, 

oljne  ben  ^naben,  without  the  boy 

The  translation  of  the  above  prepositions  give  the  literal  and 
usual  meanings,  yet  they  are  frequently  translated  otherwise. — Until 
rules  are  given  we  indicate  whenever  a  different  translation  is  required, 
and  students  should  carefully  commit  such  variations  to  memory. 

The  verbs  ijaben,  fetn,  lofcen. 

Past  Participle. 
jjeljabt,  had  getoefen,  been  gelobt,  praised 

@ein,  to  be. 
Perfect.  Pluperfect. 


idj  bin  geroefen,(*)  I  have  been 
bu  bift  geroefen,  thou  hast  been 
cr  ift  geroefen,  he  has  been 
tetr  ftnb  getoefen,  we  have  been 


fie  fmb  geroefen,  they  have  been 


idj  roar  getoefen,  I  had  been 
bu  ttmrft  geroefen,  thou  hadst  been 
er  roar  geroefen,  he  had  been 
roir  roaren  geroefen,  we  had  been 
Sie  roaren  geroefen,    \        h   , . 
or  ib,r  roaret  geroefen,  /you  had  beett 
fie  ttmren  geroefen,  they  had  been 


£abett,  to  have. 

\i)  Ijabe  gefjabt(*),  I  have  had  I   \3)  ^otte  ge^abt,  I  had  had 

etc.  etc.  etc.  etc. 

iio&en,  to  praise. 
id)  Ijabe  gelobK*),  I  have  praised         I   i(^  ^atte  gelobt,  I  had  praised 

etc.  etc.  I  etc.  etc. 

NOTE. — In  a  sentence  the  past  participle  is  always  put  last;  as, 
3)er  fieljrer  Ijat  ben  Snaben  gclobt,  the  teacher  has  praised  the 


boy. 


(*)  The  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  tenses  of  the  verb  fein  are  formed  with 
fetn  (to  be),  and  those  of  the  verbs  Ijaben  and  loben  are  formed  with 
jjaben  (to  have)  as  in  English. 


37 


already,  fdjon  |  the  garden,  ber  ©artcn    .  the  (railway)  station,  bcr 

bad,  fdjledjt  Plurl:  bie  ©arten  I         S3af)nf)of 


the  bread,  bag  93rob 
„   butter,  bie  93uttev 
•cold,  fait 
fine,  nice,  fdjon 
the  gardener,  ber  ©artner 


good,  gut  r@tunbej    „     thunderstorm,     baS 

the    lesson    (hour),    bie    very,  feljr          [©etoitter 
,.   letter,  ber  SBrief        |  warm,  iuarm 
„   paper,  ba§  papier        the  weather,  bag  SBetter 
„   rain,  ber  SRegen         I    „  yard,  ber  £of 


Exercise  No.  5. 

1.  During  the  rain, — on  account  of  a  thunderstorm, — during  the 
lesson, — on  account  of  the  trees, — out  of  a  yard, — with  the  young-lady, 
— from  a  door, — with  the  teachers  (f.), — through  the  station, — for  a 
.girl, — without  a  woman, — through  the  gardens, — without  the  gardener, 
— with  the  teachers, — through  a  yard, — out  of  a  castle, — for  the  aunt. 
— on  account  of  the  weather, — with  a  letter, — out  of  the  building, — 
without  the  bread  and  butter, — for  a  nephew  of  the  photographer, — 
out  of  a  door, — with  the  papers, — from  a  king, — for  the  soldiers, — 
without  the  plates  and  forks,— with  the  watches  (or  clocks), — from  the 


Been,  —  we  have  been,  —  had  he  been?  —  had,  —  has  she  h  i?  —  you 
had  had,  —  praised,  —  they  have  praised,  —  had  I  praised?  —  have  you  been? 

—  I  have  had,  —  had  they  been?  —  we  have  praised,  —  had  it  been?  —  he 
had  had,  —  have  I  been  ?  —  thou  hast  praised,  —  have  they  had  ?  —  I  praised, 
—did  you  praise?  —  we  are  praising,  —  does  he  praise  ?  —  she  was  praising, 

—  they  praise,  —  did  I  praise? 


2.  3)ie  ®naben  gtngen1  nut  ben  Severn.  $)a§  Setter  tft  fefjr 
fdjon  wtb  toarm  getoejen.  S)ie  ©tubenten  lamen'2  toaftrenb  be£ 
®  emitters.  £aben  @te  ben  ©dpffel  geljabt?  ®ie  Sftatrofen 
tamen2  uon  ben  ©djiffen.  S5ie  Gutter  ift  fefjr  fdjledjt  gctoefcn. 
S)er  ©olbat  !am3  au§  einem  $ofe.  S5te  Kartoffeln  ftnb  frfjon  !olt. 
2)er  Soger  !am3  ohne  etnen  ^ajen.  <Stnb  bie  §iite  ber  Xante  frf)6n? 
HOSoren  bie  SSiii^er  fiir  ben  ^ronsofen  ober  fiir  ben  Diitfjen?  2)er 
£)nfel  gtng4  mtt  etnem  (Partner  biirc^  ben  ©orten.  £at  ber  Sehrer 
-ben  6$iiter  gelobt?  Sft  bag  33rob  gut  geftcjen? 

Are  the  cherries  good  or  bad  ?  The  weatheris  already  very  warm.  We 
•came2  from  the  station.  The  presents  are  for  the  parson.  The  girls 
went1  with  the  young-lady.  Has  the  weather  been  cold  or  warm  ?  The 
gardener  went4  through  the  gardens.  The  horses  came2  on  account  of 
the  thunderstorm.  The  duke  has  praised  the  soldiers.  The  advocate's 
sister  came3  out  of  the  house.  Are  the  roses  and  violets  nice  ?  The 
woman  came3  without  a  cake.  Who  has  had  the  gimlet?  The  president 
<jame3  during  the  lesson.  Have  you  had  the  glasses?  The  uncle's 
agent  came3  without  the  letters. 

I  jjingen,  went    2  famen,  came    3  fam,  came    4  giitfl,  went 


38 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  'By  what >word  is  the  -case  in  which  a  noun,  or  any  declinable  word 
stands,  governed? 

2.  What  cases  are  governed  by  the   prepositions   tualjrenb  Cdiring),  mit 
(with),  o^ne  (without),  burclj  (through),  fcegen  (on  account  of),    ou§  '(out 
of),  fur  (for),  toon  (from)? 

3.  Can  these  prepositions  always  be  translated  literally  from  the  English, 
and  what  must  be  observed,  when  another  translation  has  to  be  used  ? 

4.  With  what  verb  are  formed  the  perfect  and  pluperfect,  of  the  verb 
fcin? 

5.  With  what  verb  are  formed  the  perfect  and  pluperfect  of  the  verbs 
Safien  and  hrten? 

t>.  Where  in  a  sentence  is  the  past  participle  put  in  German? 


Conversation. 


Who  had  the  watch? 

The  Englishman's  niece  had  the 

watch. 
Was  the  picture  for  the  uncle? 

No,  it  was  for  the  aunt. 

Was  the  weather  fine? 

No,  it  was  very  cold. 

Is  the  cake  warm  ? 

No,  it  (he)  is  already  cold. 

Was  the  butter  good? 

The    butter    was  good,   but  the 

bread  was  bad. 
Did  the  woman  come  (ham)  with 

a  letter? 

Yes,  she  had  a  letter. 
Did  the  president  come  from  the 

king? 

No,  he  t»me  from  the  duke. 
Did  the  boy  go  (ging)  through 

the  house  or  through  the  yard  ? 
He  went  through  the  garden. 
Did  the  advocate  come  during  the 

rain? 

No,  he  came  during  the  thunder- 
storm. 

Had  you  the  knife? 
Yes,  I  had  it. 
Did  the  teacher  (f.)  come  out  of 

the  house  or  out  of  the  (railway) 

station  ? 
She  came  out  of  the  station. 


23er  ,fiat  bie  UJjr  gebdbt?(*) 


bte  llhr  .gebabt. 
3ft  ba§  ©emalbe  fur  ben  £nfet 

getoefen? 
9tan,  &  ift  fur  bie  Xante  ge* 

toefen. 

3ft  ba3  Better  fdjon  gewefen? 
9Zein,  e3  ift  fehr  fait  getoefen. 
3ft  ber  ®udjen  to  arm? 
9ieiit,  er  ift  fdjon  fait. 
3ft  bie  Gutter  gut  getrefen? 
^ie  Gutter  mar  gut,  aber  ba§ 

$8rob  ift  fc^Ieti)t  geroefen. 
bte  grau  rait  einem  53riefe? 


3&,  fte  fiat  einen 

Earn    ber  .^rafibent  .toon    bem 


9Jctn,  er  fam  toon  bem 
©ing  ber  $nabe  buri^ 
ober  burdj  ben  ^>of? 
®r  ging  burd)  ben  ©arten. 
Earn  ber  2(boofat  roa&reni 


er  fam  toafcrenb  bel 
fritters. 

3ie  ba§  SRcffer 
,  ic^  Ijabe  e^  gebabt 
am  bie  Sebrertn  au^  bem 
ober  auS  bem 


@ie  fam  au§  bem  93afjnfiof. 


*)  In  German  the  perfect  tense  and  imperfect  tense  are  very  often  used  indiffer- 
ently when  in  English  the  imperfect  is  used,  especially  in  conversation. 


39 

(torc!0e  flo.  5. 


(Beredjttgteit, 

(Justice.  ) 

(Sin  ©rfjmieb  in  <£pauieu  £jatte   einett  IRetfeuben  auf 

fSHrith  .  Spain  .  .  Iruwller         on 

bcr  Sanbftrage  ermovbet.     (£r   ttmrbe   angellagt    uub  511111 

'high-road          murdered  .  was  accused  .      to(the) 

Xobe    t)erurtf)ei(t.       ®ie    SSaitern    feineS    £orfe§    fjorten 

death          condemned  .          peasants          of  his  .  heard 

baton.     @ie    famen  511  bcm  9ttrf)ter   ur^)  fasten:    ,,SSir 

of  it  .  came       to         .  judge  .  said 

lommen    @ie    iim    eine    (S5nabe    gu   Bitten.       Glc    §aBcn 

come  .  for          .  favour        to         ask 

imfertt  S^mieb  gum  Xobe  bcrurt^eilt.      $Bcr  iuir  lannen 

our  smith       to(the)   death        condemned  .  .  can 

.nitfjt  o^ne  i^n  leBen.     @r  mug  uufere  5Bagen  uub  $ftu'ge 

not  .         him       live  .       must         our  carts  .         ploughs 

au^Beffern.      S55ir  Bitten  @ie  baljer,  ifyn  .itic^t  §u  .^aitgcn." 

mend  .          ask  .       therefore  him       not       to         .hang 

£>er  Smdjter  onttoortete:     „%$  fann  biefeS  9KaI  g^r  @efit^ 

judge  iinswered  .         can        this       ti:.io    your    petition 

nirfjt   Bemitligen.     2)er  (Sc^mieb  §at  cincn  SO^cufc^cn  er* 

not  grant  .  smith  .  .  man 

morbet  uub   mu^   be§^alB   ftcrBen.      SBir   miiffcn  ©ered)= 

murdered        .         must      therefore  die  .  must         justice 

ttgfeit  u'Ben."      3)ie   93auern   fatten   biefe   ^nttoort  ,ni^t 

practise  .         peasants  .  this  answer  not 

errtjartet    unb    foaren    Betroffen.      (Sie  Beratl)fc^tagten  mit 

expected  .  .  perplexed  .  deliberated 

etncmber,   gingen  bauu  §u  bem  ^Ric^ter  gurird  unb  fagtcn: 

each  other  went          then        .          .  judge         back          .  said 

,f(£ie  fjaBen  gang  SRedjt,  totr  miiffen  ©erei^tigfeit  iiBen.    SBix 

(are)      quite      right         .          must  justice         practise 

IiaBen  nun  gtoei  SKeBer  m  unferm  fleitten  3)orfe.    ©in  SBeBer 

now     two     weavers     .         our  small  .  one      weaver 

ift   genug.      §a'ngen  6ie  ben  anbern  SBeBer  auftatt  be3 

enough  hang  .  other         weaver     instead  of 

©cfjmtcbeS.     @o  toerben  it)ir  ©erec^tigleit  iiBen." 

smith  thus        shall         we  justice          practise 


40 

Sixth  Lesson.  (Sedate  Seftion. 

Nouns  with  Prepositions  (concluded). 

In  the  declensions  the  Genitive  is  indicated  by  of,  and  the  Dative 
by  to;  o/"and  to  are  not  rendered  in  German,  being  expressed  by  the 
termination  of  the  article  (Noun,  etc.);  viz:  of  the,  be§;  to  the,  bent; 
etc.  Frequently,  however,  of  and  to  have  to  be  translated  in  German 
according  to  the  following  principal  rules,  which  suffice  for  the  present. 

Of  is  expressed  by  the  Genitive  if  standing  betweeen  two  nouns, 
the  first  of  them  governing  the  second  (L  e.  if  the  first  noun  belongs  to 
the  second  noun);  as, — bie  Xfcure  be§  $<xufe§,  the  door  of  the  house 
ber  9ieffe  eine§  <J3farrer»,  the  nephew  of  a  parson 

Of  is  translated  by  Bon  (from),  with  the  dative  after,  if  no  such 
noun  precedes  it;  as, — SBir  fpradjen  bon  bent  Dnfel,  we  spoke  of  the  uncle 

To  has  to  be  translated  by  Stt  with  the  dative  after,  and  we  indicate 
it  when  it  has  to  be  rendered  by  the  Dative  without  translating  to;  as, 

tdj  gelje  511  bent  Dnfel,  I  am  going  to  the  uncle. 
a§  2Jiefier  gefjort  bent  Dnfel,  the  knife  belongs  pat.)  to  the  uncle. 

If  of&nd  to  require  a  different  translation  than  above,  we  indicate  it. 

Besides  the  prepositions  governing  the  Genitive,  Dative,  or  Accusa- 
tive, there  are  prepositions  governing  sometimes  the  Dative,  and 
sometimes  the  Accusative. 

Prepositions  governing  the  Dative  or  Accusative  are: 
fltt,  at ;  ailf,  on,  upon ;  in,  in,  into ;  itttter,  under,  below,  among. 

The  Dative  usually  follows  these  prepositions ;  but  the  Accusative 
is  used  if  the  sentence  expresses  a  movement  or  a  direction  towards  the 
object  standing  after  the  preposition,  thus  answering  to  the  question 
whither? 
Ex.  with  the  Dat.:  35er  Dnfel  ift  in  bent  ©arten,  the  uncle  is  in  the  garden. 

55er  Dnfel  gefct  in  bent  ©arten  fpajteren,  the  uncle  is  walking  in  the  garden. 

5>er  Dnfel  lag  ein  fitnb  in  bent  ©arten,  the  uncle  saw  a  child  in  the  garden. 

5Da§  83udj  liegt  auf  bent  Sifdje,  the  book  is  lying  on  the  table. 
With  the  Ace. :  Sdj  falj  in  ben  ©arten,  1  looked  (whither?)  in  the  garden. 

Segen  ®te  ba§  23ud}  auf  ben  Xifdj,  lay  the  book  (whither?)  on  the  table. 

The  dative  usually  implies  rest  or  presence  in  something,  and  is 
answering  then  to  the  question  where  f 

NOTE. — Prepositions  are  often  contracted  with  the  definite  article. 
The  most  usual  contractions  are : 

am  for  an  bcm    im  for  in  S>cm    sum  for  s«  &c»»    ^om  for  turn  bent 
an*  for  an  ba§     in*  for  in  ba§     $ur   for  511  bcr 


Future  of  the  verbs  fjabett,  fcin,  fo&ett. 

Id)  torrbe,           \  I  shall       \ 

bu  wtrft,               I     Ijo&en  thou  wilt    I  have 

rr  luirb                           or  he  will  or 

mir  icerben           >      fetn  we  shall      >  be 

Sic  locvbcn            I         or  you  will       I  or 

lor  iljr  we^et),    I     loben  you  will  praise 

fu  wcrben  they  will   / 

Note.— In  sentences  the  infinitive  of  the  Future  (fjo&cn.   fetn,   loben,   etc.) 

e  always  put  last;  as,  3cf)  rocrbe  ba§  Wdbcfjcn  lolicn,  1  shall  praise  the  girl. 


the  day,  ber  £ag 
Plur:  bie  jTage 
„  fortress  bie  geftitng 
„  ink,  bie  Sinte      ffa& 
,,  inkstand,  ba3  X 
,,  lady,  bie  25onte 

much,  Diet 


41 

many,  bide 
the  river,  bee  glufc 
still,  ttocl) 

the  wall,  trie  SBanb 
Plur:  bie  SBanbe 
,,  water,  ba§  SBaffer 
the  week,  bie  SBodje 


when,  fomtn? 

1,  etn8(t)  6,  fedjS 

2,  siuei  7,  fie&en 

3,  brei  8,  ad)t 

4,  bier  9,  neun 
j  5,  fiinf  10,  jefen 


*  • 

Exercise  No.  6. 

1.  The  ruler  of  the  boy,     of  the  queen, (*)    the  leaves  of  a  book 
ofakey,(*)    toalady,(*)      to  the  manufacturer's  customers, (*)      t«» 
{Dat.)a,giT],    atthedoor,(**)     (whither?)  at  &door,(**)     uponahouse 
(whither?)  on  the  house,     in  a  fortress,     (whither?)  into  the  fortress, 
under  the  table,      (whither?)  under  a  table,      in  a  week,      of  the 
days,(*) — (whither?)  at  the  rivers,     upon  the  chair,     (whither?)  in 
the  castle,     the  walls  of  a  room,     to  the  building,  (*)     the  ink  in  the 
inkstand, — at  the  window, — (whither?)  at  the  water, — among  the  pu- 
pils (f.),     (whither?)  on  the  trees,     below  a  duke,     to  (Dot.)  the 
gardener,     on  a  rose. 

We  shall  be,  I  shall  have,  they  will  praise,  will  he  have  ? 
thou  wilt  be,  will  you  praise?  she  will  be,  will  they  have?  I  shall 
praise,  we  shall  have,  it  will  be,  we  have  had,  have  you  been? 
do  they  praise  ?  he  was  praising,  has  she  been  ?  I  have  praised. 

2.  Spredjen  (Sie1  toon  bem  ^ofjrifanten?     Sinb   bie  £naben 
nod)  in  bem  (or  tm)  gtmmer?     Segen  (Bte2  ben  33fei[ttft  aitf  ben 
Xtjd).    SBann  roirb  ber  Dn!e(  in  ba3  (orin§)  £>au3  geljen3?    Sicgt1 
fcie  93iirfte  be§  SefyrerS  aitf  bem  ©tittle?    SBer  ftirb  ba3  ®ematbe 
en  (on)  bie  28anb  fjangen5?    §angen  @te6  bie  3tocfe  an  (on)  bie 
Satire.    @tnb  (are  there)  totele  bourne  in  bem  (or  im)    ©arten? 
Stegt4  Me  ^eitnng  unter  bem  23nd)e?    Segen  @ie2  ben  23rief  untcr 
bag   Stneat.      $n  bem  Sintenfa^   ift  (there  is)   jefyr  totet  Xinte. 
iffiann  hrirb  bie  Xante  gn  ber  (or  gnr)  ^onigin  geben3. 

Are  you  still  in  the  garden  ?  Is  the  needle  lying4  on  the  table. 
Are  [there]  many  soldiers  in  the  fortress?  I  have  had  the  Russian's 
horses.  When  will  the  president  go3  to  the  monarch  ?  Lay2  the  rulers 
on  the  table.  Do  you  speak1  of  the  thunderstorm  ?  Is  [there]  still 
much  water  in  the  dish?  There  (es)  are  many  Frenchmen  among  the 
sailors  of  the  ship.  I  shall  hang5  the  hats  on  (an)  the  window.  Lay2 
the  newspaper  and  the  paper  under  a  book.  The  boys  have  been  on 
the  'trees  in  the  yard.  When  will  the  ladies  be  in  the  room  ?  Has 
the  king  had  many  fortresses?  When  will  you  be  to  (an)  the  river? 

(t)  Cin§  if  standing  with  a  noun  is  em  and  is  declined  like  the  indefinite  article. 
(*)  0/and  to  have  to  be  translated  by  bom  and  gu,  according  to  the  given  rules. 
(**)  Put  the  accusative  after  prepositions  preceded  by  whither,  otherwise  the  Da- 
tive. 

1  fpredjen  <Sie,  do  you  speak?    2  legen  @ie,  lay    3  gefyen,  go    4  liegt,  is  lying 
5  Ijongcn,  hang    6  fjcingcit  Sic,  hang. 

German  Grammar  9* 


42 


2. 


3. 


Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  How  is  of  to  be  rendered,  if  standing  between  two  nouns,  of  which 
the  first  is  governing  the  second  ? 

How  is  of  to  be  rendered  before  a  noun  not  governed  by  another 
noun? 
How  is  to  to  be  rendered,  when  no  o^ier  translation  is  indicated? 

4.  What  prepositions  govern  sometimes  the  Dative,  and  sometimes 
the  Accusative  ? 

5.  What  case  usually  follows  these  prepositions? 

6.  But  when  must  the  Accusative  be  used  ? 

7.  To  what  question  does  the  Accusative  answer  * 

8.  What  is  usually  implied  by  the  Dative,  and  to  what  question  does 
it  answer  / 

9.  How  can  the  prepositions  an,  in,  gu,  son  be   contracted  with  the 
article  bcra? 

10.  For  what  are  the  contractions  an§,  in§,  jur  used? 

11.  What  is  the  place  of  the  infinitive  of  the  Future  tense  in  a  sentence  ? 

Conversation. 


AY  hen  wilt  thou.  go  to  the  uncle? 
I  shall  go  in  three  days. 
Are  the  boys  in  the  garden  ? 
No,  they  went  (gingen)  into  the 

yard. " 
Please  (bitte},  lay  (legen  Sie)  the 

letters  on  a  table. 
The  letters  and  the  newspapers 

are  lying  (liegcn)  on  the  table 

in  the  room. 
Are  the  hats  hanging  (hangen)  on. 

(an)  the  wall? 
No,   but  I   shall  hang  (hangen; 

the  hats  and  the  coats  on  the 

wall. 
A  paper  is  lying  (liegt)  under  the 

chair. 
Please,  lay  it  on  the  table  under 

a  ruler. 
Did  you  go  (gingen)  to  (an)  the 

river? 
Yes,  and  a  sailor  has  also  been  to 

the  river. 
Are  [there]  many  ships  on   the 

river? 

Yes,  I  saw  (sah)  eight  ships. 
When  will  you  come  (kommen)t 
We  shall  come  in  two  hours. 


SSann  ttrirft  bit  junt  Dnfel  geljen? 

§d)  toerbe  in  bret  Xagen  geijen. 
inb  bte  £naben  tnt  ©artenV 
•ftein,  fie  gingen  in  ben  §of. 

SSttte,  legen  Sie  bte  SSriefe  auf 

etnen  Xtfd). 
2)te  93riefe  iinb  bte  3ei^lllI9en 

liegen    auf    bem    5Ttfdje    tm 


£angen  bte  §iite  an  ber.  S&anb? 


aber  id)  roerbe  bte 

iinb  bte  9Rocfe  an  bie  SSanb 

Bangen. 
Sin    $apter    Itegt    unter    bent 

Stttyfe. 
SSitte,    legen    @te   e^   auf  ben 

Xifd)  unter  etn  Stneal. 
©ingen  Sie  an  ben  i$ln%t 

Sa,  unb  etn  2ftatrofe  tft  aud)  am 

fylufie  geiuefen. 
©inb    t)tele    @d)iffe    auf    bem 


,  id)  fafj  ad)t  Sd)iffe. 
nn  rt>erben  Sie  fontnten? 

merben  in  snrn  Stunbcn 
fommen. 


43 

JUttMiuj  <E*crci0e  Wo.  6. 


I.    ©in  bife  ®afef)anbler  fjatte  bie  ®etoof)nfjeit  mit  fid) 

stout      cheesemonger          .  .  habit  .      him 

fetBft  511  fpredjen.       (£r  ritt  einmal  auf  feinem  $ferbe  in 

self        .  Speak  .      rode        once  his 

bie  (Stabt  unb  Bemerfte  an  bent  SSege    einen    ®irfrf)Baum 

town          .         perceived       .          .  way  .  cherry-tree 

fcoff  fdjtmer  ®irfdjen.     (£3  geCiiftete  ttjn,   bafcon  $u  effen. 

full  of  .  .          tempted          .          of  them       .         eat 

(£r  fteflte  ftrfj  aufredjt  auf  ben  (Sattel,  nm   an   bie   Stefte 

put   himself  upright          .  .          saddle  in  order    .  .    branches 

langen  §u  frmnen.      Xer  33antn  ftanb  in  einem  btcfen 

reach         .       be  able  .  .  stood      .  .  thick 

Biifrfje  toon  Sornen  nub  35ifteln.     2)er  gitte  9}lann 

thicket        .          thorns          .          thistles  .        good         man  looked 

urn    ftdj    fjer   unb  Betounberte  bie  ®ebulb  feine§  ^Pferbe§. 

round  himself  about       .  admired  .        patience       of  hia 

3c§  ttJare   in    einer  arttgen    SSertegen^eit,    tocnn   ^emanb 

.     should  be    .  .  nice  embarassement  if  somebody 

„$#§"  rufen  unb  ic^   ^erunterfaHen    toiirbe.       (£r   fagtc 

gee  up       call          .          .  fall  down  would  .         said 

btefel  SBort  siemtic^  tout.      S)a§  $ferb  begann  ju  trafcerr, 

this        word         rather        loud  .  .  began        .         trot 

unb  unfer  9fteiter  fiel  mitten  in  bie  Xornen. 

our         rider       fell      amidst      .        .          thorns 

II.    (£in   §err   ging    tua^renb    grower   ©onnen^i^e   in 

.    gentleman   went  .  great  sun  heat 

einem  Garten  fpajteren.     @etn  Partner  fd^Itef  unter  einem 

his  .  walking  his  .  slept 

93aume.    @r  nafjerte  fid^  i^m  jornig  unb  fagte  §u  i^m: — 

.  approached  himself  him      angrily         .          said        .      him 

®erl,  bu  ftegft  ^ier,  anftatt   §u   arbetten?     S)u    tjerbienft 

fellow       .  •     liest      here      instead  of      .  work  .         deservest 

ntdjt,  bag  btd^  bie    ©onne   Befc^eint!  —   Sd^    ^aBe   mtdj 

not       that     thee        .  sun        shines  upon  .  .        myself 

be§f)alB  auc^  in  ben  ©fatten  gelegt,  anttoortete  ber  ©drtner. 

therefore      also      .        .  shade  laid          answered 


4* 

Seventh  Lesson.  ©tebte  Seftioiu 

Declension  of  Proper  Nouns. 

(Names  of  persons,  countries,  toions,  villages,  rivers,  etc.). 

•1.  Names  of  persons  are  generally  used  without  the  article, 
and  then  their  declension  consists  in  taking  §  or  '3  in  the 
Genitive ;  '§  being  preferred  with  surnames. — If  two  or  more 
names  belong  to  the  same  person  the  last  is  declined  only ;  as, 
Starts,  Charles';  ©otlje'S,  Goethe's;  ftriebricf)  ©fitter's,  Frederick 
Schiller's. 

Christian  Names  ending  in  g,  fd),  r.  or  j  add  in  the  Geni- 
tive eng,  and  feminines  ending  in  e  add  n§ ;  as, 
grransenS,  Frank's;  3ftarien3,  Mary's. 

In  the  Genitive  the  proper  name  may  either  precede  the  other  noun 
•or  stand  after ;  as, 

ftortt  $ut  or  ber  $ut  8arlS,   Charles'   hat;   ©djiHer'S  SBetfe  or 
tie  SBerfc  Settler's,  Schiller's  works 

Note. — The  Dative  and  Accusative  do  not  change;  however  there  is 
an  old  form  in  en  or  n,  which  is  sometimes  added  in  these  cases,  principally 
to  the  Christian  Names  ending  in  §,  fdj,  j,  5,  and  the  feminines  in  c. 

If  preceded  by  the  article  Names  of  Persons  do  not  change ;  as, 

ber  £ut  be§  Sari,  the  hat  of  Charles 

Rules  when  the  article  must  stand,  are  given  in  the  chapter  on 
'the  employment  of  the  article. 

2.  Names  of  places,  and  neuter  names  of  countries  are  gener- 
ally used  without  the  article ;  they  take  in  the  Genitive  an  §  or 
%  but  those  ending  in  g,  j,  g,  cannot  take  3,  and  toon  must 
be  used,  which  also  can  be  used  with  the  other  names,  instead 
of  adding  g;  as, 

bie  ©rra&en  ^Berlin's  or  bie  ©trafeen  toon  93erltn,  the  streets  of  Berlin ; 
bet  SRetdjtljum  @nglanb'§  or  ber  fReidjtljum  ton  Srtglanb,  the  riches  of 
.England; — but:  bie  (JinluoIjner  toon  SJlatnj,  the  inhabitants  of  Mayence 

If  such  a  proper  name  is  preceded  by  a  noun  indicating 
ithe  title  of  a  person,  of  must  be  translated  by  toon;  as, 

bie  Konigin  bon  (Snglanb,  the  queen  of  England 
The  other  proper  names  (not   those   of  persons),    are   used 
"with  the  article,  and  follow  the  declension  to  which  they  be- 
long, according  to  their  gender  and  termination;  as, 

bag  SSaffer  be§  5R^etne§,  the  water  of  the  Rhine;  ber  $raftbent  ber 
gdjteeij,  the  president  of  Switzerland. 

NOTE. — In  the  plural  proper  nouns  are  seldom  used,  and  then 
generally  follow  the  common  declensions. 


The  verbs  Ijafcen,  fcin,  lofcett. 

Imperative. 
Ijabe,  have  (thou)  fei,  be  (thou)  lobe,  praise  (thou) 


45 


Berlin,  SBerttn  n. 
Charles,  Start 
Elizabeth,  (Sltfafietlj 
the  emperor,  bet  ®otfer 
England,  ©nglanb  n, 
Frank,  5*0115 
Frederick,  grtebrid) 
Germany,  Seutjdjlanb  n. 
Goethe,  ©ptfje      [wotyner 
the  inhabitant,  ber  ©ia» 
London,  ilonbon  a 


I  Mary, 

I  Mayence,  SOtainj  n. 
j  the  poem,  ba§  ®ebic$t 
!    „   Rhine,  ber  9tfjein 

Schiller,  ©filler 

Scotland,  ©cfjottlanb  n. 

the  shore,  ba§  lifer 
„    street,  bie  ©trafee 

Switzerland,  bie 

the  work,  bo§  SBerl 


11,  elf 

12,  jttjotf 

13,  bieijeljir. 

14,  tJtergC^n 

15,  fiinfsefin 

16,  [etfijebn 

17,  fiebseljn 

18,  acljtseijn 

19,  neunjefin 
20, 


Exercise  No.  7. 

1.  Frederick's, — Elizabeth's, — Goethe's, — Frederick  Schiller's, — 
Frank's — Mary's — Charles'  knife, — Elizabeth's  roses, — Goethe's  works,, 
— Frank's  gimlet, — the  carriage  of  (the)  Charles, — the  poems  of  (the)i 
Schiller, — the  houses  of  London, — the  villages  of  Scotland, — the  in- 
habitants of  Paris  (Paris), — the  emperor  of  Germany, — the  king  oF 
England, — the  shores  of  the  Rhine, — the  inhabitants  of  Switzerland,, 
— Frederick's  watch, — the  buildings  of  Berlin, — Goethe's  poems, — the- 
streets  of  Mayence, — the  president  of  Switzerland, — Frank's  book, — the-- 
rivers  of  Germany, — Mary's  needles, — the  stations  of  London, — to  (an} 
the  Rhine, — for  England, — from  Charles, — without  Switzerland,— forr 
Elizabeth, — with  Germany, — through  Mayence. 

Praise! — have  (thou)l — be! — praise  (thou)\ — have! — be  (ihou)\ — 
praise! — be! — have! — you  will  have, — I  have  been, — I  shall  praise, — 
had  you  praised? — we  had  been, — he  will  be, — I  praised, — she  had  had,. 
— we  shall  have, — they  are  praising, — they  will  have, — will  she  praise?' 
— do  you  praise  ? 


2.  2Bo  ift  grtebrirf)3  £ut?  ®ort  $at  9ftarten3  Soffel  gefiabt. 
©inb  bie  ©tra&en  SSerltn^  fc^on?  2Ber  fiat  (SItfaBetp  Stueol  ge* 
^aben  @ie  @6t^  ©ebi^te  getefen1?  ^ein,  aber  ic^  I)abe.^ 
;ic^  (Sc^tlter^  SBerfe  gelefen1.  9}iarte  ^at  granjcnS  SBleiftift. 
l^)te  ^aiifcr  toon  ^5ari^  ftnb  fe^r  fc^on.  ©tnb  @ie  fcfion3  ant'  (to 
the)  9ifietn  getoejen?  SBann  ftnb  @te  in  ber  (5djft>et§  gemefenl 
(SItfabeti)  mar  bie  ®b'ntgin  toon  ©ngtanb  unb  Sftarte  bie  ^ontgtm 
toon  ©c^ottlanb^  Sft  Sriebrtc^g  Dnfel  in  Sonbon  ?  SSSer  ift  ber 
^Srciftbent  ber 


Have  you  had  Mary's  book  ?     We  have  Goethe's  works.      Are  the- 
houses  of  London  fine?     I  have  been  in  Switzerland.    "Where  is  Charles' 
pen  ?    Who  is  the  emperor  of  Germany  ?     Have  you  ever2  been  to  (an)  ai 
river  of  England  ?    Frederick  has  Frank's  brush.     Was  Mary  the  queei  i, 
of  Scotland  or  of  England?   Charles  praises  the  inhabitants  of  Mayence^ 
Have  you  read1  Schiller's  poems?     I  have  read1  of  the  shores  of  the 
Rhine.     Elizabeth's  aunt  has  been  in  Berlin.      Mayence  is  a,  fortress?. 
on  (an)  the  Rhine. 

1  oelefen.  read    2  fdjon,  ever  (already) 


46 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  How  are  the  Names  of  Persons,  used  without  the  article,  declined? 

2.  When  two  or  more  names  belong  to  the  same  person,  which  name 
is  declined  ? 

3.  What  names  take  in  the  Genitive  ens,  and  which  ns! 

4.  What  place  has  the  name  of  a  person  in  the  Genitive  if  standing 
with  another  noun  ? 

5.  Do  names  of  persons  change  in  the  Dative  and  Accusative,    and 
what  old  form  exists  for  expressing  these  cases  for  Christian  names  ? 

6.  If  an  article  precedes  such  a  name,  how  is  the  name  declined  then  ? 

7.  How  are  Names  of  Places,  and  neuter  names  of  countries  declined  ? 

8.  How  is  the  Genitive  of"  siren  names  rendered,  if  ending  in  s,  x,  z  ? 

9.  How  is  of  translated  if  such  a  name  is  preceded  by  a  noun  indi- 
cating the  title  of  a  person  ? 

10.  Are  the  other  proper  names  (not  those  of  persons)  used  with  the 
article,  and  how  are  they  declined  ? 


Conversation. 


Hast  thou  seen  (geseJien)  Charles' 
glass? 

Yes,  it  is  on  Mary's  table. 

Where  are  Gcethe's  poems  ? 

They  are  among  the  books  in 
Elizabeth's  room. 

Have  you  many  books? 

I  have  only  Frederick  Schiller's 
works. 

Have  you  been  at  (in)  Berlin  ? 

No,  but  I  shall  be  in  Paris  in  three 
weeks. 

Are  the  houses  of  London  fine? 

The  houses  of  London  and  Paris 
are  fine. 

Was  Elizabeth  the  queen  of  Scot- 
land or  of  England? 

She  was  the  queen  of  England. 

Are    the  monarchs  of  Germany 

kings  or  emperors  ? 
They  (it)  are  emperors  and  kings.   I 
Is  Mayence  a  fortress  of  Germany  I 

or  of  Switzerland?  \ 

It  is  a  fortress  in  Germany. 

Where  is  the  Rhine  ? 

It  is  a  river  of  Germany. 

Have  you  ever  (already)  been  to 

(an)  the  Rhine? 
No,  I  have  not  (nicht}  been  there 

(dortj. 


£aft  bu  SarlS  ®ta3  gefeljen? 

$a,  eg  ift  auf  9tf  orient  £ifdj. 
SSo  ftnb  8&i*'4  ©ebidjte? 
©te  ftnb  miter  ben  $Bud)ern  tit 

Glifabetp  3intnter. 
§aben  ©ie  totele  93iid)er? 
Sdj  Jjabe  mtr  griebridj  ©dn'IIer'3 

SBerfe. 

©tnb  ©te  in  Berlin  geftejen? 
92etn,    aber   id)    toerbe  in   brci 

SSodien  in  $art£  fein. 
©tnb  Me  ^mufer  fionbon'§  fdfjon? 
2>ie   £aitjer    Con  Sonbon  unb 

toon  ^art§  ftnb  frfjoit. 
2Bar  Slijabetf)  bie  Sontgtn  toon 

©d^ottlanb  ober  toon  Snglonb  ? 
@te  irar  bte  ^ontgtn  toon  ©ng- 

lanb. 
©tnb    bte    9Konard^en 

lanb'g  $6mge  ober 
&%   ftnb  ftaijer  unb 
3ft  9)?atn5  etne  geftnng 

lanb1^  ober  ber 
g§  ift  etne  Defiling  in 

lonb. 

25o  ift  ber 
@§  ift  era 
©tnb    ©te    fdjon   am 

gemefen? 
,  id)  bin  ntd)t  bort  geiuefen. 


47 

€*erd0c  Ito.  7. 


I.  (Sin  Member  fan:  nadj  Sonbon  iinb  Befucfjte 

stranger     came      to  —  .         visited         .  mad- 

tjauS  in  23ebkm.     G£r  fpradj  mit  einigen  ber   Srren   unb 

house       .  .        spoke         .  some  .        madmen 

crfjielt  Don  einent  fef)r  oerniinftige  5lnttoorten.     $)er  3>rre 

received        .  .  .  sensible  answers  .  madman 

fiifjrte  ben  SBefudjer  bitrd)  bie  Siwrorc    unb    erIISrte    tfym 

led  .  visitor  ...  .         explained  (to)him 

"bie  ^ranf^etten  after  anbern  SSdjnjtnmgen.      2)er    $err 

maladies         of  all        other  lunatics  .       gentleman 

ttmr  lifter  bie  t>erftanbigen  (Srfltirumjen  erftaunt  unb  fagte: 

.     about  (at)   .  clever  explanations      astonished        .          said 

erfld'ren  6ie  mir  nun,  iDarum  finb  6ie  benn    fn'er? 

explain  me      now  why  .  .         then 

ine§  @treite§,  jagte  ber  SSa^nfinnige. — S)a3    mu§ 

quarrel          said         .  lunatic  that        must 

em  fonberftarer  ©treit  getoefen  fetnj  toa§  tear  e£  benn?— 

strange  quarrel  .  .         what        .          .       then 

fragte   ber  33efucfjer.     ^)er   3>rre    erttJteberte : — ®ic    SBelt 

asked          .  visitor  .      madman         replied  .          world 

•jagte,  i$  toare  toft,  unb  id^  fagte,    bie    SBelt    rtare    toff. 

said         .         was      mad         .  .          said  .        world        was        mad 

$(ber  bie  SBelt  §atte  bie  @ttmmenme^ri)eit  unb  fc^ttfte  mic§ 

world         .  .  majority  of  votes  ,          sent        me 

Ijierfjer. — 

here. 


II.  ©in  ^farrer  Begegnete  einmal  etnem  fleinen,  fe^r  tt)t|igen 

met  once          .  little          .          witty 

®naBen  unb  fagte  §u  ifnn: — 6age  mir,    mein   ®inb,    too 

said        .        him  tell         me  my         child 

®ott  tft,  unb  ic§  toerbe  bir  einen  $fyfel  geBen.     5)er  ^naBe 

God        ...  .to  thee     .  .  give 

anttoortete  fdjneff:  —  ©agen    6ie   mir,  §err   $farrer,  too 

answered         quickly  tell  me         Mr. 

<$ott  nid)t  ift,  unb  id)  toerbe  %$ntn  jtoet  Ste^fel  geBen. — 

43od       not         .  to  you         .         apples        give 


48 

jSlghth  Lesson.  SIcIjte  Sefttom 

The  Determinative  Adjectives 

consist  of  demonstrative,  possessive,  interrogative  and  indefinite  numeral 
adjectives. — In  German  these  words  are  called  adjectives,  whenever  fol- 
lowed by  a  noun. 

The  Demonstrative  Adjectives. 


Sing.  Masc.      Fern.                   Nev.t. 

Plur.  of  all  Gen. 

biefet              biefe       *     biefeS  this 

biefe  these 

Jenet               jene              jene§  that 

jene  those 

ber                  bte               ba§  this 

bie  these 

joldjer             foldje           fold)e§  such 

foldje  such 

berjenige         btejenige       baSjeniae  that 
berfelbe           biefelBe         baSfcfbe 

biejemgen  those 
biefcIBen       )   the 

ber  namlidje    bie  ndmlidje  ba§  namltdje 

bie  ndmlid)en  )  same 

ber  anbere       bie  anbere     ba§  anbere 

bie  onberen  the  other 

liefer,  jener  follow  the  declension  of  the  definite  article  (page  18). 

Examples:  biefer  8noBe,  this  boy;  ba§  SJZeffer  biefe§  ®naBen,  the  knife 
of  this  boy ;  jene  ^rau  unb  biefe§  3Rabtf)en,  that  woman  and  this  girl ;  mit 
jener  gran  unb  oljne  biefeS  9ftabd)en,  with  that  woman  and  without  this  girL 

2)tefer,  biefe,  etc.,  are  generally  also  the  translation  of  the 
English  that,  whenever  that  does  not  express  opposition  to  this;  as, 
biefer  2)ifdj,  that  table;  biefe  ©tiiljle,  those  chairs 

3)er,  bie,  etc.,  are  sometimes  used  instead  of  biefer,  biefe, 
etc. — They  are  declined  exactly  like  the  definite  article,  but  have,  if  used 
as  demonstratives,  always  the  full  stress  in  pronunciation,  while  the  de- 
finite article  has  no  stress. 

igdj  lenne  ben  ©olbaten,  I  know  this  (or  that)  soldier 

©otcfier,  foldje,  etc.  are  declined  like  btefer,  btefe,  etc.  if 
not  standing  with  ein,  cine,  etc. ;  as, 

foIdjeS  93ier..  such  beer;  tntt  foldjen  SRatrofen,  with  such  sailors 

©oldjer,  folcfce,  etc.  in  the  singular  generally  are  used  with 
ein,  cine,  etc.,  which  may  stand  either  before  or  after. 

If  followed  by  ein,  fold)  only  is  used  for  all  genders  which  is  not 
declined  at  all;  as, — fold)  eine  ftonigin,  such  a  queen. 

Sin  folc&er,  berjenige,  berfelbe,  ber  namlidje,  ber  anbere 
follow  the  declension  of  adjectives  preceded  by  an  article,  and  will  be 
treated  along  with  the  demonstrative  pronouns. 

Verbs  used  with  Negations. 

In  negative  tenses  in  German  the  negation  (like  not,  nothing,  never, 

Jic.)  is  put  after  the  verb  or  after  its  auxiliary  in  compound  tenses ;  as, 

id)  Ijabe  nidjt  I  have  not     id)  lobe  nidjt,  I  do  not  praise  (or  I   am 

not  praising)      lobte   id)   md)t,    did  I  not  praise  (or  was  I  not  praising)? 

loben  @ie  md)t,  do  not  (don't)  praise!    id)  Bin  nidjt  Qetoejcn,  I  have  not  been 

id)  toerbe  nid)t  loBen,  I  shall  not  praise 

In  a  sentence  the  negation  is  generally  placed  after  the  noun  or 
pronoun  following  the  verb ;  but  before,  if  the  noun  or  pronoun  is  pre- 
ceded by  a  preposition  in  German ;  as, 

SDer  Seljrer  loBte  ben  SnaBen  nidjt,  the  teacher  did  not  praise  the  boy. 
3d)  Bin  nidjt  in  bem  <Sorten  aefeefen,  I  have  not  been  in  the  garden. 


49 
after,  nadj  (Dative)  the  (military)  officer,  tier 


the  beer,  bo§  SBier 
„  church,  bie  ®itd)e 
„  gentleman  (Mr.),  ber 
£err*  Plur:  bie£erren 

high,  fjodj 

how,  lute 

Miss,  Srroulein  n. 


, 

old,  ott  LCffeier 

poor,  arm 
rich,  reidj 

the  school,  bie  ©djule 
„   son,  ber  ©ofin 
,,   tower,  ber  SCljunn 
wine,  ber  SSein 


Mrs.,  grau  f.  ;  young,  jung 

(*)  G.  be8  ^errn    D.  bem  $errn    A.  ben  £errn 


21,  einunbjtoansig 

22, 

23, 

24, 

25,  funfitnbjttjattgig 

26,  fecfjSunbjttmnjig 

27,  fiefJenunbstDaitgtj 


29,  neununbjjnwnjtg 


Exercise  No.  8. 

1.  This  gentleman  and  that  lady, — this  beer  and  those  glasses,— 
the  teacher  of  this  boy, — a  door  of  this  church  and  a  window  of.  that 
building, — the  teacher  (f.)  of  these  girls, — with  this  spoon  or  with  that 
fork, — out  of  this  house  or  from  that  towers, — for  that  soldier  and  for 
this  woman, — through  that  village  and  through  these  streets, — that 
curtain, — the  ink  of  that  inkstand, — with  that  dish, — through  that 
room, — those  pens, — for  this(*)  student, — fromthat(*)  school, — this(*> 
book, — with  these(*)  hunters, — for  such  wine, — with  such  butter, — 
such  bread, — the  roofs  of  such  houses,— such  a  rain, — for  such  a  news- 
paper,— during  such  a  thunderstorm. 

We  have  not, — he  is  not, — they  do  not  praise, — had  I  not? — were' 
they  not? — did  she  not  praise? — you  have  not  had, — have  I  not  been? 
— I  have  not  praised, — will  they  not  have? — it  will  not  be, — we  shall 
not  praise, — are  we  not  praising? — I  was  not  praising, — you  do  not 
praise, — they  did  not  praise, — is  he  not  praising? 

2.  3)iefer  SBetn  ift  gut,  after  jene3   S3ier  tft   fcfiledjt.      3)ie 
Xljiirme  biefer  $ircfie  finb  food).    3)er  (Sofin  btefe3  ^aftrifanten  tft 
nod)  jung.    $d)  fentte1  ben  §errn  tttdjt.    8ft  biefer  Slbbofat  ntdjt 
rei^?    $aben  @ie  fcfion2  foldje  Slitter  gefiabi?      28ie  alt  ift  biefe- 
35ame?     2)te  Qrintoofiner  btefeS  'Sorfe^  finb  nid)t  arm.     Bennett 
<Ste3  grautein  ©djntibt?    2>er  Sleffe  biefer  ©ante  ift  reidj,  aber  bie 
S'Jtc^te  jeneS  |>errn  tft  arm.    SSir  famett  nid)t4  nod)   biefem  ©tu-* 
benten.  ©itib  fold^e  ^trfd^en  auf  biefem  93aitme?    ?^rau  SSfaun  ift 
bie  Xante  btefe£  DffijterS.    S23ir  finb  in  fold)  einem  Garten  getoefen. 

How  old  is  this  gentleman?  Is  the  niece  of  this  lady  still  young?' 
Do  you  know3  Mrs.  Braun  ?  Is  that  agent  rich  or  poor  ?  This  butter 
is  good,  but  that  bread  is  bad.  Those  girls  did  not  come4  after  these 
boys.  Is  Mr.  Schmidt  not  the  uncle  of  this  young-lady  ?  We  have- 
such  violets  in  this  garden.  The  towers  of  this  castle  are  not  high. 
How  many  pupils  are  in  this  school?  I  don't  know1  that(*)  Russian. 
Have  you  ever2  been  in  such  a  church?  These  gentlemen  are  officers, 
and  those  gentlemen  are  students.  Charles  has  not  had  this  letter. 

(*)  Use  ber,  bie,  etc.  instead  of  biefer,  biefe,  etc. 

1  id)  fenne  nid)t,  I  don't  know    2  fdjon,  ever  (already)    2  fennen  ©ie,  do  you 
know?    4  famen  mdjt,  did  not  conie. 


50 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  What  is  the  Nominative  and  Accusative  of  dieser  and  jener  in  the 
masculine,  what  in  the  neuter,  and  what  in  the  feminine  and 
plural  ? 

2.  What  is  the  Genitive  and  Dative  of  dieser  and  jener  in  the  mascu- 
line and  neuter,  what  in  the  feminine,  and  what  in  the  plural  ? 

3.  When  is  that  generally  translated  by  dieser? 

4.  Der,  die,  etc.  if  used  instead  of  dieser,  diese,  etc. ,  how  are  they  dis- 
tinguished from  the  definite  article  ? 

5.  When  are  solcher,  solche,  etc.  declined  like  dieser,  diese,  etc.  ? 

6.  How  can  such  a  be  rendered  in  German  ? 

7.  Soldi  in  solch  ein  is  it  declinable  ? 

8.  What  place  does  the  negation  occupy  in  a  negative  tense  in  German? 

9.  What  place  does  the  negation  occupy  in  a  sentence  in  German,  if  the 
verb  is  followed  by  a  noun  or  pronoun  ? 

10.  What  place  does  the  negation  occupy  if  the  noun  or  pronoun  is  Ac- 
ceded by  a, preposition  in  German* 


Conversation, 


Who  is  this  gentleman? 

It  is  Mr.  Schmidt. 

And  who  is  that  lady  ? 

It  is  Mrs.  Braun,  the  sister  of 
(the)  Mr.  Schmidt 

Do  you  know  (kcnnen)  that  young- 
lady? 

Yes,  it  is  Miss  Braun. 

Did  Frank  come  (kam)  with  this 
sailor? 

Xo,  he  came  with  that  soldier. 

Is  the  niece  of  that  lady  old? 
Xo,  she  is  still  very  young. 
Have  you  such  a  wine  or  such  a 

beer? 

I  have  only  such  a  beer. 
Has   Frederick  had  the    uncle's 

key? 
No,  he  has  not  had  the  key. 

Have  yon  been  in  this  garden? 

I  have  not  been  in  this  garden, 

but  in  that  yard. 
Who  is  the  teacher  of  these  boys  ? 
Mr.  Braun  is  the  teacher. 
Is  that  officer  rich? 
No,  he  is  not  rich. 


2Ser  ift  biefer  (or  fcer)  &err? 
@3  ift  $err  ©djmibt. 
ttnb  tuer  ift  jene  Some? 
(£§  ift  3frau  SBraun,  bte  ©djmefter 

be3  §erm  ©djmibt. 
ftennen    Sic    biefeg    (or    iw*) 

g-raulein. 

Sa,  c»  ift  fyroulein  93raun. 
Sam  grans  mi*  biefem  Stfatrofen? 

•Kent,  er  fam  mtt  jcnem   ©ot* 

baten. 

3ft  bie  9ftd)te  jener  £ame  alt? 
9Mn,  fie  ift  nod)  fefjr  Jung. 
&aben    @ie    foldjen   Rein  obcr 
33ter? 
nur 


ben 

DnfclS  gebabt? 

ein,  er  hat  ben  ©djliiffel  nid)t 

getjabt. 
©inb    ©te    in    biefem    ©arten 

getnefen? 
Sd?  bin  nid]t  in  biefem  ©arten 

getvefen,  abcr  in  jenem 
25er  ift  ber  Scorer  biefer  ^no 
feerr  SBraun  ift  ber  Se&rer. 
Sft  btcier  Cfpsier  reic^? 
9iein,  er  ift  nidjt  reid). 


51 

JtcaMttg  €*misc  Ito.  8. 

I.  (Sin  2ftatrofe  Begegnete  fcor  feiner  @HnfdOiffnng  nacfy 

met         before      his  embarkation         to 

3nbten  einem  alien  £errn.    liefer  Ijatte  bie  gfamilie  bee 

India  .  old  .  ...  family 

Sftatrofen  gut  gefannt     @r  fragte  ifyn: — 28ie  fb'nnen  (3ie 

well        knowr.  .        asked     him  .  can 

toagen,  cmf  ba§  2fteer  §n  ge^en?     3^r    23ater   ftarb    auf 

venture          .  sea  go  your       father         died 

etnem  S&racf,  ebenfo  3§r  ©ro§t)ater  unb  Urgrogbater,     (Sie 

wreck     the  same    your     grand-father       .     great  grand-father 

•finb  fcfyr  fitfjn. — §err  9£v — autmortete  ber  SJlatrofe, — >abcr 

bold  .          .  answered 

fagen  @ie  mir,   tt)0  ftarb    benn    3$r    SSater? — ^5er    §err 

tell  me          .         died        then       your        father 

ertoieberte : — (£r  ftarB  fe^r  fanft  in  f etnem  23ett,  ebenfo  atte 

replied  .        died         .        gently     .          his  bed     the  same     all 

meine  SSorfa^ren. — @ir  §err    36. ! — fagte    ber    Sftatrof e,  — 

my         fore-fathers          why         .  .  said 

3$re  SSorfafjren  ftarben  atte  im  93ett?     SSie   fonnen    8ie 

your        fore-fathers          died         all         .         bed  .  can 

bann  toagen,  in§  SSett  §n  geijen? — 

then       venture        .         bed        .          go 

II.  (£tn  Sorb  ftmr  fe§r  retcf).  5(Ber  er  U)ar  auc^  etn  grower 

—          .  .  ...       also       .        great 

33erfcf)nienber.     2n    toenigen   ^afyun  !§atte  er  fein  f)afl)e3 

spendthrift  .  (a)  few  years  .          .       his          half 

SSermogen  fcerfcfjrtjenbet.     (Siner  t)on  fetnen  Srennben  fprac^ 

fortune  squandered  .  .  his  friends         spoke 

eine£  £age§  mit  i^m  bariiBer  nnb  jetgte  i^tn  bie  ^olgen. 

day  .        him       about  it          .       showed    him        .  consequences 

@te   IjaBen    9iecf)t,  fagte  ber  Sorb.     (££  fte^t  fd^Itmm  nttt 

right         said         .          —  .      stands          bad 

•mtr.     3^  fiirc^te,  ic^  toerbe  al8  Settler  ftcrBen.     ®a^  ift 

me  .  fear  .  .  as        beggar  die 

nicfjt  ba§  (Sdjlimtnfte,  fagte  fein  $rennb.     Slber  @ie  tuerbcit 

worst  said      his        friend 

al§  Pettier  teBen.     3)a§  ift  noc^  t)iel  f^Hntmer. 

.    beggar         live  .          .          .       much          worse 


Ninth  Lesson.  SKcimte  Scltion. 

The  Possessive  Adjectives. 

Sing.    Masc.        Fern.  Neut.  Plur.  of  all  Gen. 


mein         meine 

mein 

meine  my 

betn           beine 

bein 

beine   thy 

fein           feine 

fein 

feine    his  (its) 

ifjr            tfjre 

tfir 

tfjre     her  (its) 

unfer         unferc 

unfer 

unfere  our 

or  (euer)    (euere) 

(euer) 

(Seuete)}y°ur 

tf)r             ifjre 

i(,r 

ifjre     their 

The  possessive  adjectives  in  the  singular  are  declined  like 
the  indefinite  article,  and  in  the  plural  like  the  definite  article 
(vide  :  page  18)  ;  but  observe,  in  the  declensions  of  unfer  and 
euer,  that  the  terminations  are  added  to  er  and  not  instead  of 
er;  as, 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut.  Plur. 

N.  unfer  imfer*e  unfer  unfcr-e 

G.  unfer*e3  unfer*er  unfer*e3  iinfer-er 

D.  unfer=em  iinjer-er  «unfer*em  unfer*en 

A.  un[er>en  unjer*e  itnfer  unjer^e 

Examples:  mein  9$udj  unb  betne  ^rebet;  my  book  and  thy  pen  ber  ©arten 
iinfere»  Dnfel§;  our  uncle's  garden  mtt  ^^ren  ^Jferben;  with  your 
horses. 

Notes:  1.—  unfer  and  euer  may  elide  the  e  before  or  after  r,  if  a 
termination  is  added  ;  as,—  unfrem  or  unferm,  eure§  or  euer§,  etc. 

2.—  euer  (your)  is  the  plural  form  of  bein  (thy),  and  is  only  used  in 
familiar  conversation  with  relations,  friends,  and  children  (also  with  animals). 
The  ordinary  form  is  Sfjr  (your),  which  is  used  for  singular  and  plural.  In 
order  to  distinguish  it  from  iljr  (their)  it  is  written  with  a  capital  %. 


Remarks  on  Regular  Verbs. 

Most  German  verbs  end  in  en,  and  the  regular  verbs  are 
conjugated  like  loben ;  i.  e.  they  take  off  en,  substituting  instead 
the  same  termination  as  loben;  as, 

loBen,  to  praise;  foufen,  to  buy; 

id)  lobe,  id)  faufe,  id)  lobte,  id)  loiifte;  geloBt,  gefauft 

In  the  Past  Participle  of  verbs  beginning  with  an  unac- 
cented prefix  like  be,  ge,  er,  fcer,  ser,  emp,  ent,  no  ge  is  pre- 
fixed ;  as, — uerlaiifen,  to  sell ;  terf auft,  sold 

Note.— bit  (thou)  and  iljr  (you)  are  used  with  the  same  persons  as 
bein  (thy)  and  euer  (your),  and  with  <3ie  (your)  and  fie  (they)  the  same  rule 
must  be  observed  as  with  3^r  (your)  and  iljr  (their). 


(*)  In  this  part  of  our  Grammar  in  treating  of  the  verbs,  we  limit  ourselves  to  give 
only  those  tenses  and  rules  which  are  important  in  the  beginning,  as  the 
verbs  will  be  treated  fully  later  on. 


53 

the  father,  ber  SSater 

Plur:  Me  SSater 
to  let,  betmietljen  [iuo^nen 
to  live,  to  dwell,  to  reside, 
to  live,  to  be  alive,  leBen 
the  mother,  bie  SRuttet 

Plur:  bie  gutter 
no,  not  any,  fein(*) 

Plur:  bie  Xodjter       '  the  parents,  bie  (SItern 
(*)  fein  is  declined  like  mein,  etc.  (see  p.  18). 


the  brother,  ber  SBruber 

Plur:  bie  SSruber 
to  buy,  faufen 
the  child,  bos  ®inb 
Plur :  bie  ®tnber 
to  cost,  foften 
to  expect,  ertuarten 
the  daughter,  bie  Softer 


to  sell,  berfaufen 
since,  feit  (Dative) 
what,  tua§? 

30,  breifeig 

31,  einunbbreifjifj 

40,  tnerjig 

41,  einunbtrierjig 
50,  funfjig 

60, 


Exercise  No.  9. 

1.  My  father, — thy  mother, — his  child,— her  daughters,— our  un- 
cle's customers,  —  your  sister's  plate  ,  —  the  walls  of  your  (2nd  form) 
room, — the  presents  of  their  parents, — with  my  brother, — from  thy 
aunt, — out  of  his  castle, — with  her  children, —  for  our  parson, — with- 
out your  niece, — through  their  village, — for  our  mothers, — with  his 
daughter, — without  your  nephew, — their  brothers, — the  carriage  of  my 
teacher, — the  sails  of  his  ships, — with  no  needle, — from  your  pupils 
<(/.), — not  any  horses, — the  roof  of  my  house. 

We  live  ( divell), — I  am  buying,— it  costs, (*)— do  they  live  (are 
alive)? — do  you  expect? — art  thou  selling? — I  sold, — did  we  let?(*) — 
was  he  living  (dwelling} I— did  they  cost(*)? — did  she  sell? — you 
•bought,  — didst  thou  live  (wast  alive)  ? — we  have  been  living  (dwelling), 
— it  had  cost(*), — they  are  let(*),— have  you  expected(*),— I  shall  buy, 
— we  shall  expect, — will  he  dwell? — you  were  not  living  ( alive j, — sell! 
— do  not  expect! — it  is  not  let(*), — they  do  not  reside. 

2.  2£a§  foften  Spre  SSIctfttftc?  Seben  feme  ©Item  nocfi? 
Sett  roann  erroarten  bie  ®tnber  tfjren  Stater?  ©ett  enter  28od)e. 
3toet  Don  gfiren  ©emalben  ftangen1  an  (on)  ber  SBanb  metneS 
Bimnter^.  2)tefer  Dffigier  tootjnt  ntd)t  in  unferm  £mufe. 
SBruber  unb  metne  9ftutter(t)  gingen'J  in  euren  ©arten. 
Xod)ter  fetner  Xante  ftnb  in  Sonbon.  ^>aft  bu  !ein  Copter? 
<Sie  S^ren  ^ut  bcrfauft?  §at  ber  Slgent  btefe  ^ferbe  fiir  ben 
^er^og  gefonft1?  S)er  ^p&otograpf)  fiat  fein  |>au£>  nici^t  oermietfiet. 

Has  your  father  sold  his  chairs  ?  I  am  expecting  my  advocate  at 
(auf)  the  station.  We  went1  into  their  yard.  What  have  you  bought  in 
Switzerland?  Our  house  has  been  let  (is  let)  three  days b  since51.  There 
(es)  are  many  violets  in  our  garden.  The  girls  went2  with  their 
brothers.  Have  you  not  expected  your  mother  ?  Who  is  residing  in 
our  king's  castle?  Have  these  trees  not  any  leaves?  Her  ink- 
stand is  on  a  table  in  my  room.  Their  aunt  has  not  any  cake.  Thy 
father's  and  mother's  (t)  watches  are  hanging1  on  (an)  the  wall  of 
their  room.  How  many  children  x\as  his  sister  ?  How  much  did  your 
brush  cost? 

(*(  Verbs  having  a  t  or  b  before  en,  insert  an  e  before  adding  t  or  ft. 

(t)  Possessive  adjectives  or  any  other  determinative  adjective  must  be  repeated 

before  every  noun,  if  of  different  gender  or  number. 
1  Ijangen,  are  hanging    2  gtngen,  -went 


54 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  What  is  the  Nominative  and  Accusative  of  mein,  dein,  sein,  unser+ 
euer,  Ihr,  ihr  in  the  masculine,  what  in  the  neuter,  and  what  in 
the  feminine  and  plural? 

2.  What  is  the  Genitive  and  Dative  of  these  words  in  the  masculine 
and  neuter,  what  in  the  feminine,  and  what  in  the  plural  ? 

3.  What  letter  may  unser  and  euer  elide,  when  adding  a  termination 

4.  Of  what  word  is  euer  the  plural  form,  and  only  when  is  it  ussd? 

5.  What  is  the  ordinary  form,  for  rendering  your  in  the  singular  or 
plural?     How  must  it  be  written,  and  why? 

6.  According  to  what  verb  are  regular  verbs  conjugated,  and  how  are 
the  terminations  added? 

7.  What  are  the  terminations  of  a  regular  verb  in  the  present  indi- 
cative, and  what  are  those  in  the  imperfect  ? 

8.  How  is  the  past  participle  formed  ? 

9.  When  is  ge  prefixed  in  forming  the  past  participle  ? 
10.  What  are  the  terminations  of  the  imperative? 


Conversation. 


Are  you  expecting  your  father  at 

(auf)  the  station? 
No,  I  am  expecting  my  mother. 
Whom  (wen)  did  you  expect  in 

(auf)tliQ  street? 
I    was    expecting    my    teacher's 

nephew. 
How    many    brothers    has  your 

teacher  ff.Jt 
She  has  four  brothers. 
How    many    children    has     our 

agent's  aunt? 
She  has  five ;  two  sons  and  three 

daughters. 
Is  your  advocate's  sister  living  in 

this  house  ? 
No,  but  his  niece  is  living  there 

(da). 
Since  when  has  this  building  been 

let  (islet)! 
Six  weeks  since. 
Are  the  father  and  mother  of  this 

boy  still  living? 
Yes,  his  parents  are  still  alive. 
What  have  you  bought  in   our 

village? 
I  have  bought  [some]  bread  and 

butter. 


©rroarten  ©te  $firen  SSater  auf 

bein  33al)nhof? 

•ftetn,  id)  ermayte  ntetne  Sautter. 
SSen  rjaben  ©te  anf  ber  ©trajje 

erroartet? 
Sdj  ermartete  ben  -fteffen  metne3 

SefirerS. 
2Bie  tnele  23riiber  fiat  ^fire  £e^ 

rerin? 

©te  fi.at  mer  [23riiber]. 
23ie  oiele  8inber  fjat  bie  Xante 

unjre£  9lgenien? 
©te  f>at  fiinf;  grtjet  ©6fi.ne  unb 

bret  Xpdjter. 
25obnt  bie  ©cfinjejiter  S^r^  2lb» 

bofaten  in  btefent  |>aufe? 
S'Jetn,  aber  feme   s^tc|te   rcofint 

ba. 
©eit   roann   tft  biefe3  ©ebaube 

bernttet^et? 
©ett  fed)§  28odjen. 
Seben  ber  Skater  unb  bie  Sftui* 

ter  btcjey  ^naben  noc&? 
^a,  feme  ©Item  leben  nod). 
9   fiaben    ©te    in    unferem 

Sorfe  gefauft? 

cf)  ^abe  SBrob  unb  Gutter  ge- 

fauft. 


55 

ReaMtuj  (Erem0e  Ho.  9. 

(Sin  ^aufiret  giug  einmal  burrf)  duett  SBalb.    ®ie  §i|e 

pedlar         went        once  .  .          forest  .        heat 

tuar  unertrdgltdj,  unb  ber  Sftanu  Befrftfojs  511  ru,!)en»     ($r 

unbearable  .  .          man         resolved        .          rest 

(egte  fid)  unter  eiuen  93cmut  unb  uafjm  eine  §au6e  au3  fetuem 

laid  himself      .  ...         took        .  cap 

®aften.    S)ie  §au6e  fe|te   er   cmf   ben   ®opf,   fcfjlofj   ben 

box  .  cap          put         .         .  .          head  shut 

®aften  unb  fcfylief.     9113  er  ttadj  etutgen  Stmtben  erttmdjte, 

box  .          slept          when      .         .  a  few  .  aweok 

fcmb  er  ben  ®aftett  §u  feiner  Uefcerrafdjung  offen,  uub  aHe 

found     .         .  box         .  .  surprise  open         .        all 

|jau6eit  toaren  fcerfcfyftmnben. — ©iittger  §tmmeU  rief  er,  uub 

caps  .  disappeared  kind          heaven       cried     . 

Hicfte   aufttmrtS.      Xa  fa^  er  aHe  5Iefte  be§  S3aume§  mit 

looked          upwards  there    saw     .        all  branches     . 

Slffett  Befe|tr  uub  jeber  5lffe  f)atte  etue  §aube  auf  bem  £o))fe. 

monkeys  occupied  .        each  monkey      .       .    .  cap          .       •  .          head 

S)er   §aufirer    it)u§te   lauge   nicfyt,    \va$    er   t^un    foltte. 

pedlar  knew          long  .  what        .          do          should 

3ute|t  fagte   er  §u  ftd§ :  —  S)te  5lffen  ^afteu  gefe^en,  hrie 

at  last         said         .       .     himself  .      monkeys        .  seen 

itf)  tneiue  §aube  auffe^te,   uub    e§    ebenfo    gemac^t.      %dy 

cap  put  on  .          .      the  same          made 

nritt  tuetue  §auBe  luieber  in  ben  ^aften  tegeu,  fie  merbeu 

cap          again         .         .  box  lay 

bann  trieHeid)t    ba^felbe  t^un.      @r  er^ob  fid),  italjin  bio 

then          perhaps  the  same         do  .  rose  took 

§aube  tout  ^o^fe,  fc^u)en!te  fie  iu  ber  Suft,  legte  fie   in 

cap  .  head  swang          ...  air          laid 

ben  ®afteu,  unb  toerfcarg  fi<$   ^titter   eiuent    SBufc^e.       Xic 

box  .  hid       himself  behind  .  bush 

$ffen  tijaten  h)ie  er  tjerutut^et  Ijatte.       <Sie  ftiegeu  fofort 

monkeys      did  .         .        presumed  .  .      descended  directly 

Don  bem  SBaume,  fd)toeu!ten  bie  §au6en  in  ber  Sitft   uub 

swang  .  caps  .        air 

tegten  fie  bamt,  eiuer  uac^  bem  aubern,  in  ben  ®aften. 

laid  then  .  other         .         .  box 


66 

'Tenth  Lesson.  ute  Section. 


The  Interrogative  Adjectives. 

Sing.  Masc.          Fern.  y>:u*.  Plur.  oj  all  Gen. 

lueldjer  toeld)_e  toeldjeS  tretcfie  which? 

iDQ5  fiir  cin     ttm*  fiir  eine    tt»aS  fiir  cin    teas'  fur  what  (kind  of)? 
SBeldjer?  roelcfje?  etc.  are  declined  like  btefer  (vide  :  page  18) 

Examples:  toeldjer  &ut.  which  hat'  toelclje  2t)ure,  which  door?  tt>eIcf)eS 
fycnfter,  which  window?  fur  roeldjen  Snoben,  for  which  boy?  gu  Ju  either 
Some,  to  which  lady?  ba§  SBudj  weldje*  9Mbd;en§,  the  book  of  which 
girl? 

23a§  fiir  ein  ?  tea3  fiir  eine  ?  etc.  are  only  used  before  nouns 
in  the  singular.  —  In  the  declension  ttmS  fiir  does  not  change 
ein  alone  being  inflected,  and  declined  like  the  indefinite  article  ;  as, 

ttm§  fiir  ein  Xticf),  what  table? 

mit  ioa»  fiir  etnem  golbaten,  with  what  soldier? 

SBaS  fiir?  is  used  before  nouns  in  the  plural,  and  is  un- 
declinable; as, 

mit  tool  fut  Solbaten,  with  what  soldiers? 

2Ba3  fiir?  (without  ein)  is  further  used  in  the  singular  be- 
fore mimes  of  materials;  as, 

tua§  fur  Sinte,   what  ink?     mit  toa§  fiir  SSetn,   with  what  wine? 
in  roa»  fiir  SBrob,  in  what  bread? 

The  Indefinite  Numeral  Adjectives  will  be  treated 
»loBg  with  the  Numerals. 


The  Auxiliary  Verbs  of  Mood. 
SttiitTett,  (must)  to  be  obliged. 

Present  Indicative.  Imperfect. 

i^  rnufj,  I  must  (I  am  obliged,  etc.)  !    it^  mufete,  I  was  obliged 

bit  must,  thou  must  j    bu  mufjteft,  thou  wast  obliged 

er  mus,  he  must  er  muBtc,  he  was  obliged 

loir  mftffen,  we  must  roir  mu|ten,  we  were  obliged 

6ie  muffen  or  t^r  mult  you  must  gte  mufiten  or  ifyr  mufetct,  you  were 

fte  mufjen,  they  must  '    fte  muBten,  they  were  obliged  [obliged 

&imncn,  (can)  to  be  able, 
fann,  I  can  (I  am  able,  etc.)          i    id)  fonntc,  I  could  (I  was  able,  etc.) 


bu  fannft,  thou  canst 

er  fann,  he  can 

toit  fonnen,  we  can 

6ie  !6nnen  or  i^r  lonnt,  you  can 

fie  fonnen,  they  can 


bu  fonnteft,  thou  couldst 

er  fonnte,  he  could 

tuir  fonnten,  we  could 

©ie  fonnten  or  tl)r  fonntet,  you  could 

fie  fonnten,  they  could 


NOTE.  —  to  before  the  infinitive  of  a  verb  in  a  sentence  is  generally 
translated  by  511  ;  but  is  not  translated  if  the  verb  is  used  with  an  aux- 
iliary verb  of  mood  in  German;  as, 

5?dj  mufe  ju  metnem  Cnfel  gefyen,*  I  must  (I  am   obliged  to)  go  to 
my  uncle.    3$  fflun  ntdjt  fommen,  I  cannot  (I  am  not  able  to)  come. 


..(*)  Such  an  infinitive  must  always  stand  last  in  a  sentence. 


alone,  oHctn 
also,  and) 

to  belong  to,  gef)6ren(D.) 
black,  fd)tt)ttt5 
the  country,  ba§  £anb 
,,    meat,  ba§  j^leijdj 
,,    cousin,  ber  Setter 
Plur:  bie  SBettern 
(*)  Pronounce: 


67 

thecousin(f.),bie  Souftne* 
(bie  S3afe,  bie  2KitIjme) 
quite,  ganj 
red,  rott) 

the  town,  bie  Stabt 
Plur:  bie  Stable 
to  travel,  teifen 
to  visit,  befudjen 


the  year,  ba3 
Plur:  bie 


70, 
80, 
90,  neunjig 

100,  fyunbert 

101,  fjunbei'tunbeinS 
&c.    &o. 


Exercise  No.  1O. 

1.  Which  cousin?  —  which  town?  —  which  year?  —  which  knives?  — 
the  cousin  (f.)  of  which  student?  —  the  brother  of  which  woman?  —  the 
•queen  of  which  country?  —  the  streets  of  which  towns?  —  with  which 
•cousin?  —  out  of  which  school?  —  from  which  child?  —  after  which  pupils? 

—  through  which  station?  —  for  which  villages?  —  what  tahle?  —  the 
towers  of  what  church?  —  out  of  what  building?  —  for  what  emperor?  — 
what  pens?  —  with  what  sailors  ?  —  what  meat?  —  from  what  wine?  —  for 
what  butter? 

We  must,  —  am  I  obliged?  —  you  are  obliged,  —  thou  must,  —  is  he 
obliged?  —  they  must,  —  were  you  obliged?  —  thou  wast  obliged,  —  I  was 
•obliged,  —  were  we  obliged?—  they  were  obliged,  —  was  she  obliged?  — 
it  can,  —  are  they  able  ?  —  can  you  ?  —  thou  art  able,  —  I  can,  —  are  we  able  ? 

—  was  I  able?  —  we  could,  —  he  was  able,  —  could  they?  —  you  were  able, 

—  thou  couldst,  —  you  must,  —  was  he  not  obliged  ?  —  we  can,  —  I  could 
not,—  I  must  not,—  you  cannot. 

2.  SSeldje  ©tabt  befucfcen  <5ie  biefeS  Safer  ?  %$  tuerbe  Berlin 
befudjen,  aber  idj  mufc  cwrf)  ttarf)  (to)  $j$art3  reifen.  3>n  toeldjen 
Sanbern  ttmr  3]p  SSetter  fdpn?  Sfteine  doufine  fann  tticfet  cittern 
reijen.  3Ka3  fitr  SSein  ift  in  biefem  ©lafe?  $n  fta3  fitr  etnem 
rjaben  ^Ijre  ©Item  getooijnt  ?  SSon  toelc^em  Df  fijicr  ^at 

n  Xtn 


Onfet  fein  ^ferb  gefauft?  SSa^  fitr  Xtnte  ift  in  biefen  Xtnten- 
fftffentt  S)ic  Sinte  in  biefem  Sintenfaft  ift  rotrj,  unb  bie  £inte 
in  jenem  Xintenfofe  ift  fdjhwrj.  9^eifte  S&re  ©Defter  gang  attein 
na^  (to)  ®entfd)Ianb?  2Ba3  fiir  SDcatrofcn  errtjartet  biefer  (£ng* 
tanber?  28eIcE)ent  Slaenten  ge!§ort  biefer  ©arten.-  28a^  fiir  einen 
•28agen  ^aben  @ie  gefauft? 

For  which  boy  is  this  knife?  Which  ink  in  these  5nkstands  is 
black?  What  meat  did  you  buy?  Which  castles  is  he  obliged  to  visit? 
From  what  girls  are  these  roses?  Which  towns  have  you  visited?  Your 
mother  cannot  go  (travel)  quite  alone  to  (nach)  Berlin.  What  cherries 
are  on  this  tree?  The  roses  in  our  garden  are  quite  red.  With  which 
cousin  (/.)  does  your  sister  go  (travel)?  Our  cousin  is  obliged  to  visit 
the  president.  To  which(*)  children  do  those  presents  belong?  What 
^gentleman  is  living  in  your  house?  This  key  cannot  belong  to  your 
brother.  In  which  country  is  the  Rhine  ? 

(*•')  "To  which"  must  be  rendered  by  the  Dative,  as  ge!)6ren  (belong)  governs 
the  Pative  (see  the  translation  of  "to"  on  page  40). 


53 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  What  is  the  Nominative  and  Accusative  of  welcher  in  the  masculine 
what  in  the  neuter  and  what  in  the  feminine  and  plural  ? 

2.  What  is  the  Genitive  and  Dative  of  woleksr  in  the  masculine  uirl 
neuter  what  in  the  feminine  and  what  in  the  plural  ? 

3.  Before  what  nouns  is  was  fiir  ein  .used,  and  how  is  it  declined? 

4.  Before  what  nouns  is  was  fiir  used,  and  how  is  it  declined? 

5.  Before  what  nouns  in  the  singular  is  was  fur  without  ein  used? 

6.  How  is  to  before  the  infinitive  of  a  verb  generally  translated  ?  and  ho\v 
when  this  infinitive  stands  in  German  ^vith  an  auxiliary  verb  of  mood * 


Conversation. 


Which  gentleman  is  your  cousin  ? 

The  officer  is  my  cousin. 

To  (nach)  which  town  in  Germany 

are  you  going  (travelling)  ? 
I  am  going  to  Berlin. 
Which    lady    is    your    teacher's 

(f.)  cousin? 

My  teacher  (f.)  has  no  cousin. 
For  which  boys  have  you  bought 

those  gimlets  and  knives  ? 

For  our  parson's  sons. 

Where  (wohin)  do  you  go  (gehtn) 

this  year? 

I  shall  .go  into  (auf)  the  country. 
What   officer  is    living. in    your 

house? 
It  is  our  president's  son. 

What  children  are  in  your,  garden  ? 

They  (it)  are  the  daughters  of  my 

photographer. 
What  meat  did  you  buy  in  the 

town? 
I  did  not  buy  any  meat,  but  1 

bought  [some]  butter. 
Is  your  mother  quite  alone  in  her 

room? 
No,  -my  brother  is   also  in  the 

room. 

Are  you  obliged  to  sell  your  horse? 
Yes,  it  is  too  (zu)  old. 
When  can  you  let  this  room? 

I  cannot  let  it  before  (vor)  three 
weeks. 


SBtfdjer  £err  tft  &jr  better? 
£er  Officer  tft  mem  Better. 
Wad)  toelcfier  ©tabt  in  '3>eutfcf)' 

lanb  reifen  <£ie? 
3d}  reife  narf)  Berlin. 
2BeId)e  Same    tft    bte   Confine 

3&rer  Sehrerin? 

SRetne  Sefirerin  fiat  Eeine  GTonfine. 
giir  meldje  &tiaben   fiaben  (ste 

bieje  ^o^rcr  imb  2)ieffer  gc- 

!auf  t  ? 

$riir  bte  So^ne  unfre^ 
SSofytn  gefien  6ie  btefes 


tuerbe  auf  bo§  Sanb.gefieu. 
fiir  ein  Drfi^ter  tooijnt  in 
S^rcm  .§aufc  I 

tft  .ber  €ob^t  irnfer^  .jprafi* 
benten. 

fiir  ^tuber  ftnb  in  ^firent 
Garten  ? 
ftnb    bie    Xoc^ter    raeinec- 


SBaS  fiir  ^leifc^  ^afccn   ©ie  .in 

bee  Stabt  nefauft  J 
3^  Jauftc  fetn  B-Ieifc^,  a6er  id) 

|abe  Gutter  gefauft. 
3ft  3^re  gutter  ganj  aHein  in 

i^rem  ftimmeti 
9Jcin,  mern  ^ruber  ift  aitcf)  nit 

gnmner. 

•SRitffen  fie  3^r^ferb  oerfaufen  r 
3a/  e»  tft  311  alt. 
.SSann  foitnen  £ie  iiefe»   ftim* 

mcr  De:iitietl)en? 
3d)    faitu    e5    nid)t    oor    bni 

SBodjen  uermiet^en. 


59 

€^crctse  fto.  10. 


i.  ©in  §err  -gtng  :mit  jtoei  Stamen  in  einer 

f  ,.  ..         went        .  ...  uviin-sti-eet 

Sfoerpool'S  .ftjajieren.      ©in    Settler    naljerte    fid)   ,U)nen. 

walking  .  beggar  approached  them 

Sine  'ber  S5amen  fyatte  .ben  -Settler  fdjon  oft   gefefjen  ,unb 

beggar  .       Often*       seen 

fagte  511  ifjrem  Setjleiter:  —  -3)a3  ift  ein  fonberfrarer  'filter. 

said       .  .  companion  this        .        .  strange          old  man 

Bie  .mogen  i^m  fo  .toiet  (S.elb  .geBen    tute   .©ie    JuoKen,  .jer 

may        him     as  much  money      give  as         you      will  (like)      ie 

toetfjfelt    bo»    ©elbftiid;   unb    oe^cilt   nte    nte^r    al§    einen 

changes  .      piece  of  money      .  keeps      never     more      than 

^ettnij.  —  ^^5)er  ®erl  mug  bumm  fein,    kmerfte    ber    §err, 

fellow        .         stupid          .  observed 

id)  toifl  iljit    priifen.  —  @r  na^m  bann   ein   (Sofbftutf    uub- 

will     him         try  .          took         then        .        piece  of  gold 

legte  e§  in  ben  §nt  be§  5(rmen.      2)er  Settler  fagte  nati, 

laid        ...  .  poor  man  .          beggar        said 

einer  langeren  $aufe:  —  2ftein  §err,  ic§  lotll  bie§mal  eine 

rather  long      pause  -sir        .         .       ..will      this  time 

S2(n§nal)me  madjen  nnb  ba§  ganje   ©tiirf   be^alten. 

exception  make         .  .          .        whole        piece  keep 

tfjun  @ie  el  .nic^t  me^r.  —  2)er   §err,    nid^t   mentg 

do  .          .     more  (again)         .  .  .       .(a)little.about(at) 

biefe  wterttmrtete  ^(ntrt)ort  erftannt,  ging  toeiter,  unb  feine 

unexpected          ;answer       astonished      went     farther          . 

S)amen  ttdjerten  tior  SSergnilgen. 

tittered      (with)       pleasure 

II.  (Sin  Saner  faf)  anf  etner  3agb  einen  2)ac^§  in  tin 

peasant    saw       .  .          chase          .          badger 

2oc§  frfjfttpfen  nnb  oerfnc^te  fc^nett,  i^n  §n  ergreifen.    Sin 

hole  slip  .  tried          quickly      him      .  seize 

3ager   fragte   fjaftig    ben    Saner:  —  §aft    bn   ben  '^adr^ 

asked       hastily        .         peasant  .          .        .badger 

—  9Mn,  aber  er  ^at  mtc^,  —  frfjrte  ber  Saner,  h)e^er  euen 

me         screamed     .        peasant         who 

t)on  bem  S)ad)fe  in  bie  |janb  gebiffen  ninrbe. 

badger      .        .  .  bitten  -was 


60 

Eleventh  Lesson.  eifte  Seftion. 

The  Qualifying-  Adjectives. 

Adjectives  used  as  predicate,  i.  e.  if  they  follow  the  verb, 
•are  invariable;  as, — 2Rein  $f«b  ift  gut,  my  horse  is  good 

Adjectives  used  as  attribute,  i.  e.  if  they  precede  the  noun, 
must  agree  with  it  in  gender,  number,  and  case,  according  to 
the  following- rules : 

1.  Attributive  adjectives  preceded  by  the  definite  article  or 
substitute*  add  en  in  all  cases,  except  in  the  following  cases 
of  the  singular ;  viz :  in  the  nominative  masculine,  and  in  the 
nominative  and  accusative  feminine  and  neuter,  when  they  add 
<  only;  thus: 

Sing.     .!fos<\  Fern.  Ncitt.  PI ur.  of  all  Gen. 

N.  ber  gut=e  biefe  gut=e  jene§  gut=e  Joeldje  gut«en 

G.  be§  gut=en  biefergut--en  jene§  gut=en  tuelrfjer  gut=en 

D.  betngut=en  biefergut=en  jenent  gut=en  tt)eld)engut=en 

A.  ben  gut=en  biefe  gut=c  jenes  gut=e  tteldje  gut=en 

Examples :  biefer  gute  £ifdj,  this  good  table  bie  ^odjter  bet  franf en  ftrau,  the 
daughter  of  the  sick  woman  tnit  toeldjen  alten  $aufem,  with  which  old 
houses? 

Note.— The  e  in  the  termination  is  omitted,  when  the  adjective  ends 

in  e. 

The  Auxiliary  Verbs  of  Mood  (continued). 
SBottett,  (will)  to  be  willing,  to  wish. 


Present  Indicative. 
tdj  Join,  I  will  (I  am  willing,  I  wish, 
bu  iDittft,  thou  wilt  [etc.) 

er  tt>itt,  he  will 


Imperfect. 

idj  tooltte,  I  would  (I  was  willing,  I 
bit  Ji3oIIteft,thouwouldst  [wished, etc.) 
er  iooflte,  he  would 


toir  toonen,  we  will  .    teir  tooHtcn,  we  would 

6te  toollen  or  t^r  JooUt,  you  will  6ie  tuoHten  or  i^»-  tuoHtet,  you  would 

fte  ttJoUen,  they  will  '    fie  toottten,  they  would 

©oltcn,  (shall)  ought. 


i$  foU,  I  shall  (I  am  to,  etc.) 

bu  iottft,  thou  shalt 

€r  foU,  he  shall 

tutr  fotten,  we  shall 

Sie  fatten  or  iljr  fottt,  you  shall 

fie  fotten,  they  shall 


tdj  fottte,  I  should  (I    ought,    I   was 

bu  fottteft,  thou  shouldst       [to,  etc.) 

er  fottte,  he  should 

Joir  fottten,  we  should 

@ie  fottten  or  iljr  fotttet,  you  should 

fte  fottten,  they  should 


Notes :  1. — Thou  wilt,  he  will,  you  will,  they  will,  with  another 
Terb  following  are  translated  by  loerben  (bu  fttrft,  er  loirb,  @ie  Joerben  or 
iljr  toerbet,  fie  joerben),  when  expressing  future.— When  they  are  used  in  the 
sense  of,  to  be  willing,  to  wish,  they  are  translated  by  Jootten  (bu  Joittft,  er 
tcitt,  Sie  tootten  or  iljr  toollt,  fte  tcotten). 

2.— I  shall,  we  shall  with  another  verb  following,  generally  ex- 
pressing" future,  are  translated  by  werben  (id)  ttjerbe,  ttrir  toerbcn) ;  but  shall 
I?  shall  we?  in  the  meaning  of  am  I  to?  are  we  to?  have  to  be  rendered  by 
fotten  (fott  id)?  fotten  n>ir?). 

(*)  We  call  substitutes  of  the  definite  article  those  determinative  adjec- 
tives which  are  declined  like  it;  as,— biefer,  jener,  tteldjer,  jeber,  man* 
djer,  (foldjer)  (vide  page  18). 


the  animal,  bo?  S^ter 
„    basket,  ber  ®or6 

blue,  filou 

the  carpet,  ber 
„   cat,  bie  ®a 
colour,  bie 


„ 

deep,  ttef 
the  dog,  ber  $unb 


61 

Plur:  bie  fmttbe 

the  flower,  bie  33htme 
,,  friend,  ber  ??reunb 
„  friend(f.),biegreunbin 

green,  grim 

industrious,  flei&ig 

lazy,  idle,  trcige 

large,  great,  tall,  big,  grojj 


little,  small,  Hetn 
sick,  ill,  Iran! 

110,  Ijunbert(unb)§e|)n 

111,  I)itnbert(unb)elf 

120,  t)iinbert(unb)5ttjan5tg,. 

121,  ljunberteinimb  jtc  ansig. 

130,  Ijiinbert(unb)brei&ig 

131,  ljunberteinunbbreifcig. 


Exercise  No.  11. 

1.  Decline  in  German  in  the  singular  and  plural: — the  little  dog, 
— this  blue  flower, — which  big  animal  ? — that  (jener)  industrious  pupil, 
— the  good  friend  (f. ), — this  sick  child; — and  afterwards  translate: — 

The  old  friend,  the  old  friends, — this  small  door  and  those  large 
windows, — the  water  of  which  deep  river  ?  the  waters  of  which  deep 
rivers  ? — the  daughter  of  the  rich  lady,  the  daughters  of  the  rich  ladies, 
— the  mother  of  this  young  girl,  the  mothers  of  such  young  girls, — 
with,  this  bad  wine  and  with  those  bad  cakes, — out  of  which  old  church  ? 
out  of  which  old  churches? — from  the  red  roof,  from  the  red  roofs, — 
for  this  lazy  pupil  and  that  industrious  pupil  (f.)t  for  these  lazy  pupils 
and  for  those  industrious  pupils  (f.), — through  which  nice  country? 
through  which  nice  countries  ? — the  green  colour  of  that  large  basket, 
— since  the  cold  rain, — for  such  poor  children, — which  red  carpet? — 
on  account  of  the  warm  weather. 

He  is  willing,  — do  they  wish?  —  we  will,  —  I  will  not,  —  do  you 
wish? — thou  wishest, — I  would, — we  would  not, — thou  wast  willing, 
— you  would,  — they  were  willing,  — did  he  wish? — you  shall,  — shalt  thou? 
— it  shall  not, — are  they  not  to  ? — we  are  to, — am  I  to  ? — they  should,  — 
he  ought, — I  was  to, — ought  we? — should  you  not? — thou  oughtest, — 
are  you  able? — we  must, — I  cannot, — he  is  obliged. 

2.  S)er  reidje  gabrifant  ift  !ranf.  SHe  rotfjen  SRofen  finb  in 
bent  (or  int)  ^orbe.  ®iefe  jnngen  S^iere  ftnb  ®a|en.  Sftetn 
SSoter  ift  in  bent  (or  int)  blauen  .Simmer,  3rur  toelc&en  fleipigen 
©djuler  ift  biefe§  ©efdjenf?  ®iefe  alte  gfrau  un&  iene^  junge 
9ftabrf)en  finb  arm.  %<fy  Jjabe  ben  alten  3*ennb  ntetne£  Dnfelg 
Befudjt.  SBoHen  @ie  in  bent  (or  int)  fdjitmrgen  SBogen  retfen?  SSo 
Ijaben  @ie  biefe  gnten  gebern  gefaufU  @oE  tdj  foWjeS  grime 
$ctpier  faufen?  2)iefe3  ^rauletn  ift  bie  9frd)te  jeneS  often  £errn. 

I  will  sell  these  old  chairs.     Is  this  nice  house  let?    "We  shall  buy 
this  red  curtain  or  that  blue  carpet.    To  which  industrious  boy  do  these 
pencils  belong  ?    You  ought  to  sell  the  sick  horse.    What  are  the  green 
glasses  to  cost?    The  sailors  of  this  large  ship  are  Frenchmen.     Is  the 
red  rose  in  that  basket  ?      Shall  we  visit  the  old  castle  ?      The  son  of ' 
the  rich  advocate  is  ill.      I  could  not  buy  the  little  dogs.      This  black 
cat  is  from  our  aunt.      Am  I  to  live  in  that  large  house?      I  did  not. 
wish  to  buy  such  bad  wine.     These  nice  books  are  the  works  of  Goethe. 
They  are  not  to  visit  the  poor  woman. 


62 


Questions  on  Grammar. 

1     Is  nn  adjective,  used  as  predicate,  declined? 

•J.  What  termination  takes  an  attributive  adjective  if  preceded:  by  the 
definite  article  or  substitute  in  the  Nominative  and  Accusative  mas- 
culine and  what  in  the  Nominative  and  Accusative  feminine -and 
neuter  ? 

3.  What  termination  takes  such  an  adjective,  in  the  Genitive  and 
Dative  masculine,  feminine,  neuter,  and  in  all  the  plural  cases? 

i.  What  words  do  we  call  substitutes  of  the  definite  article,  and  which 
are  they  ? 

5.  When  are  thou  wilt,  he  will,  you,  will,  they  will  to  b<*  rendered  by 

t>.   When  are  these  words  to  be  rendered  by  molten? 

7.  How  are  /  shall  and  we  sliall,  with  another  verb  following,  generally 
rendered  in  German,  and  what  then  do  they  usually  express? 

8.  When  are  shall  I*  shall  toe?  to  be  rendered  by  fottw? 


Conversation. 


Are  your  pupils  industrious? 
The  girls  are  industrious,  but  the 

boys  are-  lazy 
Where  have  you  bought  this  big 

dog? 
I  have  bought  him  (ihn)  in  (auf) 

the  country. 
What  did  this  blue  pencil  cost  ? 

It  (he)  did  not  cost  very  much. 
Who  is  living  in  that  large  build- 
ing? 
It  is  the  house  of  the  rich  Russian. 

Sell  this  old  table  and  those  old 

chairs. 
I  shall  only  sell  the  old  table. 

Which  red  flowers  shall  I  buy? 
The  red  roses  in  that  basket 

Will  yon  have  [some]  of  this  good 

bread? 

Yes,  please  (bitte). 
Which  ink  will  you  buy? 
I  wish  to  buy  this  black  ink 

Are  these  little  animals  dogs? 
No,  they  (it)  are  my  aunt's  young 
cats. 


Stnb  Sljre  Sc|Mec  fteifctg  ? 
2>ie  9)Mbc&en  finfc  fleijjjg,  abet, 

bie  £naben  finb.  trdge. 
SSo    fiaben    Sie.  biefcn   gro&en 

£>unb  gefauft? 

^d)  Ijabe  ifjn   <m\  bem  Sanbe 
gefauft. 

ijat   bicfcr  blaue   sStctfttft 
gefoftet  ? 
foftete  nid^t  jefir  biet. 

nrohnt   tit  bicfem 
©ebdubeV 
ift   bag    ^)au§   bes  rei^cn 


!ouf  CE  ? 
rat(;eir 


©te  btefen  alten  Xi)cfy 
unb  jene  oltcn  ©tii^k. 
)  irerbe  nur  ben-  olten 
oertaufen. 


in'  biefem 


Swollen  @ie  bon  biejeui  guten 

SSrobe  [6aben]? 
Sa,  bitte. 

SSetc^e  Xinte  rtotten  @ic  faufen? 
Sc^    tDttt    biefe   jdjlcor^e   Xtnte 

faufen. 

©tnb  btefe  ffeineit  ^^iere  ^)imbe? 
§  frnb  bie  j'ungen 

meiner  Xante. 


<Ererd0c  Ho.  11. 


5ln    eiuem    feljr    fatten    &ecemBer-2T6enb'    fam    ein 

evening       came 

Sletfenber  on  ba§  SS'trtpfjauS  etne§  ®taf  e&     (£r.  trat  in. 

traveller         .         .  inn  of  a-  .  .      stepped    . 

ba§  aflgemeine  SBirtfjfdjaft^tmmer.     me  $1%    bor   bem 

public  barroom  all         seats-     before.      . 

Better  nmren  befe|t,  unb  e§  toar  t^m  umnogltc^    fi<Jj    gn 

fire  .          occupied        .  .to  him     impossible       himself 

toarmen.     5Iergerltdj  bartiBer,  fagte  er  §um  §au§!ne(^t:— 

warm  angry  about  it         said        .          .  ostler 

®eBen  <5te  fofort  meinem  $ferbe  jtoet    SDu^eub    Sdtftern. 

give        immediately        .  .  .  dozen         (of)  oysters 

£)er  §an§!ned)t  ging  an§  bem  Simmer,  um   ben.  Stnftrag 

ostler  went  .  .  in  order     .  order 

^u  fcoftgiefjen.      5Ide  ^cufonen  in    bem   S^uner    iuoHten 

execute  all          persons 

fel)en,  tt)a§  fiir  ein  $ferb  biefe§  fonberbare  gntter  freffe. 

see  ....  .  strange       food     eatsf  of  'beasts  ) 

<Sie    toerliefceir  bc§!f)aI6    t^re,  ^(cife    nnb    gingen   in-   ben 

left  therefore          .  seats  .  went 

@taH.    2)er  neue  ©aft  ma^tte  nnn  ben    Beften  ^5ta^    am 

stable  .        new      guest       chose        now        .  best          seat 

$ener  unb   madjte    e§    fid^    Beqnem.       Sinige  SfagenBlirfu 

flre  .  made        (it)  himself,  comfortable  a  few  moments 

fpater  fam  ber  §an§!nec^t,   gefolgt  t)on   ben   ^lengteri'gen, 

later       came       .  ostler  followed         .  .  curious-ones 

jurtl'cl.     ©r  erfldrte,   ba§   ^ferb   tt)offe  bie   5(uftern  ntci;t 

back  .        declared          .  .  would        .          oysters 

freffen.  —  28a3!  —  rief  ber    §err    mit  ber'  emfteften  Sftiene, 

eat  (  'of  beasts  )      .  erred        .  ...      most  serious          air 

e§  toitt  bie  Slnftern  nid^t  freffen?      9^un   gnt,   geben   @ie 

oysters  .      eaif  of  beasts}         now       well  give 

mir  ben  letter;  tcfj  n;itt  bann  btefelBen  effen  unb  aufeitre 

to  me     .  .  then         the  same  ... 

©efunb^eit  ba^u  trtnfen.     9Jletnem  ^ferbe  gefren  ©te  jebod) 

health  to  it        drink  .  give         however 

§eu  unb  §afer. 

hay         .  oats 


64 

Twelfth  Lesson.  gtoaifte  Seftioiu 

The  Qualifying  Adjectives  (continued). 

2.  Attributive  Adjectives  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article 
or  substitute^*)  are  declined  as  if  preceded  by  the  definite  article, 
except  in  the  singular  Nominative  masculine,  when  they  add 
er,  and  in  the  singular  Nominative  and  Accusative  neuter,  when 
they  add  e3,  instead  of  e;(**)  thus: 

Sing.    Masc.  Fern.  Neut.  Plur.  of  all  Gen. 

N.  etn     gut--er  metne  gut-e  36r     gut=e§         feine   guben     • 

G.  eine§  gut=en  meiner  gut--cn  SPteS  gut=en         leincr  gut»en 

D.  einem  gut=en  metner  gut=en  Serein  gulden         letnen  gut=en 

A.  einen  gut=en  meine  gut=e  gijr      gut=t3         feine   gut=en 

Examples:  ein  guter  Stuljl,  a  good  chair  ftljr  junge§  ^ferb,  your  young 
horse  ber  £unb  f  enter  reidjen  Xante,  his  rich  aunt's  dog  mit  uniern  ar= 
men  Solbaten,  with  our  poor  soldiers 


The  Auxiliary  Verbs  of  Mood  (concluded). 
Surfeit,  to  be  allowed. 

Imperfect. 


Present  Indicative. 
id)  barf,  I  am  allowed 
bu  barfft,  thou  art  allowed 
er  barf,  he  is  allowed 


id)  burfte,  I  was  allowed 

bu  burfteft,  thou  wast  allowed 

er  burfte,  he  was  allowed 


tuir  burfen,  we  are  allowed  rotr  burften,  we  were  allowed 

Sic  burfen  or  iljr  burft,  you  are  allowed   I    @ie  burften  or  iljr  burftet,  you   were 

fie  burfen,  they  are  allowed  i    fie  burften,  they  were  allowed|.allowecJ 

,  (may)  to  like. 

id)  morfjte,  I  liked 

bu  modjteft,  thou  likedst 

er  mod)te,  he  liked 

hnr  molten,  we  liked 

Sie  modjten  or  i^r  modjtet,  you  liked 

fie  modjten,  they  liked 


id)  mag,  I  may  (I  like,  etc.) 

bu  tncgft,  thou  mayest 

er  mag,  he  may 

nrir  ntogen,  we  may 

6ie  mogen  or  iljr  mogt,  you  may 

fte  mogen,  they  may 


Note. — The  interrogative  forms:  may  I?  may  he?  may  we?  may 
they?  are  generally  translated  by  burfen  (barf  idj?  barf  er?  burfen  toir? 
burfen  fie?),  and  have  then  the  meaning  of  "to  be  allowed". 

The  infinitive  form  of  an  auxiliary  verb  of  mood  is  generally  used 
as  a  past  participle  in  the  compound  tenses. — The  tenses  usually  stand 
in  connection  with  the  infinitive  of  another  verb  which  in  German  has 
to  precede  the  auxiliary  verb  of  mood,  and  in  a  sentence  both  are  put 
last;  as, 

3d)  IjoBe  geljen  muffen,  I  have  been  obliged  to  go.  3d)  Ijatte  ba§  £aii§ 
nidjt  faufen  fonnen,  1  had  not  been  able  to  buy  the  house.  (Jr  fjat 
fommen  ttoHen,  he  has  been  willing  to  come. 


(*)  We  call  substitutes  of  the  indefinite  article  those  words  which  are 
declined  like  it;  viz:  the  possessive  adjectives  mein,  bein,  etc.,  and 
the  word  lein  (vide  page  18). 

(**)  As  the  preceding  aiticle  or  substitute  does  not  indicate  the  gender  and  case 
by  its  termination,  the  adjective  must  show  it. 


attentive,  oiifnterlfam 
autumn,    ber  Jperfcft   (or 

bol  @patja|r) 
dead,  tobt 
the    grand-father,      ber 


grand-mother,     bie 
grand-son,  ber  ©nlel 


65 

the  grand-daughter,    bie 
new,  neu  i_®nfelin 

pleasant,  agreeable,  on* 

geneljtn 

the  season,  bie  ;gaf)re§seit 
summer,  ber  ©omnter 
spring.ber  griif)Hng(or  ba§ 
useful,  niiijHcf) 


wet,  ttafj 

winter,  ber  SBinter 

140, 

150, 

200,  groeifjunbert 

210,  3tteif)unbert 

300,  breifjunbert 

400,  irierfiunbert,  ete. 


Exercise  No.  12. 

1.  Decline  in  German: — a  good  grand-father, — my  good  parents^ 
—  his  old  grand-mother, — her  young  grand-daughters,  —  our  useful, 
book,  — their  useful  books ; — and  afterwards  translate : — 

A  warm  summer, — my  good  mother, — thy  new  ruler, — the  friend 
of  his  little  grand-son, — the  officers  of  our  great  queen, — the  inhabitants 
of  your  fine  country, — out  of  their  deep  river, — m(Dat.)  no  pleasant, 
season, — with  an  industrious  girl, — for  my  attentive  pupil, — without, 
his  useful  cat,  —  through  our  small  village,  —  your  tall  brothers, — the 
friends  (f. )  of  their  little  sisters, — with  no  sick  children, — for  her  nice 
poems, — with  your  old  grand-father, — my  young  horse, — through  *-• 
cold  winter, — their  large  fortress, — my  rich  cousin, — for  our  rich  uncle,, 
— during  a  fine  autumn. 

Are  you  allowed? — thou  art  not  allowed, — T  am  allowed, — are  wtf 
allowed? — she  is  not  allowed, — they  are  allowed, — he  was  allowed, — 
were  they  not  allowed? — you  were  allowed, — wast  thou  allowed? — we 
were  allowed,— was  I  not  allowed?— we  may, — I  do  not  like, — it  may, . 
— do  they  like? — may  you? — thou  likest,—  thou  likedst, — you  liked, — 
did  we  like? — I  liked,— he  did  not  like, — they  liked, — is  he  willing? 
— you  ought, — I  am  obliged, — they  were  able. 

2.  S)er  $er5ft(*)  ift  eine  angeneijme  gafire^ett  in   ©itflfanb- 
2Bir  tuerben  einen  ttmrmen  (Sommer  fiafcen.     SBte  triele  (Snfcl  fjat 
$f)r  alter  (SJrofjbater?     £5$  f)abe  feine  cmfmerfjamen  ©cfiiiler  in 
metner  ©djitle.    StReine  gute  ©ro^mutter  ift  tobt.     5>arf  id&   in. 
Qtyren  fdjonen  Morten  gejen1?    £aft  bit  em  neueS   9ftefjer  laufetr 
biirfen?    ©ein  neiter  |)iit  ift  oiif  bent  Xtfcfie.     SDZogen  @te  ttnfere 
fcfittargen  IKrf^cnl    §aben  @ic  %$*  alteS  ^Pferb  tjerfoitfen  muff  en  1' 
SD^etne  ^ouftne  SD^arie  ^at  t^re  armen  ©Item  Befitcfien  biirfen. 

The  father  of  my  good  friend  is  very  rich.  A  good  cat  is  very  useful. 
Her  little  children  are  ill.  "We  shall  have  a  cold  winter.  Our  old  dog 
is  dead.  May  we  go1  to  your  sick  mother  ?  Have  you  had  a  pleasant 
spring  in  Germany  ?  You  are  not  allowed  to  go1  into  my  large  room. 
Do  you  like  his  old  wine  ?  Their  good  grand-father  is  dead.  Have  you 
been  able  to  sell  your  green  curtains  ?  He  does  not  sell  any  good  beer. 

(*)  With  names  of  seasons  the  definite  article  must  always  be  used  in  German. 
1  fletjen,  go 

German  Grammar.  3 


66 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  What  termination,  takes  an  attribute  adjective,  if  preceded  by  the 
indefinite  article  or  substitute  in  the  Nominative  and  Accusative 
masculine  and  which  in  the  Nominative  and  Accusative  feminina 
and  neuter  ? 

2.  What  termination  takes  such  an  adjective  in  the  Genitive  and  Da- 
tive masculine,  feminine,  neuter,  and  in  all  the  plural  cases  ? 

3.  What  words  do  we  call  substitutes  of  the  indefinite  article,  and  which 
are  they  ? 

4.  What  termination  does  the  adjective  take,    if  preceded  by  the  in- 
definite article  or  substitute  in  the  Nominative  masculine  and  in 
the  Nominative  and  Accusative  neuter ;  and  why  ? 

5.  How  are  may  I?  may  he  ?  may  we  ?  may  they?  generally  translated  ? 

6.  What  form  is  generally  used  as  past  participle  in  the  compound 
tenses  of  an  auxiliary  verb  of  mood  ? 

7.  Whenever  the  infinitive  of  another  verb  stands  in  connection  with 
such  an  infinitive  form,  which  of  them  has  to  stand  last  ? 

ft.  Where  are  these  two  verbs  put  in  a  sentence  ? 


Conversation. 


Is  a  good  dog  useful? 

Yes,  dogs  and  also  cats  are  useful. 

Have  you  sold  your  new  hat  ? 
No,  but  I  have  sold  my  old  coat. 

Is  Charles'  father  a  short  gentle- 
man? 

Ho,  he  is  very  tall. 
Is  your  carpet  green? 
No,  our  new  carpet  is  blue. 

Will  you  sell  your  young  horses  ? 

Yes,  a  rich  manufacturer  will  buy 

the  fine  animals. 
May  I  take  (nehmen)  [some]   of 

your  good  butter  ? 
We  have  not  any  good  butter ;  but 

will  you  not  take  [some]  of  this 

good  bread? 
Have  you  been  able  to  buy  her 

nice  violets  ? 
No,  she  will  not  sell  any  flowers. 

Has  Frederick  an  old  grand-father? 

His  grand-father  is  dead,  but  his 
old  grand-mother  is  still  alive. 


3ft  ein  guter  §unb 

3a,  j&inibc  irnb  and)  ^afcen  ftnb 

nu|ltdj. 
£aben   @tc  3$ren   neueu   $ut 

toerfauft? 
Sfeein,  after  id)  fjabe  meinen  alien 

SRoc!  Derfaiift. 
Sft  Sarl'S  $ater  ein  Iteiner  £err  ? 


ift 


Sftein,  er  tft  feljr  grojj. 
3ft  3$r  Xepfcicf)  grim? 
Sfcetn,   unjer  neiier 

blau. 
SBoflen  @ie  S^re  jungen  ^ferbe 

oerfaufen? 
$a,  ein  retcfjer  gabrtfant   mill 

bte  fdjonen  X^tere  faufen. 
S)arf   ii^     con     S^rer     gnten 

gutter  nehmen? 
28ir  ^aben  feine  giite  Gutter; 

aber   rootten   @ie   nic^t   oon 

btefem  gnten  SSrobe  nehmen? 
|>aben  @ie  i^re  fdjonen  SSetlc^en 

faufen  fonnen? 
9^ein,    fie    mitt   fetne    S3Innten 

Derfaufen. 
§at  griebric^  etnen  alten  @ro§- 

Dater1? 
©etn  @ro§bater  tft  tobt,   aber 

feine  atte  (Srofjmiitter  lebt  nod)  . 


37 

feerct0e  Wo.  12. 


I.  ©in  fran^tffifdjer  $er§og  tear  jn  einem  gefte  getaben. 

French  .  ...          feast        invited 

9ln  bent  Xifdje  be§  §er§og§  fag  and)  ein  (£r§bifdjof.     (£3 

sat  .      .          .        archbishop 

ttmr  ein  feljr  roiirbiger  §err  toon  feftenen  Sciljigfeiten,  aber 

v  worthy  .  .  rare  qualities 

toon  niebriger  §er?nnft.    $)er  §erjog  fpradj  fel)r  toiel,  nnb 

.  low  origin  .  .  spoke 

ber  Spralat  ttriberlegte  i^n    ofter^   in   feinen    3}leinnngen. 

prelate      contradicted      him        often         .  .  opinions 

(£r§nrnt  bartiber,  fagte  ber  §erjog  enblid^  §n  i^m:  —  3^ 

irritated        about  it         said        .  .  at  last        .       him 

glanBe,  e£  nmre  fiir  @ie  fc^idlic^er,  mandjmal   ein    n>entg 

think          .       were         .          .        more  proper         sometimes         .  little 

Befdjeibener  §n  fein,  nnb  3!§re  ^erfnnft  nid^t  §n  dergeffen.  — 

more  modest         ...  .  origin  .          .          forget 

$)er  (Srjbifdjof  ertuieberte  :  —  gdj  dergeffe    fie    nie,  unb  idj 

archbishop         returned  .          forget  .      never 

toeifj  gett)igr  toenn  @ie  ber  @o^n  nteine§    SSater§    toaren, 

know      surely  if  ...  .  .  were 

8ie  in  biefer  Minute  @c^lt)etne  Bitten  toiirben.  — 

minute  pigs  keep        would 


II.  gewwfr  fra9te  etnen  reic^en  S3aner  nac§  feinem  Sifter. 

somebody     asked          .  .  peasant        .  age 

SBetjs  ©ott!  —  fagte  er,  —  id)  !ann  ntc^t   genan   fagen,   bin 

knows       God  said       ...  .  exactly         tell 

id)  toier^tg  ober  jtoetnnbtjierjig  S^^re  alt.  —  28te  fomntt  e§, 

.        comes 

bag  @ie  ni^t  totffen,  toie  aft  @ie  ftnb?—  %$    §abe   no^ 

that         .  .  know  ....  .  .yet 

nie  metne  3^re  geja^lt.     3d^  ^a^Ie  meine  Slecfer,    mein 

never       .  .  counted  .         count  .  fields 

$8ief)  nnb  mein  @etb.     Slffe§  bte§  !ann  id^  tierlieren,  aber 

cattle        .  .        money  nil         this          .          .  lose 

meine  §a^re  fcertiere  id^  nie.  — 

lose  .     never 


68 

Thirteenth  Lesson.  Sretgeljnte  Seftion. 

The  Qualifying  Adjectives  (continued). 

3.  Attributive  Adjectives  if  not   preceded    by   an  article    or 
substitute  take  tlie  terminations  of  biefer  (vide  page  18). 

In  the  Genitive  of  the  singular,  en  is  preferred   to    e§(*) ; 
thus: 

Sing.  Masc.  Fern.  Neut.  Plur.  of  all  Gen. 

N.  gutter  gut*e  gut*e§  gut*e 

G.  gut-en  (or  e§)  gutter  gut*en  (or  e3)  gutter 

D.  gut*em  gutter  gut*em  gut*en 

A.  gulden  gut*c  gut*e3  gut-e 

Examples :  frf)terf)ter  SBetn,  bad  wine  em  ©Ia§  guten  SBeineS,  a  glass 
of  good  wine  nut  friidjer  Slitter,  with  fresh  butter  folte§  SBaffer,  cold  water 
Qitfrnerlfame  gdjiiler,  attentive  pupils. 


The  Irregular  Verbs. 

The  most  important  parts  of  the  auxiliary  and  the  regular  verbs 
having  been  gone  through,  we  shall  now  begin  to  consider  the  Irregular 
Verbs  according  to  their  importance. — In  the  lessons  we  give  the  In- 
finitive only,  for  the  other  tenses  the  student  must  refer  to  our  list  of 
verbs. 

Their  irregularity  affects  but  the  Imperfect  tense  and  the  Past  Par- 
ticiple. In  the  list  therefore  only  the  Past  Participle  is  indicated  and 
the  first  person  singular  of  the  Imperfect  (of  the  Indicative)  from  which 
the  other  persons  are  formed  thus : 

SINGULAR  : — 2nd  person  by  adding  ft  (or  eft), — 3rd  person  is  the 
same  as  the  1st  person; — PLURAL  : — all  three  persons  by  adding  en  (or  n)> 
the  2nd  person  plural  if  used  with  iljr.  adding  t  (or  et). — See  list  of  verbs 
page  27. 

Some  verbs  are  also  irregular  in  the  2nd  and  3rd  persons  singular 
of  the  Present  and  in  the  singular  of  the  Imperative,  which  will  be  in- 
dicated in  the  list. 

Learn  by  heart  the  irregular  verbs: — *!ommen,  to  come 
*ftdjen,  to  stand  berftel)en(**),  to  understand  *gef)en,  to  goy 
to  walk. 

NOTE. — The  perfect  and  pluperfect  tense  of  regular  and  irregular 
verbs  denoting  movement  (t)  are  generally  formed  with  the  auxiliary 
fein,  to  be;  as, — idj  bin  gefommen,  I  have  come  id)  toor  gegongen,  I  had  gone 

Some  other  verbs  also  follow  this  rule,  as,—  fteljen,  to  stand  (but 
not  Derfieljen).  All  verbs  conjugated  with  fcin  we  shall  mark  with  a  *. 

(*)  This  is  done  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  as  most  masculine  and  neuter  nouns- 

form  their  getiiive  in  §  or  e§  in  the  singular. 

(*»)  Compound  verbs  are  conjug  .ted  like  their  root  verbs,  but  observe  that  verb* 
with  the  unaccented  prefixes  6e,  gc,  etc.  do  not  prefix  ge  in  the  past  partici- 
ple (s.  p.  52). 

(f)  Such  verbs  are:  to  come,  to  go,  to  walk,  to  travel,  to  swim,  to  sink,  to  run,  to  ar- 
rive, to  fly,  to  ipring,  to  ride,  to  fall,  etc. 


69 


always,  intnter 
the  apple,  bet  Slpfel 
Plur:  bie  Slepfel 
cheap,  tntttg 
dear,  expensive,  tljeuer 
faithful,  tren 
fresh,  frifc$ 
the  fruit,  ba§  OBjl 
generally,  gettofjnlidj 

to  lay,  to  put,  legen 
the  mUk,  bie  mil% 
„    pear,  bie  SBirne 
the  people,  bie  Seute 
ripe,  retf 
sour,  fauer 
sweet,  fiifj 
too,  ju 
unripe,  unreif 

1.000,  (ein)taufenb 

1.001,  (ein)taufenbunb- 
ein§,  etc. 

1,100,     (ein)taufenbein« 
Ijunbert  or  elfljunbert, 
etc. 

2,000,  jtoeitaufettb,  etc. 

10,000,  jeljntaitfenb,  etc. 


Exercise  No.  13. 

1.  Decline  in  German: — red  wine, — fresh  butter, — ripe  fruit, — un- 
ripe apples, — sour  pears, — little  children, — cheap  paper; — and  after- 
wards translate: — 

Sweet  cake, — black  ink, — cold  beer, — good  parents, — a  glass  of  old 
wine, — a  glass  of  fresh  milk, — on  account  of  bad  weather, — the  father 
of  industrious  girls, — after  [some]  warm  rain, — with  sour  milk, — from 
unripe  fruit, — out  of  old  churches, — through  expensive  wine, — for 
sweet  butter, — without  cheap  meat, — for  faithful  dogs, — many  rich 
people, — small  houses, — with  very(*)  good  apples, — through  unripe 
pears, — deep  water, — in  (Dat.)  red  paper. 

He  is  coming, — they  stand, — do  you  understand? — thou  dost  not 
go, — I  do  not  come, — we  go, — thou  wentest, — were  you  standing  ? — I 
understood, — we  did  not  come, — they  were  going, — she  stood, — we 
have  walked,— I  had  understood, — lie  had  come, — they  have  stood, — 
you  will  come, — we  shall  go, — will  he  understand? — go ! 

2.  £aBen  @ie  nftfcltdje*  93ucfier?  28er  tegte  imretfeS  D&ft  in 
meinen  ®orb?  Unfere  Xante  ift  mit  frifdjer  Sifttld)  ge!ommen. 
$Ieine  SHnber  unb  alte  Seitte  finb  getooljnltdj  gute  greitnbe.  gfjr 
SSater  feat  jtt  tfieueren  SSein  gefcutft.  2luf  biefent  SBaume  (there) 
finb  fcfrone  ^irfrfjen.  S^  93ruber  foil  fiifje  SSirnen  faiifen.  28ol- 
Jen  @ie  blaueg  ober  rotljeS  ^apter  tya&en?  Sfteue  SBiidjer  ftnb 
nicfit  imtner  gute  93iid)er.  S)te  ©inttjo^ner  ber  (of)  S)6rfer  too^nen 
genjo^nlid^  in  fletnen  ^aufern. 

Old  friends  are  generally(*)  good  friends.  Put  [some]  fresh  bread 
on  the  table.  (The)  dogs  are  faithful  animals.  Old  wine  is  good  for 
sick  people.  My  cousin  has  only  unripe  apples  in  his  garden.  The 
woman  has  come  with  bad  meat.  Have  you  bought  red  curtains  ? 
Sweet  fruit  is  always  ripe.  The  manufacturer  has  bought  too(*)  small 
horses  for  his  large  carriage.  We  bought  very(*)  expensive  wine  in 
the  town.  Who  likes  ripe  pears  ?  Did  you  lay  blue  or  green  paper 
under  the  book  ?  (The)  spring  and  (the)  autumn  are  generally(*)  pleasant 
seasons.  Will  you  have  a  glass  of  old  wine?  Has  your  old  friend  gone  ? 
These  flowers  have  fine  colours. 


{*)  Adverbs  are  not  declined. 


70 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

*.  What  termination  does  an  adjective  take,  if  not  preceded  by  an  arti- 
cle or  substitute,  in  the  Nominative  and  Accusative  masculine  what 
in  the  Nominative  and  Accusative  neuter  and  what  in  the  Nomin- 
ative and  Accusative  feminine  and  plural  ? 

2.  What  termination  does  such  an  adjective  take  in  the  Genitive  and 
Dative  masculine  and  neuter  what  in  the  Genitive  and  Dative  fem- 
inine and  what  in  the  Genitive  and  Dative  plural  ? 

3.  To  what  termination  is  c»  preferred  in  the  Genitive  singular? 

4.  In  what  tenses  do  German  irregular  verbs  differ  from  the  regulars  ? 

6.  From  what  person  of  the  Imperfect  are  the  other  persons  formed, 

and  how? 
6.  Of  what  verbs  are  the  perfect  tenses  formed  with  the  auxiliary  fein 

instead 


Conversation. 


Have  you  bought  an  expensive 

hat? 
No,  I  have  bought  two  cheap 

hats. 

Do  you  like  fresh  milk  ? 
Yes,  I  do  (like). 
Has  your  uncle  ripe  apples  and 

pears  in  his  garden  ? 
No,  he  has  only  unripe  fruit 
Have  you  bought  [some]  good 

butter? 

Yes,  this  butter  is  quite  fresh. 
Have    you    come    with    your 

brother? 
No,  I  came  with  my  sister. 

Has  your  Mend  gone  to  (in  the) 

church? 

No,  he  went  to  (in  the)  town. 
Did  you  well  (gut)  understand 

the  parson? 
No,  I  could  not  understand  him 

(tfjn)  well ;  he  spoke  (faradj) 

too  low  (leife). 

Who  has  stood  in  the  street? 
Little  children  and  old  people 

stood  there  (ba). 
Have  you  not  been  obliged  to 

go  into  (ailf)  the  country? 
No,  but  I  ought  to  go  to  (nadj) 

Germany. 


Sie  etnen  tHjeiierea  4?ut 
gefauft? 

in,  id)  §abe  jtoet  bifltge  &iite 
gefauft. 

SKogen  Sie  frifdje  $H(cf)? 
3a,  id)  mag. 

§at  Sfjr  Dnfel  reife  2fyfel  unb 
SSirnen  in  feinem  (Garten? 
,  er  Ijat  niir  itnretfeS  Obft. 
@te  gute  Gutter  gefaujU 


a,  biefe  83utter  tft  gan&  frtfdj. 
tnb  @ie  mit  %fr*m  Sruber 
gefommen? 

id)    fora     mit     metner 


$reunb   in   bte 
gegon-gen? 

,  er  ging  in  bte  Stabt. 
§aben    @te    ben    ^Sfarrer    gut 

tjerftanben  ? 

S^etn,  id)  fonnte  if)n  nic^t  gut 
Uerftetjen;  er  fpradj  §u  leife. 

SBer  tft  in  ber  ©rrafce  geftanben? 
gletne   ^inber  unb   alte   Seute 

ftanben  ba. 
^aben  ©te  nic^t  auf  ba3  2anb 

ge^en  miifjen? 

tn,     aber     id)    foCte     nac^ 

2>eutf  d)Ianb  ge^en  (or  reifen)  . 


71 

dmtm  fto.  13. 

griebrtd)  2Bt%Im  bet  @rfte  t>on  ^reitfeen  tear  hri|ig 

William         .         first         .  Prussia          .          witty 

unb   §atte   gern   nri|ige   Seute.      ©in    junger    ©etftlic^er 

liked  witty  .  .  clergyman 

fjoffte  turd)  feinen  2Bt£  eine  ^farrftefte  git  erljalten.      (£r 

hoped          .  wit  parsonage        .  get 

ging   jeben   Sftorgen    in    ben  Garten  be£  ®imig3  in  ber 

every        morning         .  -  „  . 

,£joffnung,  ben  ®onig  bort  gu  ftnben.    (£ine§  Sj^orgenS  fatib 

hope  .  .          there      .          find  .  morning     found 

er  tfjn  tmrKidj.     ®er  ^onig  gtng  511  i^m  unb  fcegann  mit 

.     him       really  .  ,  ....  tegan 

tt)m  §n  f^tec^en.      ©r  er^telt  frfjneUe  unb  gate  5lnttcorten 

talk  .      received       quick         .  .  answers 

unb  fc^ten  gufrieben.      S)er  ®eiftttcfje  fafite  9Jlut^  unb  bat 

seemed       pleased  .        clergyman       took     courage.       .     asbed 

tfjn    um   eine   ^forrfteHe.      S)er    ^ontg    ii6ertegte   etnen 

him       for          .  parsonage  .  .  considered 

$ngenBlic!  unb   fagte :     ,,Sc^  fann  e§  3f>nen  ntd^t  gteic^ 

moment  .  said  .  to  you  .     presently 

berfpredjen.      3^   ^uS  border  rait  bent  9)UntfiEr   reben, 

promise  .  .          before  .  .  speak 

$ber  fagen  @ie  ntir,  too  ftnb  @ie   |er?"      W3c§  fctn  eh 

tell  me         .         do    you  come  from 

Berliner  3*>re  9}lqeftat."      „©§  t^ut  mir  leib,"  fogte  bet 

majesty  I    am  sorry  said 

®ontg.      ,,^enn   afte    Berliner   taugen  ntc^t^."       «3^re 

for  all  .  are  good  for  nothing 

Sftajeftat,"  fagte  ber  ®etftltrf)e,  ,,e§  gieBt  unter  i^nen  and) 

majesty  said         .         clergyman        there     are  .  them         , 

tiicf)tige  Seute.     3d)  fclbft  fenne  jtoci/     ,,S2Ser  finb  btefe 

able  .  .        myself     know          .  ... 

gtoei?"  fragte  ber  ^ontg  neugtertg.     ,,2)er  eine,"  fagte  kr 

asked        .  .          curiously  .  .  said 

©etfttufo    ,,ift   35re   SKajeftftt,  unb  ber  anbere  bin  {%." 

clergyman  .  .  majesty  .  .         other 

£)er   ^onig    la'djette,  unb    ben   fotgenben    2JJorgen    erfjielt 

smiled  .  .  foUowing         morning  got 

ber  ®eifttidje  eine  Spfarrftette. 

clergyman          .  parsonage 


72 

fourteenth  Lesson.  SBierjeljnte  Seftion. 

^Remarks  on  the  Declensions  of  Adjectives. 

When  several  adjectives  stand  with  one  noun,  all  of  them 

^re  declined  alike;  and  as  a  rule  they  precede  the  noun  in  German;  as, 

ber  Heine,  aufmerffame  £nabe,  the  little,  attentive  boy    ein  fleiner, 

.  aufmerlfanter  $nabe,  a  little,   attentive  boy       nut  feinem  groijen  unb 

tmien  $unbe,    with  his  big  and  faithful  dog      fur  ein  fieine§,   olte§ 

$au§,  for  a  small,  old  house     eiit  $orb  guter  reifer  Slepfel,  a  basket  of 

good  ripe  apples. 

'  If  an  adjective  refer  to  a  noun  mentioned  and  the  noun  is 
understood,  it  takes  the  same  termination,  as  if  it  were  followed 
by  the  noun,- which  is  understood(*). — The  English  word  wie,  if 
•Jiaed  instead  of  the  noun,  is  not  rendered  then ;  as, 

SBo  tfl  ber  blaue  Steifttft?— $iet  ift  ber  rotfje.— £ier  ift   ein  totter. 

•  Where  is  the  blue  pencil?— Here  is  the  red  one.— Here  is   a  redone. 

SBoflen  Sie  fdjtDarje  ober  rotlje  Sinte  faiifen?— 3dj  toerbe  fditnarse  faufen. 

Will  you  buy  black  or  red  ink?— I  shall  buy  black.    $aben  ©ie  gute§ 

;  SSier?— %a,  id)  fjabe  feljr  gute«.      Have  you  [any]   good  beer?— Yes,    I 

have   [some]   very  good.      SBa§  fin:  £anbjdjub,e  ^aben  Sie?— 3d)  ^abe 

3^re  neuen.    What  gloves  have  you?— I  have  your  new  ones. 

NOTE.— The  adjective  Ijod)  (high),  if  used  as  an  attribute, 
*  becomes  Ijolj ;  as, 

ber  Ijolje  23aum,  the  high  tree 

Adjectives  referring  to  nations  begin  with  a  small  letter  in 
,  unless  used  as  nouns. — They  generally  end  in  tjcfj ;  as, 
fransoftfcfj,  French    englifd),  English    ruffifrf),  Russian.     In  beutfdj, 
German,  the  i  is  left  out. 

Adjectives  ending  in  el  elide  the  e  before  adding  a  termin- 
-ation. — Those  ending  in  en,  er  may  do  the  same,  and  all  three 
kinds  may  elide  the^e  of  a  termination  instead,  if  euphony  will 
allow  it    Thus : 

(bunfel,  dark)  ein  bunfter  SSorfjong,  a  dark  curtain    (pffen,  open)  ein 
;  offne§  genfter,  an  open  window    (tb^euci:,   dear,   expensive)  bie  t^eure 

U^r,  the  expensive  watch. 

OBSERVATION. — Participles,  if  used  as  adjectives,  follow  through- 
out the  rules  of  adjectives ;  as, 

oerfouft,  sold    bo§  uerfanfte  $ferb,  the  sold  horse     lommenb,  coming 
fur  ben  fommenben  Sag,  for  the  coming  day. 


Learn  by  heart  the  irregular  verbs:  effeit,  to  eat  Dergefien,  to 
forget  geben,  to  give  toergeben,  to  forgive  lefen,  to  read  fefjen, 
to  see,  to  look  ^treten,  to  step,  to  enter(**). 

,  (*)  If  in  English  the  noun  is  repeated,  in  German  the  adjective  alone 
.  is  usually  put,  the  noun  being  left  out ;  as, 

3n  toelrf)e§  Sficoter  werben  8ie  bcute  «benb  gepen?— 3d)   werbe  in3 
j  beuticr,e  gc:;en.    To  which  theatre  will  you  go  this  evening?—!  shall 

go  to  the  German  theatre. 
~f**>  To  enter  (a  house,  room,  etc.)  is  usually  translated  by  *rreten  in  (Ace.). 


"brown,  brawn 
dark,  bunfel 
English,  engitfcf) 
to  fetch,  fjofen 
French,  franj&ftfd) 
German,  beutfcf) 
the  glove,  bee  §anbfdjulj 
Plur:  bie  £aubid)uf)e 


73 

honest,  djvlicl) 
naughty,  unottig 
open,  offen 
Russian,  rafflfdfr 
to  send,  forward,  fdficfen 
the  umbrella,  ber  9Jegen= 
fdjirm 


yellow,  gt'IB 

100,000,  fjunberttaitfenb 

200,000,    5tDei$un&erttmf 

fenb,  etc 

a  million,  eine  SOtittion 
two  millions,    jtuei   2Jitt' 

liouen,  etc. 


Exercise  No.  14. 


1.  The  lizy,  naughty  boy,  —  the  daughter  of  an  honest,    poor 
woman,—  with  good,  cold  meat,  —  for  these  industrious  and  attentive 
girls,  —  your  large,  blue  dish,  —  of  (von)  which  new,   brown  carpet?  — 
what  plate?    A  large  one,  —  this  new  fork  ?    No,  that  old  one,  —  out  of 
which  building?    Out  of  the  high  one,  —  on  account  of  which  customers  ? 
On  account  of  our  good  ones,  —  for  what  kind  of  wine?  For  [some]  red, 

—  in  (Dot.)  what  newspapers?    In  (Dat.)  Russian  and  German  ones, 

—  a  yellow  colour?     No,   a  dark-one,  —  which  gloves?     These  black 
ones.  —  with  English  sailors,  —  an  expensive  umbrella?   No,  a  cheap  one, 

—  for  a  French  teacher,—  ,  a  small,  open  door. 

They  do  not  eat,  —  he  forgets,  —  I  am  giving,  —  do  we  forgive?  — 
are  you  reading  ?  —  thou  seest,  —  he  steps,  —  I  ate,  —  we  did  not  forget,  — 
didst  thou  give?  —  you  forgave,  —  she  read,  —  were  they  seeing?  —  we  did 
not  step,  —  have  you  eaten  ?  —  thou  hadst  forgotten,  —  has  he  given?  — 
they  had  not  forgiven,  —  we  had  read,  —  I  have  seen,  —  had  you  stepped? 

—  give  (thou)/  —  read!  —  do  not  forget!  —  he  will  not  forgive,  —  I  shall 
.see,  —  have  you  stepped?  —  I  have  stood,  —  had  he  gone?  —  we  have  not 
come,  —  they  were  standing,  —  did  you  go?  —  she  came. 

2.  SBer  Ijot  bieje  fdjonen,   grofjen   Wepfel  gefdjicft?     |>oten 
€>ie  einen  gnten  9legenfdjtrm  fur  ^rauletn   9ftarte.     £aben  <3ie 
(any)  guten  frangofifdjen  SBetn?     9£ein,  aber  tdj  Ijabe  (some)  fefyr 
guten  beutfc&en.     Sft  bit  gar&e  biefer  §anbfdjitl)e  ntdjt  §u  bunfel? 
Jtdtmeit  (i$ie  englijdje  gdhmgen  lefen?     $$   fann   englifdje  unb 
frangojtfcfie  lejen.     SBetcfteS  $la§  tootten   <Sie   fjaben,   ba3   grime 
ober  bag  gelbe?    2Rit  too*  fiir  Dfftjieren  gtng  S&r  vfoffe?    ©rift 
tnit  ruffifdjen  gcgangen.     ©c^idte  ber  Stiger  etnen   alien 

einen  jungen. 


Is  that  (das)  an  English  or  a  German  ghi#?  It  is  a  German  one. 
What  gloves  have  you  bought?  I  bought  yellow  ones.  The  church 
of  our  town  has  two  very  high  towers.  What  books  have  you  read  ? 
•I  have  read  French  ones.  Will  (wollen)  you  fetch  my  new  brown  um- 
brella? A  poor  little  girl  has  stepped  into  (or  entered)  the  house. 
Shall  I  forgive  (Dat.)  the  naughty  boys?  Did  you  send  (Dat,)  your 
teacher  (f.  )  yellow  or  red  roses  ?  I  have  sent  red  ones.  Has  the  woman 
fine,  ripe  pears  in  her  basket?  She  has  quite  ripe  ones.  The  soldier 
came  through  an  open  window  into  the  house. 

German  Grammar  3* 


Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  How  are  adjectives  declined,  if  se\  eral  of  them  stand  with  one  noun  ? 

2.  If  in  English  an  adjective  refers  to  a  noun  mentioned  and  the  nouu 
is  understood,  what  termination  does  it  take? 

3.  Is  the  English  word  one  rendered,  if  it  is  used  instead  of  the  noun  ? 

4.  What  form  has  the  adjective  fjod)  (high),  if  used  as  an  attribute? 

5.  Do  adjectives,  referring  to  nations,  begin  with  a  capital  letter  in 
German,  and  how  do  they  generally  end? 

6.  What  do  adjectives  ending  in  et  elide  when  adding  a  termination? 

7.  What  adjectives  can  do  the  same? 

8.  What  may  all  three  kinds  do  if  euphony  will  allow  it  ? 

9.  What  rules  follow  participles  used  as  adjectives? 


Conversation. 


I  have  eaten  a  good  ripe  pear. 

Who  has  given  it  (fie)  to  (Dat.) 

you(3fmen)? 

Our  gardener  gave  it  to  me  (mtr). 
Where  have  you  bought  these 

fine  brown  gloves  ? 
I  have  bought  them  (fie)  in  the 

town. 

Have  you  [any]  green  paper? 
No,  I  have  only  blue. 
Has  your  brother  a  good  watch? 
Yes,  he  has  an  expensive  watch. 
Did  you  read  this  English  news- 
paper? 
No,  I  have  read  that  German 

one. 
May  I  give  you  (gfinen)  a  glass 

of  this  good  old  wine  ? 
No,  please  (bitte)  give  me  (mtr) 

a  glass  [of]  new  wine. 
What  have  you  forgotten? 
I   have  forgotten  my  French 

books. 

Who  has  looked  into  the  room? 
It  was  our  agent. 
Can   you   forgive    (Dat.)    the 

naughty  boy  ? 
I  have   already  forgiven  him 


3d)  fio&e  etne  gute  reife  SBirne 

gegeijeit. 
SBer  f)at  fie  31)nen  gegeben? 

llnfer  Partner  gob  fie  mtr. 
2So    fcaben   @ie    biefe    fdjonen 

braunen  §aitbfdjul)e  gefauft? 
3dj  fia&e  fie  in  ber  ©tabt   ge* 

fauft. 

|mben  @te  griineS  papier? 
Stfem,  tdj  fiabe  nitr  blcmeS. 

t  3§r  23ruber  etne  gute  llfir? 
:a,  er  jfjat  etne  tfjeure. 
Safen  Ste  btefe  engiifdje  get 


len  did  you  come  to  your 
lesson  ? 
n  hour  ago  (bor.) 


tc^    ^abe    jene    beuifcfie 
gelejcn. 

S)arf  id)  3^«en  eht  @Ia§  tion 
biejem  guten  alien  2Bein  geben? 
bitte  geben  @te  ntir  ein 
nenen. 

@ie  oergeffen? 
3d)      abe    metne   frangoftfd^en 
Sucker  bergeffen. 
fiat  in  ba^  Dimmer  gefe^en? 
roar  unfer  Slgent. 

6te    bent     itnartigen 
£naben  bergeben? 
3c^  ^abe  tljm  fcfjon  bergeben. 

SSann  ftnb  6te  gn  3^  Stunbe 

gefommen? 
SSor  etner  ©tunbe. 


75 

ReaMttg  (Em*ct0e  Mo.  14. 


I.  Set  ^aufmann  wtb  feme 

(The  shopkeeper  and  his  customers. ) 

©in  £err  Brandjte  ein  $aar  ©triimpfe.      (£r  trat  in 

needed          .         pair     (of)  stockings 

cinen  Saben  unb  fagte  §u  bem  §anb(er: — ©eBen  <Ste  mir 

shop        .          said       .         .  dealer  .  .     to  n*e 

ein  $aor  (Striimpfe,  aBer  gute. — S)er  Sabenfjdnbler   §eigte 

pair      (of)  stockings        .  .  .  shopman  showed 

if)tn  fiinf  $aar.     £er  §err  roaftfte  ein  $aar  unb  fragte 

to  him     .         pairs  .  .  chose         .         pair          .          asked 

bann: — 3Sa§  fotten   biefe  ©triimpfe   !often?— 23ier   SOtorf, 

then  .  .  .  stockings  .  .  marks 

fagte  ber  ®cwfmann. — 2)a§   ift  §n  t)iet,   fagte   ber   §err. 

said        .         shopkeeper  that       .        .         .  said 

3<f)  Bin  ein  ffrennb  tjon  3^rem  §aufe  unb  fomme  immer 
gu  S^nen.     <Sie  ntilffen  mir  bie  (Striimpfe  better 

you  .  .  to  me    .  stockings    therefore  s 

biHiger  geben. — 8d^  banfe  3^nen  bafiir,  fagte  ber 

cheaper  .  .        thank         you         for  it          said         .  shop- 

ntcmn.      SIBer  id§   fann  bie   ©trwnpfe  nid^t   fiir   tueniger 

keeper  ....          stockings  .  .  less 

geBen.     SSon  metnen  ^reunben  mu§  id)  teBen;  meine  gei 


fommen  nicfyt  §u  mir. — 

.  .         .        me 

n.  S33ie  roeit  ift  e§  ton  DlbenBurg  Bi§  Bremen?  fragte 

far      .      .         .  to  asked 

ein  £$rember. — s&fyi  @tunben. — llnb  raie  roeit  ift   e§   toon 

stranger  .  .  (miles)        .  .         far 

S3remen  M3  £)tbenBurg? — -iftitn,  ba  roirb   fein  Unterfc^ieb 

—  to  —  well     there        .  .  difference 

fetnl — £) !  Bitte  nm  SDer^ei^ung,  ba§  ift  nid^t  immer  ber  3faIL 

beg    your       pardon  that     .         .         always       .      case 

@o  finb  e§  3.  S3.  (gum  SBeiftriel)  toon  Dftern  Bi§  ^fmgften 

—         .         .  for  example  .         Easter        .     Whitsuntiiie 

72Botfjett  unb  t?on  ^ftngften  6i§  Dftern  45! — 

Whitsuntide     to       Easter 


76 

fifteenth  Lesson.  Siinfee§nte  Seftiotu 

Comparison  of  Adjectives. 

The  comparative  of  adjectives  is  formed  by  adding  er  to  the 
ordinary  form  (the  Positive)  ;  the  superlative  by  adding  ft,  or,  by 
adding  ften  and  placing  am  before  ;  as, 

Positive.  Comparative.  Superlative. 

ttetn,  small  Heiner,  smaller  fleinft,  am  f  leinften,  small- 

est 

cufmerffam,  attentive         aufmerffamer,    more    at-    cufmerlfamft,  am  aufmetf' 
tentive  famften,  most  attentive 

The  comparative  and  superlative,  if  attributes,  are  declined  like 
other  adjectives,  the  terminations  being  added  to  the  above  forms 
(tf  enter,  fleinft).—  Thus  : 


Sing.  Masc. 
(bet  fleiner=e 
1  ein  fletner=er 
(  —  lleiner=er 
(  ber     fleinft=e 
4  mein  fletnft=er 
(  —      fleinft=er 

Fern, 
bie   fleiner--e 
cine  I  leinefe 
—  IIeiner--e 
bie       fleinfce 
meine  !Ieinft=e 
—      fletnft=e 

flML 

ba§  IIeiner=e 
ein  Heiner-e§ 
—   IIeiner=e§ 
ba§      Iteinft=e 
mein   !Ieinft=e§ 
—      fleinji=e§ 

Plur.  of  all  Gen. 
bie     IIeiner=en 
meine  IIeiner=en 
—    fleinet^e 
bie      fleinft'en 
meine  fleinft=en 
—    neinft=e 

Examples:—  (5in  fletner=er  %i\<f),  a  smaller  table,  bet  fletnft=e  Jtf^, 

the  smallest  table    bie  fleiner=e  U^r,  the  smaller  watch,  meine  neinft=e 

•  Uljr,  my  smaUest  watch    btefe§  IIeiner=e  genfter,  this  smaller  window, 

itnfer  fleinft=e»  genfter,  our  smallest  window    fleinet=e  Sdume,  smaller 

trees,  bie  flein[t=en  93aume,  the  smallest  trees. 

If  the  noun  is  understood  the  adjective  in  the  Comparative  or  Su- 
?-perlative,  like  the  Positive,  takes  the  usual  terminations  ;  as, 

SBir  IjoBen  fdjone  Slepfel,  abet  unfer  SSetter  Ijat  fc^5ner=e  (aBer  unfet 
Setter  Ijat  bie  f^6nft=en).>   We  have  nice  apples,  but  our  cousin  has 
nicer  ones  (but  our  cousin  has  the  nicest  ones).      @ie  tft  bie  fdjonfte 
.  toon  ben  2)amen.    She  is  the  nicest  of  the  ladies. 

'  The  Comparative  and  Superlative,  if  predicates,  are  invariable, 

,  arid  the  form  ,;am  fletnften"  must  be  used  in  the  Superlative;  as, 

£a§  $au§  ift  fleinet.    The  house  is  smaller.      Sa§  £au§  tft  am 

Iletnften.    The  house  is  (the)  smallest,     ©r  ift  aufmerlfamer.     He  is 

more  attentive.    Gr  root  am  aufmerffamften.    He  was  most  attentive. 

"  NOTES.  —  1.  Adjectives  which  do  not  allow  the  superlative  termin- 
ation ft  to  be  easily  sounded,  insert  an  e  before  ft  .  Such  are  the  ad- 
jectives ending  in  b,  t,  tlj,  8,  6,  fd),  j.  Thus: 

fdjtecfit,  bad  faledjteft,  am  fd)tecf)teften 

ijeife,  hot      Ijei&eft,      am  fcet&eften 

2.  Adjectives  in  el  and  generally  those  in  en,  er  in  the  Comparative 
drop  the  e  before  I,  n,  r  ;  as,—  bunfel  (dark),  bunfler     tljeuer  (expensive), 

tljeuret 

3.  Adjectives  in  e  in  the  Comparative  add  r  only,  and  in  the  Su- 
perlative they  omit  the  e  when  possible;  as,—  trfige  (lazy),  trager,  trfigfl 


Learn  by  heart  the  irregular  verbs:  befefjlen,  to  command,  to 
order  empfeljlen,  to  recommend  bred&en,  to  break  jerbredjen,  to 
break  (to  pieces)  $elf en,  to  help. 


to  choose,  too"fjlen 
the  cofiee,  bet  Coffee 
cool,  fiifcl 
the  cup,  bie  £offe 
„    evening,  ber  Slbenb 
hot,  fceife 
impolite, 


to  look  for,  to  seek,  fudjen 

merry,  toergniigt 

the  over  coat,  (great  coat), 

ber  tiberrod! 
the  pocket-handkerchief, 

ba§  5Tafd)entuti) 
polite,  Pfltd) 
The  ordinal  numbers  are  declined  like  adjectives. 


the  sugar,  ber  Slitter  ' 
than,  oil,  ttrie 
the  tea,  ber  £ 
the  first,  ier,  bie,  ba§r- 
erfte,  Plur:  bie  erftm*~ 
the  second,  ber 


, 
third,  bu  britte 


Exercise  No.  15. 

1.  Cheap,  cheaper,  cheapest^*),  —  deep,  deeper,  deepest(*),  —  pleasant, 
more  pleasant,  most  pleasant(*),  —  honest,  more  honest,  mosthonest(*),  — 
a  more  naughty  boy,  the  most  naughty  boy,  —  a  richer  lady,  the  richest 
lady,  —  the  smaller  pocket-handkerchief,  my  smallest  pocket-handker- 
chief, —  politer  people,  the  impolitest  people,  —  during  a  cooler  evening^, 

—  with  his  freshest  milk,  —  from  the  newer  knife,  —  out  of  the  finest 
gardens,  —  for  our  cheapest  sugar,  —  without  the  smaller  cup,  —  for  my 
newest  ruler,  —  for  riper  pears,  —  which  coffee?   The  cheaper  one,  —  with: 
which  pupil  (f.)1      With  the  most  attentive  one,  —  for  sweeter  fruit? 
No,  for  sourer,  —  what  days?  The  merriest  days,  —  he  is  more  faithful,  he 
is  most  faithful,  —  it  was  more  useful,  it  was  most  useful,  —  the  hottest- 
tea,—  for  a  darker  colour,  —  with  the  lazier  pupils,  —  for  a  more  expen- 
sive over-coat. 

He  commands,  —  they  are  recommending,  —  thou  breakest,  —  do  yon 
break  (to  pieces)?  —  we  do  not  help,  —  I  order  (command),  —  I  was  recom- 
mending, —  we  broke,  —  did  they  break  (to  pieces)  ?  —  she  did  not  help,, 

—  you  commanded,  —  thou  recommendedst,  —  have  you  broken?  —  thou  .. 
hadst  broken  (to  pieces),  —  I  have  helped,  —  we  had  not  ordered  (com- 
manded), —  have  they  not  recommended?  —  break  (thou)f  —  break  (to 
pieces)!  —  don't  help  !  —  command  (thou)  I  —  recommend  ! 

2.  S)ie  $inber  ftmren  int  (Garten  bergniigter  ate  (or  rote)  inv 
$aufe.      S93a3  fur  einen  lleberrocE  fuc^en  6ic1     SSftetnen  neuftetu 
35er  ©otnrner  ift  bie  beifeefte  SaljreSaeit.     SO^eine  Gutter  fiat  bir 
tfjeureren  Xajcfientiidjer   geftm&It    £aben  @ie  ton  ber  alten 


ter-  gegeffen?     2)er  Coffee  in  btefer  Xaffe  ift  fiifjer  a!3  (or  roie) 
Sthee  in 


ber  Sthee  in  jener  Xaffe.      S)tefer  gucfer  ift  am  bittigften. 
^at  ba§  fc^onfte  SBteffer?    ®arl  fiat  bag  fd^onfte. 

Which  season  is  more  pleasant,  (the)  spring  or  (the)  autumn?'  Are; 
you  looking  for  your  newest  pocket-handkerchief?    (The)  dogs  are  more-- 
faithful than  (the)  cats.     What  over-coat  did  you  choose,  a  cheap  one  or 
the  most  expensive  one  ?  Have  you  broken(**)  the  smaller  cup?  These 
apples  are  sweet,  those  pears  are  sweeter,  and  these  cherries  are  (the)  < 
sweetest.      All  the  (alle)  children  were  merry,  but  the  girls  were  the  • 
merriest.     (The)  cooler  evenings  are  more  pleasant.     My  sister's  friend  . 
(f.)  always6  reads'*  the  most  useful  books. 

(*)  Translate  the  superlative  in  both  forms,  as  shown  in  the  first  examples.  *. 
(**)  To  break  in  the  sense  of  to  break  to  pieces  is  translated  by  jerBredjen..' 


78 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

L  How  is  the  comparative  of  an  adjective  formed? 

2.  How  is  the  superlative  formed? 

3.  How  are  the  comparative  and  superlative  declined,  if  attributes  ? 

4.  "What  is  done  if  the  noun  is  understood? 

5.  Are  the  comparative  and  superlative  declined,   if  predicates,  aud* 
which  superlative  form  can  only  be  used  as  predicate? 

6.  "What  adjectives  insert  an  e  before  ft  in  the  superlative  ? 

7.  What  do  adjectives  in  el,  and,  usually,  those  in  en  and  erdropin.the 
comparative  ? 

8*  What  do  adjectives  in  e  add  or  omit  when  adding  the  Comparative 
and  Superlative  terminations  ? 


Conversation. 


Which  hat  is  nicer,  this  black 

one  or  that  brown  one  ? 
The  black  one  is  nicer. 
Who  has  the  darkest  gloves? 

Elizabeth  has  the  darkest  ones. 

Have  you  a  smaller  dog  than 

your  cousin  or  your  friend  ? 

No,  my  friend's  dog  is  (the) 

smallest. 
Can    you    recommend     these 

cherries? 
"No,  the  cherries  in  that  basket 

are  sweeter. 

Don't  break  the  glasses. 
I    have    already    broken    the 

smaller  one. 
Who   has  ordered  (Dat.)  the 

soldiers  to  go  to  (in  the)  church? 
Their  officer  ordered  (it)  them 

(ifinen). 

Where  (toofiin)  are  you  going? 
I  am  going  home  (nadj  4?aufe), 

I  have  forgotten  my  pocket- 

liandkerchief. 

Whence  (roofier)  do  you  come? 
I  have  been  looking  for  my 

tnife  in  the  garden. 
"When  will  you  buy  a  new  over- 
coat? 
I  shall  buy  one  (einen)  in  three 

weeks. 


SSelcfier  |mt  ift  fdjoner,   btefer 

fd)tt)arj$e  ober  jener  braune? 
55er  fdjroarje  ift  jdjoner. 
SBer  fiat   bie   bunfelften 

fcfiufie? 

(Htfabetlj  fiat  bte  bunfelffen.  • 
§aben  <Ste  etnen  fletneren  |mitb 

ate  (or  rote)  3$r  better  ober 

S§r  greimb? 
yitin,  ber  Sunb  meme§  greimbeS 

ift  am  fietnften. 
£onnen  @te  biefe  ftirfcfien  emp* 

feblen? 
S'letn,    bte   ^trfcfien   in    jenem 

Slor6e  ftnb  fitter. 
Berbrec^eit  ©ie  bte  ©lafer  ntc^t. 
3<^  fiabe  f^on  ba§  ?(etnere  ger* 

broken. 
2Ber  fiat  ben  ©olbnten  oefofilen 

in  bte  SHrcfie  §u  gefien? 
S^t  Dfftgier  befall  eg 


geljen  6ie? 
gefie  nac 
mein  £a(d)entttd)  oergeffen. 


SBoficr  iEommen  @tc? 

3d)  fiabe  mein  9Keff£r  tm  ©arten 

gefud)t. 
SSann  merben  @ie  etnen  neuen 

Ueberrodf  faufen? 
3d)  tterbe  in  brei  SBoc3^en  einen 

faufen. 


79 

drercise  Ito.  15. 


,  ®ontg  turn  Hrragonien,  genannt 

—  .          fifth  .  .  called 

ber  ®roJ3miitf)ige,  tear  ber  §elb  feine3  SafjrfjnnbertS.     @r 

generous  .  .        hero  .  century  (age) 

bacfjte  nur  baran,   'Slnbere    gliicflicl)    511   ntacfyen.      liefer 

thought       .         of  that          others  happy          .  make 

giirft  ging    gern    ofjne    ®efolge   unb    gu   gufj   burdfj   bie 

prince         liked  to  go  .         attendance        .         on      foot 

©trafjen  fehter  §auptftabt.      9J?an  mad)te  if>m  etnft  9Sor= 

capital  one  (they)  made    him      once      remon- 

ftettimgett  iiber  bie  ^efa^r  fetner  ©^ajiergdnge.     @r  ant= 

strances  about      .         danger  .  walks  .          an- 

toortete:  ,,(Sin  SSater,  toeldjer  unter  feinen  ^inbern  um^er= 

swered  .  .  who  .  .  about 


fear 

(Siner  t)on  feinen  @c^a|meiftertt  brad^te  tf)m  etne  Sumrne 

one         .  .  treasurers         brought    him      .  sum 

t)on  tcwfenb  2)u!aten,    @tn  Dffi^ier  njar  gerabe   jngegen 

ducats  .  .  .  just  present 

nnb  fagte  gan^  teife   ju   S^nanb.:    f,223enn   idj   nut   biefe 

low         .         some-one  if  ... 

(Simtme  ^citte,  tt)ie  toiirbe  i(^  gliidlid^  fein!w  —  35er 

sum      would  have   .        should        .          happy 

Ijatte  e§  gefjort  unb  fprac^:    ,,2)u  fottft    e§    fein» 

heard        .          spoke  ....  take 

biefe  taufenb  5)ulaten  ntit  bir!° 

ducats  .      thee 

(Sine  mit  9Jlatrofen  unb  <5olbaten  Belabene  ^Jafeere  ging 

laden  galley 

unter;    er   Befall,   i^nen   §iilfc  ju  Bringenj  man  jogerte. 

down          .  .  them          help          .  bring       one  (they)  hesitated 

—  &a  fprang  5ltp^on§  fetbft  in  ein  $8oot  unb  fagte  ju 

there      sprang  himself     .         .         boat          .          said       . 

ben  Umftefjenben:    ,,3dj  mill  lieBer  if>r  (^efci^rte,  a&  ber 

bystanders  .  .         better        .        companion        .        , 

3itfcfjauer  ifjreg  Xobe§  fein." 

spectator          .  death        be 


Sixteenth  Lesson.  (sed^efjnte  Seftioiu 

Comparison  of  Adjectives  (colluded). 

The  following  adjectives,  all  of  one  syllable,  modify  the  vowels 
a,  o,  or  u  in  the  Comparative  and  Superlative : 

alt,  old  lattg,  long  grob,  coarse 


arg,  arrant 
arm,  poor 
I)art,  hard 
fait,  cold 


rfjarf,  sharp  rotf),  red 

djtoadj,  weak  Jung,  young 

cfrtoarg,  black  Itug,  prudent 

tarf,  strong  frumm,  crooked 


franl,  sick,  ill  roarm,  warm  fur§,  short 

Ex.:    alt       alter,  older  or  elder  alteft,  am  alteften,  oldest  or  eldest 
grob     grober,  coarser  grobfr,  am  grofcften,  coarsest 

jung     jiinger,  younger         jiingft,  am  jiingften,  youngest 

The  following  are  sometimes  modified,  and  sometimes  not  : 

blafj,  pale  fdjmal,  narrow,  small  biimnt,  stupid 

glatt,  smooth  gart,  tender  gejunb,  healthy, 

najj,  wet  frontm,  pious  wholesome 

The  following  are  compared  irregularly  : 

Positive.  Comparative.  Suptrlative. 

grot?,  large  (great,  etc.)      grofjer,  larger  grBfct,  am  gro&ten,  largest 

gut,  good  Beffer,  better  Beft,  am  beften,  best 

|odj,  Ijoft,  high  $ol)er,  higher  Ijorfjft,  am  Ijpdjften,  highest 

nab,e,  near  naljer,  nearer  nadjft,  am  ncidjften,  nearest, 

next 


In  Comparisons  as  —  as  is  translated  :    ebenfo  —  al§  (or  tote), 
and  not  so  —  as:  nic^t  fo  —  al§  (or  tine)  ;  as, 

©ein  Dnfel  ift  efcenjo  retc^  al§  (or  lute)  metn  2Sater.  His  uncle  is 
as  rich  as  my  father.  2Jer  8naf>e  ift  nic^t  fo  franf  al§  (or  tuie)  ba& 
9Jlabd)en.  The  boy  is  not  so  ill  as  the  girl. 

REMARKS  ox  THE  PLACE  OF  SOME  WOUDS  IN  GERMAN  SENTENCES. 

1.  Adverbs  of  time  (like  :  to-day,  to-morrow,  soon,  always,  again, 
after  a  week,  in  three  days,  etc.  )  stand  directly  after  the  verb  or  auxiliary  ; 
as,  —  SJJetn  greunb  gef)t  Ijeute  nidjt  in  bie  Birdie.     My  friend  does  not  go  to 

church  to-day.     %$  toerbe  in  bret  SBodjen  meinen  Dnfel  6efuc§en.     I 
shall  visit  my  uncle  in  three  weeks. 

2.  As  in  English,  these  words  can  commence  a  sentence,  but  then, 
in  German,  the  verb  or  auxiliary  precedes  the  subject  ;  as, 

$eute  geljt  mein  greunb  nidjt  in  bie  Strtfie.  To-day  my  friend 
does  not  go  to  church.  3n  bret  SSodjen  toerbe  id)  meinen  Dnfel  6e* 
fud)en.  In  three  weeks  I  shall  visit  my  uncle. 

3.  A  noun  in  the  Dative  generally  precedes  a  noun  in  the  Ac- 
cusative ;  as,  —  3$  §abe  meinem  SBruber  einen  @d)luffel  gegeben.    I  have  given 

a  key  to  my  brother. 

Learn  by  heart  the  irregular  verbs:   neljmen,  to  take    fpredjeu, 
to  speak    Derfprecfjen,  to  promise    fteljlen,  to  steal. 


81 


here,  Ijter 
long,  long 

the  month,  bet  SOfconot 
Plur:  bie  donate 
the  mountain,  ber  S3erg 
near,  nolje 
the  night,  bte 
Plur:  bte 
the  pocket,  bie  Zafdje 


short,  fur$ 
strong,  ftarl 
the  wind,  bet  SHJinb 
to-day,  Ijeute 
to-morrow,  morgen 
yesterday,  geftern 
the  day  before  yesterday, 
borgeftern    |iibermorgen ' 
the  day  after  to-morrow, 


the  fourth,  bet  toiette 
fifth,  bet  ffinfte 
sixth,  ber  fecf)§te 
seventh,  ber   fiebente. 
(or  ber  ftebte) 
eighth,  ber  odjte 
ninth,  ber  neunte 
„   tenth,  bet  jeljnte 


Exercise  No.  16. 

1.  Cold,  colder,  coldest,  —  old,  older  (elder),  oldest  (eldest),  —  red,, 
redder,  reddest,  —  poor,  poorer,  poorest,  —  young,  younger,  youngest,  — 
sick,  sicker,  sickest,  —  black,  blacker,  blackest,  —  short,  shorter,  shortest, 

—  strong,  stronger,  strongest,  —  long,  longer,  longest,  —  warm,  warmer,. 
warmest,  —  high,  higher,  highest,  —  much,  many,  more,   most,  —  large,, 
larger,  largest,  —  good,  better,  best,  —  near,  nearer,  nearest  (next),  —  my 
largest  pocket,  —  a  warmer  month,  —  the  next  station,  —  higher  moun- 
tains, —  a  stronger  wind,  —  he  is  as  poor  as  his  brother,  —  these  pencils  are 
not  so  expensive  as  those  pens  . 

We  take,  —  I  am  speaking,  —  do  they  promise?  —  he  steals,—  thou' 
takest,  —  do  you  speak?—  I  promised,  —  wedid  not  steal,—  was  she  taking? 

—  they  did  not  speak,  —  they  promised,—  you  stole,  —  thou  wast  taking, 

—  have  you  spoken?—  I  had  not  taken,  —  speak  (thou)!  —  don't  promise  ! 

—  do  (thou)  not  steal  !—  take  (thou)  I  —  I  cannot  promise,  —  we  shall  taker 

—  thou  shalt  not  steal,  —  he  will  speak,  —  are  you  allowed  to  take? 


2.  ®o3  SBetter  roar  geftern  fdjoner  al§  (or  rote)  fieiite.  Unfer 
SBrob  nrirb  morgen  beffer  fein.  £aben  <5te  bem  armen  ®naben 
Sfcren  beften  £ut  gegeben?  3)a3  jiingfte  £tnb  tneiner  @d)icefter 
ift  am  !ran!ften.  S)te  SSerge  ber  ©djtoeift  ftnb  footer  al$  (or  rote) 
bie  93erge  3)eutf<i)tcmb3.  SBaffer  tft  gut,  SSter  ift  beffer,  aber  SBein 
ift  am  beften.  S<^  bin  nid)t  fo  alt  al§  (or  roie)  S^w.^oujinc. 
^>ter  ftnb  toarmere  ^anbfdjufte.  SBerben  @te  ubermorgen  ebenfa 
fc^one  25etl(^en  !aufen  !onnen  alS  (or  rote)  geftern  ?  SKeldje  donate 
finb  am  roarmften? 

Where  is  the  nearest  station?  I  will  visit  the  president's  eldest 
son  to-morrow.  To-day  the  wind  is  stronger  than  yesterday.  The 
pockets  in  my  new  over-coat  are  larger  than  the  pockets  in  my  old  one. 
I  gave  better  books  to  (Dot.)  your  friend.  (The)  most  people  are  not 
rich.  The  day  after  to-morrow  we  shall  have  the  longest  day.  How 
old  is  your  eldest  girl  ?  My  nephew  is  not  so  young  as  your  daughter. 
Where  are  the  highest  mountains  ?  The  woman  was  as  ill  the  day  be- 
fore yesterday  as  [she  was]  yesterday.  Your  uncle  will  be  here  in  two> 
months.  In  (im)  summer  the  days  are  longest  and  the  nights 
shortest.  You  have  many  books,  but  I  have  more,  and  Charles  has  the 
most. 


Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  What  adjectives  modify  their  vowels  in  the  comparative  and  super- 
lative? 

2.  What  adjectives  are  sometimes  modified,  and  sometimes  not? 

3.  Which  are  compared  irregularly? 

4.  How  are  as — as  and  not  so — as  translated  in  comparisons  ? 

5.  What  place  do  Adverbs  of  time  occupy  in  a  German  sentence? 

6.  Can  these  words  also  commence  a  sentence,  and  what  is  then  done 
in  German? 

7.  If  a  noun  in  the  Dative,  and  one  in  the  Accusative  occur  in  a  sen- 
tence, which  noun  must  precede  the  other  in  German  ? 


Conversation. 


Was  the  weather  finer  yesterday 

than  [it  is]  to-day? 
Yesterday  it  was  finer,  but  the 

day  before  yesterday  (it)  was 

finest. 
Is  my   cup  larger  than  your 


Your  cup  is  as  large  as  my 

glass. 
How  old  is  the  eldest  sister  of 

your  friend  (f.)1 
She  is  seventeen  years  old. 
Was  there  (went)  a  colder  wind 

the  day  before  yesterday  than 

to-day? 
Xo,  the  wind  is  as  cold  to-day. 

What  have  you  said  (gefagt)  to 

your  friend? 
I  promised  to  visit  his  parents 

in  a  fortnight  (mergefinXagen). 
Who  is  taking  the  umbrella  ? 
The  mother  has  taken  it  (tfin). 
Is  that  woman  honest? 
Xo,  she  has  stolen  a  watch. 
Have  you  recommended  a  new 

book  to  (Dai.)  your  pupil? 
Xo,  I  recommended  him  (ibm) 

a  German  newspaper. 
When  will  our  advocate  come  ? 

He  promised  to  be  here  the  day 
after  to-morrow. 


bag  better  geftern  fdjoirer 
ate  beute? 

ern    tear    e§   fdjoner,   after 
oorgeftern  roar  e§  am  fdjonften. 


3ft  rneme  Xaffe  grower  ate  S^r 

0(a5? 
Sftre  Xaffe  ift  ebenfo   grofj   ate 

mem 


2Bie  att  ift  bie  altefte  ©djtuefter 

Sbrer  greunbm? 
@te  ift  ftebgefin  Satire  alt. 
@tng    t)orgeftern     em    fiilterer 

SBinb  ate  fjeute? 


m,  ber  SStnb  ift  fjeirte  ebenfo 

fait. 
2Ba3    fjaben    Ste    p     3»6rem 

grcunbe  gefagt? 
Sid)  Derfprad),  m  t>  tersefjn  Sagen 

feme  GItern  gu  befu^en. 
SSer  ntmmt  ben  9?egenfd)trm  ? 
®te  93lutter  bat  ibn  genommen. 
Sft  bteje  grau  ebrtidj? 
9lein,  fie  Ijat  cine  Ufcr  geftoblcn. 
c  Sbrem  6d)ii(er  ein 
iid)  empfoblen? 
id)    empfahl    ifjm   eine 

beittfc^e  Settling. 
SBann  roirb  unfer  5lboo!at  font* 

men? 
6r  oerjprad)  itbermorgen  ^ter  311 

fetn. 


€rern0e  Wo.  16. 


$)er  Benifjmte  Sftarfdfjafl  tion  <5ad()fen  toar  fefjr  ftarl. 

famous  marshal          .          Saxony 

(£r  madfyte  einmal  einen  Sftttt  in  ber  UntgeBung  toon   2fte£ 

made          once  .  ride      .        .  environs  . 

unb  faf)  plo|ltrf),  bag  fein  ^Sferb  ein  @Hfen  derloren  Ijatte* 

suddenly      that  .  .        iron  (shoe)    lost 

3m  narfrften  S)orfe  fragte  er  ben  ©rfjmieb,  oB  er  ba§  $ferb 

asked      .         .  smith   whether. 

Befrfjlagen  fonne?    £>er  §cmbtt)er!er  Beja^te  btcS.     31I§  er 

shoe  could  .  artisan  affirmed     this  when     . 

fiegtmten    tooflte,    na!)m   t^m   ber  3}Jarf(^an  ba§  |mfeifett 

begiu  .  .  him         .  marshal  .         horse-shoe 

cm§  ber  §cmb  unb  gerbrad^   e§j   eBcnfo  bte  fotgenben  Bi§ 

—  .  .  .        the  same       .  following        till 

er  mtgeftiljjr  ein  f)alBe§  ®ii|enb  gerBroi^en  §atte.      Xann 

about  .  half  dozen  .  .  then 

fanb    er   eine£,    n)etc^e§  feiner  ^raft  tutberftanb.     $)iefe3 

found       .  one  which  .         strength         resisted  this-one 

Befall  er  anfgutegen  nnb  toarf  nac^  Beenbtgter  5lrBeit  einen 

to  be  put  on        .        threw         .  finished          work 

Xfjater  anf  bte  3Ser!Banf.    &§t   tarn  bte  ?Rei!)e   on    ben 

dollar         .          .       working-table       now          .  (was)  the        smith's 

Srfjmteb.     (£r  na§m  ben  Staler  unb  gerBrac^  t^n  eBenfatt§. 

turn  .  .  .          dollar          .  .  it        likewise 

$5er  Sftarfdjatt  ftmrf  einen  jtDeiten,  britten,  Bt§  ber  (Sc^mteb 

marshal        threw          .  .  ...          smith 

eBenfo  triete  ^aler  gerBroc^en  §atte,  al§  fein  ®unbe  §ufeifen. 

dollars  .  ...  .  horse-shoes 

—  £)§!  ©ie  tt)erben  aHe  nteine   (Setbftitde  gerBredjen,  —  rief 

.  all  money-pieces  .  cried 

ber  Severe.  —  SSir  Gotten  fe^en,  oB  @ie  ftar!  genug  finb, 

latter  .  .  .      whether   .  .         enough 

oudj  biefeS  §u  serBredfjen.    TOt  biefen  Shorten  gaB  er  tfjm  ein 

this  one     .  .  words          .        .     him 

(Mbftiid,  nield)c§  ber  §uffd^mieb  n)ol)I  ni( 

gold-piece          which         .  farrier       probably     . 


84 

Seventeenth  Lesson.  SteBjefjnte  Sefttoiu 

The  Pronouns. 

The  Pronouns  consist  of  Personal,  Possessive,  Demonstrative, 
Interrogative,  Relative  and  Indefinite  pronouns. 

The  Personal  Pronouns. 

Nom.  Dat.  Ace.  Gen.(*) 

Wr  I  tntr  mid),  me  metner,  of  me 

»tt,  thou  bir  bid),  thee  betner,  of  thee 

£r»  n®  t&m  i&n,  him  fetner,  of  him 

PJLSP8  tfjr  fie,  her  ifirer,  of  her 

e8(**)r  it  it)m  e§(**),  it  beffen  ifeiner),  of  it 

totr,  we  un§  »n§,  us  unj(e)rer,  of  us 


fle,  they  ibncit  fte,  them  iijrer,  of  them 

It  is  translated  by  er  (Norn.)  or  tfjn  (Ace.),  if  reierring  to  a 

masculine  noun,  and  fie  (Noin.  or  Ace.),  if  referring  to  a  feminine- 

noun;  as,—  So  ift  mem  BleifKft?—  ®r  ift  ouf  bent  Sifdje.     Where  is  my 

pencil?—  It  is  on  the  table.       SSer  Ijot  meinen  JRorf?—  tar!  ^at  i^n» 

Who  has  my  coat?—  Charles  has  it.    SBo  ift  bie  Siirfte?—  3ft  fie  nidjt 

ouf  bcm  Jifc^e?    Where  is  the  brush?—  Is  it  not  on  the  table? 

It  and  them  if  not  referring  to  persons  preceded  by  a  preposi- 
tion, governing  the  Dative  or  Accusative  are  generally  translated 
by  ba,  the  preposition  being  affixed  to  ba.  —  If  the  preposition  com- 
mences with  a  vowel,  bar  is  used  ;  as, 

bamtt,  with  it  (or  with  them)  barau?,  out  of  it  (or  out  of  them) 

bafur,  for  it  (or  for  them)  baran,  at  it  (or  at  them) 

bobitrdj,  through  it  (or  through  them)  )    barauf,  upon  it  (or  upon  them) 

Note.  —  "  It",  not  referring  to  persons,  in  the  Genitive,  has  to  be  rendered4 
by  beffcn  (or  beifel&en)  ;  as,—  fcafjrenb  beffen  (or  be§feI6en),  during  it. 

It,  tliey,  if  subject  of  the  verb  to  be  and  referring  to  a  following 
noun  (or  pronoun)  are  translated  by  e3  and  the  verb  agrees  with 
the  following  noun  (or  pronoun)  in  number  ;  as, 

S»  ift  mein  SBruber.    It  is  my  brother.    6§  itjaren  ©tubenten.   They 
were  students.    (£§  fmb  Sfce  £6djter.    It  is  your  daughters. 

The  following  expressions  are  rendered  thus  : 
id)  &tn  e§,  it  is  1  i    urir  fmb  e§,  it  is  we1 

bu  bift  e§,  it  is  you  ©te  Ttnb  ei,  it  is  you 

ct  ([it)  ift  e§,  it  is  he  (she)  '    pe  fink  ei,  it  is  they 

93in  id)  eS?  is  it  If    3d)  tear  e§,  it  was  I;  etc. 

Note.—  ®u  (thou),  Plural:  iljr  (you)  are  used  for  addressing  near  rela- 
tions, intimate  friends,  children,  and  animals;  they  coram  'in-e  with  capitals 
in  correspondence  only.—  The  usual  form  for  you  is  Sic,  which  always  be 
gins  with  a  capital  letter  even  in  changing  into  3§nen,  Qijrer,  in  order  to 
distinguish  them  from  the  3rd  person  plural. 


Learn  by  heart  the  irregular  verbs:  *fterben,  to  die     treffen,  to 
hit,  to  meet    berberben,  to  spoil    toerfen,  to  throw. 

(*)  The  Genitive  is  seldom  used  now  and  is  generally  replaced  by  a  preposition 
with  the  pronoun  in  the  Dative  or  Accusative.— In  poetry  the  abbreviated 
forms  mein,  betn  fein,  etc.  often  occur. 
(**)  e3  is  sometimes  '§. 


the  boot,  bcr  ©ttefel 
„    bottle,  bic  Stofdje 
„    cap,  bie  SOlii&e  ($appe) 
„    market,  ber  SUJarft 
'to  meet,  Begegnen*  (Dat.) 
the  pair,  ba3  $aar 
to  pay,  Bejafjlen  (saljlen) 
to  say,  to  tell,   fagen(*) 

(Dat.) 
the  shoe,  bcr 


85 

Plur:  bie  ©d^u^c 
the  shoemaker,  ber  <sd)ut)= 

madjer 

to  show,  jetgen 
the  tailor,  ber  6djneiber 
„   theatre,  ba§  Sweater 
„  trousers,    bie    fiofen 

(PI.  f.) 

the  waist-coat,  bie  SSefte 
to  want  (wish),  ttmnfdjen 


the  way,  ber  SBeg 
„    eleventh,  ber  elfte 
„    twelfth,  ber  jfoSIfte 
„   thirteenth,  ber  brei« 

geljnte 
„   nineteenth,  ber  neun» 

jefjnte 
„   twentieth,  bcr  sfoan« 


Exercise  No.  17. 

1.  I,— we, — thou, — you, — he, — she, — it, — they, — with  me, — with 
us, — from  thee, — from  you, — after  him, — after  her, — after  them, — for 
me, — for  us, — without  thee, — without  you, — through  him, — through 
her, — through  them,— of  me  (Gen.), — of  us  (G.),—  of  thee  (G.), — of 
you  (&.},—  of  him  (G.),—  of  her  (G.),—ot  it  (G.),—of  them  (G.)— 
Where  is  the  market?    I  cannot  say  where  it  is. — Did  you  see  my  cap? 
No,  I  have  not  seen  it— Do  you  want  the  gimlet?    Yes,  I  want  it. — 
Did  the  tailor  send  my  waist-coat?    Yes,  it  is  on  the  chair. — Did  the 
•woman  come  with  tho  children?    Yes,  she  has  come  with  them. — Here 
is  a  glass,  don't  step  on  it.  —Did  you  eat  with  this  spoon  ?    Yes,  I  have 
eaten  with  it.  — "Will  you  have  [some]  of  these  apples  ?    Yes,  I  will  have 
[some]  of  them. — Are  all  (alle)  these  pears  ripe?    No,   there  (es)  are 
unripe  ones  amongst  them. — Is  it  your  friend? — It  was  his  teacher. — 
They  are  my  shoes. — Were  they  soldiers? — Is  it  you?  No,  it  is  I. — 
Was  it  they  ?  No,  it  was  she. — It  is  we. — Was  it  he  ? 

We  die, — I  am  hitting, — thou  spoilest, — do  you  throw? — he  was 
dying, — they  did  not  hit, — you  spoiled, — thou  threwest,— die  (thou)! 
— don't  hit ! — do  (thou)  not  spoil ! — throw ! — they  have  died, — had  she 
hit  ? — I  have  not  spoiled, — we  had  thrown. 

2.  ®eben  @ic  mtr  erne  ^tafdje  (of)  S3ter.    2Bo§  ttmnfcfien  @te 
son  tfjtn?    ®onnen  @ie  unS  ben  narfrften  2Beg  in  (to)  ba3  Sweater 
getgen?     %&)  faufte  ein  ^aar  (of)  (Stiefel  fitr  @tc.     ©inb   @te 
ben  SSJlatrojen  begegnet(**)  ?     Stein,  id)  bin  ifinen  nidjt  begegnet. 
6tnb  btefe  £ofen  fiir  mirf)?     ®am  ber  ©djufitnadjer  mit  meinen 
(Sdjufien?    §a,  er  !am  bamtt.    9Ba§  fagten  @te  511  ifir? 

Does  that  dog  belong  (Dat.)  to  you  ?  No,  it  does  not  belongfZtotf .) 
to  me.  Was  it  she?  No,  it  was  he.  Where  did  you  buy  these  boots, 
and  what  did  you  pay  for  them?  Is  your  new  umbrella  as  good  as  your 
old  one?  No,  it  is  not  so  good.  What  did  your  waist-coat  cost ?  It 
was  very  cheap.  Who  is  it?  It  is  I.  Where  will  you  meet(**)  me? 
I  shall  meet  you  in  the  theatre.  What  did  that  lady  say  to  us?  What 
gentlemen  are  in  the  room  ?  They  are  advocates. 

(*)  "To  say  to"  may  be  translated  by  fagen  311,  otherwise  fagen  governs  the 

Dative. 

(.**)  "To  meet  (to  have  a  meeting)"  is  translated  by  treffen  (Ace.),  whilst 
"to  meet  (in  passing  by)"  is  translated  by  fiegegnen  (Dat.).  Sreffen  is 
conjugated  by  Ijaben  and  fcegegnen  by  fein. 


86 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  How  is  it,  in  the  Nominative  and  Accusative,  translated  if  referring 
to  a  masculine  noun,  and  how  if  referring  to  a,  feminine  noun? 

2.  How  are  it  and  them,  if  not  referring  to  persons  and  preceded  by  a 
preposition  governing  the  Dative  or  Accusative,  rendered  in  German, 
and  where  is  the  preposition  added  ? 

3.  What  must  be  used,  if  the  preposition  commences  with  a  vowel? 

4.  How  is  it  rendered  in  the  Genitive,  if  not  referring  to  persons' 

5.  When  are  it  and  they,  if  subjects  of  the  verb  to  be,  rendered  by  eS  ? 

6.  How  are  the  expressions  it  is  I,  it  is  we,  etc.  rendered  in  German  ? 

7.  When  are  bu  (thou)  and  iljr  (you)  used  in  German,  and  when  only 
do  they  commence  with  capitals? 

8.  What  is  the  usual  form  for  translating  you,  and  with  what  must  it 
always  begin  ? 


Conversation. 


What  do  yon  want  1 

Please  (bttte),  give  me  (Dat.)  a 

glass  [of]  wine. 
Is  this  wine  good? 
Yes,  it  is  very  good. 
Where  (tuoljin)  are  you  going? 
I  am  going  to  (ouf)  the  market 
What  wall  you  buy  there  (bort)  ? 
I  shall  buy  a  pair  [of]  shoes. 

Don't  pay  too  much  for  them. 
Who  is  coming? 
It  is  I  and  my  brother. 
WTiere  are  you  to  meet  your 

uncle? 
I  am  to  meet  him  at  (auf)  the 

station. 
Please,  show   (Dat.)    me    the 

nearest   way    to     (in)     the 

theatre. 

I  cannot  show  it  to  yon. 
Did  not  your  agent  die  a  long 

time  ago  (fdjon  lange)  ? 
No,  he  is  still  alive ;  yesterday 

I  met  him  in  (auf)  the  street. 
You  will  spoil  this  picture. 

It  is  spoiled  already. 

Where  is  your  mother? 

She  is  in  the  garden.    What  do 

you  want  with  (don)  her? 
I  mnst  tell  her  something. 


nmnfd)en  (Sic? 
93itte,  geben  Ste  mir  em 

2Betn. 
Sft  btefer  SBein  gut? 
3a,  er  ift  fefjr  gut. 
22of)in  gdjen  ©te? 
3d)  gefje  auf  ben  9ftarft. 
2Bas  raoflen  ©te  bort  faufen  ? 
3d)    toerbe    ein    SJkar    ©djulje 

faufen. 

Batten  ©ie  nid)t  gu  biel  bafiir. 
SBer  fonrmt? 

%<fy  uub  mein  S3ruber  ftnb 
2Bo    follen    Sie 

treff  en  ? 
3d)  joll  ifjn  auf   bem 

treff  en. 
Sitte,  geigen  <5ie  tntr  ben  nci^- 

ften  SSeg  in3  X^eater. 

Sd)  lann  t^n  Stynen  ntdit  jeigen. 
Sft  S^r  Stgent  nic^t  fd)on  lange 

geftorben  ? 
Sftein,  er  lebt  nod) ;  geftern  be* 

gegnete  id)  ijjm  auf  bet  ©trafee. 
Ste  roerben  bieje^  ©euialbe  oer* 

berben. 

G3  ift  fd)on  tierborben. 
23o  ift  S^re  Gutter? 
6ie  ift  im  ©arten.    SSa5  ttJiin- 

fcen  @ie  t»on  t^r? 

fagen. 


87 

Healing  €rerct0e  Mo.  17. 


@in  ettger  wnb  cm  toetter  ©tiefcL 

(A  small  and  a  wide  boot. ) 

(£in  §err  Eremite  ein  $aar   (StiefeL      (£r   fling   311 

needed         .  .  ... 

einem  (Sdjufnuacfjer  unb  fagte: — Sftadjen  Sie  mir  ein  ^aar 


gute  ©tiefel.     2lber  idj   mnfj  S^nen  border  ettoaS  fagen 

before    something 

Sn  meiner  3>ugenb  l^aBe  t(^>  ein  S3ein  gebrod§en.    (Sin  Snfs 

youth  ...         leg  .  . 

tft  ba^er  bicfer  ate'  ber    anbere,   unb    <5ie   ntiiffen    einen 

.    therefore  thicker        .  .  other 

©tiefei  toeiter  al$  ben  onbern  marfjen.  —  S)er   <Srf)ii£)mad)er 

wider        .         .          other          make 


§  unb   na^m   ba§    SD^ag.       9^ac^    brei   Xagen 

measure 

fcljicfte  er   bem   §errn   bie   ferttgen    (Stiefel   bnr^    feinen 

....  .  finished 

Sefjrburfrfjen.     Site  jener  fie  an^robirte,  §og  er  ben  toeiten 

apprentice  when  that  one    .  tried  put      .         .         wide 

©tiefel  auf  ben  biinnen  gug,  unb  ber  gug  gtng  nattirlid) 

thin         foot          .          .       foot         .  of  course 

letdjt  §inetn.     S)ann  tjerfu^te  er  ben    engen    ©tiefel   auf 

easily          in  then  tried  .         .          small 

ben  bicfen-  Su§  anjujie^en.      ©§  toar  nic^t  mogtic^.    3(er= 

thick       foot         to  put  on  ...         possible  an- 

gerlidj  fagte  er  gu  bem  Se^rBurfc^en  :  —  3)etn  3JJetfter  tier- 

grily  ....  apprentice  .  master 

fte^t  fein  §anbtoer!  nid^t.      %tf)    Jiabe   ifym   gefagt,    einen 

handicraft          .  .... 

©tiefel  iDeiter  ate  ben  anbern  §u  mac^en.     @r  ^at  gerabe 

wider        .         .          other        ,         make  .        .          just 

ba§  ($egentf)eit  getfyan  unb  einen   €>tiefel   enger   ate   ben 

opposite  done          .  .  boot        smaller 

anbern  gemadjt. 

other  made 


88 

Eighteenth  Lesson.  Sld&tjeljnte  Seftion. 

The  Personal  Pronouns  (concluded), 

REFLECTIVE  FORM. 

Accus.  Dat.  Accus.  or  Dot. 


mid)  mtr,  myself 

bid)  btr,    thyself 

wn§  un§,  ourselves 

cud)  eurf),  yourselves 


ft* 


one's  self,  himself,, 
herself,  itself, 
yourself,  yourselves, 
themselves. 


The  reflective  form  is  used  when  myself,  etc.  is  the  object  of 
the  verb,  indicating  the  same  person  or  thing  as  the  subject ;  as, 

3$  fcafdie  mid).  I  wash  myself.  S)er  ftnabe  6,at  ftd)  ntdjt  berle&t. 
The  ooy  has  not  hurt  himself. 

Reflective  pronouns  are  generally  in  the  Accusative,  but  some- 
times in  the  Dative,  according  to  the  case  which  the  verb  governs(*) ; 
as, — 3d)  lobe  midj.  I  praise  myself.  3d)  fd)meid)Ie  (Dat.)  mtr.  I  flatter 

myself. 

NOTE. — The  verb  in  German  is  often  reflective  when  it  is  not  so 
in  English,  and  the  student  must  be  careful  not  to  omit  the  reflective 
pronoun  in  German ;  as, 

fid)  beneb,men,  to  behave.  2>te  ®inber  benab,men  fid)  nidjt  feljr  gut 
The  children  did  not  behave  very  well. 

Myself,  etc.  is  translated  by  fet&ft  (or  jelber),  if  not  reflective, 

.and  emphasising(**)  a  noun  or  another  pronoun  in  the  sentence ;  as, 

3d)  felbft  (or  felber)  ging  511  feinem  SSoter.      I  myself  went  to  his 

father.     2)er  ^Srdfibent  ging  felbft  (or  felber)  pm  ®6mg.     The  president 

went  himself  to  the  king.     3d)  ging  jum  ®5mg  felbft  (or  felber).     I 

went  to  the  king  himself. 

NOTE. — In  German  felbft  or  felber  can  even  emphasise : 
•a)  a  reflective  pronoun ;  as, 

®r  lobtc  fid)  felbft  (or  felber).    He  praised  himself. 

b)  Any  other  personal  pronoun  in  the  dative  or  accusative  case,  having 
then  a  meaning  to  the  English  me  (myself  J,  thee  (thyself),  him 
(himself),  etc.;  as, 

3d)  fab,  ib,n  fetbft  (or  fetber).  I  saw  Mm  (himself).  ®er  Slbbofat 
toerfprad)  e§  mtr  felbft  (or  felber).  The  advocate  promised  it  to  me 
(myself). 

REMARK. — Personal  pronouns  if  used  without  prepositions  in  Ger- 
man stand  directly  after  the  verb  (or  auxiliary),  and  therefore  precede 
an  adverb  of  time  ;  as, 

3d)  babe  itym  I)eute  bo§  S5ud)  gegeben.  I  have  given  the  book  to 
him  to-day. 

Learn  by  heart  the  irregular  verbs:  bitten,  to  ask,  to  beg 
*ft£en,  to  sit,  to  be  seated  Bejtfcen,  to  possess  Beginner,  to  begin 
gerotnnen,  to  win,  to  gain  *fc^roimmen/  to  swim. 

(*)  This  must  be  especially  observed  with  mid),  bid)  (Ace.),  and  mir,  btr  (Dat.) 
(**)  Myself,  etc.  emphasises  a  noun  or  pronoun,  if  it  follows  the  same  immediately 
or  can  be  placed  after  without  altering  the  sense. 


a  little,  eht  ttcntg 

to  accustom  to,  getoBIjnen 

an  (Ace.) 

to  ask  (a  question),  frogen 
to  behave,  fid)  Beneljmen 

(irr.) 

to  comb,  Idntmen 
•early,  fritl) 
to  flatter,  fdjmeid)eIn(Dat.) 


89 

to  hurt,  berlefcen 

late,  foot 

to  procure,  tierfdjaffen 

(Dat/) 

to  save,  to  rescue,  retten 
sharp,  fdjatf 
to  sit  down,  fid)  fe&ett 
to   trouble    oneself,    to 

endeavour,  [id)  Bemufjen 


true,  toaljr 

to  wash,  loafdjen  (irr.) 

why,  W  arum 

to  warm,  toarmen 

to  wound,  Dertounben 

the  twenty-first,  bet  ein» 

unbaftansigfteO5'),  etc. 
the   thirtieth    ber   brci« 

fcigfte,  etc. 


(*)  These  numbers  are  formed  from  stoanjig  by  adding  fte  instead  of  tc. 


Exercise  No.  18. 

1.  I  hurt  (Pres.)  myself, — we  warm  ourselves, — thou  troublest 
thyself, — did  you  wound  yourself  (yourselves)? — he  flattered(*)  himself, 
— they  have  washed  themselves, — have  you  saved  yourselves?  (2nd  form) 
— I  procured  myself, — dost  thou  flatter(*)  thyself? — sit  down  ! — we  be- 
haved,— she  endeavoured. — The  lady  herself  combs  her  daughter's  hair 
(Haarn.). — I  my  self  came. — "We  were  ourselves  a  little  impolite. — 
The  officer  will  say  it  to  the  soldiers  themselves. — Will  you  go  your- 
.self  ? — Did  you  ask  (a  question)  the  duke  himself? — I  could  not  accustom 
myself  (**)  to  it. — He  wounded  "himself. — Did  you  give  it  to  (Dat.)  him 
(himself)? — I  want  to  speak  to  (mit)  her  (herself). — Did  you  nota  say 
soc  yourself &  ? — I  forgot  myself. — "We  recommended  ourselves. 

He  asks  ( begs), — do  they  sit? — we  possess, — I  am  beginning, — are 
you  winning? — thou  dost  not  swim, — did  I  ask  (beg)l — we  were  sitting, 
— they  possessed, — she  began, — thou  didst  not  gain, — were  you  swim- 
ming?— you  have  asked  (begged), — hadst  thou  been  sitting? — I  have 
not  possessed, — we  had  begun, — he  has  won, — had  they  swum? 

2.  SBaritm  l)at  ber  ©olbat  fid)   berrounbet?      3>te  SDfatrofen 
-retteten  fid),  aber  e§  roar  p  foat  ba§  @d)tff  §u  retten.     %<fy  barf 
(may)  tntr  fd)metd)etn,  baft  (that)  id)  befcfietben  bin.    S33ir  miiffen 
wt3  an  ba§  fatte  ^Better  geroofynen.     S)te  Sfta'bc&en  roafdjen  fid) 
felbft.     S)er  ^farrer  fam  fclbft  511  friij.     SSarunt  Jjaben  @ie  iijtt 
ntd)t  felbft  gefragt?    2Bie  benafimen  bie  ®tnber  fid)  geftern? 

"Will  (wollen)  you  not  sit  down  ?  I  shall  accustom  myself  to  it. 
"We  have  not  saved  ourselves  alone.  I  washed  myself  with  warm 
water.  "Why  did  you  wound  yourself?  The  queen  has  visited  my  par- 
ents&  herself* .  The  boys  behaved  very  badly  (schlecht).  You  trouble 
yourself  too  much.  I  procured  myself  a  sharp  knife.  The  garden  be- 
longs to  him  (himself).  Is  it  true,  your  brother  hurt  himself! 
Yes,  but  he  hurt  himself  a  little^  onlya  .  He  natters  himself(*),  that 
(doss)  he  is  ( sei)b  a  great  advocate^  .  He  asked  me  (myself)  for  (um, 
Ace.)  a  better  coat.  She  sent  a  letter  to  the  president  himself.  I  gave 
(Dat.)  him  (himself)  the  book  the  day  before  yesterday.  Don't  hurt 
yourself.  I  warmed  myself  at  the  fire  (Feuer  n.). 

(*)  Verbs  in  eln  add  the  usual  terminations  after  leaving  off  the  n. 
(**)  self  printed  in  italics  indicates  in  our  exercises,  that  the  reflective  pronoun 
is  to  be  emphasised  by  fel&ft. 


90 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  When  is  myself,  etc.  translated  by  the  reflective  form  f 

2.  In  what  case  do  reflective  pronouns  generally  stand  in  Gonmm  ? 

3.  In  what  case  do  they  sometimes  stand,  and  when? 

4.  Are  reflective  pronouns  used  only  -when  they  are  used  in  English, 
and  when  must  they  be  used  in  German  ? 

5.  When  is  myself,  etc.  translated  by  feftft  (or  feffcer)? 

6.  Can  reflective  pronouns  be  emphasised  in  German,  and  how  ? 

7.  What  other  pronouns  can  be  be  emphasised  by  fel&fi  (or  felfier)? 

8.  Where  are  personal  pronouns  without  prepositions  put  in  German  ? 

9.  Do  they  precede  an  adverb  of  time? 


Conversation, 


Why  do  you  not  sit  down  ? 

I  have  no  chair. 

Please  fetch  one   (einetl)  from 

(au3)  the  next  room. 
Are  you  sitting  now  (jejjt)  ? 
Yes,  "I  am  (sitting). 
For  (urn)  what  has  the  poor 

woman  asked  you? 
She  asked  me  for  a  little  bread. 

Did  you  swim  yesterday? 

No,  the  water  was  too  cold. 

Did  you  win  something  (etitmS)? 

Yes,' I  have  won  a  horse  and  a 
carriage. 

Who  possessed  this  garden  be- 
fore (m>r  Dat.)  you? 

A  manufacturer. 

Did  you  ask  the  shoemaker  him- 
self after  my  boots? 

Yes,  he  has  forgotten  to  send 
them. 

Have  you  accustomed  yourself 
to  the  English  beer  now  ? 

No,  I  cannot  accustom  myself 
to  it. 

You  are  early  this  evening. 

I  did  not  wish  to  be  too  late. 

Better  too  early,  than  too  late. 

I  shall  endeavour  to  be  always 
early. 

Will  you  wash  yourself? 

Yes,  but  I  have  no  water. 


SSarum  fe£en  Sic  ftdj  ntdjt? 

ftd)  fcabe  kitten  StufjI. 

Bitte,    bolen    Sic    men    au3 

bent  nadjften  3iminer- 
Stfcen  Sfe  xefctl 
So,  (trf)  fae). 
Um  toaS  Ijat  bte  orate  gran  @te 

gebeten  ? 
@ie   bat  tnidj    nra    ein    ttjentg 


Sutb  Sie  gefteru  gefdjtDommen  ? 
gjetu,  bag  SEaffcr  roar  gu  fait. 
©eroannen  Sic  etttmS? 
So,   ic^    fiabe    ein    ^Pferb   unb 
etnen  SSagen  getuonnen. 
befa§   biefen   ©arten  »or 


©in  gabrifant. 

gragten  ©ie   ben  Scfcubmadjer 

jelbft  na(^  nxetnen  Stiefeln? 
So,    er    f)at    Dergeffen,    fie    §u 


@ie  ftd)  je|t  an  ba^  eng» 

lifdje  SBter  geiupbnt? 
9lein,  tdi  fann  mtc^  nic^t  baton 

geroofinen. 
Ste  !otnnten  ^eute  5lbcnb  friifi. 

tcf)  roonte  ntdjt  ^n  fpat  fommcn. 
efjcr  gu  ftfflj,  otS  gu  fpat. 
gd)  merbe  mi^  bemiiben,  tntmer 

afi|  511  fontmen. 
SSoUen  ©ie  ftc^ 
So,  ober  id)  babe  tetn  2Baf[er. 


til 
(Eraci0e  tto. 


(£in  alter  SBaner  ttwrbe  Btinb.     (£r  toar  gang  genan 

peasant     "became         —  ...         -exactly 

mit  feinem  SJorfe  Belannt  unb    ging    be3f)alB   b.en   ganjen 

acquainted      .  .  therefore         .  whole 

£ag  ofjtte  gii^rer  bartn   itmfyer.      C£ine3    SlbenbS    nntrbe 

guide  .  about  .  .  be«ame 

feme  Softer,  Bet  toeldjer  er  toofjnte,   ploitftd)    Iran!,   nnb 

with       whom        .  .  suddenly 

Sftiemanb  at§  ber  atte  Sftann  tuar  511  $aufe.      G£r   ntitgte 

nobody          .         .          .  man  .        At       home 

olfo  feffift  ge^en,  um  §iilfe  §u  fnd^en,    28a§  tfjat  er  unter 

consequently .        .      in  order  assistance .  did      . 

btefen  Utnftcinben?     @r  fterfte  ein  BrennenbeS  Sit^t  in  erne 

circunuitances  .         put        .  lighted         candle     . 

Saterne,   na^tn   fie   in  bie  §anb,  nnb  gtng  in  ba3  S)orf. 

lanthorn  .  ...          —  .... 

$luf  ber  @tra§e  Begegnete  er  einem  SBefannten,  njeld^er.i^n 

.  person  acquainted  with  who 

anfytelt  nnb  fagte: — 3$  fyabe  <Sie  intmer  fiir  einen    ber* 

stopped         .  .  .  reason- 

nilufttgcn  SJJann  ge^atten.     Se|t  fefje  ic^,  ba§  @ie  fc^on 

able  man         thought  now        .         .       that 

!inbifd(j  toerben.    DBgteid^  @ic  Blinb  finb,  tragen  6t^  boc^ 

childish       become  although        .  —          .  carry          .        yet 

eine  Soterne  mit  einem  Brennenben  £ic^te.     (£§  fann  2^nen 

lanthorn         .  .  lighted          candle 

jo      ttidjtS    nii|cn,     3ft  bag  nid§t  eine  S^or^ett? — 3d^ 

be  sure       nothing    be  useful          .      that         .  .        foolishness 

Bin  nic^t  fo  tf)orid)t,  toie  @ie  gtanBen,  fagte  ber  S3linbe. 

foolish  .  .          believe  .  .        blind  man 

3$  trage  bag  Sidjt  nidjt  fiir  mid^.    3^  trage  e§  fiir  @ie 

carry         .        light         ...  .        carry 

nnb  bie  anbern  Sente,  bamtt  @te  mid)  fe^en  unb  mir  an§ 

other  .     in  order  that    ....  (out  of 

bent  SBege  gefjen  lonnen. — 

my  way) 


92 


Nineteenth  Lesson. 


Seftton. 


The  Possessive  Pronouns. 


The  possessive  Pronouns  are  formed  from  possessive  adjec- 
tives (vide  page  52)(*)  thus  : 


meiner  or  ber  metntge,  mine 
tenter  or  ber  beinige,  thine 
fetner  or  ber  feinige,  his)  .^ 
tfirer  or  ber  t&rtge,  hers )     v 


unf(e)rer  or  ber  unf(e)rtge,  ours 
3fitcr  or  ber  Stage     { 
eu(e)rer  or  ber  eu(e)rtge  )  J 
tfcrer  or  ber  tjjrtge,  theirs 


SJletner,  etc.  is  declined  like  biefer  (page  18;,  and  ber  metntge, 
^etc.  like  an  adjective  preceded  by  the  definite  article ;  as, 

Sing.  Masc. 

N.  meiner 
G.  meineg 
D.  metnem 
A.  meinen 

N.  ber  metntge 

G.  beg  nteinigen 

D.  bent  metntgen 

A  ben  nteinigen 

Possessive  pronouns  take  the  gender  and  number  of  the  noun 
•for  which  they  stand ;  as, 

SBelcfier  $ut?— Sljrer  (or  bet  Sftrige).  Which  hat?— Yours. 
SBeldje  llfjt?— Seine  (or  bie  feinioe).  Which  watch?— His.  ftljr  £au§ 
ober  unfreS  (or  ba§  unjrige)?  Your  house  or  ours?  SDZeine  fjebern 
ober  iljre  (or  bie  itjrigen)?  My  pens  or  theirs. 

NOTE.  1. — 2Jletner,  betner,  etc.  are  especially  used  in  conver- 
.eation. 

2.— 2)er  metntge,  ber  beinige,  etc.  are  sometimes  abbreviated 
into  ber  metne,  ber  beine,  etc.,  which  are  declined  the  same,  tg 
being  omitted ;  as, 


Fem. 

nteine 
metner 

Ncut.                 Plur.  of  all  Gen. 

ntetne^              metne 
meineg               metner 

meiner 
metne 

metnem 
meineg 

meinen 
nteine 

bie  meinige 
ber  nteinigen 
ber  metntgen 
bie  meinige 

bag  metntge 
beg  nteinigen 
bent  nteinigen 
bag  meinige 

bie  metntgen 
ber  nteinigen 
ben  metmgen 
bie  nteinigen 

Sing.  3/a.fC. 

N.  ber  nteine 
G.  beg  meinen 
D.  bent  metnen 
A.  ben  metnen 

Fern. 

bie  nteine 
ber  metnen 
ber  metnen 
bie  metne 

Neut. 

bag  metne 
beg  meinen 
bent  meinen 
bag  metne 

Plur.  of  all  Gen. 

bie  meinen 
ber  metnen 
ben  metnen 
bie  metnen 

jttringen,  to  force,  to  compel 


(*)  All  determinative  adjectives  become  pronouns,  if  not  connected  with  a  noun. 
<**)  "Its"  (either  as  adjective  or  pronoun)  is  rendered  fein,  feiner,   etc.    if 
referring  to  a  masculine  or  neuter  noun  and  iljr,  tljrer,  etc.  if  referring 
to  a  feminine  noun. 


the  apartments,  the  re- 
sidence, bie  SBolntung 
„    artisan,    ber    £onb= 

toerler 

clever,  gefdjidt 
the  floor,  ber  <5totf 
,    floor    (of    a   room), 

bet  gu&fioben 
Plur:  bic  gufjboben 
the  fortune,  ba§  SSermogen 


93 

to  make,  to  do,  modjen 
not  yet,  nod)  nidjt 
now,  jeljt  (nun) 
the  parasol,  ber  <5onnen= 

fdjirm 

,,  penholder,  ber  geber* 
ready,  fertig  (J^to 
the  task,  the  exercise, 

bie  2iufgo6e 
to  thank,  bcmlen 


the  work(*),  the  make.. 

bie  2ir6eit 
to  work,  ar&eiten 
well  (Adverb),  gut 

cvn  ^dlo 

ein  SSiertel 

brei  SSiertet 

ein  ®rittel 
§  sroei  Srtttet 
i  ein  SerfjStel,  etc. 


Exercise  No.  19. 

1.  Your  penholder  and  mine, — my  apartments  or  thine? — her  for- 
tune and  his, — our  needles  and  hers, — the  make  of  your  tailor  or  the- 
make  of  ours?— the  parasol  of  my  sister  or  the  parasol  of  yours?— on 
account  of  our  house  or  on  account  of  theirs  ? — the  teacher  of  your  boys 
or  the  teacher  of  mine  ? — with  my  carriage  and  with  thine, — from  which 
task?  From  his, — out  of  which  book?  Out  of  hers, — with  which  over- 
coats?  With  ours, — for  their  artisan?   No,  for  yours  (2nd  form), — 
through  our  church ?  No,  through  theirs, — without  your  glass?   Yes, 
without  mine, — for  their  floors  (of  a  room)  or  for  ours? 

You  bind, — thou  findest, — he  is  (in  health), — they  do  not  invent, 
— I  disappear, — we  are  singing, — they  spring, — it  bursts, — we  drink, 
— I  do  not  force, — thou  tiedst, — you  were  finding, — I  was  (in  health), 
— we  invented, — you  did  not  vanish, — thou  sangest, — she  was  jumping,. 
— did  they  burst? — thou  drankest, — you  were  compelling, — I  have 
bound, — we  had  found, — they  have  been  (in  health), — he  had  invented, 
— hast  thou  disappeared? — you  had  sung, — they  have  sprung, — it  had 
burst, — we  have  drunk, — I  had  forced. 

2.  9fteine  SBofimmg  ift  (are)  int  (on  the)  erften   (Stocfe,   too* 
tft  (are)  $&re  (or  bie  S&rtgej  ?    2>er  <3cfiuljmad)er  fjat  ftfjre  ©ttefel 
gemacfit,    aber  metne   (or   bie  metnigen)   finb   nod)   ntc&t   fertig. 
griebrid:)  fjat  meinen  Otegenfc&trm,  id}  toerbe  jejjt  feinen  (or  ben 
feinigen)  ne^men.    S5ie  §u§boben  in  £5^™  ©fcttfe  jtnb   nicfit  fo' 
aft  als>  bie  (those)  in  wtfrem  (or   tm  unfrtgen).      SIrBeitet  3$r 
(Bdjneiber  eBenfo  gut  a!3  metner  (or  ber  metnige)  ?    $d)  fiaBe  mem 
Sfteffer  toergeffen,  lonnen  @te  mtr  3$re3  (or   ba3   Shrige)   geben? 
3dj  banfe  gotten.      3ft  3^  <5d)uf)mad}er  etn&  ebenfo  gejc^icfter11 
§anblt)er!er  at3  metner  (or  ber  metnige)? 

I  am  now  doing  my  task  and  Charles  his.  I  have  my  penholder,, 
where  is  yours?  Mine  is  on  the  table.  His  fortune  is  as  large  as  hers. 
Your  cousin's  shoes  are  ready,  but  not  yours.  Our  rooms  are  on  (in) 
the  second  floor,  where  are  theirs  ?  You  have  done  your  work,  but  I 
could  not  yet  do  mine.  I  walked  with  my  cousin  (f.),  and  my  friend 
with  his.  I  cannot  find  my  hat,  may  I  take  yours  ?  Your  house  is  not 
so  nice  as  ours.  Our  residence  has  six  rooms  and  yours  only  five.  Who- 
is  [the]  more  clever,  your  tailor  or  mine  ? 

(*)  The  work  is  translated  ba§  SBerf  when  it  means  a  book  or  if  used  in  a  figurative 
and  poetical  sense. 


94 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  How  arc  the  possessive  Pronouns  mine,  thine,  etc,  translated  ir 
German? 

2.  How  is  metner,  etc.  declined  ? 

3.  How  is  ber  ntctmge,  etc.  declined? 

4.  What  gender  and  number  do  possessive  pronouns  take  in  German  ? 

5.  What  form  is  especially  used  in  Conversation  ? 

6.  How  are  ber  metnige,  ber  beinige,  etc.  sometimes  abbreviated,  and  how 
are  they  declined  ? 

Conversation. 
How  do  you  do  ?(*)  j 

How  are  youl 

Thank  you,  very  well;  and  how\ 
do  you  do  (and  how  are  you)1  \ 


I  am  quite  well,  thank  you. 


How  is  your  friend  to-  day 1 


Thank  you,  he  is  much  better 
now. 

Have  YOU  found  our  gloves? 

No,  I  found  only  mine. 
Where  are  you  living  now  ? 
I  am  living  at  13  ...  Street. 

On (in)which  floor  are  youliving? 

On  the  3rd  floor. 

Have  you  nice  (^iibfcf))  apart- 
ments ? 

Yes,  I  have  two  large  rooms 
and  three  smaller  ones. 

What  do  you  wish  to  drink  ? 

A  cup  of  tea,  if  you  please. 


We  shall  have(bcfommen)[some] 

rain  to-day ;  have  you  not  an 

(no)  umbrella  ? 
I  have  only  a  parasol ;  but  can 

you  not  give  (Dat.)  me  an 

umbrella  ? 


SSte  geljt  el 

or  2Bte  befinben  ©ie  ftdj? 

(3$)  bank  (3$nen),   fe$r   gut, 

unb  trie  gefyt  e3  3§nen  ? 
or  unb  trie  befinben  Ste  ftdj? 
gef)t  mir  feijr  gut,  (ic^)  banfe 


or  %dj  befinbc  tnirf)  gan^ 

(ic^)  bonfe  (3fyn<m). 
2Bie  g0t  es  l^eute  Sfce 
or  SSte  befinbet  ftc|  %f)t  greunb 

^eute? 
Sanfe,  t§   ge^t  i^nt   je^t   btel 

beffer. 
or  ^anfe,  er  bejinbet  ftcfj  je^t  oiel 

beffer. 
^aben   ©ie   unfere    ^icmb^u^e 

gefunben? 

9ietn,  id)  fanb  nur  meine, 
2Bo  tnoljnen  ©ie  je|t? 
Sc^  tuofjne   in   ber    ...    Stra§e 

Summer  13. 

tn  njelc^etn  ©tocfe  too^ncu 
m  britten  Stocfe. 
|>aben   Sie   eine  ^iibfd^e 

nung  ? 
3a/  i^  ^abe  gtoei  gro§e 

mer  unb  brei  fleinere. 
25a^  ttiotfen  @te  trinfen? 
Sine  Xoffe  X^ee,  ttjenn  e^  £f§nen 

gefalltg  ift  (or  tuenn  tdf)  bitten 

barf). 

luerben   Ijeute   9?egen    be* 

fommen;    ^aben    Sie    feinen 

Diegenfc^tnn  ? 

c^  fyabettnreinenSonnenfdn'rm; 

aber  fonnen   @ie    mir   uidjt 

einen  &Jegenfd^trm  geben? 


(*)  Idiomatical  expressions  and  phrases  we  shall  print  in  italics. 


95 

JUaMnij  €mctse  tto.  19. 


Sur  $tit  ©romfoeflg  leBten  triete  S&ttalicfer  in   ©tig* 

at  the   time  —  .  .  fanatics 

tcmb.      @ie  fcerBracf)ten  jeben  £ag  meljrere  Stnnben    anf 

.  passed  every         .  several 

ben  ®nieen  unb  Beteten.    $)a§  nannten  fie  ben  §errn  fudjen, 

knees        .       prayed  that        called        .        .        Lord  . 

(Sronttoett   Befolgte   biefen    ®eBrcmd)    toafjrenb  be§  grof&en 

followed  .  custom. 

XfjeilS   feineS   SeBenS  unb  erftarB  fid)  babnrc^  bie  @unft 

part  .  life  .         acquired        .  .  .      goodwill 

ber  ^anatirfer.     !ftnr  einntat  in  feinem  Sefien  fc^ten  er  fic^ 

;  fanatics  .  once        .  .  life       seemed   _. 

baritBer  luftig  §it  mac^en.      (Sr  tear  fc^on  $rote!tor    bon 

at  it  to  joke  ... 

Gtnglanb   nnb    fyatte   eine   grofie  ©efettfc^aft  511  Xifd^e  ge* 

party  .       dinner 

taben.      %lun    ttjottte    er   feinen  ^reiinben  etn  guteg  ©ta§ 

invited  ....  .  ... 

SSetn    geBen.      (Sr    ftmnfdjte   bte   Stafc^e   fefBfl  gn  offnen 

give  .  .  .  .  .  open 

unb  berlangte  ba^er  einen  $fro£fen§ie!jer.     SDerfetBe  tr»nrbe 

demanded    therefore        .  corkscrew  .  was 

fogtetrf)  geBracjjt,  aBer  ber  ^roteftor  Benafnn  fic§  nngefrfitdt 

immediately  brought  .  •  awkwardly 

unb  Iteft  tljn  ouf   ben   SvigBoben   foUen.      (£r   tear   ntc^t 

let        ...  .  fall  ... 

fogteid)  §u  ftnben,  nnb  bie  gan^e  ©efettfc^oft  pel  be§f)alB  fo= 

immediately  .  .  whole  party          fell    therefore 

fprt  auf  bie  f  niee,  urn  i^n  §u  fnc^en,     s-^ei  btefem  SlnBticfe 

directly  .         .        knees    in  order  ...  .  sight 

ladjelte    SromtoeH   nnb    fagte:  —  <^efe|t,    Semanb  offne  in 

smiled  .  .  supposed        anybody        open 

biefem  SIngenBIide  bie  X^iire  nnb  fe^e  end)  anf  ben  .^niccu, 

tnoment  .  .  .....          knees 

toa§  toitrbe  er  benfen?     @r  miirbe  glanBen,  i^r  fnd)et  ben 

would       .        think  .        would         believe          .  .  .. 

£>errn,  nnb  ifjr  fnc^t  boc^  nur  einen  ^fropfenjtefjer.  — 

Lord  .         ,  .         yet         .  .  corkscrew 


9ti 
Twentieth  Lesson.  gnmnsigfte  Seftioit. 

The  Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

The  demonstrative  Pronouns  are  the  same  as  the  demon- 
strative Adjectives  (vide  page  48)  ;  viz  : 


biefer,  this  (one) 
jener,  that  (one) 
ber,  this  (one),  that  (of) 
foldjer,  such  (one) 


berjenige,  that  (of) 


ber  anbere,  the  other 


These  words  take  the  gender  and  number  of  the  noun  for  which 
they  stand,  following  in  general  the  declensions  and  rules  of  the  de- 
monstrative adjectives  with  the  following  modifications  and  additions  : 

£)er,  bie,  etc.  if  pronoun,  in  the  Genitive  singular  and  plural 
and  in  the  Dative  plural  are  declined  thus  : 

Gen.*  Masc.  befjen  Fern,  bercn  Neut.  beffcn 

Gen.  Plur.      beren     Dat.  Plur.  benen 

(Soldjer,  folcfje,  etc.  (either  as  pronoun  or  as  adjective)  may 
be  preceded  by  etn,  etne,  etc.  in  the  singular,  being  then  declined 
like  an  adjective  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article  ;  as, 

©in  foldjes  £au»,  such  a  house.     23o§  fur  einen  £ut?—  Sinen  fol« 

djen.    What  hat?  —  Such  a  one. 

SJerjenige,  berjelbe,  ber  namlidje,  ber  anbere  (either  as  pro- 
nouns or  as  adjectives)  are  declined  thus  :  —  jertige,  jelbe,  etc.  like 
adjectives  preceded  by  the  definite  article,  and  the  article  ber,  bie, 
etc.  in  the  ordinary,  manner  ;  as, 

Masc.  N.  berienige      G.  beljemgen      D.  bemjenigen     A.  benjenigen 
Plur.   N.  biejenigen    G.  berjenigen      D.  benjenigen      A.  btejemgen 

This,  these  are  translated  by  bte3  (or  bieje3)  and  tliat,  tlwse  by 
bo§  (or  jene3),  if  subject  of  the  verb  to  be  and  referring  to  a  fol- 
lowing noun  or  pronoun,  the  verb  agreeing  with  the  following 
noun  or  pronoun  in  number  ;  as, 

25te§  ift  mein  SBIeifttft.     This  is  my  pencil.     S)ie§  (biefe?)  tft  mcin 
gut,  unb  ba§  (jene»)  ift  ^fjrer.    This  is  my  hat  and  that  is  yours. 

NOTE.  —  This  and  that  used  in  a  general  sense  are  also  translated 
bie*  and  ba§;  as,  —  £ie§  ift  nidjt  toaljr.     This  is  not  true.     SSer  fagte  ba§? 
Who  said  that? 

3>er,  etc.  or  the  stronger  berjenigc,  etc.  are  especially  the 

translation  of  that,  if  followed  by  a  Genitive  or  by  a  preposition  ;  as, 

giir  tnetnen  $itt  unb  fur  ben  (or  benienigen)  nteineS  greunbeS.     For 

my  hat  and  for  that  of  my  friend.    2)ie  ©emalbc  in  nteinem  Sininter  unb 

bie  (or  biejentgen)  in  3^rem.  The  pictures  in  my  room  and  those  in  yours. 

Learn  by  heart  the  irregular  verbs:  bietett,  to  bid  tierbteten, 
to  forbid,  to  prohibit  *fliegen,  to  fly  fd)ie&en,(**)  to  shoot 
fdjlie&en,(**)  to  shut,  to  lock,  to  close  befdjlief3en,(**)  to  resolve. 

(*)  Instead  of  beffen  and  beren  also  be§  (or  befe)  and  ber  are  used  sometimes 

(**)  6  of  the  Imperfect   1st   person   singular    in   taking  a  termination   is 

changed  into  ff,  if  the  past  participle  has  the  same  root  yowel  as  th* 

Imperfect  and  this  vowel  is  followed  by  ff  in  the  past  participle  :  as,— 

»otr  f^Ioffen;  except  before  t  (.tfjr 


vo  accompany,  Begteiten 
ago,  before,  to  or  (Dat.  or 

Ace.) 
to  bespeak,  to  order,  Be* 

fteflen 

the  bird,  ber  SSogel 
Plur:  bie  SSoget 
,,    comb,  ber  ®amm 
the  dress,  ba§  Sleib 
Plur:  bie  ftleibet 


97 

to  greet,  to  salute,  griifeen 
the   hotel,    ber    ©aftyof, 

(ba§  $otel) 
to  knock,  Hopfen 
the     looking-glass,     ber 

Spiegel 

the  man,  ber  Sftaitn 
Plur:  bie  -Ulanner 


the  spectacles,  bie  23riHe 

(sing.) 
„   suit  of  clothed,  ber 


once,  einmot 
twice,  stteimat 
thrice,  breimal 
four  times,  triermal 


physician,  ber  Strjt    I  five  times,  fiinfmal 
soap,  bie  <Seife  eto.    etc. 


Exercise  No.  20. 

1.  Which  comb,  this  one  or  that  one? — the  dress  of  which  !adyy 
of  this  one  or  of  that  one? — before  (Dat.)  which  castle,  before  (Dat.) 
this  one  or  before  that  one  ? — for  which  birds,  for  these  or  for  those  ? — 
with  which  physician?  With  that  one, — in  (Ace.)  which  hotel?  In 
this  one. — Is  this  your  soap? — That  was  my  looking-glass.— Are  these 
your  spectacles  (singular)  or  mine?  They  are  mine  (singular). — Are 
those  your  brother's  penholders  ? — Why  do  you  say  that  ? — This  was 
very  impolite.— Is  that  true? — When  did  you  see  that?  —Which  suit 
will  (wollen)  you  buy  ?  I  shall  buy  that  one  (den).  On  account  of. 
that  (dessen)  I&  must«  go? — I  shall  order  such  a  parasol. — What  apples- 
did  you  take? — I  took  such  [apples]. — Your  friend  and  that  of  your 
brother. — The  sons  of  these  men  or  those  of  the  women. — With  the 
horses  of  your  father  and  with  those  of  your  grandfather, — the  tree  ins 
the  yard  and  that  in  the  garden, — the  ink  in  this  inkstand  or  that  in. 
the  other  one, — the  same  hat, —with  the  other  pen, — for  the  other  boy, 
— for  what  wine?  For  the  same, — these  pears?  No,  the  others. 

We  bid, — I  am  forbidding, — you  fly, — thou  dost  not  shool(*), — 
we  are  shutting, — he  resolves, — thou  badest, — did  you  prohibit? — it 
flew, — they  shot, — I  locked, — we  were  resolving, — I  have  bidden, — we 
had  forbidden, — they  have  flown,— we  had  shot,— you  have  shut, — 
thou  hadst  resolved. 

2.  SSetcfier  £err  griifjte  @te,  biefer  ober  jener?  $o&en  @ie 
Sfire  ©djroefter  ober  bie  (or  btejenige)  SfjreS  greunbeS  (your 
friend's)  begleitet?  2ln  roetdje  £pre  fiafcen  @ie  gellopft?  %<fy 
ftopfte  an  bieje.  SKelcfier  Offetw  tft^r  Better?  (£3  tft  ber  (or 
berjenige)  mit  ber  trifle.  Sjl  bieS  Sfir  (Spiegel?  9?ein,  e3  tft 
ber  (or  berjenige)  ntetner  Xante  (my  aunt's).  SBaren  torr  uor 
einem  $afire  nidjt  in  bentfel&en  (or  in  bem  namltdjen)  ®aftfiofe? 

Is  this  looking-glass  not  larger  than  that  (one)  ?  I  met  (begegnen) 
him  in  the  same  street  two&  months  ago«  .  Which  gentleman  is  the- 
physician,  this  one  or  that  one  ?  On  which  tree  has  your  bird  flown  ? 
It  flew  on  that  one  in  our  yard.  I  shall  prohibit  them  that.  Did  you 
show  (Dat.)t  me  this  suit  (of  clothes)?  Yes,  I  showed  you  the  same. 
Will  (wollen)  you  have  this  newspaper  or  the  other?  Did  you  order 
(bestellcn)  these  men  or  those  ?  I  have  said  this  already.  These  are 
my  sisters  and  those  are  my  brothers. 

(*)  After  hissing  sounds  like  f,  fj,  etc.  an  c  is  inserted  when  adding  ft. 
German  Grammar  4 


98 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  What  gender  and  number  do  demonstrative  pronouns  take? 

2.  "What  declensions  and  rules  do  they  generally  follow  ? 

3.  How  is  bet,  etc.  declined  in  the  Genitive  of  masculine,  feminine, 
neuter,  and  plural,  and  how  in  the  Dative  of  the  plural? 

4.  How  is  foldjcr,  etc.  declined  if  preceded  by  tin? 

5.  How  are  berjentge,  berfcl&e,  bcr  uomlt^c  and  bcr  anbere  declined? 

6.  When  are  this,  these  translated  by  btc§  (or  biefeS)  and  that,  those  by 
bo§  (or  jetieS)? 

7.  When  this  and  that  are  used  in  a  general  sense,  how  are  they  then 
translated  ? 

8.  When  is  that  translated  by  bcr,  etc.  or  berjettigc,  etc.? 


Conversation. 


TJiere  is  a  knock. 
Who  knocks? 
Who  can  it  be? 
Our  cousin  will  come  to-day. 
Come  in. 

Which  key  will  you  have,  mine 
or  my  brother's? 

Pkase,  give  (Dai.)  me  yours. 
Which  dress  will  you  buy? 
I  shall  buy  that  one. 
On  which  table  are  my  books? 

They  are  on  that  in  the  large 

room. 

Who  has  forbidden  that? 
(The)  father  has  forbidden  it 
Are  the  windows  shut? 

I  shut  the  windows  in  this 

room,  also  those  in  the  other. 

Who  has  shot  this  little  bird? 

A  naughty  boy  shot  it  yesterday 

evening. 

Are  these  your  letters  ? 
No,  they  are  yours. 
Where  (tooljin)  did  you  resolve 

to  go? 
We  have  resolved  to  visit  the 

old  castle. 
It  this  the  way  to   (cwf)   the 

station? 
No,  that  one  is  (it). 


G3  Ifojjft  Senumb. 
SSer  Hopft? 
SSer  fonn  e§  fetn  ? 
Unfer  Setter  nrirb  Ijeute  fommen  . 
£erein. 

SSeldjen  Sdjtuffet    ttoflen    <2te 
§aben,  metnen  ober  ben  met* 


SMtte,  geben  @te  mtr 

SBeldjeS  ftteib  tooflen  @ie  faufen? 

tdj  tuerbe  biefe^  faufen. 
uf  toetc^em  Sij^e  ftnb  meine 


@ie  ftnb   aitf  bcm  im  grofeen 

ghnnter. 

28er  ^at  bo§  tierboten? 
2)er  SSater  ^at  e§  oerooten. 
©tnb  bte  genfter  gefc^Ioffen? 
^a,    id)   fd)Io^   bie  genfter  in 

btefent  3tmmer,   QUC^  bic  im 

anber(e)n. 
2Ber  ^ot  btefen   fletnen  SSogel 

gefd^offen? 
©in  unarttger  £nobe  fdjofc   i^n 

geftern  3{benb. 
©tnb  bteS  S^re  93riefe? 
9^etn,  e§  ftnb  Sijre. 
SBo^tn  bejd^Ioffen  @ie  ^u  ge^en? 

SStr  feaben  befd^toffen;  ba3  alte 

(SdfiloB  gu  befuc^en. 
3ft  ties  (or  bo§)   ber  2Beg  ouf 

ben  SSaljn^of? 
S^ein,  jener  (or  ber)  tft  eg. 


99 

fercise  Ho.  20. 


®eorg  ber  @rfte,  ®onig  bon  (£ngtanb,  ttmr  ®nrfiirft 

—  ....  .  elector 

ton  §ann0oer,  efje  er  ben  engtifdien  £f)ron  beftieg.    55a 

before    .  .  .  .         ascended         as 

er   fein   $ebnrt§tanb   feljr   gem   Ijatte,    reifte    er   beinalje 

native  country  (was  very  fond  of)  .  .  nearly 

jebe§  Scrfjr  bortfjin.     Seine  SReife    gtttg  getob'Ijnttci)    burc^ 

every         .  there  .        journey 

§ottanb,    too  er  bie    -ftacfjte  in   ben  ®aftf)ofen   §ubrad)te. 


S2tber   jeben   SJlorgen   Ijatte   er   fo   groge   9fJec|nungen  ju 

every        morning  ...  .  bills 

begaljlen,  ba§  er  e§  fcfjttepdj    ju   biet    fanb,    obgleit^    er 

that      .       .  finally  .  .  .  although 

ber  ®omg  be£  reidjjen  (Snglonb^  mar.     ($r  befc^tog  ba^er, 

_   .  ...  therefore 

me  nte^r  in  etnem  ($aftf)0fe   §u   iibernac^ten,  fonbern  bie 

never  ayain      .  .  pass  the  night  but        dur- 

S^ad^te  burc§  gu  fa^ren.     @tnmal  loar  er  bie  gan§e  ^ac^t 

ing  the  nights  .         drive  .  ...        whole 

gefa^ren  unb  fiielt  urn   ac§t  U^r   be§  3)lorgen§    cor   bent 

driven  .     stopped   at          .      o'clock       in  the  morning 

golbenen  Soften  in  5lmer§fort,  ntn  bie  $ferbe  jn  tt)e^)feln, 

golden  lion         .  in  order  .  .  .          change 

Xa  er  ein  toenig  §unger  ^atte,  BefteUte  er   brei   gefottene 

as       ...  .  ...  boiled 

(£ier*     5lt§  er  fie  mit  gntem  Sfypetit  gegeffen  ^atte,  fragte 

eggs         when     ....  —  .  . 

er  ben  SBirtf) :— 28a§  foften  bie  @ier? — ^toei^unbert  (Sulben, 

.  innkeeper  .  .          .     eggs  .  florins 

jagte  biefer. — $)er  ^onig  ertoieberte  erftannt: — Stmfjwtbert 

replied         astonished  . 

©ulbcn  fiir  brei  (Sier!    @tnb  benn  bie  (£ter  §ier  fo  fetten? 

florins         .          .        eggs  .         then        .      eggs        .        .      scarce 

— $)te  ©ier  finb  gar  nidfjt   fetten,    fagte   ber  SSirtf),    aber 

eggs        .         not  at  all         scarce  .  .     innkeeper          . 

bie  ®onige  finb  fefjr  fetten, — 

.  „       scarce 


100 

Twenty-first  Lesson.  (Sinunb^njanjigfte  Seftion. 

The  Interrogative  Pronouns. 

The  Interrogative  Pronouns  are  : 

toer,  who?  I  tocher,  which  (one)? 

what?  I  nwS  fiir  eitter,  what  kind?  what  sort? 


Declension  of  met?  and 


N.  toer,  who? 
G.  toeffen(*),  whose? 
D.  toem,  (to)  whom? 
A.  teen,  whom? 


N.  hm3,  what? 
G.  (toeffen(»),  of  what?) 
D.  ttag,  (to)  what? 
A.  tuo^,  what? 


Examples :— 28er  fommt?  Who  is  coming?  SBeffen  Sfteffer  iftbieS? 
Whose  knife  is  this?  SBem  ga&en  @ie  ben  SBrief?  To  (Dat.)  whom 
did  you  give  the  letter?  28en  Ijat  3fc  greunb  Befudjt?  Whom  did 
your  friend  visit? 

$Ba§  ift  ba§?  What  is  that?  Stuf  toa§  fifcen  Sic?  On  what  are 
you  sitting?  28a§  foollen  Sic  laufen?  What  will  you  buy? 

SBetdjer?  toaS  fiir  etner?  take  the  gender  of  the  nouns  to 
which  they  refer.  They  are  declined  like  triefer  (vide  page  18), 
but  ftjo3  fiir  etner  is  in  the  plural,  and  if  referring  to  names  of 
materials,  only  roaS  fiir  (vide  page  56) ;  thus : 

Masc.  ttm»  fur  ciner?  Fem.  wa§  fiir  etne?  Neut.  too3  fiir  cine§? 
Plur.  ttjal  fur?  etc. 

Examples :— SSelcIjer  toon  ben  finafien  fommt?  Which  of(**)  the 
boys  is  coining?  %i)  Ia§  eine  3«tung.— SSel^e  lafen.  @ie?  I  read  a 
newspaper.— Which  one  did  you  read.'  @r  luar  in  einem  £aufe.— S» 
tna§  fiir  einem?  He  was  in  a  house.— In  what  kind?  %i)  fauftc  jttJei 
ffliic^er.—  9£a§  fur  ftnb  e§?  I  bought  two  books.— What  kind  are 
they?  2Bunfrf)en  @ie  Slitter?— SSa§  fiir  ^aBen  ©ie?  Do  you  want 
[some]  butter?— What  sort  have  you? 

Wliich  1  if  subject  of  the  verb  to  be,  and  referring  to  a  follow- 
ing noun  or  pronoun  is  translated  njel^e^ ;  fein  (to  be)  agreeing 
in  number  with  the  following  noun  or  pronoun ;  as, 

SBeldjeS  ift  3!)r  geberb, alter,  un&  n)eldje§  ift  nteiner?  Which  is 
your  penholder,  and  which  is  mine?  SSeldjeS  finb  S^te  geberit? 
Which  are  your  pens? 

NOTE. —  What  ?  if  preceded  by  a  preposition  governing  the  Dative 
or  Accusative,  is  very  often  rendered  by  too,  the  preposition  being  af- 
fixed to  too.  —If  the  preposition  begins  with  a  vowel  tt>or  is  used ;  as, 
roobon,  of  what?  I   ttorou§,  out  of  what? 

toomit,  with  what?  ttoran,  at  what? 

ttoburdj,  through  what?  |   teortn,  in  what?  etc. 

These  contractions  are  also  equivalent  to  the  English  whereof?  wherewith?  etc. 


Learn  by  heart  the  irregular  verbs:  fieben,  to  boil  toerlierett, 
to  lose  ttriegen,  to  weigh  (to  be  of  weight)  gteljen,  to  draw,  to  pull 
*(iegen,  to  lie,  to  be  situated. 

(*)  tocffen  is  sometimes  abbreviated  into  nje»  (or  tt>ejj). 
(**)  "Of"  after  an  interrogative  pronoun  is  better  rendered  by  ton  than 
by  the  Genitive. 


101 


the  cloak,  ber  Sftantel 
Plur:  bie  9Mntel 
„   collar,  ber  ftragen 
Plur:  bie  ®ragen 
„     fool-scap     (writing) 
paper,  ba§  $anjlei* 
papier 
to  hear,  IjSren 
the  lamp,  bie  fiampe 
„   laundress,    bie    28a= 
faerin 
„   note-paper,  baSS3rief= 
papier 

nothing,    not   anything, 
nicfjt§ 
to  observe,  to  perceive, 
to  remark,  fcemerten 
the  parcel,  ba§  93acfeJ 
„     pocket-book,      -  bt2 
SBrieftajdje 
,,    post-man,  ber  95ritiT= 
trager         !\£ing.) 
,,   scissors,  bie  Sdjerc 
„    sheet,  ber  93i-Gert-     • 
„   shirt,  ba§  §emb 
Plur:  bie  &embe« 

the  thimble,  ber  ginger- 

„   thread,  ber  gaben 
Plur:  bie  §aben 
„   washing,  bie  SSafd^e 
,  ,.    workaian.berSivbftier 
onefbla,  simple,  '°'vft(*d) 
twoiold,  jtoeifadj 
double,  bo*?»ert 
threefold;  breifi^ 
fourfold    (quadruple), 
bierfa^ 
fivefold,  fiinffac^,  etc. 

Exercise  No.  21. 

1.  Who  is  here? — Who  is  singing? — Whose  shirt  is  this? — Whose 
•works  are  you  reading? — To  (Dat.)  whom  does  this  pocket-book  belong  ? 
— With  whom  did  you  come  ? — To  whom  will  (wollen)  you  go  ? — Whom 
have  you  seen? — Whom  are  you  expecting? — For  whom  is  that  lamp? 
— What  has  the  laundress  in  her  basket? — What  do  you  perceive? — Of 
(Gen.)  what  is  this  man  accused  (beschuldigt)? — What&  (*)  shall  we 
speak  of«  ? — Uponwhat(*)  are  you  standing? — With  what(*)aml  to  eat? 
— What  did  you  hear? — What  did  the  laundress  say? — Which  of  these 
collars  ?— With  which  of  the  bottles  ?— Have  you  the  parcel  ?  Which 
one  ? — Where  are  the  cloaks  ?  Which  ones  ? — Here  is  a  thimble.  What 
kind  is  it  ? — They  are  workmen.  What  sort  are  they  ? — Give  me  a  sheet 
[of]  paper.  What  kind  [of  paper]  ? — I  bought  [some]  thread.  What  kind? 
Which  is  our  carpet? — Which  are  your  scissors?—  Which  are  my  flowers? 

We  are  boiling, — I  lose, — it  weighs, — they  pull, — thou  liest, — did 
you  boil? — he  was  losing, — they  weighed, — I  pulled, — we  lay, — thou 
liast  boiled, — had  you  lost  ? — it  has  weighed, — they  had  pulled, — we  have 
been  lying, — I  shall  boil, — you  will  lose, — can  he  pull? 

2.  2Ber  Ijat  geftopft?  (S3  nmr  ber  SSrteftrager.  SBa3  ijatte 
£t1  (£r  Ijatte  ein  $aclet  giir  roen  ift  baS  $arfet?  2Ba3  l[t  in 
biefer  SSrteftafcfje?  (£in  SSogen  Copter  ift  barm.  3fe  fitr  ift  e3? 
<$3  ift  ^an^etpajrier.  ftd)  tt>imjd)e  ein  ®Ietb.  2Ba3  fur  eine§ 
ttmnjdjen  @ie?  2Ba§  Ijaben  @tc  ge{)ort?  $$  Wfetenid&tS.  28em 
Ijaben  @te  ben  S3rief  gegeben?  SBeldjen  Don  ben  S3riibern  fafjen 
@ie?  SKontit  (mit  toaS)  ^at  ber  ShiaBe  fid)  berte^t?  28eld)e§ 
ift  $0*  ^inger^ut?  SSon  toem  ijaben  @ie  btefen  §ut  gefauft? 

What  are  you  looking  for  ( 'seeking 'J?  I  have  lost  my  pocket-book. 
What  kind  was  it?  To  (mit)  which  of  these  officers  have  you  spoken? 
Which  are  our  collars?  Whom  did  you  greet?  Who  is  knocking?  It 
is  the  laundress.  What  does  she  want  (will)  ?  She  wants  (will)  to 
fetch  the  washing.  Whose  washing?  Which  of  these  shirts  belongs 
~to  (Dat.)  me?  I  must  have  a  hat;  what  kind  shall  I  buy?  With 
whom  did  you  go?  Upon  what(*)  were  you  sitting?  I  want  [some] 
paper.  What  sort  do  you  want,  note-paper  or  foolscap  paper? 
(*)  Translate  "what"  by  toa§  as  well  as  by  t»o  (wotoon  etc.) 


102 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  What  is  the  translation  of  the  interrogative  pronouns  who 
whose  (Gen.),  (to)  whom  (Dat.),  and  whom  (Ace.)! 

2.  Hov7  is  the  interrogative  pronoun  what  rendered  in  the  Nominative, 
Gfbmtive,  Da-tira  and  Accusative? 

3.  How  are  welclier  and  was^ffyr  einer  declined? 
4    Tn  mhjft  case  \swhuh  rendered  by  welches? 

5.  With  what  word  must  sein  (to  be)  agree  in  numbej  ? 

6.  When  may  what  be  rendered  by  wo  ? 

7.  When  has  wor  to  be  used  ? 


Conversation. 


Who  was  here? 

The  postman  has  been  here. 

What  has  he  brought  (gebracht)  ? 
He  had  a  letter  for  you,  and  a 

parcel  for  me. 
From  whom  is  the  parcel  ? 
It  is  from  my  tailor. 
Has  the  laundress  fetched  my 

washing  ? 
Yes,  I  gave  her  3  shirts,  5  collars 

and  6  pocket-handkerchiefs. 

Whom  did  you  meet  in  (auf) 

the  street? 

It  was  my  friend  Charles. 
What  were  you  speaking  of? 
We  spoke  of  the  new  railway- 
station. 
Whom  will  you  ask  for  (urn)  a 

pocket-book  ? 
I  shall  ask  my  uncle  for  it ;  he 

promised  to   buy  (Dai.)  me 

one  (eine). 

What  are  you  boiling  here  ? 
I  am  boiling  potatoes. 
What  kind? 
They  are  r,ew  ones. 
Whose  scissors  are  these? 
They  are  my  sister's  (those  of  my 

s.);  she  lost  them  yesterday. 
What  was  the  weight  of  this 

meat? 
It  weighed  10  pounds  (Pfund). 


2Ber  n>ar  filer? 

2)er  23rieftrdger    ift    fjter    ge- 

toefen. 

3&a3  fiat  er  gebracfjt? 
©r   IjQtte   einen  SBrief  fiir  ©te, 

.  unb  ein  ^acfet  fiir  micfi. 
23on  to  em  ift  bag  $acfet? 
@3  ift  t)on  meinem  @d)netber. 
§at  bte  2Bajd)erin  nteme  SBafcfie 

ge^olt? 
3a,    idj    gab    ifjr    3    $emben, 

5    ftrtigen    unb    6    Xafd)en* 

tiid)er. 
SSen  ^aben  @te  auf  ber  Strafe 

getrof[en  ? 
tuar  metn  f^reunb  $arl. 

fprac^en  6ie? 
SBir  fpracfien   t)on    bent   neuen 

SSa^nfiof. 
SSen  tuollen  @ie  lira  eine  SBrief* 

tofd^e  bitten? 
%tf)  n;erbe  ineinen  Dnfet  bcrriim 

bitten;  er  ber]"prad)  mir  eine 

gu  f  auf  en. 

2Ba3  ftcben  ©ie  ^ier? 
%<$  fiebe  tartoffetn. 
SSa^  fiir? 
@g  finb  neue. 
SSeffen  ©djere  ift  bteS? 
6)3  ift  bie  metner  ©cfjtoefter;  fte 

berlor  fie  geftern. 
SBieoiel  tnog  biefe^  glcifc^? 

(gg  tr-og  10  $funb. 


103 

(forn0e  Wo.  21. 


ber   Sfoolfte,    ®onig  fcon  Sdjtoeben,    ttmrbe  in 

—  was 

(Stralfunb  belagert.     SSd^renb  ber  33elagenmg  ftmrbe  eine 

besieged  .  .  siege  was 

.    grofje   5ln§a§I  SBomben   in   bi-e    @tabt   getoorfen.     (£ine3 

number          bombs          ... 

£age§   fafj   ber   ®omg    in   einem  Dimmer   im  ©rbgefdjofj 

ground-floor 

eine§  jtoeiftocftgen  §anfe§,  too    er  feinent  ©ecretar  93riefe 

house  of  two  stories  .          .  .  secretary 

bictirte.     SptflfcUcfj  fiel  eirte  S3ombe  auf  ba§  §au§,    f(^^ug 

dictated  suddenly      fell        .  bomb          .  .  .  .broke 

beibe    (Stocftoerfe   burtf),   itnb   §er^)Ia|te  Irac^enb   in   bem 

both  stories  .  .  burst          crashingly 

anftogenben   Qimmtx.      ©in    (Stiicf   ber   S3ombe  flog  bi^ 

contiguous  .  .          piece          .  bomb 

an'  bte  git^   ^e^  ^o'nigS,    to&%   jeboc^    anf  i^n  fo  tuenig 

feet          .  .  .        however        .          .         .  . 

(£tnbrncl   ma^te,    bag    e§   fc^ien,    ate    ob    er   gar   ni^t 

impression  .  that        .        seemed          as        if        .          not  at  all 

bemerft  fjatte,  ttm§  tJorgefaKen  tear.     @ein  (Secretar  aber 

had  .  happened  .  .          secretary  however 

ftmrbe  btetd)  unb  pel  anf  bie  Sefjne  feineg  @tn^Ie§  ^urifcL 

became       pale  .         fell       .          .        back  .  .  back 

®er  ®onig,  tt)etc§er  fogletc^  bemerfte,   ba§  er  nic^t  fc^rteb^ 

who      immediately  .  that      .          .  wrote 

fragte:— 28a§  fe^It  gfjnen?     SBarnm  fd^retben  @ie  ni^t?— 

ails   .        .  .  write 

S)er  (Secretar  tear  fo  erf(^rorfen,    bafj  er  faum  bie  SBorte 

secretary  .         .         frightened         that      .    scarcely     .         words 

{jeratt^ftottern  fonnte: — S)te  33omber  ©tt).  SDfajeftat!—  2Sa§ 

bring  out  stuttering         .  .          bomb        your        majesty 

tjat   benn   bte  23ombe  mit  bem  SBriefe   ju   i^un,    ben  @ie 

then         .          bomb          .  do        which 

fcfireiben?  fagte  ber  ®onig  gan§   gelaffen.      ©d^reiben  @ie 

write  ...  .  calmly  Just 

bodj  nnr  toetter. — 

jjo  on  writing 


104 

'Twenty-second  Lesson.  Smeiunbjroanstgfte  Seftton. 

The  Relative  Pronouns. 

The  relative  Pronouns(*)  are : 

ber  or  foeldjer,  who,  which,  that(**). 

Ser  is  declined  like  the  demonstrative 2>r0noim  (vide  page  96), 
and  toeldjer  is  declined  like  the  interrogative  pronoun  (vide  page 
100),  except  in  the  Genitive,  which  is  like  that  of  relative  ber ;  thus  : 

•Sing.  Masc.  Fern.  Neut.  Plur.  of  all  Gen. 

N.  ber  or  toeldjer  bie  or  tueldje  ba§  or  tneldjeS  bie  or  toeldje,     who  (which, 

O.  beffen  beren  beffen  beren,  whose  [that) 

T>.  bent  or  toeldjem  berorhjeldjer  bemorttjeldjem  benenorh)etdjen,(to)  whom 

A., ben  or  njelrfjen  bie  or  toddle  ba§  or  n)eld)e§  bie  or  toeldje,     whom 


They  must  agree  in  Gender  and  Number  (but  not  in  case)  with 
rthe  noun  or  pronoun  to  which  they  refer;  as, 

ber  ©olbot,  ber  (or  tceldjer)  ...,  the  soldier,  who  (that)  ...  bie 
;£eljrerin,  beren  ...,  the  teacher  (f.),  whose  ...  bo§  £au§,  au§  bent  (or 
•toeldjem)  ...,  the  house,  out  of  which  ...  unfere  SBaume,  bie  (or 
toeldje)  ...,  our  trees,  which  (that)  ... 

Relative  pronouns  in  German  require  the  verb  at  the  end  of 
iihe  sentence(t) ;  as, 

$ier  ift  ber  £itt,  ben  (or  tneldjen)  Sie  geftern  in  ber  Stobt  fauften. 
Here  is  the  hat,  which  you  bought  in  town  yesterday. 

In  compound  tenses  the  auxiliary  verb  is  last;  as, 
£ier  ift  ber  £ut,  ben  Sie  in  ber  ©tabt  gefauft  fia&en. 
Relative  pronouns  in  German  can  never  be  omitted  as  some- 
limes  is  done  in  English ;  as, 

®er  Sftonn,  ben  (or  toeldjen)  id}  fa!j.  The  man  (whom)  I  saw. 
3>oe  ®Ia§,  ba§  (or  njelc^es)  ©ie  jer&roc^en  !^a6en.  The  glass  (which) 
you  have  broken. 

The  Genitives  beffen  and  beren  must  always  precede  the  nouns 
by  which  they  are  governed,  and  the  definite  article  is  then  not 
required;  as, 

$a§  ©eBaitbe,  beffen  genfter  gefdjloffen  ftnb.  The  building  the 
windows  of  which  are  shut. 

Note.— Ser  or  toeldier,  etc.  are  usel  indifferently  and  their  employ- 
ment depends  much  on  euphony;  however  in  conversation  generally  ber, 
«tc.  is  preferred. 

Learn  by  heart  the  irregular  verbs:  betfjen,  to  bite  gtetdjen, 
(Dat.)  to  resemble,  to  be  like  bergletdjen,  to  compare  greifen, 
to  grasp,  to  gripe  begretfen,  to  comprehend,  to  understand  er=> 
greifen,  to  seize. 

(*)  A  relative  pronoun  refers  to  a  noun  or  pronoun  previously  used,  and  com- 
mences the  sentence  which  describes  this  noun  or  pronoun. — They  must  not 
be  confounded  with  the  interrogative  pronouns  which  are  used  in  direct  or 
indirect  questions,  like:  28er  ift  Ijier?  Who  is  here?  ©agen  6ie  mir,  mit 
ttjem  er  in  bie  ©tobt  gegangen  ift.  Tell  me  with  whom  he  has  gone  to 
town. 
<**)  For  the  relatives  luer  and  h)a§  see  the  following  lesson. 

(t)  This  is  also  the  case  with  interrogative  pronouns  used  in  indirect  questions 
(see  the  last  example  iu  the  above  foot  note  (*). 


4he  (travelling)  bag,  bic 

(3?eife)tafrf»e 
„    baker,  ber  S3acfer 
,,   ball,  ber  93  at! 
to  be  mistaken,  fid)  irren 
the  bill,  bic  SRedjnung 
,,   box,  bic  Sdjodjtel 
„   brother-in-law,     ber 

Sdjwoger    , 
Plur:  bie  Sdjttwger 
to  dance,  tonjen 


105 

the  butcher,  ber  gleifdjer 

(ber  9Jlefcger) 
„     hat-box,    bie    $ut« 


to  hire,  to  rent,  ntietljen 
thelock  (castle),  ba§  ©djlofc 
to  look  at,  Betradten 
the  match,  ba§ 

rfjen  (ba§  <5tretd)f)olsd) 
the  money,  ba§  ©elb 
Plur:  bie  ©elber 


to  revolt,  to  mutiny,  fid} 

emporen 

the    shop-keeper     (mer- 
chant), ber  "8aufmann 
Plur:  bie  ftaufleute 
the      sister-in-law,     bie 

SdjiflSgerin 
,,    trunk,  ber  Coffer 
one  kind,  einerlei 
two  kinds,  jtoeierlei 
three  kinds,  breierlei,  etc. 


Exercise  No.  22. 


1.  My  brother-in-law,  who  (that)..., — his  sister-in-law,  who(that)..., 
a  girl,  who  (that)..., — Englishmen,  who  (that)..., — a  shop-keeper, 
whose..., — the  lady,  whose..., — a  child,  whose..., — the  women, 
whose..., — my  baker,  with  whom..., — her  mother,  of  whom  .., — the 
girl,  after  whom..., —  the  shop-keepers,  from  whom..., — our  butcher, 
for  whom  ..., — your  sister,  without  whom  ..., — a  child,  through 
whom..., — the  pupils  (f.),  for  whom..., — their  trunk,  which..., — 
the  travelling-bag,  from  which..., — the  money,  with  which..., — the 
matches,  for  which..., — the  soldiers,  who  revolted  yesterday. — My 
tailor  sent  (Dat.)  me  a  bill,  which  I  paid  (Dat.}  him  three  months  & 
ago*  . — I  showed  him  the  house,  in  which  I  had  lived  with  my  parents. 
— Is  that  the  hat-box  you  bought  for  me  ? — The  gentleman  you  saw 
yesterday, . . . — The  lady  I  met  (begegnen  Dat. )  to-day, . . . — Are  you  look- 
ing at  the  looking-glass,  the  glass  of  which  is  smashed  (zerbrochen)  ? 
— I  saw  a  church,  the  towers  of  which  are  very  high. 

They  bite, — she  resembles, — I  am  comparing, — we  do  not  grasp,— T 
do  you  comprehend?' — thou  seizest, — he  bit, — they  did  not  resemble, — 
you  compared, — wast  thou  grasping? — we  comprehended, — I  was  seizing, 
— I  have  bitten, — we  had  resembled, — thou  hast  not  compared, — had 
you  grasped? — has  he  not  comprehended? — they  had  seized. 

2.  3ft  bte3  ber  £err,  beffen  $au3  @te  gctnictljct  fjo&en?  S)er 
$cmfmann,  ber  (or  tnelcfier)  mtr  btefe  Sfedjmmg  fdjtcfte,  tnujj  fid) 
geirrt  fiaben.  $tf>  faf)  Ijeute  bie  3)ame,  nut  ber  (or  roelcfier)  id)  geftern 
Slbenb  auf  (at)  bem  23alle  tanjtc.  @3  war  3$*  ©c&toager,  ben 
(or  toetdjen)  id)  im  Sweater  traf.  (Sic  gtttg  an  (to)  etnen  ©ptegel, 
in  tueldjem  fie  ficfj  betracfjtete.  Sr  |attc  etnen  Coffer,  beffen 
<5d)Iof}  gerbrod)en  mar. 

Where  is  the  house  which  you  have  taken  (hired}  ?  It  is  the 
best  coat  that  I  have.  Show  (Dat.}  me  the  hat -box  in  which  my  hat 
is.  The  shop-keeper  sold  (Dat.}  me  two  boxes  [of]  matches  which 
are  spoiled.  It  was  a  German  newspaper  in  which  he  was  reading. 
That  is  the  butcher  from  whom  we  buy  the  best  meat.  The  flowers, 
you  have  sent  (Dat.}  me,  are  very  nice.  I  took  (hired)  apartments 
(eine  Wohnung,  Sing.)  the  rooms  of  which  are  very  large. 


German  Grammar 


106 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  Like  what  pronoun  is  the  relative  pronoun  der  declined? 

2.  Like  what  pronoun  is  welcher  declined? 

3.  What  gender  and  number  must  relative  pronouns  take  ? 

4.  Do  they  agree  in  case  with  the  words  they  refer  to  ? 

5.  "Where  is  the  verh  put,  if  used  with  a  relative  pronoun? 

6.  Where  is  the  auxiliary  placed  in  compound  tenses  ? 

7.  If  the  relative  pronoun  is  omitted  in  English,  can  this  also  be  done 
in  German  ? 

8.  Are  the  Genitives  dessen  and  der  en  put  before  or  after  the  nouns  by 
which  they  are  governed  ? 


Conversation. 


Have  you  your  bag? 

No,  it  is  still  in  my  trunk, 

which  is  (steht)  in  the  other 

room. 

From  whom  is  this  bill  ? 
Our  butcher  has  sent  it. 
Have  you  read  the  letter  I 

received  (erhielt)  this  evening  ? 
Yes,  I  did  (read  it). 
Is  that  the  dog  which  bit  you 

yesterday? 
No,  this  one  has  not  bitten  me. 

Do  you  resemble  your  father? 
No,  I  resemble  my  mother. 
Can  you  comprehend  what  I 

tell  you? 
Yes,  very  well. 
Have  you  compared  your  task 

with  the  key? 
No,  not  yet. 

Have  the  sailors  mutinied? 
Yes,   but  they  soon  (bald)  fled 

(die  Fluckt  ergreifen). 
Why  did  you  try  (grasp)  after 

the  ball? 
I  wished  to  throw  it  over  (uber) 

the  house. 
Where    were    you    yesterday 

evening? 

I  was  at  (auf)  a  ball 
Did  you  dance  much  ? 
Not  very  much,  I  was  not  quite 

well  (wohl). 


£aben  Ste  gljre  fcafdje? 
Sftetn,    fie  ift  nod)  in  metnent 

Coffer,  ber  im  anbent  ^tnt* 

mer  ftefjt. 

SSon  toent  ift  biefe  SRecfjmmg  ? 
Unfer  gletfdjer  ^at  fie  gefrf)ic!t. 
£aben   <5ie  ben  S3rtef  gelefen, 

ben  id)  fjeute  Slbenb  erljtelt? 

§g,  id)  la§  tf)n. 
ft  ba£  ber  |>unb,ber  6ie  geftern 

btfc? 
9?etn,   btefer  fjat  mid)  nid)t  ge- 

Mffen. 

©letcfjen  @ic  S^ent  SSater? 
Sftein,  id)  gleid)e  meiner  2Jhttter. 
®onnen  @ie  begretfen,  tt)a^  idj 

S^nen  fage? 
So,  fe^r  gut. 
$aben  @te  ^^re   5lufgabe  nut 

bent  Scfjluffel  bergltd}en? 
S^etn,  nod)  ntd)t. 
|>aben  bte  9^Qtrofen  fid)  em|)6rt? 
So,    aber  fie    fjaben   balb    bte 

gtud)t  ergrtffen. 
SBarunt   griffen  @ie  nod^   bent 

SSoCe? 
%d)   tuottte  i^n  iiber  ba3  §au^ 

toerfen. 
S33o  ftnb  @ie  geftern  SIbenb  ge* 

roefen? 

8$  foar  ouf  einent  $8otte. 
£aben  @te  otcl  getan^t? 
^ic§t  fe^r   t)tel,   ic^   mar  ntc^t 

gang 


107 

JUaMiuj  Ctord0e  Mo,  22. 


Subnrig  ber  Sldfjtjeljnte  con  granfreitf),  bet  gegen  ba§ 

Lewis          .  .  .  France  .      towards 

(£nbe  femes  £eBen§  nidjt  mefjr  gefien  lonnte,  ftmrbe  etne§ 

end  .  life  .      anymore        .  .  was 

in   einem    §anbftmgen   in   ben   ©djtoggarten   oon 

hand-carriage        .          .      gardens  of  the  palace 

.  (£loub  fpagieren  gefcrfjren.     5ln  einem  ©patter  fa!)  er 

driven  for  pleasure  .  .  espalier 

i  SBirnenj   er  Befall  bent  (Partner  fie  §u  Bremen,    unb 


ifym   in    etn  ©arten^au§  im  §intergritnb  be§ 

summer-house        .         back-ground 

Bringen.    5>er  (Partner  ^atte  einen  @o^n  bon  fed^§  3 

bring  .  ..... 

bem  er  cmftrug,   bent  ®onig  bie  S3irnen  §n  Bringen. 

.  commissioned      .....  bring 

®imig  na^m  eine,  fcegann   fie  ju   effen,  unb  fagte  §u  bem 


,  bie  anbere  gn  effen.     5lBer  tt)ie  trmr  er  erftaunt, 

other        .  ....       astonished 

ate  ber  fteine  Sftann  ein  SJJeffer   an§  ber  Xafd^e  §og  unb 

when     .  ...... 

bie  SBtrne  bamit  f^alte,  —  2Ba§!  fagte  Subtutg  ju  iljm,-—  idfj, 

peeled  .  .  Lewis 

ber  ®6mg  Don  granfret^,   effe   bie   SBirne  ungefd^dlt,  unb 

France  .         .  not  peeled 

bu,  ber  @o{)n  einel  armen  @artner§,  fannft  nit^t  ba^felBe 


t§un  toie  idj?  —  ©etniJ^nttc^,  anttoortete  ber  ShtaBe,  effe  ic§ 

do  .  answered          .  ... 

ba§  OBfi  audjj  mit  ber  §aut   aBer  biefe§  Wlal  i^ue  ic§  e§ 

peel          .  .          time       do 

nicfjt,  toeil  mir  untertneg^  eine  toon  ben  SStrnen  in  einen 

because       .        on  the  way         ...  .  . 

@djmu{$cmfen  geroUt  ift,  unb  idj  nun  nidjt  meljr  meig, 

heap  of  dirt  rolled         ...  •      any  more  know 

bon  ben  Beiben  e£  tear.  — 

both 


.   ,  108 

Twenty-third  Lesson.  fcreiunbatoanatgfte  Seftton. 

The  Relative  Pronouns  (concluded). 

The  personal  pronouns  he,  she,  they,  etc.  and  the  words  that 
and  those(*)  are  translated  by  the  demonstratives  berjenige  or  bet, 
biejenige  or  bie,  etc.,  if  followed  by  a  relative  pronoun  relating 
to  them ;  as, 

bcrjcnige,  toeldjer  (ber)   or  ber,  toetcfjer  (ber),  he  who  (that) 
biejenige,  foelcfye  (bie)     or  bte,  tuelc^e  (bie),  she  who  (that) 
baSjenige,  toeldjeS  (baS)  or  baS,  tuelcfjeS  (bag),  that  which 
btejenigcn,  roeldje  (bie)     or  bie,  toeldje  (bie),  they  who  or  those 
berjentge,  beffen  or  ber,  beffen,  he  whose  [who 

mit  bemjenigen,  toeldjer  (ber)  or  mit  bem,  foeldjer  (ber),  with  him 

who,  etc. 

REMARK. — Such  combinations  of  relatives  with  any  demonstrative 
pronoun  are  called  correlative  pronouns. 

Note.— The  Genitive  plural  of  the  demonstrative  bet  if  followed  by 
a  relative  is  beret  (not  beren);  as, 

grinnere  bid)  berer,  foeldje  bir  ©utei  getljon  Ija&en.      Remember 
(Gen.)  them,  who  have  done  thee  good, 

Berjentge  or  ber,  foeldjer  (ber),  etc.  (berjenige  and  tuelcfjer, 
etc.  being  in  the  same  case),  if  used  in  the  sense  of  the  English 
whoever,  whoso  are  generally  replaced  by  toer,  which  is  declined 
like  the  interrogative  toer  (see  page  100). 

2Ber  must  always  commence  the  first  sentence  and  requires 
like  other  relatives  the  verb  at  the  end  of  that  sentence ;  as, 
XBer  ba3  ifct,  muJ3  fterben.    He  who  (whoever)  eats  that,  must  die. 

Note.— In  case  the  second  sentence  is  introduced  by  a  personal 
pronoun  (he,  him,  they,  etc.),  this  pronoun  must  be  rendered  by  the  de- 
monstrative bet,  bem,  etc.  according  to  the  case;  as, 

28er  ba§  t&t,  ber  imtl  fter&en.     He  who  eats  that,  he  must  die. 

fBer  bid)  Ijajjt,  ben  Ijafje  nidjt  toieber.    He  who  hateth  thee,  him  hate 

not  again. 

The  relative  what  (or  whatever)  is  translated  ttw§,and  that  which, 
if  used  in  a  general  sense,  is. translated  bag  luag  (or  tuag). 

29a§  is  declined  like  the  interrogative  tt)a3  (seepage  100) and  re- 
quires like  the  other  relatives  the  verb  at  the  ena  of  its  sentence ;  as, 
SBa§  ©te  mir  fagten,  ifl  ntdjt  fealjr.     What  you  told  me,   is  not 
true.    3d)  fage  nur  ba§,  t»a§  id)  fogen  barf.    I  only  say  that  which 
I  am  allowed  to  say. 


Learn  by  heart  the  irregular  verbs:   leibett,  to  suffer      pfeifen, 
to  whistle    reifcen,  to  tear  jerreifcen,  to  rend,  to  tear  (to  pieces). 


(*)  "That"  and  "those"  being  in  opposition  to  "this"  and  "these"  are 
always  translated  by  jener,  if  followed  by  a  relative ;  as,— @§  tft  nidjt 
btefer,  fonbern  jener,  ber  eS  ju  mir  fogte.  It  is  not  this  one,  but  that  one 
who  said  it  to  me. 


by,  near,  Bei  (Dat.) 
content(ed),  satisfied,  au« 

frieben 

the  desk,  ba3  $ult 
Plur:  bie  $ulte 
discontented,  dissatisfied, 

unjufrieben 

the  drawing,bie,3eidjmntg 
„  egg,  ba§  ®i 
Plur:  bie  ©iet 


109 

esteemed,  geadjtet 

to  feel,  fiif)Ien 

happy,  lucky,  gtufllidj 

hard,  Ijort 

honest  (true),  red&tfdjoffen 

man      (mankind),      bcr 

SJienfcIj 

(see  exceptions  on  p.  15.) 
the    owner,    bcr    @tgen» 

tfjiimer 


to  present  (to  give), 

fdjenten 

the  ring,  ber  SRing 
seldom,  rare,  felten 
soft,  nmdj  Igliicllidj 

unhappy,    unlucky,    un» 
firstly,  erftenS 
secondly,  jraeitenS 
thirdly,  brittenS 
fourthly,  biertenS,  etc. 


Exercise  No.  23. 

1.  "Which  gentleman?     He  who*)  was  here  yesterday. — Which 
lady?    She  whose  daughter  has  died. — "Which  girl?     That  one  with 
whom  I  came. — Which  men  (man-kind)?     They  who  are  happy. — 
From  which  officer?   From  him,  who  lives  in  your  house. — With  which 
lady?    With  her,  whom  you  saw  to-day. — Out  of  which  house ?     Out 
of  that,  the  windows  of  which  are  open. — After  which  children?  After 
them  who  are  in  the  garden. — For  which  ring?     For  that,  which  I 
have  sold. — With  out  which  bag?    Without  that  in  which  my  washing 
was. — Through  which  window?    Through  that  which  was  shut. — For 
which  matches?    For  those  which  I  bought. — He  who  (or  whoever)  is 
content,  is  happy. — They  who  are  (or  whoever  is)  honest  (true)  are  (is) 
esteemed. — What  (or  whatever)  he  said  is  true  (wahr). — I  will  forget 
that  which  you  said  to  me. 

We  suffer, — I  do  not  whistle, — thou  tearest, — you  are  tearing  (to 
pieces'), — they  were  suffering,— he  whistled, — did  you  tear?— thou torest 
(topieces), — I  have  suffered,— we  had  not  whistled,— has  she  been  tear- 
ing?— you  had  torn  (topieces), — whistle ! 

2.  3n  toefdjem  Sjhifte  ift  ba3  SSrtefpo^ier?    (£3  ift  in  bem 
(or  bemjenigen),  bal  im  anbern  gtmmer  ftef)t.    3ft  biejer  alte  £err 
ber  Sigentpmer  be3  $ferbe£?    Stein,   e§   ift  jener,   ber  bei  bem 
Dn!el  ftefjt.    SBer  nid)t  pren  tottf,  mufc  fuljlen.    SBelc^e  (£ter  finb 
J)art?    $te  (or  biejenigen),  toeldje  in  ber  ©djuffel  ftnb,  ftnb  toeidJ. 
2Betd)e  3eicf)mmg  f>aben  (3ie  gentacijt?  3d)  madfjte  bie  (or  biejenige), 
n>elcf)e  ouf  bem  Xtfd)e  Itegt.    3Ba3  biHig  ift,  ift  felten  gut.     2)te* 
jenigen  (or  bie)  SJienfdjen,  bie  ungufrteben  ftnb,  finb  itnglurfltd). 

Which  ring  did  you  lose?  That,  which  my  aunt  gave  (presented) 
(Dat.)  me  two6  years0  agoa  .  With  which  lady  will  you  dance?  With 
her  who  danced  with  me  the  day  before  yesterday.  That  which  is  ex- 
pensive, is  generally  good.  Where  did  you  find  these  violets  ?  I  found 
them  near  that  tree  which  you  showed  (Dal. )  me  yesterday.  He  who 
(or  whoever)  said  that,  is  a  bad  man  (Mensch).  Are  these  apples  from 
a  tree  in  the  garden.  No,  they  are  from  that  one,  which  stands  near 
the  house.  Those  who  are  rich,  are  often  (oft)  (the)  most  discontented. 


(*)  Before  relative  sentences  a  comma  must  always  be  used,  in  Gennan,  as  well  as 
after  unless  a  full  stop  has  to  be  used. 


110 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  How  are  Tie,  she,  they,  etc.  and  that  and  those  translated,  if  followed 
by  a  relative  pronoun  ? 

2.  What  is  the  Genitive  plural  of  the  demonstrative  pronoun  der,  if 
followed  by  a  relative  pronoun  ? 

3.  By  what  are  derjcnige,  welcher  etc.  generally  replaced,  if  used  in  the 
sense  of  whoever  ( whoso}? 

4.  How  is  icer  declined? 

5.  What  place  does  wer  occupy,  and  where  is  the  verb  put? 

6.  How  are  he,  him,  they  etc.  rendered,   if  introducing  the  second 
sentence  ? 

7.  How  is  the  relative  what  (whatever)  translated,  and  how  that  which 
if  used  in  a  general  sense  ? 

8.  How  is  was  declined  ? 


Conversation. 


Are    you  satisfied    with   this 

drawing  ? 
No,    that  which  your  cousin 

made,  is  better. 
Which  egg  do  you  want? 
I  want  that  which  is  on  the 

plate. 
What  gentleman  was  with  (bei) 

you? 
It  was  he  who  was  with  me 

yesterday. 
Which  of  the  women  died  ? 

She  who  was  ill  such  a  long 

time  (so  lange). 
Has  she  suffered  very  much  ? 
Yes,  she  suffered  very  much. 
Who  has  whistled? 
The    same    boy    who    always 

whistles  before  our  house. 
Wlio  has  torn  this  newspaper? 
I  did  not  tear  it. 
Which      curtains     have     you 

bought? 
I  bought  those  you  showed  me. 

To  (in)  which  theatre  shall  we 

go? 
We  will  go  to  that  in  which  we 

were  once  before  (schon  dn- 

mal). 


Sinb  Ste  mit  biefer  3eidjnung  git* 

frieben  ? 
9fetn,  bte,   toeldje  Sfcr  Setter 

mad)te,  ift  beffer. 
2SeId)e3  (£t  ttriinfc&en  Ste? 
3d)   ttiimfdje  bag,   toeldjeS   cmf 

bem  Setter  ift. 
28a§  fur  ein  4?err  tear  bei  Sfyntrit 

@$  tpar  bcr,  toelcfier  geftern  bet 

mtr  ftmr. 
2Md)e  con  ben  grauen   ift  ge* 

ftorben? 
$>ief  toeldje  fo  lange  franf  toar. 

Sat  fte  fefir  [oiel]  gelitten? 

3a,  fie  litt  j_efir  [met]. 

28er  fiat  gepfiffen? 

Serfelbe  $nabe,  ber  tmmer  tor 

unferem  ^_aufe  pfeift. 
SBer  fyat  biefe  fettling  gcrrtff  en  ? 
fie  nid)t. 


fauft? 
S<^  faufte  bicf   tneld^e  @te  mtr 

getgten. 
Sn  n?eld)e§  Xfieatcr  fotten  totr 

ge&en  I 
2Btr  ttjotfen  in  ba§  ge^en,   in 

bem  ttnr  fdjon  einmal 


Ill 
dmtm  Wo.  23. 


tJrtebridj  ber  (Sroge  unb  ber  Qpbelhta&e. 

(Frederick  the  great  and  the  page.) 

©in   Berii^mter   prenfjtfdjer   (General   toar   in   feiner 

celebrated  Prussian  .          .  . 

Sngenb   ©belfnabe  an   bem  £ofe   griebrirfjS  be§  (SJrofjen. 

youth  page  .  .          court  .  .  . 

(£r  fjatte  feinen  SSater  mefjr,  nnb  feine  Gutter  nafjrte  fidj 

lived 

fummerlid?  in  ifjrem  SBitttoenftanbe.    Urn  fie   nnferftit|en 

scantily         .  .  widowhood  in  order     .  support 

^n  limnen,   itBerna^m    er   ofter§    bie    ^a^tnjac^en   feiner 

undertook         .         often          .          night-watches 

®amerabenr  ba  jebe  $Rac§t  ein  @bel!nabe  fcor  bem  @$Iaf= 

comrades          as    every          .  .  page  .          .  bed- 

gemad)  be§  ^6nig§  ftmdjen  ntngte.    ®a§  @elbr   tt)eld^e§  er 

chamber       .  .  watch  .  .  . 

bafiir  erfn'elt,  fparte   er  gnfantmen  nnb   fd^icfte   e§  feiner 

received       saved         .          together  .  ... 

SDhttter.    ©inntal  fonnte  ber  ^onig  nici^t  fd^Iafen  nnb  toottte 

sleep 

fic^    etrt)a§   borlefen   laffen.     (Sr  Ilingelte,    er  rief;    afier 

(to  have  read  something  to  him)  .  rang  .      called 

•ftienmnb  lam.     (£nblidj   ftanb    er  auf  nnb  ging  felbft  in 

no  one  .  at  last  got          ...  .  . 

ba§  -yieBenjimmer,   nm   §n  fefjen,    oB  lein  $age  ba  toare. 

adjoining  room     in  order    .  .       whether    .  —     there    were 

£ier   fanb    er'  ben    gnten  Siingling,  ber  bie  SSadjje  iiber* 

youth  .         .       watch  un- 

nommen  §atte,    am  £tfc$e  fi|en.    SSor  i^m  tag  ein  ange* 

dertaken  ...  .  ....          com- 

fangener  S3rief   an   feine  2ftntter;    aber  er  tear  ii&er  bem 

menced  ...  .  ..... 

(Sdjrei&en  eingef^tafen.    S)er  ^iJnig  fdjftd)  §erBei  nnb  lad 

writing  fallen  asleep  .  .  stole          near          .         * 

ben  $nfang  be§  S3riefe§,  toeld^er  fo  tantete: 

.  commencement .  .  .  ran 

fotgt    conclusion  folloiving). 


112 

Twenty-fourth  Lesson.  SBienmbanmnjigfte  Seftioiu 

The  Indefinite  Pronouns. 
The  indefinite  Pronouns  are  : 

3ebermann,everybody,everyone  j   einanber,  each  other,  one  another 
§emanb,    somebody,  someone,  j   jelbft  or  felber,  (my)  self,  etc. 
anybody  j    etiPdS,  something,  anything 

SRtemanb,  nobody,  not  anybody  i    itidjtS,  nothing,  not  anything 
man,  one,  they,  people 

Sebermann,  S^ntanb,  9Ziemanb  take  an  inflection  only  in  the- 
Genitive  by  adding  §  ;  as, 

3ft  3enmnb  im  Simmer?  Is  some  one  in  the  room?  Sfttemonb  ift 
bier.  Nobody  is  here.  3dj  Ijore  ftiemanb.  I  do  not  hear  anybody. 
gebermann§  greunb  tft  SftiemanbS  greunb.  Everybody's  friend  is  no- 
body's friend. 

Note.  —  3emanb  and  Sftiemonb  are  sometimes  declined  in  the  Dative 
by  adding  em  or  en,  and  in  the  Accusative  by  adding  en;  as, 
Dat:  Semonbem  or  ^emanben:  Ace:  Sliemanben. 

2ftatt  can  only  be  used  in  the  Nominative  singular  case  (as 

subject  of  the  sentence),  and  it  is  in  general  the  translation  of  oiie, 

and  also  of  they  or  people^*),  if  no  particular  persons  are  meant  ;  as, 

9JJan  fpridjt  oft  uniiberlegt.    One  often  speaks  without  reflection. 

SJion  gab  ben  Solbaten  93rob  unb   SSein.      They  (people)  gave  the 

soldiers  .[some]  bread  and  wine. 

Note.—  The  other  cases  of  man  are  replaced  by  etner,  etc.  (vide  in- 
definite numerals  on  page  126). 

©inanber  (called  also  the  reciprocal  pronoun)  is  indeclinable;  as> 
®r  unb  fein  gteunb  Ijelfen  einanber.    He  and  his  friend  help  one 
another. 

©elbft,  felber  are  indeclinable,  and  are  explained  with  the- 
reflective  pronouns  on  page  88. 

is  indeclinable  ;  as, 


$5rten  6ie  ettua§?    Did  you  hear  anything?     @r  gob  mit 
He  gave  me  something. 

Note.—  ®twa§  in  ordinary  conversation  is  sometimes  abbreviated  into- 
»o8;  as,—  $o&en  @ie  »a§?  Have  you  anything? 

Sftdjt^  is  invariable  ;  as, 

(Jr  gab  mir  ntc^tl.    He  gave  me  nothing,    ftdj  fonnte  nic^tS  feb,en. 
I  was  not  able  to  see  anything. 

Note.  —  3febermann,  gemanb,  9itemanb  begin  now  often  with  small  letters, 
and  etttm»  and  nicf)t§  still  often  with  capitals. 

Learn  by  heart  the  irregular  verbs:  *retteit,  to  ride,  to  go  on 
horseback  *fc&Ietdjen,  to  sneak,  to  steal  (into)  f  djleif  en,  to  sharpen^ 
(to  grind)  fdjnetben,  to  cut  ftreiten,  to  dispute,  to  quarrel  (to 
fight)  *bleiben,  to  remain,  to  stay  leifien,  to  lend  nteiben,  Der- 
meiben,  to  shun,  to  avoid(**). 

(*)  "The  people,  bie  Scute"  is  translated  bas  SBott,  if  meaning  the  "nation". 

(**)  "To  avoid"  is  translated  by  meiben  if  followed  by  a  noun  or  pronoun) 

in  the  Accusative  denoting  a  person  ;  otherwise  generally  by  toetmeiben. 


to  admire,  fcettmnbern 
the  avarice,  bet  ©eij 
„   bedroom,  ba§  ©djlaf* 

jitnmet 

detestable,  DeradjtHdj 
the  enemy,  ber  Sfeinb 
„  intelligence,  bie  3latf)> 
ticfct 


113 

the  news,  bie  SReuigfeit 

(sing.) 

,,   noise,  ber  fiarm 
over,  about,  ii&er  (Dat. 

or  Ace.) 

the  patience,  bie  ©ebulb 
to  relate,  erjciljlen  ffudjt 
the  selfishness,  bie @el&ft» 


the    sitting-room,      baS1 

SSofinjimmer 
„   stone,  ber  Stein 
„    story    (history),     bie" 

©ef$i$te    ' 
unexpected,  unertoartet 
the  voice,  bie  ©tinxme 
whole,  ganj 


Exercise  No.  24. 

1.  Everybody  ought  to  be  polite. — He  was  every  one's  enemy. — 
The  king  spoke  to  (mit)  everybody. — Some  one  has  taken  my  ball. — 
1  heard  somebody's  voice. — Is  somebody  in  the  sitting-room? — No,, 
nobody  is  there  (dort). — She  is  nobody's  friend  (m.) — One  must  not6 
praise  oneself  (sichfl-  selbst). — One  ought  never  (nie)  to  talk  (sprechen) 
too  much. — They  (people)  helped  (Dat.}  the  sick  man. — They  (people) 
sang  in  (auf)  the  street. — They  (people)  gave  (Dat.)  the  poor  boy 
nothing. — The  advocates  spoke  to  (mit)  each  other. — "We  saw  one- 
another  three6  weeks"  ago« . — I  have  thanked  him  (himself). — We- 
ourselves  admired  her  patience.  — Have  you  something  for  me  ? — "Were 
you  able  to  hear  anything6  during  the  noisea  ?— No,  I  have  not  heard, 
anything. 

They  ride, — she  is  sneaking, — we  do  not  sharpen, — I  am  cutting, 
— do  you  dispute? — thou remainest, — I  lend, — we  shun, — they  did  not 
ride, — thou  sneakedst, — you  sharpened, — we  were  cutting, — I  quar- 
relled,— they  stayed, — she  lent, — you  avoided, — have  you  ridden? — 
thou  hadst  sneaked, — we  have  sharpened, — I  had  cut, — he  has  disputed, 
— they  had  remained, — you  have  lent, — I  have  avoided. 

2.  (£r  fagte  etttmS,  after  id)  fonntc  il)n  nidjt  toerftefcen.  fat- 
ter (Stein  Sentanb  berlefct?  @r  toerlefcte  Sftiemanb.  9ftan  fott 
(ought)  ben  Xag  ntdjt  toor  bent  Slbenb  loben.  ®onnten  <3ie  etjv- 
anber  fefcen?  Sebermann  bettmnberte  ba3  fcfjone  ©emdlbe.  -ifttdjte 
ift  t)erad)tttrf)er:  ate  [ber]  (SJeij  unb  [bie]  ©elbftfudjt.  ©eprt  btefer 
§unb  Sentanb  int  £aufe?  9Jian  f^rad^  iiber  biefe  uneritmrtete 
yiafyxifyt  in  ber  gan^en  (all  over  the)  ©tabt.  gebermann  fprad^ 
toon  ber  S'leuigJeit.  ^n^firem  ©^tafjimnter0  tear6  9Ztemanb.a  SJlan 
ift  gliicfli^,  ttjenn  (if)  man  jufrieben6  ift.a  Sfcntanb  fiat  ntir 
toor  jhjet  3<rf)ren  biefe  ^ej^td^te  er§afilt.  , 

I  heard  somebody  knock  at  the  door.  I  have  spoken  to  (mit) 
nobody.  One  is  unhappy,  if  fwenn)  one  is6  discontented*1  .  Every- 
body admired  my  friend's  fine  horse.  Are  you  expecting  anybody  T 
There  (es)  is  something  in  this  basket.  I  cannot  see  anything.  Some 
one  in  the  village  related  that  story  to  (Dat.)  me.  We  forgot  one- 
another.  To  (Dat.)  everybody  the  intelligence6  came«  unexpeoted(ly). 
The  noise  was  too  great,  we  could  not  hear  anything.  They  (or  people)- 
spoke  about  it.  I  cannot  see  anybody.  The  whole  town  esteema 
(achtet)  his  uncle. 


Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  How  are  Jedermann,  Jemand,  Niem&nd  declined  ? 

2.  How  are  Jedermann  and  Niemand  in  the  Dative  and  Accusative 
sometimes  declined? 

3.  In  which  case  can  man  only  be  used? 

4.  When  are  one,  they,  people  translated  by  man} 

5.  Is  einander  declined  ? 

<5.  Are  etwas  and  nichts  declinable  ? 


Conversation. 


From  whom  did  you  hear  this 

news? 

Everybody  spoke  about  it. 
Has  anybody  been  in  (hier), 

since  I  was  away  (fort)? 
Somebody  inquired  for  (fragen 

nach)  you. 
Was  it  a  gentlemen? 
No,  it  was  a  lady. 
Will  she  come  again? 
Yes,  she  said  so  (  es). 
Where  is  your  cousin  to-day  ? 


He  rode  to  (auf)  the  country. 
How  long  will 
(dort)t 


he  stay  there 


He  did  not  tell  me  anything 

about  it. 

Who  stole  into  the  house? 
I  have  not  seen  anybody. 
Can  you  cut  the  paper  with  this 

knife? 
No,  I  have  not  yet  sharpened 

it. 
Did    you    not    dispute    about 

something,  that  you  do  not 

understand  ? 
I  understand  it  perfectly  (sehr) 

well. 
Did  anything  of   his  fortune 

remain  to  (Dat.)  your  friend  ? 
Xo,  nothing  remained  to  him. 
Can  anybody  lend  (Dat.)  me 

a  pencil? 
I    have    lent    mine    to    your 

brother. 
Why   does    everybody    avoid 

this  man? 
On  account  of  his  avarice. 


Son    mem    fjorten    @ie    Mefe 


gebermann  fpradj  baruber. 
SSar  ^emanb  §fcr,  fctt  id)  fort 

mar? 
Semanb  fragte  nadj  SJjnen. 

25  ar  e§  etn  £>err? 

Vltin,  t%  tear  erne  S)ame. 

SStfl  fie  ttriebcr  fotnmen? 

3a,  fie  fagte  e3. 

SSo  ift  %hi  Setter  ijeute? 

(&:  rttt  auf  bag  Sanb. 

SSie  Iang(e)  mill  er  bort  bleiben? 

©r  fagte  mtr  nidjtS  bariiber. 


SSer  fd)Itd)  in  ba§ 

fd)  ^abe  ^temanb  gefefjen. 
onnen   @ie    ba^   $apier   mit 
btefent  9Keffer  fd)neiben? 
9ltin,  id)  fjabe  eg  noc^  ntc^t  gc* 

fd)ttffen. 

Strttten  Sic   nid)t  iiber 
ba^  Sie  nic^t  toerfteijen? 

Sc^  terfte^e  eg  fe^r  gut. 


SBIieb 
con  feinetn  Sermogen? 

nid)tg  ift  if;m  geblieben. 
mir  gemanb   etnen 
ftift  let^en? 
%d)  Iiabe  meinen  ^retrt 

geltefjen. 
SSarum  meibet  ^cbermann  biefen 


SSegen  feineS 


115 

<tmtm  Mo.  24, 


Sfrtebrtdj  ber  ®rof?e  iwb  ber  (£belfna6e, 

(©djlufe    Conclusion.) 

,,2Fteine  Befte,    getieBte  Gutter!    $)iefe§   ift  frf)on  btc 

beloved  .  .... 

t>rttte  Sftacljt,    bafj    id)  fiir  (Mb  toadje.     SBeinalje  lann  idf) 

that        .         .  .          watch  nearly 

e£  titdjt  tneljr  cmSljaltett.    3nbeffen  freue  ic§  mic^,  bag  tc^ 

anymore        endure  however  (I  am  glad)  that 

nun  ftrieber  gel^n  Staler  fiir  @ie  tierbtent  §abef  toeldje  ic^ 

dollars        .  .         earned 


here\vith 

rt  iiBer  ba§  gute  §erj  be§  3uttgttng§  Ifigt  ber 

touched  .  .  .        heart        .  youth  lets 

ig  i^n  fd^Iafen,  geljt  in  fein  Sintmer,  §oft  §toet  Gotten 

sleep  ...  .  .  .  rolls 

SDitfaten,  ftedt  i^m  eine  in  jebe  Xafcfje,  nnb  legt  fi^  tuieber 

ducats         puts        .          .        .      each          .  .... 

fdjlafen.    Sll§  ber  (SbellnaBe  erioad^te  nnb  ba§  ©elb  in  feinen 

sleeping        when     .  page  awoke         .         .  ... 

Xafc^en  fanb,  fonnte  er  tro^l  benfen,  looker  e§  gefommen 

well        think         whence 

tuar.     (Sr  frente  ftt§  jtnar  fefjr  barilBer,  loeil  er  nun  feine 

he  was  rejoiced    to  be  sure     .  .  because.  . 

Sautter  nod)  Beffer  unterftitjjen  !onnte;  aBer  er  erfd^ra!  auc§, 

support  .  .        .        was  frightened 

toetl  ber  ^onig  i^n  fdjlafen  gefunben  ^atte.      Sim  3)lorgen 

"because    .  .  .         sleeping  .  .  .         morning 

Bat  er  ben  ®b'nig  um  SSerjei^ung  toegen  feine§  ®ienftfe^Ier§ 

for  pardon  .  .          fault  of  service 

unb  banfte  fiir  ba§  giittge  ^5ef(^en!.     S)er  gute  ^onig  loBte 

kind  .  .  . 

jetne  linbtid^e  SieBe,  ernannte  i^n  fogleic^  gum  Officer,  unb 

filial          love        appointed       .    immediately   an        officer 

fcfjenfte  tf)m  nod^  eine  (Sumtne  ©elb,  um  fid)  SltteS  anfd^affen 

.  sum  .      in  order    ,         all  procure 

,§u  timnen,  toa§  er  fiir  feine  neue  ©tettung  Braitdjte. 

that      ...  .  position  needed 


116 

Twenty-fifth  Lesson.  gimfunb^toanjigfte 

Remarks  on  Pronouns. 

The  personal  pronouns  of  the  third  person  (er,  fie,  e3,  fie, 
etc.)  in  all  their  cases  are  often  replaced  by  the  demonstratives 
berfelbe,  btefelbe,  btefelben,  etc.  (also  sometimes  by  biefer  or  ber). 

This  is  principally  done  whenever  a  misunderstanding  might  arise, 
and  to  avoid  a  succesion  of  pronouns  sounding  alike  or  nearly  so,  or 
also  the  frequent  repetition  of  the  same  pronoun ;  as, 

9Hein  93ruber  farad)  mit  bem  Slgenten,  aber  berfelbe  fouftc  ba$ 
$ferb  bennod)  (better  than:  aber  er  faufte).  My  brother  spoke  to 
the  agent,  but  he  (the  same)  bought  the  horse  nevertheless.  ^dj. 
fab,  bic  Sonigin,  fafjen  6ie  bief elbe  aud)  (better  than :  f  ofjen  <5ie  fir 
aud))?  I  saw  the  queen,  did  you  see  her  also? 

Note.— For  the  same  reason  to  avoid  a  misunderstanding  the  posses- 
sive adjectives  of  the  3rd  person  fein  and  iljr  are  often  replaced  by  beffen 
and  beren  or  be§felben,  berfelben;  as  follows: 

3fjre  Xante  bemcfjte  bie  alte  Same,  elje  He  311  beren  Sodjter  gtng 
(or  el)e  fie  ju  ber  Xodjter  berjelben  ging).  Your  aunt  visited  the 
old  lady  before  she  went  to  her  daughter. 

Demonstrative  and  relative  pronouns  may  be  contracted  with 
prepositions  governing  the  Dath*  or  Accusative,  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  the  personal  and  interrogative  pronouns  (see  pages  84  &  100). 

Thus  the  demonstrative  pronouns  this  and  that  if  used  in  a 
general  sense  are  rendered  by  ba  (bar),  and  the  relatives  which,  thaty 
what,  if  not  referring  to  persons,  by  too  (toor),  the  preposition, 
being  affixed  to  these  words ;  as, 

tuomtt,  with  which  (what,  that)- 
ttjooon,  of  or  from  which  (what, , 

that) 

tuoran,  at  which  (what,  that) 
tuorauf,    upon    which    (what,, 
that),  etc. 

Notes  1.— "This"  may  also  be  rendered  by  b,te  or  Ijier,  if  corresponding 
to  the  English  "herewith,  hereof,"  etc.;  as,— Ijiemit  or  Ijiermit,  with  thi& 
(herewith),  fjierouf,  upon  this  (thereupon). 

2. — If  "this"  or  "that"  is  followed  by  a  relative,  no  contraction 
with  the  preposition  takes  place  ;  as,— 3d)  farad)  Don  bem,  n>a§  Sic  mir  fagten. 
I  spoke  of  that  which  you  told  me. 

OBSERVATION  1. — The  preposition  oljne  (without)  can  never  be 
contracted,  and  we  say  generally  oljne  ba§felbe  (without  it),  oljne  biefeS, 
oljne  tDeId)e»,  etc. 

2. — It  and  them  preceded  by  a  preposition,  instead  of  being  ren- 
dered -by  the  contracted  form  may  also  be  translated  byberfetbe,  etc.;  as, 
§ier  t|i  ein  ©tein,  h>a§  rooHen  €>te  mit  bemfelben  (or  bamit)   tljun? 
Here  is  a  stone,  what  will  you  do  with  it? 


bamit,  with  this  (that) 
bacon,  of  or  from  this  (that) 

boron,  at  this  (that) 
barauf,  upon  this  (that),  etc. 


Learn  by  heart  the  irregular  verbs:  fdjeinen,  to  shine,  to  seem 
fd^reiben,  to  write  frfjreten,  to  cry,  to  scream  fcfjtoeigen,  to  be 
silent  oerjeifjen,  to  pardon  belueifen,  to  prove  fjeifjen,  to  bid, 
to  be  called. 


behind,  Ijinter  (Dat.  or 

Ace.) 

the  cloud,  bie  SBolfe 
to  commit  (a  crime),  &e« 

geljen   .  (irr.) 
to  count,  jaljlen 
the  dagger,  ber  Sold) 

Plur:  bie  £>oldje 
to  excuse,  entfdjulbigen 


117 

the   error   (mistake),  ber 

Srrtfium 

Plur:  bie  Sfrrtfjumer 
,,    fault,    the   mistake, 

ber  getter 
to  glitter,  glaitjen 
the  moon,  ber  SUionb 
Plur:  oie  SUlonbe 
„  murderer,  ber  2Korber 


the  murder,  ber  9ft orb 
Plur:  bie  SRorbe 
„   revolver,  ber  §Ret)oI» 
toer(*)         C£immel 
„    sky,     heaven,      ber 
„   star,  ber  ©tern 
„    sun,  bie  ©onne 
„  translation,  bie  lte&er= 
fe&ung 


Exercise  No.  25. 

1.  Her  aunt  came  and  with  her  (the  same)  the  four  children.  — 
The  teacher  gave  his  son  the  book,  which  he  (the  same)  read.  —  I  was 
in  the  room  and  saw  the  picture;  it  (the  same)  is  very  large.  —  The 
manufacturer  praised  the  workman,  he  gave  him  (the  same)  something 
to  drink.  —  His  brothers  came  ;  did  you  see  them  (the  same)l  —  Did  the 
boys  look  for  my  watch,  and  did  they  find  it  (the  same)?  —  I  took 
(brachte)  the  dog  to  the  agent  and  showed  it&  (the  same)  to  (Dat.) 
him*  .  —  We  have  spoken  of  that.  —  I  cannot  say  anything  about  that 
{this).  —  I  cannot  excusa  you  for  that.  —  The  carriage,  in  which  we  were 
driving  (fuhren),  was  very  old.  —  That  is  the  dagger  with  which  the 
murderer  committed  the  murder.  —  That  is  (it)  of  what  we  were  speaking. 

It  shines,  —  they  write,  —  do  you  cry?  —  thou  art  silent,  —  I  do  not 
pardon,  —  we  prove,  —  do  you  bid  ?  —  thou  seemedest,  —  we  were  writing, 

—  I  screamed,  —  they  were  silent,  —  did  he  pardon?  —  I  proved,  —  we  bade, 

—  they  have  shone,  —  she  had  written,  —  you  have  not  cried,  —  we  had  been 
silent,  —  I  have  pardoned,  —  they  had  proved,  —  he  has  bidden. 


2.  3ft  bteS  bie  tteberje^nng,  toortn  (there)  fo  triele 
ftnb1?  @ie  fdj  bie  (Bonne  fdjeinen,  aber  balb  tterfdjtuanb  btefelbe 
fotnter  ben  SBoIfen.  SSalb  ba(r)narf)  fdjien  ber  SSJlonb  unb  bie  ©terne 
gtangten  am  (in  the)  £immel.  SBtr  jafien  ben  afa&ol&er,  toomit 
ber  (Solbat  nadj  (at)  bent  ^raftbenten  f  dpfj  .  28tr  gafilten  bas>  ($elb  unb 
»ermtebenb  babnrd)a  einen  ^rrtfjiim.  (£r  tooCte  tnetnen  SRing  fiaben, 
aber  id)  gab  tfint  benfelben  nidjt.  35amit  (by  that)  fonnen  <&ie 
bert)eijen. 


The  desk,  in  which  the  money  was,  was  not  shut.  I  gave  him  no 
money,  at  (durch)  which  he  seemed  discontented.  Have  they  (one) 
found  the  dagger  with  which  the  man  wounded  himself?  Don't 
dispute  about  that.  By  (mit)  this  I6  shall*  excuse  myself.  Here  is  the 
stone  upon  which  I  sharpened  my  knife.  I  have  the  key  with  which 
I  shall  compare  my  translation.  I  made  a  mistake  in  that.  Your 
cousin  (f.  )  came  to-day  ;  did  you  see  her  (the  same)  ?  Did  you  show 
(Dat.)  the  gentlemen  the  dogs,  and  did  they  buy  them  (the  same)1 
The  boy  saw  the  ball,  took  it,  and  threw  it  (the  same)  through  the  window. 


(*)  Pronounced  as  in  English. 


118 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  By  what  words  are  the  personal  pronouns  of  the  3rd  person  er,  sie, 
es,  fie  in  all  their  cases  often  replaced? 

2.  When  is  this  principally  done  ? 

8.  f5y  what  words  are  for  the  same  reason,  the  puun^qgive  adjectives- 
sein  and  ihr  replaced? 

4.  When  and  how  in  German  may  the  demonstrative  pronouns  this  and 
that  and  the  relatives  which,  that,  what  be  rendered  and  contracted 
with  a  preceding  preposition  governing  the  Dative  or  Accusative  ? 

5.  How  and  when  may  this  be  rendered  equally  well,  if  contracted  ? 

6 .  If  this  or  that  is  followed  by  a  relative,  can  they  also  be  contracted 
with  a  preposition  ? 

7.  Can  the  preposition  ohne  (without)  ever  be  contracted  with  any 
pronoun,  and  what  is  said  instead  ? 

8.  How  may  it  and  them  preceded  by  a  preposition  be  translated  in- 
stead of  being  rendered  by  the  contracted  form? 


Conversation. 


Where  were  you  the  day  before 
yesterday? 

I  was  with  my  cousin  in  (auf) 
the  country. 

Had  you  fine  weather? 

In  the  morning  (Morgens)[t}ieTe] 
were  many  clouds  in  the  sky, 
but  in  the  afternoon  (Nach- 
mittags)  the  sun  was  shining. 

Was  the  night  also  fine  ? 

Yes,  the  moon  shone,  the  stars 
glittered,  and  there  was  (es 
ging)  a  pleasant  wind. 

Have  you  been  working  much 
to-day? 

Yes,  I  had  to  write  many  letters. 

To  (an)  whom  have  you  written 

them? 
Most  of  them  I  wrote  to  my 

customers. 
What  is  your  name? 

I  am  called  (my  name  is)  Fre- 
derick. 
Be  silent ! 
No,  I  must  speak. 


2Bo  roaren  @ie  oorgeftern? 

3d)  ttmr  mit  meinem  Setter  auf 

bent  Sanbe. 

fatten  @ie  fdjoneS  SBetter? 
SttorgenS  toaren  triele  SBolfen  am 

$tmmel,     aber 

fd)ien  bie  ©onne. 

28ar  bie  SRadjt  aitcr)  fdjon? 
$a,  ber  SO'Jonb  frfu'en,  bie  (Sterne 

gtan§ten  unb  e3  ging  ein  an* 

geneijnter  SSHnb. 
£aben  @tc  fjeute  oiel  gearbeitet  ? 

3a,   id)  Ijatte  ciele  S3riefe  511 

fc^reiben. 
Sin  toen  !§a&en  @ie  btefelben  (or 

fie)  ge)d)rteben? 
S)ie  meiften  berfelben  (or  babon) 

fd)rieb  id)  an  meine  ^unben. 
SBie   fieiBen   Sie?   (or  2&eld)e£ 

ift  3^r  ^ameO 
3d&    ^ei|e    (mein    SZamc    ift) 

griebridj. 
©djnjeigen  Sie! 

c^  mu|  fpred)en. 


119 

JUaMttg  dmtm  Wo.  25. 

$r.  §oug!j,    ber  fcerftorBene  SBifcfjof   toon   SBorcefter, 

—  .  late 

jetcljnete  ftc!j  burci)  ©anftmutlj  be§  Characters  fotuo^I,  at$ 

distinguished  .  gentleness  .  as  well         as 

burd)  jebe  anbere  cf)riftHcf)e  Xugenb  au3,  roofcon  bie  folgenbe 

every          .  Christian         virtue        —  .  .       following 

®ef(f)tcfjte  etnen  SBetoeiS  liefert. — (£in  junger  SJlann,  beffett 

story  .  proof      furnishes  .  . 

gamitte  gut  mit  bent  SBifdjof  Befannt  gemefen  tuar,  mad^te, 

family          ...  —        acquainted 

6et)or   er   auger  Sanbe§  ging,   erne  Sfleife   burd§  ©ngtaub, 

before        .  abroad  .  .       journey 

unb  ftattete  @r.  Sorbfd^aft  etnen  S3efud^  abr  al§  er  an  beffen 

paid      his         lordship  .  visit       —     when  . 

Sanbfi|   DorBeifam.      Sufa'tttg    tt)ar   @ffen§§ett    unb   ba& 

country  seat        passed  accidentally        .          dinner  time 

Dimmer  tear  t)oH  bon  ©efeHfc^aft    Snbeffen  empftng'  tfjn 

full        .  society  however       received 

ber  93tf(^of  mit  grower  greunbltdjfeit;    aber    at§    i^m  ber 

friendliness  .... 

Wiener  einen  @tu§l  retcfjte,    toarf  er  ein  !iinftltc§e§  SSaro* 

servant  .  .  gave  .          .        .  artistic 

meter  fjerttnter,  roeld)e§   §n)an§tg  ^uineen  gefoftet  §atte. 

—  down  .  . 

2)er   §err   war   augerorbentltc^    Beliimmert   unb   Bat   um 

exceedingly  sorry  .  .          for 

(Sntfdjulbtgung,    bag    er  bie  SSeranlaffung  be§  UnfaU§  ge* 

pardon  that       .        .  cause  .      mischance 

raefen  Ware,  al§  ber  SSifc^of  i^n  gutmiit^ig  unterBrad^  unb 

when     .  .      good-tempered     interrupted 

tarfjelnb  fagte: —  @eien  8ie  unBeforgt,  benn  td§  Bin  3fjnen 

smilingly          .  be  quiet  for 

feljr  tjer^flic^tet    28ir  fjaBen  etnen  fel^r  trodnen  6ommer 

indebted  ....  dry 

geljaBt,  aBer  tdj  f)offe,  ba§  tt)ir  nun  Sftegen  Befommen  raerben^ 

hope     that        ...  get 

benn  idj  fa§  ba§  barometer  nte  in  meinem  SeBen  fo  fatten. — 

for  —          never  .  .  life  fall 


The  Cardinal 
eine,  ein) 


120 
Twenty-sixth  Lesson  A.        Secpmtbgtoangtgfte  Seftton. 

The  Numerals. 

Numbers. 

24  menmbgtoangig 

25  fitnfunbgroangig 

26  fecJ)3unbgtoangig 

27  fiebemmbgttartgig 

28  acfjtunbgttmngtg 

29  neummbgttmngig 

30  breijjtg 
40  toiergig 
50  fiinfgtg 
60  fedfoig 

70  ftebgtg  (or  ftebengtg) 
80  acfjtgig 
90  neungig 

100  fjunbert 

101  JjunbertunbeinS 

102  Ijimberhmbgmet 
110  ijimbertunbgefjn 
200  gtoeiljunbert 

1.000  taufenb 

1.001  taufenbunbetnS 
5,000  fiinftaufenb 

100,000  ijunberttaufenb 
1,000,000  erne 


1  etn  (etn, 

-2  gttjet 

3  bret 

4  trier 

5  ffinf 

7  fteben 

8  ad&t 

9  neun 

10  gebn 

11  elf 

12  gtodlf 

13  bretgefjn 

14  triergeljn 

15  fiinfge^n 

16  fed)gef)n 

17  ftebge^n  (or  ftebengeljn) 

18  adjtgefjn 

19  neunge^n 
•20  gttmngig     • 

21  etnunbgtDangtg 

22  gnjetunbgluangig 

23  bretunbgroangig 

The  Ordinal  Numbers 

are  formed  from  the  cardinal  by  adding  te  up  to  19,  and  fte 
.from  20  upwards ;  ber  erfte  and  ber  britte  are  irregular  and  to  odjt 
e  only  is  added ;  as, 


.the    1st  ber  (Me,  ba3)  erfte 

„     2nd  ber  gtoette 

„      3rd  ber  britte 

„      4th  ber  trierte 

„     5th  ber  fiinfte 

„     6th  ber  fec^gte 

„     7th  ber  ftebte  (or  ftebente) 

„     8th  ber  ac^te 

„     9th  ber  neunte 

„  10th  ber  getynte 

.„  llth  ber  elfte 

„  12th  ber  gttjolfte 

„  13th  ber  breige^nte 

.„  14th  ber  btergeljnte 

„  15th  ber  fiinfgefjnte 

„  16th  ber  fedjgeljnte  f8^^nte) 

„  17th  berfiebge^nte(orfieben- 


the 


18th  ber  adjtgeljnte 
„     19th  ber  neungefjnte 
„     20th  ber  gttmngtgfte 
„     21st  ber  emunbgtoangigfte 
„     30th  ber  breiBtgfte 
„     40th  ber  biergigfte 
„     50th  ber  fiinfgigfte 
.,     60th  ber  (edjgigfte 
„      70th  ber  fiebgigfte  (or  fte- 
„     80th  ber  acf)tgtgfie[bengigfie) 
„     90th  ber  neungigfte 
„    100th  ber  ^unbertfte 
„    101st  ber  ftunbertunberfte 
„    102nd  ber  f)imberhntbgnjeite 
„    200th  ber  gtoetf)unbertfte 
„  1000th  ber  taufenbfte 
„  millionth  ber  millionftc 


121 

The  Fractional  Numbers 

.are  formed  as  in  English,  but  in  German  an  I  is  added  to  the  or- 
dinal numbers,  except  ein  £>dlb(e3) ;  as, 


*tn  £aI6(e§),  one  half 
eiu  SDrtttel,  one  third 
4»ei  SDrittel,  two  thirds 


ein  SStertet,  one  quarter  (fourth) 

ein  fjiinftel,  one  fifth 

ein  Sroanaigftel,  one  twentieth,  etc. 


The  Multiplicative  Numbers 
are  formed  by  adding  f  adj  to  the  cardinal  numbers  ;  as, 
einfad),  one-fold  (simple)  I    bretfad),  (treble)  threefold 

jroetfad),  twofold  (or  boppelt,  double)   |   trierfad),  fourfold,  etc. 

The  Iterative  Numbers 
•are  formed  by  adding  mat  to  the  cardinal  numbers  ;  as, 

etnmal,  once       jnmmal,  twice       breimal,  thrice,  three  times,  etc. 

The  Variative  Numbers 
.are  formed  by  adding  ertet  to  the  cardinal  numbers  ;  as, 

einertei,  one  kind       jtteterlei,  two  kinds       breierlei,  three  kinds,  etc. 
Also:  mandjerlet  or  trielerlet,  many  kinds. 

The  Distinctive  Numbers 
are  formed  by  adding  n§  to  the  ordinal  numbers  ;  as, 

erftenS,  firstly       jtoettenS,  secondly       brittenS,  thirdly,  etc. 

NOTE  THE  FOLLOWING  EXPRESSIONS  : 
aSictJtcI  ttfir  (tteldje  Sett)?  what  o'clock,  what  time? 
(£§  ift  ein  llf)r  or  e§  ift  etn§,  it  is  one  (o'clock) 
(£§  tft  sroet  Uljr  or  e§  ift  jttjet,  it  is  two  (o'clock) 
fjalb  ein  Uljr  or  ^oI6  ein§,  half  past  twelve 

t)olb  gtuet  (U^r),  half  past  one    ^aI5  bret  (ll^r),  half  past  two,  etc. 
ein  aStertel  auf  etn§  or  ein  SBiertel  nad)(*)  giDoIf,  a  quarter  past,  twelve 
ein  SSiertet  auf  jtoei  or  ein  SStertel  nod)  einl,  a  quarter  past  one,  etc. 
bret  SStertel  ouf  etn§  or  ein  SSiertel  uorC")  ein§,  a  quarter  to  one 
bret  SSiertel  auf  jttjet  or  ein  SStertel  tior  jtoei,  a  quarter  to  two,  etc. 
:fiinf  9Jl;nuten  bor  ein  U^r  or  ein§,  five  minutes  to  one,  etc. 

9Jitnuten  nad)  ein  Uljr  or  ein§,  twenty  minutes  past  one,  etc. 


llm  totefciel  llfjr  (nm  welrfje  Sett)?  (at)  what  time? 

urn  (or  am)  ein  Ut)r,  at  one  o'clock,  etc. 

2>er  UJtcuicItc  ift  ^eute?  or  Sen  njietiielten  ^a6enh)tr?    What  is  the  date? 

' 


inden,  June  1st  1881 

fittb  ©ie  gcBoren?    When  were  you  born? 
Sd)  bin  am  britten  2luguft  1860  ge&oren.  I  was  born  on  the  third  of  August  I860. 
2Bic  alt  finb  @tc?    How  old  are  you?    What  is  your  age? 
3d)  Bin  jtoansig  ^afyre  alt.    I  am  twenty  years  old.    I  am  twenty  years  of  age. 
.3m  ^atjre  1882.    In  1882. 

(gtltftwitnig,  with  one  horse,  etc.     stoeifpanntg,  with  two  horses,  with  a  pair, 
etc.    fed)§fpanmg,  six  in  hand,  in  a  carriage  and  six. 

(*)  Instead  of  nod)  :  i'tber,  and  instead  of  toor  :  Bi§  or  ;ju  may  be  used. 


122 

Twenty-sixth  Lesson  B.         Setpunbghmnsigfte  Sefttoiu 

Remarks  on  the  Numerals. 

The  cardinal  Numbers  are  indeclinable,  except  the  following : 
@Hn  (cine,  ein)  is  used  if  followed  by  a  noun.     It  is  declined 
like  the  indefinite  article,  from  which  it  differs  by  having  the  full 
stress  in  pronunciation ;  as, 

em  £unb,  one  dog    mil  einem  SKeffer,  with  one  knife 
(£in  takes  the  termination  of  biefer  if  referring  to  a  noun,  viz : 
ctner,  cine,  ein(e)3;  as, 

ftofcen  Sic  einen  ober  jJnei  £unbe?— %3)  fjabe  nut  cinen.     Have- 
you  one  or  two  dogs? — I  have  only  one. 

(£tn3  is  only  used  in  counting,  if  not  followed  by  another 
number;  as, 

Ginmal  einS  ijl  ein§.    One  tune  one  is  one. 

OBSERVATION.— Gin  preceded  by  an  article  or  substitute  is  declined 
like  an  adjective  and  must  be  considered  an  indefinite  numeral. 

Notes. — 1.  For  expressing  the  Genitive  of  a   cardinal  number,   "of" 
is  usually  translated  by  toon  and  the  numeral  is  not  inflected;  as, 

SJie  Gtnttjoljner  ton  jtoei  6tabren.    The  inhabitants  of  two  towns. 
6tn  SBater  Don  fiinf  fiinbern.    A  father  of  five  children. 

2.  However  juici  and  brei  followed  by  a  noun  and  not  preceded  by 
an  article  or  preposition  may  form  the  Genitives  by  adding  er,  and  also 
the  Datives  by  adding  en;  as, 

Sie  (£inrool)net  jtueier  Stfibte.      The  inhabitants  of  two  towns. 
3n>eien  £erren  btenen.    To  serve  (Dat.)  two  masters. 

3.  All  numbers  from  gtoei  to  ^unbert  may  take  en  in  the  Dative,   if 
not  used  with  a  noun ;  as, 

mit  tieren,  Don  fiinfen,  etc. 

The  ordinal  Numbers  are  declined  like  adjectives ;  as, 

bo§  erfte  9JlaI,  the  first  time      mit  bem  giDeiten  SUQC,   with  the 
second  train. 

Ordinal  numbers  used  in  apposition,  like  adjectives,  must  agree  hi 
gender,  case  and  number  with  the  noun,  and  must  commence  with  a 
capital  letter ;  as, — £arl  bet  ©rfte  (Sari  I),  Charles  the  first  (Charles  I). 
fiorl§  be§  Grfien  (Starts  I),  of  Charles  the  first  (of  Charles  I). 

The  fractional  Numbers  are  not  declined,  except  fjalu,  which 
with  a  noun  is  declined  like  an  adjective,  and  must  directly  pre- 
cede the  noun  ;  as, 

SQlit  feinent  fatten  SSerntogen,  with  half  his  fortune.     S«  cm  unb 
eincr  tialBen  Srunbe,  in  one  hour  and  a  half. 

All  fractional  numbers  had  better  precede  the  noun  in  German ;  as, 
Sn  brei  unb  einem  btertel  3a^re.  In  three  years  and  a  quarter. 

The  multiplicative  Numbers  are  declined  like  adjectives;  as, 
bet  einfadje  SBetrag,  the  simple  amount. 

The  iterative,variative  and  distinctive  Numbers  are  indeclinable. 


Learn  Try  heart  the  irregular  verbs:  *fa^ren,  to  drive,  to  go  (or 
ride)  in  a  vehicle  or  boat    graben.  to  dig    begraben/  to  bury. 


broad,  wide,  Brett 

the  chest  (box),  bie  JKfle 
„   coal,  bie  fiotyfe 
„   death,  ber  Sob 
„    family,  bie  ganrilte 
„   foot,  ber  gufc 
Plur:  bie  §ii|e 

Lewis,  Subttrig 


the  hundred-weight,  ber 

(Sentner 

the  minute,  bie  SDlinute 
nearly,  Beinatje 
the  poet,  ber  SHcfjter 
„    pound,  ba§ 
Plur:  bie 
Prussia,  ^reufjen  n. 


to  reach,  erreidjcn 
the  song,  ba§  Sieb 

Plur :  bie  Sieber 
„    success,  ber  ©rfolg 
„   sum,  bie  (Suntme 
„   time,  bie  Sett,  foa§ 

Wat,  (in  counting) 
to  wait,  marten 


Exercise  No.  26. 

1.  Three  men  are  in  the  house. — She  saw  twenty  one  soldiers. — 
Five  and  six  are  eleven.— Four  times  eight  are  thirty  two.— Thirty  four 
from  ninety  six  leave  (lleiben)  sixty  two. — A  year  has  three  hundred 
and  sixty  five  days. — Have  you  two  hooks?  I  have  only  one. — One 
soldier  stood  in  the  garden  and  one  before  the  house. — Have  you  one 
pen  or  two?  I  have  only  one. — One  and  one  are  two. — Here  are  the 
works  of  (von )  two  poets. — He  is  the  owner  of  six  houses. — London 
had  in  1881  (see  page  121)  nearly  four  millions  [of]  inhabitants. — He  is 
the  seventh  king  of  this  family.— Are  you  here*>  for  (zu)  the  first 
time"  ?— He  will  come  on  the  twenty-fifth  of  March  fJ/arsJ  (see  page!21). 
She  died  in  the  seventh  week. — Frederick  the  second  of  Prussia  was  a 
great  king. — Who  was  king  after  the  death  of  Lewis  XVIII  ?  His 
brother  Charles  X. — They  remained  half  the  day  in  the  town.— She 
lost  half  her  fortune. — One  hundred  weight  and  a  half  of  coal  (coals). — 
This  small  table  is  a  foot  and  a  (Ace. )  half  high. — I  want  three  quarters 
[of  a]  pound  [of]  coffee. — The  parcel  weighs  seven  pounds(*)  and  a  half. 
— He  had  a  threefold  success. — I  paid  him  the«  sumc  tenfold^  — The 
young  lady  sang  six  or  seven  times.— She  sang  many  kinds  [of]  songs. 
—They  have  two  kinds  [of]  chairs. —Firstly  16  did<*  not  say  it,  secondly 
it6  is«  not  true. 

We  drive, — I  am  digging, — they  do  not  bury, — was  he  driving?— 
you  digged, — thou  buriedst, — she  has  driven, — they  had  digged, — I 
have  buried, — you  must  drive, — we  shall  dig, — I  cannot  bury. 

2.  @ie  (they)  f  amen  gftcimal ;  einmal  am  erften  SfJlat  (May), 
ba§  anbere  2M  am  neunten.  ©§  irar  am  I8ten  j^unt  tm 
gafjre  1815.  SSir  lefcn  auf  ber  fitnfunbfte&engtgften  (Seite  (page). 
Subftrig  ber  SSier^ehnte  ttmr  !ein  guter  ^omg.  %$  toar  urn  brei 
SMertel  auf  ac&t  bort  (there).  $er  glufc  ift  150  gu|(*)  breit.  (££ 
ift  jefct  beinafie  jtoolf  Uljr. 

I  have  been  waiting  more  than  half  an  hour.  What  o'clock  is  it 
(see  page  121)  ?  It  is  five  minutes  to  eleven.  When  was  your  brother 
born  (see  page  121)  ?  He  was  born  on  the  5th  of  July  (Juli  m.)  1860. 
You  will  reach  the  town  in  two  hours  and  a  half.  In  this  chest  [there] 
are  fifteen  pounds(*)  [of]  tea.  At  what  time  do  you  expect  me? 

(*)  Masculine  and  neuter  nouns  expressing  number  and  weight,  when  preceded 
by  a  numeral  and  followed  by  a  noun  (also  understood)  are  indeclinable  and  only 
used  io  the  singular- 


124 


Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  Are  cardinal  Numbers  in  general  declinable? 

2.  When  is  ein  (eine,  tin)  used,  and  how  is  it  declined? 

3.  How  is  ein  declined,  if  referring  to  a  noun  ? 

4.  When  is  eins  used  ? 

-5.  How  is  of  before  a  number  usually  translated  for  rendering  the 

Genitive,  and  is  the  number  inflected  ? 

€.  How  are  ordinal  Numbers  declined? 

.7.  What  is  to  be  observed  with  these  numbers  if  in  apposition! 

8.  Are  fractional  Numbers  declined  ? 

9.  How  is  halb  declined,  and  where  is  it  placed  ? 

10.  What  place  do  fractional  Numbers  take  in  German? 

11.  How  are  multiplicative  Numbers  declined? 

12.  Are  iterative,  variative  and  distinctive  Numbers  declinable? 


Conversation. 


What  o'clock  is  it? 

It  is  three  o'clock. 

At  what  time  (at  what  o'clock) 

are  you  coining? 
I  shall  come  at  J/4  to  four. 

By  (mit)  which  train  (Zug  m.) 

will  you  go  ? 
By  the  train  at  5.25. 

What  is  the  date? 

To-day  is  the  thirteenth, 

How  old  are  you? 

I  am  eighteen  years  old. 

When  were  you  born? 

I  was  born  on  the  18th  of 
December  1863. 

In  what  year  did  your  father 
die? 

In  1867. 

When  did  your  friend  die? 

«On  last  Monday. 

Is  he  buried  yet  ? 

Yes,  they  buried  him  on  Thurs- 
day. 

Where  (wohin)  has  your  cousin 
driven  [to]  ? 

He  has  driven  to  (in  the)  town. 

Did  he  drive  a  pair? 

INo,  he  drove  only  one. 


9Sie  Diet  Ufir  ift 
S3  ift  brei  Ufir. 
Itm  ttrietriel  Ufjr 


fommen  @te? 


3d)    roerbe    urn   3/4    auf    trier 

fommen. 
3)Mt  toelcfiem  $uge   roollen  Ste 

gefien  (reifen)? 
Sftit   bem     ue  um   fiinf  lUjv 


nnebtelte  ift  beute? 
£eute  ift  ber  breigebnte. 
38ie  alt  ftnb  @ie? 
3d)  bin  acfitsebit  gafire  alt. 
9Sann  ftnb  Ste  gelioren? 
3d)  bin  am  18  ten  December  1863 

geboren. 
3n  tt>eld)em3afcre  ift 

geftorben? 
3m  3aftre  1867. 
SSann  ftarb  3^ 
Sim  le^ten  SKontag. 
3ft  er  fdjon  begraben? 
3a/  man  begrub  ifm  am 

ner^tag. 
UBobin  ift  3&r  Setter  gefafiren? 

Sr  ift  in  bte  Stabt  gefaftren. 

£iifir  er  groetfpanntg  ? 

9Zein,  er  fufcr  nur  etnfpannig. 


125 

ReaMttg  €*mise  Mo.  26. 

(£in  ®raf  in  $ari3  fcefag  einen   grofjen  Garten  &or 

count     .  ..... 

ber  @tabt,  an  beffen  £f)iir  er  folgenbe  SBorte  malen  liejj: 

.  .          .       following      words       painted      had 

— ,,2Ber  fcofllommen  gnfrieben  ift,  erljalt  biefen  Garten  gnm 

completely  .  .       receives 

©efd^enf."     SSiete  Sente,  toetdje  bie  2Cnffcfjrtft  tafen,  ladjtett 

inscription          .  laughed 

baritber,   benn   fie   ttmfiten,    baft   ber    @raf    ein    (Spag*- 

for          .  knew  that         .          count          .  joker 

Dogel  ttmr.    $lnic  ein  ^ei^al§,    ber   cmdj    bie    5Iuff(^rtft 

miser  .  .  .  inscription 

Ia§,   fagte   511   fidjj   felbft:— S)a§   ift  ja  eine  leidjte  SBeife 

.  indeed    .  easy       manner. 

t)iet  ®elb  o^ne  SJlit^e  unb  5lrBeit  §u  derbienen. — @r  gina 

trouble       .  .  .  earn 

gum  (Srafen   unb    fagte: — 2Ber    t)oH!ommen  §nfrieben   iftr 

count  .  .  .  completely 

fott  g^ren  (Garten  jum  ©ef^enl   er^alten.     3<^  bin  t)oH* 

receive  .          .         com- 

lommen  gufrieben.    @ie  milffen  mir   ba^er  %$un  Garten 

pletely  .  ...        therefore 

gefien. — Sie  fagen,  @ie  feien  fcoHfommen  pfrieben,  ermieberie 

are        completely  .  replied 

ber  ®raf ;  after  angenommen,  ba§  ic§  e§  nidjt  glanBe,  bann 

.      count  .  supposed  that     .        .  .          believe        then 

milffen  @ie  e§  erft  fcetoeifen.    SSie  !onnen  @ie  bie§  t^nn?" 

.   at  first  .  ....  do 

— ffia§    lann  nic^t  Belt>iefen  tuerben,  anttcortete  ber  @ei§* 

...  .  be  answered          .         miser 

IjalS,  ba§  fitfrft  man  im  §er^en,   aBer  ba§  §er^  lann  man 

heart  .  .       heart 

3diemanb  §eigen. — 35er  ©raf  layette  nnb  fagte : — 3$  MJe,  bag 

count     smiled        .  .        that 

@te  ni^t  tjoHfommen  jufrieben  finb;  benn  toer  ba3  ift,  toiinfdjt 

completely  .  .for         ... 

ni^tg,  unb  ic^  barf  S^nen  bafier  ben  Garten  nid^t  geBen.— 

therefore      . 


126 

Twenty-seventh  Lesson.        ©iebenunbjtoanjigfte  Seftion. 

The  Indefinite  Numerals. 
The  indefinite  Numerals  are : 
ctt=er,  all  (declined  like  biefer)  ;    mel)rer--e,  several  (d.  1.  biefe  Plur.) 


att=e§,  everything  (d.  1.  biefeS) 

ganj,  whole  (d.  1.  an  adjective) 

:'?nug,  enough  (not  d.) 

ioenig,  little  (generally  not  d.) 

1'lur    tt>enig=e,  few  (d.  1.  biefe) 

tin  toenig,  a  little  (not  d.) 

einig»er,  seme  (d.  1.  biefer) 

Plur  :  eintg=e,  some,  a  few  (d.  1.  biefe) 

Diet,  much  (generally  not  d.) 

Plur:  toiel=e,  many  (d.  1.  biefe) 

me&r,  more  (not  d.) 

ber  meift=e,  (the)  most  (d.  1.  an  adj.) 


fein,  (adj.)  no,  not  a,  not  any(d.Ltnein) 
temper,    (Pron.)  none,  not  any,  no 

one  (d.  1.  biefer) 
fceibe,  both  (see  remarks) 
jeber,  (d.  1.  biefer)  each,  every,  every- 

one (or  ein  jeber,  d.  1.  an  adj.) 
mand)=er,  many  a,  many  a  man  (d.  L 

biefer) 

Plur.  mandj=e,  many,  some  (d.  1.  biefe) 
ein=er,  one  (some-one)  (d.  1.  biefer) 
onber--er,  other 
cm  anber=er/  another 


\f,    , 
]"(d-  L 


NOTE.  —  Most  of  these  numerals  are  used  either  as  adjectives  or  as 
pronouns,  as  in  English. 

Remarks. 

The  definite  article  following  all  is  better  not  translated  in 
German;  as, 

olle§  @elb,  all  the  money.    oHe  Scanner,  all  the  men. 
An  article  or  substitute  following  both,  in  German  has  to  pre- 
cede beibe,  which  then  takes  n  in  all  cases  ;  as, 

nteine  Beiben  SBriiber,  both  my  brothers  in  biefen  fceiben  £5ufem, 
in  both  these  houses. 

The  definite  article  after  both  is  usually  omitted  in  German, 
and  betbe  is  declined  like  biefer;  as, 

S3etbe  Scfjfeeftern  (also  :  bte  Betbeit  ©djtueftern),  both  the  sisters. 
Some,  referring  to  a  noun  in  the  singular,  denoting  material, 
is  usually  not  expressed  in  German  ;  as, 

8dj  fjafce  ©elb.  I  have  some  money.  9£et)men  Sie  toon  biefer 
Sutler.  Take  some  of  this  butter.  £aben  Sie  SBein  ?  So,  idj  Ijabe. 
Have  you  any  wine?  Yes,  I  have  some. 

Some,  referring  to  any  noun  in  the  plural  is  generally  ren- 
dered einige;  as, 

£ier  finb  einige  SBiidjer.  Here  are  some  books.  £aben  ©ie  einige 
gebern?  3a,  l^ier  ftnb  einige.  Have  you  some  pens?  Yes,  here  are 
some. 

NOTE.  —  Some  referring  to  a  plural  noun  may  also  be  not  rendered;  as, 
£a&en  Sie  SBogel?    S«/  i$  6°^.     Have  you  any  birds?     Yes,  I 
have  some. 

Any  in  questions  is  not  translated  in  German  ;  as, 

£aben  Sie  Slepfel  gcfauft?    Have  you  bought  any  apples! 
NOTE.  —  Not  any  is  always  rendered  by  lein,  feiner,  etc. 
OBSERVATION.—  All  of  the  above  declinable  numerals,  used  substantively 
(i.  e.  if  having  a  general  meaning  and  not  referring  to  distinct  persons  or  things) 
commence  with  a  capital  letter. 

Learn  by  heart  the  irregular  verbs:    fdjlagen,  to  beat,  to  strike 
tragen,  to  carry,  to  wear    ttwfdjeii,  to  wash. 


the  candle,  bie 
„    care,  btc  Sorge 
,,    cheese,  ber  $a§ 
<or  ®afe  after  the  2nd  d.) 
the  cigar,  bie  Stgotre 
„    concert,  bo§  Gonccrt 


127 

the  gooseberry,  bie  <S>ta--  i  the  oil,  ba§  Cel 

djel&eere  |    „    raspberry,    bie   $im- 

Beere 

salt,  ba§  @olj 
Plur:  bie  ©alje 
strawberry,  bie  (£rb-- 

Icact 


home  (adv.),  nadj 

C&eiirt) 
at  home,  511  fiaufe   (ba« 


duty,  bie  ^flid^t        i  the  hope,  bie  ^offniing 


Exercise  No.  27. 

1.  He  loses  all  hope. — I  found  all  the  money. — All  the  brothers 
are  coming. — Everything  is  lost. — The  whole  house  has  not  more  than 
five  rooms. — There  (es)  was  nobody  in  (auf)  the  whole  street. — Have 
you  enough  cheese?  Yes,  I  have  enough. — Give  (Dot.)  me  some  salt. 
Have  you  any  beer  ?  Yes,  I  have  some. — Can  you  lend  (Dat.)  me  some 
paper  ?~Send  (Dat.)  me  some  of  (von)  these  candles.— I  bought  two 
pounds  [of]  strawberries ;  will  (wollen)  you  have  some  ?  —  Have  you 
any  oil?  No,  I  have  not  any. — Will  (wollen)  you  take  any  of  these 
cherries? — I  have  drunk  little  milk  to-day. — Only  a  few  people  were 
at  (in)  the  concert. — He  has  much  money,  but  his  father  has  more. — 
(The)  most  of  (von)  these  raspberries  are  spoiled. — The  lady  sang  several 
songs. — He  has  no  care  (cares). — None  of  (von)  the  English  poets  writes 
so. — He  sold  both  his  dogs.  — Both  these  cigars  are  good. — Both  the  boots 
are  torn  (zerreissen). — Each  day  has  its  duties. — Many  a  soldier  died 
here. — Have  you  a  good  pencil?  Yes,  I  have  one. — He  did  not  pay 
himself,  others  paid  for  him. 

Do  you  beat? — thou  carricst, — he  washes, — they  were  beating, — 
we  did  not  carry, — I  washed, — they  have  stricken, — had  she  worn? — 
have  you  washed? — beat! — I  shall  carry, — they  cannot  wash. 

2.  SSertteren  @te  ntcfit  aHe  £offmmg!  SStr  trantett  etmge 
fjtafdjen  93ter  imb  gtngett  bann  (then)  natf)  $aufe.  3ft  enter  toon 
3f)ren  SSrilbcrn  511  £aufe?  9Mtt,  feiner  tft  ba  (there).  SSiel  ®elb 
madjt  GJKnen  ntdjt  tinnier  gliicfltcfi.  3)iefe  arme  gamtlie  fiat  fefir 
ttenig  (Mb.  ^4  ^aufte  ©tac&el&eerett,  aber  tdj  fonnte  nidjt  atte 
effett.  SBtr  tuerben  mefirere  donate  in  Sonbon  btetben.  S)iefe 
^leiber  finb  fitr  tneine  beiben  ©^toeftern. 

He  lived  some  years  later.  He  has  less  (wcnigcr)  money  than  I. 
Will  (wollen)  you  eat  a  few  apples  ?  He  was  drinking  (Acc.)tfie  whole 
day.  Several  have  made  the  same  mistake.  All  the  soldiers  have 
drunk  much,  but  none  of  (von)  them  paid.  Many  of  (von)  his  friends 
have  died.  You  will  find  many  an  old  friend  at  (in)  our  house.  Very 
few  people  had  heard  of  it.  I  have  eaten  some  fruit.  You  will  lose 
too  much  time.  Can  you  give  me  a  little  bread?  Many  a  man  is  not 
that  which  he  seems&  to  be«  .  He  had  two  sons,  but  both  are  dead 
now.  I  have  lost  one  of  (von)  my  pencils.  Every  window  in  the  room 
is  broken  (to  pieces).  There  (es)  were  only  a  few  cigars  in  the  box. 


128 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  Is  the  definite  article  following  all  usually  translated  in  German? 

2.  Where  has  an  article  or  substitute,  standing  with  both,  to  be  put  ia 
German,  and  how  is  beide  declined  then  ? 

3.  What  is  usually  done  with  the  definite  article  after  both  in  German, 
and  how  is  beide  declined  in  this  case? 

4.  When  is  some  usually  not  rendered  in  German  ? 

5.  How  is  some  translated  when  referring  to  a  noun  in  the  plural  ? 

6.  Is  any  in  questions  usually  translated? 

7.  How  is  not  any  rendered  if  an  adjective  (i.  e.  standing  with  a  noun),, 
and  how  if  a  pronoun  ?    (See  the  list  of  indef.  numerals. ) 


Conversation. 


Is  [there]  still  any  wine  in  this 

bottle? 

No,  I  have  drunk  all. 
Please,  give  me  some  cheese. 

I  have  not  any  in  the  house. 
Have  you  perchance  (vielleicht) 

some  butter  ? 
Yes,  but  only  very  little. 
Have  you  any  strawberries  ? 
Here  are  a  few  in  this  basket. 
Do  you  want  some  salt  ? 
No,  thank  (Dat.)  YOU,  I  have 

enough. 
May    I  give  (Dat.)  you  some 

cigars? 

Yes,  please  give  me  some. 
Is  your  father  at  home  ? 
No,  not  yet ;  but  he  will  come 

home  in  half  an  hour. 

What  o'clock  is  it? 

It  has  just  (gerade)  struck  three. 

How  long  did  yoii  wear    this 

overcoat  ? 
I    wore  it  [for]  several  years. 

Has  the  laundress  washed  my 

shirts? 

She  washed  only  one. 
Where  are  your  cousin  and  your 

sister? 
Both  are  at  (in)  the  concert. 


3ft  nod)  SSctn  in  btefer  ftfofdje  ? 

Sftein,  icf)  fjabe  alien  getrimfen. 
SBitte,    geben  Ste   mir   (etroaS) 

Safe. 

3$  Ijabe  feinen  im  £auie. 
$aben  Sic  metteidjt  Gutter? 

3a,  aber  niir  fefjr  roenig. 

§aben  @te  Srbbeeren? 

|>ier  ftnb  einige  in  biefem  £orbe. 

SSiinfdjen  @ie  ©alg? 

(9?etn),   idj   banfe  (3$nen),  id^ 

fjabe  gemig. 
£arf  id)  S^nen  einige  Gugarren 

geben? 

So,  bitte,  geben  Ste  mir  einige. 
3ft  3§r  SSoter  §n  £aufe? 
•ftetn,  nod)  nidjt;   aber  er  tmrb 

in  etner  Ijalben  ©tunbe  nac^ 

^>aufe  fommen. 
2Bie  met  ll^r  ift  e§? 
^   ^at   gerabe  brei  (Ufjr)   gc- 

fd)Iagen. 
2Bie  Iang(e)   f>aben   ©ie   btefcn 

lleberrocf  getragen? 
3d)  fjabe  t^n  me^rere  ^Q^re  ge- 
tragen. 
£at  bie  SScif^erin  metne  ^emben 

geroafc^en  ? 
6te  nwfcf)  nur  eine§. 
SBo  finb  3f)r  Setter  unb 

©d^roefter? 
S3eibe  finb  im  (Concert. 


129 

ReaMng  €*erd0e  Wo.  27. 

$5rei  ®anf(eute,  bte  mit  einanber  reifteit,  fanben  einett 

Scfjajj  itnb  tfjetlten  benfelBen.     $)a  tfjre  £eBen§mittel  auf= 

treasure        .         divided  .  .          .  provisions 

ge§ef)rt   ttmren,  famen  fie  iiBerein,  einige   in   ber  nadtftert 

eatea  up  .  they  agreed  ... 

©tabt   ju   faufen.     $)er  jnngfte  uBernal^n  biefen  5Iuftrag 

undertook  .       commission. 

unb   fling  fort,    UntertoegS  fagte  er  511  ftrf): — 3c§  rtJiirbe 

away.  on  the  way  ....  .         should. 

t>tel   reufjer   fetn,    toenn   i^    attein   ben  @c^a^    gefunben 

if  .       treasure 

§dtte.     2Bte  fonnte  ic^  bte  X^eite  ber  cmbern  Befommcn? 

had  .          could        .        .         parts          .  .  get 

3>c()     tmff    bte    SeBenSmtttel    Dergiften    unb    Bet    metner 

.  provisions  poison  .          on 

SRnc!!eI)r  fagen,    bag   id^  fd^on   §n    SJltttog   gefpetft    fjaBe. 

return  .  that        .  .  dined 

9ftetne  ©efa^rten    effen   bann  o!§ne  Sfttjstranen  baDon  nnb 

companions  .  then  .  mistrust 

miiffen  fterBen.    2Cnf   biefe  SBetfe  toitrbe  ber  gan^e  @^a§ 

.  .  .  manner      would         .  .         treasure 

mein  (Sigentfjum  toerben. — 3n^ff^tt  fagten  bie  Betben  anbern 

property         "become  meanwhile          ... 

Sftetfenben  gu  einanber: — 2Benn  biefer  jnnge  9ftenfdj  nid§t  mit 

travellers       *  .  if  fellow 

nn§   gereift  toare,    fatten  tt)ir  ben  (Si^aJ   nii^t  mit  ifjnt 

had  we  should  have  .       treasure 

tfjetten  miiffen,   toobiircf)  tDtr  fe^r  reic^  fein  toiirben.     223ir 

part*  l4"  .  .  .  should 

fjaBen  gute  S)olrf)e;  toenn  er  lommt,  Gotten  Unr  i^n  tobten. 

.    "          when       .  ...  kill 

$)er  jnnge  9Jlann  !am  mit  tjergifteten  SeBen^mitteln  gnrticf . 

poisoned  provisions  back 

Seine  ®efctf)rten  ermorbeten  ii)n}  fie  afjen,  fie  ftarBen,  unb 

companions         murdered  ....  • 

ber  (Sdjajj  gefjorte  3fltemanb, 

treasui-c  .  . 

German  Grammar.  6 


Twenty-eighth  Lesson.  'VUiitatylfttit&igpe  Seftiou. 

THE  VERBS. 

Conjugation  of  Verbs. 

The  Moods  are  :  1  Indicative  ;  2  Subjunctive  (or  Conjunctive); 
3  Conditional;  4  Imperative;  5  Infinitive;  6  Participle. 


The  Tenses  are  :  1  Present;  2  Imperfect  (or  Pas*); 
4  Per/ec<;  5  Pluperfect;  6  JVtiuw  Per/ec*  (II). 

The  Numbers  and  Persons  are  :  Singular  and  Plural  1st,  2nd 
and  3rd  persons. 

AUXILIARY  VERBS. 

1)  Ijaften,  to  ^are  is  used  for  forming  the  perfect  tenses 

2)  fein,  to  6e  is  sometimes  used  for  forming  the  perfect  tenses 

3)  tocrbcn,  to  become  is  used  for  forming  the  future  tenses  and 
the  passive  voice. 

These  verbs  can  also  be  used  as  principal  verbs,  being  conju- 
gated in  the  same  manner  (see  our  list  of  verbs). 

However,  the  Past  participle  of  toerben  if  used  as  auxiliary  is 
tuorben;  if  used  as  principal  verb  getoorben. 

The  Auxiliary  Verbs  of  Mood  axe: 


1  muifett,  (must)  to  be  obliged^ 

2  fimttcn,  (can)  to  be  able  \wish 

3  tuollctt,  (will)  to  be  willing,  to 


4  foffett,  (shall,  ought)  to  be  to 
6  iiirfen,  to  be  allowed 
6  mug  en,  (may)  to  like 


For  their  conjugation  see  list  of  verbs. 

These  verbs  of  mood  can  also  be  used  as  principal  verbs. 

There  is  another  verb  laffett,  to  let,  to  leave,  sometimes  used  as  an 
auxiliary  of  mood,  the  employment  of  which  we  shall  explain  in  the 
2nd  part  of  our  grammar. 

Remarks. 

The  notes  on  the  auxiliary  verbs  of  mood,  given  in  lessons  10,  11 
and  12,  we  partly  repeat  here. 

1.  Auxiliary  Verbs  of  mood  require  the  following  infinitive 
without  511 ;  as, 

^d)  nwfe  tnein  $f«b  berfoufen.     I  am  obliged  to  (or  I  must)  sell  my  horse. 

2.  The  infinitive  form  of  an  auxiliary  verb  of  mood  is  used  as 
past  participle  in  the  compound  tenses ;  as, 

gt  Ijot  lomtnen  burfetu    He  has  been  allowed  to  come. 
NOTE. — The  real  past  participle  (geburft,  gemu&t,  etc.)  may  be  used, 
but  only  when  the  verb  is  no  longer  an  auxiliary  (L  e.  when  not  fo1 
lowed  by  another  verb) ;  as, 

3dj  Ijafce  getwrft,    I  have  been  allowed. 


131 

There  are  two  conjugations  of  verbs  in  German :   the  regular 
and  the  irregular. 

THE  REGULAR  VERBS. 

All  verbs  not  found  among  the  list  of  irregular  verbs  or  which  are 
not  compounds  of  them,  are  regular. 

The  greater  part  of  the  regular  verbs  end  the  Infinitive  in  eit, 
and  a  few  in  tt  (namely :  eln  and  ern) ;  as, 

lo&en,  to  praise    foufen,  to  buy    tabeln,  to  blame    jittera,  to  tremble 
The  Present  (Indicative)  is  formed  by  taking  the  following 
terminations  instead  of  the  Infinitive  terminations  en  or  n : 
Sing.  Plur.  Examples: 


1st  p.  id)— e  1st  p.  loir— en  or  n 
2nd  p.  bu— ft  2nd  p.  j  §j.eZ[W  °r  * 
3rd  p.  er  — t  3rd  p.  fie— en  or  n 


id)  lofic,  I  praise 
bu  faufft,  thou  buyest 
er  tabelt,  he  blames 
tote  jtttern,  we  tremble 


NOTE. — In  the  Plural  all  persons  terminate  like  the  Infinitive  (ex- 
cept in  the  old  form  of  the  2nd  person  plural  (ifjr)). 

Verbs  ending  in  eln  (and  sometimes  those  in  ern)  in  the  1st 
person  of  the  singular  (id))  elide  the  e  before  I  (or  r) ;  as, 
idj  table,  I  blame    id)  jtttere  (or  idj  jittce),  I  tremble 

The  Imperfect  (Indicative)  is  formed  by  taking  the  follow- 
ing terminations  instead  of  en  or  n ;  as, 

Sing.  Plur.  Examples: 


1st  p.  id)— te       1st  p.     tpir— ten 
ten 
tet 
p.  er— te       3rd  p.    fie—  ten 


2nd  p.  bu-teft     2ndp.{|5.eZ 


id)  loote,  I  praised 
bu  fcmfteft,  thou  boughtest 
er  tabelte,  he  blamed 
loir  sitterten,  we  trembled 


The  Present  Participle  is  formed  by  adding  b  to  the  In- 
finitive; as, 

looenb,  praising    faufenb,  buying    tabelnb,  blaming    sitternb,  trembling 

The  Past  Participle  is  formed  by  changing  en  or  n  into  t 
and  prefixing  ge;  as, 

gelobt,  praised    getauft,  bought    getabett,  blamed    gejittert,  trembled 

Verbs  commencing  with  unaccented  prefixes  (like:  Be,  flC,  et, 
t>er,  $er,  emp,  ent,  tnift,  &ofl,  tiriber,  Ijinter,  etc.) ;  and  all  verbs 
ending  in  tren  and  terctt(*)  do  not  prefix  ge;  as, 

Infinitive:  Beficmbeln,  to  treat  entfdjulbigeit,  to  excuse 

Past  P.:     oefjanbelt,  treated  entfdjulbigt,  excused 

Infinitive:  ftubiren,  to  study  regieren,  to  govern 

Past  P.:     ftubirt,  studied  regiert,  governed 

REMARK. — If  the  terminations  commencing  with  t  or  ft  can- 
not be  easily  sounded  if  added  to  a  verb,  an  e  must  be  inserted  be- 
fore ft  or  t.  (i.e.  in  the  Present,  Imperfect  and  Past  participle.) 
Thus : 


Sing.         Present.    Plur . 
1st  p.  id)— e         1st  p.     toir  —en 
2ndp.bn-efl       2ndp.{|lreZec? 
3rd  p.  er— et       3rd  p.     fie   —en 


Sing.      Imperfect.     Plur. 
1st  p.  id)— etc       1st  p.     toir— eten 
2nd  p.  bu— eteft     2nd  P-iffofH.^^? 
3rd  p.  er— ete       3rd  p.    fte  —eten 


Past  participle:  ge— ct. 


(*)  Verbs  in  iren  and  ieren  are  all  regular,  and   have   the   accent   on   the 
syllable  containing  i  or  ie.  -# 


132 

Such  verbs  are  those  which  have  before  the  termination  ctl 
one  of  the  letters  b,  t,  tfj  and  also  m  and  tt,  if  these  latter  two  are 
preceded  by  another  consonant  but  m,  it,  r,  I,  I);  as, 

baben,  to  bathe  ttarten,  to  wait  burften,  to  brush  bermietfien, 
to  let  toibmen,  to  dedicate  atljmen,  to  breathe  Sffnen,  to  open. 
B  eg  eg  n  en,  to  meet. 

Examples:  Present.— bu  babeft,  er  tuartct,  ib,r  Biirftet,  etc.  Imperfect.— 
id)  bermietfjete,  bu  ttribmetefr,  etc.  Past  Participle.— geSffuet,  begegnet,  etc. 

Before  ft  as  well  in  the  2nd  person  singular  of  the  present  for 
the  same  reason  an  e  is  inserted  with  verbs  ending  in  f ,  fcfi,  j ;  as, 
reifen,    to   travel,    bu    rettcft       loufdjen,    to   listen,    bu   laufdjeft 
fdjtoaljen,  to  chatter,  bu  fdjroafccft. 

The  Imperative  in  the  2nd  person  plural  is  formed  by  plac- 
ing the  pronoun  @ie  after  the  Infinitive  ;  as, 

loben  ®ie,  praise  (you)    tobeln  ©ie,  blame  (you) 

The  other  form  for  the  2nd  person  used  in  familiar  conversation 
is  effected  by  changing  en  into  e  for  the  singular,  and  into  et  for 
the  plural ;  as,  lobe,  praise  (thou)  tobet,  praise  (you) 

Note.— Verbs  in  eln,  ern,  in  the  singular  leave  out  the  e  before  I  ancl 
r,  and  in  the  plural  they  add  t  only;  as,  table,  tabelt,  sttrre,  jittert. 

The  other  persons  of  the  Imperative  are  formed  with  the  aux- 
iliaries tuoflen  (1st  person  plural)  and  fotten  (3rd  person  singular 
and  plural)  placing  the  Infinitive  after ;  as, 

tttr  rooEen  loben,  let  us  praise  er  foil  loben,  let  him  praise  fte 
fatten  loben,  let  them  praise. 

Note. — There  are  two  other  forms  for  the  1st  person  plural,  viz :  loben 
wit  and  lafct  un§  loben. 

The  Future  (I)  (Indicative)  of  all  verbs  (regular  and  irregular) 
is  formed  by  using  the  Present  Indicative  of  toerben  as  an  auxiliary 
and  placing  the  Infinitive  after ;  as,  id)  merbe  loben,  I  shall  praise,  etc. 

The  Conditional  (I)  of  all  verbs  (regular  and  irregular1)  is 
formed  by  using  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  of  toerben  as  an  auxiliary 
and  placing  the  Infinitive  after ;  as,  idj  murbe  loben,  I  should  praise,  etc. 

The  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  (Indicative)  of  all  verbs  (regular 
andirregular)  is  generally  formed  as  in  English  by  using  the  Present 
and  Imperfect  (Indicative)  of  ^aben(*)  as  an  auxiliary  and  placing 
the  Past  Participle  after ;  as, 

id)  Ijabe  gelo&t.  I  have  praised    id)  Ijotte  getoBt,  I  had  praised 

The  Future  perfect  (II)  (Indicative)  and  the  Conditional 
perfect  (II)  of  all  verbs  are  generally  formed  by  using  the  Future 
(I)  (Indicative)  and  the  Conditional  (I)  of  Ija&en(*)  as  an  auxiliary, 
and  placing  the  Past  participle  before  Ija&en ;  as, 

id)  tuerbe  gelobt  Ijaben,  I  shall  have  praised,  etc. 

id)  hmrbe  gelobt  Ijoben,  I  should  have  praised,  etc. 
Note. — For  expressing  the  Conditional  of  the  auxiliary  verbs  of 
mood  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  for  the  Conditional  I,  and  the  Pluperfect 
Subjunctive  for  the  Conditional  II  are  generally  preferred  to  the  regular 
forms  (see  List  of  Verbs). 

(*)  Those  verbs  which  are  conjugated  with  fetn  instead  of  Ijaben  we  shall 
continue  to  indicate  till  further  explanations  are  given. 


133 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

The  different  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  of  regular  verbs  are  in 
general  like  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  Indicative,  except  in 
the  following  cases : 

Present:   2nd  person  Sing,  (bu)  ends  in  eft  instead  of  ft 
3rd       „        „     (er)     „     „  t  „  t 

2nd      „     Plur.  (ifjr)    „      „  et       „       „  t  (but   verbs 
in  eln  and  ern  retain  the  t  in  the  2nd  person  plural). 

In  the  compound  tenses  the  auxiliary  verbs  deviate  from  their 
Indicative  tenses  in  the  following  cases  : 

Future :  toerben  2nd  person  Sing,  (bu)  is  teerbeft  instead  of  toirft 
3rd      „         „      (er)  „  tocrbe         „       „  toirb 

Perfect :  Ijafcen  2nd  person  Sing,  (bu)  is  fiabeft  instead  of  Ijaft 
3rd  „  ,,  (er)  ,,  ijabe  ,,  ,,  Ijat 
2nd  ,,  Plur.  (tljr)  „  ^abet  „  „  IjaBt 

Pluperfect:  Ija&en     The  root  vowel  a   of  all  persons  is  modified;   thus: 
id)  fiatte,  bu  Ijatteft,  etc. 

The  Subjunctive  tenses  of  feitt  also  differ  very  much  from  its  In- 
dicative tenses  (see  list  of  verbs). 

OBSERVATION  : — The  use  of  the  Subjunctive  Mood  will  be  explained 
in  the  2nd  part  of  our  Grammar,  and  until  then  we  shall  always  indicate 
its  employment. 

**  • 

Remarks. 

1.  In  German  the  different  tenses  can  be  used  in  one  form 
only,  therefore  the  English  Progressive  and  Emphatic  forms  like : 
I  am  praising,  I  do  praise,  I  was  praising*  I  did  praise,  I  have  been 
praising,  etc.,  must  always  take  in  translating  the  simple  form  of 
I  praise,  I  praised,  I  have  praised,  etc. 

2.  The  Negative  Tenses  are  formed  by  placing  the  negation 
(not,  nothing,  never,  etc.)  after  the  verb  or  its  auxiliary ;  as, 

id)  loBe  nidjt,  I  do  not  praise  id)  loBte  ntdjt,  I  did  not  praise 
id)  Ijabe  nidjt  gelofct,  I  have  not  praised  id)  toerbe  nidjt  lo&en,  I  shall 
not  praise. 

3.  The  Interrogative  Tenses  are  formed  by  placing  the 
.pronoun  after  the  verb  or  its  auxiliary;  as, 

loBe  idj?  do  I  praise?  loBte  id)  nidjt?  did  I  not  praise?  Ija&e  idj 
geto&t?  have  I  praised?  toerbe  id)  nidjt  lo&en?  shall  I  not  praise? 

4.  In  compound  tenses  the  auxiliary  verb  occupies  the  same 
place  as  in  English  and  the  past  participle  and  infinitive  are  put 
last  in  the  sentence  ;  as; 

$dj  IjaBe  ben  ®na6en  geto&t.  I  have  praised  the  boy.  3d)  toerbv 
ben  ^nafien  lo&en.  I  shall  praise  the  boy.  3d)  toerbe  ben  ®na&en 
getoBt  Ija&en.  I  shall  have  praised  the  boy. 

5.  To  occurring  with  an  infinitive  is  generally  translated  by 
^U,  and  both  in  an  infinitive  sentence  are  put  last;  as, 

•(£r  Ijat  mid)  geBeten  *u  fommen.  He  has  asked  me  to  come.  3d) 
fjafce  tiergeffen,  iljm  ba§  ©elb  ju  fdjiden.  I  have  forgotten  to  send 
(Dat.)  him  the  money. 

NOTE. — 3u  is  not  used  after  the  auxiliary  verbs  of  mood  and  some 
others. 


to  bathe,  fcoben 
to  believe,  glau&en 
even,  iogar 
foolish,  tijoricfct 
to  fulfil,  erfiillen 
to  hope,  Ijojfen 
if,  toenn 
impatient,  ungebulbig 


134 

to  learn  (to  studyl  Tcnten 
ths  luck,  ba§  ®lud 
,,    name,  ber  JRame 
never,  nie 
to  obey,  ge^crtficn 
painful,  fdjmerjlidj 
quiet,  ruljig 
sleepy,  faldfrig 


to  spell,  Btidf)fla5iren 

suddenly),  fclS&licIj 

unquiet,  restless,  unruljicj 

the  word,  ba»  SSort 
Plur :  bie  SBorter  or 
SSorte  (see  page  17X 


Exercise  No.  28. 

1.  Have  you  a  little  time? — I  have  no  money  about  (bei)  me. — 
We  have  had  no  time. — He  will  have&  to  fulfil^  a  painful  duty. — 1 
should  have  more  money,  if  I  had&  (Subj.)  more  lucka  . — He  told 
me  that  (dass)  he  has&  (Subj. )  nothing  to  losea  . — Are  you  alone?  No, 
my  sister  is  with  (bei)  me. — ~\Vas  the  weather  warm? — Have  you  been 
at  (in)  the  concert? — 1  believed  that  (dass)  he  was&  (Subj.)  in  (the) 
town«  . — Why  has  your  friend  been  impatient  ? — Be  quiet. — They  would 
be  more  agreeable,  if  they  were*  (Subj.)  not  impolite*  . — I  am  getting 
(becoming)  sleepy. — Why  did  he  become  unquiet?  —  The  duke  has 
suddenly  become  ill. — She  hopes  he  will  (Subj. )  not  become  foolish. — I 
could  not  believe  that  story. — Will  you  be  able  to  be  here  this  (heute) 
evening?  No,  I  shall  not  be  able. — Are  you  willing  to  see  my  brother? 
— May  (diirfen)  I  ask  you  to  repeat  (wiederholen),  what  you  said  ? 
Are  you  allowed  to  go  to  (in)  the  theatre  ? — You  will  be  obliged  to 
obey. — I  am  to  learn  German. — He  may  come,  if  he  likes  (wolleri). — 
I  should  not  be  able  to  come,  even  if  I  were  willing^  (to  come0  ). — I 
should  have  learned  French  if  I  hade  (Subj.)  had&  [the]  time0  . — 
Where  have  you  been  bathing? — How  long  was  he  waiting? — Fetch  a 
glass  [of]  water. — Why  have  you  not  spelt  your  name  ? 

2.  SBarirm  !pnnen  Ste  md)t  erfiilleit,  ttw3  <Bie  tjerfprocfcen 
fjaben?  SStr  biirfen  heute  (this)  Slbenb  ouf  (to)  ben  23att  gefien. 
dr  tmH  mir  ba3  @elb  geben.  3>arf  id)  in§  (to  the)  doncert 
gef)en,  ober  mufc  id)  beint  (with)  Dnfel  bleifcen?  9£etn,  bit 
ttwrbeft  fd)Iafrig  toerben.  28a3  ift  au£  (of)  bent  ©ofine  be£ 
@djnetber3  getoorben?  SBudjftabtren  @te  bag  SSort  ,,pl6fcltd)". 
Seten  @ie  nidjt  iingebulbtg,  Sebermann  mu^  ge^ord)en.  @3  ift 
tfiorid^t  toon  Bfynen,  ittenn  @ie  bag  hoffen.  ^c^  fonnte  e§  nid)t 
glauben,  fogar  roemt  id)  e^  pren  toiirbe. 

Have  you  learned  the  poem?  AVhy  have  the  horses  suddenly 
become  restless  ?  Don't  hope,  that  (dass)  he  will0  (Subj. )  believe6 
thata  .  Men  (die  Mcnschen)  are  never  perfectly  (vollkommen)  happy. 
It  would  be  foolish,  notb  to  avoidc  such  mistakes0  .  We  had  much  to 
learn.  What  was  he  saying  to  you  ?  The  gardener  was  working  in 
his  garden.  The  old  man  was  thanking  (Dot.)  you&  only«  .  My 
brother  became  [a]  soldier.  The  boys  have  had  three  lessons.  How 
much  did  this  tea  cost  ?  I  do  not  flatter  (Dot.)  him  very  much.  May 
(diirfen)  we  hope,  to  see  you  to-morrow?  You  may  (can)  go  now. 


135 


Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  When  is  the  past  participle  of  werden,  geworden  used,  and  when 
warden? 

2.  May  the  real  past  participles  of  the  verbs  of  mood  (gemusst,  etc.)  be 
used  and  when  ? 

3.  What  do  verbs  in  eln  and  sometimes  those  in  cm  in  forming  the 
1st  pers.  singular  of  the  present  ? 

4.  Which  verbs  in  the  past  participle  do  not  prefix  ge  ? 

5.  What  must  be  done  if  a  termination  commencing  with  a  t  or  st 
cannot  be  easily  sounded,  when  added  to  a  verb  ? 

6.  What  do  verbs  in  eln  and  ern  in  the  Imperative  in  forming  the 
2nd  pers.  singular  and  plural  (familiar  form)  ? 

7.  What  tenses  are  generally  used  for  the  conditional  form  of  the 
auxiliaries  of  mood  ? 

8.  Do  the  Subjunctive  tenses  of  regular  verbs  differ  much  from  those 
of  the  Indicative  ? 

9.  How  does  the  Subjunctive  differ  in  the  present  from  the  Indicative  ? 

10.  How  does  the  auxiliary  werden  in  the  future  of  the  Subjunctive 
deviate  from  the  Indicative  ? 

11.  How  does  the  auxiliary  haben  in  the  perfect  and  pluperfect  of  the 
Subjunctive  deviate  from  the  Indicative  ? 

12.  How  is  to  occurring  with  an  Infinitive  usually  translated,  and  where 
are  both  put  in  an  infinitive  sentence  ? 


Conversation. 


Shall  we  stay  at  home? 
No,  let  us  go  to  the  theatre. 

But  we  must  go  soon  (bald),  if 
we  wish  to  be  there  (dort)  at 
the  right  time  (rechtzeitig). 

Tell  your  brother  that  (dass)  I 
should  like  to  see  him. 

When  shall  he  come  ? 

This  evening  if  he  can. 

Will  the  weather  be  fine  to-day  ? 

Yes,  it  will  be  very  pleasant. 
Are   you   living   in  (auf)  the 

country  or  in  (the)  town? 
We  have  lived  in  the  country 

these  three  years. 
Have  you  bathed  in  our  river 

yet  (schon)l 
No,  not  yet;  the  water  was  not 

warm  enough. 


©often  fair  511  §oufe  btetben? 
•ftein,   ttrir   tooften  in3  Sweater 

geijen. 
$ber    tmr  miiffen   Batb  geljen, 

toenn  fair  recfjtgeitig  bort  fein 

to  often, 
©agen  ©ie  3$rem  SSruber,  bajs 

id)  tfjn  fyrecfjen  modjte. 
SSonn  jofl  er  fomtnen? 
£eute  Slftenb,  toenn  er  farm. 
SSirb   ba§   better   fjeute  frfjon 

fein? 

So,  e3  ftrirb  fetyr  angenerjtn  fein. 
SBoIjnen  @te    cmf    bent  Sanbe 

ober  in  ber  (Stabt? 
2Bir  ftio^nen  fett  brei  Scrfjren  auf 

bent  Sonbe. 
$aben   @te   fdjon    in   imferem 

gfoffe  gebabet? 
9?etn,   nod)  ntdjt;   ba<§    SBoffor 

njar  nicljt  tuarm  genug. 


136 


For  (auf  Ace.)  whom  have  you 

been  waiting? 
I  have  been  waiting  for  my 

cousin. 
What  has  become  of  (aus)  your 

cousin  ? 

He  has  become  [an]  advocate, 
It  is  growing  dark ;  what  o'clock 

is  it  then  (denn)l 
It  is  nearly  half  past  eight. 
"Why  has  your  sister  gone   to 

bed  (Bett)1 
She  became  suddenly  sleepy; 

she  was  at  (auf)  the  ball  last 

night  (gestern  Abend). 
Were  you  there  as  well  (auch)t 
Yes,  but  I.  went  home  before 

my  sister. 

With  whom  did  you  dance? 
I  danced  once  with  Mr.  A.  and 

twice  with  Mr.  B. 
<Dan  I  do  something  for  you? 
Yes,  you   might  look  for  my 

pocket-book. 
Why  are  you  too  late  ? 
I  believed,  I  had  (Subj.)  more 

time  to  spare  (ubrig). 
Am  I  not  right  ? 
No,  you  are  wrong. 
May  I  read  this  book? 
Yes,  you  may  read  it. 
Could  (Subj.)  you  go  for  me  to 

Berlin? 

Yes,  I  can  (go),  but  not  before 
to-morrow. 

Do  you  know  German? 

No,  but  I  know  French. 

Sow  is  it,  that  (doss)  you  don't 
know  both  the  languages 
(Sprachef.)t 

I  have  had  no  time  to  learn  Ger- 
man, and  French  I  learned 
(already)  at  (in  the)  school. 

Who  has  sent  this  workman? 

He  will  have  to  mend  (machen) 
something. 


2luf  roen  Ijaben  @te  geroartet? 

Sid)  f)abe  auf  ntetnen  Setter  ge- 
roartet. 


ift    aits    Sfjrem    Setter 

geroorben  ? 

(£r  ift  Slbtoofat  geroorben. 
(B  roirb  bun!e(  ;  rote   Diet  Ufjr 

ift  t§  benn? 

@3  ift  beinalje  Ijalb  neun. 
SSarum  ift  Sftre   edjroefter   jU 

83ett  gegangen? 
Sie   ift   Jrfojjlidj    fcfjlafrig    ge^ 

roorben;  fie  roar  geftern  2IbenD 

auf  bent  Satt. 
SSaren  @te  aud^  bort? 
Sa,  aber  id)   gtng    oor   ntetner 

Scfyroefter  nac^  f»aufc. 
SKit  roem  fjaben  Ste  getongt? 
S<^  tangte  etmnal  mtt  §errn  21. 

tinb  groeimal  mil  ^errn  S3. 
^ann  id)  etroa^  fiir  @ie  t^un? 
£50,  Ste  fonitten   metne   S3rief> 

tafdje  fuc^en. 

SSarunt  fommen  ©te  311  fpat? 
Sc^  gtaitbte,  tc^  ptte  me^r  3eit 

iibrig. 

id)  nicfjt  9?ed^t? 

in,  @tc  Ijaben  Unrest. 
S)arf  tc^  biefe^  23ud)  lefen? 
Set/  @te  fonnen  eg  lejen. 
^onnten    @te    fiir    mid)    nad) 

SSertin  ge^en? 
%a,  id)  fann  ge^en,    aber   utd^t 

Dor  tnorgen. 
^onnen  @te  S)eutfd^? 
•ftetn,  aber  ia^  fann  grangdftfd^. 
SSte  fontntt  e^,    ba§   @ie   nid)t 

beibe  ©prad^en  fonnen? 


S(^  Ijatte  noc^  feme 

gulernen,  itn 

to)  fd)on  in  ber  Sdfjue. 
SSer  f)at  btefen  SIrbeiter  gefc^icft? 
(£r  rotrb  etroa^  gu  maa^en  ^aben. 


137 

RraMng  (Ererdee  Ho.  28. 


($eorg  ber  S)ritte,  ®onig  t)on  ©ngtanb,  toar  em 
freunblidjer1  §err  unb  unterf)ielt2  fid)  gern3  mit  feinen 
ttntertfjanen4  ,  fie  molten  arm  ober  reid)  fein.  (£ine§ 
ritt5  er  mit  fetnem  ©oljme,  bem  $rin§en7  Don 
in  ber  Umgegenb8  Don  SBinbfor  fpa^ieren6  .  $n 
einem  §of)Ituege9  ftiegen10  fie  auf  einen  Waiter11,  beffett 
SBagen  mit  einem  SRabe12  in  ein  ttefe§  Sod)13  geratfien14 
war,  unb  ber  nid)t  me^r15  toeiter16  fonnte.  2)er  ^onig 
befann  fid)1?  nidjt  (ange,  fprang  t)om  ^ferbe,  nnb  ber 
^ron^rinj18,  auf  ein  SSort  Don  i^m,  eBenfatt^19.  @ie 
"banben  bie  $ferbe  an  einen  93aum,  griffen  bereint20  mit 
bem  SBauerii  in  bie  @|)ei^en21  be§  9flabe§i2,  unb 
t»cn  SBagen  gtiidlic^24  i>eran§23.  ^atiirlid)2 
fid)  bie  beiben  §erren  nici^t  tuenig  unb  niaren 
ifyice  ®Ieiber  tuieber  in  Drbnung28  §u  fcrtngen29.  5ll§30  fie 
im'eber  i^re  $ferbe  befteigen31  toofften,  Bat  fie  ber  erlennt= 
Itc!§e32  Saner11  bringenb33,  mit  ifjm  im  nac^ften  SKtrt^^aufe34 
tinen  ^rug35  porter  §u  leeren36.  2)er  £onig  ban!te 
Id^elnb37  unb  fagte,  ba§  feine  gran38  §u  §anfe  auf  tf)n 
tt)arte.  ©r  bat  ben  Saner11  gngteid)39,  Don  i^m  eine 
.&Heinig!eit40  an^une^men41,  unb  briidte42  i^m  einige  ©uineen 
in  bie  §anb.  $)er  Saner11  raar  ftumm43  Dor  (Srftaunen44, 
unb  at§30  er  f^rec^en  tooftte,  toaren  ber  ^ontg  unb  fein 
fc^on  iiber  atte  Serge. 

(£r  ging  nun  aHein  in  ba§  2Btrtp^au§34  unb 
IJei  einem  ^rug35  Sier  Don  feinen  ^elfern45  in  ber 
9^ot^46  unb  i^rer  @rogmuti)47.  S)ie  anmefenben48 
(Mfte49  fagten  i|m  bann^o,  bag  e§  o^ne  Sroeifeis1  ber 
mit  bem  ^ronprtngen18  getoefen  fei. 


1  friendly,  2  —  3  liked  to  converse,  4  subjects,  5  &  6  took  a  ride, 
7  prince,  8  environs,  9  defile,  10  came,  11  peasant,  12  wheel, 
13  whole,  14  got,  15  —  16  any  farther,  17  to  reflect,  sich  besinnen, 
besann,  besonncn,  18  crown-prince,  19  as  well,  20  together, 
21  spokes,  22  &  23  lifted  out,  24  successfully,  25  of  course,  26  to 
soil,  beschmutzen,  27  endeavoured,  28  order,  29  put,  30  when, 
31  to  mount  (a  horse),  besteigen,  bestieg,  bestiegen,  32  thankful, 
33  urgently,  34  inn,  35mug,  36  to  empty,  leeren,  37  smilingly, 
38  wife,  39  at  the  same  time,  40  trifle,  41  to  accept,  42  to  press, 
driicken,  43  dumb,  44  of  astonishment,  45  helpers,  46  difficulty, 
47  generosity,  48  present,  49  guests,  50  then,  51  doubt. 

German  Grammar  5* 


138 


Twenty-ninth  Lesson. 


SReummbstoanjigfte  Seftton. 


THE  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

The  Irregularity  of  these  verbs  consists  mostly  in  changing 
the  root  vowel  of  the  Infinitive  to  another  vowel  in  the  Imperfect 
and  Past  Participle,  whilst  the  other  tenses  are  formed  regularly. 
Some  also  deviate  otherwise  as  will  be  found  in  our  list.  (See  the 
conjugation  of  geben,  list  page  27.) 

Remarks. 

From  the  1st  person  singular  of  the  Imperfect  Indicative  the 
other  persons  are  formed  thus  : 

Sing:  2nd  person  by  adding  ft  (or  eft) 

„      3rd       ,,      is  like  the  1st  person  sing. 

Plur  :  of  all  three  persons  by  adding  en  (or  n  only  when  already  end- 

ing in  e) 
„     the  2nd  person  (ib,r)  by  adding  t  (or  et). 

The  Imperfect  Subjunctive  is  formed  from  the  Imperfect  In- 
dicative by  adding  an  e  to  the  1st  and  3rd  persons  singular  when 
not  already  ending  in  e.  The  2nd  person  singular  (bu)  and  the 
2nd  person  plural  (ifyr)  must  always  end  in  eft  and  et,  and  the 
other  persons  of  the  plural  are  like  those  of  the  Indicative. 

When  the  Imperfect  has  one  of  the  vowels  a,  0,  it,  these 
vowels  in  all  persons  are  modified  in  the  Subjunctive  (i.e.  changed 
to  a,  a,  u).  Thus: 

IMPERFECT. 


Sing.    Indicative.    Plur. 
1st  p.  i# 1st  p.  wit  —en 


2nd  p.  bu-ft  (eft)    2nd  p.  {  &lf* 


3rd  p.  er 

Ex.:  Indicative. 
Subjunctive. 


iljr- 
3rd  p.  fte 


icfj  fang   ) 
i$  fange  / 


t  (et) 


_n__ 
8ang 


Sing.    Subjunctive.  Plur. 
1st  p.  tdj"— e         1st  p.  Wit  "—en 
2nd  p.  bu"-eft      2nd  p.  {  f£'.'.~™ 
3rd  p.  er"— c        3rd  p.    fie  "—en 
fdjofe  )  T  »»,«4.     i$  tuft 


.    . 
shot 


•, 


Compound  verbs  follow  the  conjugation  of  their  rot>t  verbs  and  as 
regards  the  prefixes  in  the  past  participle  the  rules  of  regular  verbs  are 
also  applied  to  them  ;  as, 

geben,  to  give  tdj  gebe          i$  gab          gieb  gegeben 

bu  gtebft 
er  giebt 

tetgeben,  to  forgive     id)  bergebe     i^  toergab      bergieb      toergeben 
bu  ttergiebft 
er  betgiebt 


Learn  by  heart  the  irregular  verbs:  *faHen,  to  fall  fangen,  to 
catch  empfongen,  to  receive  fallen,  to  hold  befyatten,  to  keep 
er^alten,  to  get,  to  receive  laffen,  to  let(*),  to  leave,  oertoffen,  to 
leave,  to  quit  rotten  (Dat.),  to  advise  frratfjeit,  to  guess 
t^eit,  to  betray  fcfjlofen,  to  sleep. 


(*)  To  let  (a  house,  etc.)  is  translated  bermtetljen. 


the  anecdote,  bie  Stnelbote 
„   bank-note,  bie  23attf= 

note 
„    book-binder,   ber 

S3udj6inber 
„   book-seller,  ber  S3ud)= 

fjanblev 

easy,  easily,  leicfyt 
the  exercise,  bie  Uefcung 
„   hill,  ber  £iigel 


139 


the  mouse,  bie 

Plur.  bie  SJMufe 
„    music,  bie  SKufif 
,,    (postage^  stampr   bie 

(JBricfO  SWarle 
„    price,  prize,  ber  $rei§ 
,,   rule,  bie  SRegel 
„    (maid-)  servant,   ba§ 

SHenftmabdjen 


the  shop,  ber  Saben 

Plur.  bie  Soben 
„    singer  (f),  bie  ©ange» 

tin 
some  time  ago,  tor  eini* 

ger  Sett 
the  wood    (forest),     ber 

2Batb,    Plur.     bie 

SBalber 


Exercise  No.  29. 


1.  Where  (wohin)  has  your  (maid)  servant  gone  ? — He  stood  upon 
a  hill. — I  have  not  understood  the  rule. — Have  you  read  this  anecdote  ? 
Yes,  some  time  ago,  but  I  have  forgotten  it. — Who  broke  (to  pieces) 
the  looking-glass  ? — Why  have  you  not  taken  the  bank-note  ? — We  spoke 
a  veiy  long  time  (seJir  lange)  to  (mit)  each  other.  — When  did  your  grand- 
father die? — The  music  has  not&  begun0  yet®  . — Which  horse  has  won 
the  first  prize  ? — What  book  was  the  bookbinder  binding  ? — Where  did 
you  find  my  pocket-book? — The  singer  (f.)  sang  several  songs. — What 
have  you  been  drinking,  wine  or  beer? — The  soldiers  fired  (shot)  at  (auf) 
the  sailors. — Are  all  the  shops  shut? — Did  you  lose  anything? — I  have 
not  compared  the  exercises. — They  comprehended  easily  what  I  said. — 
I  did  not  tear  (rend)  the  stamp. — The  uncle  has  ridden  in  the  wood. 

You  fall, — we  catch, — I  receive, — thou  holdest, — you  are  keeping, 
— they  get  (receive), — he  lets  (leaves), — I  leave  (quit), — we  advise, — 
she  guesses,— they  betray, — dost  thou  sleep? — I  fell, — you  caught, — they 
received, — he  held, — we  kept, — I  got  (received),—  you  were  letting 
(leaving), — thou  leftest  (quittedst), — she  did  not  advise, — they  were 
guessing, — I  betrayed, — we  slept, — they  have  fallen,— he  has  caught, 
— they  had  received, — we  have  held, — I  had  kept, — thou  hast  not  got 
(received), — had  you  let  (left)? — they  have  left  (quitted), — she  had 
advised, — I  have  guessed,— we  had  betrayed, — they  have  slept. 

2.  |>a&en  @ie  mit  (to)  bent  23ud)btnber  gefprodjen?  $&t 
(your)  $unb  fiat  unfere  ®a£e  gebiffen.  3>er  SBogel  flog  in  ben 
(Garten.  Sftan  ergriff  ben  ormen  SIrbeiter.  Sftein  S3ruber  fiat 
ifim  triel  (SJelb  getiefien  imb  aHe<§  rjerlotep.  SBaram  mteben  @ie 
mid)?  SSon  toem  fiaben  @ie  biefeS  ®efd)en!  erfialten?  %$  fyabe 
fieute  (last)  jftadjt  gut  gefdjlafen.  Safjen  @ie  ba3  Sienftma'bcfieH 
natf)  ^auje  gefien. 

The  whole  garden  is  spoilt.  Who  has  seen  my  hat  ?  That  basket 
weighs  eight  pounds  (Sing.)  and  a  half.  The  cat  has  caught  two  mice. 
The  boy  threw  the  stone  through  the  window.  How  much  did  you 
win  ?  It  is  now  striking  half  past  twelve.  My  watch  does  not  go. 
Why  have  you  left  your  work  at  home?  The  man  died  yesterday. 
About  what  have  you  been  disputing  ?  How  long  did  you  stay  yester- 
day at  (auf)  the  ball?  I  have  written  to  (an  Ace.)  the  book-seller. 
Why  did  you  beat  your  poor  little  dog? 


140 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  From  which  person  in  the  Imperfect  Indicative  are  the  other  persons 
of  an  irregular  verb  formed  ? 

2.  How  is  the  2nd  pers.  singular  formed,  and  how  the  3rd  pers.  singular  ? 

3.  How  are  the  three  persons  of  the  plural  formed,  and  how  the  2nd 
pers.  plural  (ihr)  1 

4.  How  are  the  1st  and  3rd  pers.  singular  of  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive 
formed  ? 

5.  What  terminations  must  the  2nd  pers.  singular  (du)  and  2nd  pers. 
plural  (ihr)  always  have  in  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  ? 

6.  Do  the  other  persons  of  the  plural  differ  from  those  of  the  Indicative  ? 

7.  "When  the  Imperfect  has  one  of  the  vowels  a,  o,  u,  what  is  done 
with  these  vowels  in  the  Subjunctive? 

8.  How  are  compound  verbs  conjugated  ? 

9.  What  rules  are  applied  for  the  prefixes  of  such  verbs  in  the  past 
participle  ? 


Conversation. 


What  shall  I  sing? 

Please,  sing  a  German  song. 

Hove  I  come  too  early? 

No,  you  come  just  in  time. 

Which  tailor  can  you  recom- 
mend (Dat.)  me? 

Go  to  mine,  he  is  a  clever  work- 
man. 

Have  you  not  promised  too 
much? 

No,  (that)  I  have  not. 

What  are  you  writing  here? 

I  am  writing  to  (an)  my  friend(f). 

Have  you  any  stamps  ? 

No,  fetch  me  (Dat.)  some  please. 

Can  you  lend  (Dat.)  me  this 

book? 
Yes,  but  don't  keep  it  too  long. 

When  did  you  leave  the  concert  ? 
A  few  minutes  after  (nacluLem) 

you  had&  gone0  . 
Why  did  you  leave  the  child 

alone  at  home? 
I  could  not  take  it  with  [me]. 
Have  you  cut  yourself? 
Yes,  I  have  cut  my  finger. 


fott  id)  ftngen? 
SBitte,    fingen  @te  ein 

Sicb. 

33m  idj  git  fritr)  gefommen? 
•ftein,  @ie  fommeu  gerabe  recfit. 
SSelcfjen  (^cfineiber  fonnen   @te 

mir  empfe&len? 
@ef)en  @ie  511  meinem,    er  tft 

ein  gefdjicfter  Slrbeiter. 
|mben  <5te   nic&t   gu  Diet   tier* 

(prodjen? 

•ftetn,  bal  fiabe  id)  nicfjt. 
2Ba3  fcfiretben  <5ie  fcier? 
%d)  fdjreibe  an  meine  $rewtbtn. 
|>aben  Sie  9#arfen? 
92etn,     bitte     holen    @te    mir 

einige. 
Sonnen   @te    mir 

letfien? 
Sa,  aber  befialten  @ie 

ju  Iong(e). 
3Bann  berlte^en  @te  ba3  Soncert  ? 
(Sinige  SJlinuten    nadjbem  @ie 

gegangen  oiaren. 
SSarum    Itefcen   @te   ba§  ^inb 

aCetn  311  £aufe? 
^rf)  !onnte  e^  ntd^t  mttnefimen. 
§aben  @ie  fic^  gefdjnttten  ? 
§a,  tc^  &abe  mi%  in  ben  ginger 

gejcfynitten. 


nid^t 


141 

Reading  dmtm  Wo.  29. 


ber  <$rof?e  iwb  ber  fadjftfrfje1  Waiter2  » 

Ofriebricfj  ber  ($ro)3e  ttwrbe3  nadj  ber  @d)tad(jt4  bet 
in  eincnt  fadjfifdfjen1  <Stabtc§en5  ertoartet.  SStete 
t)ornef)me6  Seute  ber  @tabt  unb  Umgegenb?  fatten  fid)  &or 
feinem  Ouartiere8  fcerfammelt9  ,  um10  if)n  §u  begriigen11. 
2lud(j  ein  armer  33auer2  fjatte  fidj  unter  bte  SBornefjmen12 
gemifdjt13.  2H§i4  ber  ®5nig  mit  feinen  ®eneraten15  unb 
9(bjutanten16  anfam17,  brcingte18  er  fid)  audj  in  ba§  3 
!)inein19.  (Sinige  fat^fifd^e1  §oftinge20  bemerften  i 
glet^2i  unb  tooHten  i^n  ^inatt§rt)eifen22.  2)oc^23  ber 
trat  t)or24  unb  fragte  ben  Wlann:  —  2Ba§  toiUft  bu  benn25 
liter?  —  ^id^tS  toetter26,  al§  h)a§  bte  ^nbern  atte 
id^  ttJiff  ben  ®onig  fe^en.  —  ^)a§27  fann 
fagte  ber  9Jlonar^,—  aHein29  umfonft-^o  ifi  ber 
nit^t.  ^5)ie  anbern  §erren  be^a^Ien  bafitr,  unb  toenn  bu 
etnia§  bafiir  geben  ftriflft,  fo  fann  e§  bir  -fttemanb  tier- 
bieten.  ytur  ber  ^offirer32  ^at  e§  untfonftso.  ^Rimrn  alfo 
beinen  §ut  unb  fantmle33  ba£  ©elb  ein38,  bann25  brauc^ft34 
bu  nirf)t§  §u  ga^Ien.  —  ®er  S3auer2  Iteg  fid§  ba§  nidjt 
§tr)eintai  fagen.  —  ®u  fannft  bei  ntir  begtnnen,  —  fagte  ber 
®imig  unb  n;arf  ein  ®otbftuc£35  in  ben  §ut.  2)er  93auer2 
mac^te36  bte  9flunbe37  unb  Reiner  toagte38  fid^  an%%n= 
fcpejsen39.  S^ad^bem40  ba§  @etb  eingefammelt41  toar,  er* 
lunbigte42  er  fi^  beim  ®onig,  an  tuen  er  ba3  ©elb  ab= 
tiefern43  fotte.  S)a  l(o|)fte  i^m  btefer  auf  bie  ©coulter44  unb 
fagte:  —  5Run  U)ei§t45  bu,  n;ie  ba§  §u  t)erfte^en  ift,  menu 
man  fagt,  e§  foftet  ©elb,  HJO  fief)  ber  ®onig  t)on  ^reugen 
fe^en  lagt.  5Iber  fiir  fic^  beljalt  er  e§  ntc^t,  ba§ 
bir.  —  3efet  erft47  uerftanb  ber  berbliiffte48  SSauer2  , 
ber  ^onig  meinte49.  ^)oc§23  e^e50  er  ban!en  fonnte, 
ber  ®onig  in  ein  anbere§  ^i^mer  getreten. 


1  saxon,  2  peasant,  3  was,  4  battle,  5  small  town,  6  distinguished, 
7  environs,  8  quarter,  9  to  assemble,  sich  versammeln,  10  in  order  (to),  11  to- 
welcome,  salute,  begrussen,  12  people  of  rank,  13  to  mix,  14  when,  15  generals, 
16  adjutants,  17  arrived,  18  &  19  squeezed  (into),  20  courtiers,  21  immediately, 
22  send  away,  23  yet,  24  forward,  25  then,  26  nothing  else,  27  -28  that  may 
be,  29  however,  30  for  nothing,  31  joke,  32  cashier,  33  collect,  34  to  need, 

want,  brauchen,  35  piece  of  gold,  56  &  37  went  the  round,  38  to  venture,  wagen, 
39  to  exclude,  40  after,  41  collected,  42  to  inquire,  sich  erkundigcn,  43  deliver, 
44  shoulder,  45  knowest,  46  to  mind,  remember,  sich  (Dat.J  merken,  47  only, 
48  startled,  49  to  mean,  meinen,  50  before 


142 

Thirtieth  Lesson.  Xreigigfte  Seftton. 

COMPOUND  VERBS. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  compound  verbs  Inseparable  and 
Separable  verbs. 

Inseparable  verbs  are  those  having  a  prefix  which  can  never 
be  separated.  The  most  nsual  of  them  are  those  having  the  un- 
accented prefixes  be,  ge,  er,  ber,  jer,  em}),  ent,  mifj,  tooH,  ttriber, 
(see  page  131). 


The  Separable  Verbs. 

Separable  verbs  are  those  the  prefixes  of  which  consist  in 
general  of  prepositions  or  adverbs. 

Such  separable  prefixes  are  :  ab,  an,  auf,  aiu§,  Bet,  bar,  em, 
fort,  Ijer,  Ijeim,  l)in,  Io3,  mit,  ttadj,  nteber,  bor,  toeg,  511,  bebor, 
baban,  em^or,  entgegen,  borbet,  boruber,  gurficf,  jiifqmmen,  etc., 
and  all  those  prefixes  beginning  with  Ijet  and  Ijtn(*),  like  :  Ijerauf, 
Ijtnanf,  Remitter,  tyinunter,  etc. 

These  verbs  are  conjugated  like  other  verbs,  except  in  the 
following  cases  : 

1.  The  prefix  is  separable  in  the  Present,  Imperfect  (Indie,  and 
Subj.)  and  in  the  Imperative  (see  list  of  verbs  page  21),  and  is 
placed  quite  at  the  end  of  the  sentence,  the  root  verb  being  con- 
jugated as  usual  ;  as, 

anfommen,  to  arrive.    a&BefteHen,  to  countermand. 
8dj  fomntf  nicfjt  mtt  mehiem  greunb  <m.    I  do  not  arrive  with  my 
friend.    3d)  fecfteUtc  ben  9torf  ab.    I  countermanded  the  coat.    Sefteltcn 
©te  ben  9iocf  afc.    Countermand  the  coat. 

2.  In  the  past  participle  the  prefix  is  put  before  the  past  par- 
ticiple of  the  root  verb  ;  as, 

ungefomntm,  arrived,    afc&eftettt,  countermanded. 

3.  If  the  infinitive  has  511  with  it,  511  is  inserted  between  the 
prefix  and  the  verb  ;  as, 

G§  toot  ntdjt  ntogtid),  redjtseittg  onsttloratnen.    It  was  not  possible 
to  arrive  in  time. 


Learn  by  heart  the  irregular  verbs:  *Tcmfen,  to  run  frfjttoren, 
to  swear  (to  take  an  oath)  rufen,  to  call  liigcn,  to  tell  a  lie 
nnlugen  or  belihjen,  to  belie  betriigen,  to  cheat,  to  deceive 
bretmen,  to  burn  berbrennen,  to  burn  (to  ashes). 

{*)  ^cr  and  Ijtn  must  always  be  added  when  the  verb  denotes  a  move- 
ment or  direction  from  or  to  a  place.  $er  expresses  the  direction 
towards  the  place,  and  fji»  the  direction  away  from  the  place ;  as, 

Rommen  ©ie  Serein.    Come  in.    ®efien  @ie  Hnein.    Go  in. 
6ic  e§  ^erauS.    Take  it  out.    Segen  @ie  eg  ^inein.    Put  it  in. 


143 


to  arrive,  *anfomtnen 
irr. 
„  cease,  <wff)6ren 
„  come  downstairs,  *IJC?<= 
Utttctf  ommen  irr. 
„  come   upstairs,   *$£?* 
ouffommen  irr. 
„  commence,     anfangen 
irr. 
„  copy  (by  writing),  a&= 
ftfjreifien  irr. 
„  dress,  auHeiben 

to  go  out,  *au3get)en 

irr. 
,,  go  downstairs,    *(jitt= 

,,  go  upstairs,    ^tttauf* 
gefien  irr. 
,,  introduce,  to  present, 
tiorftetten 
,,  offer,  onbteten  irr. 
,,  open,  aufmadjen 
„  pickup,  ttitfljetoen  irr. 
,,  prefer,  torgie^en  irr. 

to  prepare,  UorBcrctten 
,,  pronounce,  au§fpred)en 
irr. 
,,  read  to,  jjotlefen  irr. 
„  shut,  jitntadjen 
„  stay  out,  *au£6Iei&en 
irr. 
,.  throw  away,  tocgtoer= 
fen  irr. 
„  try,  to  erf  ud)  en 

Exercise  No.  30. 

1.  I  cease,  —  he  ceased,  —  cease  !  —  we  have  ceased,  —  they  ask(*)  us 
to  cease,  —  you  will  cease,  —  are  you  copying?  —  we  went  out,  —  shut!  — 
I  have  preferred,—  try  to  open  !  —  he  does  not  commence,  —  I  was 
reading  to  (Dat.)  him,  —  don't  pronounce  !  —  we  have  thrown  it  away,  — 
she  tried  to  pick  it  up,  —  I  shall  offer,  —  they  are  staying  out,  —  when 
did  you  arrive?  —  he  has  prepared,  —  we  forgot  to  introduce,  —  I  cannot 
dress,  —  go  upstairs  !  —  come  upstairs  !  —  go  downstairs  !  —  come  downstairs  ! 
—  I  have  gone  out,  —  we  forgot  to  shut,  —  what  do  you  prefer?  —  they 
have  not  commenced,  —  she  has  arrived,—  I  offered,  —  we  were  obliged 
to  open,  —  you  are  not  allowed  to  pick  it  up. 

He  runs,  —  they  swear,  —  we  call,  —  I  tell  a  lie,  —  thou  beliest,  — 
you  cheat,  —  they  burn,  —  it  burns  (to  ashes],  —  you  were  running,  —  thou 
didst  not  swear,  —  I  called,  —  we  told  a  lie,  —  you  belied,  —  thou  wast 
cheating,  —  he  burned,—  they  burned  (to  ashes),  —  thou  hast  run,  —  had 
you  sworn?  —  they  have  called,  —  she  had  told  a  lie,  —  I  have  belied,  —  we 
had  cheated,  —  have  you  been  burning?  —  he  had  burnt  (to  ashes). 


2.  28a§  fcfiretben  @te  ab?  SRit  toent  gtngen  <5te  cms? 
baS  ®ienjhnabdj.en  bte  Sfjitre  gugemadjt?  3a,  aber  fie  Ijat 
geffen,  bte  genfter  aiifeutnadjen.  $cmgen  <Sie  an  git  tejen. 
@ie  tijtn  ba3  ®etb  cmqe&otert?  3<f)  raerbe  Tticfjt  Iong(e)  au§bleiben. 
SBann  ift  S^e  Koufine  otigefommen?  ^d^  ftetlte  meinen  tieuen 
^reunb  meinen  (SItern  bor.  SBarnnt  oerfurfiten  @te  ntdjt,  fid)  an^ 
§u!Ieiben?  %3)  Bat  iljn  lijtnaufgugeljen.  ^eben  @ie  bte  -ftabel  auf, 
bie  aitf  bent  gu^boben  Itegt.  SBarnm  fommen  @ie  nicftt  f>ernnter? 

Have  you  copied  all  the  letters  ?  Do  you  prefer  wine  or  beer  ? 
The  boys  did  not  cease  from  making  a  noise  (zu  Idrmen).  Don't  go 
downstairs.  Why  have  you  come  upstairs  ?  You  read  this  anecdote 
to  (Dai.  )  me  yesterday.  It  is  better  to  throw  away  such  bad  butter. 
Please  (bitte)  introduce  me  to  (Dat.)  your  cousin  (f.  ).  Have  you  dressed 
yourself  now?  Shut  the  window  and  open  the  door.  How  do  you 
pronounce  this  word  ?  You  have  been  staying  out  too  long.  We  are 
obliged  to  prepare  our  tasks.  Pick  up  that  stamp. 

(*1  To  ask  (to  beg)  is  translated  Bitten  (irr.),  to  ask  (a  question)  is  fragen. 


144 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  What  do  the  prefixes  of  separable  verbs  mostly  consist  of? 

2.  When  is  the  prefix  separable  ? 

3.  Where  is  the  prefix  put  in  the  past  participle  ? 

4.  When  the  infinitive  has  zu  with  it,  where  is  zu  placed  then? 

5.  When  must  her  and  hin  be  added  to  the  verb  ? 

6.  What  direction  expresses  her  and  what  direction  hin  ? 

Conversation. 


Will  you  go  out  with  me? 
No,  I  prefer  to  stay  at  home. 

May  I  offer  you  some  cheese 

and  butter? 
No,  thank  [you] ;  I  cannot  eat 

any  more. 
Why  have  you  not  prepared 

your  exercise? 
I  had  no  time  to  prepare  it 

Please,   come   upstairs  [for]  a 

minute. 

What  do  you  want  from  me  ? 
Take  this  letter  and  copy  it. 

Where  (wohin)  have  the  boys 

been  running? 
They    have    been  running    to 

(auf)  the  street. 
Has  somebody  called  (Dannie  ? 
No,  I  did  not  hear  anything. 
Is  the  fire  (Feuer  n.)  burning  ? 
No,  all  the  coals  are  burnt  out. 
To    (Dat.)    whom    have    you 

introduced  your  friend  ? 
I  introduced  him  to  Mr.  X. 

fVbuld  you  be  kind  enough  to 
read  this  intelligence  to  me  ? 

Yes,  willingly  (gerne).  Shall 
I  commence  at  once  (sofort)  ? 

Are  you  able  to  open  the 
window  ? 

I  shall  try  to  open  it. 

HowlongdoyouintendftooJ&n^   ! 

to  stay  out? 
About    (ungefahr)    two   hours 

and  a  half. 


SSotten  Sie  mit  mir  au§gef)en  ? 
•ftetn,    id!)   §iefje   bor  gu  £cmfe 

ju  bletben. 
Storf  id)  Sljnen  ®Sfe  imb  Gutter 

qnbieten  ? 
Stein,    banfe;    id)  !ann  ntdjt£ 

mefjr  effen. 
SSarum  fjaben  ©ie  Q^re  Uebung 

nirf)t  borberettet? 
3dj  fjatte  feine  3eit,  fie  borju- 

bereiten. 
SBitte,  lomtncn  ©ie  etne  9Jltnute 

^erouf. 

ttrimfdjen  6te  oon  ntir? 

e^men  ©ie  biejen  Srief,  iinb 

fc^retben  ©ie  t|n  ab. 

n  finb  bie  $itaben  gelaufen^ 


©ie  finb    auf   bie   ©tra^e   ge* 
laufen. 

Eat  mir  ^emanb  gerufen? 
ein,  idj  ^abe  nic^tS  geprt. 
93rennt  bal  Belter? 
S^etn,  affe  ^o^Ien  finb  uerbrannt. 
SSem  ^aben  ©ie  gfjren  gr^unb 

Dorgeftettt? 
%tf)  ftettte  ifjn  (bent)  $errn  X. 

bor. 
SSiirben  ©ie  fo   gut  fetn,   mir 

btefe  sJJa(^rid^t  borgutefen? 
Set/  gerne.    ©oft  td^  fofort  an- 

fangen  ? 
$onnen   ©ie  ba§   genfter  auf* 

madden  ? 
Sc^  fterbe  berfud^en,   e§  aufgu* 

madden. 
2Bte  lange  njoHen©te  au^bletben  ? 


Ungefafjr  jmet  unb  etne 
©tunbe. 


145 

JUaMng  <Ererd0e  Ito.  30. 


ber  gihtfte  unb  bte  S 

®aifer  ®arl  ber  Silnftc  fid)  eine§  £age§  cuf 
ber  3>agb3  fcertrrt4  fjatie,  !am  er  an  etrt  §au§,  in  to  element. 
trier  banner  ttrnren,  bte  fid)  ftefften5  ,  at§6  ob7  fie  fdpefen. 
*J$lo|lid{)  ftanb8  einer  toon  benfel&en  onf9  ,  unb  fagte  ju. 
bent  ®aifer:  —  gdj)  IjaBe  getrdumt10,  id)  ntiiffe  beine  U|r 
nefjmen.  —  Sftit  biefen  Shorten  bentddjttgte11  er  fid)  feiner 
U§r,  S)arauf  erfyob12  fid)  ber  §tt)eite  nnb  inetnte13,  bajj. 
er  getrduntt10  §aBe,  ber  Dfierrocl14  be§  gremben15  ^affe16' 
i!C)m  §nm  ©nt^iiden17,  nnb  er  na!§m  benfelben  o^ne1^ 
tt)eitere§19.  5luf  btefelBe  28eife20  fe|te21  fic§  ber  brttte 
in  93efi£22  ber  S3orfe23  be§  grembiingS15.  @nbli^24 
nd^erte25  fic^  ber  fcierte  nnb  f^rac^:  —  3d^  §offe,  e§  lt)tri> 
@nd^  nic^t  nnangene!jm26  fein,  menn  id^  @nc^  nnterfndje27. 
—  @r  t^at28  bie§  nnb  faf)  am  §atfe29  be§  ®atfer§  eine- 
golbene30  ^ette31,  an  toeWjer  ein  ^fetf^en32  Befeftigt33  mar. 
^od^34  ber  ^aifer  fagte:  —  9JJein  grennb,  e^e35  3 
biefeS  ^Ieinob§36  Beranbt37,  ntng  ic^  (£nd)  beffen 
le^ren39.  —  3nbent40  er  bieS  fagte41,  ^fiff  er.  Seine 
njetd^e  i^n  fndjten,  eilten42  nac^  bent  §anfe,  unb  ber 
®aifer,  a(§2  er  fid)  auger43  ®efaf)r44  fa§,  fprac^:  —  |rier 
finb  banner,  bie  genau45  trduntten10,  ma§  fie  h?oHten.. 
3e£t  mitt  ici^  aber34  aud^  einntat  trdumen10.  —  Unb  nad)= 
bent46  er  einige  Slugenbticle47  in48  ($eban!en  dertieft49  ba= 
geftanben50  mar,  fnfjr51  er  fort52:  —  %<fy  I)a6e  getrdumt10r 
ba§  i^r  atte  trier  t)erbient53,  ge^enft54  git  merben55.— 
$er  ^aifer  §atte  biefe§  Urt^eil56  torn57  auSgeftrodjen,  al§2 
e§  auc^  toon  feinen  5)ienern58  im  SBalbe  auggefii^rt59  murbe60. 

1  robbers,  2  when,  3  hunt,  4  to  go  astray,  sich  verirren,  5  to  feint,  sick* 
stellen,  6  as,  7  if,  8  <fc  9  to  rise,  anfstehen,  stand  auf,  aufgestanden,  10  to  dream, 
traumen,  11  to  take  possession  of,  sich  bemdchtigen  (Gen.),  12  to  rise,  sich  cr- 
heben,  erhob,  erhoben,  13  to  mean,  meinen,  14  over-coat,  15  stranger,  16  to  suit, 
passen,  17  wonderfully,  18  &  19  without  ceremony,  20  manner,  21  to  put, 
setzen,  22  possession,  23  purse,  24  at  last,  25  to  approach,  sich  ndhern,  (Dat.),. 
26  unpleasant,  27  examine,  28  to  do,  thun,  that,  gethan,  29  neck,  30  golden,. 
31  chain,  32  little  whistle,  33  fastened,  34  however,  35  before,  36  treasure, 
37  deprive,  berauben,  38  power,  39  to  teach,  lehren,  40  —  41  in  saying  this, 
42  to  hasten,  eilen,  43  out  of,  44  danger,  45  exactly,  46  after,  47  moments, 
48  —  49  musing,  50  stood  there,  51  &  52  continue,  fortfahren,  fuhrfort,  fortgt- 
fahren,  53  to  deserve,  verdienen.  54—  55  to  be  hanged,  56  sentence,  5T  hardly,, 
58  servants,  59  to  execute,  ansfiihren,  60  was. 


146 

Thirty-first  Lesson,  (Jtmwbbretfjigfte  Seftton. 

The  Separable  Verbs  (continued}. 

Whenever  the  verb  is  removed  to  the  end  of  the  sentence,  the 
prefix  of  a  separable  verb  in  the  Present  and  Imperfect  (Indicative 
and  Subjunctive)  is  no  longer  separable. 

NOTE. — Verbs  are  removed  to  the  end  of  the  sentence  usually  by 
relative  pronouns  or  subordinative  conjunctions;  as, 

8Bo  ift  bet  Warm,  toeldjcr  ben  Jbtofcen  fo  longe  anfttctt?  Where 
is  the  man  who  detained  the  boy  so  long?  SBoIIen  @ie  ben  SSrief 
lefen,  wclrfjm  idj  abfdjrcs&e?  Will  you  read  the  letter,  which  I  am 
copying?  @§  ift-mdjt  ttaljr,  bajj(*)  er  geftern  Slfenb  cmlam.  It  is 
not  true  that  he  arrived  yesterday  evening.  %$  fann  ni$t  fommen, 
»ctl(*)  idj  midj  rmfleibe.  I  cannot  come,  because  I  am  dressing 
myself. 

Verbs  which  are  sometimes  Separable,   sometimes 
Inseparable. 

Verbs  compounded  with  the  four  prepositions  bitrdj,  ura, 
iiber,  imler  are  sometimes  separable,  sometimes  inseparable,  like  in 
English  to  look  over  and  to  overlook. 

"When  such  a  prefix  is  accentuated  it  is  separable,  and  when  the  ac- 
cent is  on  the  verb  the  prefix  is  inseparable. 

The  preposition  in  general  is  separable  when  the  verb  has  its  literal 
meaning,  and  inseparable  when  the  verb  has  a  more  figurative  sense ;  as, 

uberfe&en,  to  ferry  over,  ii&erfefcen,  to  translate,  tuttcrfteljen 
(irr.),  to  stand  under  (shelter),  unterfteljen,  to  venture,  to  dare. 

Where  burd),  unter,  etc.  are  not  separable,  the  verb  of  course 
does  not  prefix  ge  in  the  past  participle,  like  all  those  with  an  un- 
accented prefix  (be,  ge,  er,  etc.) ;  as, 

ufiericfet,  translated,    unterftanben,  ventured. 
(For  Exercises  and  continuation  see  Lesson  32.) 


Learn  by  heart  the  irregular  verbs:  femten,  to  know  (by  the  ap- 
pearance) hrijfen,  to  know  (to  have  knowledge  of)  fenben,  to  send1 
toenben,  to  turn  benfen,  to  think2  brutgen,  to  bring  berbringen 
(or  anbringen),  to  spend,  to  pass  (time)  tfjun,  to  do8. 

1.  To  send  is  mostly  translated  fd)tc!en  (reg.). 

2.  To  think  used  in  the  sense  of  to  suppose,  to  expect  is  generally 
translated  by  glaiiben  (reg.). 

3.  To  do  is  very  often  translated  by  macf)ett  (to  make),  and  to 
make  by  tljim,  as  will  be  explained  in  the  2nd  part 

(*)  £o?j  (that)  and  tteil  (because)  as   well  as  ftenn  (if)  are  subordinative 
conjunctions,  and  throw  the  verb  at  the  end  of  the  sentence. 


147 


•the  afternoon,  ber  9£acf|-- 
mittag  r$en 

to  awake  (intr.),*  auftua= 

the  bed,  ba§  Sett 
Plur:  bte  SBetten 

to  blame,  tobeln 

to  fall  asleep,  *eittfdjtafen 
irr. 

to   get   up,    to    rise,    to 
stand  up,  *rtuffteljen  irr. 

to  invite,  cinlaben  irr. 


to  look,  to  have  the  ap- 

pearance, au§fet)en  irr. 

the  morning,  ber  SEJiorgen 

the  post,  post-office,  bie 

^Soft  fsie^en  irr- 
to  put  on  (clothes),  an= 
to  put  on  (a  hat,  etc.), 

ftttffetsen 
to  return  (something),  to 

give  back, 

gefien  irr. 


to  set  out,   to   depart, 


to  sit  up,  *auf6Iei6en  irr. 
to  start,  *a&gef)en  irr. 
to  take  off  (clothes),  au§- 

&tef)en  irr. 
to  take  off  (a  hat,  etc.), 

a&nefytrten  irr. 
the  train,  ber  gug 
to  undress, 


Exercise  No.  31. 


1.  The  book  which  I  am  returning, — the  hat  which  you  put  on 
yesterday, — I  found  that  he  was  looking  well. — He  will  blame  me  if 
I  put  on  my  new  coat. — We  are  sleepy,  because  we  sat  up  too  long  last 
night   (gestern  Abend). — I  took  off  my  waist-coat. — The    waist-coat 
which  I  took  off. — He  is  taking  off  his  hat. — This  gentleman  is  impolite, 
because  he  does  not  take  his  hat  off. — When  did  you  get  up  this  (heute) 
morning?— I  heard  that  you  got  up  very  late  this  (heute)  morning. — Who 
invited  you? — The  lady  who  invited  you. — By  (mit)  which  train  will 
(wollen)  you  set  out  ?    •  By  the  train  which  starts  at  nine  o'clock  this 
(heute)  evening. — Undress  the  children,  they  must  go  to  bed. 

They  know  me, — he  knows  everything, — I  am  sending, — we  turn, 
— dost  thou  think? — you  bring, — we  spend  (time), — I  am  doing, — 
you  knew  him,  — thouknewest  much, — she  sent, — they  were  turning, — 
I  was  thinking, — we  brought, — we  passed  (time), — you  did, — we  have 
known  you, — I  had  known  nothing, — he  has  sent, — they  had  turned, — 
you  have  thought, — she  had  brought, — they  have  spent  (time), — I  had 
done. 

2.  ©etjen  @te  fjeute  (this]  Sfadjmtttag   ait§?     8a,   id)   mufc 
auf  (to)  bte  $oft  geljen.    SBantm  ftanben  @ie  fo  fact  auf?     SSeil 
idj  fefjr  fofit  eingefcfjlafen  Bin.    28er  madjte  ben  Saben  be£  &u$> 
fjanblerJ   auf?    S)erfetbe  Sftann,   ber   ifjn  geftern  cmfmadjte.    3ft 
3$r  SBrubcr  mit  bent  erften  ^ug  abgeretft?    -ftetn,    er  nwjjte  tntt 
bent  jiueiten  3U9  cibretfen,    toeil   er  §n  f^fit  oufgert)acf)t  ift.    ®o^ 
Concert  fangt  nm  (at)  btefelbe  3^tt  an,  um   (at)  toel^e  e3  geftern 
anftng.    SSarum  blteben  @ie   geftern  Slbenb  (last  night)  fo  lange 
auf?    SBetl  ntetn  SSetter  uon  Sonbon  anfam. 

Has  the  gentleman  returned  the  umbrella  which  you  lent  (Dat.) 
him  yesterday  ?  The  children  cannot  come  yet,  because  they  are  not 
dressed.  Pick  up  the  (news)  paper  which  that  lady  threw  away. 
I  prefer  that  bonnet  (hat),  which  you  offered  (Dot.)  me.  He  will 
(wollen)  give  (Dot.)  me  something  if  I  copy  this  letter.  You  forgot  to 
put  on  your  hat.  How  did  the  gentleman  look  who  went  upstairs  ? 
You  cannot  blame  anybody  because  the  windows  are  not  shut  (zu- 
machen).  I  have  commenced  to  do  (machen)  my  task. 


148 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  When  is  the  prefix  of  a  separable  verb  in  the  present  and  imperfect 
no  longer  separable  ? 

2.  By  what  words  are  verbs  usually  removed  to  the  end  of  the  sentence  f 

3.  Which  verbs  are  sometimes  separable,  and  sometimes  inseparable  ? 

4.  Where  is  the  accent,   when  these  prefixes  are  separable,  and  where, 
when  inseparable? 

5.  When  is  the  preposition  in  general  separable,  and  when  not? 

6.  Does  the  verb  in  the  past  participle  prefix  ge,  when  durch,  unter  etc. 
are  not  separable  ? 


Conversation. 


When  does  the  next  train  start 

to  (nach)  Berlin? 
At  9. 15.    ' 

When  will  you  set  out? 
To-morrow    with    the   earliest 

train. 
Then  (dann)  don't  sit  up  too 

long,  that  you  may  awake  in 

time  (rechtzeitig). 
When  do  you  generally  get  up  ? 
Generally  at  a  quarter  to  six. 

And  when  do  you  go  to-bed? 
Generally  at  half  past  nine. 
Can  you  take  this  letter  to  (auf) 

the  post-office  ? 
Yes,  but  there  (es)  is  no  stamp 

on  it. 

Please,  buy  one. 
Do  you  know  that  gentleman? 
Yes,  I  have  known  him   these 

two  years. 

Do  you  know  the  news? 
No,  I  dont  know  it. 
What  are  you  thinking  of  (an 

Acc.)l 

I  thought  of  my  nephew. 
Do  you  think  that  he  wiH(Subj.) 

visit  you  very  soon  (bald)} 
Yes,  I  have  invited  him,  and  I 

think  he  will  arrive  to-day. 

Where  will  you    spend    your 

holidays  (Feri-en)  ? 
I  shall  go  into  (auf)  the  country. 


2Bonn  gefit  ber  nfidjfte  $ug 

Berlin  ab? 
Utn  9  Ufer  funfgefjn. 
SBann  ttotten  @ie  abreifen? 
2ftorgen  mtt   bent  erften  3uge 


bleiben  @ie  ntd)t  gu  lange 

auf,    bafj  @te  redjtgeitig  auf* 

n>ad)en. 

SSann  ftefcen  @te  getpofinlid^  aiif  ? 
@eroof)nlidj  urn  brei  SSiertel  auf 

fecfcS. 

Unb  ttwun  gefien  @ie  ju  SSett? 
©etDofjttltd)  um  ^alb  ge^n. 
$dttiten    <Sie    biejen   95rief   auf 

bie  ^Soft  trageu? 
SQ/   aber   e3   ift   feine   2Jlarfe 

barauf. 

23ttte,  faufen  @ie  eine. 
Bennett  @te  btefen  §errn? 
^a,    id^    fenne    ifin   jett 


SKifjen  @te  bie  ^euig!eit?* 

9lein,  id)  hjeifc  fie  uidit. 

Sin  n?a£  (or  tooran)  beufen  @ie  ?  ' 

Sd)  bad)te  an  ntetnen  9^effen. 
©lauben  Sie,  ba§  er  @te   balb 

befud)en  roerbe? 
ga,    idj    ^abe   i^n    etngeIabenA 

uub  id)  glaube,  er  tuirb  fjeute 

aufommen. 
2Bo    toerben    @ie  3$re   ^erien 

gubrtngen  (or  tjerbrtngen)  ? 
^d)  merbe  auf  ba0  Sanb  gefjen. 


149 

dmtm  Mo.  31. 


SSeftrafte1  £a&fudjt2 . 

(Sine  beriifjmte3  (Sangerin  reifte  toon  §auptftabt4  gu 
:£auptftabt4  j  fie  fanb  iiberafl5  grofjen  S3etfatt6  unb  fcer^ 
tuente7  triel  ®elb,  SK  Solge8  iljrer  grofjen  ©innaljmen9 
trmrbe  fie  feljr  reicfj  unb  Ijatte  einen  eigenen10  ^utfdjer11, 
^Bagen  unb  ^ferbe.  (£inft12,  at§13  fie  burdj  eine  bergige14 
<$egenb15  fufjr,  gerbradj  bie  $rf)fe16  on  ifjrem  SSBagen,  n)a§ 
fie  in  grofje  SSertegen^eit17  brac^te.  SSd^renb  fie  fo  rat5= 
io§18  bet  i^rem  jerbroc^enen19  SBagen  auf  ber  Sanbftrafje2Qi 
ftanb,  !am  ein  §err  auf  einem  fcfjimen  9^a^^en21  be§22 
2Bege§23  unb  fa§  i^re  ^ot§24,  (££  mar  ein  reiser  ©ut§= 
befi^er25,  ber  in26  ber  ^cit)e27  toofjnte.  @r  lub  bie  ®ame 
ein,  i^m  in  fein  §au§  gu  folgen28,  unb  bort  fo  lange  $u 
bteiben,  bi^29  ber  (Sdjaben30  gut  gema^t  tuare.  2)te 
(Scingerin  na^m31  bie  (Sinlabung33  mit  Reuben34  an32,  unb 
ber  @ut§befi|er25  fdn'cfte  fogteic^35  gu  bem  ©c^miebe36,  urn37 
nadj  bem  SSagen  gu  feijen.  2)a38  ber  ©utg^rr39  biefem 
SSorfaHe40  bie  ^etegen^eit41  t)erban!te42,  eine  beru^mte3 
(Sa'ngerin  §u  beaiirt^en43,  fo  tub  berfetbe  5lbenb§44  feine 
^reunbe  ein  unb  bat  bie  ©a'ngerin,  ber  ($efettfrf)aft45  einige 
Slrien46  (5l=ri=en)  gu  fingen.  @ie  t^at  bie§  unb  bie 
®efeflfd)aft45  ging  bergniigt  au§einanber47.  @§e48  am 
anbern  9JJorgen  bie  ©a'ngertn  i^re  Steife  fortfe|te49,  er* 
fud^te50  fie  i^ren  giitigen51  2Birtf)52,  i^r  fiir  ba§  geftrige53 
Concert  300  2)u^aten54  gn  bega^Ien.  S)er  §err,  erftaunt55, 
bega^Ite  biefe  ©umrne;  boc^  at§13  bie  6angerin  abreifen 
ttjoffte,  forberte56  er  fiir  feine  93eanrtljung57  400  ^ufaten54, 
bon  benen  er  300  befn'ett  unb  100  bem  ©cfjmiebe36  gab. 

1  punished,  2  covetousness,  3  celebrated,  4  capital,  5  everywhere, 
6  applause,  7  to  earn,  verdicnen,  8  inconsequence  offGenit.J,  9  receivings, 
10  own,  11  coachman,  12  once,  13  when,  14  mountainous,  15  country, 
16  axle,  17  embarrassment,  18  helpless,  19  broken,  20  highroad,  21  black 
horse,  22  &  23  on  the  road,  24  difficulty,  25  proprietor  of  an  estate,  26—27 
near,  28  to  follow,  folgen,  fDatJ,  29  till,  30  damage,  31  &  32  to  accept,  an- 
nchmcr,,  nahm  an,  angenommen,  33  invitation,  34  pleasure,  35  immediately, 
30  (black-)  smith,  37  in  order  (to),  38  as,  39  landlord,  40  accident,  41  oppor- 
tunity, 42  to  owe,  to  thank,  verdanken,  43  to  entertain,  bewirthen,  44  in  the 
evening,  45  society,  46  airs,  47  one  from  another,  48  before,  49  to  continue 
fa  way),  fortseteen,  50  to  request,  ersuchen,  51  kind,  52  host,  53  yesterday, 
54  ducats,  55  astonished,  56  to  ask,  to  demand,  fordern,  57  entertainment. 


150 

Thirty-second  Lesson.  Stoeiunbbretgtgfte  SeftioiL 

The  Separable  Verbs  (concluded). 

Verbs  with  the  prefixes  twrd)  and  jtm  are  generally  separable; 
except  a  few  of  which  the  following  are  the  most  used  and  which 


are  inseparable : 


is  inseparable  in 


burdj&0!)frett,  to  pierce 
burdjbringejt  irr.,  to  penetrate 
burdjreijen,  to  travel  over 


burdjfcrfcijen)  to  examine  thor- 
burrf))n<i)en    )  oughly,  to  search 
(through) 


Xote.—  Jardj  is  separable  in   burtfjfiofiren,    to   bore   through 
(irr.),  to  get  through    *j>tt*d)reiien,  to  travel  (pass)  through. 

Jim  is  inseparable  in 


iratttrnten,  to  embrace 
itmgeben  irr. )  to  encircle, 


irr. 1  to 
i      J  to 


mitring  en      )  to  surround 
iimgel)en  irr.,  to  avoid 
umjrf)iffen,  to  circumnavigate 


umfcf)Iing«n  irr.,  to  entwine,  to 

embrace 
umfdjretben  irr.,  to  circumscribe, 

to  paraphrase 
umftctfen,  to  surround 
nmtoSlfen,  to  cloud  (over) 

Note.—  tt«t  is  separable  in  *umgeljen  (irr.),  to  haunt  tttnfdjiff en,  to  transfer 
to  another  sbap    uwf^reiben,  (irr.)  to  write  over  again    ttmftellen,  to  transpose. 

Verbs  with  the  prefixes  fiber  and  unter  are  generally  insepar- 
able ;  except  a  few  of  which  the  following  are  the  most  used  and 
which  are  separable : 

fiber  is  separable  in 


*uberfa^ren  irr. )  to  ferry  over 


:en  irr. )  to 
n          )  to 


"fiberfe^en          )  to  cross 
fiberfiihren,  to  convey  over 


*fibergef)en  irr.,  to  go  over  (to 

another  party),  to  desert 
*fiberloiifen  irr.,  to  flow  over 


Note.— fiber  is  inseparable  in  iiBerfa^rcn  (irr),  to  run  over  (by  a  vehicle) 
fetjen,  to  translate  uberfii^ren,  to  convict  iifiergc^en  (irr.),  to  overslip 
,  to  intrude  upon. 

unter  is  separable  in 


nirterbringen  irr.,  to  shelter 
*untergei)en  irr.,  to  go  down,  to 
set,  to  sink 


unterorbnen,  to  subordinate 
*imterfteljen  irr.,  to  go  or  stand 
under  shelter 


Ncte.—  Unter  is  inseparable  in  unterfieljeit,  to  venture,  to  dare. 

The  prefix   ttriefcer  (not  nnber)  is  inseparable  in  the  verb 
,  to  repeat. 


a*teberf)olen  (separable)  means  «to  fetch  back  (again)",  but  it  is  usually 
written  in  two  separate  words  (wiebet  fjolen)  like  the  other  verbs  occurring 
with  toiebcr. 


151 


the  coachman.ber  ®utf  djer 
to  converse,    fid)    unter= 

fatten  irr. 
,,  to    cross     or     strike 

through,   to    cancel, 

bitrd)ftmcf)en  irr. 
,,     distinguish,      itnter= 

fdjetben  irr. 
,,  go  through    or.    over, 

but  (J)geljen  irr.     firr. 
„  interrupt,  unter&redjen 


to  look  through  or  over, 

bnrcfjfefyen  irr. 
the    matter,    thing,     bie 

(Sodje 
„    number,    figure,    bie 

8<#I 

„    page,  bie  (Seite 
„   police,  bie  ^olt^et 
to  repeat,  tmeberljolen 
„   rise  (the  sun,  etc.), 
"aufgeljeit  irr. 


to    set    (the    sun,    etc.> 

*tttttergef)en  irr. 
,,  search  (through),  btifd)= 

judjen 
,,  sign,  to  receipt,  untcr- 

fcfjreitien  irr. 
„    think    on,    upon,     to 

consider,  iifierlegen 
,,  translate,  ii&erfetjen 
„  turn  back,  *umfeljre» 
,,  upset,  ttmtoerfcu  irr. 


Exercise  No.  32. 

1.  Go  through  this  exercise. — I  looked  over  the  whole  book. — Our 
coachman  has  upset  the  carriage. — They  are  turning  back. — He  has 
thought  upon  the  matter. — Do  you  translate  your  task? — Do  not  inter- 
rupt me. — Did  he  distinguish  the  figures? — Repeat,  what  1  said. — The 
police  are  (is)  searching  (through)  the  whole  house. — The  sun  sets  at  five 
o'clock,  and  the  moon  rises  at  nine  o'clock. — Is  this  letter  signed? — 
With  whom  did  you  converse? — Cross  the  sixth  word  on  the  sixteenth 
page  through. — Did  you  go  over  your  translation? — I  considered  it 
well.— The  shopkeeper  did  not  receipt  the  bill  (Rechnung). — Don't 
upset  the  lamp. — He  interrupted  me  suddenly. — Have  you  looked  over 
the  newspaper? 

2.  3ft  bte  (Somte  fdjon  untergegangen1?     -TO  ttm3  fur  enter 
S)ame  wtterfiielten  @ie  jrat    tteberlegen  @ie,  toaS  @ie  tfiun  molten 
(intend).      $d)    ratfje   Sftnen,    ^e    9anSe   ®e^e    burc&^iiftreicfyen. 
$omtett  @ie  uttterfcrjetben,  tt)a^  fiir  eine  ^arbe   ber   Seppid)   fjat? 
53it(f)ftabiren  @ie  bag  Sort,  ba3  @ie  rt)ieber^olten.     SBanim  finb 
@te  ttid)t  friifier  umgele!)rt?    SSie  t)iele  ©eiten  BaBett  @ie  ii&erje 
|)abe  td^  etma^  §u  imterfdjreiBen?     S<^  ^be  ba§   S3ud 
burc^gegangen.      SSariim  f)at  (have)  bie  ^oltgei  nitf)t  ben  Garten 
burcf)fiic|t  ? 

You  have  now  three  times  interrupted  me.  Who  has  upset  this 
bottle  ?  Several  figures  were  crossed  through.  Look  over  your  exercise 
twice.  Which  page  are  we  to  (solleri)  translate  ?  He  never  thought 
on  what  he  spoke.  When  did  the  moon  rise?  He  conversed  with 
me&  nearly  every  morning*  .  I  cannot  distinguish  what  bank-note 
that  is.  Have  you  repeated  all  the  rules?  Please  (Bitte),  sign  this 
letter.  You  turned  back  very  early.  Some  time  ago  I  upset  all  the 
glasses  which  stood  on  the  table.  Search  (through)  every  room.  I 
have  no  time  to  go  through  your  translation.  All  the  stars  have  set. 
This  colour  looks  very  nice.  Why  have  you  taken  off  your  cloak? 
Where  did  the  coachman  upset  the  carriage  ?  It  grows  dark,  let  us 
turn  back.  Translate  for  (auf)  the  next  time  (Mai)  page  twenty-five. 


152 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  Are  verbs  with  the  prefixes  durch  and  um  generally  separable  or 
inseparable  ? 

-2.  Are  verbs  with  prefixes  iiber  and  unter  generally  separable  or  in- 
separable ? 

3.  In  which  verb  is  the  prefiz  wiedzr  inseparable  ? 


Conversation. 


"When  shall  we  turn  back? 

In  a  quarter  of  an  hour. 

Do  you  know  the   gentleman 

who  is  conversing  with  your 

brother? 
Yes,  it  is  Mr.  H.,  a  friend  of 

my  brother. 

Who  has  upset  the  lamp  ? 
Charles  did  it. 
What  poem  have  you  read  to 

(Dot.)  your  aunt? 
It  was  a  poem  by  (von)  Goethe. 
-Shall  we  stay  a  little  longer? 

No,  I  think  it  is  better  we  should 
go  home. 

Let  us  wait  till  (bis)  the  music 
has  finished  (ceased). 

^NOj  I  must  go  now,  for  my 
mother  asked  me  not  to  stay 
out  too  long. 

To  what  are  you  invited? 

To  a  ball  at  (bei)  the  pre- 
sident's. 

Why  did  you  not  offer  a  chair 
to  (Dai.)  the  lady? 

I  did  so  (it),  but  she  preferred 
to  stand. 

Have  you  translated  your  ex- 
ercise? 

Yes,  [I  have],  the  translation 
was  very  easy. 

Where  were  you  ? 

I  took  a  letter  to  (auf)  the  post- 
office. 

Does  the  train  to  (nach)  B.  start 
now? 

.Not  before  three  quarters  of  an 
hour. 


SSann  fallen  fair  umfefjren? 
3>n  etner  SSiertelftunbe. 
mnen  ©te  ben  £errn,  ber  fid) 
mtt  S^rem  SBruber  unterljaft  ? 

£50,  e§  ift  £err  £.,  ein  greunb 

tnetne^  ^BruDer^. 
93er  fiat  bie  £ampe  umgeaiorfen? 
^arl  t^at  c§. 
28a3  fiir  ein  (Bebidjt  ^aben  @te 

S^rer  Xante  oorgelefen? 
@^  ttmr  ein  65ebid)t  Don  ©ot^e. 
©often    fair   ein   tuentg   longer 

bletben? 
S^etn,   ic^    glaube  e§  ift  beffer, 

tuenn  tr>ir  nac^  £>aufe  ge^en. 
2Sir    trollen    marten,   bi§    bie 

SWuft!  aufgefiort  [}at. 
•ftein,  id^  mu§  je^t  ge^en,  benn 

meine  SDhitter  bat  mtc^,  nicfit 

gu  lange  au^gubleiben. 
3u  tpa3  finb  Ste  eingelaben? 
3u  einem  S3aII  betm  ^ra'ftbenten. 

SSarum   boten   ©te  ber  S)ame 

feinen  ©tu^I  an? 
^d^  t^at  e§,    aber   fie  jog   tjor 

gu  fte^en. 
§aben  ©te  ^E^re  Uebung   iiber* 

fe|t? 
Sa,  bie   Ueberfe^nng   tear  fc!§r 

leic^t. 

2So  roaren  ©te? 
^d^  ^abe   etnen   Srief   auf  bie 

^?oft  getragen. 
@e^t  ber  $ug  nad^  93.  je^t  ab? 


oor  bret  SSiertelftunben. 


153 

(Ern*a0e  Jlo.  32. 


Qrfattber1  unb  bte  ©rfjtlblrote*2 

in  grlanber1  ,  ber  in  Jamaica  getoefen  toar,  er* 
einmal  in  einer  grogen  (SJefeflfdjaft3  :  —  SSor  §roei 
3aljren  bradjte  man  mir  in  Sftentego  23ai  eine§  9ftorgen§ 
etne  @rf)tlb!rote2  ,  ber  id)  fogleid)  ben  ®opf  abfn'eb4  .  3)en 
$opf  benmljrtc5  irfj  anf,  betradjtete  iljn  affe  Xage  unb 
fanb  nai^  fed)§  SSod^en,  bag  er  fic|  nod)  fcetoegte6  .  —  S)ie 
<$efeHfd)aft3  fc^ien  ungtanBig7  ,  unb  tnele  S3emerlnngen8 
ixnb  @tntt)enbungen9  tuurben10  gemadfjt  2)er  Srldnbcr1 
t)ertf)eibigteu  fid^  2Infang§12  fo  gnt  er  lonnte,  aber  man 
trieb13  i§n  t)on  alien  @eitenu  fo  in15  bie  (£nge16,  ba§  er 
§ute|t17  nnmidig18  ftmrbe  nnb  fagte  :  —  SCber  ic^  'fage  3i)nen, 
meine  §erren,  bag  ic^  e§  felbft  gefefjen  §abe.  3c§  ttjerbe 
ba^er  bemjentgen  eine  ^ugel19  bnrd^  ben  ®opf  jagen20,  ber 
baran  gn  §tt)etfetn21  tt)agt22.  —  ®tefc  SSorte  fatten  bie  ge= 
rtnnfc^te23  SStrfnng24.  We  fdjtoiegen,  nnb  fitnf  SJlinnten 
lang  tunrbe25  !ein  SBort  gefprocl^en.  3)tefe§  @c§lt)eigen26 
•Joar  bem  grlcinber1  nod§  unangene^mer27,  al§  e§  tor^er28 
bie  S3enter!nngen8  getoefen  tuaren.  Um  e3  gn  unter* 
bre«$en,  njenbete  er  fidj  gn  feinem  9^ac^bar29  nnb  fagte: 
—  28a§  fatten30  @ie  ton  ber  @a^e?—  @ein  ^lac^bar29  ber 
^ein  linger31  3Rann  tuar,  antluortete32  :  —  3$  toerbe 
3$nen  fagen,  aber  @ie  miiffen  mir  jutjor33  etne 
beantmorten35.  —  28a3  Gotten  @ie  toiffen?  fragte  ber  3r= 
lanber1  .  —  SBiirbcn  @ie  e§  glauben,  ft)enn  @ie  e§  nic^t 
felbft  gefeljen  fatten?  —  ^ein,  geiutg36  mrfjt.  —  ®ann37  miiffen 
@ie  mir  erlanben38,  fagte  ber  Slnbere,  bag  idj  mir  ba^felbe 


1  Irishman,  2  tortoise,  3  society,  4  to  hew  (or  cut  off),  abftawen,  Me6  06, 
.  abgehauen,  5  to  preserve,  to  keep,  anfbewahren,  6  to  move,  (sich)  beweg&n, 
7  incredulous,  8  observations,  9  objections,  10  were  11  to  defend,  vertheidigen, 
12  in  the  beginning,  13  to  drive,  treiben,  trieb,  getrieben,  14  flanks,  15  —  16  into 
straits,  17  at  last,  18  irritated,  19  ball,  20  to  drive  (quickly),  jagen,  21  to 
doubt,  zweifeln,  22  to  venture,  wagen,  23  desired,  24  effect,  25  was,  26  silence, 
27  more  unpleasant,  28  before,  29  neighbour,  30  to  think  of,  Jialten  von,  Melt, 
'  gehalten,  31  prudent,  32  to  answer,  (to  give  an  answer),  antworten,  33  at  first, 
34  question,  35  to  answer  (something),  beantivorten,  36  certainly,  37  then,  38  to 
allow  erlauben,  (Dat.  ),  39  right,  4.0  to  arrogate  to  oneself,  to  claim  for  oneself, 
sich  (Dat.)  herausneftmen,  nahm  heraus,  herausgenomme.n. 


154 

Thirty-third  Lesson.  Sretimbbretgigfte  Seltton. 

Classification  of  Verbs. 

There  are:  I)  Transitive  (or  Active),  II)  Passive,  III)  Reflec- 
tive, IV)  Intransitive  (or  Neuter),  V)  Impersonal  Verbs. 

I.  Transitive  Verbs. 

Transitive  verbs  are  those  which  require  an  object  acted  upon,  and 
which  have  this  object  (noun  or  pronoun)  in  the  Accusative  case. 

Transitive  verbs  form  their  perfect  tenses  with  the  auxiliary 
Ijn&Ctt  (see  list  of  verbs  page  17) ;  as, 

3dj  Ijabe  etnen  9Jorf  gefauft.    I  have  bought  a  coat.    9Kein  greunb- 
Ijatte  mid)  fcejudji.    My  friend  had  visited  me. 


II.  Passive  Verbs. 

A  transitive  verb  becomes  passive,  if  the  subject  suffers  the  action 
expressed  by  the  past  participle. 

The  Passive  Voice  is  formed  by  using  the  verb  toftbcn  as  an  aitx- 
iliary  and  the  past  participle  of  a  traiisitive  verb  (see  list  of  verbs  p.  19). 

For  forming  the  passive  voice  in  English  the  verb  to  be  is  used  as 
an  auxiliary.  Thus : 

To  be  in  its  various  tenses  followed  by  a  past  participle  is 
usually  translated  by  toerben,  and  if  in  English  to  be  in  addition 
is  accompanied  by  being  in  German  roerben  stands  for  both ;  as, 

S»  ift  $er&jl,  unb  bic  Srouben  tuerben  gelejen.  It  is  autumn  and 
the  grapes  are  being  gathered.  Set  8nabe  nmrbe  Don  feinem  Secret 
getabelt.  The  boy  was  blamed  by  his  teacher.  Sttefe  §i)dje  fmb  ii 
ber  Sfjemfe  gefangen  ttorben.  These  fishes  have  been  caught  in  the 
Thames.  SBit  toerben  nidjt  gelobt  toerben.  We  shall  not  be  praised 

To  be  however  followed  by  a  past  participle  is  translated  bj 
fetit,  when  the  participle  expresses  a  state  or  condition  of  the  sub- 
ject, in  which  case  it  is  considered  an  adjective. 

Examples :  (a)  £ie  SDjure  ift  gefdjlnfien.  The  door  is  shut  (i.  e.  it  is  a 
shut  door),  (b)  Sie  Sfjflre  toirb  jeben  2l6enb  urn  |"erf)§  Ufa  gefdjloffen.  The 
door  is  shut  every  evening  at  six  o'clock  (i.  e.  people  shut  the  door). 

(a)  Sdj  lam  ju  fpat,  ba§  £ait§  *°a*  oerfauft.  I  came  too  late,  the  house 
was  sold  (i.  e.  the  sale  was  over  and  it  was  a  sold  house),  (b)  S)a§  4?au§ 
ttwrbe  tterfauft,  ofi  id)  anfam.  The  house  was  (being)  sold,  when  I  arrived 
(i.  e.  the  sale  was  going  on). 

(a)  Sic  S&iire  ttrirb  gefdjloffen  fcin,  »enn  Sic  nod)  £oufe  fommen.  The 
door  will  be  shut,  when  you  arrive  at  home  (i.  e.  you  will  find  a  shut  door), 
(b)  3)ie  SJjure  rotrb  gefdjloffen  tocrben,  toenn  Sie  in?  §au§  geljm  njolfen.  The 
door  will  be  shut,  when  you  wish  to  go  into  the  house  (i.  e.  people  will 
shut  the  door). 

REMARK. — The  past  participle  expresses  the  passive  voice  if  a  per- 
son present  at  a  certain  time  could  see  an  action  going  on,  which  the 
subject  is  suffering  (see  sentences  marked  (b). 

The  past  participle  is  merely  an  adjective,  if  a  person  present  at  a. 
certain  time,  could  not  see  an  action  going  on,  but  simply  see  the  ac- 
complished state  or  condition  in  which  the  subject  is  (see  sentences 
marked  (a). 


to  alter,  finbern 

America,  Slmertfo 

the  bank,  bie  SSont 

„   behaviour,  ba§93etra» 

„   bell,  bte  ©lode    [gen 

„    bill    (of    exchange), 

ber  2Bed)fel       \irr. 

„  break  out, 


155 

to  build,  fcauen  i  just  (Adv.),  eben  (gerabe) 


the  business,  ba§  ©efdjdft 
to  change,  to  give  change, 

loecijfeln 

,,  clean,  reinigen 
,,  esteem,  odjten 
,,  fire,  ba§  geuer 


to  light,  attjimben 
„  neglect,  tierfavttnen 
the  opportunity,  bie  ©e= 

legenljett 

,,   receipt,  bie  duitturtg 
to  ring,  tauten 
,,  weep,  to  cry,  toetnen 


Exercise  No.  33. 

1.  His  father  is  esteemed  by(*)  everybody  — Your  room  is  being 
cleaned. — Our  house  was  built  six  years6  ago"  . — The  windows  were 
being  shut  (zumacheri),  when  (als)  I  entered2'  (see  page  72)  the  houses  . 
— The  bill  (of  exchange)  will  be  paid  to-morrow.  —  His  behaviour  will 
not  be  forgotten. — I  should  be  invited,  if  I  were  here. — His  business 
has  been  sold. — This  opportunity  has  been  neglected. — I  have  been 
asked  (a  question). — The  child  would  have  cried  (wept)  if  it  had  (Subj.) 
been  beaten. — The  gas  is  lit. — The  gas  is  lit  every  (Ace.)  evening  at 
(um)  seven  o'clock. — The  children  are  dressed  now. — The  children  are 
just  being  dressed. — The  post-office  was  shut  (schliessen),  and  nobody 
was  in  the  house.  — The  post-office  was  [being]  shut,  just  when  (als)  the 
bell  struck6  eight  o'clock^  . — I  wished  (wolUn)  to  buy  some  presents, 
but  all  the  shops  were  shut  (schliesseri). — All  the  shops  were  being  shut, 
when  (als)(**)  the  great  fire  broke  out. — The  receipt  will  be  already  writ- 
ten, when  (wenn)  you  come6  to  (auf)  the  bank«  . — The  receipt  will  be 
written  as  soon  as  (sobald)  you  arrive6  (kommeri)  at  (auf  Ace.)  the  bank«. 

2.  gcf)  ttmrbe  in  (to)  bie  ©tabt  gefcfiicft.      S5aS   Simmer  ift 
geanbert  toorben.      (Stub  @te  gefefyett  roorben?     @ie  ftwrben  ge* 
tabelt  toorbett  feitt,  toenn  @ie  nicfjt  gefommen  toaren.     5liif   (at) 
bet  $oftc  tDtrb6  !ein  $elba  gettjec^jelt.    Sft  baS  ^euer  artgegiinbet? 
@§  toirb  eBen  angegilnbet.      SBatm  ift  5imerifa  entbecft  (discovered) 
roorben?     SSarum  roerben  bie  ©loden  gelcmtet?     Stefer  ©olbat 
ift  t)ertuunbet.     $8on(*)  roem  tuiirbe  S^e  Soufitte  ttadj  §oufe  be* 
gteitet?    2Bar   bieje<§   ©lag  fc^on  gerbro^ett,   alS  (when)  @ie  in0 
Dimmer  trateni    Sftein,  e^  tourbe  na<f)fier  (afterwards)  gerbrocfjen. 

By(*)  whom  has  that  hat  been  ordered  (bestellen)  1  When  was  this 
castle  built?  The  desk  was  opened  (aufmachen)  when  (als)  I  saw&  ita. 
My  desk  has  been  opened  by(*;  somebody.  Has  the  water  been  fetched? 
I  think  (glaulen)  all  the  apples  will  be  eaten.  He  was  compelled  to 
leave  the  town.  When  was  your  house  let  ?  This  intelligence  is  in- 
vented. His  behaviour  is  (being)  praised  by(*)  everybody.  My  horses 
will  be  sold  at  (auf)  the  market.  The  murder  was  committed  when 
(als)  the  sun  had6  seta  .  The  same  story  was  (being)  related  to  (Dat. ) 
us  twice.  When  was  your  watch  stolen  ?  The  children  have  been  rescued. 

(*)  "To  be"  with  a  past  participle  accompanied  by  the  preposition  "by" 
and  a  noun  or  pronoun  denotes  always  the  passive  voice  and  "by"  is 
rendered  Don  in  German. 

(**)  9H§  is  here  a  subordinative  conjunction  (see  page  146). 


156 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  With  which  auxiliary  do  transitive  verbs  form  their  perfect  tenses  ? 

2.  How  is  the  Passive  Voice  formed  in  German? 

3.  How  is  to  be  in  its  various  tenses  followed  by  a  past  participle  usually 
translated? 

4.  When  to  be  in  addition  is  accompanied  by  being,  what  stands  for  both 
in  German? 

5.  When  is  to  be  rendered  by  sein* 


Conversation. 


Must  not  this  rule  be  altered? 

Yes,  it  must  (be  altered). 
Why  is  this  business  being  sold  ? 

The  owner  of  it  is  dead. 

.Shall  we  go  into  the  sitting- 
room? 

Yes,  as  soon  as  (sobald)  the  gas 
is  lit, 

Will  the  fire  be  lit  as  well 
(auch)} 

No,  it  is  not  cold. 

Have  my  clothes  (Kleider)  been 
cleaned  ? 

Your  coat  is  not  cleaned  yet 

When    was   the  new    theatre 

built? 

Three  years  ago. 
I  have  not  yet  been  there  (dort). 
You   should   not  neglect  this 

opportunity. 
<Can  you  give  me  change  for  this 

sovereign? 

No,  I  have    not   any  change 
{Tdeines  Geld)  about  (bei)  me. 
Is  it  time  for  (in  die)  church  ?  • 
Yes,   the  bells  are  just  being 

rung. 
I  thought,  this  book  had  been 

(Perf.  subj.)  returned. 
No,  we  have  not  finished  (aus- 

leseri)  it  yet. 
"Why    are   these    pears    being 

thrown  away? 
They  are  all  unripe. 


btefe  SReget  ntrfjt  geanbert 

Joerben? 

$a,  [fie  tnufj  geanbert  toerben]. 
SSarum    tuirb    btefe3    ©efdjaft 

berfaitft? 

3>er  ©tgentljihner  baoon  ift  tobt 
©otten    ftur    tn3   SBo^njimmer 

gefjen? 
3a,  fobalbba§®a!angeaimbetift. 

SBtrb   ba§    geuer    cmdj    onge* 

giinbet  n?erben? 
^etn,  e0  ift  ntdjt  !att. 
(Binb    tneine    ^letber   gereinigt 

motben? 
3!§c   9ioc!    ift    nodj   nic^t   ge* 

reintgt. 
SSann  nwrbe  ba§  neue  Sweater 

gebaut? 

SSor  brei  Sa^rcn. 
Sc^  bin  nod)  ntd)t  bort  getoefen. 
@ic    fottten    btefe    ©elegen^eit 

ntdjt  berfaumen. 
Soimca  Sie  mir  biefen  ©obereign 

raed^feln? 
Sletn,  id)  ^obe  !ein  fletneS  ©elb 

bei  tntr. 

Sft  e§  Beit  in  bte  ^ircfie? 
8a,    bie  ©locfen    tuerben   eben 

geldutet. 
Sd^    glaubte,    biefe§    Sud^    fei 

guriirfgegeben  roorben. 
^ein,   roir   fjaben  e^  nod)  nid)t 

au^gelefen. 
SBarunt    irerben    btefe    SStrnen 

fteggeftorfen  1 
8ie  ftnb  aEe  unrcif. 


157 

(Em*ct0e  tto.  33. 


Ste  ridjttge1  S^arfamlett.2 

S3on  einem  iiberaus3  reidfjen  -Eflanne  im  fdfjtoeijer4 
(Canton  Sfceufdjjatel,  ber  auger5  grogen  ©ummen,  bie  er 
bet  fetnem  £obe  an  milbe6  ©ttftungen7  fcermarfjte8  ,  feinen 
^inherit  nodf)  t)ier§ig  Sftiflionen  granlen9  fjinterliefp,  nrirb* 
gotgenbeg11  er§afylt:—  TO12  er  eine3  5l6enb§  in  feine* 
SBoijnung  fam,  fanb  er  im  $or§immer13  einige  9)lon^eu 
ton  bem  @t.  (@anct)  S3ern^arb=^tofter15,  tt>elcf)e  ilm  er*- 
tuarteten,  urn  auf  t^rer,  jur  ©tnfammlung16  t)on  nttlben6 
©aben17  befttmmten18  9ieife19,  duc§  if)n  urn20  ein  ©elbge- 
fd^en!21  fiir  ifjr  ^(ofter14  anjiifpre^en22.  Xer  §err  ffl^rte25' 
fie  in  fein  Simmer  tmb  rtef24,  ba26  e§  fcerett§27  bitnfel 


t25.  $tefe  erf^ien30  unb  »arf,  aid  fie  bie  ®er§e29' 
anjiinbetc,  ein  S&nb^&g^eit,  ba§  an  ben  ^oijlen  nid§t 
fogtetd^31  §atte  Brennen  tt)oHenr  fjtntoeg.  2t(§12  ber  §err 
ba^fetbe  liegen  fa§,  §oB  er  e§  auf,  unb  fagte  in  einem 
ftreng,en32  £one33  gn  bem  SJla'bc^en:—  28ie  tjerf^njenberifc^34 
bu  bift!  S)a§  anbere  (Snbe35  be§  §otgc^en§  ift  ja36  nocfj' 
braud^bar37.  —  3Jlan  lann  fidj  benfen,  bag  bie  $0l6nc^eu, 
al£12  fie  bie§  prten,  nic^t§  ober  tt)enig  ton  ber  grei* 
gebigfeit38  bel  9^anne»  er>t)arteten  j  after  true  fe^r  ttJiirben 
fie  u6errafd()t39,  al§12  berfelbe  au§  feinem  (Mbfc^ranfe40 
ein  ©atfd^en41  mit  fed^^^nnbert  $ran!en9  ^olte  unb  i^nen 
balfetbe  iiberreidjte42.—  §ier  ift  meine  ©abe17  fiir  ba& 
§of^t543,  fagte  er;  unb  al§12  er  i^re  SSertounberung44  ge 
maijr  tourbe45,  fu^r46  er  fort47:  —  2lf)a,  ic§  terfte^e,  if) 
feib  iiber  meine  S^arfamfeit2  an  bem  Swtb^ot^en  er 
ftaunt48.  5lber  eben  burc^  eine  fold^e  @parfam!eit2  !ann: 
biefe§  ©e(b  fiir  euer  ^tofter14  geben. 


1  proper,  2  economy,  3  exceedingly,  4  Swiss,  5  besides  fDat.J,  6  mild, 
charitable,  7  institutions,  8  to  bequeath,  vermachen,  9  francs,  10  to  leave  as  an 
inheritance,  Mnterlassen,  (er  JiinterlsisstJ,  hinterliess,  hinterl&ssen,  11  thefollmtnng, 
12  when,  13  anti-room,  14  monks,  15  cloister,  16  collection,  17  the  gift,  die 
Gdbe,  18  destined,  19  journey,  20  for,  21  gratuity,  22  to  beg  of,  smsprechen, 
fer  spricht  o,nj,  sprach  an,  angesprochen,  23  to  conduct,  fuhren,  24  &  25  to  call 
(to  a  place),  herbeir«/eu,  riefherbei,  herbeigerufen,  26  as,  27  already,  28  kindling, 
29  candle,  30  to  appear,  erscheincn,  erschien,  erschienen,  31  immediately,  32 
strict,  sharp,  33  voice,  34  prodigal,  35  end,  36  as  you  see,  37  fit  for  use,  38 
generosity,  39  to  surprise,  uberr&schen,  40  money-chest,  41  small  bag,  42  to  hand. 
over,  iiberreichen,  43  hospice,  44  astonishment,  45  to  perceive,  gewahr  werden- 
firr.  ),  46'  &  47  to  continue,  fortfahren,  fer  fahrt  fort),  fuhrfort,  fortgefahren,  48  as 
tonished. 


158 


Thirty-fourth  Lesson. 


SSterunbbret^igj'te  Seftiom 


IIL  Reflective  Verbs. 

When  the  object  of  a  verb  is  the  same  person  or  thing  as  the 
subject,  the  verb  is  called  reflective  and  the  object  takes  the  form 
•  •I'  the  reflective  pronoun  (see  reflective  pronouns  on  page  88). 

Reflective  Verbs  are  conjugated  with  fjafcen  (see  list  of  verbs 
page  24). 

Various  verbs  are  reflective  in  German  and  not  in  English 
•where  they  are  used  without  the  reflective  pronoun ;  as, 
3d)  erfunbtgte  midj  nadj  iljm.    I  inquired  for  him. 

Many  verbs  can  be  used  reflectively  by  taking  the  reflec- 
tive pronoun ;  as, 

3d)  toafdje  ntidj.    I  wash  myself.    (£r  berttwnbete  fid).    He  wounded 
himself. 

Some  verbs  however  can  be  used  only  reflectively,  as  they 
have  no  meaning  at  all  without  a  reflective  pronoun  or  else  have 
a  different  meaning.  Such  are : 


fidj  beetten,  to  make  haste 
fid)  befinben,  irr.  to  be  (in  health) 
ftdj  beflogen  fiber  (Ace.),  to  complain  of 
fldj  bemfitjen,  to  endeavour,  to  trouble 

oneself 

fid)  betrogett,  irr.  >  f 
fid)  benefjmen,  irr.  f  fc 
fid)  entporen,  to  revolt 
fid)  entfdjIteBen,  irr.  to  make  up  one's 

mind 
fid)   erbarnten  Genit.   or  fiber  (Ace.), 

to  have  mercy  on 
fid)  erinnern  Gen:t.   or  an  (Ace.),  to 

remember 


fidj  erfatten,  to  catch  cold 
fid)  erfunbtgen  (nadj),  to  inquire  (for) 
ftdj  freiten  (fiber  Ace.)  to  be  glad  (of) 
fidj  ffirdjten  (Dor),  to  be  afraid  (of) 
fid)  gerooljnen  an  (Ace.),  to  accustom 

oneself  to 

ftdj  trren,  to  be  mistaken 
ftdj   fdjamen   Genit.   or   fifer  (Ace.), 

to  be  ashamed  of 
ftdj  fefcen,  to  sit  down 
ftdj  unterljolten,  to  converse 
ftd)   berlaffen  auf  (Ace.),  irr.   to  rely 

(depend)  on 
ftd)  toeigern,  to  refuse,  to  be  unwilling 


Reflective  Verbs  require  the  reflective  pronoun  in  the  Accusative, 
except  the  following,  which  require  the  pronoun  in  the  Dative,  viz : 


ftdj  anmafeen,  to  usurp 
ftd)  ausbitten,  to  request 
fid)  etnbtlben,  to  imagine,  to  fancy 
fid)  bte  greiljeit  netjmen,  irr.  to  take 
the  liberty 


ftdj  getrauen,  to  dare 
ftdj  borneljmen,  irr.  to  take  the  reso- 
lution 


ftdj  tjorftetten(*),  to  imagine 
ftd) 


jitjteljen,  to  incur 


EXAMPLE  : 


idj  getraue  mtr,  I  dare  etc. 
£m  getroufl  btr 
er  getroitt  ftdj 


tt)tr  getrauen  un§ 

<5ie  getrauen  ftd)  or  ib,r  getraut  cud) 

fie  getrauen  ftd) 


The  reflective  pronoun  in  the  Dative  is  of  course  also  required  by 

those  verbs  used  reflectively,  which  have  their  object  in  the  Dative ;  as, 

3d)  Ijelfe  bcm  SKannc.    I  help  the  man.    3d)  Ijelfe  ntir.    J  help 


(*)  ©idj  torfteHen,  to   introduce  oneself,  has  the  reflective  pronoun  in  the 
Accusative. 


159 


tho  accusation,  bie3lnlloge  i 
against,  gegen  (Ace.) 
to  allow,  to  permit,    et» 
IcutBen  (Dat.) 
„  be    ashamed    of,     ftdj  i 
fdjamen  itBer  (Acc.(*)  i 
,,  behave,    fid)   Betragen  ! 
irr. 
,,  complain  of,   fid)   6e=  ' 
flagen  iiBer  (Acc.(*)    i 

to  defend,  fcerrfjeibtgeit 
entirely,  gan§ltdj 
to  explain,  etflciren 
„  imagine,  to  fancy,  fid) 
(Dat.)  etnBilben 
,,  make  haste,  fid)  Beeiten 
„  make  up  one's  mind, 
fid)  entfdjlte&en  irr. 
,,    mistrust,    mifetrauen 
(Dat.) 

to  refuse,   to   be   unwil- 
ling, fid)  foetcjern 
„  rely,   to    depend   on, 
irr.  fid)  berlaffeit  oitf 
(Aec.(*) 
„  remember,  ftdj  erinneni 
(Gen.) 
unjust,  itngeredjt 
the  volume,  ber  93onb 

Exercise  No.  34. 

1.  I  am  washing  myself, — thou  warmest  thyself, — he  offers  him- 
self,— we  rescue  ourselves, — you  forget  yourself, — they  blame  them- 
selves,— I  endeavoured, — thou  wast  mistaken, — she  remembered, — we 
made  haste, — you  behaved  (betrageri), — they  were  ashamed, — I  have 
procured, — thou  flatteredst  thyself, — I  shall  imagine, — thou  procurest, 
— I  allow  myself, — didst  thou  mistrust  thyself? — sit  (you)  down ! — have 
they  made  up  their  mind? — we  shall  complain, — I  introduced  myself, 
— he  has  excused  himself, — let  us  refuse  (be  unwilling) ! — do  (thou)  not 
rely  on  it, — they  had  defended  themselves, — I  have  hurt  myself, — many 
revolted, — can  you  accustom  yourself  to  it? 

2.  8dj  fjabe  mid)  bemuljt,  e3   tfjm   gu   erflaren.     @r  nutjjte 
fidj  gegen  brei  $einbe  rjertfjetbtgen.      %tf)  bcfinbe  mid)   fjeute   triel 
(far)  buffer  al§  geftern.     28ir  miiffen  un8  beeilen,  ober  toir  merben 
gu  fpat  fommen  (be),     ^d)  erinnere  mid)  ber  SRujtf,   fie   ift   ton 
(by)  SBeber.      @ie  fjaben  fid)  in  biefent  9Jlanne  geirrt.      2Bie  be* 
trugen  fid)  bie  ^inber  geftern  5lbenb?     @ie  fottten  fid)  iiber  ^^r 
S3etragen  fd)dnten.      @^  ift  tpafyr,  @ic  !onnen    (may)   fid)   barauf 
berlaffen.     %d)  mi^traute  mir  gdngtidj.      £onnen   ©te   fid^   ntdjt 
ben  gnieiten  S3anb  biefe^   S3ud)e^   t>erfd)affen?     Wltin   SSater  ^at 
fid)  nun  entfdjloffen,  ba^  §au§  imb  ben  (Sarten  §u  faufcn.      2>u 
bilbeft  bir  ein,  mid)  gefeljen  gu  fjoben. 

I  have  defended  myself  against  this  unjust  accusation.  I  imagined 
that  I  could  (Subj.)  do  it.  How  are  you  to-day?  I  made  haste  to  tell 
(Dat.)  him  that  his  ship  had&  (pres.  subj.}  arrived*  .  Remember  me. 
I  thought  (glaubte)  he  would  come,  but  I  was  mistaken.  Have  you 
not  been  mistaken?  He  allowed  himself  too  much  [liberty].  Be 
ashamed.  Why  do  you  not  rely  on  me  ?  You  must  make  up  your 
mind,  or  it  will  be  too  late.  I  have  endeavoured  to  do  it.  We  have 
made  up  our  mind  to  depart.  Why  have  the  soldiers  revolted?  You 
must  not  complain  of  the  weather.  We  shall  refuse  to  receive  them. 
I  flattered  myself  to  be  more  clever  than  you.  You  have  not  behaved 
(betrageri)  like  (wie)  a  gentleman.  Why  did  you  not  introduce  yourself 
to  (Dat. )  the  lady  ?  Remember  those  who  do  (Dat. )  thee  good  (Gutes). 
You  may  (Tconnen]  rely  on  me,  I  shall  help  (Dat.)  you. 

(*)  The  prepositions  ii&er  and  ouf  after  these  verbs  always  govern   the  Ac- 
cusative. 


160 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  When  is  a  verb  called  reflective  ? 

2.  "With  which  auxiliary  are  reflective  verbs  conjugated  ? 

3.  Are  there  verbs  which  are  reflective  in  German  and  not  in  English  f 

4.  How  can  many  verbs  be  used  reflectively? 

5.  Are  there  verbs  which  can  only  be  used  reflectively  ? 

6.  Why  can  they  not  be  used  without  reflective  pronouns  ? 

7.  In  what  case  does  the  reflective  pronoun  usually  stand  ? 

8.  In  what  other  case  is  the  reflective  pronoun  required  by  some  verbs  ? 

9.  After  what  verbs  must  the  reflective  pronoun  always  stand  in  the 
Dative  case? 


Conversation. 


Is  this  work  in  several  volumes  ? 

Yes,  it  is  in  three. 

Can  you  procure  me  the  second  ? 

I  shall  endeavour  to  get  it  for 

you. 
Why  do  you  refuse  to  pay  the 

bill? 
Because  theshopkeeper  hasbeen 

mistaken. 

Will  you  depart  to-day? 
I  have  not  yet  made  up  my  mind. 

We  must  make  haste  or  we 
shan't  catch  our  train. 

What  time  does  it  start? 

At  10  minutes  to  ten. 

We  have  no  time  to  lose  then 

(dann). 

You  ought  to  behave  better. 
I  hope  you  will  not  have   to 

complain  any  more  of  me. 

Why  do  you  mistrust  yourself? 
I  imagine  that  I  am  not  enough 

prepared  yet. 
Will  you  not  sit  down? 
No,  thanks ;  I  prefer  not  to  sit. 

Do  you  still  remember  the 
rules  I  explained  to  (Dat.) 
you  yesterday  ? 

Yes,  quite  well 


|>at  bicfe3  SSer!  mefjrere  SSanbe? 
£50,  e3  fyat  bret. 
£onnen   @te  mir  ben 

tierfdjaffen  ? 
3d)   tuerbe  mid)   bemiif)en,  if)n 

fur  @ie  §u  erfjalten. 
SSarum  roetgern  ©te   fid),    bie 

9?ed)nung  511  be§af)Ien? 
2Betl   ber  tfaufmann   fid)  getrrt 


SBoflen  @te  fjeiite  abreifen? 
3d)  fjabe  mid)   nod)  nitf)t  ent* 

fdjfoffen. 
2Bir  miifjen  un§   beetlen,  ober 

ttrir   toerben  nid)t  [me^r]  auf 

ben  3U9  fommen. 
Um  mie  met  llljr  ge^t  er  ab? 
Um  se^n  3Kinuten  oor  ge^n. 
2Bir  ^aben  bann  feine  &it  gu 

berlieren. 

©te  foUten  ftd^  beffer  betragen. 
^d)  ^offe,  @ie  tuerben  ftd^  nic^t 

me|r  iiber  mid)  gu  beflagen 

^aben. 

SBarum  mifjtrauen  @ie  fid)? 
%3)  bilbe  mir  etn, 

ntd)t  genug  oorbereitet  bin. 
SSoIlen  6ie  fid)  nid)t  fe^en? 
9Zein,  banfe  ;  id)  5te 

§u  ft^en. 
©rinnern    @te    fid) 

SRegeln,  bie  id) 

erflarte? 
Sa,  gang  gut. 


oor  nid)t 

nod)    ber 
geftern 


161 

Reading  (torctse  Jlo.  34. 
Ser 


©in  Sfteifenber2  ,  ber  beinalje3  bie  ganje  SBeft4 
teift5  I)atte>  erga^Ite6  nnter  5lnberem  in  einer  (8efe0> 
fcijaft7  : — gdO  toeif}  ttic^t  meljr  genan8  ,  too  e§  toar;  aber 
i4  glanbe,  e§  mar  in  ^erfien9  ,  too  id)  einen  ftofKopfU 
Don  foldf)  fabettjafter*1  (SJroge12  faf),  bag  @ie  fid^  eine 
ric^tige13  SSorftettung14  baoon  erft1^  bann16  madden  fonnen, 
toenn  id§  3§nen  fage,  bag  tcfj  felbft  gefe^en  ^abe,  toie  ein 
Regiment  Sfteiterei17  unter  einem  SSIatte  @d§lt)enlungen18 
ma^te.  ®abei19  regnete20  e§  fe^r  ftar|2i-  boc§22  tourbe 
•fttemcmb  na§. — Stner  t)on  ber  @efeflfdjaft7  Bef^tog,  ben 
Siigner23  in  feiner  eigenen24  3JJiln§e25  §u  & egafjten  unb 
fagte: — 55a§  toar  freilt^2^  ein  fe^r  grower  ®of)l!o|)fio ; 
bod^  geBe27  td^  §n,  bafj  e§  augergetDo^nlid^e28  ©ad^en  auf 
ber  SSelt4  gtebt29.  5lud^  id^  lann  &on  einer  folc^en  cr= 
§cifjlen.  5luf  nteinen  bieten  9leifen30  lam  id^  anc^  nac^ 
3apan,  Sort  fjaBe  ic^  gefe^en,  toie  ein  ^effel1  con  gleid^= 
fatl§3i  faoelfjafterii  ©rogei2  anf  einer  grogen  (£bene32  an- 
gefertigt33  tonrbe.  5ln  bemfetben  arbeiteten  ^nnbert  ^it^jfer* 
fd^miebe34;  fie  ttmren  jeboc^35  fo  toeit36  t)on  einanber  ent^ 
fernt37,  ba§  leiner  bie  Ijammerfdfjtage38  be§  anbern  Ijoren 
fonnte.  ^onnen  @ie  fid^  borftetten39,  toie  grojs  biefer  ^effeli 
ttmr? — SDer  Siigner23  toar  betroffen4(>  nnb  fagte:— ^}'a^ 
mng  ein  fefjr  grower  ^effel1  getoefen  fein;  aber  fagen 
@ie  aud^,  too^n  er  gebraud^t41  tuerben  foUte. — %tf)  tt)ei§ 
ba§  nid^t  rec^t42,  ertoieberte43  ber  5tnbere;  boc§  gtaube  id(), 
bag  man  ben  ^o^lfo^f10  barin  foifjen44  tooffte,  ben  @te 
in  $($erfien9  gefefjen  §aben* 

1  kettle,  2  traveller,  3  nearly,  4  world,  5  to  travel  over,. 
durchreisen,  6  to  relate,  erztihlen,  7  society,  8  exactly,  9  Persia, 
10  cabbage  head,  11  fabulous,  12  seize,  13  correct,  14  idea,  15  only, 
16  then,  17  cavalry,  18  evolutions,  19  at  the  same  time,  20  to- 
rain,  regnen,  21  fast,  22  yet,  23  liar,  24  own,  25  coin,  26  in- 
deed, 27  to  permit,  zugeben  (irr.),  28  extraordinary,  29  there  are, 
es  giebt,  30  journeys,  31  likewise,  32  plain,  33  to  make,  to  finish, 
vnfertigen,  34  coppersmiths,  35  however,  36  far,  37  distant, 
away,  38  strokes  of  the  hammer,  39  to  imagine,  sick  vai'stcllen,. 
40  struck,  41  to  use,  brauchen,  42  exactly,  43  to  reply,  &rwiedernf 
44  to  cook,  kochen. 

German  Grammar.  6 


162 


Thirty-fifth  Lesson. 


Sfiinfunbbreifjtgfte  Seftioiu 


IV.    The    INTRANSITIVE    VERBS. 

Intransitive  Verbs  are  those  which  convey  a  full  idea  without 
squiring  an  object,  or  of  which  the  object  is  not  in  the  Accus- 
ative case ;  as, 

fdjlofen,  to  sleep;  geljen,  to  walk;  Ijelfen  (Dat.)  to  help 

They  cannot  have  a  passive  voice,  and  form  their  perfect 
tenses  with  the  auxiliary  fetn  (see  list  of  verbs  page  22),  but  very 
often  also  with  Ijaben.  Viz  : 

All  intransitive  verbs  signifying  change  of  place  or  of  condition 
of  the  subject  are  conjugated  with  fetn.  Such  are  : 

oufftefjen  irr.,  to  get  up 
fake 


aufttmdjen,  to  aws 

begegnen  (Dat.X*),  to  meet 

eilen,  to  hasten 

clnfdjlafen  irr.,  to  fall  asleep 

erfdjeinen  irr.,  to  appear 

ertrinfen  irr.,  to  be  drowned,  to  drown 

fafiren  irr.,  to  drive 

fallen  irr.,  to  fall 

fliegen  irr.,  to  fly 

flieljen  irr.,  to  flee 

folgen  (Dat.),  to  follow 

gefjen  irr.,  to  walk,  to  go 

genejen  irr.,  to  recover 


gefdjeljen  irr.,  to  happen 
tommen  irr.,  to  come 
lonben,  to  land 
laufen  irr.,  to  run 
reiien,  to  travel 
retten  irr.,  to  ride 
fdjletdjen  irr.,  to  sneak 
fdjtmmnten  irr.,  to  swim 
finfen  irr.,  to  sink 
[terben  irr.,  to  die 
fteigen  irr.,  to  mount 
ftiir$en  irr.,  to  rush,  to  fall 
tieridjtmnben  irr.,  to  disappear 
toadjien  irr.,  to  grow,  &c.  &c. 


NOTE. — Nearly  all  of  these  verbs  compounded  with  prefixes  are 
conjugated  with  fetn,  when  they  have  an  intransitive  meaning ;  as, 
<juf  geljen  irr.,  to  rise  (the  sun  etc.)      I   abreifen,  to  set  out 
anfommen  irr.,  to  arrive  I   entgefjen  irr.,  to  escape 

@i£en  irr.,  to  sit;  fteljen  irr.,  to  stand;  Itegen  irr.,  to  lie; 
bleiben  irr.,  to  remain,  to  stay,  are  likewise  conjugated  with  fetn 
(the  first  three  also  sometimes  with  Ijaben). 

The  other  intransitive  verbs  not  following  the  above  rule,  are 
conjugated  with  Ijabcn.  Such  are  : 


Qiuroorten,  to  answer 
arbeiten,  to  work 
Bluten,  to  bleed 
b,ordjen,  to  listen 
ladien,  to  laugh 
ieben,  to  live 
fefen  irr.,  to  read 
pfeifen  irr.,  to  whistle 
culjen,  to  rest 


fdjetnen  irr.,  to  shine 
fdjfofen  irr.,  to  sleep 
fdjreien  irr.,  to  scream 
fdiroetgen  irr.,  to  be  silent 
fin  gen  irr.,  to  sing 
fpredjen  irr.,  to  speak 
toadjen,  to  be  awake 
tueinen,  to  weep,  to  cry 
tooljnen,  to  reside,  &c.  &«. 


Some  of  these  verbs  may  also  be  used  transitively. 


<*)  93egeflnen  may  also  be  conjugated  with  Ijaben  and  has  then  the  ot>jc>ct 
in  the  Accusative. 


163 


to  answer,  ottttoorten 
,,  be  awake,  ttadjen 
,,  be  drowned,  *er= 

trinfen,  irr. 

„    be  wrecked,  *f#eitern 
the  boat,  bo§  93oot 
the  disease,   illness,    bie 
flranffiett 


the    evening-party,     tie 
SlBenbgefeHfdjaft 
far,  toett 
to  follow,  *folgen  (Dat.) 
„  grow,  *ttw<f)ien,  irr. 
,,  hasten,  *etlen 
last,  lefct  adj. 

to  listen,  Ijordjen 
to  recover  (from  illness), 
*genefen  irr. 
the  rock,  ber  gelfe* 
to  sink,  *fmfen,  irr. 
the  speech,  bie  glebe 
„    storm,  ber  Sturm 

Exercise  No.  35. 

1.  He  has  hastened  home. — Has  somebody  been  drowned? — They 
will  not6  have**  arrived0  yet*  . — I  should  have  come,  if  I  had  (Subj.) 
known  it. — The  boat  has  sunk. — Has  your  sister  recovered  now? — We 
have  swum  very  far. — During  the  last  storm  five  ships6  have  been0 
wrecked.  —  Where  have  you  been  sitting  that  I  could  not  see  you  ? 
— How  long  did  you  stay  (translate :  have  you  been  staying)  yesterday 
at  { in)  the  evening-party  ?  —  I  shall  have  got  up  by  the  time  (wenn) 
you  depart. — Why  have  you  not  answered? — I  have  helped  (Dat.) 
them. — They  were  (translate:  have  been)  awake  during  the  thunder- 
storm.— Somebody  has  been  listening  at  the  door. — How  these  trees 
have  grown  ! — Have  you  slept  well  ? — Have  they  fallen  asleep  ? — Have 
you  heard  who  has  been6  singing*  ? — We  have  been  standing  during 
his  speech. 

2.  SBofitn  (where)  tft  ^fcr  ©djttmger  gereift?     3d)  bin  Ijeute 
Styrem  greunbe  begegnet.     SSir  toaren  nod)  nidjt  toeit  gefatyren, 
al$  (when)  ber  (Sturm  anfing.      2lfle  feme  ®inber  ftnb   an   (of) 
berfelben  ffranfljeit  geftorben.    SBarum  ftnb  @ie  mir  nid^t  gefolgt? 
®ie  ©onne  toirb  untergegangen  fein,  e^e  (before)  ttnr  nac^  ^aitfe 
fontnten.    S)a§  @d)iff  tft  an  (on)  einem  ^elfen  gefd)eitert.    SBarunt 
ftnb  otte  Seute  an  (to)  ben  glu^  gelaufen?     Sn  njeldjem  SSagen 
ftnb  ©te  nacj)  ^>auje  gefaftren?     @ie  tt)iirben  fritfier  nad)  §aufe 
gefommen  fein,  ftjenn  @ie  ntd)t  fo  toett  geritten  toaren. 

Of  (an)  what  disease  has  your  sister-in-law  died  ?  My  father  has 
gone  out.  Your  cousin  has  ridden  to  (nach)  B.  What  have  you  been 
doing  ?  I  have  been  reading.  The  train  for  (nach)  L.  has  not&  start- 
edc  yet<*  .  The  bird  has  flown  over  (Ace.)  the  house.  All  the  sailors 
have  been  drowned.  Have  you  been  whistling?  They  had  already 
arrived,  when  (als)  we  came6  to  (auf)  the  station*  .  Why  have  you 
not  gone  to  the  evening-party  ?  These  cherries  have  been  lying  under 
the  tree.  When  did  you  awake  (translate :  have  you  awaked)  this 
(heute)  morning?  Where  (wohin)  has  the  ball  fallen?  I  hope,  you 
will  soon  (bald)  have  recovered.  I  have  lived  several  years  in  this 
house.  We  were  (translate :  have  been)  awake  during  the  storm.  I 
have  been  working  a  very  long  time  (sehr  lange).  How  many  boats 
have  been  wrecked?  What  has  he  answered?  Have  you  come  alone ? 


164 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  What  intransitive  verbs  are  conjugated  with  sein? 

2.  When  are  such  verbs,  compounded  with  prefixes,  conjugated  with 
sein  ? 

3.  With  which  auxiliary  are  the  verbs  sitzen  (to  sit),  stehen  (to  stand), 
liegen  (to  lie),  bleiben  (to  remain,  to  stay)  conjugated  ? 

With  which  auxiliary  are  the  other  intransitive  verbs,  which  do  not 
follow  the  rule  mentioned,  conjugated? 


4. 


Conversation. 


Are  you  still  sleeping? 
No,  I  awoke  an  hour  ago. 

Why  have  you  not  got  up  yet? 

Because  it  is  too  ea.Tly[toT](Dat.) 

me. 

Why  are  so  many  people  run- 
ning to  (an)  the  river? 
A  man  was  drowned. 
Could  he  not  swim  ? 
He  had  nearly  swum  to  (an) 

the   shore,     when    (als)   he 

suddenly  sank. 
Has  your  'father  not  recovered 

yet  from  his  illness? 
No,  he  is  still  very  ill. 
Did  you  hear  the  storm  last 

(heute)  night? 
Yes,  I  was  not   asleep    before 

one  o'clock. 
Four  ships  are  said  (sollen)  to 

have  been  wrecked. 
Has  anyone  been  drowned? 
No,  all  the  people  have  been 

saved. 
The  train  for  (nach)  L .  will  have 

started,  beforefe^  we  arrive. 
No,  it  must  wrait  for  (auf)  our 

train. 
Do  you  think,  we  shall  arrive 

very  late  ? 
Yes,   we   shall  be  half  an  hour 

late. 
Why  did  you  stay  out  so  long  ? 

I  had  to  (musste)   stay  rather 
(ziemlich)  late  at  (im)  business. 


©djlafen  @ie  nod)? 

•ftein,  idj  bin  [fd)on]  uor  einer 

(Etunbe  aufgetoadjt. 
SBarum  ftnb  @ie  nod)  ntdjt  auf* 

geftanben  ? 
SSeil  e3  tntr  nod)  511  friif)  ift. 

SB  arum   laiifen  fo   triete   Seute 

an  ben  ^tuft? 
Sin  9ttann  ift  ertrunfen. 
£onnte  er  nidjt  fd)intmmen  1 
(£r  mar   beina^e   an^  lifer    ge= 

fdjinommen,    al§   er  :pI6£Iid) 

fanf. 
Sft  S^r  SSater  nodj   nid)t   oon 

feiner  £ran!^eit  genefen? 

in,  er  tft  nod)  fe&r  !ran!. 
6ie    fieute    -ftadjt    ben 

Sturm  geprt? 
Sa,  id)  bin  oor  em  U^r  ntdjt 

eingefdjlafen. 
S3ter    ©djiffe    foUen    gefdjeitert 

fein. 

Sft  S^ntanb  ertmnfen? 
9lein,    aHe  Seute   finb    gerettet 

ft  or  ben. 
Ser  ^9   nad)   2.   tt)trb    abge* 

gangenfein,  el)ett>iranfontnten. 
SJ^ein,    er  muB  auf  unfern  3uft 

marten, 
©lauben  @te,   tme  tuerben  fefjr 

fpat  anfomnten? 
So,    tntr    loerben    eine    ^atbe 

©tunbe  SBerfpdtung  ^aben. 
25arum  finb  @ie  fo  lange  au^» 

geblieben  ? 
Sd)    mufete  siemtid)   lange   im 

©efdjaft  bleiben. 


165 

(Erercisc  Ho.  35. 


ie  Slfcridjttttta,1    toon 

G£in  ®aufmann  in  Sonbon  lam  bnrcf)  gufatt2  in  ben 
$8efi|3  etne§  §unbe§,  meldjer  fritter4  einent  S)iebe5  gef)5rt 
Ijatte  nnb  toon  bemfelben  §nm  Steven6  abgericfjtet7  morben 
mar.  O^ne  Don  ber  ®efd)icfli(f)leit8  be§  §nnbe§  etma§  §u 
a^nen9 ,  lam  biefer  eine§  £age§  in  feine§  neuen  §errn 
(£omptoir10  gelanfen  nnb  legte  i^m  bie  SSorberBetne11  onf  ben 
(Schools12.  Ser  ^aufmann  fcemerfte,  ba§  er  ein  ^atfet 
in  ber  @<ijnan§e13  tjtelt,  na^m  eg  i^m  ab  nnb  fanb,  ba§ 
e§  eine  9totteu  ®etb  mar.  @r  lonnte  ntc^t  Begreifen,  rtne 
ber  §unb  ba§n  gefommen  fei  j  jeboc^15  betjtett  er  bte 
fc^rieb  ben  Xag,  an  toeldjem  ber  §nnb  fie  gebrac^t 
ouf  biefelbe  nnb  tegte  fie  bei  Seite16. 

3n  ber  Solge17  mac^te  e§  ber  §nnb  noc^  tjerfd^iebene18 
SJlate  fo,  nnb  fetn  §err  ijob19  ba§  ($elb  mit  ber  ncimlii^en 
aiif .     (Snbii^21  pet  i^tn  ein22,  ber  §nnb  miiffe  ba§ 

bei  einem  feiner  ^reunbe  fte^len,  ber  ebenfafts23  ein 
^anfmann  mar,  nnb  ben  er  oft  befudjte,  toobei24  er  ge= 
ttJo^nlic^)  ben  §nnb  mitna^m25.  (S^e26  er  aber  nrieber27 
gn  feinent  greunbe  ge!jen  nnb  ifjm  feinen  3lrgtt>o!)n28  mit= 
%iten29  lonnte,  lam  biefer  felbft  §n  i^m  nnb  er^ci^Ite, 
er  merbe  feit  einiger  &it  oft  beftofjlen30  nnb  miffe  nid^t, 
mie  e§  snge^e31,  ba  fein  ©elblaften32  nnbef^abigt33  bteibe, 
nnb  anger34  i^m  Sftemanb  in  ba§  Dimmer  lomme.  £>er 
(Sinjige35,  ben  er  im  SSerbac^t36  ^aben  lonne,  fei  ber  £nnb, 
ber  bann37  nnb  mann38  in  feinent  §aufe  fic!^  anftjalte39; 
aber  e§  fc^eine  i^m  nnglanblid^40,  bafc  ein  §nnb  ©etb  meg= 
neijmen41  fottte.  (6d)iuB  folgt.) 

1  teaching,  2  chance,  3  possession,  4  formerly,  5  thief, 
6  stealing,  7  to  teach,  to  train  up,  abrichten,  8  ability,  9  to  perceive, 
to  anticipate,  ahnen,  10  office,  (Pronounce:  Kon-tor,)  11  fore-feet, 
12  lap,  13  snout,  14  roll,  15  however,  16  aside,  17  subsequently, 
18  various,  19  to  lay  away  (to  pick  up),  zufheben  (irr. ),  20  precaution, 
21  finally,  22  he  remembered,  23  likewise,  24  whereby,  25  to  take 
with  (one),  -miinehmen  (irr.),  26  before,  27  again,  28  suspicion, 
29  to  communicate,  mittheilen,  30  to  rob,  bestehlen  (irr. ),  31  happened, 
32  money-box,  33  uninjured,  34  besides,  35  only  one,  36  to  suspect, 
im  Verdacht  haben,  37 — 38  now  and  then,  39  to  stay,  sich  aufhalten 
(irr),  40  incredible,  41  to  take  away,  vregnchmen  (irr.). 


166 


Thirty-sixth  Lesson. 


©edjSunbbretfiigfte  Seftiotu 


V.    The    IMPERSONAL    VERBS. 

Impersonal  Verbs  are  used  only  in  the  3rd  person  singular 
(e§).  They  are  conjugated  with  the  auxiliary  Ijaben  (see  list  of 
verbs  page'  26).  Such  verbs  are : 

Infinitive.  Present. 

btifcen,  to  lighten,      e§  blt&t 
bonnern,  to  thunder,    e§  bonnert 


Infinitive. 
regnen,  to  rain, 
reifen,  to  be  a  hoar-) 
frost,                        } 
fdjneten,  to  snow, 
tag  en,  to  dawn, 
tfjauen,  to  thaw, 
ttetterleudjten,  to  be  \ 
sheet-lightning,        ) 

Prevnt. 
e§  regnet 
e§  retfr 

e§  fdmett 
e§  tagt 
e§  tfcaut 
e»  roetter= 
leudjtet 

Mn     tn  KA  J"  e§   if*'   there  k 

leSfmb,  there  are 
gefrieren  irr.to  freeze,  e*  gefriert 
bagein,  to  hail,  e§  Ijagelt 

Remarks. 

There  is,  there  are,  are  translated  e»  giebt  (there  was,  were,  e3 
gab,  etc.),  when  they  express  the  indefinite  existence  of  a  following 
noun  or  pronoun^ ;  as, 

@i  gtebt  triele  ©efdjtrfjten,  bie  nicSt  tpa^r  ftnb.  There  are  many 
stories  which  are  not  true.  ©§  gab  fritter  eine  gewiffe  6orte  gti'dje 
tm  5D?eere,  bie  je^t  beridjrounben  ift.  There  was  formerly  a  certain 
species  of  fish  in  the  sea  which  has  now  disappeared.  ®egen  ben 
Sob  gtebt  e§  fetn  SKittel.  Against  death  there  is  no  remedy. 

There  is  is  translated  e3  ift,  and  there  are,  e§  finb  (tliere  was, 
e3  luar;  there  were,  e3  luoren,  etc.),  when  they  express  the  definite 
existence  of  a  following  noun  or  pronoun(*)  (mostly  in  a  small 
place,  distinctly  pointed  out) ;  as, 


©5  ift  etn  $err  tm  3imwcr.  There  is  a  gentleman  in  the  room. 
S-:-  nmren  SSuc^er  auf  bem  5Ctl"(^e.  There  were  books  on  the  table. 
C£c  roaren  t)iele  ftinber  tra  ®arten.  There  were  many  children  in  the 
garden. 

Note.— G-?  (there)  in  e§  ift,  c§  toot,  etc.  (bnt  not  in  e§  gteBt,  etc.)  must 
be  omitted,  if  it  cannot  commence  the  sentence  in  German  and  should  be 
placed  after  the  verb  (i.e.  in  the  interrogative  and  inverted  form);  as, 

23ar  etn  §err  tm  3imnter?  Was  there  a  gentleman  in  the  room? 
Sluf  biefem  2t)'d)e  fmb  teine  93uc^er.  On  this  table  there  are  no  books. 

Many  other  verbs  may  be  used  impersonally,  sometimes  go- 
verning a  case ;  as, 


e§  fdjeint,  it  seems,  it  appears 

e§  berrifft,  it  concerns 

e§  genugt,  it  suffices 

e§  bebarf,  it  needs 

e§  ift  (tb,ut)  mtr  letb,  I  am  sorry 

e§  freitt  micfi,  I  am  glad 

e§  friert  mtoi,(**)  I  am  (feel)  cold 

e§  ift  mtr  BKtt«,(**)  I  am  (feel) 


e3  ifi  mtr  ropb,!,  1  feel  well 

e§  geltngt  mtr,  I  succeed 

e§  tierfteijt  ftc^,  it  is  a  matter  of  course 

e§  lommt  mtr  oor,  it  seems  to  me 

c§  ift  mtr  rec^t,  I  agree  to  it 

tote  gefyt  e§  3b,nen?  how  do  you   do, 

how  are  you  i 
c§  gefjt  mtr  gut,  I  am  well 


(*)  6§  gtebt  e§  gab,  eto.  require  the  following  noun   or  pronoun  in  the 

Accusative,  whilst  e3  ift,  e§  finb,  etc.  require  it  in  the  Nominative. 
(**)  Instead  of  e§  friert  mid)  also  id)  Ijabe  fait,  id)  friere,  and  instead  of  e§ 
ift  mtr  ro arm  also  id)  Ijabe  warm  may  be  used,   but    the  above  forms 
-ire  preferred. 


tot 
I  am  cold,  eS  friert  (irr.)/  I   succeed,   e§(*)  gelingt 


I  am  glad,  e§  freut  mid) 
I  am  sorry,  e§  ift  mir  leib 
I  am  warm,  e§  ift  mir 

to  arm 
I  am  well,  c§(*)  ge^t  (irr.) 

mir  gut 
I  feel  well,  e§  ift  mir  rooljl 


I      (irr.)  mir 
'  close  (of  air),  fdjnml 
fast  (of  raining,  etc.),  ftarl 
to  freeze,  gefrieren  (imp. 

irr.) 

,,  happen,  *gefd)eljen  irr. 
how  do  you  do  >  roie  geftt 
how  are  you  |e§;3Ijnen? 


to  lighten.  Bttfcen  (imp.) 
the  lightning,  ber  93Ii£ 
the  rain,  ber  iRegen 
to  rain,  regnen  (imp.) 
„  snow,  fdjneien  (imp.) 
„  thaw,  tfjauen  (imp.) 
the  thunder,  ber  5)onner 
to  thunder,  bonnern 


Exercise  No.  36. 

1.  It  is  snowing.— Did  it  lighten  ? — No,  it  thundered  only. — Will 
it  freeze  to-night  (heute  Nacht)? — It  has  been  raining. — There  was  no 
family,  which  was  as  (so)  happy  as  (als)  yours. — There  is  nothing  more 
detestable  (nichts  Verdchtlicheres)  than  avarice. — There  are  good  and 
bad  men  (Menschen). — There  will  never  again  (nie  wieder)  be  such& 
aa  poet. — There  is  a  bird  in  the  room. — There  are  some  girls  in  your 
house. — There  was  nobody  in  (auf)  the  whole  street.      There  were 
many  soldiers  in  the  fortress. — There  has  been  a  large  fire  in  the  town. 
— Is  there  a  book  on  the  table? — It  is  too  warm. — What  has  happened  ? 
— I  am  sorry. — Are  you  glad? — It  is  hot. — It  snows  very  fast. — Were 
you  warm? — How  do  you  do? — I  am  well. — He  does  not  feel  well. — I 
shall  succeed. — To-morrow  it  will  thaw. — I  was  cold. — It  is  too  early. 
— It  has  grown  (werden)  dark. — Did  it  snow? — It  lightens. — It  is  close. 
— Were  you  sorry  ? — It  happened. — We  have  been  glad. — Was  it  rain- 
ing fast? — It  has  been  thundering. — You  will  be  cold. — They  succeeded. 

2.  ©tauBen  @te,  bafj  eg  morgett   frfjneten   totrb?     Stein,   eg 
ift  511  roarm.     $at  eg  geblifct?    3a,  id)  fcafce  ben  SSIifc  gefeljen. 
fe  toiirbe  mid)  fretten,  roenn  ber  9tegen   aufprte  (would  cease). 
(£g  regnet;  bitte  (please),  geben  @ic  mir  etnett  9tegetifdjtrm.     @3 
gtebt  nur  emeu  ©tjafeSpeare.    ©3  bomtert;  fonnen  ©te  ben  ®on> 
ner  pren?      @^  ift  fefcr    fd)tDut  in  biefem  3tmmer.       3^^ 
@ic  S^en  SDlontel  an,  ober  eg  njtrb  @ie  frieren.    3$  woltte  bo§ 
5pferb  lanfen,  aber  eg  gelang  mir  nidjt. 

It  has  been  thundering  and  lightening  the  whole  night.  Yester- 
day it  rained ;  to-day  it  snows.  It  has  been  freezing  to-night  (heute 
Nacht).  I  am  glad  to  see  you.  It  is  very  close;  we  shall  have  (bekom- 
men)  a  thunderstorm.  Are  you  warm  ?  We  must  make  haste,  it  will 
rain  very  fast.  There  were  four  cigars  on  the  table.  It  happened, 
when  ( als)  I  was&  ilia  .  I  am  sorry  to  hear  it.  It  will  thaw  this 
(heute)  afternoon.  There  is  no  wine  in  the  bottle.  Do  you  feel  well 
now  ?  There  are  people,  who  talk6  (sprechen)  much*  and  think&  little0  . 

(*)  Such  impersonal  verbs  have  e§  for  the  subject  in  German  and  their  ob- 
ject, being  the  same  person  as  the  subject  in  English,  must  stand  either 
in  the  Accusative  or  Dative  case;  as, 

thou  wast  cold,  eS  fror  bid);  ho  has  been  cold,  cS  Ijot  iljn  ge- 
froreit;  the  children  were  warm,  eS  ftjar  ben  ®inbern  warm;  are  you 
warm?  ift  e8 


168 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  In  which  person  only  are  Impersonal  verbs  used  ? 

2.  With  which  auxiliary  are  they  conjugated? 

3.  When  are  there  is,  there  are  etc.  translated  by  esgiebt  etc? 

4.  When  is  there  is  translated  by  es  ist  and  there  are  by  es  sind  etc.  ? 

5.  When  is  es  (there)  in  es  ist,  es  war  etc.  to  be  omitted  ? 

Conversation. 

How  do  you  do? 

Thanks,  I  am  well;  and  how 

are  you  to-day? 
I  don't  feel  quite  well. 
I  am  sorry  for  it. 
Did  it  rain  last  (heute)  night? 
No,  it  has  been  freezing   and 

snowing. 

It  is  very  close  to-day. 
Yes,  I  think  we  shall  have  (be- 

kommen)  a  thunder-storm. 
It  just  commences  to  lighten. 
And  now  it  is  thundering. 
How  is  the  weather  to-day  ? 
It  is  raining  very  fast 
Are  you  obliged  to  go  out? 
No,  I  shall  stay  at  home. 
Do  you  feel  cold? 
No,  I  am  warm. 
Do  you  think  you  can  let  your 

house  ? 

I  think  I  shall  succeed. 
What  is  the  newsl 
There  is  no  news. 
What  is  the  matter  1 
Nothing  is  the  matter. 
What  has  happened  ? 
Somebody  has  been  drowned. 
Who  was  it? 
I  don't  know. 

Is  there  any  ink  in  the  inkstand  ? 
Yes,  there  is  some  (in  it). 
Is  it  time  to  go  ? 
No,  it  is  still  too  early. 
I  am  glad  to  see  you. 
So  am  I. 
Can  you  spare  me  a  little  time  to 

accompany  me? 
No,  I  am  very  sorry ;  I  must  go 

home  now. 


2Bte  geljt  eg 

SJanfe,   eg   ge&t   mtr  gut;  unb 

rote  ge&t  eg  3&.nen  jjeute? 
eg  ift  mtr  nicfit  gana  roofil. 
ift  mtr  letb. 

eg  fceute  -ftadfjt  geregnet? 
,    eg   bat  gefroren  wtb  ge* 
fcfinett. 

(5g  ift  beute  febr  fc&roiil. 
3a,  id)  glaube,  ttrir  roerben  ein 

©eroitter  befommen. 
eg  fangt  eben  an  511  bitten. 
Unb  je$t  bonnert  eg. 
2£ag  f iir  SSctter  Ijaben  rotr  fieute  ? 
(£g  regnet  feBr  ftarf. 
9Mffen  6ie  augge^en? 
9?etn,  id)  roerbe  511  |>aufe  bletben 
griert  eg  @ie? 
3lein,  eg  ift  mir  roarm. 
©lauben  Ste,   @te  fonnen 

§aug  Dermtetfien  ? 
^sd)  glaube,  eg  nrirb  mtr  gelin 
SSag  gtebt  eg  9Zeueg? 
(£g  gtebt  ntcbtg  91eueg. 
2Bag  gtebt  eg? 
©g  gtebt  ntcfjtg. 
SSas  ift  gefc&efien? 
Semanb  ift  ertrunfen. 
SSer  roar  eg? 
3d)  roetfe  [eg]  ntcfct. 
3ft  Stnte  tm  Sintenfa^ 
a,  eg  ift  bar  in. 
ft  eg  Beit  gu  gefcen? 

eg  ift  norf)  gu 
freut  mtd^,  ©ie  gu  feijen. 
d)  ebenfallg. 

6ie  ein  roenig  fttit, 
begletten? 

,  eg  ift  mtr  febr  letb ;  ic 
jefct  nac^  ^aufe  geben. 


169 

<Emd0e  Mo.  36. 
Slfcridjtwtg  toon  $mtbett» 


nun,  —  fagte   ber  5lnbere,  —  man  !ann  nidjt 
ttriffen:  mandjer§nnb  tft  feljr  gefdn'cft     $eben  @ia  bod)2 
einmal  genaner  5(c§t3  ,   toenn  mein  §nnb  tmeber  bet  3$net1 
ift!  —  ^Better4  fagte  er  §n  feinem  grennbe  je&t  nidjt§. 

3)er  §wtb  fanb5  fidj  balb  ftneber  bet  bem  ®anfmann 
etn,  ttmrtete  t)or  ber  X^itre  be§  (£omptotr§  bi§  biefe  auf= 
ging6  unb  legte  fic^  bann,  tt)ie  er  tmmer  §u  t^un 
an  ben  ®amin8  .  S)er  ^aufmann  offnete  balb 
fetnen  ©elbfaften10,  na^m11  etnige  Gotten  f)eran§  nnb 
legte  fie  auf  etnen  Xtfc^;  bann  fefete  er  fid)  ftrieber  an 
fetnen  @^reibttf(|12  nnb  'arbettete,  boc§13  fo,  bag  er  in 
etnem  t)or  t^m  Ijangenben14  (Spiegel  genan15  nterlte16,  ft)a§ 
ber  |jnnb  tjorna^m1^.  —  liefer  lag  nodfj  etne  SSetle18  rn^tg 
an  bem  ®amin8  ;  bann  aber  fdjftrf)  er  ftc|  gang  Keife19 
nad^  bem  Xtfc|e  ^tn,  naljm20  eine  9totte  meg  nnb  legte  fid) 
gang  ftitt21  toteber  an  fetnen  bortgen22  ^(a|23.  i)er 
2Rann  fteffte24  fi^,  al§  ^atte  er  ntdjtsbemerlt;  er 
bie  iibrtgen2^  Gotten  toteber  in  bie  ®ifte2?  nnb 
fie,  —  -fttdjt  lange  nac^^er9  !am29  ber  §nnb  t)on  bem 
^ert)or,  ging  an  bie  Simmertljiire  nnb  gab  bnrdj  S3ellen30 
nnb  ^ra^en31  §u  tierfte^en,  bag  er  §inau§32  tooHe.  @o** 
n)ie33  nnn  bie  Xljitre  anfgemad^t  tourbc,  lief  er  nadj  §aufe 
nnb  brad^te  bie  SRoUe  feinem  §errn, 

bie  beiben  $rennbe    nnn    n)teber  mit  einanber 
ber  S3efto^lene36  natiirlid)3?  fein@elb  §nriid, 


1  why,  2  just,  3  to  pay  attention,  Acht  geben,  4  more,  5  to 
appear,  sick  emfinden  (in.),  6  opened,  7  to  use,  pflegen,  8  chimney, 
9  afterwards,  10  money-box,  11  to  take  out,  heraus?ie^me7i  (irr.), 
12  writing-desk,  13  yet,  14  hanging,  15  exactly,  16  to  note,  mcrken, 
17  to  undertake,  vornehmen  (irr.),  18  while,  19  softly,  20  to  take 
away,  wegnehmen  (irr.  ),  21  calmly,  22  previous,  23  place,  24  to 
make  as  if,  sichstellen  als  (ob),  25  to  pack,  pacTcen,  26  left,  27  box, 
28  to  lock,  verschliessen  (irr.  ),  29  to  come  forward,  hervorkommen  (irr.  )t 
30  barking,  31  scratching,  32  to  go  out,  33  as  soon  as,  34  when, 
35  to  receive  back,  zuruckbekommen  (irr),  36  robbed  one,  37  of  course. 


German  Grammar  6* 


170 


Thirty-seventh  Lesson  A.       ©ieBemmbbreifctgfte  Sefttotu 
THE  ADVERBS. 

The  following  are  lists  for  reference  containing  the  greater  part  of 
German  Adverbs  and  Adverbial  expressions. 


1.    Adverbs  of  Place. 


"too?  where? 
•roofiin?   whither, 

(to)! 
•looker?   whence, 

(...from)? 
"Ijier,  here 
•Ijierljer,  hither,  here 


nten,  (there)  below] 


•fn'nunter1) 

(tjinofr)  (down, 
'IjeatnUrf     downstairs 

(b,erob)  / 
"born,    before,    in 

front 

"Ijinten,  behind 
oufmarts,  upwards 
obroarts,  downwards 
iborroarts,  forwards 


•Ijinuber,    over   (there), 

across 
•b,erttber,    over   (here). 


the 


•babin    \thithei,  there 

•  oortpxu  j     (...to) 

•  babcr    )  thence,   from 

•  bortljer  f     there 

"barin,  therein,  in  there  rurftoartS,  backwards 

•  oufjen,  outside  au?rodrt§,  outwards 

•  •  braufeen,  out  (there),  out  red)t§,  to  the  right,  on  the  mrgenbg,  nowhere 

of  doors  right  (hand  side)  iiberall,  everywhere 

ltnf§,  to  the  left,  on  the,  umber,  around,  about 

left  (hand  side)  ringsum  fljer),  all  round 

gerabeauS,  straight  on       runb  Ijenun,  round  about 


bancben,  close  by  (it\ 

near  by  (it) 
nebenan,  next  door 
"anberewo,   elsewhere, 

somewhere  else 

•  anberlttoljer  (or  Ijtn),  from 

(or  to)  elsewhere 
"irgenbwo,      somewhere, 
anywhere 

•  irgenbrooljer  (or  Ijin),  from 

(or  to)  somewhere 


"innen,  within,  inside 
"brinnen,  within  (there) 
•b,inein,  in  (there) 
*  ^erein,  in  (here) 
"oben,  above,  upstairs 
[broben,  (there)  above] 


auf  biefer  Settc,  bie§ieit§,  untertocg§,  on  the  way 


on  this  side  *narf) 

auf  bet  anbern  Sette,  jen= 

feit§,  on  the  other  side 
bruben,  on  that  side 


home 


etc. 


ete. 


unten,  below,  downstairs1  gegeniiber,  opposite 

2.    Adverbs  of  Time. 


roann?  when' 

Ijdufig,  frequently 

tmmer  (oDejett),  always 

lieute,  to-day 

metften§,  mostly 

auf  (or  fur)  tmmer,  for  ever 

geftern,  yesterday 

balb,  soon 

jemals,  je,  ever  (before^ 

morgen,  to-moiTOw 

mandimat  (jutoeilen,    bt§= 

me  (niemal§)  never 

iibermorgen,  the  day  after 

toetlen),  sometimes 

totebcr,  again 

to-morrow 

bann,  then 

nod),  still 

borgeftern,  the  day  before  bamal»,  at  that  tune,  then 

nod)  einmal,   once  again, 

yesterday                         bann  unb  toann,  now  and 

once  more 

friinbltdj,  hourly 

then 

nod)  nidjt,(*)  not  yet,  not 

tdglidj,  daily 

friiljer  (fonft,  e^ebem,  eb,e» 

...yet 

roodjentlidj,  weekly 

mat§,  bormalS),  formerly 

nod)    me,    never   before, 

monatltd),  monthly 

nadj^er    ^afterwards, 

never  yet 

ialjrlidj,  yearly 

(b,ernad))  )     after 

juerft,  first,  at  first 

je^t,  nun,  now 

border  (gubor),  before 

onfanga,  at  firet 

eben,  gerobe,  just 

einft  (etnftmoIS),  once 

jule§t,  last,  at  last 

eben  jefct,  just  now 

einmal,  once  upon  a  time, 

enbltd),  at  last,  at  length 

gegennjdrtig,  at  present         one  day 

bt§  je^t,  till  now,  as  yet 

aufienblirfltd),  instantly       neulidj,  the  other  day 

bt§b,er,  hitherto,  till  now 

plSgfid),  suddenly               furjlid),  lately,  of  late 

feitb,er,  smce  that  time 

gleid),  presently                   borKurjem)  a  little  while 
fogleidj,    fofort,    directly,  unldngft      f  ago,  not  long 
immediately                                              ago 

erft,  only,  not...tiU 
einftweilen      (unterbeffen), 
meanwhile 

nod)    unb   nadj,    aflmaltg,  tiinftig   (in  8ufunft)/  f°r 
by  degrees,  gradually        the  future 

Iang(e),  long,  a  long  t;uie 
gen)5f)nlid),  usually,   gen- 

oft (oftmalS),  often             fdjon    (berett?),     already, 

erally 

Selten,  seldom                         ever 

etc.          etc. 

(*)  »yet"  occurring  after  "not"  is  translated   nod)   nid)t,   and  these  can 

never  be  separated. 


171 


Adverbial  Expressions  of  Time. 


beg  SttorgenS,  2Jlorgen§,  in  the  morn- 
ing 

6,eute  friifj,  Ijeute  SKorgen,  this(*)  morn- 
ing 

motgen  frtil),  to-morrow  morning 
gefiern  frulj,  yesterday  in  the  morning 
be§  93ormtttag§,   23ormittag§,  in  the 

forenoon 

tyeute  SBormtttag,  this  day  before  noon 
9ftittag§,  um  SJHttag,  at  noon 
Ijeute  SJitttog,  to-day  at  noon 
be§  SJJadjmtttagg,  9tadjmittag§,  in  the 

afternoon 

Ijeute  Sftadjmtttag,  this(*)  afternoon 
be§  9Cbenb§,  2lbenb§,  in  the  evening 
Ijeute  Slbenb,  this(*)  evening,  to-night 
geftern  Slbenb,  yesterday  evening,  last 

night 
borgeftern   Sl&enb,   the   night  before 

yesterday 

be!  9lad)t§,  9ladjt§,  bei  Sftadjt,  by  night 
Ijeute  9ta$t,  to  night,  last  night  (the 

whole  night) 
Ijeut  ju  Sage,  nowadays 
bet  Sag,  am  Sag,  by  day 
etne§  Sage§,  one  day 
eine§  SlbenbS,  one  evening,  etc. 
im  Saljre,  in  the  year 
tm  ©emitter,  in  summer,  etc. 
im  Sanuor,  in  January,  etc. 
am  erften  £yanuar,    on   the   first   of 

January,  etc. 
am  ©onntag,  on  Sunday,  etc. 


6onntag§,  on  Sundays,  etc. 
itm  ein  Uljr,  at  one  o'clock,  etc. 
gegen  ein  Uljr,  about  one  o'clock,  etc. 
bt§  ein  Uljr,  by  one  o'clock,  etc. 
tjor  ac^t  SCagen,  a  week  ago 
bor  triersefyn  5Eagen,  a  fortnight  ago 
in  adjt  Sag  en,  in  a  week,  etc. 
Ijettte  iiber  Ad^t  Sage,  this  day  week 

(hence),  etc. 
Ijeute  tior  adjt  Sagen,  this  day  week 

(back),  etc. 

nodjfter  Sage,  one  of  these  days 
erft  motgen,  not  till  to-morrow,  etc. 
bier  Sage  lang,  for  four  days,  etc. 
feit  brei  Sagen  (28od)en,   etc.),  these 

three  days  (weeks,  etc.) 


ben  gangen  Sag,  all  day 
Sag  fur  Sag,  day  by  day,  etc. 
Sttjetmol   be§   Sage§   (bie   SBodje,   beS 
9Jlonat§,  be§  SafjreS),  twice  a  day, 
(a  week,  a  month,  a  year) 


jum  erften  9Kal  (sum  erftenmat),  for 

the  first  time,  etc. 
auf§  nacfjfte  Sliat,  for  the  next  time 
jum  te^ten  9)lal,  for  the  last  time 
jur  3eit/  in  the  time 
I6i§  jetjt  nodj  nidjt,  not  as  yet 
ouf  einige  Qtit,  for  a  while 
cine  fteit  lang,  for  a  time  ;  etc.  etc. 


3.    Adverbs  of  Quality  and  Manner. 


rate?  how? 

ungefab/r,  about 

burdjau§,  throughout,  ab- 

unetriel? how  much? 

noc|,    nod)    meljr,     some 

solutely,  by  all  means 

ft)  arum?  why? 

more,  any  more 

burdjouS  nidjt,  letneSioegS, 

luci'lialb    \   r. 

anberS,  otherwise 

by  no  means 

roeSttjegenJ  w 

feb,r  (redjt),  very,  much 

gern  (gerne),  willingly 

Su,  too 

Bet  ttjettem  (um  btel),  by  far 

ungern,  unwillingly 

fount,  scarcely,  hardly 

gans,  quite 

gettrifs,  surely,  certainly 

jtemltdj,  tolerably,  pretty, 

ganjHd),  wholly,   entirely 

frettid)    }  t    i 

rather 

befonberS,  especially 

ftdjertidj  ) 

Dielmeljr,  eljer,  rather 

jufoHig,  by  chance 

nattirlid),  of  course 

,c  ri.\       r  nearly,  almost 

DteUeidjt,  perhaps 
umfonft,fornothing,  gratis 

ttJtrllidj        \really,      in 
in  ber  Sb,atJ     deed 

sujammen  )  +      ±^ 

bergeben§,  bergeblid),  um= 

ja  (ja  bodj,  bodj),  yes 

betj  iftmmen  1  toe>etri 

fonft,  in  vain 

ja  tuoljl,  0  yes,  certainly 

allein,  alone 

fdjroerlid),  hardly 

nein,  no 

au§einanber,  asunder, 

gerobe    (eben),    precisely, 

ntdjt,  not 

apart 

just 

iiberf)aupt,  at  all 

fonft,  else 

ebenfaHS  llikewige 

gar  ntd)t,  not  at  all 

fonft  etnwS,  anything  else 
fonft  ntdjtS,  nothing  else 

gIeid)faH§  \ 
jebenfattS,  at  all  events 

fogar,  felbft,  even 
nidjt  etnmal,  not  even 

fo,  ebenfo,  so,  as,  thus 

tljeilroeife,  partly 

tm    ©egentb,eil,     on    the 

genug,  enough.sufficiently 

atCerbtngS,   certainly,   in- 

contrary 

fyutldngltdj,  sufficiently 

deed 

tm  Sltlgemetnen,  in  general 

nur  (blo§),  only,  but 

etc.         etc. 

(*)  "This"  standing  with  nouns  expressing  day-time  (morning,  afternoon, 
etc.)  is  usually  translated  fjeute;  but  btefen  (Ace.)  also  may  be  used. 


172 

Thirty-seventh  Lesson  B.       ©iebenunbbreifsigfte  Seftion. 

Remarks  on  the  Adverbs. 

There  are  three  principal  kinds  of  adverbs;  viz:  I)  Adverbs  of 
Place,  2)  Adverbs  of  Time,  3)  Adverbs  of  Quality  and  Manner  (see 
pages  170  &  171). 

Adverbs  of  Manner  consist  of  Adverbs  of  manner,  quantity,  affir- 
mation, negation  and  doubt.  For  Adverbs  of  Quality  see  next  lesson. 

OBSERVATIONS. — Many  adverbs  of  place  if  used  with  a  vei-1  < 
indicating  direction  or  movement  towards  or  from  a  place  must  be 
accompanied  by  f)tn  and  fier(*)  (marked  in  our  list  with  a  •); 
whilst,  when  no  such  direction  or  movement  is  indicated,  the  or- 
dinary or  another  form  without  f)in  and  §er  must  be  used  (marked 
in  our  list  with  •  •) ;  as, 

SBoIjin  geljen  6ie?  Where  do  you  go  (to)?  SBoIjer  fommen  ©ie? 
Where  do  you  come  (from)?  SSo  ftnb  £ie?  Where  are  you? 

Note.— The  adverbs  commencing  with  f)in  and  Ijer  like  (Ijtnaue,  Jjevauf, 
etc.)  are  always  used  as  prefixes  of  separable  verbs. 

The  adverb  together  is  translated  beijammen  when  the  verb 
denotes  absolute  rest ;  as, — beifammen  ftfcen,  to  sit  together 
Otherwise  together  is  rendered  gufatntnen;  as, 

SSir  gingen  jufammen  nad)  £au)e.    We  went  home  together. 
Only  is  translated  erft,  if  denoting  time;   otherwise  nut  (or 
blO£) ;  as, — %<fy  fann  erft  in  einer  grunbe  fommen.     1  can  only  come  in  an 

hour.    £aben  Ste  nur  ein  $Pferb?    Have  you  only  one  horse? 
Just  is  translated  eben  (or  gerabe)  if  an  adverb,  and  geredjt  if 
an  adjective  (i.  e.  if  qualifying  a  noun  or  pronoun) ;  as, 

Cr  ift  eben  gefommen.    He  has  just  come.      (5r  ift  geredjt.    He  is  just. 

At  all  (iiber^aupt)  if  standing  with  negations  is  translated 
gar,  which  always  precedes  the  negation ;  as, 

gar  nid)t,  not  at  all  gar  nidjt?,  nothing  at  all  gar  fetner,  none 
at  all  gar  fein  83rob,  no  bread  at  all  gar  SRiemanb,  nobody  at  all 
gar  me,  never  at  all,  etc. 

On  the  Position  of  Adverbs  in  a  Sentence. 

Adverbs  usually  occupy  the  same  place  as  in  English  with  the  fol- 
lowing principal  exceptions : 

Adverbs  can  never  be  placed  between  the  subject  and  the 
Verb ;  as,  — %$  fdjrteb  me  an  ifjn.  I  never  wrote  to  him.  SBir  fonnten 

faum  bas  Sdjiff  feljen.    We  hardly  could  see  the  ship. 
Adverbs  of  place  always  stand  last  in  a  sentence  ;  as, 

3d)  gtng  geftern  mit  Secern  Sruber  jufalKg  barton.  I  went  there 
by  chance  yesterday  with  your  brother. 

But  if  there  be  a  past  participle  or  another  part  of  the  verb,  which 
must  be  at  the  end  of  the  sentence,  the  adverb  precedes  such  verb ;  as, 
6ixt>  Cie  geftem  cud)  bort  getoefen0    Have  you  been  there  yesterday  as  wells 
For  the  place  of  Adverbs  of  time  see  pages  80  and  88. 
Adverbial  expressions  are  generally  preceded  by  the  true  ad- 
verbs of  the  same  kind ;  as, 

ftt  lam  geftern  sum  rrften  Wlal.    He  came  for  the  first  time  yesterday 

~P)  The  use  of  b,in  and  $«  is  explained  on  page  142. 


173 

about,  ungefaljr  (Adv.)     ,  nothing  at  all,  gen  mdjt3 
again,  tt>iet>ec  of  course,  natitrlidj 


at  all, 
at  all  events,  jebenfallS 
at  present,  gegentoartig 
above,  upstairs,  often 
below,  downstairs,  itnten 
first  (adv.),  at  first,  per  ft 
last  (adv.),  at  last,  julc^t 
long,  a  long  time,    Icmge 
not  at  all,  gar  nidjt 


on  the  way, 
perhaps,  toie 
presently,  gletcf) 
pretty  (adv.),  tolerably, 

rather,  jiemlicl) 
scarcely,  hardly,  fount 
sometimes,  mandjmal 
soon,  balb 


straight  on,  gerabeftttS 
surely,  certainly,  geroifj 
the  other  day,  neuliclj 
there,  yonder,  bo,  bort 
together,   jitfrttnmen,  6ei« 

frtntnten 
to  the  right,  on  the  right 

(handside),  retf)t§ 
to  the  left,   on  the  left 

(handside),  Iinl» 


Exercise  No.  37. 

1.  Where  shall  (solleri)  we  go  (to)  to-morrow? — Where  do  you  come 
from? — Come  here. — Your  pencil  is  there. — Look  there. — Do  you  come 
thence  (s.    p.    170)? — Is  your  brother  upstairs?      No,  he  is  down- 
stairs.— Go  upstairs. — Go  downstairs. — Come  upstairs. — Come  down- 
stairs.— Go  to  the  right. — Go  to  the  left. — Is  the  church  on  the  right 
handside  ?    No,  it  is  on  the  left.  — Go  straight  on.  — Let  us  walk  together. 
— I  saw  him  on  the  way. — They  have  no  time  at  present. — I  shall  be 
there  presently. — He  will  soon  be  here. — Sometimes  I  thought  (glauben) 
it. — Who  came  first? — I  came  last — I  know  your  father  pretty  well.—. 
He  would  (wolleri)  scarcely  believe  it. — Can  you  write  to  (an  Ace.}  me 
in  about  a  month  ['s  time]  ?    Perhaps  I&  cana  (*)  do  it.      At  all  events 
don't  forget  it.     Certainly  not.     You  should  of  course  answer  my  (auf 
meineri)  letter. — Has  your  friend  been  at  (im)  business  at  all  ? — This 
workman  is  not  at  all  clever.     They  stood  together  a  long  time. 

2.  ®b'nnen  @te   nttr  ben  ttacfcften  SBeg  auf  (to)  ben  SBafjttljof 
getgen?    Gfe^en'-ftafe)  <3te  bte  erfte  ©trotfe  red)t3  wtb  (gefien  @ie) 
bann  (then)  gerabeait£.      SBttten  @ie  3>Bren  (SJrofftater  tjierfier  511 
!ommen.    SStr  fafcen  nod)  lange  betfammen.    (£3  tft  bemofie  jed)^ 
lifer;  luir  miifjen  nn§  beeiten,    irenn  totr  guerft  bort  fern  rooHen. 
&§>  tft  nttr   fieute  gar  ntd)t   toofit.    %&)  werbe  t)iettetd)t  in  etner 
©tunbe  §u  $aufe  fein.     3ft  ^emanb  oben?    ©egenmdrtig  ftnb  bte 
sJ2tid)te  fiiftter.    SBariint  lommen  (are)  @ie  tmmer  fo  fpdt.^    SBetl 
id)  fo  lange  (late)  im  (at)  ®efd)aft  bleiben  ntii^. 

At  last  he  came  himself.  We  were  not  at  all  polite.  Your  cousin 
has  not  come  here  yet  (see  Note  (*)  on  page  170).  The  music  will 
commence  presently.  I  seldom  conversed  with  her.  At  six  o'clock 
we  could  see  scarcely  anything.  We  went  together  yesterday  to  my 
uncle(s).  It  is  already  evening.  Of  course  Ib  shall*  (*)see  you  again. 
It  will  soon  strike  eight.  He  said  nothing  at  all.  At  all  events  you6 
willa  (*)  find  (trefferi)  me  at  home  to-morrow.  He  never  wrote  to  (an 
Ace.)  me.  Who  is  going  there?  I  did  not  meet  (begegneri)  anybody 
at  all  on  the  way.  We  were  not  long  together.  I  had  sometimes  no 
money  at  all. 

(*)  If  the  subject  does  not  commence  the  sentence,  it  is  placed  after  its  verb  or 
auxiliary. 


174 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  What  place  do  adverbs  usually  occupy  ? 

2.  Can  adverbs  be  placed  between  the  Subject  and  the  Verb  in  German? 

3.  Where  are  adverbs  of  place  put  ? 

4.  But  if  there  be  a  past  participle  or  another  part  of  the  verb  which 
must  be  at  the  end  of  the  sentence,  where  is  the  adverb  then  placed? 

5.  Where  are  adverbs  of  time  placed  ? 

6.  If  there  be  a  personal   pronoun  without  a  preposition  in  German, 
where  is  the  adverb  of  time  then  placed  ? 

7.  If  there  is  an  adverbial  expression  and  a  true  adverb  of  the  same  kind, 
what  order  has  to  be  observed  ? 


Conversation. 


Where  shall  we  go  to-day  ? 
Let  us  go  to  (in)  the  theatre. 
Have  you  often  been  there  (al- 
ready)? 
Yes,  I  go  there  twice  a  week. 

Did  you  ask  Mr.  H.  to  come 
here? 

Yes,  he  will  be  here  presently. 

How  far  is  it  to  (nach)  (the) 
.  .  .  street? 

About  half  an  hour's  walk. 

Which  way  must  I  take  (go)  1 

Go  straight  on  and  then  (dann 
[take]  the  second  street  on 
the  left. 

Did  you  come  first? 

No,  it  was  not  I,  for  (denn)  I 
came  last. 

When  will  you  come  ? 

Perhaps  at  half  past  six ;  but  at 
all  events  I  shall  be  here  at 
seven. 

Will  your  brother  come  as  well 
(auch)l 

Certainly,  he  will  [come]. 

What  do  you  know  of  your 
friend,  Mr.  N.? 

I  saw  him  the  other  day ;  he  is 
still  in  B. 

Why  will  you  depart  so  sud- 
denly? 

I  am  expected  at  home  to-mor- 
row afternoon. 


SBpfjin  fotten  rotr  beute  geben^ 
SBir  rooflen  in!  Xfjeoter  gefjen. 
<5inb  @te  fcfcon  oft  ba  (or  bort) 

geroefen? 
3a,  id)  gelje  jroeimal  bie  28od)e 

bafyin  (or  bortfjin). 
93aten  Ste  £errn  $.  Berber  511 

fomrnen? 

8a,  er  ttrirb  gleid)  fn'er  fein. 
SSie  roeit  ift  e3  nad)  ber    ... 

©tra&e  ? 

ttngefafjr  cine  Ijalbe  ©timbe. 
2BeId)en  28eg  mufj  id)  gefjen? 
(Seljen  @ie  gerabe  cms  unb  bann 

bie  gtoeite  ©trafce 


®amen  @ie  guerft? 

yietn,  id)  roar  e3  md)t ,  benn  id) 

fam  gule|t. 

SBann  roerben  Ste  fpmmen? 
33iefleid)t  um  ^atb  fteben;  aber 

jebenfaH§  roerbe  id)  um  fteben 

^ier  fein. 
SSirb  3$r  SSruber  aud)  fommen? 

©eroi§  [tmrb  er  fommen]. 
2Bos    tuiffen   @ie    bon   S^rem 

^reunbe,  ^errn  -ft.? 
^d)  fa^  i^n  neulid§ ;  er  ift 

in  S3. 
SBarum  tuotten  @ie  fo 

abreifen  ? 
I  ^^  werbe   morgen   9£ad)mittag 
erroartet. 


175 

HenMng  dmtm  tto.  37. 


£aifer  Sofe^  II. 

Sine  arme  SBttttue1  in  2Bien2  nmrbe  fefjr  fran!  unb 
fdjicfte  iJjrett  fteinen  @ofm  tiad)  etnem  Sfrjte.  3)er  ®naBe 
lief  §n  t>erfrf)tebenen3  Slerjten  j  aBer  jeber  tooftte  erft4  einen 
(Mben5  f)aBen,  elje6  er  fomtnen  lonne.  S)er  arme  SHeine,? 
ber  tttcf)t§  al§8  Xljranen9  f)atte,  tootfte  traurig10  tmeber 
nac^  §auje  gefyett,  al§n  er  untertt)cg§  etnem  freunbltcf)12 
on^fe^enben13  §errn  Begegnete.  3n  feiner -iftotf)14  fagte  er 
jn  i^m: — ©ndbiger  §err15,  feien  @ie  fo  Barmfjer^tg16  unb 
fd^enlen  @te  mtr  einen  ®nlben.5 — liefer  fragte  tf)n:— 
benn17  ntc^t  and§  njeniger? — -ftein,  antrt)ortete  ber 
nnb  gaB18  ifym  bie  Urfac^e19  an. — S^nn20,  h)enn  ba§ 
fo  ift,  fagte  ber  §err,  fo  tmfl  id^  bir  ben  ©nlben5  geBen; 
aBer  fage  mtr  erft,4  too  betne  9Jlutter  rao^nt.- — *3)er  ^naBe 
t^ettte21  t^m  bie  5lbreffe  mtt,  erf)telt  ba§  (Mb  unb  lief 
bann22  raf<^23  jum  nacf)ften  5lr^te,  todfirenb24  ber  gut^erjige25 
franfen  SBttttDei  eilte.  5(nf  feme  Srage2^,  m$ 
er^a^lte  i^m  bie  3tom,  tueld^e  i^n  fitr  einen 
Slrjt  telt28,  oon  i^rer  ®ran!§eit  unb  3Irmut529.  ^ierauf 
t>erfc^rteB30  er  tfjr  eine  SIrjnei31,  toeld^e  fie  fjolen  laffen 
fottte.  ^aum  raar  er  eintge  SD^innten  fort32,  al^11  ber  ®naBe 
mtt  bem  tt)tr!lic^en33  SCrjte  !am.  SlI^11  er  §orte,  bag  fcfjon 
ein  3lr^t  ba  geroefen  fei  unb  etlua^  berfd^rieBen30  fjaBe, 
ta§  er  ba§  9lecept34  unb  rief3^  bann22  iiBerrafc^t36  au§: 
-  9lnn2(),  ber  lann  fretlid^37  Beffere  SRecepte3*  fc^reiBen 
aU  ic§;  er  fiat  @udj  fiinfjig  2)n!aten38  Beim  fatferltrfjen39 
3a!)tamt40  angetotefen41  unb  ben  -ftanten42  ^ofep^  barunter 
gefc^rteBen.— 28i6t  S^r  jejt,  raer  e§  mar? — 

1  widow,  2  Vienna,  3  various,  4  first,  5  florin,  6  before, 
7  little  boy,  8  but,  9  tears,  10  sorrowfully,  11  when,  12  friendly, 
13  looking,  14  distress,  15  my  lord,  16  merciful,  17  then,  18  to 
mention,  angcbcn  (irr.),  19  cause,  20  well,  21  to  inform  of,  mit- 
theilen,  22  then,  23  quickly,  24  whilst,  25  good-hearted,  26  question, 
27  to  ail,fehlen  (Dat.),  18  to  take  for,  halten  (irr.)/wr,  29  poverty, 
30  to  prescribe,  verschreiben  (irr),  31  medecine,  32  away,  33  .real, 
34  the  receipt,  prescription,  dasfiecept,  35  to  exclaim,  aiisrufen  (irr.), 
36  surprised,  37  to  be  sure,  38  ducats,  39  imperial,  40  treasury, 
41  to  assign,  anweisen  (irr.),  42  name. 


176 

Thirty-eighth  Lesson.  Sldjtunbbreigtgfte  Seftton. 

Remarks  on  the  Adverbs  (concluded). 
Adverbs  are  indeclinable. 

Most  qualifying  Adjectives  can  be  used  as  adverbs  without  al- 
tering their  form ,  as, 

3>iefc*  <8ud)  ifl  frfjledjt.  This  book  is  bad  (Adj.).  £iefe§  JBudi 
ift  fdjledjt  gebunben.  This  book  is  bound  badly  (Adv.)  SJietn  TOet'fer 
ift  nicbt  gut.  My  knife  is  not  good  (Adj.).  ffliein  TOeffer  ift  nidjt  gut 
gefdjlifren.  My  knife  is  not  well  (Adv.)  sharpened. 

The  comparative  and  superlative  of  Adverbs  are  formed  like 
those  of  Adjectives;  but  in  the  superlative  the  one  form  with 
am  must  be  always  used  (see  page  76);  as, 

fdjtedjt,  bald         fdjledjter,  worse  am  fcfjtedjteften,  (the)  worst 

warm,  warmly     farmer,  more  warmly   am  rodrmften,  (the)  most  warmly 

The  following  Adverbs  form  their  degrees  thus : 

fjolb,  soon  fruljer  (eljer),  sooner   am  friiljeftett  (am  eljeften),  (the) 

gern(e),  willingly,  gladly  liebcr,  better  am  Hcbftcn,  best        [soonest 

gut  (tooljl),  well  fceffer,  better  am  bcften,  (the)  best 


NOTES.  1.  —  There  is  another  form,  the  absolute  superlative,  which 
expresses  a  very  high  degree  without  comparison.  —  It  is  formed  from 
qualifying  Adverbs  by  putting  aufs  (auf  das)  before  the  Adverb  and 
adding  ste  fate)  to  the  Adverb  ;  or  simply  by  adding  st  (est)  without 
using  aufs;  as, 

3dj  ttmrbe  auf§  freuttMtdjfte  empfangen  or  idj  tourbe  freuttblidjft 
I  was  most  kindly  received. 


1.  —  A  few  adverbs  form  this  superlative  by  adding  (e)stens;  thus  : 


ttjemgftenS,  at  least 
fcftfefteitS,  at  the  earliest 
fpfitefteuS,  at  the  latest 


I}64ften§,  at  the  most 
l'd^5nften§,   most   beauti- 
fully 


6eften§,    in    the    best 


manner 


etc.        etc. 


A  so :  erge&enft,  most  humbly 

OBSERVATION. — ©ern(e),  Iteber,  am  liebften  are  generally  used 
as  the  translation  of  the  English  to  Wee,  to  like  better,  to  like  best, 
in  the  following  manner : 

3d)  effe  gern(e)  2Te^fet.  I  like  to  eat  apples.  3ftf)  trinfe  gern(e) 
SSetn.  I  like  to  drink  wine.  3d)  fpiele  Iteber.  I  like  better  to 
play.  3d)  ttmrbe  (or  modjte)  cm  lie&ften  fingen.  I  should  like  best 
to  sing. 

When  in  English  the  second  verb  is  only  understood,  in 
German  it  must  be  used ;  as, 

3d)  effe  gern(e)  gleifdj.  I  like(*)  meat  (to  eat).  3d)  trinfe  feljr  gern(c) 
Sier.  I  like  beer  very  much  (**)  (to  drink).  3d)  gef)e  gern(e)  in§ 
Sweater.  I  like  the  theatre  (to  go  to  the  theatre).  3d)  i)5re  nidjt 
fe^r  gern(e)  Wvtft.  I  don't  like  music  much  (**)  (to  hear). 

®  ern(e)  etc.  is  also  used  in  the  translation  of  to  be  fond  of;  like : 

£a&en  Sie  iljn  gern(e)?  Are  you  fond  of  him?  3$  tanje  lie&er 
I  am  more  fond  of  dancing. 

(*)  ,,To  like"  referring  to  taste  may  also  be  rendered  by  mogen;  as, 

3d)  mag  gietfd).    9R5gen  @te  lieber  SScin?  etc. 
(**)  ,,Much"  or  ,,very  much"  in  such  cases  is  translated  feljr. 


177 


beautiful,  ft 
the  birthday, 

tog 

correct,  rtdjttg 
distinct,  beutlid) 
loud,  aloud,  lout 
to  play,  fpielen 
to  take  a  walk, 

ren  geljen  irr. 
in  the  morning,  9Jiorgen§ 
this  morning,  Ijeute  frill) 


to-morrow  morning,  mot* 

gen  fritJj 
yesterday  in  the  morning, 

geftern  friil) 
in  the  forenoon,  33ormit= 

tog§ 

at  noon,  SDtittogS 
to-day    at    noon,     Ijeute 

SRittog 
in  the  afternoon,   9toclj' 


in  the  evening,  218  rob  8 
this    evening,    to-night, 

Ijeute  Sl&enb 
yesterday    evening,    last 

night,  geftern  Sl&enb 
a  week  ago,  borSXogenic. 
in  a  week,  in  8  SEogen  :c. 
this    day   week  (hence), 

Ijeute  iiBer  8  5Eoge  it. 
this    day    week   (back), 

fjeute  uor  8  Xogen  ic. 
a  fortnight,  14  Sage 


Exercise  No.  38. 

1.  This  bird  sings  (pfeiferi)  beautifully. — My   sister  sang  more 
beautifully  than  yours. — Your  cousin  (f. )  sang  most  beautifully. — Which 
boy  works  must  industriously  ? — I  spoke  to  (mil]  him6  very  politely*  . 
— He  read  louder  than  you. — You  ought  to  write  more  distinctly. — 
He  pronounced  the  word  the  most  correctly. — You  did  your  work  as 
badly  as  your  brother. — Why  have  they  not  paid  sooner  ? — I  shall  be 
here  soonest. — Do  you  like  wine?    No,  I  like  beer  better  than  wine. — 
My  brother  likes  wine  best. — We  do  not  like  to  sing.  —I  should  like 
best  to  read. — He   never  liked  the  theatre. — Do  you  like  cherries  ? 
Yes,  I  like  them  very  much. — Is  your  sister  fond  of  you  ? — Children 
are  very  fond  of  playing. 

2.  2Bo  ftmren  @ie  fjeute  frufy?  8$  gelje  getuofinftd)  $8ortntttag3 
in  bie  (to)  ©tabt.    (Geftern  5tbenb  ttmr  id)  im  (at  the)  (£oncert, 
unb   Ijettte  5lbenb   foerbe  id)   itt§  (to  the)  Sweater  geljen. 

<3ie  Ijeute  Stadjmittag  fpagteren.  §err  3£.  ift  tmr 
§aufe.  ^onnte  tc^  ifjn  nttjt  morgen  frii^  fprec^en  (see)1 
letter  tear  oor  8  Xagen  fd)5ner  al^  fjeitte.  §eute  iiber  14  Xage 
toerbe  ic^  ttadj  (for)  S.  abreijen.  §eute  iiber  3  SKodjen  ift  tnetn 
®ebitrt3tag.  2)er  S3rteftrdger  fommt  immer  ^orgen^  unb  2lbenb§. 
©tauben  (Ste,  baft  ba3  ©djiff  in  14  Sagen  feier  fetn  ttjerbe? 

What  have  you  been  doing  the  whole  week  ?  In  the  morning  we 
stayed  at  home,  and  in  the  afternoon  we  took  a  walk.  Do  you  like 
walking  (spazieren  gehen)  ?  This  day  week  I  was  still  very  ill.  What 
have  you  to  do  this  afternoon  ?  How  long  did  your  sister  stay  at  (auf) 
the  ball  last  night  ?  The  birthday  of  my  mother  is  this  day  fortnight. 
Read  aloud  and  distinctly.  Do  you  think  (glauberi),  your  work  will 
(Subj.)  be  ready  in  a  week?  Yes,  this  day  week  I  shall  have  finished 
(done)  it.  We  expected  you  yesterday  in  the  morning.  Send  (schicken) 
(Dat. )  me  the  parcel  this  morning.  I  shall  be  at  home  to-day  at  noon. 
We  like  music  very  much  (to  hear).  The  name  was  not  written  cor- 
rectly. This  day  fortnight  I  was  still  in  Paris.  What  shall  (sollev) 
we  do  to-night  ? 


178 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  How  can  most  qualifying  adjectives  be  used  as  adverbs? 

2.  How  are  the  comparative  and  superlative  of  adverbs  formed  I 

3.  What  adverbs  form  their  degrees  irregularly  ? 

4.  When  is  the  absolute  superlative  used  ? 

5.  How  is  the  absolute  superlative  formed? 

6.  How  is  this  superlative  formed  by  a  few  adverbs  ? 

7.  When  are  gem(e),  lieber,  am  liebsten  generally  used  ? 

8.  When  the  second  verb  in  English  is  only  understood,  must  it  be 
expressed  in  German? 

9.  In  translation  of  what  expression  can  gem(e)t  etc.  also  be  used? 


Conversation. 


Do  you  like  cigars? 

Yes,  I  like  them  very  much. 

Does  your  sister  like  dancing? 

Yes,  she  likes  dancing  and  sing- 
ing. 

What  do  youlikebest,  tea,  coffee 
or  wine? 

I  like  tea  better  than  coffee  or 
wine. 

Where  is  your  father?  I  should 
like  to  see  him? 

He  will  come  home  this  even- 
ing. 

Do  you  like  roses? 

Yes,  I  am  very  fond  of  flowers. 

Should  you  like  to  go  to  (in) 
the  theatre? 

Yes,  if  we  can  go  together. 

Which  would  you  like  better, 
to  stay  at  home  or  to  go  out? 
I  should  rather  go  out. 

When  did  you  write  to  (an  Ace.) 
your  friend  (f.)? 

I  wrote  to  her  a  week  ago. 

Has  she  (already)  answered  (auf 

Ace.)  your  letter? 

No,  not  yet ;  I  do  not  think  that 
she  will  answer  before  a  fort- 
night 


@te  gern(e)  (£igarren? 
[id)  raud)e  fie]  fefir  gern(e). 
Sbre  ©cfitoefter  gern(e)? 
fie  tanjt  iinb  fingt  gern(e). 


trtnfen  (5ie   ant  liebften, 

SDjee,  $affee  ober  SBetn? 
3d)  trtn!e  Sfjee  lieber  alS  $affee 

ober  SSein. 
2Bo   ift  Sljr  gsater?  %$  moc&te 

ifjn  gem(e)  fpredjen. 
(£r    ttrirb    fceitte    SIbenb    nad) 

|mufe  fotnmen. 
£aben  @ic  SRojen  gem(e)? 
Sa,  id^  fiobe  SSIumen  fefir  gern(e). 
SSiirben  (or  modjten)  6ie  gern(e) 

in^  Sweater  geljen? 
^a/  roenn  tuir  gufommen  geljen 

fonnen. 
®a^  roiirben  @ie  lieber  tbun,  511 

^>aufe  bleiben,  ober  au^gefyen  ? 
$5^   tuiirbe    (or  mod)te)    lieber 

au^geben. 
SSann   fdjrieben   @te    an 


fctirieb  nor  8  Xagen  an  fie. 
mt  fie   fd)on  aiif  Sfren  93rief 
geantruortet  ? 

Sftein,  nod)  nid^t;  id)  glaube 
nid)t,  bafe  fie  oor  14  £agen 
antiuorten  wirb 


179 

JUaMttg  dmtwt  Ho.  38. 


linger1 

(Sin  §err  in  SSrigfyton  fjatte  einen  §unb,  ber  jeben 
Hftorgen  mit  einem  $ennt)  im  9ftau(2  $nm  ^teifcfjer  lief 
iinb  fid)  felbft  fein  grnfjftuc!3  feufte.  ($ine§  2ftorgen§  fanb 
er  ben  Saben  be§  gleifcf)er§,  bei  bem  er  getooljnlidfj  fein 
gleifdj  Ijolte,  gefdjloffen.  Ste*  er  £nnger5  fjatte,  tooflte 
er  nidjjt  ttmrten,  bis6  ber  Soben  aitfgemac^t  ttmrbe,  nnb 
lief  ba^er^  §n  einem  anbern  gleifc^er,  ber  nid^t  toeit8 
batjon  too^nte.  S3ei  feiner  Slnteft9  legte  er  ben  $enn^ 
anf  ben  SSIoc!  nnb  Bero^10  narf)11  feiner  ©emofin^eit12  bie 
SSaare13  be§  gleifd^er§.  liefer  mac^te  mit  bem  neuen 
^nnben  tuenig  Umftdnbe14,  nafjtn  ben  ^5enn^  nnb  jagte15 
ben  §nnb  mit  einem  @totfe16  cm§  bem  Saben.  ©ine'fotd^e 
Ungerec^tigfeit1''  tnnjste  bem  X^iere  fe^r  migfatten18  ;  attein19 
e§  fonnte  nici^tS  mac^en  nnb  blieb  einen  Xag  oljne  ^u§= 
ftiirf.3  5lm  anbern  9ftorgen,  al§  ber  §nnb  Don  feinem 
|jerrn  feinen  ^enn^  er^alten  Ijatte,  ging  er  tuieber  §nm 
namlidjjen  gteifc^er,  ber  i§n  geftern  fo  fc^Iec^t20  bef)anbelte. 
@r  tegte  feine  ^npfermiinae2!  mieber  anf  ben  33loc!,  fe|te22 
aBer  biefe§  9JlaI  Innrrenb23  feine  ^fote24  barauf.  ^5)er 
Steiftfjer  niagte25  unter  fotc^en  Umftanben14  feinen  neuen 
@treid)2<5,  fe^nitt2^  ein  (Stiicl28  gteif^  ab,  gab  e§  bem 
§unbe,  nnb  aioUte  fid^  nnn  bega^lt  mac^en.  @^e29  er  aber 
biefe§  t^nn  fonnte,  §atte  ba§  Kuge1  X^ier  fein  Sieifc^  tier* 
fcljlnngen30  nnb  ben  $enn^  fcom  95Iocfe  genommen,  too* 
mit  er  an§  bem  Saben  jum  anbern  gleif^er  rannte31,  ber 
i^n  immer  efjrlidf)32  bebient33  fiatte.  ®ort  !anfte  er 
ein  @tiic!28  gleifdj,  nm34  fi^  fiir  ben  geftrigen35 
^n  entfc^cibigen37. 

1  prudent,  2  mouth  (of  a  beast),  3  breakfast,  4  as,  5  hunger, 
6  till,  7  therefore,  8  far,  9  arrival,  10  to  smell  at,  beriechen  (irr.), 
11  according  to,  12  habit,  13  wares,  14  circumstances,  15  to  chase, 
jagen,  16  stick,  17  injustice,  18  to  displease,  miss/  'alien  (irr.), 
19  but,  however,  20  to  treat,  behandeln,  21  copper-coin,  22  put, 
23  growling,  24  paw,  25  to  venture,  wagen,  26  trick,  27  to  cut 
off,  sibschneiden  (irr.).  28  piece,  29  before,  30  to  devour,  ver- 
schlingen  (irr.),  31  to  run,  rennen  (irr.},  32  honestly,  33  to  serve, 
bedienen,  34  in  order  (to),  35  yesterday,  36  fasting-day,  37  to 
indemnify,  entschtidigen. 


180 

Thirty-ninth  Lesson.  Sfteununbbreigtgfte  Seftton. 

The  Prepositions. 

Prepositions  are  invariable. — They  require  the  following 
declinable  word  in  either  the  Genitive,  Dative,  or  Accusative, 
according  to  the  case  they  govern. 

Prepositions  governing-  the  Genitive  are : 


angeftdjt§,  in  the  face  of 
anftait  (or  ftott),  instead  of 


innerljalb,  within 
oberfyalb,  above 
unterbalb,  belo^ 


,  outside,  without  (a  place) 


mittelft  (or  tiemtittelft),  by  means  of 

feiten§,  on  the  part  of 

tro£,0)  in  spite  of 

urn  ...  nrillen  ( .  . .  Rafter,  IjalbenCO, 

for  the  sake  of 
iinbefdiabet,  without  prejudice 


bieSfeiti  (or  biesfeit),  on  this  side  of  ungearf)tet,(2)  notwithstanding 

jenfeitS  (or  jenieit),  on  the  other  side  of  unroett  (or  unfern),  not  far  from 

tnmitten,  in  the  midst  of  tjerntoge  (or  fraft),  by  virtue  of 

IdngM1)  along  toaf)renb,(l)  during 

bef)uf§,  in  behalf  of  roegen,  (2,  3)  on  account  of 

btnftdjtlidj,  with  regard  to  sufolge  (2)  (or  lout),  according  to 

EXAMPLES  : 

$dj  ging  trojj  be§  SRegen  (or  bem  iRegen)  ou3.  I  went  out  in  spite 
of  the  rain.  Slnftatt  be§  S?ater§  fam  ber  6ofin.  Instead  of  the  father 
the  son  came  S>a§  ©djiff  fag  bie§feit§  be§  §Iufie».  The  ship  lay  on 
this  side  of  the  river.  Sag  £ait§  fteljt  aujjerfjalfc  ber  ©tabt.  The 
house  stands  outside  the  town.  @ie  ttmrben  tuegen  eine»  <5treite§ 
(or  etne§  @treite§  wegen)  getnbe.  They  became  enemies  on  account 
of  a  quarrel. 

1.  25ng§,  tro^,  tod^renb  are  also  used  with  the  Dative  alter. 

2.  SScgen,  5»fofse,  ungcct^tet  may  also  follow  the  word  they  govern,  but 
then  sufolge  requires  the  Dative. 

3.  The   word  governed  is  placed  between  lira  and  toiHen,    and  before 

potter. 

"With  the  genitives  of  personal  pronouns  the  following  contrac- 
tions of  um  .  .  .  roillen,  Ijalljen,  roegen  take  place : 

Urn  meinetroitten  (or  nteinetl)al&en),  for  my  sake,  um  betnettDuTen  (or 
beinetfjal&en),  for  thy  sake,  meinetroegen,  on  my  account,  beinetluegen,  on 
thy  account  etc. 

Prepositions  governing  the  Dative  are: 

au§,  out  of,  from  I  gemafe   (or  jufotge  (4),  ac-  I  f ammt,  together  with 

aufeer,  except,  besides      |  mit,  with          [cording  to  |  feit,  since  for 


bei,  near,  with,  by,  at 
binnen,  within  (for  time) 
entgegen(4)in  oppositionto 
9egenuber(4),  opposite 


,  after, to, according  to 
nadjft  (or  gunacfift),  next  to 
nebft,  together  with,  be- 
sides 

EXAMPLES  : 


con,  from,  of,  by 
Don.. .an,  from,  since 
gu,  to,  at 
jiitoiber  (4),  contrary  to 


3$  fam  au§  bem  ^aufe.  I  came  out  of  the  house,  ©r  ftanb  Bei 
mtr.  He  stood  near  me.  38ir  fennen  iB,n  feit  lefctem  3ab,re.  We  have 
known  him  since  last  year.  Stefeg  ©efdjenf  erb.ielt  id)  fton  ntetnem 
Dnfel.  This  present  I  got  from  my  uncle.  3d)  erttjartete  ba§  nidjt 
Don  i^m.  I  did  not  expect  that  of  him. 

4.  Gtttgegen,  gegcniiber,  gcmaf;,  juttJibcr  better  follow  the  word  they 
govern. — For  sufolge,  if  governing  the  Dative,  see  above  the  preposi- 
tions governing  the  Genitive. 


181 
Prepositions  governing  the  Accusative  are : 


6tS  (1),  as  far  as,  till,  to,  up  to 
burd),  through,  by 
entlang  (2),  along 
fur,  for 


mitten  burd),  right  through 

ofynt,  without 

urn,  round,  at 

ttnber,  against  (with  hostility  only) 


flegen  (3),  towards,  against 

EXAMPLES  : 
SSir  it>oHen  burd)  ben  ©arten  gefyen.    Let  us  go  through  the  garden. 

§d)  I)a6e  ettoaS  fiir  Sie.    I  have  something  for  you.    <5ie  latnen  o^ne 
Ijren  £unb.    You  came  without  your  dog. 

1.  33i§  is  usually  accompanied  by  another  preposition  ;  like : 

6i§  on  bie  93anf,  as  far  as  the  hank  fci§  auf  ben  SBafjnfiof,  as  far  as  the 
station  6i§  nod)  Berlin,  as  far  as  Berlin  6i§  auf  biefen  Sag,  up  to  this 
day  6i§  um  bier  Ufyr,  till  four  o'clock. 

However  Bi§  is  often  also  used  alone  if  the  noun  is  without  an 
article  or  substitute ;  as, 

fci§  S3erlin,    &i§  bier  Uljr 

a.  (Sntlantj  generally  follows  the  word  it  governs  (see  also  langS,  along 
with  the  Genitive). 

3.  ©egett  has  also  the  old  form  gen  in  the  expression: 
gen  ^itnmel,  up  to  heaven 

Prepositions  governing  the  Dative  or  Accusative  are : 

an,  at,  on  |    iifier,  above,  over,  about 


nnf,  upon,  on 
Ijtnter,  behind 
in,  in,  into 


iwter,  under,  below,  among,  beneath 
Dor,  before,  in  front  of,  ...  ago 
jimjcljen,  between 


neb  en,  by  the  side  of,  beside,  close 

REMARK. —  The  Dative  usuaHy  follows  these  prepositions ;  but  the 
Accusative  is  used  if  the  sentence  expresses  a  movement  or  a  direction 
towards  the  object  after  the  preposition,  thus  answering  the  question 
whither?  or  where  to? 

The  Dative  usually  implies  rest  or  presence  in  something  and  then 
answers  to  the  question  where  ? 

EXAMPLES  : 

©tcmben  @ie  Winter  mir?  Did  you  stand  behind  me?  ©teffen  <Ste  ftdj 
^tnter  midj.  Place  yourself  behind  me.  Siegt  ber  93att  in  bem  ©arten?  Is 
the  ball  lying  in  the  garden?  Qd)  fjabe  ben  Sail  in  ben  ©arten  geiuorfen. 
I  have  thrown  the  ball  into  the  garden  (See  also  page  40). 

NOTE  : — Some  of  the  above  prepositions  sometimes  govern  the 
Accusative,  when  the  rule  mentioned  cannot  strictly  be  applied.  This 
is  especially  the  case  after  certain  verbs  which  require  to  be  followed 
by  one  of  these  prepositions.  A  list  of  these  verbs  will  be  given  in  our 
second  part. 

List  of  prepositions  contracted  with  the  definite 
article. 


am  for  on  bem 

au§  for  an  ba§ 

im  for  in  bem 

i»8  for  in  bag 


Bctm  for  Bei  bem 
Horn   for  toon  bem 
Sum   for  511  bem 
Siir    for  ju  ber 


auf§     for  auf  ba§ 
burd)§  for  bitrd)  bag 
tior§     for  bor  baS 
ii&er§    for  iiOer  bag 


The  prepositions  taking  an  3  are  also  often  written  with  an  'S ;  like  :— 
an'§,  in'*,  etc. 


182 

Remarks  on  Prepositions : 

In  the  following  we  give  those  explanations  on  the  translation  of 
prepositions,  which  will  be  at  present  most  useful.  In  our  2nd  part 
we  shall  enter  further  into  the  subject. 

at,  (on),  to,  (ju) 

At  and  to  are  translated  in  if  meaning  to  be  inside  or  to  go 
inside  of  a  (common)  place ;  as, 

int  ©aftljof,   at  the  hotel  in  ben  ©aftljof,  to  the  hotel 

im  Sweater,  at  the  theatre  in§  Sljeater,  to  the  theatre 

Note  also : — 3n  £onbon,  at  London  etc. 

int  ©efdjaft,  at  business  in§  ©efdjaft,  to  business 

in  ber  Sdjule,  at  school  in  bie  Sdjule,  to  school 

in  ber  fttrrfje,  at  church  in  bie  ftirdje,  to  church 

At  and  to  are  translated  auf,  if  meaning  to  be  inside  or  to  go 
inside  of  a  place  higher  up  than  the  speaker  is ;  as, 

ouf  ber  ©temroarte,  at  the  observatory      ouf  bie  Stentnjarte,   to 
the  observatory 

At  and  to  are  translated  auf  as  wellinthefollowing expressions : 

auf  ber  $oft,  at  the  post(-office)  auf  bie  $oft,  to  the  post-(office) 

ouf  bent    SBaljnljof,   at  the  (railway-)  auf  ben  SBalmljof,  to  the  station 

station 

auf  bem  SJiarfte,  at  the  market  auf  ben  SKarft,  to  the  market 

auf  bem  S3afle,  at  the  ball  auf  ben  Sail,  to  the  ball 

auf  bem  ftirdjjjof,  at  the  cemetery  auf  ben  Sirdjljof,  to  the  cemetery 

auf  ber  3agb,  at  the  chase  (out-hunting)  auf  bie  £?agb,  (to  go)  hunting 

auf  bem  Simmer,  at  the  room  auf  ba§  gimmer,  to  the  room 

auf  bem  ©ontor,  at  the  office  auf  ba*  Gontor,  to  the  office 

At  is  translated  um  (or  ant),  when  denoting  the  time  ;  as, 
um  (or  am)  jtuei  ttljr,  at  two  o'clock 

At  is  translated  fcei,  and  to,  gn,  when  they  mean  to  be  at  or  to  go 
to  somebody  or  somebody's  place;  as, 

bet  feinem  Dnfel,  at  his  uncle's  ju  feinem  Onfel,  to  his  uncle's 

beim  93  defer,  at  the  baker's  jum  23  fief  er,  to  the  baker's 

bet  mir,   at  my   house  ju  mir,  to  my  house 

bei3b,rem$8ater,  at  your  father's  house  ju  3§rem  93ater,  to  your  father's  house 

To  is  translated  with  the  Dative,  when  standing  after  a  verb 
etc.  governing  the  Dative  in  German ;  as, 

Sr   gab  ei   mir.     He  gave  it  to  me.     Sa§  £au§  geljort  feinem 
•Sater.    The  house  belongs  to  his  father. 

To  is  translated  nfldj,  if  denoting  direction  to  a  place  (propei 
name  of  a  town,  village,  etc.)  or  country ;  as, 

nod)  23erlin,  to  Berlin  nad)  Seutfdjlanb,  to  Germany 

nod)  ber  (gdjnmj,    to  Switzerland 

Note :  With  feminine  names  of  countries  (always  used  with  the 
article  in  German)  ,,to"  may  also  be  translated  by  in;  thus: 
in  bie  Sdjwei},  to  Switzerland 

To  is  translated  an  if  denoting  direction  to  a  (common)  place, 
when  not  into  is  meant ;  as 
an  ben  glufj  geijen,  to  go  to  the  rirer     an  bie  Sljure  ge&en,  to  go  to  the  door 


acorcling  to,  (Dat.)...  fill' 

folge 

along,  (Ace.)...  enttang 
as  far  as,  Bt§  (s.  p.  181) 
behind,  frnten  CD.  or  A.) 
besides,  except,  aufeer(D.) 
by  the  side  of,   beside, 

ite&en  (D.  or  A.) 
between,  5tutfdjen(D.orA.) 
the     cemetery,     church 
yard,  ber 


the  difference,  ber  llntet* 

ftfieb 
.,    entreaty,  request,  bte 

8ttte 
for  the  sake  of,  utn  (Gen.) 

...ttrilten 

the  heat,  bic  £ifce 
in  spite  of,  troij  (Gen.) 
instead  of,  cmftatt  (Gen.) 
the  lake,  ber  See 

Plur:  bie  Seen 


the  office,(*)  ba3  ffiontot 
(or  eomptoit),   ba§  83u 
reau,  bie  ®anjlei 
opposite,  (Dat.)...  gegeit 

iifier 
outside,  without, 

Ijalfc  (Gen.) 
present,  anfoefenb 
to  punish,  fieftrafen 
Turkey,  bie  Zitrfei 


Exercise  No.  39. 

1.  She  brought  the  bottle  instead  of  the  glass. — He  stood  outside 
his  house. — In  spite  of  my  entreaties  they*  refused**  to  come. — The  hoy 
was  being  punished  on  account  of  his  bad  behaviour.  —  Do  not  go  out 
this  afternoon  during  the  great  heat. — I  pardoned  (Dat.)  him  for  the 
sake  of  his  mother. — According  to  (an)  intelligence  the  ship&  has  beena 
wrecked. — Besides  your  nephew  nobody  &  was«  present. — You  sat  op- 
posite me. — I  have  known  (translate:  I  know)  him  these  (seit) 
seven  years. — We  went  as  far  as  the  church. — They  rode  along  the 
river, — He  sat  behind  me  on  a  chair. — Go  behind  the  house. — The  girl 
stood  by  the  side  of  her  father. — The  boy  threw  the  stone  beside 
our  table. — Between  you  and  him  [there]  is  not  much  difference. — He 
intended  (wollen)  to  step  between  you  and  me. — Is  your  cousin  (/.)  at 
tfie  concert? — No,  she  has  gone  to  the  theatre.—  Let  us  go  to  the  castle. 
— Who  is  going  to  the  post-office  ? — Your  father  is  selling  his  dogs  at 
the  market. — The  ladies  were  at  the  cemetery. — Has  your  cousin  gone 
to  his  (the)  office? — No,  he  is  still  at  his  room. — Can  you  be  here  at  a 
quarter  to  six? — Who  is  at  your  aunt's? — Do  you  go  to  the  tailor's. — 
Go  to  his  house. — They  live  at  their  grandfather's  house. — All  the 
money  belongs  (Dat.)  to  you  now. — Do  you  go  to  Paris  this  year? — No, 
I  shall  go  to  Turkey. — All  the  people  are  running  to  the  lake. 

2.  3ft  3&r  SSater  tm  (Sefdjftft  ?  Stein,  er  tft  ju  nteinem  Dnlel 
gegangen.  S&attn  tootten  <5ie  gu  tntr  fontmen?  %$<§  tcerbe  inn 
etn  SSiertel  auf  3  ttfir.  fomnten.  ©eften  <5ie  tnorgen  auf  ben  S3atl 
bet  4?errn  3??  -ftein,  id)  nwfj  nad)  33.  ge&en.  SSergeffen  @ie 
nicfit,  morgen  Slbenb  an  ben  Shift  §u  lontmen. 

I  should  like  to  go  to  the  market.  Who  gave  this  present  to  (Dat. ) 
you?  Do  you  go  to  Switzerland  or  to  Germany  this  (Ace.)  summer? 
Go  to  the  butcher's  and  fetch  some  meat.  How  many  ladies  were  at 
the  ball  last  night?  Will  (wollen)  you  not  come  to  my  house  from 
time  to  time?  I  stood  often  before  the  picture.  We  are  living  outside 
the  village.  Shall  (solleri)  I  sit  behind  you?  Be  here  at  half  past 
five.  Is  your  brother  at  his  (the)  office  ?  We  were  at  the  post. 

(*)  Only  a  mercantile  office  is  called  Kontor  (or  ©otnptotr),   otherwise  usu- 
ally 93ikeau  (pronounce  93ii=ro)  or 


184 


Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  When  are  at  and  to  translated  in! 

2.  When  are  they  translated  auft 

3.  When  is  at  translated  um  f 

4.  How  are  at  and  to  translated  when  they  mean  to  be  at  or  to  go  to  some- 
body or  somebody's  house  ? 

5.  How  is  to  translated  after  a  verb,  etc.  governing  the  dative  in  German? 

6.  When  is  to  translated  nach? 

7.  How  can  to  also  be  translated  if  standing  with  feminine  names  of 
countries  ? 

£.  When  is  to  translated  an? 


Conversation. 


Will  you  take  (tragen)  this  par- 
cel to  the  post? 

Certainly ;  shall  I  pay  the  pos- 
tage (das  Porto)  ? 

Yes,  if  you  will  be  kind  enough. 

You  are  very  late  to-night. 
I  did  not  catch  my  train. 
Why  did  you  miss  your  trainl 


I  had  to  (musste)  stay  too  long 

at  business. 
When  do  you  generally  go  to 

jour  (tJie)  office? 
Generally  at  9  o'clock  in  the 

morning. 

And  when  do  you  have  itl 
At  half  past  six  in  the  evening. 
Shall  I  come  to  your  house? 
No,  please  wait  for  me  at  the 

station. 

Where  are  you  going? 
I  am  going  to  my  uncle's. 
Have  you  ever  (schon)  been  at 

the  castle? 
No,  never  yet ;  but  to-morrow 

morning  I  shall  go  there. 
Did  you  see  me  yesterday  at 

the  concert? 
Yes  [I  did],  you  were  sitting 

near  the  door. 


SBoIIen    (Sic  btefeS   ^ocfet   auf 

bte  ^oft  tragen  .' 
®enrifj;  foH  id)  ba£  $orto   be* 

gabien? 
3a,  roenn  @te  fo  gut  fetn  root* 

lot. 
@te  fommen  beute  5lbenb  febr 

fpat. 
bin  nid^t  auf  ben  $ug 


SSarum  ftnb  (5ie  nidjt  auf  ben 
3ug  gefomnten?  (SSarum  Der* 
feblten  @te  ben  3"g-) 

3d)  muBte  gu  lange  im  ®efcpft 
btetben. 

2Bann  gefien  <Ste  geroobnltd) 
auf  3  (£omptotr  (or  in3  ®e)~d)aft)? 
9ftorgen3  um  9  ll^r. 


Hub  toann  geben  Sie  roeg? 
Slbenbs  um  fjalb  fteben. 
©ott  id)  §u  S^^  fonimcn? 
S^etn,  bitte  tnarten  Ste  auf  mid) 

auf  bem  93a()nbof. 
SBobin  gefien  <Ste? 
3d)  gebe  gu  meinem  Dn!el. 
©tub  @te  fd)on  auf  bem  ©c&lojie 

geroefen  ? 
^ein,    nod)   me;   aber  morgen 

frii^  rcerbe  id)  btnaufgeben. 
^)aben.  ©ie    mid)    geftern    im 

(Concert  gefe^en? 
3a,  @ie  finb  bet  ber  Sbure  ge* 

feffen. 


185 

(itornse  fto.  39. 


fdjlagt  feutett  eigetien2 

3m  %afyice  1794  fa§  fid)  ein  franjofifdjer  (Emigrant 
genotfjtgt,3  nm4  fein  ($elb  auf  feiner  toetten5  SReife6  §u 
9totf)e7  jn  fatten,  toal)renb  be§  28tnter§  in  etnem  fleinen 
&orfe  in  2Beftfaf)ten  §n  bletben.  S£)a8  e§  i^m  ganjlid) 
an  |jol§  fef)lte,9  fo  rief10  er  einem  33aner,  ber  mit  etnem 
SBagen  t)oEn  tJoriiBerfu^r12,  §u,  toa§  ba§  §olj13  fofte. — 
3)er  93aner,  tuelc^er  an  bem  geBrodjenen14  ^)eutfd^  be§ 
f^ranjofen  merfte,15  bafs  er  etnen  ^tnSldnber16  bor  fidj  ^abe, 
bac^te,  er  !onne  ifm  leic^t  iibert)prt^eilen17,  nnb  berlangte18 
bafjer  brei  Sout^b'or.  ^)er  ^ran^ofe  fing  an  §n  ^anbeln19, 
aber  olme  @rfo(g20,  fo  bag  er  ben  toerlangten18 
fi^tieglic^21  ja^ten  mugte, 

SDer  93anerr  bergniigt  iiber  feinen  gnten  §anbel22, 
nad^bem23  er  abgelaben24  §atte,  nad^  bem  nafjen 
^aufe  nnb  lieg2^  fid)  ein  gritftftiic!  geben.26  28ci§renb27 
er  biefe§  be^agltc^28  Derje^rte29,  rii^mteso  er  fid),  toie  er 
ben  $ran§ofen  iiber^31  £)^r  gefianen32  ^abe;  benn33  er  §abe 

etnen    fleinen   SBagen   §ol§13,    ber   §oc^ften§34  gtoei 
toert§36  fet,  ftir  brei  £otti§b'or  tjcrfauft 
SBtrt^  ein  brafcer3?  Wlann,  f^iittelte38  bei  biefer 
ben  ^opf^o  unb  fagte,    ber    Saner   foUe    fic§ 
fdjamen,  einen  Sremben41  fo  fd^dnblic^42  betrogen  §n  ^aben. 

@i  n)a§! — berfe&te43  ber  S3aner — ba§  §olj13  ge^orte 
mir;  ic^  fonnte  bafiir  Jjerlangen18,  fo  oiel  idj  toottte,  o§ne 
ba§  ein  fritter  fi^  baritber  anf^atten44  barf, 

(gortfefcung  folgt.) 

1  deceit,  2  own,  3  to  compel,  to  oblige,  nothigen,  4  in  order 
(to),  5  far,  6  journey,  7  together,  8  as,  9  he  was  in  need  (of), 
10  to  call  to,  zu.ru/en  (irr.),  11  full,  12  to  drive  by,  voriiber/a^mt 
(irr.),  13  wood,  14  broken,  15  to  perceive,  merken,  16  foreigner, 
17  to  take  in,  iibervortheilen,  18  to  ask,  to  demand,  verlangen,  19 
to  bargain,  handeln,  20  success,  21  at  last,  22  bargain,  23  after, 
24  to  unload,  abladen,  (irr.),  25  &  26  had  given,  27  while,  28  com- 
fortably, 29  to  consume,  to  eat,  verzehren,  30  to  boast,  sick  ruhmen, 
31—32  overcharged,  33  for,  34  at  the  most,  35  dollars,  36  worth, 
37  honest,  38  to  shake,  schutteln,  39  account,  40  head,  41  stranger, 
42  shamefully,  43  to  reply,  versetzen,  44  to  criticise,  sick 
(irr.)  iiber. 


Ibtt 
Fortieth  Lesson.  SSiergigfte  Seftion. 

Remarks  on  Prepositions  (concluded). 
On  (aitf)  is  translated  an : 

1.  If  meaning  at  or  near;  as, 

on  ber  SBonb,  on  the  wall  gronffutt  a.  attain  (am  9»am),  Prank- 
fort  on  the  Maine  an  3§rent  9*ocfe,  on  your  coat 

2.  If  denoting  date  or  if  standing  with  days  of  the  week,  being 
contracted  with  the  article  bem  into  am  (see  page  171);  as, 

am  3ten  9Rai,  on  the  3rd  of  May    am  SDZontag,  on  Monday 

With  (mit)  is  translated  usually  bet,  if  standing  with  names 
of  persons ;  but  if  the  verb  denotes  movement,  the  translation  re- 
mains mit ;  as, 

@r  ifl  6ei  feincr  Xodjter.  He  is  with  his  daughter.  SSer  roofcnt 
6ei  3b,nen?  Who  lives  with  you  ?  3d}  Ijabe  fein  ©eib  bei  mit.  1  have 
no  money  with  (or  about)  me.  —But :  — ®t  fam  mit  feiner  Sodjter.  He 
came  with  his  daughter.  3d)  fonn  nidjt  mit  $l)nen  geJjen.  I  cannot 
go  with  you. 

By  (burdj)  is  translated  toon  when  the  verb  is  in  the  Passive 
voice  ;  as, 

Unfete  Solbaten  tourben  bom  geinbe  gefdjlagen.  Our  soldiers  were 
beaten  by  the  enemy. 

When  the  passive  voice  is  understood  only,  still  Don  must  be 
used;  as, 

2)iefe  Sftuftf  ifl  toon  SBeber.  This  music  is  by  Weber.  3ft  ba» 
©ebidjt  Don  ©filler?  Is  the  poem  by  Schiller? 

By  is  translated  mit,  when  it  means  to  travel,  to  go,  to  send, 
etc.  by  means  of  something  ;  as, 

mit  ber  Gtfenboljn,  by  (the)  railway  mit  bem  Sampfboot,  by  (the) 
steamboat  mit  ber  $oft,  by  (the)  post 

By  is  translated  bet,  (or  neben)  when  meaning  close  to  a  place;  as, 
bei  bet  ^irdje,  by  the  church 

From  (toon)  is  usually  translated  au§,  when  standing  with  an 
abstract  noun ;  as, 

ou§  Setdjlfmn,  from  thoughtlessness     au§  Grfafyrung,  from  experience 
For  (f  iir)  is  translated  auf ,  if  denoting  time ;  as, 

auf  ba§  nacfifte  2JlaI,  for  (the)  next  time  auf  morgen,  for  to-mor- 
row auf  ttne  lange?  for  how  long? 

In  is  translated  auf  in : 

auf§  £anb  geljen,  etc.,  to  go,  etc.  into  (or  to)  the  country  auf 
bem  fianbe  fein,  etc.  to  be,  etc.  in  the  country  auf  33eutfdj,  auf  @n= 
glifdj,  in  German,  in  English,  etc.  auf  biefe  SBeife,  in  this  manner. 

OBSERVATION  : — In  German  prepositions  must  always  precede 
the  word  they  govern  (except  those  on  page  180)  which  can  be 
placed  directly  after ;  as, 

SSon  teas  (roooon)  foredjen  <5ie?  What  are  you  speafcing  of  ?  3)ie$ 
ift  bte  Same,  mit  bet  er  ging.  That  is  the  lady  (whom)  he  was 
going  with. 


187 


the    experience,    bte   @C<= 

fcrijrung 

to  hang,  Ijcmgeit  irr.  intr. 
the  kindness,  bte  ©iite 
„    railway,  bte  (StfenBa^n 
round  (prep.),  urn  (Ace.) 
thesteamboat,ba§  3)ampf= 

'boot 
„  tramway,  bic 


Sunday,  ©ottntag  m. 
Monday,  SJlontag  m. 
Tuesday,  SienStag  m. 
Wednesday,  9Jiitttt)odj  m. 
Thursday,  $onner§tag  m. 
Friday,  ^reitog  m. 
Saturday,  <8am<Stag  m. 
(or  (Sonnabenb  m.) 
January,  Somtat  m. 
February,  gebruar  m. 


March,  9Mr5  m. 
April,  8lpril  ra. 
May,  9Kai  m. 
June,  Sfunt  m. 
July,  Sitli  m. 
August,  Stuguft  m. 
September,  (September  m. 
October,  October  m. 
November,  Sftobemb'et  m; 
December,  SDeccmbec  m 


Exercise  No.  4O. 

1.  What  have  you  on  your  coat? — All  the  hats  hang  on  the  wall. 
— Hamburgh  (Hamburg)  lies  on  the  Elbe  (f.). — On  what  (which}  lake 
lies  Geneva  (Genf)i. — Will  your  aunt  come  on  Tuesday? — No,  she  will 
come  on  Friday. — My  brother-in-law  arrived  on  the  18th  of  July  and  set 
out  on  the  30th  of  August. — With  whom  did  you  come?  —  We  were 
travelling  with  an  old  gentleman. — Was  somebody  with  you?  —  I  sat 
with  my  uncle  in  the  garden. — You  are  being  looked  for  by  your  sister. 
— The  letter  was  being  written  by  me. — By  whom  has  the  fire  been  lit  ? 
— Are  these  poems  by  Schiller  ? — That  picture  is  by  Holbein. — By  which 
steamboat  did  you  come? — Send  (schickeri)  the  parcel  by  (the)  post. — 
They  stood  by  their  house. — The  building  lies  by  the  station. — He  did 
it  from  kindness. — I  know  that  from  experience. — What  shall  (solleri) 
we  prepare  for  next  week  ? — Order  (bestellen)  the  wine  for  this  evening. 
— Do  you  go  into  the  country  in  a  fortnight  ? — We  live  in  the  country. 
— Tell  me  that  in  German. — Whom  are  you  writing  to  (an  Ace.)  ? 

2.  SSoffen  @te  ntdjt  Bet  mtr  BletBeit?     SSir  gtngen  mit  un* 
jerer  Gutter  faa^tereri.    ®tefe  SKufif  ift  Don  £at)bn.    ®a3  tonnen 
@te  nur  burcf)  tonge  (Srfafinmg  lernen.     2Bir  tooljnett  Beim  SBafin* 
Jjof.     Shifter  3$nen  unb  mtr  toirb  jRtemanb  antuejenb  fetn.     %&) 
roerbe  @ic  iridjt  bor  8  Xagen  ertoarten.      S)a§  lefete  3M   tcaren 
@te   an   etnem   (Somttag   fjier.      @r  fd^rteB  ben  SSrtef  am  22[ten 
9JJar§.    SStr  raollen  mit  ber  ^ferbeBafin  fafiren  (go).     £5$  JDrac^ 
oor  bret  SBocfien  mit  (to)  tfim  bariiBer. 

When  will  (wollen)  you  come,  on  Wednesday  or  on  Thursday  ?  I 
cannot  come  before  Saturday.  Is  your  family  living  in  the  country  ? 
The  ship  arrived  on  the  16th  of  June.  Why  were  you  not  at  the  ball 
yesterday  ?  The  door  was  shut  (zumachen)  by  the  servant.  (For)  how 
long  may  (durfen)  I  keep  this  book  ?  Is  somebody  with  your  cousin 
in  his  room  ?  All  the  children  sat  round  the  table.  Is  that  letter  for 
me  ?  The  concert  will  commence  at  six  o'clock.  Let  us  go  to  our 
hotel.  From  avarice  heb  did«  not  eat  enough.  My  brother  has  gone 
to  (the)  business.  I  shall  travel  by  the  railway. 


188 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  When  is  on  translated  ant 

2.  How  is  with  usually  translated  if  standing  with  names  of  persons? 

3.  But  how  is  it  translated  if  the  verb  denotes  movement  ? 

4.  When  is  by  translated  vonl 

5.  When  is  u  translated  mit,  and  when  bci  (or  neberi)  ? 

6.  When  is  from  usually  translated  aus  f 

7.  When  is  for  translated  auf? 

8.  Where  are  prepositions  placed  in  German? 


Conversation. 


How  long  have  you  been  wait- 
ing for  (auf  Ace.)  me  ? 

Above  twenty  minutes. 

Can  you  pay  this  small  bill 
for  me? 

No,  I  have  no  money  about 
me. 

Let  us  take  a  walk. 

Where  shall  we  go? 

Let  us  go  to  the  wood. 

Who  is  going  with  us? 

Your  brother  and  your  cousin 
will  go  with  us. 

Were  you  alone  in  (the)  town 
yesterday? 

No,  my  friend  was  with  me. 

Did  you  come  by  the  railway 
(by  rail)? 

No,  I  came  by  the  tram  (-way). 

You  ought  to  know  from  ex- 
perience, what  man  he  is. 

I  thought  he  would  behave 
better  this  time. 

Eor  what  time  have  you  or- 
dered the  workmen? 

I  ordered  them  for  8  o'clock 
to-morrow  morning. 

By  whom  were  you  accom- 
panied home  last  night? 

My  cousin  accompanied  me. 

Since  when  have  you  lived  in 
the  country? 

I  have  lived  there  these  two 
years. 


mid) 


bet 


SSie  lange  fiaben  @te  auf 

gettmrtet  ? 

Ueber  gnjan^tg  9ftinuten. 
£omien  Sie   btefe  Heine 

nung  fiir  mtdj  begatylen? 
•ftein,   id)   fjabe  fein   (Mb 

mtr. 

2Bir  ttjotten  fpajteren  geljen. 
SSofitn  f  often  rotr  geljen? 
23ir  trotten  in  ben  SBalb  geljen. 
SBer  gefjt  mit  [un§]? 
Sljr    23ruber    unb    Sljr    Setter 

tuoHen  mit  [un§]  gefjen. 
SSaren    @te    geftern    aUein    in 

ber  ©tabt? 

9^em,  mein  Ofreunb  roar  bet  mtr 
^amen  @ie  mit  ber  ©tjenbabn 

(mit  ber  93dm)? 
S^etn,  td^  !am  mit   ber   $Pferbe* 

ba^n. 
Sie  follten  au^  SrfaBrung  tptffen, 

raa§  fiir  ein  -Jftann  er  tft. 
glaubte,  er  n?iirbe  ftc^  btefeS 
^al  beffer  betragen. 
2luf    rotetotel    U^r    ^aben   @te 

bte  2Irbeiter  beftettt  ? 
Sc^  beftettte  fie  auf  morgen  frii^ 

8  Ufir. 
SSon  tnem  ttjurben   6te   geftern 

3Ibenb  nacft  ^aufe  begleitet? 
9ftem  Setter  beglettete  mid^. 
©eit  roann  hjofinen  ©te  auf  bent 

Sanbe? 
;5C^    roofine    fcit 

ba  (or  bort). 


RcaMiuj  <torct0£  Ho.  40. 


SBetrug  fdjlagt  fctncn  etgettett 

(gorfeijung,  continuation.) 

35er  SBtrtlj  fcljitrieg.     3)er  33auer  fjatte  fein 
ber^efjrt  unb  fragte  nun:  —  2Ba§  bin  idf)  fdjulbtg?1 

—  3)rei  £oui§b'or!  —  t>erfe|te  ber  SSirtf). 

—  2Ba§!     3)rei  Souigb'or  fiir  ein  <Stiic!2    95rob    nut 
®afe  unb  §ioei  ®ia§d)en3  ©djitapps?*  —  fdpe  ber  SBauer. 

3ft,  aHerbincj§,5  —  entgegnete6  ber  SBirt^  eBen  fo  ge* 
laffen^  tote  §ufcor;8  —  S3rob,  ^dfe,  @c^na^§4  gefjoren  mirj 
tc^  lann  bafiir  fo  t)iel  tierlangen,  al§  td^  tottf,  unb  tuenn 
3^r  mtr  bie  bret  Sout^b'or  nic^t  Bega^lt,  fo  ne^me9  ic^ 
©ure  ^ferbe  unb  (£uren  SSagen  fo  lange  in  SSefc^Iag,  bi§10 
t(^  mein  (Mb  fiaBe.  SSenn  3f)r  glauBt,  bag  (Sud)  Un= 
rec^t  gefc^ie^t11,  fo  t)er!lagt12  mic^  Beint  stotmann13!  — 

SDer  93auer  lieg14  fic^  ba§  nit^t  jtoeimal  fagen15;  er 
eilte  ju  bent  Se|teren16  unb  bradjte17  feine  S3e}(^n)erbe18 
an.  S5er  STmtmann^  tiefeiQ  ben  SBirt^  fogteicf)20  gu  p^ 
rufen,  unb  ber  (Smpfang21  toar  nic^t  ber  freunbtii^fte22. 
3)er  SSirti)  er^a^Ite  gan§  rx^ig,  toa§  ifyn  ju  einer  folc^ 
auffaHenben23  gorberung24  tjeranlagt26,  unb  er  tootte  an 
bent  S3auer  nur  ba§  ^Red§t26  ber  SBieberoergeltung27  au§= 


Unter  fol^en  Umftanben29,  —  fagte  ber  tetmann13,— 
fann  td^  bent  SBirtfje  nid§t  Unrest30  geben,  —  unb  er  ent* 
fd^ieb31,  bag  ber  S3auer  i^nt  bret  Soui^b'or  gafjten  fotte. 

S)er  33auer,  ftdj  tjerbriegit^32  am  ^opfe  Ira^enb33, 
jog  bie  ©olbftucfe34  tangfant35  au§  ber  Xafdje  unb  tegte 
fie  tnit  tjerbtffener3^  SBut!)3^  auf  ben  Sifcfj. 

(<Sc^Iu§  folflt.) 

1  to  pay,  2  piece,  3  little  glasses,  4  dram,  5  certainly,  6  to 
reply,  entgegnen,  7  calmly,  8  before,  9  to  confiscate,  in  Beschlag 
nehmen  (irr.),  10  till,  11  to  be  done  wrong,  Unrecht  geschehen  (irr. 
Dat.},  12  to  summon,  verklagen,  13  bailiif,  14  &  15  had  said,  16 
latter,  17  to  put  forth,  oxibringcn  (irr.),  18  complaint,  19  had 
called,  20  immediately,  21  reception,  22  most  friendly,  23  strik- 
ing, 2*  claim,  25  to  induce,  veranlassen,  26  law,  27  retaliation, 
28  to  exercise,  ausiibcn,  29  circumstances,  30  to  do  injustice,  Unrecht 
geben,  31  to  decide,  entschciden  (irr.\  32  irksomely,  33  to  scratch, 
kratzen,  34  gold  -pieces,  35  slowly,  36  suppressed,  37  rage. 


iyo 

Forty-first  Lesson.  ©tnunbtrierjigfte  Seltion. 

The  Conjunctions. 

Conjunctions  are  invariable,  and  there  are  two  kinds :  1)  Co- 
ordinative  2)  Sub-ordinative. 

1)    Co-ordinative  Conjunctions. 


clfo,  so,  thus,  consequently 
audE),  also,  too,  as  well 
ouBerbem,  besides 
bann,  ba,  then 


,  be§toegen,  borum),  there- 

fore, on  that  account 
bennodj,  nevertheless 
beffen=ungead)tet,  notwithstanding 
befto  (or  umfo),  (so  much)  the  [with  a 

comparative  after] 
bod),  yet,  stiU 


jebodj  (gletdjttjoljl),  however,  still 

ober)^*)  either.. .(or) 
(mitljin),  consequently 
inbeffen  (unterbeffen),  meanwhile 
nod)  (aud)... nidjt),  nor 
jo,  thus,  so 

«jeil§...tljetl§,  partly... partly 
iioerbie§,  moreover 
ttjeber...nod),  neither.. .nor 
jtoar,  indeed,  it  is  true 
etc.  etc. 


When  co-ordinative  conjunctions  begin  a  sentence,  the  subject 
is  placed  after  the  verb  or  auxiliary ;  as, 

3d)  war  franf;  be§f)aH>  fonnte  id)  nidjt  fomtnen.  I  was  ill;  there- 
fore I  could  not  come.  3d)  fiejaljlte  bie  9?edjnung ;  bcnnort)  toar  ber 
Saufmann  nid)t  jufrieben.  I  paid  the  bill;  nevertheless  the  shop 
keeper  was  not  contented. 

NOTE.  — When  such  a  conjunction  does  not  commence  the  sentence 
the  subject  keeps  its  usual  place,  and  the  conjunction  is  generally  placed 
after  the  verb  or  after  a  personal  pronoun  without  preposition  ;  as, 

S>et  2lrst  ift  Ijter ;  id)  fjabe  il)n  jcbod)  nod)  nidjt  gefeljen.  The  phy- 
sician is  here;  I,  however,  have  not  seen  him  yet. 

Many  adverbs  may  be  used  as  co-ordinative  conjunctions  and  then 
belong  to  this  class. 

The  following  seven  co-ordinatives  are  exceptions  to  the  above 
rule,  and  do  not  alter  the  position  of  the  subject,  if  directly  pre- 
ceding it ;  viz : 

unb,  and  I   ober,  or 

ober  (oUein),  but,  however  fonbern,  but  (on  the  contrary) 

benn,  for  ^because)  I   foitjo^l...ol§  aud),  both.. .and,  as  well  as 

Examples :— Sofcotyl  fein  SSater,  al§  audj  feine  9Kutter  famen;  abcr  er  roar 
fdjon  tobt.    Both  his  father  and  his  mother  came,  but  he  was  already  dead. 

not  only— but  also 

In  ttidjt  nur...fonbertt  oudj  (nic^t  atletn  or  nic^t  bloS... fonbern 
),  not  only... but  (also),  fonbern  and)  usually  leaves  the  order 
unaltered,  but  then  audj  is  placed  after  the  verb  or  after  a  personal 
pronoun  without  preposition ;  as, 

aJZetn  SBrubcr  tear  ntdjt  nur  511  ^auje,  fonbern  er.mar  aud)  in  fetnem 
Simmer.  My  brother  was  not  only  at  home,  but  he  was  in  his  room. 

If  there  is  only  one  verb,  fonbern  cwclj  remain  unseparated;  as, 
SRidjt  nur  fein  SSater,  fonbern  aud)  feine  SJiuttec  fam.      Not  only 
his  father,  but  also  his  mother  came. 

(*)  After  ober  the  position  of  the  subject  better  remains  unaltered. 


191 


besides  (conj.),  auBerbcm 
both.. .and,  "1  fotooljl... 
as  well  as  J  ol§  aucfj 
the  debt,  bie  <3<i)ulb 
either... (or),     entroebet... 
for  (conj.),  benn     [(ober) 
the  furniture,  ba§  9Ji66el 
„   husband,  ber  SJiann 
(ber  ©emaljl) 


impossible,  unmBgttdj 
to  insure,  berfidJern 
meanwhile,  inbcffen 
neither..  .nor,tt)eber...noc!j 
not  only...  but  (also),  nid)t 

nur...fonlerrt  aucfi 
partly...  partly,      tljeilg... 


possible   mogUtf 


to  surprise,  ufjerrajdjen 
(so  much)  the  [with  a  com- 
parative after],  befto 
then,  bann 

therefore,  batjer  (beSfjalb) 
the     waiting-room,     ber 

SBarteTaat 
„    wife,  bie  ^frait 
(bie  ©emaljlin) 


Exercise  No.  41. 

1.  I  shall  visit  you  and  your  brother  ;  Ic  shall6  also«  visit  your 
cousin. — He  is  not  willing  to  pay  the  money,  besides  it  is  not  possible 
[for]  him  (Dat}. — Be  at  my  house  at  half  past  nine,  then  I  will  show 
(Dat.)  you  the  things. — He  was  not  at  home,   therefore  the  door  was 
locked  (schliessen). — Either  your  son  must  come  himself,  or  he  must 
send  somebody. — I  knew  it  already  and  was  therefore  not  surprised  by 
the  news ;   the  more  surprised  were  those  who  did  not  know  it. — Neither 
the  house  nor  the  furniture  was  insured. — The  money  belonged  partly 
to  (Dat.)  the  wife,  partly  to  the  husband. — We  were  conversing  in  the 
waiting-room,  meanwhile  the  train  started. — He  sold  his  horse  last  week, 
and  his  brother  bought  it  again. — I  wished  (wolleri)  to  sleep,  but  it  was 
impossible. — We  must  go,   or  the  church  will  be  (Passim]  shut  (zu- 
machen). — Light  the  gas,  for  it  grows  (werden)  dark. — Both  the  uncle 
and  the  aunt  are  coming. — His  house,  as  well  as  his  garden,  have  been 
sold. — He  not  only  had  no  money,  but  he  was  also  in  (had  also)  debt 
(plur.). — Not  only  the  glass,  but  the  bottle  also  was  broken. 

2.  SDletn  ©djttmger  tft  auggegangen ;  (Sie   !6nnen   tfjn   bafier 
nidjt  fpredjen  (see).    S)ie   S)ame   fang   tueber   gut,    nod)   ridjtig. 
©4en  @ie  in3  Xljeater,  bann  merben  @ie  3&ren  ffreunb   treffen. 
S)a§  SSftobel  ttmr  tljeilS  Derftcfier.t,  tfjetB  ntcfit.    Strf)  bin  nod)  ntdjt 
ferttg ;  baljer  miiffen  (Sie  attein   gefjen.      SSir  fonnten   ntdjt   tn3 

gef)en,  benn  bie  Satire  war  gefdjtoffen.   ©otoo^l  bie  ©olbaten, 
aud^  bie  Sftatrofen  em^orten  fid).    @c  ^at  eine  reidje  (wealthy) 
gran;  aufeerbem  fiat  er  felbft  etn  gro^e^  ^ermogen. 

I  went  into  the  house,  but  I  did  not  see  him.  Both  my  brother 
and  his  daughter  saw  you.  He  was  too  sleepy,  therefore  he  would 
(wollen)  not  remain.  You  must  either  sing  or  dance.  Neither  his 
uncle  nor  his  cousin  was  present.  You  must  wait,  or  I  cannot  help  (Dat. ) 
you.  We  could  not  depart,  meanwhile  it  became  colder.  They  did 
not  believe  it,  for  it  was  not  possible. — The  ladies  were  sitting,  and  the 
gentlemen  were  standing.  Her  children,  as  well  as  her  husband,  have 
died.  The  woman  is  not  only  poor,  but  also  very  ill.  At  first  h«  was 
surprised,  then  he  became  quiet. 


192 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  When  co-ordinative  conjunctions  begin  a  sentence  where  is  the  sub- 
ject then  placed  ? 

2.  When  such  a  conjunction  does  not  commence  the  sentence,  how  are 
the  subject  and  the  conjunction  placed? 

3.  Which  conjunctions  do  not  alter  the  position  of  the  subject,  if  di- 
rectly preceding  it  ? 

4.  Does  sondern  auch  in  nicht  nur,  etc.  ...sondern  auch  usually  alter  the 
position  of  the  subject  ? 

5.  Where  in  this  case  is  auch  placed? 

6.  If  there  is  only  one  verb,  is  sondern  auch  then  separated? 


Conversation. 


Mr.  X.  is  not  in  yet ;  you 
therefore  must  wait  a  little. 

Do  you  expect  him  soon? 
Yes,  in  about  five  minutes. 
We  have  a  very   cold   winter 

this  year. 
I  think  summer  will   be    all 

the  warmer. 

Did  you  find  Mr.  N.  at  home  ?  j 
No,  I  found  neither  him   nor 

his  wife. 
Can  you  recommend  (Dot.)  me 

these  shirts  and  collars? 
Yes,  they  are  both  cheap  and 

Why  did  you  not  come  last 
night? 

I  had  to  work  late  in  (the) 
business,  and  meanwhile  the 
last  train  had  started. 

You  must  not  go  there,  for  you 
will  find  nobody  at  home  to- 
day. 

Very  well,  then  I  shall  go  to- 
morrow. 

Perhaps  it  will  not  be  possible 
for  me  to  go  with  you  to- 
morrow. 

Either  you  must  make  up  your 
mind  now,  or  I  must  set  out 
alone. 


£err  $,.  tft  nod)  nicfit  filer ;  @tc 

miiffen    be^balb    em    toenig 

irarten. 

Qcramrten  (Ste  ifi.n  batb? 
3a,  ungefaljr  in  ffinf  3fttnuten. 
2Bir   baben  biefe3   %cfyt    einen 

fehr  fatten  SBtnter. 
3d)  glaube,  ber  Sommer   nrirb 

befto  tuarmer  fein. 
Xrafen  @ie  £errn  $1.  p  £aufe  ? 
Sftein,  id)  traf  toeber   t&n,  nod) 

feine  fjrau. 
^onnen  @te  mtr  btefe  ^emben 

unb  $ragen  empfe^Ien? 
3a,  fie  ftnb   fotoo&t   bitttg    ate 

and)  gut. 
SBarunt  ftnb  @te  geftem  5tbenl> 

nidjt  gefommen? 
Sd)  batte  feBr  btel  im  ©efd)c^ 

§u   tbun,    nnb   inbeffen   ma 

ber  Ie|te  3^9  abgegangen. 
@ie  miifjen  nidjt  bortbtn  ge^en, 

benn   @ie    merben    -fttemanb 

^eute  p  ^aufe  treffcn. 
©ut,    bann   toerbe   id)   morgen 

geben. 
SSietteid)t  hJtrb  e§  mtr  nicfit  mo* 

glid)  fein,  morgen  mit  %$ntn 

gu  geben. 
entmeber  miiffen  @ie  f  d)   je 

entfdjtieBen,    ober    t^    mu 

aflein  abreifen. 


193 

drerri0e  Ito.  41. 


SSetrug  fdjfagt  feinctt  etgenen 


3dj  toifl  ba§  ®elb  nidjt  fiir  midj,  —  fagte  fjierauf  ber- 
ba§  ftmnen  @ie  fid)  toof)!1  benfen,  |jerr  ^mtmattn! 
•Jjaben  @ie  bie  ®iite2  unb  toecfyfeln  <3ie  einen  8oui§bor; 
ber  Waiter  §at  bag  SScigeldjen3  $ofy  felbft  auf  jtoet  Skater 
gefrf)d|t;4  biefe  bitte  td^  tfjm  511  bega^Ien  unb  ba§  Uebrtge5 
bem  armen  ^rangofen  §uftetten6  ju  laffen.7  Su^  ba§  S^ii^- 
ftiirf  berlange  ic§  ni^t§.  —  S)er  5(mtmann  tourbe  burc^  biefe 
$utmutf)tg.!eit8  freubigs  iiberraf^t10,  (Sr  ^a^lte  bte  jtoei. 
X!)a(er  an  ben  SBauer  unb  entlieg11  i§n;  bem  (Shnigranten 
tunrbe  ber  9teft12  juritcfgegeBen. 

55er  SSorfatt13  tunrbe  inbeffen  in  htr§eru 
nur  in  bem  S£)orfe,  fonbern  aitd^  in  ber 
befannt16.  3Jlan  f^rac^  mit  Sob1^  t?on  bem  SStrt^e,  after 
mtt  befto  gro^erem  UntDtffen18  t)on  bem  93auern,  ber  jtc^ 
inbeffen  bamit  troftete19,  ba§  er  toenigften§20  fein  $0(5 
beja^It  unb  ein  grufjftiic!  umfonft21  er^atten 

3uftimg22  erfuijr23  auc^  ein  Bena^barter2^ 
etraa§  baijon,  unb  ba  in  biefer  $eit  t)iele  ^otgb 
oeriibt27  tuorben  toaren,  beren  Better28  er  ntdjt  auf  bie 
6^)ur29  fjatte  fommen  fonnen:  fo  erlunbigte30  er  fic(j  bet- 
bent  5(mtmann  nadjj  bem  S3auern,  2)urc§  i^n  brarf)teyl  er 
fotoo^l  ben  ©ot^erfciuferS2  al3  aud^  ben  tduferss  in  Gr- 
fa^rung,  unb  bet  ber  toeitern34  llnterfud^ung35  ergab36  e§ 
fi^,  bafj  ber  S3auer  ba§  SBagelc^en3  §ol§  gefto^ten  §atte. 
@r  tt)urbe  bather  fiir  biefen  ^re^el37  nad)  ben  beftel^enben38, 
ni^t  geiinben39  ©efefeen^o  geprig^i  beftraft 

1  I  am  sure,  2  goodness,  3  little  cart,  4  to  value,  schatzen, 
5  balance,  6  —  7  to  have  transmitted  to,  8  kindness,  9  agreeably, 
10  to  surprise,  iiberr&schen,  11  to  discharge,  entlassen  (irr.),  12  re- 
mainder, 13  occurrence,  14  short,  15  neighbourhood,  16  known, 
17  praise,  18  indignation,  19  to  console,  trosten,  20  at  least,  21  foi 
nothing,  22  by  chance,  23  to  hear,  erfahren  (irr.  ),  24  neighbouring, 
25  forester,  26  thefts  of  wood,  27  to  commit,  veriiben,  28  perpe- 
trators, 29  track,  30  to  inquire,  sich  erkundigen,  31  to  ascertain,  in 
Erfahrung  bringen  (irr.),  32  seller  of  the  wood,  33  buyer,  34  fur- 
ther, 35  inquest,  36  to  prove,  sich  ergeben  (irr.),  37  transgression, 
38  existing,  39  mild,  40  laws,  41  rightly. 

German  Grammar. 


194 


Forty-second  Lesson. 


Seftton. 


2)    Subordinative  Conjunctions. 


al§,  when,  as,  than, 

beoor,  elje,  before 

bt£,  until,  till 

ba,  as,  since  (reason) 

bafe,  that 

bamtt,  in  order  that 

falls,  tin  gaHe  [bafe],  in  case  [that] 

inbein,  while,  in  [with  a  present  par 

ticiple  following] 
nodjbera,  after 
06,  whether,  if 


obgletdj   (obfrfjon,   obtooljl),  although, 

though 
feit,  (ictibem),  since  [that] 


fobalb  [al§](*),  as  soon  as 
folonge  [al§](*),  as  long  as 
fo  oft  [<£!](*),  as  often  as 

ungeodjtei,  notwithstanding 
nmljrenb,  while,  whilst 
roenn,  if,  when 
toeil,  because 
toie,  as,  how 


Compound  Subordinative  Conjunctions. 


ol§  6i§,  untfl 

alg  ob  -i  as  if  (the  verb  in 

ol§  (or  »ic)  tDCitn  f    the  Imp.  Suhj.) 

«I§  bafj,  but  that,  but 

anftait  bajj,  instead  of  (with  a  present 
participle  following) 

baburd),  bafe,  by  (with  a  present  par- 
ticiple following) 

bamit...mdE}t  (Subj.),  lest 


gletdj  tote,  just  as 

ofine  bajj,    without   (with   a  present 

participle  following) 
io  bofe,  so  that 

njenn...uid)t  (tDofern...nid^t),  unless 
l"o...aii(^  (nrie...audj),  however 
Dorauegeie^t,  ba§,  provided  that,  sup 

posing 
utn...5U,  m  order  to; 

—and  some  more. — 


Subordinative  Conjunctions  make  the  clause  which  they  in- 
troduce dependent,  and  so  throw  the  verb  to  the  end  (like  the  re- 
lative pronouns  on  page  104) ;  as, 

3d)  gitig  ju  iljm,  fobalb  cr  nadj  £aufe  fam.(**)  I  went  to  Mm  as 
soon  as  he  came  home. 

NOTE. — In  compound  tenses  the  auxiliary  verb  must  be  last  in  a 
dependent  clause,  the  order  of  verbs  being  thus  the  reverse  of  the  Eng- 
lish ;  as, 

SBiffcn  6ie,  bafe  3ft>r  Dnfel  morgctt  fern  £au§  nerf craft*  b>ben&  toirb?* 
Do  you  know  that  your  uncle  will0  have6  soldc  his  house  to-morrow  ? 

But  in  the  compound  tenses  of  an  auxiliary  verb  of  mood,  standing 
with  another  verb,  the  verbs  are  placed  at  the  end  in  their  usual  order;  as, 

®r  blteo  ju  £<mfe,  tocil  cr  nidjt  f»ai«  au§geb,ettc(***)  fonnen6.  He 
remained  at  home,  because  he  hasa  not  been  able6  to  go  out6, 
©lauben  @te,  ba&  Sic  aHetn  tocrbena  fommen6  biirfenc?  Do  you  think 
that  you  will0  be  allowed6  to  come0  alone? 

If  the  dependent  clause  precedes  the  main  clause,  the  subject 
of  the  main  clause  is  placed  after  its  verb  or  auxiliary ;  as, 

©obalb  er  nadj  £aufe  lam,  ging  id)  $u  ib,«.  Aa  soon  as  he  came 
home  I  went  to  hiiri- 


(*)  9H§  usually  is  omitted.  But  it  must  be  put,  if  fobolb  a!8,  etc.  are  no  longer 
conjunctions,  but  adverbs  (i.e.  if  not  introducing  a  dependent  clause);  as, 

Rommen  ©ie  fo  oft  aI8  mSglidj.    Come  as  often  as  possible. 

(**)  A  dependent  clause  is  separated  from  its  main  clause  by  a  comma  in  Gtenuan. 

(***)  See  remark  on  separable  verb*,  if  removed  to  the  end  of  the  sentence  (p.  146). 


195 


although,    though,     oB= 

gletci) 

as  long  as,  folange  [at§] 
as  often  as,  fo  oft  [ol§l 
as  soon  as,  fo&ftlb  [al§] 
in  case  [that"),  falt§ 
notwithstanding,      unge« 

cdjtet 
(*)  Pronounce: 


in  order  that,  bamtt 
provided  that,  supposing, 

borciuSgeiefct,  bafe 
till,  until,  BtS 
while,  whilst,  ttjafjrenb 
the  answer,  bie  2inttoort 
,,    chimney,  ber  ®amin 
cross,  Bofe 


the  dentist,  ber 
to  extract,  aitc^iefyen  irr. 
the  loss,  ber  Bertuft 
Plur:  bie  SScrlufte 
necessary,  notfjig 
the  opera,  bie  £)per 
the  ticket,  ba§  23tllet(*) 
:,   tooth,  ber 


Exercise  No.  42. 

1.  It  is  not  necessary  that  you  should  come  (trans:  that  you  ccme) 
this  evening.  —  Go  to  the  dentist,  in  order  that  he  may  extract  (  Subj.) 
your  bad  tooth.  —  He  paid  all  the  bills,  notwithstanding  he  had  had  a 
great  loss.  —  She  is  very  cross  because  she  cannot  go  to  the  opera.  —  Stay 
here  till  the  rain  has  ceased.  —  Can  you  fetch  some  stamps  while  I  am 
writing  this  letter?     I  will  try  it,  although  the  post-office  is  closed 
(schliessen).  —  Your  sister  will  take  a  ticket  for  you,  in  case  you  should 
come  too  late.  —  I  will  repeat  it,  provided  that  you  will  not  interrupt 
me.  —  We  have  visited  him  as  often  as  we  were  (trans:  have  been)  able 
to  go  to  him.  —  He  may  (konnen)  have  come  because  perhaps5  hea  has 
been  obliged  to  come.  —  Although  there  was  a  chimney  in  the  room  one 
could  not  light  a(t)  fire.  —  As  soon  as  the  shoemaker  has  made  the  shoes 
he  will  send  them.  —  In  case  jou  don't  give  better  answers  I  shall  not 
ask  you  [any]  more.  —  Come  here  as  soon  as  you  can.  —  I  called  the  ser- 
vant that  she  may  light  (Subj.)  the  gas. 

2.  @ie  Tttiiffett  fid)  ntc&t  Beflogen,   bo$   ber  93ucpinber   ba3 
SBud)  nic&t  gefc&irft  fyat.    S3itte  ttmrtett  @ie,  btj§  id)  bie  Oitittitng 
gefcforiebett  fabe.     (So  lange  er  in  ber   ©tabt   mofinte,    bttbete   er 
fid)  em,  bafj  er  fran!  fei  (was).     $d)   fiabe   gefprodjen,    toeif   id) 
ijabe  fprec&ett  tniiffen.    (Ste  oerliefjen  ba3  |mu3,  fobolb  ifyr  SBruber 
anfam.      @d)retben   (Ste   fobalb  al3  mogttc^  (possible),   bantit   er 
ben  SSrtef  no^  heute  erfiaite.     ^dj  tuitt  t§>  Sf)nett  fQ9en/  &oraiu>» 
gefe|t,  ba§  @ie  mtd^  nidjt  oerratfien.    SSaljrenb  ic^  unfere  SBtflete 
nahm,  ging  ba§  S)ampfboot  ab. 

I  believe  that  he  is  very  ill.  Although  he  is  ill,  he  is  willing  to 
come.  They  were  playing  while  I  was  in  the  garden.  As  often  as  she 
sang  he  began  to  speak.  You  are  a  good  man,  but  you  have  no  pa- 
tience. I  have  a  bad  tooth,  therefore  I  must  have  it  extracted  (aus&ieJien 
lassen).  I  will  do  it  for  yon,  provided  that  you  cannot  come  yourself. 
He  could  take  the  letters  because  my  desk  was  open.  We  stayed  with 
them  until  it  became  dark.  In  case  you  wish  (wollcn)  to  hear  the 
singer  (f.)  you  must  go  to  the  opera  this  evening.  As  soon  as  the 
dentist  is  at  home  I  shall  go  to  him. 


(t)  Observe  that  "not  a,  not  any"  are  generally  translated  fein. 


196 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  What  is  a  clause,  introduced  by  a  subordinative  conjunction,  called? 

2.  What  is  done  with  the  verb  in  a  dependent  clause  ? 

3.  If  there  is  a  compound  tense  where  must  the  auxiliary  verb  be  in 
such  a  clause  ? 

4.  But  what  is  done  with  the  verbs  if  the  compound  tense  of  an  auxiliary 
verb  of  mood  is  standing  with  another  verb? 

5.  What  is  to  be  observed,  if  the  dependent  clause  precedes  the  main 
clause  ? 


Conversation. 


Do  you  think,  that  your  cousin 
(f.)  will  come  to-day  ? 

Yes,  /  am  certain  of  it. 

Can  you  wait  till  I  have  dressed 
myself? 

Certainly  I  can  (wait). 

Think  upon  the  matter  once 
more  (noch  einmal),  whilst  I 
am  writing  this  letter. 

No,  I  know  what  I  want,  it 
therefore  willnotbe  necessary. 

Although  I  have  a  ticket,  I  shall 
not  go  to  the  opera. 

Why  do  you  not  go  ? 

Because  I  don't  feel  well. 

I  hope  that  you  will  feel  better 

to-morrow. 
I  hope  so  too. 

Has  the  physician  come  yetl 
Yes,  he  came  whilst  you  were 

in  your  room. 
In  case  you  wish  to  catch  your 

train,  you  must  make  haste. 

I  have  still  five  minutes  to  spare. 

As  long  as  the  bad  weather 
continues  (anhalten),  we  shall 
not  be  able  to  go  out. 

No,  we  must  stay  at  home. 

Do  you  know  that  your  friend 
will  not  be  able  to  come  to- 
night ? 

Yes,  I  know  it. 


©louben  (Ste,  baf?  31)re  (Joufine 
beute  fommen  tuirb? 

§a,  id)  njetJ5  eg  getmfj. 
onnen    (Sie    jrarten,    big    id) 

mid)  angeHeibet  tyabe? 
©enrifj  [fann  id)  toarten]. 
Ueberlegen  <Sie  fid)  bie  Sad^e 

nod)    etnmat,    Jocifjrenb     id) 

biefen  S3rief  jd)reibe. 
9?ein,  id)  ttjet§,  mag  id)  nritt;  eg 

rotrb  bafier  nid^t  notfiig  fetn. 
Dbgleid)    id)    ein    SSittet    fiabe, 

iuerbe  id)   nid^t  in  bie  £)per 

gefien. 

SBarum  gefcen  @ie  ntd^t? 
SSetl  eg  mir  nid)t  roo&I  ift. 

gen  bejfer  fein  roirb. 
Sd)  ^offe  eg  and). 
3ft  ber  2lr$t  jc&on  gefommen? 
3a,  er  font,    roaljrenb   @ie   in 


te 


6ie  [nod)]  auf  ben 
fommen  njollen,  miiffen 
ftdj  beeilen. 

S^    fiabe   nod)   fflnf   SKinuten 
Beit. 

So  lange   bag   fd)Ied)te   SSetter 
anplt,  njerben  hrir  ntd)t 
ge^en  f  onnen. 

5Hein,    tt)ir 
bleiben. 

SBiffen  @tc, 
^eute  Stbenb  nid)t  ttJtrb  fom 
men  f  onnen? 

3a,  tc^  tueiB  eg. 


197 

ReaMttg  dm*ci0e  Mo.  42, 


$er  grofte 

Stoet  Sftatrofen,  ein  grlanber  unb  cm  (Smglanber, 
bie  auf  bemfelben  @d^iffe  bienten,2  macfjten3  jufammen  au§, 
gegenfeitig4  fiir  einanber  ju  forgen,5  fafl§  einer  in  bent 
fceginnenben  ®antpfe6  fcertounbet  toerben  foflte.  3latf)  eini= 
gen  TOnuten,  tDa^renb  bie  erften  ©c^ixffe^  getoedjfelt 
lourben,  ri§8  eine  ^ationenfugel9  bent  (Snglanber  ein 
^einio  lueg,  fo  bajg  er  auf  ba§  SSerberf11  nieberfieli2,  ©r 
Bat  nnn  feinen  ffrennb,  i§n  jum  3trjte  jn  tragen,  n;a§ 
biefer  auc^  BereittotHig13  t^at.  ^aum  aber  §atte  er  fetnen 
<Sefa!)rtett14  anf  bent  Sftiicfen15,  al§ie  cine  jtoeite  ^ugeli7 
t>em  armen  Xenfel18  ben  ^opf19  toegrifj.8  %n  bent 
<5)etofe20  unb  bent  (^etotrre21  ber  ©c^tac^t22  §atte  ber  Sr= 
la'nber  jebod^  ba§  le|te  Ungliitf23  feine§  ^anteraben24  nid^t 
fcemer!t  unb  fe|te25  feinen  SBeg  §unt  (^f)trttrgen  fort.  @tn 
Dffeier  fafj  i^n  mit  bent  !o^}f(ofen26  ^orper2?  unb  fragte 
i§n: — SBoIn'n  totttft  bu?— 3um  Softer,  fagte  ber  ^rla'nber. 
— Sum  ®o!tor? — ertokberte  ber  Officer 5 — bu  SDummfopf28, 
ber  9Jlann  §at  ja29  feinen  ®otf™  t)crloren!— Site  ber 
SUlatrofe  bie§  |orte,  tuarf  er  ben  ®orj)er27  t)on  feinen 
<Scf)uftern30,  Betrac^tete  i^n  aufmerlfant  unb  rtef : — Sftetner 
(Seel31!  er  fagte  ntir,  e§  hjcire  fein  93ein13;  aber  ic^  toar 
buntm32,  bag  it!)  i^nt  gtaubte;  benn  er  ttwr  intmer  ein 
grower  Stigner,1 


1  liar,  2  to  serve,  dienen,  3  to  arrange,  OMsmacTien,  4  mutually, 
5  to  take  care  of,  sorgen,  6  combat,  7  shots,  8  to  tear  away,  weg- 
reissen  (in.)  9  cannon-ball,  10  leg,  11  deck,  12  to  fall  down, 
*nie&eTfallen  (irr.),  13  readily,  14  companion,  15  back,  16  when, 
17  ball,  18  devil  (fellow),  19  head,  20  bustle,  21  confusion, 
22  battle,  23  misfortune,  24  comrade,  25  to  continue,  fortse/ze?t, 
26  headless,  27  body,  28  blockhead,  29  can't  you  see  it,  30  shoulders, 
31  heaven  knows,  32  stupid. 


198 

Forty-third  Lesson.  Sretunbtrieratgfte  Seftton. 

The  Subordinative  Conjunctions  (concluded). 
OBSERVATION  : — Adverbs  of  interrogation  if  not  used  in  direct 
questions(*)  have  a  relative  meaning ;   they  therefore  make  the 
clause  they  introduce  dependent  and  throw  the  verb  to  the  end. 
Such  are : 


in  ami,  when 
ttjarum,  why 
loesfjalo,  wherefore 
n>ie,  how 


toieotct,  how  much 
tote  Innge,  how  long 
too,  where 
tooljer,  where  (from) 


toofiftt,  where  (to) 
tooburd),  whereby 
toortn,  wherein 
nJomit,  wherewith;  etc. 


Examples. — (Sogen  @ie  ntir,  toaira  Ste  fieute  Slbenb  fommen  toollcn.  Tell 
me  when  you  wish  to  come  this  evening.  (Bagte  er  3^nen,  loofyin  er  ge&en 
loitt?  Did  he  tell  you  where  he  will  go?  SBariim  <5ie  nidjt  cingelaben  toorben 
loaren,  toiiBte  id)  nidjt.  Why  you  had  not  been  invited  I  did  not  know. 

Remarks  on  Conjunctions  (Adverbs  &  Prepositions). 
But  is  generally  translated  after  (or  aOeilt). 

3lber  instead  of  introducing  the  sentence,  may  be  placed  after 
the  verb. —  If  the  verb  is  followed  by  a  personal  pronoun  without 
preposition,  abet  is  placed  after  such  pronoun ;  as, 

Sttetn  Dnfel  fiat  ein  $ferb,  abet  er  fiat  fetnen  SBogcn  or  er  fiat 
aber  fetnen  SBagen.  My  uncle  has  a  horse,  but  he  has  no  carriage. 
3d)  fonnte  @ie  fefien,  abec  metn  ^rreunb  bemerfte  @ie  nid^t  or  mem 
greunb  bemerfte  Sifr  aoer  nidjt.  I  could  see  you,  but  my  friend  did 
not  perceive  you. 

NOTE. — %&cr  may  also  be  placed  between  the  subject  and  the  verb, 
if  the  subject  is  another  person  or  thing  than  the  subject  of  the  first 
sentence;  as, 

3$  tonnte  ©ie  fefien,  mein  ^reunb  a&er  Benterfte  Sie  nidjt. 

But  is  translated  fonfoern,  if  occurring  after  the  negation  not 
(ntdjt)  and  having  a  contradictory  meaning. — This  is  usually  the 
case,  if  not  and  but  have  one  verb  or  one  auxiliary ;  as, 

®r  ift  nicfjt  $u  ^aufe,  fonbern  in  ber  Stabt.  He  is  not  at  home, 
but  in  town.  9ttcfjt  id),  fonbern  mein  Skuber  war  bort.  Not  I,  but 
my  brother  was  there.  $$  Ijo6e  °ie  Sieuigfeit  nirfjt  gelefen,  fonbern 
gefiort.  I  have  not  read  but  heard  the  news. 

However  but  after  not  is  translated  aber  if  not  contradictory  (i.  e. 
usually  if  not  and  but  each  has  its  own  verb) ;  as, 

(Sr  ift  nod)  ntd)t  ju  $oiife,  aber  er  nrirb  fealb  foramen.  He  is  not 
at  home  yet,  but  he  soon  will  come. 

But  after  a  negation  (not  excepted)  in  the  same  sentence,  is 
translated  al3  (or  au&er) ;  as, 

£ie  ftinber  fiotten  nid)t§  aI3  SBrob.  The  children  had  nothing 
but  bread,  igd)  fa£)  5Riemanb  ate  Ofiren  93ruber.  I  saw  no  one  but 
your  brother.  (£t  fiatte  fein  @tlb  al§  ba3,  tt>eldje§  @te  ifim  gaben. 
He  had  no  money  but  what  you  gave  him. 

But  being  an  adverb  and  meaning  only  is  translated  nur  or  erft 
(s.  p.  172) ;  as, 

3d)  fiobe  nur  etnen  SBruber.  I  have  but  one  brother.  (B  fdjrieb 
mir  erft  geftern.  He  wrote  to  me  but  yesterday. 

(*)  In  direct  questions  the  subject  always  follows  the  verb;  as, — SBann  font 
men  @ie?  When  do  you  come?  — If  there  is  no  direct  question,  the 
subject  always  precedes  the  verb  (for  examples  see  above). 


199 


to  accept,  attttefjmen  irr. 
the  arm,  ber  Slrm 
Plur:  bie  Slrme 
the  company,  party,    so- 
ciety, Die  ©efettfdjaft 
„    confidence,  bag  SSer» 

trail  en 

„    cook  (f.),  bie  &od)in 
,,    danger,  bie  ©efaf)t 
dangerous,  gefoljrlicf) 
to    detect,    to    discover, 
entbecfen 


difficult,  fdjtner 
to  fear,  fiircfiten 
to  grant,  6ett>iHigen 
the  hand,  bie  £mnb 
Plur:  bie  |>anbe 
„  journey,  bie  SReife 
„   leg,  ba§  SSein 
,,    misfortune,   bo§   Un= 

gliict 

the    printer,    ber    83itcl)= 
brucfer 


to  print,  brudew 

the    proposal,    ber   S?or» 


to    propose,    fcotfc&Iagen 

irr. 
to  telegraph,  tetegroiiniren 

(Dat.) 

the  thief,  bet 
wherefore, 
to  write  down,  aufjcfjrei" 

ben  irr. 


Exercise  No.  43. 

1.  Do  you  know  wherefore  we  have  lost  their  confidence? — I  can- 
not understand  (begreifenj  where  the  cook  (f.)  has  gone. — Tell  (Dat.) 
me  why  you  make  us  such6  a'*  proposal. — Explain  to  (Dat.)  me  how 
the  thief  could  be  (Passive)  detected. — Did  you  write  down  how  much 
you  have  paid  for  your  suit  of  clothes  ?  —  Ask  your  mother  when  the 
party  will  be  here. — It  is  difficult  to  say  how  long  the  storm  will  con- 
tinue (&nhalten). — I  proposed  it  to  (Dat.)  him,  but  he  did  not  accept 
my  proposal. — He  tried  everything,  but6  he  hada  no  luck. — The  printer 
has  printed  ihe  books,  but6  the  bookbinder  has*  not  yet  bound  them. — 
I  should  like  (s.  p.  176)  to  accompany  you  but6  the  journey  is*  too 
dangerous. — He  has  not*  broken  (brechen)  his  (the)  leg6,  but  his  (the) 
arm. — Not  he,  but  his  wife  received  me. — He  will  not  write,  but  tele- 
graph.— I  did  not  fear  the  danger,  but  I  wished  (wollen)  to  avoid  it. — 
She  has  not  read  the  book,  but  she  has  looked  it  through.  —  "We  had 
nothing  but  misfortune. — I  cannot  find  any  other  hat  but  yours. — No- 
body but  the  police  was  present. — The  poor  man  has  but  one  hand. — 
You  have  but  to  come  and  you  will  get  your  money. — Your  son  was 
with  me  but  an  hour  ago. 

2.  SOSer  trjeifj,  ftarm  ber  SBrteftrager  btejen  SSrtef  gebracfjt 
bat?  ©r  berjucfite  eine  3?ebe  p  batten  (make),  aber  ber  Carnt  tear 
§11  grofj  (much).  Sag  ©ebtcftt  itmr  rucijt  gebmcft,  jonbern  ge* 
frfjrteben.  Sri)  farm  3$re  S3ttte  ntcfjt  bettrifltgen,  aber  icfj  ftrifl 
@ie  einem  t>on  rnetnen  gremtben  empfeblen.  ©r^ablen  @ie  mir, 
lwe  ber  9ftort>  begattgen  rrmrbe.  $rf)  trjoffte  mit  tfjm  jprec&en, 
er  tear  aber  nic^t  mefyr  (no  longer)  int  ©afttjofe.  ^d)  lam  nidjt 
mit  ber  (Stfenbaijn,  fonbern  mit  ber  ^ferbebtibn.  $aben  @ie  feinen 
anbent  UeberrotJ  al§  ben,  toelc^en  Sie  anfjaben  (have  on  you)  ? 

It  was  not  his  business,  but  he  had  much  experience  in  such  things. 
Can  you  remember  where  you.  have  lost  your  gloves  ?  Where  have  you 
lost  your  pocket-book  ?  We  did  not  knock  at  the  door,  but  at  the  win- 
dow. It  was  but  a  mistake  (Irrthum  m.),  that  I  sent  (Dat.)  you  the 
same  bill  twice.  I  did  not6  find  your  parasol",  but  your  umbrella. 
During  our  journey  to  Germany  we6  had"  nothing  but  rain.  We  were 
waiting  for  (auf  Ace.)  you  a  long  time  in  the  waiting-room,  but  you 
•lid  not  come. 


200 


Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  What  is  done  with  the  verb,  if  the  clause  is  introduced  by  an  ad- 
verb of  interrogation  and  there  is  no  direct  question  ? 
•  2.  How  is  but  generally  translated  ? 

3.  What  other  place,  besides  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  can  aber 
take? 

4.  But  where  is  aber  placed  if  the  verb  is  followed  by  a  personal  pro- 
noun without,  a  proposition  ? 

5.  When  may  aber  also  te  put  between  the  subject  and  the  verb? 

6.  When  is  but  translated  sondern  ? 

7.  When  has  it  usually  a  contradictory  meaning? 
$.  When  is  but  after  not  translated  aber? 

9.  How  is  but  translated  after  a  negation  (not  exceptcd)  in  the  same 

sentence  ? 
•10.  When  is  but  translated  nur  and  erstt 


Conversation. 


Tell  me  why  your  hands  are 
not  clean? 

Because  I  have  been  working 
in  the  garden. 

Why  did  you  not  clean  them? 

I  have  not  had  the  time  yet  to 
do  so. 

Could  (Subj.)  I  see  you  to-mor- 
row morning? 

Yes,  but  when  would  you  like 
to  come? 

At  half  past  nine  if  it  is  con- 
venient to  (Dat.)  you. 

Very  well,  I  shall  expect  you  at 
that  time. 

Do  you  know  when  the  steam- 
boat will  arrive  ? 

I  think  at  seven  o'clock. 

Do  you  expect  somebody? 

Yes,  my  brother  telegraphed 
me,  that  he  will  (Subj.)  come 
by  the  steamboat  this-e  vening. 

Why  does  he  not  take  the  rail- 
way? 

He  always  prefers  travelling  by 
water. 

But  now  with  this  fog  it  is  rather 
dangerous. 

My  brother  does  not  care  much 
.  about  that. 


8agen  ©te  mir,   ttmrunt 

|>anbe  ntcfot  rein  ftnb? 
SSetl  id)  im  Garten   gearbettet 

babe. 

SSarirm  reinigten  6ie  fte  nicfit? 
3$  fiabe  nod)  feine  3eit  geftabt, 

e3  §u  tfcun. 
$6nnte    tdj    (Ste    morgen 

tyrecfcen  ? 
£50,    aber   rtmtm    nwrben 

gerrte  !ommen? 
Urn  §atb  sefjit,  toeim  e3 

artgenelmt  ift. 
©ut,  ic§   ttjerbe   6te  urn 

$eit  ertoarten. 
SBtfien  @te,  ttmnn  ba§ 

boot  an!ommen  nrirb? 
%<fy  glaube  wit  fieben  llfjr. 
(grtuarten  @ie  SemQnb? 
8a,  mein  Sruber  telegra^btrte 

mir,  bafc  er  feeute  Stbenb  mit 

bem£ampfboot!ornmenft»erbe. 
SSarum  fontmt  er  nid^t  mit  ber 


friifj 
@ie 


bie[e 


immer  ben  SSaffertueg 

bor. 
Stber  jefct  bet  biefem    9^ebel  ift 

e3  giemlid^  gefcibrlic^. 
2Jlein  93ruber  madjt  ftd^   nid^t 

»iel  barau^. 


201 

(Erercisc  Ha.  43. 


2>er  SBein^anbrcri  OJeoraS  I. 

(£in  323einf)dnbler,i  §oflieferant2  $eorg£  I.  toon  (£ng* 
Canb,  ttiar  em  ®iinftling3  beSfeJBen  unb  pftegte4  §u  ben 
!6mglic^en5  3>agben6  ^ugelaffen?  §u  toerben.  S3ei  ber 
$M!efjr8  toon  ber  Sagb6  unterfjielt  ftdj  ber  ®6nig  etne§ 
£age§  fefjr  leiitfelig9  mtt  ifjm  unb  rttt  eine  Betrdc^ttic^e10 
©trede  28ege§n  an  feiner  @eite.  £)er  bienfitJ)uenbe12 
Sorb  pftertei3,  al&  be§  ^onig§  5lufmerlfamleiti4  bnrd^ 
einige  UorilBerge^enbe15  Seute  aBgetenlt16  tonrbe,  bent 
SBehtfjanbfer  etrt)a§  in§  D^ri7.  Xer  9ftonardj,  bent  ba§ 
nicl^t  entgtng18,  fragte  fetnen  Steferanten19  in  guter  Sanne20: 
—  28a§  ijat  ber  Sorb  §u  S^nen  gefagt?—  SDer  SSein^dnbteri 
antnjortete:  —  @ire,  td^  ^abe  nttt^  unafcfidjtltdj21  gegen  @rt). 
S^ajeftat  une!)rBietig22  Betragen.  3Jlt)lorb  fagte  ntir, 
ba§  idj  nteinen  §nt  abne^men  ntiiffe,  toenn  (Srt).  SJ^qeftat 
mit  ntir  fprecfjen.  5lttein  ^aBen  @n).  SJlqeflat  bie  ($nabe23 
§n  Bebenlen24,  ba§  ntetn  §nt,  toenn  i^  anf  ber  3agb7 
Bin,  an  nteiner  $erriic!e25  Befeftigt26  ift,  unb  meine  ^erritcfe25 
an  ntetnem  ^0^7.  gd^  felBft  aBer  Befinbe  mic^  auf  bent 
eine§  tnut^tgen29  9loffeg30r  f0  ba§,  irenn  etn 
Jjerttnter32  fontmt,  tt)ir  aEe  jufantnten  fjerttnter32 
miiffett.—  ®er  tontg  la^te33  ^er^ti^s^  iiBer  biefe  brollige3^ 
@ntf(^ulbigung36  unb  erlauBte  itym  gernr  ben  §ut  auf  bent 
^opfe2?  §u  Befallen,  toentt  er  auf  ber  3«9b6  mtt  tfjm 
fprec^e. 

1  wine  merchant,  2  purveyor  to  the  court,  3  favourite,  4  to  use, 
pflegen,  5  royal,  6  the  hunt,  die  Jagd,  7  to  admit,  zulassen  (irr.), 
8  return,  9  affably,  10  —  11  considerable  way,  12  attending,  13  to 
whisper,  fliistern,  14  attention,  15  passing,  16  to  divert,  abknken, 
17  ear,  18  to  escape,  *entgehen  (irr.),  19  purveyor,  20  good  humoured, 
21  unintentionally,  22  disrespectfully,  23  grace,  kindness,  24  to 
consider,  to  observe,  bedenJcen  (irr.),  25  wig,  26  to  fasten,  befestigen, 
27  head,  28  back,  29  mettlesome,  30  horse,  31  thing,  32  down, 
33  to  laugh  at,  lachen  uber,  34  heartily,  35  droll,  36  excuse. 

German  Grammar  7* 


Forty-fourth  Lesson.  SSterunbtnerjtgfie  Seftion. 

Remarks  on  Conjunctions  (Adverbs  &  Prepositions) 
(continued). 

For,  if  a  conjunction  (i.  e.  in  the  meaning  of  because),  is  always 
translated  benn  ;  as, 

3dj  f  ann  nidjt  bejaljlen,  benn  idj  Ijaoe  fein  ®elb  6et  rait.    I  cannot 
pay,  for  I  have  no  money  with  me. 

For,  if  &  preposition,  see  pages  181  &  186. 

2lud)  is  the  translation  of  the  English  also,  too,  as  well. 

Too,  if  not  having  the  meaning  of  as  well,  is  an  adverb  and 
translated  §u,  being  then  found  before  adjectives  and  adverbs  ;  as, 

Siejer  $ut  ift  ju  grot;.    This  hat  is  too  large. 

Besides,  if  a  conjunction  (L  e.  in  the  meaning  of  moreover),  is 
translated  oitf;crbcm;  as, 

@§  toot  lalt;  auijerbem  u^neite  e§.    It  was  cold;  besides  it  snowed. 
Besides,  if  a  preposition,  is  translated  aufjcr;  as; 

fhtBer  Sfaem  SSater  fonntc  audj  ^Ijr  23ruber  Ijelfen.    Besides  your 
father,  your  brother  was  also  able  to  help. 

Yet,  still,  if  conjunctions  (i.e.  in  the  meaning  of  nevertheless, 
however),  are  translated  fcorf)  ;  as, 

<£r  roar  Ijier,  bod)  falj  idj  tljn  nidjt.     He  was  here,  yet  I  did  not 
see  him. 

Still,  if  adverb,  and  yet,  with  a  negation,  are  translated  nod)  ;  as, 

3ft  g^r  SSater  nodj  ju  £auie?    Is  your  father  still  at  home?    6r 
ift  nod)  nidjt  ausgegangen.    He  has  not  gone  out  yet. 

Then(*),  is  translated  batttt,  either  as  a  conjunction  or  as  an 
adverb,  if  having  the  meaning  of  afterwards,  thereupon  or  in  that 
case;  as, 

3uerft  ging  cr  nodj  £aufe,  bann  fam  er  ju  unS.    At  first  he  went 
home,  then  he  came  to  our  house. 

Then,  as  an  adverb  having  no  particular  meaning  and  used  in  direct 
or  indirect  questions  as  a  kind  cf  exclamation,  is  translated  benn;  as, 

2Ba§  fagte  er  benn?    Then  what  did  he  say?      grogen  Sie  i!jn, 
tnarum  er  e£  benn  nidjt  tf)un  nnH.    Ask  him  why  he  will  not  do  it  then. 

When,  if  a  conjunction,  is  generally  translated  tuenn  ;  except 
when  not  meaning  as  or  after;  as, 

Kommen  Sie,  roenn  idj  ju  £aufe  6in.    Come  when  I  am  at  home. 
NOTE.  —  In  this  case  also  soniotinies  nmnn  instead  of  »en»  is  used 
if  distinctly  referring  to  time. 

When,  if  a  conjunction,  and  meaning  as  or  after  is  translated  al£ 

(the  verb  being  then  either  in  the  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  tense);  as, 

&I»  er  mirf)  iaf;,  faradj  er  imt  ntir.    When  he  saw  me,  he  spoke 

to  me.      31>r  33rubet  fam,  a!3  Sie  ouggegangen  toaren.    Yo^r  brother 

came  when  you  aad  gone  out. 

When,  as  an  adverb  of  interrogation  (in  direct  or  indirect  questions), 
is  always  woira;  as, 

28ann  erfn'elten  6ie  nteincn  Srtef  ?  When  did  you  receive  my  letter? 
©ie,  roann  er  lominen  roirb?    Do  you  know  when  he  will  come? 


"Then"  meaning  "ftt  that  time"  is  translated  bamal?. 


203 


the  caution,  bie  $Borftd)t 

cautious,  borfidjtig 

the   darkness,    bie   2>im= 


„    ear,  ba§  Dfir 

Plur:  bie  OB/ren 
.,    ebb(-tide),  bie  (£66  e 
everywhere,  ii6eraH 


the  eye,  bag 

Plur:  bie  Slugen 
„   flood,  bie  gfhttij 
„    fog,  mist,  ber  9ie6el 
,,    grammar,  bie  ©root' 

matt! 

,,    gun,  rifle,  ba§  ©etoeJjr 
punctual, 


the  progress,    ber 

fd&ritt 

to  recognize,  erfennen  irr. 
the  smoke,  ber  9*aucf) 
to  smoke,  raud)en 
unpunctual,  unpiinftltd) 
visible,  fic^t6ar 
welcome,  tmEfommen 


Exercise  No.  44. 

1.  "We  mnst  make  haste,  for  the  flood  is  coming. — What  did  you 
pay  for  this  grammar  ? — I  can  lend  (Dat.)  you  my  gun  for  a  week. — Man 
(der  Mensch)  has  two  ears;  he  also  has  two  eyes. — Will  my  friend  be 
welcome  as  well?  Yes,  he  too6  will"  be  welcome. — You  are  too  cau- 
tious. Better  too  much  than  too  little.  —  Your  task  is  done  (made) 
unpunctually,  besides  it  is  written  badly. — Besides  the  darkness  [there] 
was  (herrschen)  a  heavy  (stark)  fog. — One  could  not  see  the  fire,  yet 
the  smoke  was  visible  everywhere. — I  have  many  and  good  cigars,  still 
I  do  not  like  to  smoke. — Are  you  still  the  same  punctual  man? — (The) 
ebb-tide  has  not  yet  arrived  (*emtreten  irr. ).  Then  we  must  wait 
ptill  longer. — It  lightened  and  thundered  for  some  time  (eine  Zeitlang), 
then  it  rained. — Why  will  you  sell  your  house6  then"? — Come  when  I  am 
not  at  (the)  work. — When  the  weather  is  finer  we  shall  go  out. — I  recog- 
nized him  when  he  had  told  (Dat.)  me  his  name. — The  fire  broke  out 
when  all  were  sleeping. — When  can  you  grant  my  request? — Don't 
ask  me  when  I  can  do  that. 

2.  £>ie  ®ran!fjett  ber  armen  $rau  tow  witfjt  gefaljrltdj,  bodj 
fonnte  fie  nidjt  arbeiten.  $d)  roetfj  nicfrt,  toann  idj  bie  [ftedjnung 
be§af)lt  babe;  aufjerbem  Ijabe  id}  and)  bie  Guittitng  oerloren.  28tr 
Derliefeen  ben  (iflftfof,  al£  bie  ©onne  anfgtng.  9ftan  fomtte  nidjt 
unterjdjeibeit,  ttms  fur  etn  .©djiff  t%  war,  benn  e^  ift  noc§  §u 
bunfel  geroefen.  28a<s>,  <Sie  finb  noif)  im  SSett!  3uerf^  QQb  w  nttr 
feine  Stntujort,  bann  fagte  er  mir  2lEe§.  ©agen  ©ie  tntr,  roann 
ber  ^a^tmtjt  nteinen  3a^  auSjieljen  fann.  SSarum  finb  ©ie 
benn  ^ier?  Siefe  ?tufgabe  ift  ntcfrt  gu  fc^JDer.  SSefuc^en  ©ie  miclj, 
njenn  id)  jit  ^aufe  bin.  SSerbe  id)  ^fymn  bann  tmftiotnmen  iein? 
©ie  foltten  anf  etnige  SBodjen  in  bie  ©c^aietg  gefien. 

When  the  whole  party  is  present,  he  will  make  (halten)  his  speech. 
At  first  I  looked  for  you  everywhere,  then  I  went  home.  What 
time  was  it  when  you  spoke  to  (mit)  the  gentleman  ?  Besides  his 
gun  each  man6  hada  a  revolver.  We  came  to  the  river  when  the 
steamboat  had  already  started.  I  offered  him  the  money  three  times 
and  still  he  would  (wollen)  not  accept  it.  One  could  see  the  smoke 
when  it  became  daylight  (Tag).  He  was  drinking  very  much  wine, 
besides,  he  was  also  smoking  too  much.  When  did  the  party  set  out  ? 
Is  the  dentist  still  at  home  ?  Yes,  he  has  not  gone  out  yet.  Knock  at 
the  door  when  you  find  it  shut  (schliessen),  and  I  will  then  open  it  to 
(Dat.)  you.  I  work  very  much,  yet  I  do  not  make  any  progress. 


204 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  How  is  for  translated  if  a  conjunction,  and  how  if  a  preposition? 

2.  What  is  the  translation  of  auch  in  English  ? 

3.  How  is  too  rendered,  if  being  an  adverb  and  not  having  the  meaning 
of  as  well  ? 

4.  How  is  besides  translated,  if  a  conjunction,  and  how  if  a  prepo- 
sition ? 

5.  When  are  yet  and  still  rendered  dock,  and  when  nochJ 

6.  When  is  then  translated  dann,  when  denn,  and  when  damalsl 

7.  How  is  when  generally  translated  if  a  conjunction  ? 

8.  How  is  it  translated  if  meaning  as  or  after  ? 

9.  How  is  when  translated  if  an  adverb  of  interrogation? 


Conversation. 


Why  are  yon  always  so  un- 

punctual? 
I  always  go  to-bed  too  late,  and 

therefore  I  cannot  get  up  in 

time  ( bei  Zeiten). 
Then  you  ought  to  go  to-bed 

earlier. 
I  shall  do  so  as  often  as  possible. 

Will  you  pay  me  a  visit  (Besuch 
m.)  when  you  come  to  N.? 

Yes,  I  shall  come  and  see  you  (or 

call  on  you). 
I  cannot  remember,  when  we 

saw  one  another  last. 

I  also  cannot  remember  (it). 
Is  it  not  five  months  sincel 

It  may  be  as  long  as  that. 
Do  you  like  smoking  ? 
Yes,  I  am  very  fond  of  it. 
Are  you  smoking  tobacco'? 
No,  I  like  cigars  much  better. 

What  cigars  have  yon  ? 
Partly  German,  partly  Havanah 
cigars 


SSarum  fotmnen  (Ste  imtner  fo 

unjwnftlidj  ? 
3d)  gefce  immer  511  fpat  §it  23ett, 

itnb  bafjer  fann  id)  ntcfot   bei 

3etten  aufftefien. 
3>ann  foCten  @ie  friifcer  311  SSett 

gefien. 
%fy  toerbe  e§  jo   oft   al£   mog* 

ltd)  tf)im. 
SBerben  @ie  mtr  ettten   SBefudj 

madden,   toenn  @te  nacij    91. 

fommen? 
Sa/id^  toerbe  @te  befud^en   (or 

bet  S^wen  borjprec^en). 
^d)  fann  mtd^   ntd^t   erinnern, 

n?ann    ttJtr    etnonber    gnle^t 

gefefcen  ^aben. 
3Ittd)  id)  lann  mid)  beffen  ntc^t 

erinnem. 

@tnb  e§  ntd^t  j^on  fiinf   do- 
nate? 

(£§  fann  fd^on  fo  lange  ^er  fein. 
9?aud)en  Sic  gern? 
So,  id)  raud)e  fefir  gern. 
atoitdjen  @te  Xabaf? 
S'letn,  idj  rauc^e  t)tel  Iteber  Kt- 

garren. 

fiir  gtgarren  fiaben  @te? 
beutfd)e,  tfietB 

Stgarren. 


205 

(torctee  Mo.  44. 


(Stoift  iwb  fcin  Wiener,2 

5H§  ber  fcerftorbene3  Sterfiant1  @nrift,  fcon  einem 
Wiener2  begleitet,  einft  erne  SReife  madjte,  leljrten4  fie  in 
eittem  SBirtpfjanfe5  ein  nnb  blieben  bort  iiber  -ftadjt6 
2lm  nad)ften  Sftorgen  fcerlangte?  ber  $>e(f)ant  feme  @ttefel, 
toorauf  ber  Wiener2  fie  ifmt  unge£u|t8  bradjte.  ©em 
§err  bemerlte  e§  imb  fagte: — 2Ba§  ift  ba3,  X^oma§?- 
3)a9  6ie  reiten  Pollen  unb  e§  ^eute  regnet, — anttoortete 
biefer, — fo  glauBte  id§,  fie  ftmrben  Batb  tt)ieber  fc^mu^tg10 
toerbett. — (^ut, — fagte  ber  ^etfxint,1  —  ge^'  imb  mad)'  bie 
$ferbe  fertig !— 3RtttIertoetteii  gab  er  bent  SSirt^e12  ben 
feinem  Wiener2  lein  griiftncl^  Sn  geben.  5ll§15 
gnriiclfefjrte16  nnb  melbete1^,  bag  bie  $ferbe  fertig 
feien,  befall  i^m  ber  Xed^ant  biefelben  tJorjn 
Slber  |jerr  Xec^ant1  ic^  §abe  mein  Sriifjftiic!14 
ge^abt, — fagte  £f)oma§. — J^ttt  nit^t^19, — fagte  ber  ^e^ant1, 
— bn  toixrbeft  bodjj  balb  tt)ieber  ^ungrig20  tuerben. — @ie 
fafeen21  anf  unb  ritten22  fortj  ber  ^ec^ant1  §og  ein  $8ud) 
au§  ber  Xafc^e  unb  fing  an  jn  (efen.  UntertoegS  begegnete 
i^nen  ein  §err.  9tl§  er  ben  Xo!tor  lefen  fa^  tt)oHte  er 
i^n  nic^t  ftoren23,  ritt  borbei24  nnb  rebete25  ben  Wiener2 
an: — 2Ber  ift  biefer  grembe2^?— SJlein  £err,— anttnortete 
Xf)oma§. — 2)a§  tan  ic§  mir  benlen,  bnntmer2^  9Jlenfc^j 
aber  toofjin  reitet  %? — 3n  ben  §immet! — SBarnm  fagft  bn 
ba§? — SSeil  id&  fafte28,  nnb  mein  $err  betet29. — 

1  dean,  2  servant,  3  deceased,  4  to  put  up,  *einkehren,  5  inn, 
6  to  pass  the  night,  *ul>er  Nacht  bleiben  (irr. ),  7  to  want,  verlangen, 
8  un cleaned,  9  as,  10  dirty,  11  in  the  mean-time,  12  innkeeper, 
13  order,  14  breakfast,  15  when,  16  to  return,  *zuruck&eAmt, 
17  to  announce,  melden,  18  to  bring  to  the  door,  vorfiihren,  19  never 
mind,  20  hungry,  21  to  mount  (a  horse),  *a,M$sitzen  (irr.).  22  to  ride 
away,  *fortreiten  (irr. ),  23  to  disturb,  storen,  24  to  ride  by,  *vorbei- 
reiten  (irr.},  25  to  address,  anreden,  26  stranger,  27  silly,  28  to- 
fast,  fasten,  29  to  pray,  beten. 


Forty-fifth  Lesson.  gimfimbtnerjigfte  £e!tton. 

Remarks  on  Conjunctions  (Adverbs  &  Prepositions} 

(continued). 

As,  introducing  a  dependent  clause,  is  translated  ol£,  bo,  01 
trie,  as  follows : 

1.  It  is  translated  al$,  if  denoting  time,  and  then  meaning  when;  as, 

81I§  id)  nad)  $anfe  fam,  fanb  id)  3^re  Xl)ute  often.     As   I  came 
home,  I  found  your  door  open. 

2.  It  is  translated  ba,  if  denoting  reason,  and  then  meaning  since(*); 

asj — 3d)  mug  es  glau&en,  ba  @te  e3  fefbft  oerfidjern.     I  must  believe  it, 
as  you  assert  it  yourself. 

3.  It  is  translated  tote,  in  most  other  cases,  not  meaning  when  or 
since  then ;  as, — gie  flnb  nidjt  gefontmen,   tine  Sic  berfarodjen  Ijaoen. 

You  did  not  come  as  you  promised. 

In  comparisons,  not  so... as,  is  translated  nidjt  fo...a!3  (or  nrie) 
and  as.. .as  by  ebeitfo...al3  (or  tote)  (see  page  80). 

If  there  is  no  comparison  as...  as  is  rendered  by  fo...aI3  (or 
tote)  (see  also  foot-note  (*)  on  page  194) ;  as, 

9ftad)en  @ie  bie  Ueoerfefcung   fo   gut  al§  moglid).    Do  the  trans- 
lation as  well  as  possible. 

Before,  if  a  conjunction,  (i.  e.  if  introducing  a  dependent 
clause),  is  translated  elje  (or  bebor) ;  as, 

3d)  uerfaufte  rnetn  $fcrb,  c^c  eg  jii  alt  ttmrbe.      I  sold  my  horse 
before  it  became  too  old. 

Before,  if  an  adverb  (of  time),  is  translated  toorljer;  as, 

SSaren  Ste  border  bort?     Were  you  there   before-?      SBir   lanien 
ffinf  ?Ktniiten  corner.    We  came  five  minutes  before. 

Before,  if  a  preposition  (i.  e.  if  preceding  its  noun  or  pronoun),  is 
translated  t»or;  as, 

3d)  ttmr  toor  gljnen.  bort.    I  was  there  before  you.    SSir  famen  fiinf 
9K;nuten  Dor  bet  ®efettid|afr.    We  came  five  minutes  before  the  paarty. 

I£  denoting  condition,  is  translated  ttJCttn;  as, 

3d)  tuerbe  ntorgen  oBretfen,  toenn  id)  leinen  SBrief  Don  3I)nen  er= 
^alte.     I  shall  depart  to-morrow,  if  I  do  not  receive  a  letter  from  you. 

NOTE. — When  after  if  (wenn)  the  verb  is  in  the  Imperfect  or  Plu- 
perfect tense,  the  subjunctive  mood  must  be  used ;  as, 

3d)  ttmrbe  3ljnen  ein  SOReffer  (jefien,  tuemt  id)  eine§  Ijatte.    I  should 
give  you  a  knife  if  I  had  one. 

If,  in  the  meaning  of  whether,  is  translated  ob ;  as, 

3d)  ttjeife  nid)t,  06  id)  fdjreiBen  fann.    I  do  not  know,  if  (whether) 
I  can  write. 

NOTE.  —  Though,  although,  are  translated  obgteid)  (o&fdjon  or  obn>i>l)l). 
,  gleidj,  etc.  are  found  sometimes  separated ;  as, 

Cbgleid)  id)  6ie  nidjt  fanb  or  Ob  id)  6ie  gleid)  nid^t  fairb.    Although 
I  did  not  find  you. 


(*)  "Since,"  referring  to  time,  is  translated  feit  (or  fettbem)  if  a  conjunction; 
f either  (or  feitbem)  if  an  adverb,  and  feit  if  a  preposition. 


the  advice,  ber  SRatf) 

Plur :  see  page  17 
afterwards,  nadfter 
the  alteration,    bie   Sten= 

berung 
back,  juriuf 

to  follow  (to  observe,  to 
obey),  fcefolgen  (tran»  * 


207 

the  hair,  ba3  |jaar 
Plur :  bie  |>aare 
head,  ber  Sopf 
health,  bie  ©efunbljeit 
novel,  ber  9toman 
offer,  ba£  Slnerbteten 
partner,     ber 


the  permission,    bie 

lauBrtift 

to  presume,  Dermuttjen 
the    promise,    ba§    9S 

fpredjen 
quick,  irfjnell 
slow,  langfam 


©r* 


Exercise  No.  45. 

1.  As  (wte»)  the  clock  struck  eleven,  I  went  out.  —  I  was  present, 
as  (when)  lie  made  (Dat.)  you  that  offer.  —  You  ought  to  stay  at  home, 
as  (since)  your  health  is  still  rather  indifferent  (schwach).  —As  (since)  I 
gave  you  (the)  permission,  you  may  (Jconnen)  do  it.  —  It  happened  as  I 
presumed.  —  My  hair  is  not  so  black  as  yours.  —  The  head  of  this  dog  is 
as  big  as  that  of  that  dog.  —  Walk  as  quickly  as  possible.  —  Write  as 
distinctly  as  you  can.  —  Before  I  can  give  you  such6  aa  promise  I  must 
speak  to  (mit)  my  partner.  —  Do  it,  before  it  will  be  too  late.  —  Why  did 
you  not  make  this  alteration  before  ?  —  Your  brother-in-law  should  fol- 
low my  advice  before  and  not  afterwards.  —  I  saw  him  before  his  last 
illness.  —  You  will  arrive  before  me.  —  If  you  walk  so  slowly,  you  will 
find  (treffen)  nobody  at  home  when  you  arrive.  —  Would  you  be  glad 
(s.  p.  167)  if  he  came  alone?  —  If  you  had  not  listened  you  would  not 
know  that.  —  Ask  him  if  (whether)  he  has  received  my  letter.  —  I  shall 
try  if  (whether)  I  can  buy  the  second  volume  of  this  novel. 

@§  ftmr  gerobe  fcalb  adjt,  afc>  tmr  bie  Stabt  erreidjten.  SBeun 
@ie  nicfot  jTeifjiger  jinb,  toerben  @te  feinen  gortjcfptt  madjen. 
SBte  ttwren  fcfcon  nor  fieben  Ufir  im  Sweater,  ©rfjretbett  @ie  ben 
53rief  ab,  dje  <3te  ifin  auf  bie  ^oft  tragen  (bring).  3)a  @te 
je|t  genejen  finb,  joflten  @te  auf§  Sonb  gdjen.  ^rjnnten  @ie 
nit^t  etnige  3JHmtten  border  fommen?  S^  ^e^B  nicfit,  ob  e§ 
mogttc^  fetn  tt)irb.  ^c^  Derfte^e  ba^,  ob  trf)  gleit^  nttijt  fo  btet 
(Srfafjrmtg  babe  al§  @ie.  (£§  toiirbe  mtr  leib  fein,  wenn  ©ie  ba^ 
65elb  ntdjt  em^fdngen.  ©te  miiffen  leben,  h)ie  $jht  SSater  getebt 
{jot.  S^  f^rec^e  ntdjt  fo  gut  S'eiitj'cf)  al§  @te.  2Bir  loerben  jeben^ 

bor  ^finen  tm  Xfjeoter  fein. 


I  will  relate  it  as  I  have  heard  it  myself.  Would  you  buy  this 
garden,  if  you  had  more  money?  As  (when)  you  entered  the  room  I 
was  conversing  with  no  one.  Please  tell  (Dat.  )  me  if  (whether)  that  is 
your  over-coat  or  mine.  The  ship  sank  before  the  crew  (Mannschqft 
/.  )  could  be  (Passive)  rescued.  We  could  not  buy  any  gloves,  as  (since) 
all  the  shops  were  closed  (schlicsscri).  My  cousin  has  been  (trans:  is) 
ill,  since  he  has  been  (is)  in  London.  I  do  not  know  whether  I  can  com- 
pel her  husband  to  pay  the  bill  of  exchange.  Do  you  think,  that  they 
will  be  back  before  half  an  hour?  Perhaps  they6  will*  be  here  a  few 
minutes  before.  You  could  (Subj.)  make  (Dat.)  him  no  other  offer 
if  he  did  not  accept  that. 


208 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  When  is  as  introducing  a  dependent  clause,  translated  by  als,  when 

by  da,  and  when  by  wie  ? 

2.  In  comparisons  how  is  not  so. ..as  translated  and  how  as. ..as} 

3.  How  is  as... as  translated,  if  there  is  no  comparison? 

4.  How  is  before  translated  if  a  conjunction,  how  if  an  adverb,  and  how 
if  a  preposition  ? 

5.  How  is  if  translated  if  denoting  condition  ? 

6.  In  which  mood  must  the  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  be  after  if  (wcnn)t 

7.  How  is  if  translated  if  meaning  whether* 

8.  Are  ob  and  gleich,  etc.  in  obgleich,   obschon,   obwohl,   sometimes  se- 
parated ? 


Conversation. 


As  you  don't  follow  my  advice, 
Tcan't  grant  your  request. 

It  is  impossible  for  me  to  follow 

it. 
If  you  do  not  keep  your  promise, 

he  will  refuse  to  keep  his. 

That  he  can  do  as  he  likesl 
Ask  your  father,  if  he  has  given 

(Dat.)    the    workman   (the) 

permission  to  go. 
I  know  iny  father  has  not  given 

it,  but  "perhaps  my  brother 

(has). 

What  kind  of  book  is  that? 
It  is  a  German  novel 
Are  you  allowed  to  read  novels? 
Yes,  as  it  is  a  German  one,  I 

am  allowed  to  do  so. 
Had  you  not  better  read  other 

German  books  as  well? 
I  do  that  as  often  as  possible. 

I  should  like  to  accept  your 

offer  if  I  could. 
Why  can  you  not  accept  it? 

Because  my  partner  does  not 

like  it. 
Were  you  there  when  the  party 

set  out? 
No,  I  was  at  my  cousin's. 


ntdjt  be* 
23itte 

ifjn   511 


fie 


2)a  @ie  metnen 

folgen,  fann   id) 

nu|t  beanfltgen. 
(5£  ift  mir   wundgltdj, 

befolgen. 
SBenn    @ie    gbr     SSerfprechen 

ntd)t  batten,  ttrirb  er  fid)  toet* 

gern  fetne3  gu  fjalten. 
fann  er  macften,  rote  er  rottt. 
ie   3$**n  $ater,    ob 

er  bem  Slrbeiter  bte  ©rlaubnifc 

gegeben  bat  gu  geben. 
3>d)  toei§,  mein   ^Bater  bat 

nidjt  gegeben,    aber 

mein  S3rub  er. 
2Baj*  fiir  ein  23ud)  ift 
@^  ift  ein  beutfc&er  Ionian. 
2)iirfen  @ie  Montane  lefen? 
Sa,  ba  e§  ein  beutfd)er  ift,  barf 

tc^  e3  tbun. 
©ollten   @te  ntd^t   Iteber    and^ 

anbere  beutfc^e  ^iicfier  lefen? 
3d)  tbue  ba^  fo   oft   al£   mog* 

Hcf). 
%$  ttwrbe  %$T  SInerbteten  gerne 

annebmen,  roenn  id^  fonnte. 
SSarum    fonnen   @ie   e§    nid^t 

annebmen  ? 
SSetl  mein  Xbeil^aber  e§  ntd^t 

ttwnfcbt. 
SSaren  @te  ba,  aB  bte  ©efett* 

fc^aft  abretfte? 
,  id)  n?ar  bet  metnem  Setter. 


209 

ReaMttg  dmtm  Mo.  45. 


Set  fdjfouei  ^ferbebiefc. 

reidfje  ®raf2  8...  in  Slorenj  Ijatte  em  junge$ 
Don  grower  (Sdjonljeit3  gefauft,  toelcIjeS  er  auf  eine£ 
Don  fetnen  Sanbgiitern4  fcfn'cfte.  3)a§  Sanbgut4  lag  in 
einer  a&getegenen5  ®egenb  mefjr  al§  jtoanjig  Sftetlen6  don 
ber  ©tobt  entfernt,7  itnb  ber  $raf2  !am  nidfjt  oft  unb  nnr 
5n  geioiffen  3eiten  im  S^t:e  ba^in.  —  (£in  fe^r  fc^tauer1 
®ieB,  ber  bie§  SlHe§  in  (Srfa^rnng  geBra^t^  fjatte,  gtaubte, 
ba§  e§  i^m  gettngen  ISnnte  ba§  $ferb  auf  folgenbe  SSeife 
in  feine  ©emalt9  $n  Be!ommen :  —  @r  fdjaffte  fic§  eine 
Sioree10  an,  ftn'e  bte  SDiener  be§  (^rafen2  fie  trugen,  unb 
fud^te  ^enntni^11  iifcer  bie  ^elbarbeiten12  auf  bem  Sanbgut4 
§u  er^alten.  2)ann  erfd^ien  er  eine§  Xage§  in  ber  Storee10 
unb  §u  ^ferbe13  auf  bemfetben  unb  gaB  oor14,  ba§  ber 
®raf2  i^n  gefc^idt  §atte,  urn  eintge  S3efe!§le15,  toetc^e  auf 
bie  Selbarfceiten12  93ejug16  ^aBenr  §u  itberbringeu17.  3^ac^ 
fiiuf  Xagen  !am  ber  £)teb  toieber  unb  ii6erbrac§te17  neue 
SBcfc^feiB.  SSa^renb  biefer  a»ei  93efud>ei8  §atte  er  fic§ 
ilberjeugt,  bag  e§  gan§  unmoglid^  niar,  ba§  $ferb,  Joeld§e§ 
immer  fc^arf  fietoatfjt20  itiurbe,  auf  geiDo^nlid^em  SSege  §u 
fte^len.  2)a^er  dnberte  er  fetnen  $lan  ba^in21,  bag  er 
adfjt  Xage  f^ater  jum  britten  SDtate  mit  einigen  S3efel)Ien15 
erfd^ien  unb  §ugleid)22  fagte,  ber  @raf2  fjatte  i^m  befo^len, 
ba§  $ferb  nad)  gloren^  §u  bringen,  toeil  e£  gugeritten23 
merben  fottte. 

(gortfefeung  folflfc) 

1  cunning,  2  count,  3  beauty,  4  the  country-estate,  das  Land- 
gut,  5  out  of  the  way,  6  leagues,  7  distant,  8  to  learn,  in  Erf  ah- 
rung  bringen,  9  possession,  10  livery,  11  knowledge,  12  labours 
in  the  field,  13  on  horse-back,  14  to  pretend,  vorgeben  (irr.), 
15  orders,  16  to  refer,  Bezug  haben,  17  to  deliver,  iiberbringen(irr.), 
18  visits,  19  to  convince,  uberzeugen,  20  to  guard,  bewachen,  21  to- 
that,  22  at  the  same  time,  23  to  break  in  (a  horse),  zureiten  (irr. ). 


210 

Forty-sixth  Lesson.  ©.edjlunbtrierjigfte  Seftion. 

Remarks  on  Conjunctions  (Adverbs  &  Prepositions) 
(continued). 

After  is  translated  norfjbem,  if  a  conjunction  (i.  e.  if  introducing 
a  dependent  clause) ;  as, 

@r  font,  nadjbem  Ste  ba§  $au3  berlaffen  fatten.  He  came  after 
you  had  left  the  house. 

After,  being  a.  preposition,  is  translated  ntdf  (s.  p.  180),  and  by 
nidjfjer,  if  an  adverb,  meaning  afterwards  then  (s.  p.  170). 

That,  if  a  conjunction,  is  translated  baft  (s.  p.  194). — If  a  de- 
monstrative adjective  or  pronoun  and  a  relative  pronoun  (see 
pages  48,  96  &  104). 

The... the...,  if  followed  by  a  comparative  each,  are  translated 
by  je...befto  (or  iimfo).— $e,  being  subordinative  throws  the  verb 
to  the  end,  whilst  befto  (or  itmfo),  being  co-ordinative  (s.  p.  190) 
removes  the  subject  after  its  verb ;  as, 

3fe  Idnger  id)  iljn  anfab,  befto  mefjr  ladjte  er.  The  longer  I  looked 
at  him,  the  more  he  laughed. 

$ttbettt  is  generally  used,  if  while  or  in  precede  a  present  par- 
ticiple which  is  the  verb  of  a  dependent  clause,  or  can  precede  it 
without  altering  the  sense. 

In  German  the  present  participle  cannot  be  used,  and  the  verb  with 
the  proper  subject  must  be  in  the  same  tense  as  that  of  the  main  clause 
(mostly  in  the  imperfect) ;  as, 

Sr  ialj  }uru<f,  inbem  er  in3  $au§  trat.  He  looked  back,  (while) 
entering  the  house,  gnbem  er  com  genfter  fjerabiprang,  oerletjte  er 
fidj.  (In)  jumping  from  the  window,  he  hurt  himself. 

Cf)tte  baft  (without)  and  baburd),  baft  (by)  are  used,  when  in 
English  a  present  participle  is  the  verb  of  a  dependent  clause  and 
it  is  preceded  by  without  or  by. 

In  German  no  present  participle  can  be  used  and  the  verb  with  the 

proper  subject  is  usually  in  the  same  tense  as  that  of  the  main  clause ;  as, 

Gr  font,  ofjne  bafe  er  midj  fragte.    He  came  without  asking(*)  me. 

3d)  tfjat  ba§,  ofjne  bag  er  e»  rouBte.    I  did  that  without  his  knowing 

it.      Sdj  tljat  bo§,  oljne  baB  ber  Onfel  e§  touBte.    I  did  that  without 

the  uncle's  knowing  it.      gdj  erfnett  bie  ©tette  baburd),   bas   id)   gum 

^Srafibenten  ging.     I  got  the  situation  by  going  to  the  president. 

Um... 511  is  translated  in  order  to. — Urn  is  introducing  the 
clause,  whilst  %n  with  the  infinitive  after,  is  put  last ;  as, 

SStr  gingen  in  bie  ©tabt,  um  ben  86mg  511  feljen.  We  went  to 
town  in  order  to  see  the  king. 

lint. .  .511  must  also  be  used  in  translation  of  to,  if  to  is  employed 
in  the  sense  of  in  order  to;  as, 

©er  Slrbeiter  tuurbe  geidjtcft,  urn  nadj  ben  genftcrn  $it  feljen.  The 
workman  was  sent  to  look  after  the  windows. 

(*)  If  the  participle  dire«tly  follows  "without,"  it  may  also  be  rendered  by 
the  infinitive  with  ju;  thus:  (5r  lam  ofjne  mid)  ju  fragen. 


211 


the  attack,  ber  9Ingriff 
to  alight,  to  get  out,  *au§* 

ftetgen  irr. 

the  battle,  bie  ©cfjladjt 
,,    consent,  bie  @intmtti« 

gung 

the  courage,  ber  -Whttlj 
to  deserve,  to  earn,  Der« 

bierten 
excited,  aufgeregt 


the  fare,  ba§  5o 

to  frighten,  erfdjtecfen 

to  go  away,  *fortgef)enirr. 

to  hesitate,  jograt 

to  inform,  6enadjricijtigen 

to  insult,   offend,     belei* 

big  en 

the  intention,  bie  Slbftcfit 
„    language, 


to  laugh  at,  tadjen  iiBer 

(Ace.)  (auSlacfjen) 
the  pane  (of  a  window), 

bie    ©djetfie    (gen= 

fterfd&eiBe) 

to  retire,  ftdj  suriirfjtetien 
the  seat,  ber  ©tij     |_irr- 
,,    sofa,  bo§  ©tcplja 
,,    telegram,    ba 

gramm 


Exercise  No.  46. 

1.  After  I  had  learned  the  French  language,  I  commenced  to  iearn 
German. — My  father  preferred  to  live  in  the  country  after  he  had  re- 
tired from  (the)  business. — On  the  day  after  the  battle  the  enemy  made 
another  (noch  einen)  attack. — It  is  true  that  I  had  not  the  courage  for 
(zu)  it. — It  was  the  same  gentleman  that  insulted  me. — The  more  ex- 
cited you  [will]  become,  the  quieter  I  shall  be. — The  longer  we  are 
hesitating  the  more  difficult  it  will  be  to  get  a  good  seat  in  the  theatre. 
— I  paid  the  fare  while  getting  out. — In  endeavouring  to  swim  across 
(uber)  the  river  he  was  drowned. — Knocking  at  the  door  he  called  my 
name. — Why  did  you  come  without  informing  me  of  your  intention? — 
The  boy  was  (being)  punished  without  his  deserving  it.  — I  cannot  look 
at  that  man  without  laughing  at  him. — We  got  the  money  by  selling 
our  sofa. — I  shall  give  my  consent  in  order  to  please  (gefallig  zu  sein)  your 
partner. — In  order  not  to  frighten  you  I  did  not  send  (Dat. )  you  a 
telegram. — To  be  able  to  retire  he  gave  (ubergoberi)  his  (the)  business  to 
(Dat.)  his  son. 

2.  $e   langfamer   <5te   jprecfien,    befto   befjer   farm   id)    <3te 
tterftefien.      @r  !am  ntit  feinem  @oljn  ink  ghnmer,  tnbetn  er  mtt 
it)tn  lac&te   unb  fprad)  (talked).     28ir  retften   rmrf)   $ari3,    o&ne 
baft  unjere  (SItern  eg  ftmfjten.      2Bir   beettten   wi§,    urn   ntcfit  p 
jpat  §11  fommen  (be),    ^dj  reifte  fogletd)  (directly)   ab/   ttadjbem 
id)  £jfyr  Selegromm  empfangen  ijatte.      (£r   t>er!aufte   ba3   ^Pfetb, 
o^ne  baft  er  mid)  um  (my)  ©rlaubnift  fragte.      Urn  nidjt  entbeiit 
p  werben,  giinbeten  tt»ir  fetn  ^euer  an.      2)er  S)ieb   offnete   ba^ 
Jenfter  baburd),  ba§  er  eine  ©djeibe  gerbrad). 

The  children  went  away  without  my  remarking  it. — The  earlier 
you  come  the  better  it  will  be.  After  I  had  read  the  book,  I  read  it 
once  more  (noch  einmal).  We  were  silent  in  order  not  to  offend  them. 
While  putting  on  his  hat  he  left  the  room.  Why  did  you  come  after 
me  ?  In  shutting  (zumachen)  the  windows  I  broke  a  pane.  The  phy- 
sician was  called  after  the  workman  was  already  dead.  He  went  to 
America  (in  order)  to  earn  more  money.  You  have  made  him  your  (ihn 
sich  zum)  enemy  by  having  offended  him.  I  came  at  a  quarter  past  nine 
and  my  friend  half  an  hour  after  (afterwards).  The  more  industrious 
you  are  the  more  money  you  will  earn.  Our  soldiers  gained  the  battle 
after  they  had  taken  (fassen)  fresh  courage. 


212 
Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  How  is  after  translated  if  a  conjunction,  how  if  a  preposition,  and 
how  if  an  adverb  ? 

2.  How  is  that  translated  if  a  conjunction? 

3.  How  are  the... the...,  followed  by  a  comparative  each,  translated? 

4.  "What  kind  of  conjunctions  are/e  and  desto  (or  umso)? 

5.  When  is  indem  generally  used  ? 

6.  When  are  ohne  doss  and  dadurch,  doss  used? 

7.  Of  what  is  um...zu  the  translation,   and  where  is  each  placed  in 
the  sentence? 

8.  When  must  um...zu  be  used  in  translation  of  to  ? 


Conversation. 


How  long  will  you  sit  up  to- 
night? 

Till  half  past  ten. 

Then  most  likely  I  shall  go  to- 
bed  after  you. 

You  should  not  read  so  long 
or  you  will  spoil  your  eye- 
sight 

After  I  have  commenced  read- 
ing I  cannot  leave  off  (auf- 
horen). 

What  are  you  reading  then? 

It  is  the  latest  novel  by  H. 

Is  it  very  interesting  (interes- 

s&nt)l 
Yes,  very  interesting ;  he  knows 

how  to  write  novels. 
Is  this  the  only  (einzige)  volume? 
No,  there  are  two  more. 
The  bill  of  exchange  will  not 

be  paid  without  your  signing 

it. 
Where  am  I  to  put  my  name  ? 

On  the  back  (Ruckseitef.), below 

the  other  names. 
Will  that  do  nowl 
Yes,  that  will  do. 
Could  (Subj.)  you  lend  (Dannie 

some  sheets  of  note-paper  ? 
Yes,  /  can;  how  many  do  you 

want? 
As  many  as  you  can  spare  (ent- 

behren). 


25ie   longe    raoflen    Ste    Ijeute 

5lbenb  aufbleiben? 
23t§  fialb  elf. 
S)ann  toerbe  id)   toafcrfdjeinltaj 

nod)  gfjiren  §u  SSett  gef)en. 
(Sie  fottten  nidjt  fo  lange  lefen, 

ober  @ie  toerben  3$re  Slugen 

tierberben. 
Sftac&bem   tdj    angefongen   ^abe 

§u  lejen,  fann  id)  nid)t  auf* 

loren. 

2Ba^  tefen  @ie  benn? 
®$  ift  ber  neuefte  JRoman   toon 

$. 

3ft  er  fefir  intereffant? 

Sa,  fefir  intereffant;   er  toeif^ 

tt)te  man  fRomane  fd)reibt. 
3ft  bteS  ber  etngige  ^Banb? 
9Mn,  e^  finb  nod)  giuei  ba. 
S)er  SSed^fel  mtrb  ntd)t  be§ablt 

ttjerben,    oftne   bo§    @ie   i|n 

unterfd)reiben. 
SBofiin  foil  id)   meinen   9Zamen 

fdjreiben  ? 
3luf  bie  SRucffeite,  unter  bte  an* 

bern  Sftamen. 
©eniigt  ba§  je|t? 
3a,  ba0  geniigt. 
^onnten  @te  mir  etntge  93ogen 

Srtefpapier  let^en? 
So,    ba3   fann   ic^;    toie    triete 

tt)unfd)en  @ie? 
(So  t)tele  @ie  entbe^ren  fonnen. 


213 

(feruse  Mo.  46. 


fdjlaue  ^ferbebtefc 

3)a  ber  SSerroalteri  uirf)t  ben  geringfteu  SBerbadfjt 
fcfjityfte,2  fo  §ogerte  er  nicljt,  ifmt  ba§  $ferb  mitjugeBen.3 
— 3)er  3)ieB  ritt4  bamit  auf  ber  @trage  uadfj  gtoren§  aB. 
(£r  fcfjlng5  aBer  Balb  einen  anbern  2Beg  ein,  unb  nadfjbem 
er  ettoa  §tt)an§tg  9}letlen  §temliclj  fc^neK  gerttten  tuar, 
ftieg6  er  toor  bem  erften  SSirt^l^aufe  oB,  tt)etc^e§  er  an 
ber  @trafje  fanb.  §ier  Brad^te  er  ba§  $ferb  in  ben 
too  er  ftc§  umlteibete.8  SKa^renb  er  in  bte 
ging,  fdj  er  einen  SSagen  t»or  bem  $8irtl)§f)cmfe 
an^olten10,  au§  toeld^em  §n  feinem  nid^t  geringen11  @r* 
ftaunen12  unb  ©c^retfen13  ber  ©tgent^iimer  be§  $ferbe§ 
an^ftieg14.  ®e§  S5teBe§  erfter  ®ebanfe15  ttjar,  bag  ber 
©raf  fogleid^,  nad^bem  er  aBgeritten,4  auf  ba§  Sanbgut 
gefommen  tuare  unb  ficlj  felbft  ju  feiner  SSerfotgung16  auf= 
gema^t1^  ^dtte.  Sebo^  erfannte18  er  batb,  ba§  bte§  ein 
3rrtf)um  tt)ar,  ba  tueber  ber  ®raf  nod^  einer  uon  feinen 
beiben  Seuten  nac^  i|m  ober  bem  ^ferbe  fragte.  ^un 
after  ftettte19  ftd^  etne  anbere  gurd^t20  Bet  i§m  ein.  @r 
toar  iiBer^eugt21,  ba§  toenn  enttoeber  ber  ®utfd)er  ober 
ber  Wiener  be§  ^Jrafen  in  ben  ©tatt7  ging,  fie  fogleidfj 
ba§  ^Pferb  erfennen18  toiirben.  5lu§  biefer  9^ot^22  fjalf 
er  fi^  burc§  eine  fufjne23  Sift24. — @r  t^at,  at§  oB  er  ben 
^Jrafen  gar  nic^t  !enne  unb  fragte  ben  S)tener,  raer  e§  rt)are» 

(©djtufc  fotfit.) 

1  steward,  2  to  conceive  a  suspicion,  VerdatM  schopfen,  3  to 
deliver  up,  mitgeben  (irr.),  4  to  start  (on  horseback),  *a,loreiten  (irr.}, 
5  to  take  (a  way),  einschlagen  (irr. ),  6  to  alight  (from  a  horse),  *ab- 
steig&n  (irr.),  7  stable,  8  to  change  clothes,  sick  umJcleiden, 
9  tavern,  10  to  stop,  anTialten  (irr.),  11  slight,  12  astonishment, 
13  terror,  14  to  alight  (from  a  vehicle),  *&ussteigen  (irr.),  15  idea, 
16  pursuit,  17  to  set  out,  sick  aufmachen,  18  to  perceive,  recognise, 
erkennen  (irr.),  19  to  come,  sich  einstetten,  20  fear,  21  to  convince, 
iiberzeugen,  22  difficulty,  23  bold.  24  cunning. 


214 

Forty-seventh  Lesson.  ©teBenunbtrierjtgfte  Sefttoiu 

Remarks  on  Conjunctions  (Adverbs  &  Prepositions) 
(concluded}. 

30... and)  (or  wit  aud})  are  the  translation  of  however  if  an 
adjective  or  adverb  is  between  however  and  the  subject. — (So  ornrie 
is  introducing  the  clause,  and  audj  is  generally  placed  alter  the 
subject,  in  its  usual  place ;  as, 

$dj  fann  ba§  ?Pferb  nidjt  faufen,  fo  fctfftg  e§  aud)  fetn  mag.  I  can- 
not buy  the  horse,  however  cheap  it  may  be.  6ie  f5nnen  ifjn  ntdjt 
mefjr  fefjen,  fo  oft  <Ste  audj  fomnten.  You  cannot  see  him  any  more, 
however  often  you  come. 

In  bamtt...tttdjt,  lest,  tt»ctttt...ntdjt  (or  toofern...nirfjt),  unless, 
— batmt  and  raemt  or  toofern  introduce  the  clause,  and  nicfjt  is  put 
in  its  usual  place. 

After  bamtt... nidjt  the  verb  is  in  the  subjunctive  mood. 

Ex. :  Sagen  @ie  e»  311  tljm,  bamit  er  e§  nidjt  oergeffe.  Say  it  to  him 
lest  he  forget  it.  3dj  roerbe  morgen  ju  S^nen  'foramen,  roenn  Sie 
mir  nidjt  uorfjer  fd)rei6en.  I  shall  come  to  you  to-morrow,  unless 
you  write  to  me  before. 

XOTE.  — So  (so,  thus)  is  often  employed  in  German  for  introducing 
the  main  clause,  when  the  dependent  clause  stands  first  and  is  begin- 
ning with  ba,  wenn,  obgleid)  (or  obfdjon,  ofctnofjl),  fo...audj  (or  tme...aud));  as, 

D&gleid)  id)  nid)t  bort  ttjor,  fo  metfj  id)  bod)  2lIIe§.  Although  I 
was  not  there,  yet  I  know  everything. 

So  is  not  translated  in  English  and  has  usually  a  meaning  corres- 
ponding to  then. — In  German  it  may  be  used  or  not. 


The  Interjections. 

The  Interjections  are  invariable,  and  are  used  as  in  English. 
— The  most  usual  are : — 


erf},  ah! 

ad),  alas! 

ol),  o,  ok! 

o  roefje,  0  dear,  aUisJ 

pfut,  fie! 

Ijaft,  halt,  stop! 

fiotta,  holla,  hollo  I 

[ac^te,  gently! 

ei,  why! 

nun,  Iww,  well,  icJnjl 

gut  twin,  well  then! 

fort,  be  gone,  be  off! 

ft,  ftifl,  hush,  hist/ 


letber,  unhappily/ 
Ijeifa,  huzza  l 


hurrah! 
fym,  hem! 
fo,  indeed/ 
5ldjtung,  take  caret 

hail/ 
toe^e,  woe/ 
l^euer,  fire! 

©ottlob,  God  be  praised/ 
Jpiilfe,  help! 
b,  murder/ 
S)iebe,  thieves/ 


215 


the  amount,  ber  SSetrag 
angry,  jornig 
beneficial,  gutrcigltd) 
busy,  befdjiifttgt 
to  call  for,  (tbl)olen 
to  catch  cold,  fid)  ert'alten 
dirty,  fdjmutjig 
the    distress,    need,    bie 
9?otf) 
to  disturb,  ftoren 

excellent,  bortrefflid) 
to  fall  down,  *l)er  or  l)tn= 
tttttcrfatlen  (irr.) 
famous,  beriifimt 
frequent,  f)(iuftg 
in  future,  in  Bitfuttft 
the    insult,    offence,    bie 
SBeleibigung 
to  kill,  tobten 
the  medicine,  bie  Slrsenet 

to  murder,  ermorben 
to  pain,  fdjnterjen 
the  pardon,  bie   SSerjeift* 
ung 
the  stairs,  bie  ^rep^e(sing) 
the  stove,  ber  Of  en 
Plur:  bie  £5efen 
to  use,  to  -need,  braudjen 
the  wouud,  bie  SSunbe 

Exercise  No.  47. 

1.  I  cannot  take  (emnehmen  irr.}  the  medicine  however  beneficial 
it  may  be.  —  "We  shall  go  out  however  dirty  the  street  may  be.  —  I  shall 
not  go  with  you  to  the  theatre  however  frequently  you  go  there.  —  Let 
us  go,  lest  we  disturb  you.  —  Telegraph  to  (Dat.  )  your  friend  lest  he  come. 
—  He  will  not  forget  this  insult  unless  you  beg  his  (ihn  um)  pardon.  — 
I  shall  not  accompany  you  unless  you  call  for  me.  —  Alas  !  how  my 
wound  pains  me.  —  Ah  !  is  that  the  famous  poet  N.  ?  —  Hurrah  !  the  battle 
is  won.  —  God  be  praised  !  all  distress  is  over  (wruber).  —  Help  !  thieves, 
thieves  !  —  Well  !  are  you  still  angry  ?  —  Be  gone  !  nobody  is  allowed  to 
stay  here.  —  "Woe!  they  (one)  are  killing  our  friends.  —  Fire!  the  whole 
house  is  burning. 

2.  @r  jott  §anbjd)nfi.e  angiefien,  bamit  er  feme   |>anbe  ntcfit 
jd)mn$ig  madje.    $d)  farm  ben  Djen   nid)t   braudjen,   jo  uortreff* 
Udj  er  aiidj  jein  mag.     ^Pfui!  toer  fiat  bte3   getfoan?     £mltl   e£ 
ijt  gu  [pat.      SK  Btrfunft  ttuift   id)   ojjne   @te   gefien,    tuenn   @te 
nid)t  friifier  fommen.      ©till!   b_a3  ^inb   fdjldft.      ^d)tung,    ber 
(Stein  ftillt!    3)a  ^ie  ntcfct  in  bie  D^er  ge^en  tootlten,  jo  na|m  id) 
nur  ein  93iflet.    SBenn  mein  33ud)bruder  bieje3  S3ud)  nid)t  brucfen 
fann,  jo  tnujj  id)  §11  einem   anbern   gefjen.      ©pttlob,    SlUe    jinb 
gerettet!      @o  »icl  @ie  and)  bariiber  Iad)en,  jo  ijt  e^  bod)   trjafir. 
@ie  irjerben  ben   33etrag   be^   SSed)jeI§   pergejjen,    menn   Sie  ifyn 
nid)t  aufjd)reiben.     Dbgleid)   er  gejaforlid)   berirunbet  ift,   jo   ijt 
bod)  ntd)t  alle  |)ojjnung  oerlpren,  ba§  er  genejen  toerbe. 

<3ie  langjamer,  bamit  @ie  nid)t  bie  Sreppe  Binunterf  alien. 


Oh!  why  have  you  done  that?  I  cannot  understand  you  unless 
you  read  to  (Dat.  )  me  louder.  Stop  !  you  have  lost  something.  You 
must  inform  him  of  this  loss,  however  great  it  may  be.  The  thief 
murdered  the  (maid)  servant,  lest  she  [should]  betray  him.  Hem  !  that 
may  (Jcanri)  be.  How,  you  are  still  here  !  You  must  not  speak,  unless 
you  are  (being)  asked.  Gently  !  don't  break  the  looking-glass.  Huzza 
how  our  horses  are  running  !  He  will  not  understand  you  however 
slowly  you  speak.  He  will  not  go  away  unless  we  go  first.  Put  on 
your  hat  lest  you  catch  cold.  I  shall  call  for  you  at  all  events  this 
evening,  however  busy  I  may  be.  Take  care,  lest  you  hurt  yourself  J 
Unless  you  call:  "stop,"  the  boat  will  not  wait.  I  burned  the  news- 
paper lest  he  [should]  read  the  telegram. 


216 

Questions  on  Grammar. 

1.  "When  is  however  translated  by  so...auch  (or  wie...aucK)* 

2.  What  place  do  so  or  wie  occupy  and  where  is  auch  placed  generally  ? 

3.  Where  in  damit. .  .nicht  and  wenn. .  .nicht  (or  wofern . .  .nicht)  are  these 
words  placed? 

4.  In  which  mood  is  the  verb  after  damit... nicht f 

5.  When  is  so  often  employed  in  German  for  introducing  the  main 
clause  ? 

6.  Is  «o  translated  in  English,  and  is  it  necessary  to  use  it  in  German? 

7.  Are  Interjections  variable? 

8.  How  are  they  used? 


Conversation. 


Have  you  had  your  hair  cutl 
Yes,  /  had  it  cut  yesterday. 
Why  did  you  not  have  it  shorter? 

I  like  to  wear  my  hair  long  in 
winter  lest  I  catch  cold. 

Don't  you  wish  to  buy    this 

horse? 
No,  I  shall  not  buy  it,  however 

excellent  it  may  be. 

Did  you  bring  (the)  to-datf* 
newspaper? 

Oh !  I  have  forgotten  it. 

How  could  you  forget  that? 

I  met  a  friend  on  the  way,  and 
while  talking  with  him,  I 
did  not  think  of  it  [any]  more. 

Be  quick  now  and  fetch  one. 

Holla !  is  there  nobody  at  home? 

Who  is  there? 

I  want  to  see  Mr.  N. 

He  is  not  in  just  now. 

Well!  then  I  shall  call  again 

to-morrow. 
May  I  ask  you  for  (urn  Ace.) 

your  name? 
Here  is  my  card  (Kartef.). 


£aben  ©te  ftdj  bas  £aar  fdjnet- 

ben  laffen? 
$a,    id)    Itefj    e3    mtr    geftern 

fd)neiben. 
SSarum  IteBen  @tc  e§  fid)  nicfct 

fiirjer  fcfinetben? 
ScJ)  trage  tm  2Btntcr  ba3  £aar 

gerne   long,    bamit   id)   mid) 

md)t  erfdlte. 
SSoKen  @ie  biefeS   $ferb   nidjt 

faitfen? 
•iftetn,   id)  toerbe  e»  nid)t  fail* 

fen,    fo    borrreffltc^    e§   auc^ 

fetn  mag. 
SBradhten  @te   bie   fieuttge  3e^* 

rung? 

Db!  ic^  Babe  fie  oergeffen. 
2Bie  fonnten  @te  bal  bergeffen? 
S^    traf   etnen   greunb   unter* 


unb  inbem  ic^  mit 
,  badjte  td^   nid^t   me^r 
bar  an. 
@efien  ©te  je|t  fc^nett,  unb  bolen 

@te  etne. 

§olla!  tft  Sftiemanb  §u  §aufe? 
2Ser  tft  ba? 

gd)  ttjunfc^e  ^errn  3^.  511  fpredjen. 
@r  tft  augenbltcfltc^  ntd^t  fiter. 
©ut!  bann   tuerbe  id^   morgen 
wieber  borfprec^en. 
urn    3^^ 
bitten? 
ter  tft  meine  ^arte. 


217 

dmtizt  Wo.  47. 


Ser  frfjlaite 


$)ann  ging  er  511  ifjm  unb  fagte:  M2Bie  irf)  fjore,  finb 
@ie  ber  ®raf  8...  an§  gloren^!  —  gdj  Bin  einer  t)on  ben 
Senten  be3  ^ferbefianblerS1  SBanbinefli,  fcon  bent  gijre 
<$naben2  fo  mancjjeg  $ferb  gefauft  IjaBen.  (£r  fjat  midfj 
je^t  mit  etnem  feJjr  fc^onen  ^ferbe  §n  gfjnen  gefc^tdt,  tuetl 
<r  glauBt,  bag  e§  S^nen  fe^r  gnt  gefattens  toerbe."—  ,,SBo 
ift  ba0  ^ferb?"  fragte  ber  ©raf.  „©§  tft  im  @taffe; 
ic^  toerbe  e§  g^nen  gleic^  Dorfii^ren."4  —  SoBalb  ber  ©raf 
unb  feine  Sente  ba§felbe  fa^en,  erflcirten5  fie  etnftimmig,6 
bag  biefe§  $ferb  gan§  bemjenigen  glic^e,  n)eld§e§  ber  ®raf 
onf  bem  Sanbgnt  §&tte.  ®er  ®raf,  ber  nie  ge^offt  ^atte, 
ein  gleic^e§7  ^Pferb  t)on  fo  grofjer  @c^on^eit8  gn  finben, 
loar  fjocfjft9  erfrent10  bariiBer,  nnb  fein  SSerlangen11  e§  §n 
Befijen,  §eigte  fid)  in  feinen  SJlienen12  nnb  SSorten.  2)er 
S)teb  tte§  fid^  ba£  nid^t  entge^en,  nnb  ate  ber  ($raf  nac^ 
bem  ^reife  fragte,  forberte1^  er  200  3ed§inen.  3nle|t 
mar  er  mit  180  3ed)inen  nnb  einem  gnten  Xrin!getb14  §n- 
frieben.  —  S)a  ber  ($raf  nnn  toeber  feinen  Wiener  nod) 
feinen  ®ntfc§er  auf  ber  ioeiten  fftctfe,  bie  er  t>or§atte15, 
entBe^ren16  mod^te,  nm  einen  berfelben  mit  bem  ^jSferbe 
gnrn^nfd^iden17:  fo  fragte  er  ben  $)ieB,  ob  er  ba§  $ferb  fiir 
i^n  nac!)  gloren§  Bringen  lonnte.  ®erfelBe  fcerftanb18  fid^ 
bagn  gegen  eine  geringe  SBetofjnnng19,  nnb  ber  ^5raf  fnfjr 
tt)eiter20.  %lo.3)  einer  SSiertelftnnbe  rttt  anc^  ber  ^)ieB  aB, 
fd^lng  aBer  gleic§  tuieber  einen  anbern  SSkg  ein  nnb 
Brac^te  ba§  ^Pferb  nad^  SSenebig,  n;o  er  e§  fiir  150  $t* 
'd£)inen  Uerlanfte. 

1  horse-dealer,  2  honour,  8  to  please,  gef  alien  (irr.  Dat.  ),  4  to 
Coring  before,  vorfiihren,  5  to  declare,  erklaren,  6  unanimously, 
7  alike,  8  beauty,  9  most,  10  to  rejoice,  erfreuen,  11  desire, 
12  features,  13  to  ask,  demand,  fordern,  14  gratification,  15  to  have 
before  one,  yvrhaben  (irr.),  16  to  miss,  entbehren,  17  to  send  back, 
zuriickschicken,  18  to  accede  to,  sick  verstehen  zu  (irr.),  19  payment, 
20  to  drive  on,  *weiter/a&rm  (irr.). 


As  appendix  to  the  First  Part  of  our  Grammar  we  shall  now  give 
some  rules  for  ascertaining  the  gender  of  nouns  and  for  the  formation 
of  certain  nouns  ; — hints  tor  the  purpose  of  recognising  regular  verbs, 
— and  also  rules  for  the  division  of  nouns  into  syllables. 

As  we  think  it  superfluous  to  give  exercises  on  these  rules  we  ad- 
vise the  student  to  read  them  over  carefully  from  time  to  time,  which 
will  suince. 

Although  we  have  given  in  our  vocabularies  the  most  -important 
exceptions  in  the  declension  of  nouns  it  is  now  necessary  that  the  student 
should  go  over  all  of  them  (on  pages  13 — 17)  in  his  spare  time,  so  as  to 
make  himself  thoroughly  acquainted  with  the  declension  of  German 
substantives. — However  in  the  2nd  Part  of  our  Grammar  we  shall  con- 
tinue to  point  out  irregular  declensions. 


On  the  Gender  of  Nouns. 

Every  noun  in  the  German  language  is  either  masculine,  feminine 
or  neuter. 

Of  the  masculine  gender  are : 

1.  All  names  of  males ;  as, 

bcr  2Eonn,  the  man    bet  Strjt,  the  physician     ber  25tt>e,  the  lion 
EXCEPTIONS  : — The  diminutives  in  djen  and  lein  (s.  p.  219). 

2.  The  names  of  monntains,  winds,  stones,  seasons,  months,  and 
days;  as, 

ber  Sejitt,  Vesuvius  I   bet  gracing,  spring 

ber  Citnriitb,  the  eastwind  ber  3onnar,  January 

ber  Sioraont,  the  diamond  I    ber  SJlontag,  Monday 

Remark.—  2>a§  griifaa$r,  spring,  and  ba§  ©patjaljr,  autumn  being  com- 
pound  words  take  the  gender  of  their  last  component.  But  the  masculine 
forms  of  these  words  (ber  grilling,  ber  JperBft)  are  very  often  preferred. 

3.  Xouns  ending  in  att,  en  (not  djen),  id),  ig,  ing  and  ting;  a*, 

ber  ©too,  the  stable  I   ber  £omg,  the  honey 
ber  SBagen,  the  carriage  ber  Coring,  the  herring 

ber  Jeppi($,  the  carpet  I   ber  Sperling,  the  sparrow 

Exceptions: 

boi  9KetaH,  the  metal  I   bag  33eden,  the  basin 
bag  TOeffing,  the  brass  ba*  Stiffen,  the  cushion 

ba3  Sing,  the  thing  I   &a3  SBappen,  the  coat  of  arms 

and  Infinitives  used  substantively ;  as, 

boS  ®el)en,  walking      bo8  Sfien,  eating 

Of  the  feminine  gender  are  : 

1.  All  names  of  females ;  as, 

bte  grcm,  the  woman    bie  S3»in,  the  lioneai 

Exceptions : 

a.)  Diminutives  in  c^en  and  lent  (s.  p.  219)  and  ba3  SRdbt^en,  the  girl; 
b«3  graulein,  the  young-lady. 

b.)  3)ai  SRrafdj,  the  wench ;  ba§  SBei6,  the  woman,  wife ;  and  the  com 
pound  word  bas  grauensimmer,  the  woman,  female. 


219 

2.  Most  names  of  rivers ;  as, 

bie  (Sl&e,  the  Elbe  I   bte  Sonau,  the  Danube 

bte  Slier,  the  Iller  I   bie  SBefer,  the  Weser 

Exceptions : 

a.)  bet  Sltyein,  the  Rhine      ber  Sftedar,  the  Neckar      ber  9ftoin,  the  Main 
b.)  Most  names  of  rivers  of  foreign  countries  not  ending  in  a,  and 
e,  which  are  masculine  ;  as, 

ber  SRil,  the  Nile      ber  $o,  the  Po 

3.  Nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  ending  in  e ;  as, 
bte  SStrne,  the  pear  I   bie  (Sonne,  the  sun 
bie  Xinte,  the  ink  I   bte  3ffad)er  the  revenge 

Exceptions :— a)  £>er  Srriebe,  the  peace ;  ber  gttnfe,  the  spark ;  ber  ®tau&e, 
the   faith;  ber  £aufe,  the  heap;  ber  Sftame,  the  name;  ber  ®afe,  the  cheese. 

b)  Abstract  substantives  formed  from  adjectives,  which  are  neuter ;  as, 

bo§  ©ute,  the  good      bo§  Soje,  the  bad,  etc. 

c)  ®a3  Sluge,  the  eye;  ba§  Snbe,   the   end;    bq§   (SrBe,   the  inheritance, 
and  the  few  neuter  nouns  with  the  prefixes  ©e;  like:  ba§  ©emalbe,  etc. 

4.  Most  derivative  words  in  ei,  Beit,  felt,  fdjaft,  mutfi,  img  and  the 
foreign  nouns  in  if,  tat,  ion;  as, 


bte  Slr^enei,  the  medicine 
bte  Sreiljeit,  the  liberty 
bte  ^reftigfeit,  the  firmness 
bte  greunbfdjoft,  the  friendship 


bte  £offnung,  the  hope 
bte  Belittl,  the  politics 
bie  UnitJerjttiir,  the  university 
bte  Nation,  tho  nation 


bie  Slrmutf),  the  poorness 

Exceptions  :—®o§  ©efcfjret,   the   clamour;    bo§   ^Setfi^oft,   the   seal;    ber 
the  wormwood. 


Of  the  neuter  gender  are  : 

1.  The  letters  of  the  alphabet;   bag  '#,  ba3  S3,  ba3  S,  etc.,  the  A, 
the  B,  the  C,  etc. 

2.  All  non-  substantive  words  used  substantively,  i.  e.  infinitives,  ad- 
jectives, etc.  when  used  substantively  ;  as, 

ba§  Stngen,  the  singing  I    bo§  ^a,  the  yes,  the  aye 

ba§  ©riitt,  the  green  |    ba§  SSiertel,  tlie  fourth 

3.  All  diminutives  in  d)en  and  letn,  even  those  denoting  males  01 
females  (s.  p.  222)  ;  as, 

ba§  SMnncfien,  the  little  man  I   ba§  ®na&Iettt,  the  little  boy 

ba§  Imnbdien,  the  little  hand  |   ba§  SBIitmletn,  the  little  flower 

4.  Names  of  metals,  countries,  towns,  villages;  as, 


ba§  ®olb,  gold  I    bo§  grime  ^rlanb,  green  Ireland^ 

ba»  ©tlfcer,  silver  |   ba§  le&f)afte  'iJSarig,  lively  Paris 

Exceptions : 

ber  ftobalr,  cobalt  bte  ©^tDetj,  Switzerlandf**) 

ber  ©taijl,  steel  bte  «Pfafy  the  Palatinate 

bte  fioufife,  Lusatia 
bte  S'rimm,  the  Crimea 
bte  Sftolbcm,  Moldavia 


ber  Somfiod,  pinchbeck 
ber  SBiSmutfj,  bismuth 
bie  or  baS  ^latina,  platina 


Also  names  of  countries  in  et,  which  are  feminine  ;  as, 
bte  Xurfei,  Turkey;   bie  SBalodjet,  Wallachia 


(*)  Names  of  countries,  towns   and  villages   which   are   neuter   are    only 

used  with  the  article  if  preceded  by  an  adjective. 
(**)  Names  of  countries  which  are  feminine  always  take  the  article. 


220 


'6.  Most  nouns  beginning  with  the  unaccented  prefix  ($e ;  as, 
bo§  ©ebaube,  the  building  I   ba§  ©efrabel,  the  rabble,  mob 

bal  ©e&et,  the  prayer  I   ba§  ©einrge,  the  chain  of  mountains 

Exceptions : 


bte  ©efcerbe,  the  gesture 
bie  ©ebuljr,  the  duty 
bte  ©eburt,  the  birth 
bie  ©ebttlb,  the  patience 
bie  ©efaljr,  the  danger 
bte  ©emetnbe,  the  parish 
bie  ©efdjidjte,  the  story 
bte  ©eftatr,  the  shape 
bte  ©etoatt,  the  power 


ber  ©e&ratidj,  the  use 
bet  ©ebanfe,  the  thought 
tier  ©efaHen,  the  pleasure 
fcer  ®enu§,  the  enjoyment 
ber  ©erudj,  the  smell 
ber  ©efang,  the  singing 
ber  ©efdjmaf,  the  taste 
ber  ©eftanf,  the  stench 
ber  ©etmnn,  the  gain 
and  all  those  which  according  to  their  termination  (except  in  e)   are    fem- 
inine, like:— bte  ©elegenljeit,  the  opportunity 

6.  Most  nouns  ending  in  fat,  fel,  tljum ;  as, 

bal  Sdjtcffat,  destiny  I   ba§  (Sigentljum,  the  property 

ba§  fRat^el,  the  riddle  I    ba§  Hltett^um,  antiquity 

Exceptions : 

bte  ®rongfat,  the  oppression  I   ber  ©topfel,  the  stopper 

bie  9ftiif)fal,  the  difficulty  ber  Jvrrtfmm,  the  error 

bie  Sritbial,  the  trouble  I   ber  Stadium,  the  riches 

7.  Many  nouns  ending  in  nift  (or  nt£);  as, 

ba§  8eugnt§,  the  evidence;  ba§  ©ebat^tntB,  the  memory 

There  are  however,  nearly  as  many  that  are  feminine,  of  which  the 
following  are  the  principal : 

bie  (£rlmi&m&,  the  permission 
bte  ginftermfj,  the  darkness 
bte  ^enntmfj,  the  knowledge 
bte  SBUbntfj,  the  wilderness 


bte  SBebrangnifc,  the  pressure 
bte  SBerrubntfj,  the  grief 
.bte  ©ntpfdngntfe,  the  conception 
bte  Srfenntntfc,  the  perception 


Compound  Nouns. 

Compound  nouns  take  the  gender  of  their  last  component ; 
for  instance : 

masculine  are : 
ber  DBftBattm,  the  fruit-tree  |    ber  £tr$I)of,  the  churchyard 

feminine  are : 
bte  Stmntertpre,  the  room-door  |    bte  £ofaartet,  the  court-party 

neuter  are : 
ba§  ftaisfcanb,  the  collar,  the  necfelace  |    bo§  ^tft^tu^,  the  table-cloth 

Exceptions : 

ber  Slbft^eu,  the  abhorrence  |    bol  ©egent^etl,  the  contrary 

and  the  words  compounded  with  mutfi,  the  first  component  of  which 
is  no  substantive,  which  are  feminine ;  as, 
bte  ©rofjntHtfj,  the  generosity  |    bie  Sdjftjermutlj,  the  melancholy 


221 

Words  having  a  double  Gender. 

To  indicate  their  double  meaning,  the  following  nouns  have 
a  double  gender(*j  : 

ber  SBcmb,  the  volume,  binding  ba8  SBanb,  the  ribbon,  tie(f) 

ber  93auer(f),  the  peasant  ba§  S3ouer,  the  cage 

ber  (5^or,  the  chorus  .    ba§  ©^or(t),  the  choir 

ber  ®rbe,  the  heir  ba§  GsrBe,  the  inheritance 

bie  (Sift,  the  present  ba§  ©ift,  the  poison 

bie  ^aft,  the  arrest  bag  £aft,  the  clasp,  rivet 

ber  6etbe,  the  heathen  bie  ^eibe,  the  heath 

ber  out,  the  hat  bie  Iwt,  the  guard,  care 

ber  $unbe,  the  customer  bie  Kunbe,  the  knowledge 

ber  Setter,  the  conductor  bie  Setter,  the  ladder 

ber  9JtangeI(t),  the  want  bie  SKangel,  the  mangle 

bie  ttatf,     «  bog  m*«>  the 


ber  9ftenfdj(t    man  bo§  9ttenfd)(t),  the  wench 

ber  SJleffer,  the  measurer  ba§  9JJeffer,  the  knife 

ber  ©cljilb,  the  shield  ba§  ©$ilb(t),  the  sign-board 

ber  @ee(t),  the  lake  bie  @ee,  the  sea 

ber  ©proffe,  the  descendant  bie  ©toroffe,  the  step  of  a  ladder 

bie  ©teuer,  the  tax  ba§  eteuer,  the  steerage 

ber  ©tift,  the  pencil  bo§  ©tift(t),  the  ecclesiastical  foun- 

dation 

ber  £l)or(t),  the  fool  ba§  2$0r(t),  the  gate 

ber  S8erbienft,  the  gain,  profit  ba§  SSerbienft,  the  merit 

bie  SBe^r,  the  defence  ba§  SBe^r,  the  wear,  dam 


Formation  of  Nouns  by  Derivation. 

Masculine  Nouns. 

1.  Masculine  nouns  can  generally  be  derived  from  verbs  by 
changing  the  final  en  or  n  into  er,  verbs  in  eln  dropping  the  e  be- 
fore I.  —  The  radical  vowel  of  substantives  thus  formed  from  verbs 
in  en  is  frequently  modified  ;  as, 

VERB  :  NOUN  : 

leljreny  to  teach  ber  Seljrer,  the  teacher 

tatuen,  to  dance  ber  Sanjer,  the  dancer 

erooern,  to  conquer  ber  (Srooerer,  the  conqueror 

Ijeudjeln,  to  play  the  hypocrite  ber  §eud)Ier,  the  hypocrite 

2.  From  names  of  towns  and  villages  names  of  males  can  be 
derived  by  adding  er;  as, 

SBien,  Vienna  ber  SSiener,  the  native  of  Vienna 

t,  Frankfort  ber  tJranlfurter,  the  native  of  Frankfort 


In  the  same  manner  such  names  can  very  often  be  derived  from 
names  of  countries  : 

bie  ©cfitoeh,  Switzerland        ber  ©rfjtoetaer,  the  Swiss 
Slnterifo,  America  ber  Slmeriloner,  the  American 

©nglanb,  England  ber  (Snglanber,  the  Englishman 


(*)  These  nouns  of  course  are  declined  according  to  their  gender  and  termination. 
(t)  Nouns  marked  with  a  (t)  have  an  irregular  declension. 


222 

Feminine  Nouns. 

1 .  Feminine  nouns  can  generally  be  derived  from  verbs  either 
by  changing  the  final  en  or  n  of  the  infinitive  into  ling  or  tiling, 
or  by  changing  the  final  n  into  rei ;  as, 

VERB:  NOUN: 

mtidjen,  to  mix  bte  SRtfdjung,  the  mixture 

Ijoften,  to  hope  bte  £offmmg,  the  hope 

ftttfen,  to  embroider  tie  Sttcferei,  the  embroidery 

2.  Feminine  nouns  are  very  often  derived  from  adjectives  by 
adding  I)eit(*)  or  fett  (or  tgfeit) ;  as, 

ADJECTIVE  :  NOTTN  : 

Hug,  prudent  bte  8Iitgljett,  the  prudence 

fcanf&ar,  thankful  bte  35anfbarfett,  the  thankfulness 

iuB,  sweet  bie  giiingfett,  the  sweetness 

8 .  Feminine  nouns  are  also  derived  from  other  nouns  by  adding 
jcfjaft,  which  is  somewhat  corresponding  to  the  English  ship;  as, 

NOUN:  FEM.  XOTTN: 

•ber  greunb,  the  Mend  bte  greunbfdjaft,  the  friendship 

Der  83urger,  the  citizen  bie  iSurgerjdjaft,  the  citizenship 

4.  Names  of  females  are  generally  formed  from  the  corres- 
ponding names  of  males  by  adding  in  to  the  latter ; — but  if  the  mas- 
culine ends  in  e  this  letter  is  dropped  in  the  feminine ;  as, 
ber  fieljrer,  the  (gentleman)  teacher         bte  Sdjrertn,  the  (lady)  teacher 
ber  Sontg,  the  king  bte  £6mgin,  the  queen 

ber  SJiadjbar,  the  neighbour  bte  9iad)&artn,  the  female  neighbour 

ber  SBtener,  the  native  of  Vienna  bte  SBtcnerin,  the  female  native 

of  Vienna 

ber  Xiger,  the  tiger  bte  £igenn,  the  tigress 

ber  ©atle,  the  husband  bie  ©atlin,  the  wife 

ber  SStoe,  the  lion  bte  SSroin,  the  lioness 

In  monosyllabic  names  the  vowel  is  modified ;  as, 
ber  £odj,  the  cook  bie  fiodjtn,  the  female  cook 

Der  SRarr,  the  fool  bte  -Jiarrtn,  the  female  fool 

ber  ^unb,  the  dog  bte  ^ihtbrn,  the  bitch 

The  vowel  is  also  modified  in : 
t>er  grattjofe,  the  Frenchman  bie  ffranaoftn,  the  French-lady 


Neuter  Nouns. 
FORMATION  OF  DIMINUTIVES. 

Most  German  Nouns  denoting  persons,  animals  or  things  can 
be  made  diminutive  by  adding  djen  (or  letn)  and  generally 
modifying  the  vowel ;  as, 

Nou»:  DiMistmvE: 

ber  9Konn,  the  man  bo§  9ttannd}en  (or  SRannletn),  the  little  man 

bee  iQaum,  the  tree  ba»  95auntc^en  (or  83auntlein),  the  little  tree 

ber  ©unb,  the  dog  ba-3  .fniufcrfien  (or  ^»ftnbletn),  the  little  clog 

bte  Stabr,  the  town  ba§  Stabtdjen  (or  Stabttetn),  the  small  town 

bo§  Soif,  the  village  ba§  Sprft^eit  (or  Sorfletn),  the  small  village 

ba§  ^Sferb,  the  horse  bo»  ^>ferb^en  (or  ^ferbletn),  the  little  horse 

(*)  Adjectives  of  one  syllable  take  generally  Ijeit  (or  sometimes  tgfeit). 


223 

Nouns  ending  in  e  drop  the  same  before  adding  djen  (or  letn)  ; 
as, 

NOUN  :  DIMINUTIVE  : 

bet  ®na6e,  the  boy  ba§  8na6rf)en  (or  SnaBletn),  the  little  boy 

ber  &aje,  the  hare  bo§  £>a§cfjen  (or  ^ciStein),  the  little  hare 

bie  glaive,  the  bottle  ba§  gldfcljdjen  (or  gtajd&lein),  the  small  bottle 

bie  (Snte,  the  duck  ba§  (Intern  (or  ©ntlein),  the  little  duck 


.  —  d&en  and  feitt  may  be  used  when  in  English  the  adjectives 
little  or  small  are  employed.  —  But  little  and  small  can  also  be  trans- 
lated by  fletn  instead  of  forming  a  diminutive,  and  Foreigners  had 
better  avoid  the  use  of  diminutives  unless  very  well  up  in  German,  as 
they  are  only  occasionally  used. 


On  the  Regular  Verbs. 

To  the  regular  conjugation  of  verbs  belong  the  following : 

1.  All  those  verbs  having  one  of  the  vowels  o,  it  or  en;  as, 

looljtten,  to  dwell;  fudjen,  to  seek;  beuten,  to  interpret 
Exceptions : 

fomnten,  to  come;  ritfcn,  to  call,  and  ftofjen,  to  push,  which  are 
irregular. 

2.  All  those  verbs  having  one  of  the  modified  vowels  ft,  ij,  u  or 
fill;  as, 

ttmljten,  to  choose;   Ij5ren,  to  hear;   fuTjIen,  to  feel;   ttaumeit,  to 
dream 
Exceptions: 

galjrett,  to  ferment;  geMren,  to  bring:  forth;  erlSfdfjen,  to  extin- 
guish; fd)tt)6ren,  to  swear;  Bettiigen  or  ttitgen,  to  deceive,  and  liigen, 
to  tell  a  lie,  which  are  irregular. 

3.  All  those  verbs  ending  in  eln,  era,  igen,  tren,  ieren,  djten, 
clen,  ften,  ftett,  jdjen,  §en;  as, 

tabetn,  to  blame;  gittern,  to  tremble;  Befefttgcn,  to  fortify;  ftu= 
biren,  to  study ;  regieren,  to  reign ;  rtdjten,  to  judge ;  ^oden,  to  chop ; 
Ijeften,  to  fix;  Ijuften,  to  cough;  laufd^en,  to  listen;  tonjen,  to  dance 
Exceptions : 

fledjteti,  to  plait;  fedjten,  to  fight;  etl^retlcn,  to  be  terrified; 
bacten,  to  bake;  ttwfdjen,  to  wash;  Berften,  to  burst;  fdjmeljen,  to 
smelt,  and  fijjen,  to  sit,  which  are  irregular. 

4.  All  those  verbs  ending  in  men  and  nea  (but  not  mm  en  or 
nnen);  as, 

oilmen,  to  breathe;  regnen,  to  rain 
Exceptions : 

nc^ntcn,  to  take,  and  fdjetnen,  to  shine,  which  are  irregular. 

OBSERVATION. — The  regular  or  irregular  conjugations  of 
many  verbs  cannot  be  ascertained  by  their  form ;  principally  not 
of  those  with  the  vowels  a,  e,  i,  ie,  et,  if  they  have  not  one  of 
the  above  terminations,  and  the  safest  plan  for  distinguishing 
regular  and  irregular  verbs,  is  to  learn  the  usual  irregular  verbs 
by  heart. 


224 

Division  of  Words  into  Syllables. 

All  syllables  following  the  first  syllable  are  commenced  by  a 
consonant  if  possible  ;  as, 

a*6er(*),  ta»beln,  @a«6c 

If  there  be  more  than  one  consonant,  the  last  consonant  only 
commences  the  new  syllable,  while  the  others  remain  with  the 
preceding  syllable  ;  as, 

rcf^ten,  nrib=men 


The  compound  consonants  dj,  qu,  J>Ij,  fdj,  jj,    tlj   are   con- 
sidered as  one  consonant  and  therefore  not  divided;  as, 

Be=quem,  Ijert'fdjen,  S3ii»djer 

The  compound  consonants  cf  and  $,   are  divided   into    M 
and  t-$;  as, 

(ftetfen)  fleMen,  (Safce) 


NOTE.  —  The  compound  consonants  ng,  ^f  and  jl  (not  8t)  may  be  di- 
vided or  not  ;  as, 

fmg=en  or  ftn'gen,  Sro=ljfcn  or  Zvo^en,  iBuffte  or  SButf'te 

A  consonant  belonging  to  a  prefix  must  remain   with    the 
prefix;  as, 

oer=ad)ten, 


Compound  words  are  divided  as  they  are  compounded  ;  as, 
en,  ent=fdjIieBen 


A  mute  Ij  after  a  vowel  remains  with  the  vowel;  as, 


When  two  vowels  (simple  or  compound  vowels)  are  in 
quence,  they  are  separated;  as, 
fo*en,  freu'e 


(*)  Note  that  the  hyphen  in  German  consists  of  two  lines  (•). 


THE    SYNTAX. 


German  Grammar. 

• 


226 

Forty-eighth  Lesson.  5Id(jtimbtrierstgfte  Seftton. 

The  Article  and  the  Noun. 
The  Definite  Article  is  used : 

1.)  before  abstract  nouns,  names  of  material,  and.  plural  nouns  when 
they  speak  of  the  whole  of  the  idea  or  class  they  signify ;  as, 

Sic  SJHIbt^atigfeit  tft  cine  f$6ne  Xugenb.  Charity  is  a  fine  virtue. 
Sic  gar&e  ber  Unidjulb.  The  colour  of  innocence.  £a§  ©olb  tft  ein 
eble§  9KetaH.  Gold  is  a  precious  metal  2>ie  $ferbe  fm&  nii§lid}e 
Sljiere.  Horses  are  useful  animals. 

2.)  before  collective  nouns,  names  of  mountains,  seasons,  months,  days 
and.  parts  of  the  day;  as, 

bie  SRegiemng,  government  ber  2lbel,  nobility,  nobles  ber  9Jiont« 
Blanc,  Montblanc  ber  grilling,  spring  ber  Sanuor,  January  bet 
©onntag,  Sunday  bie  9iad)t,  night  bie  Sammerung,  twilight. 

3.)  before  proper  names  preceded  by  an  adjective;  as, 

ber  Heine  Karl,  little  Charles    ba3  fdjSne  23ien,  beautiful  Vienna. 
Note.— Names  of  persons  are  not  declined  then,   and   names   of  places 
and  countries  in  S,  j,  5  do  not  take  g  in  the  Genitive. 

4.)  before  names  of  countries  which  are  feminine,  and  also  before  the 
few  which  are  masculine;  as, 

bie  Siirfei,  Turkey    ber  4?oag,  the  Hague. 

5.)  in  erpressions  of  price  and  time  when  the  indefinite  article  is  em- 
ployed in  English ;  as, 

Stoei  aftorl  ba§  $funb,  two  marks  a  pound  jtoei  SKetlen  bett 
Xag(*),  two  miles  a  day  breimal  bie  SSodje,  three  times  a  week. 

The  Article  in  German  is  invariably  placed  before  adjectives 
and  adverbs  preceding  the  noiin ;  as, 

ber  boppelte  Betrag,  double  the  amount  ein  ganj  alter  $err, 
quite  an  old  gentleman. 

The  article  is  generally  repeated  before  each  noun  in  sequence, 
and  is  only  omitted  when  several  nouns  with  the  same  article  fol- 
low each  other,  and  if  all  of  them  are  of  the  same  case  and  gender 
or  number,  and  refer  or  belong  to  the  same  person  or  thing ;  as, 
•'    ber  SSater  unb  ©rnaljrer  biefer  ftinber,  the  father  and  nourisher 
of  these  children      bie  Simmer,  £I)uren  unb  genfter  be§  |>auie§,  the 
rooms,  doors,  and  windows  of  the  house     ba§  Slleib  gefjort  einer  @d)ait« 
fpielerin  unb  ©angerin,  the  dress  belongs  to  an  actress  and  songstress. 

Masculine  and  neuter  nouns  expressing  measure,  number  and 
weight  are  not  declined  and  only  used  in  the  singular  if  pre- 
ceded by  a  numeral  and  followed  by  a  noun  or  adjective  whether 
expressed  or  understood ;  as, 

r-eben  $funb  Kaffee,  seven  pounds  of  coffee  ein  ©la?  Sier,  a 
glask  of  beer  toiele  SJlonn  SReiterei,  many  horse  (soldiers)  fed)$ 
8oH  breit,  six  inches  broad. 

Note. — "Of"  with  those  nouns  (also  with  feminine)  is  not  expressed  and 
the  two  nouns  agree  in  case. 

A  noun  in  apposition  with  another  noun  or  with  a  pronoun 
must  be  in  the  same  case ;  as, 

mit  feinem  Setter,  bem  ^ouprmann  9i.,  with  his  couetn,  captain  N. 
n,  ber  Befte  6djii$e  ber  ©tobt,  he,  the  best  marksman  of  the  town. 

(*)  Nouns  denoting  definite  time  must  be  in  the  accusative,  if  not  the  subject  of  the 
sentence. 


227 


the  blessing,  bcr  <3egen 
Plur:  bie  ©egnungenf. 
brave,  gallant,  tapfer 
costly,  valuable, 
to  dawn,  bammern 
the  degree,  ber  ©rob 
Plur:  bie  ©rabe 
the  dozen,  ba§  Sufcenb 
„   elephant,    ber     (£Ie 

pliant 
(Plur:  see  page  14) 


the  gold,  ba§  ®olb 
,,    heart,  bag  £ers 

(DecL:  see  page  16) 
,,    iron,  bo§  Siien 
lively,  leb^aft 
the  metal,  bo§  Wetrttt 
„   mutton,  ba§  §amtnel« 

Retfa 
„   pork,  ba§  @d)h>eine« 


the  rat,  bte  SRatte 
to  rejoice,  erfreuen 
the  rest,  bte  9\uf)C 
„    riches,  ber 

Plur:  bie  8Reicfitf)umei 
„    silver,  ba§  Sil&et 
„    stick,  ber  ©tocf 
troublesome,  Idfttg 
ugly,  IjaBlicI) 
|  the  war,  ber  8rieQ 


Exercise  No.  48. 

1.  Avarice  and  selfishness  are  two  ugly  passions  (Leidenschaften). 
Hope  is  one  of  the  greatest  blessings.  Iron  is  the  most  useful  and  gold 
the  most  valuable  of(von}&ll  metals.  The  nutritive  properties^  Nahr  haftig- 
Iceitf.  sing.)  of  mutton  are  (is)  greater  than  those  (that)  of  pork.  Mice 
and  rats  are  troublesome  little  animals.  Nobles  (Add  m.  sing.  )  are  (  is) 
considered  (betrachtet  als)  the  support  (Stutzef.)  of  monarchies  (  Mo- 
narchic f.).  Have  you  ever  (schon)  been  on  the  Righi  (Rigim.)i.  In 
summer  I  prefer  beer  io(Dat  .)  wine.  Sunday  is  the  day  of  rest.  Morning 
was  dawning  when  we  left  the  ball.  Brave  Admiral  (Admiral)  Nelson 
will  never  be  forgotten  by  the  English  people.  A  war  between  Turkey 
and  Russia  (Russland  n.)  was  unavoidable  (unvermeidlich).  The  pens 
cost  one  mark  (Mark  f.)  a  dozen.  The  postman  comes  four  times  a 
day.  I  have  as  costly  a  watch  as  you.  Quite  an  old  lady  travelled 
with  me.  Here  are  your  brother's  hat  and  stick.  Give  (  Dat.  )  me  three 
pounds  of  tea.  The  table  is  three  feet  high.  To-day  we  have  ten  de- 
grees [of]  cold  (Kaltef.).  I  am  the  friend  of  his  cousin,  the  advocate 
N.  I  conversed  with  Mr.  X.,  the  famous  poet.  ' 


2.  ®er  SSetn  erfreut  be3  Sftenfdjen  ^crg.  SStetriet  ®ra§  SSein 
ija&en  toir  getrun!en  ?  2Die  -ftac&t  brad}  fieretn  (came  on),  elje 
ttrir  bie  @tabt  erretc&ten.  liefer  ©toe!  ift  nidjt  mefir  ate  bier 
$u|3  long.  @ie  gaben  mir  eine  gan$  gitte  ^Inttoort.  S)er  ^affee 
foftet  etne  SQlarf  bag  $funb.  ®a^  ©olb  ift  tfieurer  ate  ba^  ©ilber. 

History  repeats  itself.  He  gave  (  Dat.  )  me  double  the  sum.  July  is 
generally  the  hottest  month  in  the  year,  and  January  the  coldest. 
The  tusks  (Zdhne)  of  elephants  are  valuable.  I  prefer  lively  Paris  to 
(Dat.  )  busy  (geschdftig)  London.  Health  is  a  greater  blessing  than  riches 
(sing.).  Winter  is  a  cold  season.  The  cheese  and  butter  you  bought 
are  not  good.  You  are  too  good  a  father  to  (gegen)  your  children.  I 
was  introduced  to  (Dat.)  his  cousin  (f.),  the  most  beautiful  lady  in  the 
town.  She  writes  to  (an  Ace.)  me  twice  a  month.  How  long  were 
you  in  Switzerland  ?  A  telegram  to  E.  costs  twenty  pfennigs  (Pfen- 
nig m.)  a  word. 


Come  to  breakfast  (etc.). 

After  breakfast  (etc.). 

At  breakfast  (etc.). 

For  breakfast  (etc.). 

At  what  time  is  the  dinner- 
hour? 

Will  you  dine  at  the  table 
d'hote? 

I  must  go  and  have  my  dinner. 

Is  the  cloth  laid? 
Dinner  is  served. 
Bring  me  the  bill  of  fare — the 

wine  card. 
What  will  you  have  (take),  some 

tea  or  coffee? 
A  cup  of  tea  if  you  please. 

Will  you  have  (take)  some  eggs  ? 
May  I  trouble  you  for  the  mus- 
tard? 
Will    you    pass    me  the  salt, 


Help  yourself! 

You  are  not  eating. 

I  have  had  enough. 

Will  you  not  take  some  more 

meat? 
No,  thank  you,  I  am  amply 

provided. 

What  do  you  want  (wish  for)  ? 
I  want  some  chocolate. 
At  what  price  ? 

At  about  three  marks  a  pound. 
This,  here,  is  a  very  nice  sort 
How  much  is  it  a  pound  ? 
Three  marks  60  pfennigs. 


228 

Conversational  and  Idiomatic  Phrases. 

©efpracfje  unb  SRebenSarten. 

Is  breakfast — dinner — supper 

—ready? 
Breakfast  (etc.)  is  preparing. 

When  do  you  generally  break- 
fast? 
When  do  y«u  dine — sup? 


3ft  bo§  gruSftfid— bag  Sftittag- 
effen— ba£  Slbenbeffen— fertig? 

3)a3  griiftftiicf  (etc.)  nrirb  eben 
gentadjt. 

SSann  friifjftiiclen  ©ie  getoofjn- 
Hdj? 

SSann  effen  ©ie  511  Sftittag— 511 

Slbenb? 
$ommen  ©ie  jum  gfrltyfifldfflfej. 

9?ad)  bent  griifrftucf  (etc.). 
SSeim  griif)ftucf  (etc). 
Bum  ftruYftuc!  (etc.). 
SSann  ttrirb  511  2ftittag  gegeffen? 

SBotfen  ©ie  an  ber  table  d'hote 

effen? 
3d)  nwfc  gum   2Jttttageffen   ($u 

S3f4)  gefjen. 

f|t  ber  Sifcfj  gebecft? 
al  2ftittageffen  ift  aufgetragen. 
S3ringen    @ie   mtr    bte  ©peife- 

farte — bie  SSeinfarte. 
SSa^  njoHen  ©ie  trinfen,   X^ee 

ober  Coffee? 
gtne  Saffe  X^ee,  toenn  i%  bitten 

barf. 

SSoCen  ©ie  einige  ®ter  effen? 
S)arf    id^    ©ie   urn   ben   ©enf 

bitten? 
SBoHen  ©ie  nut  gefaEigft  ba§ 

©alj  geben? 
93ebienen  ©ie  ftd^ ! 
©ie  effen  ja  nidjtS. 
%fy  bin  fatt. 

SSotten  ©ie  fid^  nid^t  nod§ 
gleifi^  ne^men? 

iclj    bin   no^    re 
cerfe^en. 

n  ©ie? 
Gtfjocolabe. 
u  ttjelc^em  ^rei§? 
Ungefa^r  bret  SDZar!  ba§ 
2)ie§  Ijier  ift  eine  fe^r  gitte  ©ortc. 
2Biet>ieI  foftet  ba§  ^funb  batoon? 
2)rei 


229 

dmtm  Mo.  48. 


tft  Sitter,  Sdjtoetgett2  tft  (Mb* 

©in  inbifcfjer3  ®anfmann  bradjte  einen  (£IepI)anten  ju 
SDtefte.  ®aum  toar  er  angefommen,  al§  er  einen  (£n= 
ropaer4  bemer!te,  ber,  ofjne  ein  SSort  ju  fagen,  urn  ben 
(Elep^anten  fjerttmging5  nnb  benfelben  don  alien  Setten6 
anfmerffant  befafj.?  3)er  ®aufmann  ridjtete8  fcerfdjiebene9 
Sragen10  an  i^n,  fonnte  t§m  after  letne  5lnttt)ort  ent= 
XodcnH*  3H3  fi^  bann  ein  tdnferi2  na^tcis,  joanbtc  fid^ 
ber  ^anfmann  an  ben  Snropaer  nnb  flufterte14  iljm  in§ 
D^r:  w@agen  @ie  nirfjt  ein  SSort,  big  ic^  ben  (Silepfjanten 
tjerfanft  ^abe,  it^  tuerbe  3§nen  ein  pbfd^e^15  ^efc^enf 
macfjen."  ®er  grembe16  niifte1^  jnftimmenb18,  btieb  aber 
ftumm19  tote  §nt)or20.  TO  ber  §anbel21  abgef^toffen22 
unb  ba§  @elb  be^a^lt  toar,  ^anbigle23  tf)m  ber  ^anfmann 
je^n  ^rosent2^  be§  ^anfgelbe§25  ein  nnb  fprac§  $n  bem 
^e^eimnigt)otten26  gremben:  ,,3e^t  biirfen  @ie  reben,  id^ 
bin  neugierig2?  §n  erfa^ren28,  toie  @ie  ben  Seller  an  bem 
Iin!en29  95ein  meine§  ©te^^anten  entberft  ^aben,  ben  id) 
boc^  fo  gefc^iift  glaubte  berborgen30  §n  ^aben/'  ,,@inen 
Sefjler?"  entgegnete31  ber  ©c^tDeigfante32.  „%<§  fjabe  ntt^tg 
entbetft;  e^  ift  ba§  erfte  9Jlat  in  meinent  Seben33,  ba§  ici^ 
iiberi)aupt  einen  ©lertanten  jn  ©efic^t34  befommen35,  ic§ 
§abe  i^n  be§!>alb  an§  blower36  -ftengier3?  fo  genan  befe^en. 


ober  2)eutf^cr»~2)ame:  ®a§  ^tnb  ift  ein 
Hetner  granjofe,  ni^t  toa^r38?"—  ^inbgmab^en39:  „%$ 
toei§  fetbft  ni^t,  toie  man  fagen  fott;  feine  Gutter  ift  eine 
?5ran§ofin,  fein  SSater  aber  ein  ^eutf^er."  —  £)ame:  (;5lc^ 
ba  mn§  man  eben  toarten,  bi§  e§  fprecfjen  !ann,  bann 
toirb  man  e§  glei<$  toifferi!" 


1  to  speak,  2  to  be  silent,  3  Indian,  4  European,  5  to  walk 
round,  *~heiumgehen  (irr.),  6  sides,  7  to  view,  besehen  (irr.), 
8  put,  9  various,  different,  10  questions,  11  to  elicit,  entlocken, 
12  buyer,  13  to  approach,  sich  nahen  (ndhern),  14  to  whisper, 
flilstern,  15  pretty,  nice,  16  stranger,  17  to  nod,  nicken,  18  assent, 
19  dumb,  silent,  20  before,  21  bargain,  22  to  conclude,  eibschliessen, 
{irr.},  23  to  hand,  einhdndigen,  24  per  cent,  25  purchase-money, 
26  mysterious,  27  curious,  28  to  learn,  hear,  erfahren  (irr.), 
"29  left,  30  to  hide,  verbergen  (irr.),  31  to  reply,  entgegnen,  32  the 
flilent  man,  33  life,  34  before  my  eyes,  35  had,  36  mere,  37  cu- 
riosity 38  is  it  not?  39  nurse-maid. 


230 

Forty-ninth  Lesson,  Sfceummbtrierjtgfte  Seftion. 

The  Qualifying  Adjective. 

Adjectives  as  a  rule  precede  the  noun  in  German ;  as, 
am  le&ten  SDlontag,  on  Monday  last. 

Participles,  as  in  English,  are  often  used  as  adjectives  and 
follow  throughout  the  rules  for  adjectives ;  as, 

bet  tjcrfaufte  ©arten,  the  sold  garden      tie  ftngenbe  Some,  the 
singing  lady. 

Adjectives  and  participles  used  as  nouns  are  nevertheless  de- 
clined like  adjectives  (the  termination  varying  according  to  an 
article,  etc.,  preceding  or  not) ;  as, 

Adj. :  beutuf),  German  toerloBl,  betrothed  Btttenb,  suppliant 

Masc.:    ber  Seutidje          mein   SBerloBtet  ein  SHttenber 

Fern.:     bie  Seutfdje          nteine  SBerloBte  etne  Sittenbe 

Neut. :    bo§  £eutid)e 
Plural:   bie  SDeutidjen        oHe      SSerloBtc  S3tttenbe 

Such  words  are:  ber  SBeamre,  the  official;  ber  SBebiente,  the  servant 
footman;  bet  SBefannte,  the  acquaintance;  ber  ©efangene,  the  pri- 
soner; ber  ©etftlidje,  the  clergyman;  ber  ©efanbte,  the  ambassador; 
ber  SReifenbe,  the  traveller;  ber  23erttanbte,  the  relation,  etc. 

The  words  man,  woman,  person,  following  an  adjective  are 
frequently  not  expressed  in  German,  the  adjective  then  be- 
coming a  noun ;  as, 

ber  SBIinbe,  the  blind  man     bie  Sllte,  the  old  woman     bie  ftran* 
fen,  the  sick  persons. 

In  the  same  manner  adjectives  followed  by  one  and  having  a  more 
general  meaning  are  used  as  nouns ;  as, 

bie  Kleinen,  the  little  ones. 

Adjectives  used  substantively  and  signifying  a  whole  class  of 
persons,  must  take  the  plural  termination ;  as, 

bie  Slrmen  Don  flonbon,  the  poor  of  London. 

Adjectives  denoting  nations  and  used  substantively  must  be 
rendered  by  the  corresponding  plural  noun  in  German  ;  as, 

bie  granjofen,  the  French     bie  ©nglanber,  the  English. 
NOTE. — The  corresponding  noun  must  also  be  used  in  phrases  like 
the  following  used  in  ordinary  English : 

@inb  @te  ein  (Jnglanber.    SKein,  id)  Bin  ein  Seutfdjer.     Are  you 
English.    No,  I  am  German. 

The  simple  adjective  is  used  (after  fetn,  to  be}  in  phrases  like : 
3ft  bo§  defter  gut?    Is  the  knife  a  good  one?     SBer  ift  grofjer, 
©ie  ober  id)?    Who  is  the  taller,  you  or  I? 

Adjectives  being  in  apposition  with  a  proper  name  agree  with 
it  in  case,  gender  and  number;  as, 

N.  Karl  ber  ©rofje,  Charles  the  Great     G.  £art§  be§  ©rofjen,  of 
Charles  the  Great     D.  Karl  bem  ©rofeen    A.  Karl  ben  ©rofeen. 

NOTE. — Those  names  of  persons  which  ought  to  take  ns  or  ens  in 
the  Genitive  (see  p.  42)  are  not  inflected  if  followed  by  an  apposition ;  as, 
2)a£  SeBen  granj  be$  ftmciten,  the  life  of  Francis  the  second. 


blind,  BItnb 

bold,  Ifiljn  firr. 

to  catch,  capture,  fang en 
the  colours  (ensign),  trie 

gafyne 

to  conduct,  lead,  fitljren 
to  confess,  fcefennen  irr. 

(gefteljen  irr.) 
to    conquer  (some  one), 

fcefiegen 

the  court,  yard,  ber  fiof 
„   crime,  ba3  SBer&recgen 


deaf,  tauB 

dumb,  ftumnt 

deaf    and   dumb,    tau6= 

ftumtn 

formerly,  friifier  (efjema.(») 
gallant  (civil),  artig 
to  hide,  toer&ergen  irr. 
the  hospital,  ba§  $oftritai 
Plur :  bte  f>otyttaler 
ignorant,  unttrifjenb 
the  institution,  bie  2In> 
ftolt 


lame,  loljm 
to  liberate,  Befretcn 
the  messenger,   ber  93ote 
,,    place,  bie  <5teHe 
,,    police-court,  ba£  tyQ* 


to    rob    (some   one),    6e» 

roitben 
the  sentence,  phrase,  ber 

@afc 

,,   Swiss,  ber  @<J)ttjeijer 
»*   throne,  ber  Xljron 


Exercise  No.  49. 

1.  He  had  an  old  horse,  blind  and  lame.  The  detected  thief  was 
captured.  A  commenced  letter  lay  on  the  table.  The  queen  visited 
the  wounded  soldiers  in  the  hospital.  The  dying  murderer  confessed 
all  the  crimes  he  had  committed.  Translate  the  following  sentences. 
He  died  with  [a]  smiling  face  (Mund  m.).  The  soldiers  marched 
(marschiren)  with  flying  colours  (plur.)  through  the  town.  This  lady 
is  a  German.  All  the  prisoners  were  being  liberated.  This  gentleman 
is  a  traveller  for  (lei)  Mr.  X.  I  met  several  old  acquaintances  at  my 
uncle's.  The  lame  [man]  sat  on  a  chair.  Do  not  make  the  little  [man] 
angry.  All  the  robbed  were  called  to  (auf  Ace.)  the  police-court. 
This  is  an  institution  for  the  dumb.  The  strong  ought  to  help  (Dat.  )  the 
weak.  Many  ignorant  [persons]  hide  their  ignorance  (  Unwisseriheit 
f.)  behind  impudence  (Frechheitf.).  The  French  were  conquered  by 
the  Germans  in  1870  —  71.  Is  this  gentleman  French?  No,  he  is 
Russian.  Is  the  river  a  deep  one  ?  Yes,  it  is  in  (an)  many  places 
above  fifteen  feet  deep.  Who  is  the  more  gallant,  your  cousin  or  mine? 
Voltaire  was  a  long  time  at  the  court  of  Frederic  the  Great. 


2.  $>er  erttmrtete  23ote  ift  nodj  ntdjt  ancjeromtnen.  5Btc 
foHten  immer  bie  ^reimbe  ber  5lrnten  fetn.'  S)er  SSIinbe  ftmrbe 
bon  einem  9ftabd)en  gefiityrt.  ttnjer  ©efanbter  am  ruffifrfjen  |>ofe 
ift  ftunirfberufen  (recalled)  tuorben.  ®er  9?etfenbe  be3  |>errn  3E. 
ift  Ijter  gettefen.  SBel^e^  toaren  bie  SSeftegten  in  ber  ©djlacljt 
bet  (of)  Setp^ig  (Leipsic)l  2Ber  folgte  (succeeded)  5Ufreb  bent 
©rofeen  auf  ben  englifdjen  Sfjron? 

My  cousin  is  an  official  at^&etjthe  post-office.  Is  your  horse  a  young 
one?  Have  you  read  "(the)  Paradise  (Parodies  n.)  Lost"  by  Milton  ? 
We  looked  at  (betrachten)  the  setting  sun.  Which  is  the  better,  this 
book  or  that?  The  Swiss  conquered  Charles  the  Bold.  While  the 
hospital  was  burning  all  the  sick  were  rescued.  The  man,  poor  and 
old,  was  also  deaf  and  dumb.  This  is  an  institution  both  for  the  dumb 
and  for  the  deaf.  The  sleeping  [persons]  were  surprised  by  the  fire.  Can 
you  come  on  Thursday  next?  This  lady  is  an  acquaintance  of  my 
sister-in-law. 


232 


Conversational  and 
What  is  the  price  of  this  cigar? 
Twenty  marks  a  hundred. 
How  much  do  you  charge  for  it? 
It  is  a  very  low  charge. 
Can  you  not  take  anything  off? 

That  is  the  lowest. 

I  cannot  sell  it  cheaper. 

Give    me    a    mark's  worth  of 

these  grapes. 
[  want  a  pair  of  gloves. 

What  size  do  you  take? 
Will  you  try  this  pair  ? 

These  will  fit  you. 

Can  you  give  change  for  this 

sovereign? 
I  have  not  any  change  with  me. 

Can  you  not  get  change  for  me? 

You  have  not  given  me  my 

change  yet. 
There  is  no  change. 
What  is  the  matter  with  your 

watch? 

Can  you  mend  it? 
When  will  it  be  done  (finished)? 
How  soon  can  you  mend  it  ? 
My  watch  is  right — wrong. 
My  watch  is  fast — slow. 
Wind  up  your  watch. 
I  will  put  my  watch  right. 
Put  it  by  mine. 
How  is  the  weather  to-day? 

It  is  raining  very  fast. 

Do  you  think  the  bad  weather 

will  continue  ? 
The  weather  is  very  changeable 

— uncertain. 
We  shall   have    fine    weather 

(etc.). 
We  had  ten  degrees  of  frost 

—heat 


Idiomatic  Phrases. 
SBiebiel  foftct  biefe  (Stgarre? 
^nmngig  Sftar!  ba§  ^unbert. 
2Biet>iel  fcerlangen  @tc  bafiir? 
®3  ift  ein  fdjr  biHiger  $ret3. 
$6nnen  (Sic  nidjt  ettuaS  nadj- 

laffen? 

£>a§  ift  ba§  SSifligfte. 
3>rf)  fann  e3  ntdjt  biHiger  geben. 
©eben  @ie  mtr  fitr  eine  9ttar! 

toon  biefen  Xrauben. 
3$   braiidje    ein   $aar   $anb» 

fdjufje. 

SBelc^e  Summer  ^oben  @tc? 
SSotlen  @ie  biefeS  $aar  anpro- 

btren  ? 

3>iefe  pajfcn  3^ncn. 
^onnen   @te   biefett    Sotieretgn 

toed^jeln  ? 
S<^  Ijabe  fein  fleine^   ©etb   bei 

mtr. 
£onnen  @tc  mtr  nic^t  tt)ed)fetn 

laffen? 
@ic  ^aben  mtr  nod)  ni 

gegeben. 

elb  ift  gerabe  rec^t. 
fe§It  an  Q^rer  Tlfyct 


^onnen  6te  fie  madden? 
SSann  ift  fie  fertig? 
53i3  mann  fonnen  Sie  fie  mod^ 
90?eine  ll^r  geljt  red^t—  falfd^ 

ll|r  ge^t  bor  —  nad^. 
en  @ie  S^rc  Ufa  auf. 
nritt  meine  U()r  rid^ten. 
n  Sie  fie  nac^  meiner. 
fiir  better  ift 
fiir  SSetter  ^aben 
(B  regnet  fe^r  ftarf. 
©lauben  @te,  ba§ 
SSetter  anf>alt< 

SSetter  ift  fe^r  Deranberlicf) 

—  unbeftanbig. 

merben  fc^one^  SSetter  (etc.) 
bef  omnten  . 
SSir    fatten   jeljn    ©rab 

—  SBtirme. 


233 

Reading  (Ercrdee  tta.  49. 

(Sine  Sa£fjtr*2lnelb0te. 

(£tn  anSlanbifdjer1  ©efanbter  fjatte  in  SBten  mit 
eine  Unterrebnng,2  Bet  toeldjer  jener  aujserte,3  Me 
beutfdje  (Spradje  Ija&e  etnen  groften  Sfteidjtfjnm  an  286'rtern 
unb  fiir  ntandien  93egriff4  iiBerflitffige5  SBorte.  ©apljir 
fonnte  ber  te|ten  33ef)auptnng6  nidjt  Beiftimmen7  nnb  Bal 
urn  SSeiftriete.8  3)er  ©efanbte  ertoteberte  :  ,,,3ttrifd)en 
f,f)eiJ3en"9  nnb  ,,nennen"10  ift  bod)11  !ein  llnterfdu'eb!" 
fagte:  ,,D  jar  id^  ton  tneinen  Wiener  tuo^I12 
ba§  er  ettna§  tljne,  aBer  ntd^t  nennen10."  2)er 
<5Jefanbte  ftjar  no^  tudjt  nBerjettgt13  unb  fn^r14  fort: 
,,@^eifen"i5  nnb  Weffen"i6  nnterf^eiben1^  fit§  jebocij  ni^t!" 
ir  entgegnete:  ,,Slc§  ja,  man  ton  loo^l  5lrme  fpeifen15, 
nic^t  effen16.  2)er  ©efanbte  toottte  aud^  je|t  noi^ 
ntc§t  nac^geBen18  nnb  fagte:  ,,3n)ifc^en  ,,fenben"19  nnb 
"fd^ito"19  totffcn  '@te  bod)  feinen  Unterfc^ieb!"  @a^tt 
anttoortete  :  ,,@ie  ftnb  ein  ^cfanbter20,  aBer  !ein($efd)tc!ter21. 
2)tefe  le|te  ©rllcirnng22  UeB23  ben  ®efanbten  berftummen24, 
nnb  bte  Unterrebnng  tuar  ^to|Itc^  Beenbtgt25. 


dine  Sl&ferttgung26*  —  ©in  ©ngtdnber,  ber  Bet  bent 
Sitrften2?  ^annt|  §nr  Xafel28  tnar,  ^atte  ba§  Ungliid,  ein 
®la§  SKetn  nmgntoerfen.  f,3ft  ba§  fo  ^eBrand^29  in  @ng= 
lanb?"  fragte  ber  giirft,  Di)ne  im  9Jlinbeften30  anger  gaf- 
fnng  §n  gerat^en31,  er^ieberte  ber  (Snglanber:  ,,$)a£  nid^t, 
aBer  toenn  e§  gefc^ie^t,  fo  fragt  tuenigften^  S'ltemanb  barnad)." 

1  foreign,  2  conversation  .  3  to  utter,  remark,  dussern,  4  idea, 
expression,  5  superfluous,  6  declaration,  7  to  consent,  agree,  bei- 
stimmen,  8  examples,  9  to  call  (to  give  a  name),  to  bid,  Jieissen  (irr.), 
10  to  call  (to  give  a  name),  to  name,  nennen  (irr.),  11  to  be  sure, 
12  certainly,  13  to  convince,  iiberzeugen,  14  to  continue  (in  speaking), 
fortfahren,  15  to  eat,  to  feed  (to  entertain  at  table),  speisen,  16  to 
eat,  essen  (irr.),  17  to  differ,  sick  unterscheiden  (irr.),  18  to  give 
way,  yield,  n&chgeben  (irr.),  19  to  send,  senden  (irr.),  schicken, 
20  &  21  Gesandter  (ambassador),  is  formed  from  the  past  participle  of 
senden  (to  send),  i.e.  gesandt  (sent),  meaning  one  who  is  sent.  —  Ge- 
schidcter  is  formed  from  the  past  participle  of  schicken  (to  send),  i.e. 
geschickt  (sent),  meaning  as  well  one  who  is  sent,  but  which  could  not 
be  applied  to  an  ambassador.  On  the  other  hand  geschickter  can  also 
be  considered  of  being  formed  from  the  adjective  geschickt  (clever), 
meaning  a  clever  one.  22  explanation,  23  made,  24  silent,  25  fin- 
ished, 26  repartee,  27  prince,  28  at  table,  29  custom,  30  in  the 
least,  31  being  put  out  of  countenance. 

German  Grammar  8* 


234 


Fiftieth  Lesson. 


Sunfeigfte  fieftioiu 


The  Qualifying-  Adjective  (concluded). 

Many  adjectives,  as  in  English,  require  for  the  completion  of  the 
sense  a  complement,  and  such  complement,  if  a  noun  or  pronoun,  must 
Le,  in  German,  either  in  the  Genitive  or  Dative  case,  or  must  be  ac- 
companied by  a  preposition. 

An  adjective  requiring  a  noun  or  pronoun  in  the  Genitive  or 
Dative  must  be  preceded  by  this  noun  or  pronoun ;  as, 

Stefcr  Sftann  tft  be§  3)ie6fta1)I3  t>erbacf)tig.    This  man  is  suspected 
of  theft.    3ft  e§  gfjnen  angeneljm?    Is  it  agreeable  to  you? 

Some  usual  adjectives  governing  the  Genitive  are: 

toerbadjttg,  suspected  of 
luurbig,  worthy  of 


betnufct,  conscious  of 
gerotfj,  certain  of 
03,  rid  of 


mfibe,  tired  of 
fd)ulbtg,  guilty  of 
ftdjer,  sure  of 


Some  usual  adjectives  governing  the  Dative  are: 


afjnltdj,  like,  resembling 
angenetym,  agreeable  to 
befannt,  known  to 
banfbar,  grateful  to 


fremb,  strange  to 
gtetdj,  like,  equal  to 
gunfrio.,  favourable  to 
mogltdj,  possible  for 


nab,e,  near  to 
nufclidj,  useful  to 
tteu,  faithful  to 
ttrillfommen,  welcome  to 


And  all  those  of  the  above  with  the  prefix  tut  having  an  opposite 
meaning;  like: 

ungetoiij  (Gen.),  uncertain  of;  unmogltdj  (Dat.),  impossible  for. 

An  adjective  requiring  the  noun  or  pronoun  with  a  preposition 
is  generally  followed  by  this  noun  or  pronoun,  as  in  English ;  as, 
©tnb  (Ste  jufrteben  ntit  tnetner  UeBerfetjung  ?     Are  you  satisfied 
with  my  translation?    Sfdj  Bin  ftolj  auf  tf)n.    I  am  proud  of  him. 

NOTE.  The  adjective  may,  however,  also  be  preceded,  especially 
by  a  noun;  as,— Sinb  <5ie  ntit  tnetner  lleberfe&ung  jufrteben? 

Some  usual  adjectives  with  Prepositions  differing  from  the  literal 

equivalent  are : 

freuntlidj  gegen,  kind  to    t)5fltd)gegen,civil, polite  to 
frob  fiber  ^Acc.),  glad  of   retdj  an  (Dat),  rich  in 
gleidjgiiltig   gegen,  indif-    fidjer  cor  (Dat.),  safe,  se- 

ferent  to  cure  from 

graufam  gegen,  cruel  to     |  ftol§  auf  (Ace.),  proud  of 
And  all  those  which  with  the  prefix  un  have  an  opposite  meaning,  like  : 
unfaljig  511,  unable,  incapable  of. 

Such  an  adjective  (or  participle),  if  qualifying  a  noun,  must 
always  be  preceded  by  its  complement  and  be  placed  directly  be- 
fore that  noun ;  as, 

ein  be§  2>iebftab,I§  berb  ad)  tiger  SJlann,  a  man  suspected  of  theft 
eine  tnir  unangeneb/nte  <Sad)e,  an  affair  disagreeable  to  me  unjere  an 
©elb  arnte  ©tabt,  our  town  poor  in  money. 

The  same  takes  place  if  the  adjective  is  accompanied  by  any  other 
word  or  words ;  as, 

eine  Ijauftg  oorlommenbe  ®ranfb,etr,  a  disease  frequently  occurring 
eine  nod)  nie  in  Seutfdjlanb  gefeljene  S^aturerfdjetnung,  a  phenomenon 
never  seen  before  in  Germany. 

NOTE. — Instead  of  placing  the  adjective  and  complement,  etc.,  be~ 
fore  the  noun,  they  may  also  be  changed  into  a  relative  clause ;  like : 
ein  9Jiann,  ber  be§  $'.ebftab,I£  »erbad)tig  ift. 


arm  an  (Dat.),  poor  of 
cite!  auf  (Ace.),  vain  of 
ermfibet  toon,  fatigued, 

tired  with 
Siftfl  5",  able,  capable  of 


235 


the  arrival,  bie  Slttfltttft 
„   benefactor,  ber  2801)1= 

ti)&tn 

„    beauty,  bic  <5d)onl)eit 
„    creditor,    ber    @ldvt= 

fctger 
disagreeable.unpleasant, 

unongeneljnt 
false,  folfd) 


the  fate,  ba§  ©eftdfal 
„   fish,  ber  fjif^ 
,  ,   know!  edge,  bte  $emtt= 
nijj 
Plur:  bte  ®enntntffe 
„   life,  ba§  £eben 
„    play,  game,  ba»  (Spiel 
„   reproach,    ber    SSor= 
ttmrf 

to  resist,  toiberfteljen  irr 

the  sea,  ba§  SJieer 
unable,    incapable,    utt» 

m& 

ungrateful,  unbcmfBor 
unkind,  itnfreunblic^ 
unknown,  un&efannt 
unworthy,  untuiirbig 

Exercise  No.  50. 

1.  He  had  been  a  long  time  suspected  of  (the)  false  play.    "We  could 
hardly6  get  ridc  of  him*.     The  son  will  become  like  his  father.    It  will 
be  agreeable  to  me  if  you  will  still  wait  a  little.    Is  it  possible"  for  you* 
now6  to  resist  my  entreaties  ?     You  should  make  yourself  more  useful 
to  your  father.      As  often  as  you  come  you  will  be  welcome  to  your 
friends.      This  poem  is  unworthy  of  the  great  poet.       It  is  impossible 
for  him  to  pay  all  his  creditors.     You  are  not  so  poor  in  friends  as  you 
think.    He  was  very  indifferent  to  my  reproaches.    Here  you6  are*  safe 
from  him.     Be  not  so  unkind  to  the  poor  child.     A  gentleman  strange 
to  me  has  left  that  here  for  you.       He  is  a  man  vain  of  his  knowledge 
(plur.).      A  man  (mankind)   tired  of  his  life  is  to  be  pitied  (zu 
lemitleiden). 

2.  ©eib  freunbtidj  wtb   pfttdj   gegen  ^eberntanti.     Sdj   &"1 
[mir]  fetne3  §fe&tec£  bettmfjt.    (Setb  euern  SSoljltfyatern  nicfit  im* 
bcmfbar.      (£r  ftiirgte  fid)  auf  (rushed  at)  mid)   einem  SBiit|enbcn 
(madman)  gleic&.     5)te3  ift  ber  Don  3$*em"  SSater  imterfc&rtebene 
2Berf)fet.    £)er  £imb  ift  etn  bent  30?enfd)en  treueS  £f)ter.     SSeffen 
ift  btefe  grail  fdjulbig  ?     2Ber  graufam  gegen  X^tere  ift,  ift  audj 
groufant    gegen    9Jlenf(^en.      ©eten   @ie   bem   (Sc^tcEfal   bonfbor, 
bafe  S^e  SSertufte  nic^t  grower  ftnb.     S^  &i«  ermiibet  tiom  2k> 
beiten  (working). 

The  sea  is  rich  in  fish  (plur.).  Is  that  lady  known  to  you ?  She 
is  too  vain  of  her  beauty.  Are  you  certain  of  your  cause  (Sache  f.)1 
He  became  very  impolite  to  me.  Only  a  few  soldiers  have  remained 
faithful  to  the  king.  We  are  sure  of  his  good  behaviour.  It  was  very 
disagreeable  to  Mr.  N .  that  he  did  not  find  (treffen)  you  at  home. 
Such  words  are  not0  worthy6  of  you*.  This  street  is  strange  to  me.  Ger- 
many is  a  country  rich  in  songs.  I  am  glad  (froh)  of  your  safe 
(glilcklich,)  arrival.  Eemain  near  to  me.  Is  that  an  anecdote  un- 
known to  you  ?  I  am  quite  proud  of  you.  I  was  incapable  of  such6 
a°  crime.  That  is  a  newspaper  much  read.  All  were  kind  to  me.  He 
is  capable  of  everything.  This  intelligence  was  still  unknown  to  him. 
Fate  was  favourable  to  me  and  gave  ( Dat. )  me  much  riches  (plur. ).  His 
creditors  were  tired  of  (the)  long  waiting  (Warten  n.). 


236 


Conversational  and 

A  heavy  rain— snowfall — fog — 
etc. 

A  heavy  thunderstorm. 

There  is  a  strong  wind. 

It  is  raining  in  torrents. 

It  is  leaving  off  raining. 

The  heat  is  abating. 

The  wind— storm— is  abating. 

The  wind  has  changed. 

The  weather  has  changed  dur- 
ing the  night 

A  change  in  the  weather. 

It  is  rainy  weather. 

There  was  a  snow  storm. 

It  is  only  a  shower. 

Where  will  you  spend  (pass) 
your  holiday  1 

I  shall  stop  in  town  (here). 

I  shall  go  out  of  town. 

How  did  you  spend  (pass)  your 
holiday? 

Did  you  enjoy  your  holiday? 


I  have  had  my  holiday. 
I  am  going  to  take  my  holiday. 
Are  you  going  to  the  continent  ? 
"When  do  you  start? 
Which  route  will  you  take  ? 
I  am  going  by  Flushing. 
Had  you  a  good  sea-passage? 
No,  the  sea  was  rather  rough. 

I  was  very  sea-sick. 

We  are   coming  now    to    the 

frontier  station. 
Will  the  luggage  be  examined  ? 

Yes ;  have  you  anything  to  de- 
clare? 

As  far  as  I  know  I  have  not. 

Where  is  the  luggage- room? 

Did  you  weigh  my  luggage? 

Porter,  take  my  luggage  to  the 
cab  (waggon). 


Idiomatic  Phrases. 

!  @tn  ftarfer  9?egen— SdjneefaH— 

Sfeebd,  etc.. 

I  (£tn  ftarfeS  (fd)foere<§)  ©ettritter. 
|  (£§  geljt  etn  ftarfer  323mb. 
j  @§  regnet  in  Stronten. 
@§  Ijort  auf  gu  regnen. 
3)ie  $tfce  lafet  nadj. 
3)er  28tnb— Sturm— legt  fidj. 
2)er  SBtnb  $at  fidj  gebrebt. 
3)a3  better  Ijat  fidj  fiber  9fcadjt 

geanbert. 

Sin  SBtttermigStoedjfd. 
6^  ift  Diegenmetter. 
@§  War  etn  Sd)neegeftober. 
@»  ift  nur  etn  9?egenf(^auer. 
in    gefjen    Ste   fiber  S^r^ 
(fiber  bte  ^etertage  ?  (*) 
ttjerbe  !|ter  btetben. 
tuerbe  berreifen. 

fiaben    Ste    fiber    Sfljre 
gerten  getfjan? 

SSSaren  Ste  bergnfigt  fiber  S^e 
gerien  (fatten  Ste  bergnfigte 
gerten)? 

%$  ttmr  in  ben  gferten. 
in  bte  §erten. 
Ste  auf  bag  gefttanb? 
SSann  retfen  Ste  ab? 
28eld)en  SBeg  ge^en  Ste? 
3d^  gebe  (retfe)  fiber  SSItfftngen. 
fatten  Ste  etne  gute  Ueberfa^rt? 
yitin,  ba§  9J?eer  war  §temltd^  un* 

Sidj  n?ar  fe^r  feefranf. 

SStr  lontmen  je^t  an  bte  ©renj* 

ftatton. 
SBirb    ba§    ©ebac!     unterfuc^t 

(rebtbirt)  toerben? 

gollen  ? 

So  bid  tdj  h»ct§f  ntc^t. 
SBo  ift  ba3  ©ebacfgtmmer? 
|>aben  Ste  ntetn  ®epacf  gettjogen? 
©ebadtrager,  tragen  Ste   ntetn 

©ebacf  in  ben  SBagen. 


(*)  geiertage  is  the  general  term  for  Christmas,  Easter,  Whitsuntide,  etc.. 
holidays. 


237 

ReaMttg  dmtm  tto.  50. 

(Sine  fdjr 

TO  SBaffjington  3rtring,  Bancroft  unb  ©toerett  einft 
iiber  biptonwtifcfje2  (Srinnerungen3  plauberten,4  er§af)fte  ber 
£e£tgenannte,5  ba§,  nadfjbent  er  unb  ber  neapolitanifdje<5 
®efanbte  S^rer  SJtojeftat  ber  ®onigin  $i!toria  borgefteflt 
toorben,  Sorb  Melbourne  tfjnen  anfiinbigte/  fie  rtwrbett  ju 
einer  $artie  SBljtft  Bet  ber  §er§ogin8  bon  ®ent  ermartet. 
,,3d^  fcttft,"  fagte  Melbourne,  f,Bin  nur  cm  f^mac^er 
©pieter,9  ja,  ic^  tjerfte^e  e§  faum,  after  bte  §eqogtu  §at 
ba§  @pie(  fe^r  gern.  —  ,,Unb  itf)f"  au^erte  ber  ^ea^ott* 
taner10  ju  ©tierett,  bin  ein  fe^r  fc^lec^ter  Spieler;  fottte 
id^  3$rer  ^cetten^11  SWitfiJtcIer12  toerben,  fo  bitte  id)  tm 
SSoran^13  urn  3§re  S'la^fic^t14,  morauf  ber  amertfanifc^e 
©efanbte  entgegnete,  ba§  er  fetbft  feljr  njenig  in  bent 
Spiel15  jn  §anfe  fet.  ®ie  brei  fcornefjmen16,  reic§  ge= 
fleibeten17  §erren  itmrben  barauf  bon  ber  §erjogin  emp= 
fangen  unb  fe^ten18  fid^  bann  auf  ifjre  ©tntabnng19  jum 
Spiel  nieber.  Sobatb  gegeben20  njar,  ftettte21  fic§  eine 
§ofbame22  ^inter  bie  §er§ogin  unb  bie  le^tere  fagte: 
,,3)ie  ©jceffenjen11  tuerben  entfd^ulbigen,  toetm  ic^  mic§ 
auf  ben  9lat§  meiner  greunbin  ^ier  tjerlaffe,  benn  id(j  mu§ 
befennen,  bag  ic^  in  ber  X^at23  eine  fe^r  fd§(ec§te  @pie= 
terin9  bin."  ®ie§  tuar  faft24  §u  t)iel  fttr  ®t>erctt8  ernfte 
§altung25,  bem  eine  ^artie  SB^ift  unter  fotc^en  Umftdnben26 
unau§fpred^Ii(f)27  langrteilig28  tjorlam29.  2)effenungeac^tet30 
fcerfidjerte31  jeber  ber  brei  §erren  ber  §er§ogin  am  @nbe32 
,  ba§  er  e§  augerft33  unterljaltenb  gefnnben 


1  whist-party,  2  diplomatic,  3  recollections,  4  to  chat,  talk, 
plaudern,  5  last  named,  6  Neapolitan,  7  to  announce,  ankun- 
digen,  8  duchess,  9  player,  10  Neapolitan,  11  Excellency,  Excel- 
lenzf.,  12  partner,  13  before  hand,  14  indulgence,  15  game, 
16  distinguished,  17  dressed,  clad,  18  to  sit  down,  sich  me&ersetzen 
(sick  setzen),  19  invitation,  20  to  deal  (cards),  geben  (irr.),  21  to 
place  oneself,  sich  stellen,  22  lady  in  waiting,  23  indeed,  24  almost, 
25  gravity,  26  circumstanced,  27  inexpressibly,  28  tedious^ 
29  appeared,  30  notwithstanding,  31  to  assure,  versichern,  32  end, 
33  greatly. 


Fifty-first  Lesson.  ©nmnbfunfetgfte  Seftion. 

The  Pronouns  and  Determinative  Adjectives. 

The  personal  pronoun  e3  is  used  for  rendering  so  in  ex- 
pressions like : 

id)  fjoffe  e§,  I  hope  so     id)  gloube  c8,  I  think  so,  etc. 

A  personal  or  a  reflective  pronoun  occurring  after  a  preposition 
and  denoting  the  same  person  as  the  subject  must  be  rendered  by 
the  reflective  form ;  as, 

$aben  ©te  ©elb  Bet  ftdj?  Have  you  any  money  -with  you?  S)ic 
Dfpitere  fatten  Banbfarten  Dor  ftd)  liegen.  The  officers  had  maps 
lying  before  them.  ®r  faufte  e§  fur  fid).  He  bought  it  for  him»elf. 

The  reflective  pronouns  un3,  eudj,  fid)  are  sometimes  used  in- 
stead of  einanber,  (each  other,  etc.),  if  no  ambiguity  can  arise ;  as, 
SSir  fallen  un§  (or  einanber)  felten  gefeljen.     We  have  seen  one 
another  seldom.     SBarum  fdjrieben  ©te  fid)  (or  einonber)  nidjt?     Why 
did  you  not  write  to  each  other? 

The  possessive  adjectives  (my,  thy,  etc.)  are  usually  rendered  by 

the  definite  article  if  there  is  no  doubt  that  the  object  possessed 

(usually  parts  of  the  body  or  clothes,  e£c.)must  belong  to  the  subject;  as, 

(£r  fdjuttelte  ben  ®oj)f.    He  shook  his  head.    SJZeljmen  ©ie  ben  £ut 

ab.    Take  off  your  hat. 

When  the  verb  has  a  reflective  meaning  my,  thy,  etc.,  are  usu- 
ally rendered  by  reflective  pronouns  in  the  Dative  and  the  article;  as, 
2)a§  SJiabdjen  Ijat  ftdj  ba§  ©eftdjt  ntdjt  getuafdjen.     The  girl  has 
not  washed  her  face.     %6)  Ijabe  mir  ba§  $aar  geft^nitten.     I  have 
cut  my  hair. 

When  my,  thy,  etc.  standing  with  such  nouns  do  not  refer  to 
the  subject,  they  are  generally  rendered  by  the  personal  pronoun 
in  the  Dative  and  the  definite  article;  as, 

SSer  Ijat  igljnen  ba§  £aar  gejd&mtten?    Who  has  cut  your  hair? 
REMARK. — In  a  similar  manner  also  an  English  possessive  is  often 
rendered;  as, 

Ser  Sotitg  ftecfte  ben  Dffijieren  bte  Drben  an  bie  SSruft.  The  king 
placed  the  orders  on  the  officers'  breasts. 

The  possessive  pronouns  (mine,  thine,  etc.)  after  the  verb  to  be 
referring  to  a  noun  which  is  the  subject,  are  rendered  by  the  per- 
sonal pronoun  in  the  Dative,  and  to  be  is  translated  by  gdjoren;  as, 
SHefer  £ut  geljSrt  mir.    This  hat  is  mine,    ©eljoren  bo§  $cm§  unb 
bet  ®arten  Sftnen?    Are  the  house  and  garden  yours? 

REMARK. — A  possessive  after  to  be,  referring  to  a  noun  or  pronoun 

as  subject,  is  also  rendered  by  the  Dative  and  the  verb  by  gehoren;  as, 

(MelJoren  bieje  Sigarren  3^rem  Dnlel?     SRetn,   fte  geljoren  nteinem 

fgoter.    Are  these  cigars  your  uncle's?    No,  they  are  my  father's. 

Note. — However  the  words  ntein,  betn,  fein,  unfer,  euer,  can  be  used  instead 

of  metner,  etc.  with  the  verb  fein;  as,— Siefer  £ut  ift  metn.    This  hat  is  mine. 

Of  mine,  of  thine,  etc.,  after  a  noun  are  rendered  as  follows : 

A  friend  of  mine,  etn  greunb  Don  mir.  This  friend  of  yours, 
bicfer  greunb  oon  3b,nen  (or  btefer  S^r  greunb). 

Of  his  own,  of  her  own,  etc.,  are  rendered  as  follows: 
He  had  a  house  of  his  own.    ®r  Ijatte  etn  eigeneS 


the  breast,  bie  SBruft 
,,    bricklayer,  ber  9Kau* 

rer 
directly,      immediately, 

fogTeitf)  (fofort) 
the  face,  ba§  (Beftdjt 
to  fear,  apprehend,  Be- 

fiirdjten 
the  finger,  ber  ginger 


239 

in  vain,   tiergeBen?    (tier* 

ge&Ud)) 
often,  oft 
the  playthings,  toys,  ba§ 

Spteljeug  (sing.) 
„    policeman,  ber  ^oli- 

SCibiener  (ber  Sd)n$- 

ntann      Plur :    bie 


seldom,  rare,  fetten 

to  shake,  fdjiitteln 

the  snow-ball,  ber  6d)nee> 

batt 
to  stop  (a  tooth),  ptom= 

6iren 
to   thrust,    push,    ft o {3 en 

irr. 
the  wing,  ber 


Exercise  No.  51. 

1.  Can  you  come  to  me  this  evening?  Yes,  I  hope  so.  I  fear  he 
has  not  received  the  letter,  do  you  not  fear  so  too  ?  Have  the  children 
their  playthings  with  them?  Why  did  you  take  a  revolver  with  you? 
You  should  not  only  think  of  (an)  yourself  but  also  of  (an  Ace.)  your 
poor  parents.  Two  policemen  are  there"  leading  a  man6  between  them". 
We  did  not  recognize  each  other  (reft.)  immediately.  "Why  do  you 
write  [to]  each  other  (reft.)  so  seldom?  "When  I  opened  (aufschlug) 
my  eyes  I  did  not  know  where  I  was.  Do  not  forget  to  wash  your 
hands.  Take  off  my  boots.  It  has  nearly  cost  (Dat.)  me  my  life. 
Why  have  they  (one)  cut  the  poor  bird's  wings  ?  Which  cup  is  mine  ? 
Is  this  dog  yours?  No,  it  is  my  cousin's.  Do  you  know  this  lady? 
Yes,  she  is  an  acquaintance  of  mine.  A  horse  of  ours  has  won  the  first 
prize.  Has  not6  the  physician"  a  carriage  of  his  own  ? 

2.  35ergeben§  fdjiittelte  ber  ©tumme  ben  ®oj)f,  man  ataubte 
ifym  ntcfit.  SSar  e3  nid)t  em  £unb  t>on  Sftnen,  ber  ben  &naben 
gebiffen  ijat?  @ie  (you)  fottten  fid)  nidjt  bie  |mte  (each  other's  hat) 
neljmen.  @o  lange  e3  fait  tft,  ntujs  id)  bie  S3rttte  abne^men,  tr-emt 
id)  in  ein  toarmeS  gtmmer  trete.  ftitfyn  @ie  bent  $tnbe  bie 
©djulje  au§.  I^eber  better  (horseman)  fcatte  etnen  ©djiifcen  (rifle- 
man) l^inter  fi§  ft&en  (sitting).  S)te  SSritber  baffen  jtc^  jdjon 
(liave  hated)  oon  Sfrgenb  auf  (ever  since  their  youth).  SBeldjer 
^a^nargt  I)at  %$nen  bie  ,8a"bne  ptombirt?  §aben  @te  nid)t  ben 
3Beg  tjerloren? 

The  lady  took  (ziehen)  a  ring  from  her  finger  and  gave  (schenken) 
it  to  (Dat.)  the  sick  man.  He  saw  nothing  but  the  sky  above  him. 
The  murderer  thrust  the  dagger  into  the  president's  breast.  Have  you 
not  a  coachman  of  your  own?  She  held  her  hands  before  (Ace.)  her 
face  and  wept.  All  these  cherries  are  ours.  A  brother  of  his  has  lent 
(Dat.)  him  the  money.  Where  did  you  burn  (verbrennen  refl.)  your 
fingers  ?  The  enemy  had  the  wind  against  him.  Is  not*  this  house* 
Mr.  N's.?  Do  not"  always6  put  (sleeken)  your  hands0  in  your 
pockets.  I  have  a  room  of  my  own.  The  boys  threw  snow-balls  (mil 
Sch.)  [at]  each  other  (reft.).  One  must  not  speak  too  often  of  one'sself. 
Take  off  your  glove,  then  you  can  write  better.  Which  parcel  is  yours  ? 
Where  did  the  bricklayer  break  his  arm?  You  have  saved  my  life. 
We  related  [to]  each  other  (reft.)  incidents  (Erlebnisse)  from  our 
journeys. 


240 


Conversational  and 

Please,  get  me  my  luggage;  here 

is  the  receipt. 
Where  is  the  booking-office  ? 

A  first — second  class  ticket  to 

A  single  ticket? 

No,  a  return  ticket. 

What  is  the  first  class  fare  to ...? 

When  does  the  train  start  for ...? 
The  ordinary  train? 
No,  the  express  train. 
Which  is  the  train  for  . . . .? 


Has  the  train  for  . 

yet? 
No,  it  starts  at  6.20. 


started 


What  class  are  you  going  by? 

I  am  going  second  class. 

Must  I  change  carriage? 

Change  for  .... 

We  must  get  in. 

Will  you  get  out  first  ? 

Is  this  a  through  train — car- 
riage? 

Does  this  train  stop  at ...? 

How  long  do  we  stop  here? 

Only  two  minutes,  the  train  is 
late  (behind  its  time). 

Can  I  get  anything  to  eat  here? 

Where  is  the  refreshment  room  ? 
May  I  open  the  window  a  little? 

Do  you  feel  any  draught  ? 

Yes,  there  is  a  draught. 

Can  I  travel   by   the  express 

train  with  this  ticket  to  . . .  ? 
No,  you  will  have  to  pay  excess 

fare. 

Which  is  the  next  station  ? 
Do  you  want  a  non-smoking 

compartment? 
No,  I  want  a  compartment  for 

ladies. 


..? 
ab 


Idiomatic  Phrases. 

SBitte,  Ijoten  ©ie  ntir  ntein  ©e- 
pad;  f)ter  ift  ber  @ej)acffdjein. 

2Bo  ift  bie  Saffe  —  ber  SBitlet* 
flatter? 

(Sin  S3ittet  erfter — jtoeitrt  Slaffe 
nadj  .... 

(gin  einfadjeS  SSiEet? 

SBietriet  loftet  ein  93tHet   erfter 

Staffe  na^  ...? 

SBann   ge^t  ber  B«9  nac^  •••* 
S)er  gett)o^nlic^e  BU9^ 
9^ein,  ber  ©djneflgug. 
2Betd^e§  ift  ber  BU9  n&$  •• 
Sft  ber  B"9  nad^  ...  f^on 

gegangen? 
Stein,  er  ge^t  urn  6  llt)r 

gig  ab. 

Sn  tnetc^er  Staffe  fal^ren  ©ie? 
Sc^  fa^re  gtoeiter  Staff e. 
SDlu^  ic^  umftetgen? 
llmfteigen  (SSagentpec^fet)  nad^ . . . 
SGSir  miiffen  etnfteigen. 
Swollen  ©ie  guerft  augfteigen? 
^ft  bieg  ein  burdjgefyenber 

— SBagen? 

^)dtt  biejer  BU9  m  •••• 
§5iet)iet  ^[ufent^att  ift 
9hir   gtuet   SSKinuten,    ber 

Ijat  SSerf^jatung. 
Saim  man  tjier  etiuag  §u 

be!omnien  ? 
SSo  ift  bie  SReftauratton? 
S)arf  ic^  bag  fjenfier  ein  toenig 

offnen? 


efjen 


jiefjt. 

Sann  id^  mit  biefem  Siltet  ben 
©d^nettjug  nac^  ...  bemifeen? 
^ein,  ©ie  miiffen  ein  Bufdjtag* 

bittet  ne^men. 

SSetd^eg  ift  bie  nadjfte  ©tation? 
SBotten    ©ie    ein    Coup6    fur 
ouper? 
idf)    roitt 
Coupd. 


en 


241 

(Image  Ho.  51. 


(£in  aU  fdfjtagfertig2  Befannter  93eamter  fafj  ft<f)  ge= 
n5tfjigt,3  einem  mit  mefjr  Sarm  al§  (£rfolg  auf  politifdfjetn4 
®eBiete5  anftretenben6  jnngen  Sientenant  a.  £X7  eine  ge* 
Biifjrenbe8  2TBfertigung9  §n  £fjeil  toerben  §n  taffen10,  tooranf 
biefer  erftrieberte:  ,,9Jlit  ber  Seber  finb  <5ie  mtr 
ixBerlegen12,  after  id)  ^aBe  §u  §aufe  fcerjdjiebene13 
mit  benen  id^  Beffer  §u  fd^reiben  berfte^e!"  ^)er  S3eamte 
fagte:  ,,@ol(^  gefd'firti^eg  (Spieljeug  foUte  man  t»or  ^tn= 
bern  bocjj15  forgfaltig16  t)erfd§Iie§en17,  ba§  biefelBen  bamit 
!ein  Ungtiitf18  anric^teniQ  fonnen."  3)er  erBofte20  ^egtter2i 
forberte22  nun  ben  SSeamten  anf  ^iftolen23,  9tn^tg  fagte 
biefer:  ,,3$  ne^me  bte  gorbernng24  an,  jebod^  ftette25  ic^ 
eine  SBebtngung26.  @ie  ttJtffen,  \§  IjaBe  gran  nnb  ^tnber, 
fiir  toelcfje  id§  forgen27  mng.  3Jlein  jctf)rlic()e§28  (£tnlom= 
men29  Betragtso  4500  9ftarL  §intertegen3i  (Sie  ba^er 
ein  ®apital32,  beffen  3Men33  tneinem  ©tnfommen  ent= 
f^rei^en34,  nnb  tDet(^e§,  foffte  id)  im  3)nett  fatten,  meiner 
gamitie  anggega^t35  tt)trb.  @§  iDaren  alfo  90000 
erf  orberltc^36.  "  ,,S5aju  Bin  id^  an§er  <Stanbe3V 
fleintant38  ber  ^nettfiic^tige39  ;  ,,benn  tc§  Befi|e  letn  SSer= 
mogen."  ,,8a,"  anttoortete  ber  ^5eforberte22,  ,,bann  fann 
an§  bem  S)uett  teiber40  nic^t§  toerben41.  SBer  nic^tl  §n 
tjertieren  f)at,  ber  lann  bodf)42  nnmoglic^  bertangen43,  ba§, 
id§  midO  t)on  i^m  fott  nieberfd^iegen  taffen44."  @^rad§§45 
unb  toanbte  bem  berBftifften46  SDnettnnten47  ben  9fliiden48. 

1  a  story  of  a  duel,  2  ready  in  reply,  3  obliged,  4  political, 
5  arena,  6  appearing,  7  retired,  a.  D.  (ausser  Dienst),  8  deserved,  9  re- 
buke, 10  to  give,  11  it  is  true,  12  superior,  13  various,  14  sabres, 
15  better,  16  carefully,  17  to  lock  up,  verschliessen  (irr,),  18  mis- 
chief, 19  cause,  20  exasperated,  21  adversary,  22  to  challenge, 
fordern,  23  pistols,  24  challenge,  25  make,  26  condition,  27  to 
provide,  sorgen,  28  annual,  29  income,  30  to  amount  to,  betragen 
(irr.),  31  to  depose,  hinterlegen,  32  sum,  33  interest,  34  to  cor- 
respond to,  entsprechen  (irr.  Dat.),  35  to  pay  over,  zuszaJilen, 
36  necessary,  37  unable,  38  baffled,  39  eager  duellist,  40  unfor- 
tunately, 41  the  duel  cannot  take  place,  42  certainly,  43  ask, 
44  that  I  am  to  allow  myself  to  be  shot,  45  thus  speaking,  46  con- 
founded, 47  duellist,  48  back. 


242 

Fifty-second  Lesson.  .Sttjeiimbfimfaigfte  Seftioiu 

The  Pronouns  (concluded). 

Possessives  like:  Did  you  sell  your  dog  or  your  brother's?  must 
be  changed  in  translation  into : 

Did  you  sell  your  dog  or  that  of  your  brother?  SSerfouften  Sic 
Sljren  £unb  ober  ben  QljreS  SBruberS? 

£er  or  berjemge  are  also  the  translation  of  the  English  the  one 
followed  by  a  Genitive,  a  preposition  or  a  relative  pronoun  (see 
pages  96  &  108) ;  as, 

Sftit  ttjeldjem  $errn?  SKit  bent  ber  geftern  Ijier  nmr.  With  which 
gentleman?  With  the  one  who  was  here  yesterday. 

The  interrogative  what  standing  with  a  noun  is  usually  ren- 
dered toetdjer  instead  of  too3  fiir,  etc.,  if  the  person  or  thing  spoken 
about  is  known  or  supposed  to  be  known  to  the  speaker ;  as, 

SSefrfjer  Slrgt  tft  geftorben?  What  physician  (of  those  I  know) 
has  died?  3d)  njetfe  nod)  nid)r,  tueldje  SBudjer  id)  berfaufen  toerbe(*). 
I  don't  know  yet  what  books  I  shall  sell. 

What  a !  or  what !  in  exclamations  is  rendered  by  ti)o3  fill 
ein  (plural:  nmS  fiir)  or  toelcfier,  etc.;  as, 

2Bo§  fiir  ein  (or  toeldjer)  3ttann!    What  a  man!      SBa§  fur  cine 
(or  welrf)e)  Sreube !     What  joy!      SBa§  fiir  (or  toetdje)  Slumen  @ic 
geftern  gefauft  b,aben(*)!    What  flowers  you  bought  yesterday! 
Note. — In  the  singular  also  toeld)  ein  and,  if  followed  by   an  adjective, 
even  tt>eld)  only  for  singular  or  plural  can  be  used;   as, — 

SSeld)  ein  2ftonn!    SBeld)  guter  9ftann!    SSeld^  tapfere  Banner! 

The  interrogative  tuer?  ('denoting  a  person  only)  maybe  used 
instead  of  toeldjer  if  followed  by  the  preposition  toon  (iinter  or 
<w£);  as, 

SBer  bon  S^nen?  Which  of  you?  2JHt  teem  bon  ben  grauen? 
With  which  of  the  women? 

One's,  the  possessive  of  the  indefinite  pronoun  one,  is  rendered 
by  the  possessive  adjective  fern ;  as, 

S»  ift  ntcfjt  mogtid),  fetnem  ©tfjirffol  ju  entge^en.  It  is  not  pos- 
sible to  escape  one's  fate. 

One'sself  is  rendered  fid)  or  fid)  fel&ft,  according  to  the  rules  on 
page  88. 

The  Numerals. 

The  fractional  numbers  compounded  with  I)alb  are  often  used 
thus  ('especially  anbertfialb) : 

anbertfiolb  instead  of  ein  unb  ein  Ijalb,  one  and  a  half 
brtttfjalfi  instead  of  jtcei  unb  ein  IjaUJ,  two  and  a  half  etc. 

2lnbertf)olb,  brittfialb  etc.,  are  not  declined,  but  the  following 

noun  must  be  in  the  plural  if  not  belonging  to  those  on  p.  226 ;  as, 

Stnbertfialb  ^funb  Coffee  (or  ein  unb  ein  BaIBc§  ^fitnb  Kaffee),  one 

pound  and  a  half  of  coffee.      Srittljalb  Stunben  (or  jtoet  unb    cine 

Jjalbe  6tunbe),  two  hours  and  a  half. 

The  last  but  one  is  rendered  ber  (bie,  bo^)  Uorle^te  (or  gtuettlefcte) 
„     „    „  two  „        „         „      „      „      brittlefcte 
„      „    „  three  „        „         „      „       „      ^tertlefete,  etc. 

(*)  Interrogative  adjectives,  if  not  used  in  direct  questions,  throw  the  verb  to  th« 
end,  like  interrogative  pronouns  or  adverbs  of  interrogation  (see  p.  104  &  198). 


£he  book-case,  ber  Dftifiec* 
fdbronl  [ftucl 

„   breakfast,  ba§  gritty 
'charming,  retjenb 
the  departure,  bie  Slbreife 
'  „  expression,  ber  Slil§- 

brucE 

„  home,  native  country, 
bte 


243 

the  landscape,  country, 

bic  £anbfdjaft 
„  lord-mayor,  ber  Dfier* 

Burgertneiftet 
,,  magazine,  periodical, 

bie  Settfdjrift 
the  neighbour,  ber 


to  mean,  nteinen 

own,  etgen 

the     shop-window,     ba3 

©djcmfenfter 
splendid,  pradjtig 
Vienna,  SBien 
the  wedding,  bte 


bar  Plur :  bte  9£adj= !    „    wine-merchant,     ber 
Barn  (see  p.  17)  SBeinljanbler 


Exercise  No.  52. 

1.  Are  you  speaking  of  your  cousin's  wedding  or  of  your  friend's? 
I  am  speaking  of  my  cousin's.  With  which  lady  did  you  dance? 
With  the  one  to  (Dat.)  whom  you  introduced  me  yesterday.  Do  you 
mean  this  hat  ?  No,  I  mean  the  one  in  the  shop-window.  On  what 
river  does  Vienna  stand  (liegen)  ?  Can  you  tell  me  what  wine  the  wine- 
merchant  has  last  sent  ?  Oh,  look !  what  a  charming  landscape  that 
is !  Fie !  what  bad  expressions  this  man  uses  !  Which  of  your  neigh- 
bours has  said  that?  To  (Dat)  which  of  the  children  will  you  bring 
these  playthings  ?  One  should  never  rely  too  much  on  one's  friends, 
but  (sondern)  more  on  one's  own  efforts  (Kraft  f.  sing.).  If  one  pro- 
mises anything,  one  must  keep  (halten)  one's  promise.  How  much 
beer  have  we  drunk  ?  One  bottle  and  a  half.  I  was  not  able  to  drink 
more  than  a  glass  and  a  half  of  (von)  this  milk.  In  which  house  do 
you  live?  I  live  in  the  last  but  one  on  the  right. 

2.  28eldje3  ^tnunet  bettofjnten  (occupy)  <Ste,  at§  ©te  ba3 
lefcte  2M  fjier  ttaren?  Sftan  tmifs  nie  p  biet  fid)  felbft 
loben.  28  tr  fiaben  brtttfialb  (Stunben  cmf  @ie  geitmrtet,  aber 
<5te  latnen  nidjt.  2Ba3  fiir  einen  prarfjttgen  (See  @ie  Dor 
Sf)r.em  £aitje  ijaben!  (£3  tft  immogiid:),  feine  Ijeimatf)  §u  tier" 
geffen.  SSurben  <3te  in  ber  Ie|ten  S5od)e  tior  nteiner  Slbretfe 
!ran!?  9^ein,  in  ber  toorlegten  SKoc^e.  S^  *vti$  nifyt,  toer  con 
meinen  fjreunben  mir  fold)  eine  grofje  ©itmnie  leitjen  fann. 

What  patience  you  have  !  Here  is  your  breakfast.  Thanks  (danke), 
-did  you  not"  also6  bring  Mr.  B's.c  (des  Herrn  S.)1  One  must  always 
do  one's  duty.  Is  your  brother  invited  to  (zu)  the  president's  ball  or 
to  the  lord-mayor's?  As  far  as  (so  viel)  I  know  to  the  president's. 
What  rules  have  I  not  yet  explained  to  (Dat.)  you?  What  beautiful 
trees  you  have  in  your  garden !  It  is  (are)  a  year  and  a  half  since 
(that}  I  was  in  S.  What  magazine  do  you  mean?  The  one  in  your 
book-case.  Which  of  the  gentlemen  are  you  waiting  for  (auf 
Ace.)i.  I  have  forgotten  my  German  Grammar.  I  will  lend  (Dat.) 
you  my  sister's.  To  (in)  what  towns  of  Germany  have  you  been?  Is 
it  possible  for  you  to  be  back  in  an  hour  or  an  hour  and  a  half  ? 
Which  of  these  two  letters  shall  I  take  (tragen)  to  the  post-office  ? 
The  one  on  my  desk.  Do  you  know  by  what  train  he  will  go  to-mor- 
row morning  ?  Yes.  bv  the  9  o'clock  train. 


244 


Conversational  and 
I   did  not  catch  my  train  (I 
missed  my  train). 

To  what  hotel  are  you  going  ? 

To  the  hotel.... 
Will  you  take  a  cab? 

No,  I  shall  walk. 

And  I  am  going  by  the  hotel 

omnibus. 
I  want  a  room — bed-room. 

I  do  not  like  this  room,  can  I 
not  have  a  better  one? 

Do  you  want  a  front  room  or  a 
back  room  ? 

How  much  is  the  charge  for  a 
bed-room,  breakfast,  and  at- 
tendance ? 

Is  everything  included? 

Will  you  show  me  to  my  room? 

What  is  your  number? 
Do  you  wish  to  be  called? 
Have  me  called  at  six. 
There  is  no  towel. 
Are  ray  boots  cleaned? 
Waiter,  bring  me  my  bill. 

You  have  made  a  mistake  of 

two  marks. 

Which  is  the  way  to  . . .  ? 
Is  this  the  way  to Street, 

please? 
No,  you  have  taken  the  wrong 

direction. 
Take  the  first  turning  to  the 

right— left. 
Go  straight  on. 
You  cannot  make  a  mistake. 
How  long  will  it  take  me  to ...? 
Is  it  far  off? 
It  is  about  half  an  hour's  walk. 

Let  us  cross  here. 


Idiomatic  Phrases. 

j  %d)   bin  nidjt   (or  gu  fpot)  auf 

ben  3U9  gefommen. 
3d)  toerfepe  meinen  gug. 
$n  tueldjen  ©aftfyof  —  in  tt)eld)e§ 

£otet  —  gefjen  6ie? 
$n  ben  ©aftjof—  in  ba§  §otel... 
SReljmen  @ie  einen  SBagen  —  etne 

S)rofd)!e—  einen  gtacfer? 
SRein,  id)  gelje  gu  §uJ3. 
Unb  id)  fafjre  mit   bent   §otel* 

Omntbu^  —  §  otelmagen  . 
%3)  nwnfdjeetnBumner  —  (Sdjlaf* 

Dimmer. 
3)tefe3  3^miner  gefaHt  nttr  nid)t, 

fonnen  @te  mir  fetn  befferes 

geben? 
SBotten   @ic   em  Burner  nacf) 

porn  ober  nadj  ^inten? 
SBiebiet  foftet  ein  3^mer   wit 
unb  S3ebienung? 


3ft  STOeg  mit  etnbegriffen  ? 
SBotten  (Sic  mir  metn 

geigen? 

SGBelc^e  Shimmer  fjaben  @tc? 
SBoflen  @ie  gettjedt  toerben? 
Sajjen  6ie  mic^  urn  fedjS  n?ecfen, 

t^  |abe  !ein  §anbtu^. 
inb  meine  (Sticfel  gepu^t? 
$ellner,  bringen  @ie  mir  meine 

SRedjnung. 
(Sic  ^aben  ftd^  um   gtuei   SDZar! 

geirrt. 

SBelc^eg  ift  ber  28eg  nad^  ...? 
iBittc,  ift  bie3  ber  SKeg  nad^  ber 
...  Strafe? 

@ie  finb  in   ber  falfd^en 


n    Ste    bte    erfte    ©tro^e 


@ie  gerabeaii^. 
@te  fonnen  nic^t  fe^ten. 
SBte  lange  brauc^e  ic^  nad^  ...'( 

eft  e3  wcit  oon  ^ier^ 
§     ift    ungefd^r    etne 
©tunbe. 
28ir  njotlen  ^ier 


245 

ReaMng  (tordse  ltd.  52. 


gutcr 

©igentfmmer  eine£  $emufegarten32  bemerfte,  ba§ 
ein  ®orb,  ber  nodj  eben  mit  jungen3  SRiiben4  gefiiflt5  tear, 
p(8|li(ij  leerer6  ftmrbe.  @r  befragte7  ben  (Partner;  biefer 
begriff  bie  ©adje  gleid§faff£8  nicfjt  unb  fcfjlug  at£  fid)ere39 
aftittelio  jur  ©ntbecfungi1  be3  2)iebe§  dor,  fic§  ^tnter  einer 
rta^en  §etfe12  ju  berfteden13.  ^efagt,  get^an14;  nad^ 
dnigen  SJlinuten  ftie^en15  fie  etttett  Sfluf16  ber  ilber- 
rafrf)img17  aii§  —  fie  fa^en  ben  §au^wtb  gerabe§tt)eg§18 
auf  ben  ®or&  lo^ge^en19,  eine  9liibe  in§  Sftanl20  ne^men 
unb  bamit  ben  28eg  nac^  bent  ^ferbeftaE21  einfd^Iagen22. 
—  £)te  §unbe  freffen23  letne  ro^en24  S^itben,  —  llnfere 
93eobad^ter25  fotgten  ba^er  bent  @^t|Buben26  unb  entbetften, 
bag  er  fic§  mit  einem  $ferbe,  feinem  @c^tafgenoffen27,  ju 
fd)affen28  mac^te.  (Sc^itJetfnjebetnb29  uberretd^te30  er  if)m 
feinen  9laub31,  unb  ba§  $ferb  tieg  fic^  natiirti^  nic^t  lange 
bitten,  i^n  an^une^men.  2)er  (Partner  griff  argerlid^32 
nad^  einem  ®niittel33,  um  ben  (Siinber34  fiir  feine  attju- 
grofee35  ^amerabf(^aftlic§leit36  ju  giicjjtigen37,  attein  fein 
§err  ^ielt  it)n  §uriid  ®ie  Sftiiben  gingen  bon  ber  erften 
bi§  jur  le|ten  benfelben  28eg,  bie  @§ene  ttrieberfjotte  fid§, 
bi§  ber  SSorrat^38  bottftanbig39  erf^opf^o  j^ar.  2)er  §unb 
§atte  fc^on  lange  biefe^  ^Pferb  sum  ©iinftling  erloren41 
njafjrenb  er  ein  5toeite§,  ba§  fic§  in  bemfelben  @taHe  be=» 
fanb,  feine^  33fic!e§42,  gefc^toetge43  einer  9liibe  toiirbigte44. 

1  comrade,  2  vegetable-garden,  3  new,  4  the  turnip,  die  Rube, 
5  to  fill,  fullen,  6  empty,  leer,  7  asked,  8  likewise,  9  sure, 
10  means,  11  discovery,  12  hedge,  13  to  hide,  verstecken,  14  no 
sooner  said  than  done,  15  to  utter,  a.usstossen(irr.),  16  exclamation, 
17  surprise,  18  straight-ways,  19  go  towards,  20  mouth  (of  an 
animal),  21  stable,  22  take,  23  to  eat  (of  animals),  fressen  (irr.), 
24  raw,  25  watchers,  26  rogue,  27  stable-mate,  28  to  do,  29  wag- 
ging his  tail,  30  gave,  31  plunder,  32  angrily,  33  knobbed  stick, 
34  sinner,  35  much  too  great,  36  devotedness  to  him,  37  to  chas- 
tise, punish,  zuchtigen,  38  stock,  39  entirely,  40  exhausted, 
41  made  his  favourite,  42  glance,  43  far  less,  44  held  worthy. 


246 

Fifty-third  Lesson.  Sretunbfitafetgfte  Seftioiu 

The  Numerals  (continued). 

(The)  half,  not  "with  a  noun,  in  the  sense  of  (the)  half  of  it  or 
of  them  is  rendered  bie  $alfte ;  as, 

©eben  <Sie  mir  bie  £alfte.    Give  me  the  half  of  it. 

Half  or  the  half  of  with  names  of  places  or  names  of  countries  is 
rendered  simply  Ijallj,  which  is  not  declined  if  no  article  is  used;  as, 
Ijalb  dnglanb  half  (the  half  of)  England     Ijalb  $ari§,   half  (the- 
half  of)  Paris.    But :  bie  Ijalbe  Sdjtoeis,  half  Switzerland. 

The  indefinite  numeral  (all)  with  the  same  nouns  is  rendered 
ganj,  which,  as  well,  is  undeclined  if  without  article  ;  as, 

gonj  Seutfdjtanb,  all  Germany  ganj  £onbon,  all  London.  But: 
ba§  ganje  fdjfine  3$ari§,  all  fine  Paris. 

NOTE. — ©otts,  in  this  application,  corresponds  also  to  the  whole  of, 
all  over,  or  all  through;  as, 

ganj  Suropa,  the  whole  of  Europe.  3?dj  bnrdjreifte  gaits  Snglanb, 
I  travelled  all  over  England. 

All,  with  other  nouns  in  the  singular  (except  names  of  ma- 
terial) in  the  sense  of  the  whole,  is  also  generally  rendered  gcmj, 
which  is  declined  and  must  be  preceded  by  the  definite  article  or 
any  other  determinative  word ;  as, 

bie  ganje  gomilie,  all  the  family  tnein  ganjeS  SSermogen,  all  my 
fortune  ben  ganjen  £ag(*),  all  day. 

Every,  followed  by  a  cardinal  number,  is  rendered  by  atte ;  asr 
atfe  fed)§  SBodjen,  every  six  weeks     atte  stuei  ©ttinben,  every  two  hours. 

NOTE. — 3lttc  may  also  be  used  if  every  or  each  is  immediately  fol- 
lowed by  a  noun  expressing  time;  as, 

atte  ©tnnben  (or  jebe  Stunbe),  every  (each)  hour  atte  Sage  (or 
jeben  £ag(*),  every  (each)  day. 

Any,  used  in  the  sense  of  every,  is  rendered  jeber(**) ;  as, 
@te  fonnen  in  jebe§  Beater  ge^en.    You  may  go  to  any  theatre. 

Some  may  be  rendered  by  eintger,  etc.  (or  ettoa3)  with  a  name 
of  material  or  an  abstract  noun,  if  a  little  is  meant ;  as, 

einigeS  (or  ettual)  papier,  some  (a  little)  paper  einige  (or  etfeaS) 
£offnimg,  some  (a  little)  hope. 

Some  of  it,  some  of  them  (things  only)  are  usually  rendered  ba&on, 
<vaich  is  used  even  if  of  it  or  of  them  are  understood  only ;  as, 

gdj  faufte  eine  glafdje  SGSein,  tuoHen  Sie  ba&on?  I  bought  a  bottle 
ft  wine,  do  you  wish  some  (of  it)? 

Some  or  other,  any  ....  'whatever,  any  ....  at  att,  are  ren- 
dered by  irgenb  em  (em  being  declined,) ;  as, 

irgenb  eine  bittere  SBemertung,  some  bitter  remark  or  other  irgenb 
ein  grentber,  some  stranger  or  other  oftne  irgenb  einen  QJrunb,  with- 
out any  reason  whatever  (or  at  all). 

Some  or  any  are  rendered  simply  ein,  if  or  other,  whatever  or 
at  all  are  understood  ;  as, 

6in  £err  fogte  e§.  Some  gentleman  said  so.  Ofjne  einen  (Srunb- 
anjugeben.  Without  giving  any  reason. 

(*)  Observe  that  nouns  denoting  definite  time  must  be  in  the  "accusative* 

if  not  the  subject. 
(**)  There  are  two  old  forms  of  jeber,  viz :  (ein)  jegtid)er  and  jebtoeber. 


247 


the  article,  ber  SIrtifel 

Asia,  Slften  n. 

to  conquer  (a  country  or 

place),  erobern 
to  destroy,  gerftoren 
the  disadvantage,  harm, 

bet  Sftarfitfjeil 
„    earthquake,  ba§  @rb» 

beben 

„   flame,  bie  gramme 
France,  grcmfretdj  n. 
full,  bolt 
the  ham,  bet  @d)mfen 


Italy,  S 
the  leap-year, 

jotir 

left,  remaining,  flBrtg 
to  look  at,  (infeljen  irr. 

(betracfyten) 
the  love,  bie  fiiebe 
to    mourn    at,     troitern 

fiber  (Ace.) 

the  painter,  ber  Sftater 
to  paint  (to   cover   with 

colour),  onftretdjen 

irr. 


to  paint  (to  represent  bjr 

colours),  maten 
to   restore,    replace,    er* 

fefcen 
the  soda-water,  ba§  @oba= 

ra  offer 

Spain,  ©panten 
the  table-spoon,  ber  &%-- 

loffel 
Whitsuntide,  bie  ^ftnaften 

(Plur.) 
the    wish,    desire,     ber 


Exercise  No.  53. 

1.  Have  you  eaten  your  cherries  already  ?  No,  only  (erst)  the  half  of 
them.  To  whom  does  this  house  belong  ?  One  half  belongs  to  me  and 
the  other  half  to  my  brother.  Half  of  Moscow  (Moskau)  was  destroyed 
by  the  flames.  I  have  not  seen  more  than  half  of  Switzerland.  When 
I  had  travelled  through  (durchreisen)  the  whole  of  Italy,  I  went  to 
Spain  and  France.  Where  were  you  all  the  winter  ?  I  was  not  here 
all  that  time.  Formerly  you  visited  us  every  fortnight  and  now  only 
every  three  weeks.  You  may  (Mnnen)  come  to  me  every  day.  This 
article  you6  will"  get  in  any  shop.  If  we  have  still  some  (a  little)  time 
left,  we  will  look  at  the  things  in  this  shop- window.  Here  I6  have" 
some  pounds  of  very  fine  strawberries.  Oh,  please  give  (Dat.)  me 
some  of  them  !  What  kind  of  book  do  you  want?  Please  give  (Dat.) 
me  some  one  or  other  that  is  amusing  (unterhaltend).  If  you  have 
any  wish  whatever  (so)  tell  it  to  me. 

2.  @ie  finb  jebem  toon  tneinen  SSerttmnbten  unbefonnt.  ©etn 
ganger  SRetdjtfium  tonnte  ifint  fetne  toerlorene  (SJefimbfiett  nidjt  ei> 
fe|en.  SSJJit  einiger  (or  etttm3)  ©ebitlb  mujs  %i)nen  bteje  StrBeit 
gelingen  (you  must  succeed  in  . . .).  (SJeben  (Ste  bem  ®ran!en  atte 
brei  ©tunben  einen  (Sfjloffet  toott  toon  btefer  Slrgenei.  (Sie  tonnen 
biefeS  S3ter  ofone  trgenb  einen  S^adjtfieil  fiir  ^fyxe  ®ejunbf)ett 
trinfen.  @te  baben  git  totete  Kigarren  gefauft,  tootten  @ie  mtr 
nic^t  bte  ^)alfte  abtreten  (let  me  have)  ? 

All  Prussia  mourned  at  the  death  of  its  great  king.  What  did 
you  do  all  day?  May  I  ask  you  for  (um  Ace.)  some  (a  little)  butter? 
He  had  already  conquered  half  Asia  when  he  died  suddenly.  His 
daughter  possesses  all  his  love.  All  the  house  has  been  newly  (frisch) 
painted.  I  have  bought  a  very  good  ham,  will  you  [have]  half  of  it  ? 
Every  four  years  [there]  is  a  leap-year.  I  will  drink  a  bottle  of  soda- 
water,  will  you  not  also  [have]  some  ?  I  was  out  of  town  (verreist) 
all  Whitsuntide.  Some  famous  painter  has  painted  this  picture.  All 
Lisbon  (Lissabon)  was  destroyed  by  an  earthquake.  Newspapers  are 
sold  at  any  station.  Some  gentleman  told  me  the  other  day  that  you 
sell  such  books.  All  Turkey  would  not  be  rich  enough  to  pay  such  a 
large  debt.  I  have  read  that  news  in  some  newspaper. 


248 


Conversational  and 
There  is  a  knock. 
•Come  in ! 

Does  Mr.  N.  reside  here  ? 
No,  he  has  left. 
Where  has  he  gone? 
He  lives  on  the  first  floor — on 

the  ground  floor. 
Is  he  at  home — in  ? 
Will  you  step  in  (the  speaker  is 

inside)? 
Will  you  step  in  (the  speaker  is 

outside)? 

I  will  go  before  you. 
Is  Doctor  A.  at  home? 

No,  only  Mrs.  A. 

He  will  be  here  in  a  minute. 

Give  my  regards  (respects)  to 
your  father — mother — sister. 


You  will  not  find  me  at  home. 

I  paid  him  a  visit. 

We    have    some    visitors — a 

visitor. 
When  will  you  come  and  see 

me? 

I  shall  go  and  see  him. 
Will  you  come  to  meet  me  ? 

Go  to  meet  him. 

Will  you  come  with  me  into 

the  garden? 
Will  you  come  along  with  me 

(us)? 

Take  me  along  with  you. 
Yesterday  I  called  on  you  (at 

your  house). 
I  shall  call  on  you. 
I  shall  call  for  you. 
Shall  I  send  for  you? 
You  are  sent  for. 
You  are  wanted. 


fn'er? 


Idiomatic  Phrases. 

,  (£*  Ifotft 
^erein! 
SBolmt  $err 
sJtan,  er  tft 
2Bof)in  ift  er  gegogen? 
(£r  iuofjnt  im  erften  ©tocf— im 

parterre. 
3ft'  er  511  <paufe  ? 
2B  often  ©te  Ijeretnfommen  ? 

SSoften  ©te  ijtneingeljen  ? 

§d)  ttnft  &orangef)en. 
ft  ber  £err(*)  Softer  [21.]  311 
£attfe  ? 

Stein,  mir  bte  grau(*)  S)oftor. 
©r  muJ3  jeben  StugenblidE   font- 
men. 

SSater— S^re  grait  flutter— 

3^re  graulein  ©djwefter— pon 

mir. 
©te  werben  mid)  nid)t 

treffen. 

3c^  mcic^te  tf)tn  etnen 
SSir  ^aben  SSefud^— einen  23efud). 

^Bann  tootlen  ©ie  mid^  befiidjen? 

3^  toerbe  t^n  befut^en. 
SSoften  ©ie   mir  entgegenfom- 

men? 

©efjen  ©te  t^m  entgegen. 
SOS  often   ©ie   mit   mir   in    ben 

©arten  geljen? 
SBoften  ©ie  mitge^en? 

Sftetjmen  ©ie  mic^  mit. 
©eftern  tear  id)  bet  %$nen. 


3^  merbe  ju  Sftnen  fomtnen. 
S^  roerbe  @ie  ab^olen. 
©ptt  td^  ©te  ^olen  foffen? 
©ie  fterben  gei)olt. 
<£$  tt)irb  nac^  Zsfyntn  gefragt. 


(•)  The  words  $err,  Srau,  grautcin,  are  used  in  polite  society  in  speaking 
of  persons  of  rank,  title,  etc.,  and  also  of  a  person's  relations. 


249 

(Eimise  Mo.  53. 


SBetriigerei1  im  $anbcl2  mtt  $>iamatttett*3 

3)ie  Sffabemte  ber  SBiffenfdjaften4  in  $ari§  Jjat  fid) 
nenerbtngS5  mtt  etner  merfttwrbtgen6  SBetritgeret,  toeldje  int 
§anbel  mtt  $)iamanten  anggeuW  ttrirb,  fcefrfjafttgt.8  (£tn 
Ifarifer9  |janbler10  fanfte  fcor  einigen  SBccfjen  einen 
foeifcen11,  fjeflen12  3)tamanten,3  ben  er  mtt  23,000  gran* 
fen13  Bejafjlte.  (£tne§  £age§  ftel  e§  t^m  etn14,  ben  toertf)= 
t)otten  @tetn  mtt  (Setfentoaffer15  jn  tuafc^en,  hjorauf  fic§ 
berfelBe  nac^  bem  SSafc^en  in  etnen  gelben  S)iamanten 
,  beffen  SBertfji?  ^6d§[ten§i8  auf  4000  granfen 
n?erben  lonnte.  ®er  toetge  2)iamant3  tt)trb 
mit  2000  granfen  ber  ^arat21  bega^It,  tna^renb 
ber  ®arat  be§  gelben  SDtamanten  nur  250  granfen  gttt22. 
3tnei  grofje  ^arifer  gwtDeliere23,  in  beren  -iftamen  ein 
(S^emifer24  ber  5l!abemie  ein  ®ntac(jten25  iiberreic^te26, 
erftaren  ben  (Sd^tDtnbei27  njie  folgt:  —  Um  ben  getben 
^)iamanten  in  etnen  toeifjen  jit  t>errt)anbeln,  tattd^t28  man 
ifjn  in  eine  tjtolette29  5(mlintofnng3o.  SSiotett29  nnb 
©elb  finb  ©omplementarfarben31,  b.f).32  garBen,  toelc^e  fic^ 
gegenfettig33  attffjeben34,  toorau§  garbloftgfeit35,  b.§.  SSei^11 
entfteijt36.  2)er  Clamant  erfc^etnt  bnrc^  btefe  93e^anbtitng37 
tJoEftdnbig38  toeig  nnb  biigt39  ntd^t  bag  2Rtnbefte4o  t)on 
fetnem  (^lanje41  etn39;  affein  bte  iciufdjimg42  §6rt  fofort 
anf,  fobalb  er  gerieften43  ober  gett)af(^en  inirb.  3m 
mantenf)anbel  hjirb  man  fid)  ba^er  t>or  biefer  nenen 
tritgerei  leid^t  §n  f^ii|en44  Dermogen45. 


1  fraud,  2  trade,  3  the  diamond,  der  Diama.nt  (Decl.  sec  page 
14,  a),  4  science,  5  lately,  6  remarkable,  7  to  practice,  auswftew, 
.8  to  occupy,  beschdftigen,  9  Parisian,  10  dealer,  11  white,  12  light, 
13  francs,  14  it  occurred  to  him,  15  soap  and  water,  16  to  change, 
(sich)  verioandcln,  17  value,  18  at  the  utmost,  19  to  estimate, 
schatzen,  20  namely,  21  carat,  22  to  be  worth,  gelten  (irr.J, 
23  jewellers,  24  chemist,  25  result  of  his  examination,  26  rendered, 
27  swindle,  28  to  dip,  tauclien,  29  violet,  30  anilin-solution, 
31  complementary  colours,  32  i.e.,  d.h.  (das  heisst),  33  mutually, 
«ach  other,  34  neutralise,  35  colourless  condition,  36  is  produced, 
37  treatment,  38  perfectly,  39  suffers,  40  the  least,  41  brillancy, 
42  deception,  43  to  rub,  reiben  (irr.),  44  to  protect,  schiitzen, 
45  to  be  able,  vermogen  (irr.). 


250 

Fifty-fourth  Lesson.  SSierunbfiinfgtgfte  Sefttoiu 

The  Numerals  (concluded}. 

Another,  in  the  sense  of  a  different  one  instead,  is  rendered  ein 
anberer,  and  not ...  another,  fein  cmberer;  as, 

S)tefe§  ©la?  ift  nidjt  rein,  geben  6te  mir  ein  anbereS.  This  glass 
is  not  clean,  give  me  another.  3dj  fann  Sljnen  fein  anbereS  ©lal 
geben.  I  cannot  give  you  another  glass. 

Another,  in  the  sense  of  one  more  of  the  same  kind,  is  rendered 
nod)  ein,  and  not ...  another,  fein  ...  meljr;  as, 

3$r  SBier  ifi  gut,  geben  ©ie  mir  nodj  ein  ©Io§  (babon).  Your  beer 
is  good,  give  me  another  glass  (of  it).  Sic  foUten  fein  ©lo§  SMer 
meljr  trinfen.  You  should  not  drink  another  glass  of  beer. 

More,  standing  with  an  adjective  or  an  adverb,  is  rendered  by 
the  comparative  (see  pages  76  &  176) ; — however,  if  two  adjectives 
or  two  adverbs  are  compared  more  is  rendered  by  meljr;  as, 

(£r  tfl  meljr  gurmiitljig  <&$  bumnt.  He  is  more  good  natured  than 
stupid.  6ie  lefen  meljr  unbeutlidj  a!8  unridjtig.  You  read  more  in- 
distinctly than  incorrectly. 

More,  preceded  by  a  numeral  and  not  followed  by  than,  is  ren- 
dered by  nod),  which  is  placed  before  the  numeral ;  as, 

3d)  iimnfdje  nodj  bier  toon  biefen  $rfigen.  I  want  four  more  of 
these  collars.  SBoIIen  @ie  nod)  ein  toenig  gleifdj?  So,  ge&en  ©ie 
mir  nod).  Do  you  wish  for  a  little  more  meat?  Yes,  give  me 
some  more. 

Any  more,  preceding  a  noun,  is  rendered  nod)  meljr;  as, 
£aben  8ie  nodj  meljr  83udjer?    Have  you  any  more  books? 

Any  longer  is  rendered  nodj ;  as, 

SBoIIen  @ie  bie  Settling  nodj  Beljolten?  Will  you  keep  the  news- 
paper any  longer! 

No  for  not  any)  more  (a)  no  (OT  not  any)  longer  (a),  preceding 
a  noun  expressed  or  understood,  are  rendered  by  tein  ...  meljr,  the 
latter  word  being  placed  after  the  noun ;  as, 

3dj  IjoBe  fein  ©elb  mefjr.  I  have  no  more  money,  gotten  (Sit 
Hne  £unbe  meljr?  9Mn,  tdj  fjabe  teine  meljr.  Do  you  no  longer  keep 
dogs?  No,  I  have  no  longer  any. 

NOTE. — If  not  followed  by  a  noun  (expressed  or  understood),  no 

(or  not  any)  more,  and  no  (or  not  any)  longer  are  rendered  nidjt  meljr ;  as, 

3d)   roiH  ©ie  nidjt  meljr  fetjen.     I  will  not  see  you  any  more. 

3)a§  geuer  ttiH  nid)t  meljr  brennen.     The  fire  will  not  burn  any 

longer. 

Either,  in  the  sense  of  the  one  or  the  other,  is  rendered  etner 
(Don  Beiben),  and  neither  or  not ...  either,  meaning  not  the  one  nor 
the  other,  is  rendered  fetner  (fcon  beiben) ;  as, 

SBon  biefen  (Beiben)  SReffern  fonnen  6ie  etneS  neljmen.  Of  these 
(two)  knives  you  may  take  either.  Seiner  Don  un§  (beiben)  tear  bo. 
Neither  (or  "not  either")  of  us  was  there. 

Either  meaning  each  is  rendered  jeber;  as, 

Sfton  borf  ouf  jeber  6eite  ber  SBrtide  geb,en.  People  may  go  on 
either  side  of  the  bridge. 


the  button,  bet 
„    cough,  ber  fiuften 
„    drawer,  Me  ©djuMobe 
„   fan,  ber  gddjer 

in  stock,  ouf  Sager 

the   invitation-card,    bte 
(StnfabungSfarte 

to  need,  want, 


251 

the   light,    candle,     bo§ 

Sid)t 

(Plur.:  see  p.  17  No.  5) 

the  painting,  ba§  ©ematbe 

„      pocket-knife,      ba§ 

$Eaf<f)enmefjer 
pretty,  Ijii&fd& 
several  times,  mel)reremal 


the  shutter,  ber  fiaben 

(Plur.:  see  p.  17  No.  5) 
„  side,  page,  bie  ©cite 
„  sort,  kind,  bie  ©orte 
,,  time-table,  ber  ga^r= 

plan 

„   towel,  ba§  £anbtudj 
wet,  na{3 


Exercise  No.  54. 

1.  It  is  a  very  nice  fan,  but  you  have  also  another  kind  in  stock. 
This  cigar  is  not  good,  take  another.  This  room  is  too  small,  have  you 
not  another  to  let  ?  One  plate  is  not  enough,  bring  another.  You 
should  send  (Dat.)  him  another  invitation-  card,  perhaps  he6  has*  not 
received  the  first.  I  would  (wurde)  also  give  (Dat.)  the  girl  some- 
thing, but  I  have  not  another  penny  (Penny  m.)  with  me.  The  weather 
is  more  wet  than  cold.  He  works  more  industriously  than  accurately 
(punktlich).  Give  (Dat.)  me  three  more  of  these  tickets.  I  can  give 
you  only  two  more.  In  that  drawer  you6  willa  find  some  more  towels. 
Can  you  show  (Dot.)  me  any  more  drawings?  Do  you  see  the  ship 
any  longer  ?  Do  not  bring  any  more  candles,  I  do  not  want  (need) 
any  more.  "Why  do  you  no  longer  sell  French  books  ?  If  you  do  not 
wish  to  work  any  more  (so)  go  to  bed.  I  go  no  longer  to  that  expensive 
hotel.  Will  you  sell  either  of  your  horses?  No,  although  I  do 
not  need  two,  I  shall  sell  neither.  You  can  buy  a  time-table  at  either 
station. 


2.  ©agen  @ie  bie  fftegel  nodj  ettunat.  $&)  laufte  neultdj 
biefeS  Safdjenmeffer  bet  ^fjnen  (at  your  shop)  iinb  tnocfite  gern 
nocf)  etne3  fiir  einen  greunb  oon  mir  fyaben.  2Bir  fonnen  auf 
ieber  ©cite  be3  28agen£  fifcen.  SBie  triele  Shiopfe  nmnfcfyen  6te 
nodj?  -ftod)  fiinf,  bitte.  <•$$  bin  bet  (to)  %fywn  betben  SSriibern 
getoejett,  aber  fetner  rooflte  mid)  begteiten.  $3)  ging  nod^ 
me^reremol  gu  ibtn,  aber  er  roar  me  gii  £aufe.  ^tn  (in)  ^^rer 
@teHe  roiirbe  tcf)  nid)t  nteftr  511  tljm  gefjen.  SSenn  eine^  Don  ben 
beiben  (two)  genftern  §erbrotf>en  fein  joUte,  jo  macfien  @ie  bie 
Saben  511. 

Will  you  not  take  (tririken)  another  cup  of  tea?  No,  thanks 
(darike),  I  never  drink  more  than  two  cups.  I  do  not  know  whether 
I  shall  buy  either  of  these  paintings.  I  should  not  buy  either,  because 
they  are  too  expensive.  Have  you  only  this  letter  ?  I  have  many 
more.  If  you  do  not  like  to  procure  (besorgen)  this  article  [for]  (Dat.) 
me,  I  must  go  to  another  shop.  When  you  have  no  longer  a  cough 
you  may  (diirfen)  go  out.  This  book  is  more  pretty  than  useful. 
This  letter  is  written  very  badly,  write  another.  Shall  I  order  another 
bottle  of  wine  ?  Yes,  of  the  same  sort.  Give  (Dat.)  me  a  few  more 
matches. 


252 


Conversational  and 
Do  you  want  to  see  mel 

I  want  to  see  Mr.  N. 
I  will  see  you  home. 

Did  I  keep  you  waiting? 
Do  not  let  me  disturb  you. 
Now  I  must  be  off. 
Will  you  excuse  me  one  minute? 

I  beg  your  pardon ! 

I  beg  your  pardon  (what  did 

you  say?). 
Will  you  be  kind  enough  and 

give  ...(so  good  as  to  give  ...)? 
Would  you  kindly  ...? 
With  pleasure. 
With  much  pleasure. 
Very  much  obliged  to  you. 
Don't  mention  it. 
Can  you  spare  the  book  for  a 

minute? 
Have  you  not  some  stamps  to 

spare? 

I  have  not  left  any. 
I  had  nothing  left. 
Can  you  spare  a  little  time  to ..? 
We  have  still  five  minutes  to 

spare. 

I  have  not  the  time  to  ... 
You  are  just  in  time. 
We  are  behind  our  time. 
You  are  late— early. 
Better  late  than  never. 
You  may  come  at  any  time. 
I  shall    stay    here    for    some 

time. 
At  the  same  time  I  should  like 

to... 

By  this  time  twelve  months. 
In  an  hour's  time. 
It  is  more  than  time. 
1  stayed  beyond  my  time. 


Idiomatic  Phrases. 

SSotten  ©ie  511  mir  (SBotten  ©ie 

mid)  fpred)en)? 
3d)     tounfdje    $errtt     91-     3^ 

fpred)en. 
3d)   toift   ©ie   naclj   |mufe  be* 

gleiten. 

£abe  id)  ©ie  toarten  taffen? 
Saffen  ©ie  fid)  nttigt  ftoren. 
3efct  nwJ3  icf)  fort. 
SBoflen  ©ie  mid)  einen  9tugen* 

blicf  entfdjulbigen. 
©nrfdjutbigen  ©ie  —  id)  bitte  urn 


SBie?  bitte.—  SBttte,  toaS  fagten 

©ie? 
SSoHen  ©ie  fo    gut   fein   unb 

...  geben  ? 

SSiirben  @ie  gefdtttgft  ...? 
I  93Zit  SSergniigen 

3D^it  bem  grofeten  SSergnugen. 
©el)r  tierbunben  (Sanfe  fe^r). 
83itte  feljr. 

Sonncn    @ie   ba§    S3ud^    einen 
5lugenblicf  entbe^ren? 

§aben  ©ie  nidjt  einige  SJlarfcn 

iibrig  ? 

%d)  ^abe  fcinc  mefjr  iibrig. 
3d)  be^iett  nic^tg  me^r  iibrig. 
£aben  ©ie  ein  irenig  3e^Su  •••? 
SBir  ^aben  noc^  fiinf  3Ktnuten 

Beit. 

%fy  Ijabe  feine  Beit  511  .. 
©ie  !ommen  gerabe  red^t. 
SSir  ^aben  un3  toerfpatet. 
©ie  lommen  fpat—  fril^. 
S3effer  fpat  aid  gar  nid^t. 
©ie  fonnen  511  jeber  B^it  fommen. 
3d)    njerbe   eine 

bleiben. 

g  mo^tc  t 


£eute  iiber  ein  %afyx. 

3n  einer  ©timbe. 

g§  tft  bie  I)orf)fte  B^t. 

3c^  bin  au  lange  auSgeblieben. 


253 

<£m*eise  tto.  54. 


2>te  Sarabe  in  St. 


S)tc  ®5nigtn  toon  (£ngtanb  Ijiett1  im  -fto&emBer  1882 
etne  2ftufterung2  uBer  bie  au§  (£gt)pten3  jurucfgefefjrten4 
Xruppen5  aB,  toelef)e  fidf)  511  einem  grofcartigen6  (Scfjaufpiel7 
geftaftete.8  $)ie  Slnjafjl9  ber  on  ber  2Jlufterung  tfjeilnelj* 
menben10  Xruppen  Betrug11  ungefafjr  9000  9ftann,  toor* 
unter  firfj  800  SOlann  Sletterei12  Befanben.  einjig^  in 
ber  2Belti4  n)ar  bie  Sufd^auerjaps  ton  na^e^uis  gtoci 
2ftifli0nen  9Jienfc^en  ;  benn  Beina|e  fjatB  Sonbon  Bet^etligte17 
fid^  an  bent  (Sdfjauftriel,  oBgletc^  juerft  bt^tefter18  grauer19 
9fleBeI  bie  §auptftabt2o  cinptttc21,  fo  ba§  man  !anm  iiBer 
bie  ©trafce  fe^en  fonnte.  S)ic  Xemparatttr  h)ar  baBei22 
Bitterfalt23.  S)ie  @onigin  neBft24  alien  ^itgUebern2^  be§ 
8flnig§f)anfe§26,  barunier  aud^  bie  bentfd^e  tronprinjeffin2? 
unb  ber  (SJroperjog28  bon  ©effen29,  tjerlieg  urn  ^alB 
ein  ttljr  ben  SBndEing^am^alaft30  unb  fii^r  jnr  $arabe, 
toeld^e  anf  bem  offenen  $Ia|e3i  ^inter  ben  ,,§orfe  ®uarb3" 
im  @t.  SameS'g  $ar!  ftattfanb22.  5IIIe  Xrnp^en  befilirten^s 
t)or  ber  ®onigin,  ttjeld^e  bon  atten  ©eneraten  unb  bem 
ganjen  §offtaat34  umgeBen35  tear.  S)ie  ^rinsen3^  Befanben 
fid)  unmittelBar3?  neBen  ber  ^finigin,  nur  ber  §ergog  don 
©onoug^t  ritt  an  ber  <5pi|e38  ber  ®arben39.  SSiel  Sluf* 
fe^en40  erregte4!  bie  au3getoaf)Ite42  3lBt^eitung43  ber  in* 
bifdfjen44  Slrmee,  brei§e^n  Dffijiere  unb  neunsefm  SJiann 
ftar!.  9flad^  ber  2ftufterung  marfd^irten45  bie 
mit  ©eneral  SSoifele^  an  ber  ©pifee,  burd^  bie 
(Stragen  bel  SSeftenbeS. 

1  to  hold,  abTialten  (irr.),  2  review,  8  Egypt,  4  to  return, 
zuriickfceAmi,  5  troops,  6  grand,  7  spectacle,  8  formed,  9  num- 
ber, 10  participating,  11  to  amount  to,  betragen  (irrj,  12  cavalry, 
13  unique,  14  world,  15  number  of  spectators,  16  nearly,  17  as- 
sisted, 18  thickest,  19  grey,  20  metropolis,  21  to  envelop,  einMZ^Ti, 
22  also,  23  bitterly  cold,  24  with,  25  members,  26  royal  family, 
27  crown-princess,  28  grand  duke,  29  Hesse,  30  palace,  31  space, 
32  to  take  place,  statt^ndett  (irrj,  33  to  defile,  defiliren,  34  by  the 
members  of  the  court,  35  to  surround,  umgeben  (irr.),  36  princes, 
37  immediately,  38  head,  39  guards,  40  interest,  41  caused, 
42  to  select,  smswahlen,  43  detachment,  44  Indian,  45  to  march, 
marschiren,  46  most  frequented. 


254 

Fifty-fifth  Lesson,  gimfimbfunfatgfte  Seftion. 

General  Remarks  on  Determinative  Adjectives, 
Pronouns  and  Numerals. 

Determinative  adjectives,  as  a  rule,  are  repeated  before  every 
singular  noun  in  sequence ; — however,  they  are  usually  omitted 
after  the  first  noun  when  all  the  nouns  refer  or  belong  to  the  same 
person  or  thing  and  are  of  the  same  case  and  gender  or  number;  as, 
@r  ift  mein  greunb  unb  SBpIjItljater.     He  is  my  friend  and  bene- 
factor.     9lHe  genfter  unb  £f)iiren  be§  $auje§  finb  aerbrodjeti.      All 
the  windows  and  doors  of  the  house  are  smashed. 

Pronouns  or  determinative  adjectives  take  the  gender  of  the 
noun  they  refer  to ; — but  if  referring  to  a  neuter  noun  of  the  male 
or  female  sex,  they  take  in  preference  the  gender  of  the  sex  instead 
of  the  neuter  gender ;  as, 

SBte  alt  tft  3ljr  ©6l)nd)en?  Sr  (or  c§)  tft  4  3<a!jte  alt.  How  old 
is  your  little  son?  He  is  4  years  old.  25a§  Sfidbdjen  gleidjt  tljrer  (or 
1'einer)  SJiutter.  The  girl  resembles  her  mother. 

Note. — This  is  also  the  case  with  any  adjective  referring  to  such  a  noun; 
as, — SSeldjeS  tft  bie  fd)onfte  (or  ba§  fdjonfte)  Don  biefen  SDidbcfjen?     Which  is 
the  most  beautiful  of  these  girls? 

The  indefinite  numerals  all  (alter)  or  both  (beibe)  followed  by 
a  Gmitive  are  rendered  as  follows : 

1.)  The  noun  or  pronoun  in  the  Genitive  takes  the  case  of  offer 
or  betbe  which  precedes  the  noun  (see  also  page  126),  but  follows 
the  pronoun;  as, 

8dj  fonn  ntc^t  Sfjnen  alien  ^elfen.  I  cannot  help  all  of  you. 
SBir  toaren  in  Sfiten  beiben  ©drten.  We  were  in  both  of  your  gardens. 
@te  ga&en  mir  Sleifttfte,  roeldje  allc  fdjledjt  finb.  You  gave  me  pencils, 
all  of  which  are  bad. 

2.)  If  offer  and  Betbe  are  in  the  nominative  case  and  occur  with  a 

noun  or  personal  pronoun  they  are  usually  placed  after  the  verb ;  as, 

2er  SSein  ift  otter  getrunlen  (or  atter  SBein).     All  of  the  wine  is 

•    drunk.      SStr  Ija&en  fceibe  feinen  Setter  (.or  nrir  Beibe).    Both  of  us 

have  no  cousin. 

3.)  5lffer  or  betbe,  with  a  relative  pronoun,  is  usually  placed  after  a 
noun  or  personal  pronoun  (subject  or  object)  without  a  preposition 
and  occurring  in  the  same  sentence ;  as, 

Sie  fdjrcften  mir  £anbfdjul)e,  tceldje  mir  attc  511  grofc  finb.  You 
sent  me  gloves,  all  of  which  are  too  large  for  me.  Gr  unterfdjrteb 
Stoei  SSedjjel,  toeldje  fein  SBater  Betbe  fiir  t^n  Beja^Ien  mufete.  He 
signed  two  bills  (of  exchange)  both  of  which  his  father  had  to  pay 
for  him. 

Any  other  numeral  preceding  a  relative  pronoun  in  the  Geni- 
tive retains  its  case  and  follows  the  relative  in  German,  which  is 
rendered  by  bon  bent  (or  toon  foeld&ent),  etc. ;  as, 

G§  ftanben  fedj§  SJMnner  auf  ber  ©ttafje,  toon  benen  brei  $utc 
frugen.  There  were  six  men  in  the  street,  three  of  whom  wore  hats. 

If  the  numeral  is  not  the  subject  it  is  separated  from  the  relative 
and  takes  its  usual  place ;  as, 

<Er  Ijatte  Srob,  »on  bent  er  mir  etn  wenig  gab.  He  had  bread,  a 
little  of  which  he  gave  me. 


to  assist,  support,  unter* 

ftiijjen 
the    chamber-maid,    ba§ 

Stitbenmdbdjen 
clean,  pure,  rein 
the  drama,  ba§  (S 
to   execute,    to   put    to 

death,  ijinridjten 


255 

to  freeze,  to  he  killed  by 

the  frost,   *erfrieten 

irr. 

interesting,  inteteffont 
the  little  boy,ba§  ®na&djen 
to   pass    (by),    tJorti6er= 

gefjen  an  (Dat),  etc. 
to   please,    gefaHen  irr. 

(Dat.) 


the  quantity.bie  Guontitat 


the  ribbon,  ba§  53anb 
„   robber,  bet  3tauber 
to  soil,  fiefdjinufcen 
the  sorrow,  bet  Summer 
to  wear,  carry,  tragen  irr. 


Exercise  No.  55. 

1.  He  has  sold  Ms  carriage  and  horses.  Such  a  robber  and  mur- 
derer ought  to  be  put  to  death.  Each  gentleman  and  lady  wore  a  blue 
ribbon.  "Where  is  the  chamber-maid  ?  I  will  call  her  directly.  I  am 
to  invite  all  of  you  for  this  evening.  I  have  spoken  to  (mit)  all  of  your 
relations  about  it.  You  should  sell  both  of  your  houses.  I  read  two 
novels  both  of  which  are  very  interesting.  All  of  the  flowers  in  the 
garden  have  been  killed  by  the  frost.  Both  of  the  ladies  ride  very  well. 
Was  only*  your  brother6  ill  ?  No,  both  of  us  were  ill.  I  received  a  large 
quantity  [of]  tea  all  of  which  I  can  sell  at  (zu)  a  good  price.  The  last 
ship  brought  many  soldiers,  several  of  whom  are  wounded.  He  had 
several  dogs,  none  of  which,  however6,  he*  would  (wollen)  sell. 

2.  (g$  ttrirb  wt3  afle  frenen,  roenn  6te  batb  tmeber  fommen 
tterben.  S)a3  ift  bag  arme  grdutein  ©.,  fie  f>at  Diet  Shimmer 
gefjabt.  %d)  ging  an  %$nen  bciben  rjoriibrc,  aber  6ie  fafien 
micf)  nicfjt.  8ft  nur  einer  con  gftren  ©tfcfebt  gerriffen?  9^ein, 
e^  .finb  beibe  gerriffen.  ©c^enften  @ie  bent  SIMbcfien  bte(jemgen) 
^anber,  bon  benen  eintge  befc^mup  finb?  SBcIc^er  bon  biefen 
^nabc^en  ift  ber  attere?  S^r  S^effe  ^eigte  rntr  feine  ^roei  Bimmer, 
n)eld)e  mir  beibe  gut  (much)  gefielen.  ©^  finb  ^aufleute,  tuelc^e 
beibe  fetjr  reic^  finb. 

I  shall  write  to  (an  Ace.)  all  of  you.  These  are  the  works  of  two 
poets,  both  of  whom  are  already  forgotten.  Both  of  my  parents  are 
still  living.  Both  my  money  and  watch  have  (has)  been  stolen.  You 
should  not"  drink  all  of  the  beer6  at  once  (auf  einmal)c.  He  had  two 
sons  neither  of  whom  could  assist  him  in  his  business.  They  (one) 
have  captured  both  of  the  thieves.  He  wrote  many  dramas,  several  of 
which  were  played  all  through  (in  the  whole  of)  England.  You  sent 
(Dat.)  me  some  note-paper  all  of  which  is  soiled.  All  of  us  went  to 
the  station  with  him.  He  has  two  houses  both  of  which  are  let.  Did 
you  see  both  of  us?  Both  of  you  ought  to  be  ashamed.  All  the  cheese 
and  butter  are  eaten.  Her  brother  and  sister  will  be  here  to-night. 
You  will  find  similar  (ahnlich)  flowers  in  both  of  our  gardens.  Many 
persons  (Leute),  (the)  most  of  whom  were  workmen,  were  waiting  for 
(auf  Ace.)  the  lord-mayor.  Did  you  introduce  that  gentleman  to 
(Dat.)  the  society?  No,  he  introduced  himself  (selbst)  to  (Dat.)  all 
of  us.  Bring  another  fork  and  spoon,  these  are  not  clean. 


256 

Conversational  and  Idiomatic  Phrases. 

£aben  ©ie  -ftadjridjten  toon 
Sfjretn  SBruber? 

3d)  fjabe  fdjon  lange  niifitg  toon 
ifjm  gefjort. 

Sdj  toerbe  lange  nidjt  an  tljn 
fdjreiben. 

(£g  ift  fdjon  lange  Ret]. 

eg   tft  fdjon  lange  [fjer],   baft 


Have  you  any  news  from  your 

brother? 
I  have  not  heard  from  him  for 

a  long  time. 
I  shall  not  write  to  him  for  a 

long  time. 

It  is  a  long  time  since, 
It  is  a  long  time  since  I ... 


It  is  a  month  since  he  came 
here. 

It  is  a  week  since — since  I ... 

It  is  a  week  since  he  left. 

Have  you  ever  been  to  Ger- 
many? 

Have  you  been  to  the  theatre 
yet? 

Has  the  doctor  come  yet? 

1  have  not  seen  him  for  three 
days. 

I  was  in  Germany  for.  three 
months. 

Can  you  lend  me  the  book  for 
a  fortnight? 

Can  you  stop  for  some  hours? 

I  am  going  to  France  for  the 

winter. 
How  long  will  it  be  before  you 

come  back  ? 
It  took  me  a  long  time  before  I 

could  speak  German. 
No  longer  ago  than  a  week. 
I  saw  him  not  long  ago. 

That  was  a  long  time  ago  (a 

great  while  ago). 
I  shall  come  at  once  (directly). 
He  ate  the  apples  at  once. 
All  at  once  he  disappeared. 
If  we  ever  chance  to  meet  each 

other. 
Will  you  make  a  long  stay  here  ? 

You  had  better  come  in  the  day 
time. 


c  ift  fdjon  etnen  2ftonat  Ijter 
(or  er   ift   fdjon    fett   einem 


eg   ift  fdjon  eine  SSodje—  bafc 

id)  ...  . 

er  ift  fdjon  eine  SBodje  fort. 
©inb  @ie  fdjon  in  S)eutfcf)tanb 

getoefen  ? 
©inb  @ie  fdjon  im  Sweater  ge- 

toefen? 

8ft  ber  25oftor  fdjon  gefommen  ? 
34  fjabe  i^n   fdjpn   brei   Xage 

[lang]  ntdjt  gefefjen. 
$d)  tear  brei  Donate  [lang]  in 

S5eutfdjlanb. 
$6nnen   @ie   mir   auf  oierje^n 

Sage  bag  SBiidj  letfjen? 
$5nnen    @ie    einige    ©tunben 

bleiben? 
3dj  gefje  iiber  ben  SBinter  nadj 

granfreid). 
SSann  toevben  @ie  guriitffommen? 

%fy  braudjte  fe^r  lange,  big  id^ 
3)eutfdj  fprec^en  lonnte. 

Srft  bor  adjt  Sagen. 

S^  fal^  i^n  erft  t>or  ^urgent— 
unldngft. 

S)ag  ttmr  f^on  uor  longer  3^it. 

$dj  hjerbe  gleic^  fommen. 
Sr  afj  bie  2IepfeI  auf  etnmal. 
2luf  einmal  oerf^ttjanb  er. 
SSenn  nrir  itng  je  [einmal]  be- 

gegnen  foflten. 
SBerben  ©ie  fid§  lange  Ijier  auf* 

fatten? 
£ommen  ©ie  lieber  bei  Sag. 


257 

€rerct0e  Wo.  55. 


SMieit  iwb  ^a^ren* 

3m  SOHttetalter,1  unb  §raar2  Bi§  gum  13ten  %afa 
Ijnnbert,3  ritten  bie  grauen  nacfj  ber  5(rt4  ber  banner. 
2>atm  raurbe  e§  @itte,5  ba§  bie  gran  auf  etnem  Jointer  bent 
(Sattel6  Befefttgten7  ®iffen8  $ta|  naf)m  unb  ben  Dor  iljr 
fi^enben  SJlann  mit  beiben  Airmen  nmfc^lang.9  S)ie§  raar 
nod)  im  16ten  3a§r§unbert  iiBItc^10,  nnb  e§  gieBt  noc^  titele 
berartige11  SlbBtlbnngen12.  3)er  (^ebrancl^13  ber  SBagett 
jur  ^erfunenbeforbernng14  tear  im  SJJittetalter  fe^r  be* 
fc^rdnlt15,  nnb  e§  tunrbe  toon  giirften16  unb  Obrig!etten17 
fe!§r  bagegen  geeifert18,  toeil  ba§  ga^ren  bie  mtinnltdje19 
^raft20  nnb  Xapferlett2!  be3  SSoi!e§  Beeintrdc^ttge22.  3)ic 
erfte  ^aroffe23  lam  1533  au§  gtalten  na^  $ari§  nnb 
1601  U)nrbe  bnrd}  bie  Qnfantin24  9Jlarie  don  (Seamen  bie 
erfte  berartige  ^ntfc^e25  mit  ($la§fenftern  nad^  2)eutf(f)tanb 
geBrad^t.  £>ie  erften  ^ietpntf^en2^  tuurben  1615  in 
$ari§  eingefiifirt27.  S^ac^bem  e§  einmal  anfge!ommen28, 
crtete29  an  fiirftlidjen30  §ofen  ba§  ga!§rtt)efen31  mani^mat 
in  8uj:u832  an§.  @o  !)iett  ^nrfiirft33  @igi§mnnb  1594. 
feinen  ©tngug34  in  SBarfcfjan35  mit  36  ^anonen36,  nnb 
ber  SSraiittoagen3?  ^aifer  £eo^>otb§  I  ttmrbe  1670  mit 
38,000  ©nlben38  Beaafjit  S)a0  ^Reifen  §n  SBagen  raar 
after  nod)  im  17ten  ga^rfinnbert  raegen  ber  fc^lec^ten  SSege 
nicf)t  angene^m;  benn  nic^t  fetten  mu§ten  Seute  neBen  bent 
SBagen  gefjen,  nm  biefen  mit  §eBebdumen39  an§  ben  Coc^ern40 
unb  bem  ©cfylamme41  ber  @tra§e  gu  ^eben42.  SBer  f^neU 
fortfommen43  raoUte,  mn§te  reiten. 

1  middle-ages,  2  namely,  3  century,  4  manner,  5  custom, 
6  saddle,  7  to  fasten,  befestigen,  8  pillion,  9  was  holding  on, 
10  customary,  11  such,  12  pictures,  13  use,  14  transport  of 
persons,  15  limited,  16  sovereigns,  17  government  authorities, 
18  inveighed,  19  manly,  20  vigour,  21  bravery,  22  deteriorated, 
23  coach,  24  infanta,  25  coach,  26  hackney-coaches,  27  to  intro- 
duce, einfuhren,  28  having  come  into  use,  29  to  degenerate,  ausar- 
ten,  30  sovereign,  31  employment  of  vehicles,  32  luxury,  33  elec- 
tor, 34  entry,  35  Warsaw,  36  cannons,  37  nuptial  carriage, 
38  florins,  39  levers,  40  holes,  41  mud,  42  to  lift,  heben  (irr.)t 
43  to  proceed. 

German  Grammar.  9 


2.73 

Fifty-sixth  Lesson.  ©ed^imbfunfjigfte  Seltion. 

The  Auxiliary  Verbs  of  Mood. 

An  Auxiliary  Verb  of  Mood,  in  the  Imperfect  followed  in 
English  by  the  Infinitive  perfect  (i.e.  by  to  have  with  a  past  par- 
ticiple) must  be  rendered  in  German  as  follows : 

The  Verb  of  Mood  is  changed  into  the  Pluperfect  Subjunctive 
(f)dtte  ...  fonnen,  etc.)  and  the  Past  Participle  of  the  principal 
verb  is  changed  into  the  Infinitive ;  as, 

3d)  l)5tte  S^nen  fdjreiBen  fonnen.  I  might  (could)  have  written 
to  you.  Sie  fjdtten  fommen  foUen.  You  should  have  come. 

This  form  is  also  commonly  used  for  rendering  the  Conditional  II. 
(see  page  132) ;  as, 

Sr  Ijatte  nidjt  fommen  burfen.    He  would  not  have  been  allowed  to  come. 

fflttff  en. 

Sftuffen  expresses  a  moral  as  well  as  a  physical  necessity  and 
corresponds  to  the  English  must,  to  be  obliged,  to  be  compelled;  as, 

®r  muB  ar&etten.  He  must  work.  3d)  mu&te  flieljen.  I  was 
compelled  to  flee.  SBarum  Ijaben  Sie  fommen  muffen?  Why  have 
you  been  obliged  to  come? 

It  often  corresponds  also  to  to  have  to;  as, 

3d)  tniiB  nadj  Seutfdjlanb  ge^en.    I  have  to  go  to  Germany.    3d) 
toerbe  an  il)n  fdjrei&en  miifien.    I  shall  have  to  write  to  him. 
Note. — It  may  as  well  be  said:    3d)  fyifie  nad)  3>eutfd)Ianb  ju  geljen,  etc. 
I  must  not,  etc,  is  rendered  id)  barf  nid)r,  etc.;  but  must  I  not!  etc., 
in  the  usual  way  nwfj  id)  nidjt  ?  etc. 

Stotmen* 

fonnen  expresses  a  physical  possibility  and  corresponds  to  the 
English  can,  could,  to  be  able;  as, 

Set  Sftenid)  fann  fdjtirimmen.  Man  can  (is  able  to)  swim.  <5r 
fonnte  ntdjt  aroeiten.  He  could  (was  not  able  to)  work. 

It  expresses  also  a  possibility  supposed  by  the  speaker  or  a 
permission  granted  by  another  person  to  the  subject  of  which  the 
latter  may  take  advantage  or  not,  and  is  corresponding  to  may  or 
might  (Subjunctive) ;  as, 

6r  fann  mid)  bergeffen  Ija&en.    He  may  have  (I  think  it  possible 
that  he  has)  forgotten  me.     Sie  fonnen  mir  f)elfen.    You  may  assist 
me  (if  you  like).      SBan  fonnte  tl)m  nid)t  glauben.    They  might  (I 
think  it  possible  that  they  would)  not  believe  him. 
Note. — In  these  cases  also  mogen  is  sometimes  used;  as, 

©r  mag  mid)  bergeffen  I)a6en. 

REMARK. — To  be  able  is  occasionally  rendered  im  ©tanbe  fein  or 
oennogen  (irr.) 

ftonnen  corresponds  further  to  to  understand  or  to  know  in  the 
sense  of  to  understand  something;  as, 

ffBnnen  Sie  Xeutfd)?  Do  you  know  German?  Sonnen  Sie 
jeidjnen?  Do  you  understand  drawing?  ®r  fann  2THe8.  He  knows 
(understands)  everything.  3d)  fann  meine  Slufga&e.  I  know  my 
exercise. 


259 

Could,  referring  to  the  past  (i.e.  in  the  meaning  of  was  able  to) 
is  rendered  fonnte  (Imperfect  Indicative)  ;  as, 

3d)  fonnte  nidjt  arBetten.  I  could  not  (I  was  not  able  to)  work. 
fionnten  Sie  fdjtetBen?  Could  you  (were  you  able  to)  write? 

Could,  denoting  conditional  (i.e.  in  the  meaning  of  would  be 
able  to)  is  rendered  fonnte  (Imperfect  Subjunctive)  ;  as, 

gd)  fonnte  nidjt  orBeiten.  I  could  not  (I  should  not  be  able  to) 
work.  ®onnten  @ie  fdjreiBen?  Could  you  (would  you  be  able  to) 
write? 

Note.—  "I  cannot  help,  forbear,   avoid,   withhold,"   are  rendered:   gdj 
fann  nidjt  wnljtn  (or  idj  fann  nndj  ntdjt  entljalten);  as, 

3dj  fann  nidjt  utnfyin  gn  tteinen.    I  cannot  help  weeping. 


implies  an  inclination,  intention,  determination  or  de- 
sire, depending  on  the  free  will  of  the  subject,  and  is  corresponding 
to  will  (would),  to  be  willing,  to  wish,  to  want,  to  like,  to  desire,  to 
intent,  to  feel  inclined,  to  be  determined;  as, 

SSotten  @ie  mitgefjen?  Will  you  go  with  me?  (Sr  n)itt  nadj 
(Sdjtoeben  reifen.  He  wishes  to  travel  to  Sweden.  (£r  roiH  nidjt 
!ommen.  He  does  not  feel  inclined  (he  does  not  like)  to  come,  ftdj 
hJottte  e§  tljun.  I  would  (I  was  determined  to)  do  it.  fatten  @ie 
fommen  tootfen?  Had  you  intended  to  come?  SBoflen  <5ie  ba§  23udj? 
Do  you  wish  (want)  for  the  book? 

SSotten  signifies  further  somebody's  assertion  not  altogether  credited 
by  him  who  repeats  it  ;  as, 

(Sr  tmtt  in  SRu&Ianb  gettefen  fein.    He  pretends  to  have  been  in  Russia. 

It  has  also  the  meaning  of  to  be  about,  to  be  going  to  do,  or  to  be  on 
the  point  of  doing  something  ;  as, 

Sd)  h)ottte  eBen  fdjreiBen.     I  was  just  on  the  point  of  writing  (I 
was  just  about  to  write,  or,  I  was  just  going  to  write). 
Note.—  In  this  sense  is  also  said:  gdj  toot  tm  SBegriff  511  fdjretfien. 

Would,  referring  to  the  past  (i.e.  meaning  was  willing  to,  etc.) 
is  rendered  toottte  (Imperfect  Indicative)  ;  as, 

Sd)  ttollte  es  tljun,  oBer  idj  fonnte  nidjt.  I  would  (was  willing 
to)  do  it,  but  I  could  not.  6r  tooUte  nidjt  attein  geljen.  He  would 
not  (he  did  not  intend  to)  go  alone. 

Would,  denoting  conditional  (i.e.  meaning  would  be  willing, 
etc.)  is  rendered  toiirbe  (Imperfect  Subjunctive);  as, 


SBiirben  <Ste  attein  flrij.cn.?    V^puld  you  (would  you  be  willing  to) 
go  alone?     (5r  hJiirbe  fomnten,  rten 
he  could. 


.. 

alone?     (5r  hJiirbe  fomnten,  rtenn  er  fonnte.    He  would  come  if 
could. 
SBoHen  as  auxiliary  of  the  Imperative  see  page  132. 


©oHen  implies  an  obligation,  the  speaker  is  expected  to 
comply  with,  and  is  corresponding  to  shall,  should,  ought  to,  am 
to,  was  to,  etc.;  as, 

S)u  fotlft  nidjt  fteljlen.    Thou  shalt  not  steal.    <5ie  fotften  ba§  bet> 

8efTen.     You  should  (ought  to)  forget  that.      3d)  foE  Bei  3fljnen 
leiBen.    I  am  to  stay  with  you.      fiSer  foUte  6ie  fiegteiten?     Who 
was  to  accompany  you? 


260 

Should  after  if  (toenn)  or  in  ccise  (faffs,  im  gaffe  baft),  these 
words  being  either  expressed  or  understood,  is  rendered  by 
[ottte  (Imperfect)  ;  as, 

SBenn  id)  nidjt  ba  fein  fottte  ....  If  I  should  not  he  there  .... 
galls  ttnr  iljin  begegnen  follien  ....  In  case  we  should  meet  him  .... 
SoHte  em  SBrief  fiir  midj  fommen  ....  Should  a  letter  arrive  for  me  .... 

Note.  —  "I  should,  we  should"  in  the  other  cases  generally  express  the 
conditional  and  are  rendered:  id)  lourbe,  nnr  ttmrben;  as, 

3d)  nmrbe  ba§  nidjt  tljun.    I  should  not  do  that. 

Sott,  foUen  (3rd  person  singular  and  plural)  are  also  employed  in 
the  sense  of  the  English  is  or  are  said,  it  is  said,  they  or  people  sayz 
is  follows  : 

®r  faff  feljr  front  fein.    He  is  said  to  be  very  ill.      SMe  JBiidier. 
foUen  berfauft  toorben  fein.     The  books  are  said  to  have  been 
Sic  foil   feljr  bumm  fein.     They  (people)  say  (it  is  said)  that  she  is 
very  stupid. 

SoUen  is  sometimes  also  used  alone,  the  infinitive  being  understood; 
SSas  foff  ba§  (Ijet&en)?     ^Tiat  does  that  mean?      S3a§  foil  id? 
What  am  I  to  do  here? 


6oHen  as  an  auxiliary  of  the  Imperative  see  page  132. 


S)urfcn  expresses  a  permission  granted  to  the  subject  by  law 

jr  by  another  person,  and  corresponds  to  the  English  to  be  allowed, 

to  be  permitted,  may  (in  the  sense  of  to  be  allowed),  also  to  dare;  asr 

SHemanb  barf  fi&er  btc  SStefe  geljen.    No  one  is  allowed  (.permitted) 

to  go  across  the  meadow.     2arf  id?  eintreten?    May  I  step  in?     SHe 

Qinber  burfen  im  ©arten  fpielen.     The  children  may  (are  allowed  to) 

play  in  the  garden.     6ie  biirfen  t^m  !einen  foldjen  93ricf  fdjretben. 

You  dare  not  write  to  him  such  a  letter. 

3)urfte  (Imperfect  Subjunctive)  is  often  used  in  the  sense  of  what 
the  speaker  thinks  possible,  however,  f  onnen  may  also  be  used  ;  as, 

®r  biirfte  (or  fonnte)  ba!  (tooljl)  gefagt  Ijaoen.  He  may  (might) 
have  said  that. 

Note.—  In  this  case  ttoljl  usually  accompanies  the  verb. 

SRiigett* 

SJ^ogen  expresses  a  possibility  supposed  by  the  speaker  ;  or  a 
permission  granted  by  another  person,  of  which  the  person  spoken 
of  may  take  advantage  or  not  ;  as, 

®§  mag  (or  lann)  fein.  It  may  be.  ©ic  modjten  (or  ISnnten)  fid) 
irren.  You  might  be  mistaken. 

Note.—  In  these  cases  usually  I5nnen  is  used  (see  page  258). 

SJISgen  corresponds  also  to  to  like,  to  be  fond  of;  as, 

Sftogen  Sie  engtifdjen  Safe?  Do  you  like  English  cheese?  SRBgen 
gie  3Ijren  SSetter?  Are  you  fond  of  your  cousin? 

May  or  might  used  for  expressing  a  wish  are  rendered  by 
moge  (or  modfjte);  as, 

9R6ge  er  gludlidj  toieberfe^ren  !  May  he  return  safely!  (ft 
jounidjte,  bag  Sie  iialb  genefen  modjten.  He  wished  that  you  might 
recover  soon. 


the  artist,  bet  @iinftler  < 
to  breakfast,  friif)ftucfen  j 
the  communication,  bie 

SKtttljeilung 
,,      compensation,     bie 

aSergiitung 
considerable,    fcetradjitidj 

(Bebeutenb) 
the    country-estate,    ba§ 

Sanbgut 
the    country-house,    ba§ 

SanbljaitS 

the  execution,  (perform- 
ance), bie  2lu£fiiljrung 


261 

the  guide,  bet  giiljtet 
,,      hand-  writing,      bie 


to  imitate,  nadjaljnten 
to  insist,  *6efteljen  irr. 
Italian,  italienifdj 
the  lesson  (task),  bie  £el* 

tion 

to  make  inquiry  about, 

fidj  erfunbigen  it&er(Acc.) 

the    manner,    bie   SBeife 

(bie  «rt) 
the   opinion,  bie  Vltfigt] 

(2Jleitmng) 


the  order,  command,  ber 

93efef)I 
to  play  the  piano,   ftltt' 

bier  ftrielen 
to  send  off,  a&fdjtcfen 
the  small-pox,  bie  $o<fen 

(Plural) 
to  spend  (money),    o»§* 

geBen  irr. 
tired,  miibe 
unavoidable,    uttbermeib' 

lid) 
to  be  wanting,  feljlen 


Exercise  No.  56. 

1.  You  should  not  have  spoken  in  such  a  manner.     They  might 
have  waited  another  quarter  of  an  hour  (  Viertelstunde  f. )    He  would 
been  obliged  to  give  (Dot.)  you  (a)  compensation.      I  have  been  com- 
pelled to  make  inquiry  about  him.     You  will  be  obliged  to  alter  your 
opinion.     I  had  to  insist  upon  the  execution  of  my  orders.    They  may 
not  have  known  it.     He  might  be  at  (auf)  his  country-estate.      Do 
you  know  Italian  as  well  as  French  ?    Does  your  sister  understand 
playing  (to  play)  the  piano  ?     No,  she  only  understands  singing  (to 
sing).     "We  could  not  work  any  more,  because  we  were  too  tired.     We 
could  not  work,  even  if  you  would  pay  us  double  the  sum.     Did  you 
not"  intend  to  buy  a  country-house6  near  London  ?     You  may  go  if 
you  like.     He  pretends  to  have  seen  you.     He  was  going  to  send  off 
the  letter.     He  would  try  to  imitate  my  handwriting,  but  he  did  not 
succeed.     You  would  do  the  same  in  (an)  my  place.     Do  not  wait 
for  (auf  Ace.)  us  if  we  should  not  have  arrived.      (The)  war  is  said  to 
be  unavoidable.     You  dare  not  speak  to  him  in  this  manner.     May  he 
be  happy. 

2.  ©oGte  nodj  etn  ®Ia3  feljten,  fo  foufen   @te   etne§.     ®ic 
fotten  in  Sonbon  fcin.    fatten  @tc  tttcfjt  mit  bem  nacfiften 

fafiren  (go)  bitrfen?  9Str  foitnten  e3  t&tm,  toenn  toir  looHten. 
tc  tootten  S^rc  tteberfe£ung  attetn  gentqdjt  6a&en!  £)arf  id)  @tc 
begtetten?  ©etne  -SUtttthetlung  fiatte  @te  ntc^t  erfdjrecfen  foHen. 
^Berben  @ie  ntd^t  etnen  'giifirer  nefimen  tniiffcn?  SQlogen  oHe  S^c 
SBiinfc^e  erfiiflt  toerben!  (Sr  !ann  otel  tne^r  (a  great  deal  more) 
oB  @tc. 

I  am  not  permitted  to  go  out.  I  could  not  go  to  church  yester- 
day. Now  we  have  to  make  haste.  I  would  not  have  been  able  to  do 
it  myself.  You  might  give  (Dat.J  me  another  cup  of  coffee.  I  am 
busy,  could  you  not  come  another  time  ?  I  did  not  want  to  spend  too 
much  money.  In  case  I  should  see  the  artist  I  shall  send  him  to  (Dat.) 
you.  I  wished  that  he  might  succeed.  "We  could  not  have  been  at 
3rour  house  soouer.  His  debts  are  said  to  be  very  considerable.  I  am 
about  to  breakfast.  It  may  be  a  fortnight  since  (schon).  None  of 
{von}  the  boys  knew  his  lesson. 


262 
Conversational  and  Idiomatic  Phrases. 


What  time  do  you  leave  busi- 
ness? 
I  met  him  the  next  day. 

Every  other  day. 

The  very  same  day. 

Again  and  again. 

As    much     again  —  as    large 

again. 
Half  as  much  again — half  as 

large  again. 

No  sooner  said  than  done. 
Are  you  in  a  hurry '? 
I  am  in  no  hurry. 
I  passed  my  evening  at  the 

theatre. 
Where  will  you  pass  the  night  I 

I  pass  here  every  day. 

I  pass  your  house  twice  a  day. 

To  pass    on    horseback,  in  a 

vehicle  or  boat. 
To  go  pass  (or  by),  to  ride  past 

(or  by),  to  drive  past  (or  by). 
We    passed    through    a  small 

village. 
We  passed  over  a  bridge. 

We  passed  under  a  bridge. 

When  we  had  passed  the  last 

house. 
I  saw  while  passing  by. 

How  came  it  to  pass? 
I  asked  the  price. 
What  did  he  ask  for  it  ? 
Has  anybody  asked  for  me  ? 
I  shall  ask— beg— him  for  the 

money. 
Did  you    ask   the  shoemaker 

about  my  boots  1 
Have  I  been  asked  for  ? 
Ask  no  questions  ! 


28cmn  geljen  Sie  au&  bent 


8$  begegnete  iljm  ben  folgenben 

Sag. 

9Ifle  attet  Sage. 
9In  ebenbemjelben  Sag. 
3mmer  roieber. 

einmal  fomel—  nod)  einmal 
fo  grofj. 

jotjiel—  Ijalb  jo  grojj. 


©efagt,  getljan. 

&aben  Ste  Site? 

%fy  fjabe  feine  @tfe. 

3d)   toerbradjte   ben   Slbenb   int 

Sweater  (id)  bradjte  ...  311). 
93o  ipollen  @ie  iibernac^ten  (iiber 

9la^t  bleiben)  ? 
%&)    ge^e   jeben   Xag    (or  ofle 

Sage)  ^ter  tooriiber  (or  ttorbet). 
%fy    ge^e    stoetmal    ben    Sag 

an  S^em  ^>aiife  tioriiber. 
Soriiber  (or  Dorbei)  reiten,  faijren. 

SSoruber  (or  jjorbet)  ge^en,  reiten, 

fafjren 
SBir  gingen  (ritten,   etc.]   biird) 

ein  !Ieine0  S)prf. 
28ir  gingen   (ritten,   etc.]  fiber 

etne  S3riicfe. 
S8ir  gingen   (ritten,  etc.]   uitter 

einer  ^riicte  bnrcf). 
2ll»  niir  am  Iei;,tcu  ^aus   tior* 

fiber  (or  corlJei)  njaren. 
3d)  fa^  im  58orubergci;eu   (im 

SBorbeigefjen)  . 
SSie  ift  e^  gugcgangen? 
S<^  f^agte  na^  bem 
SBieoiel  oerlangte  er  bafur? 
£at  S^manb  na<^  mir  gefragt? 
3d)   fterbe  t^n  urn   ba^    @elb 

bitten. 

Sie    ben   (Sd)ul)mad)ei 
meinen  Stiefeln  gefragt  2 
3ft  nod)  mir  gefragt  toorben? 
gragen  Sie  nic^t! 


263 

KeaMng  (itorctse  lit*.  56. 


Ste  ^eufdjrerfcn1  auf 

©mem  23erid)t3  be§  euglifdjeu  ®ommtffar§4  auf 
gufotge  §at  fid)  feit  1878  bie  Saubplage^  bet  £>eufd)reclen 
auf  ber  gufel6  bermetjrt7  3m  teijten  griifyjafjr  uub 
(summer  §at  fie  gang  erfd)rec!tid)e  SBer!)dltuiffe  auge= 
nontmen.8  S)ie  ^eufdjrede  ift  auf  ©typern  fjehnifd),9  uub 
ifjre  $ert>ielfattiguug10  ift  grogeuttieite11  ber  gerftijrung12 
ber  SSalbuugeu13  gugufdjreikn14.  SDer  SSobeit15,  auf  ttctdjem 
bte  SSdlber  ftaubeu,  eiguet  fid)16  in  beu  tueutgfteu  gdffen17 
gum  Slubau18  uub  Juirb  baburc^  ber  (Sr^eugmtg19  biefer 
Sufefteu20  gimftig.  ®ie  eugtifc^e  ^Regieruug21  I)at  oerfuc^t, 
ber  ^tage22  (Siu^att  gu  t!)uu23  uub  Ijat  gtemlic^  bebeu= 
tenbe24  $5etofmuugett25  au§gefetjt26,  bie  ua<^  uub  trad)2? 
berbreifac^t28  toorbeu  finb.  @o  uugtauMtcf)29  e§  fdjeineu 
mag,  fiub  town  Suit  1881  Bi§  5lufaug30  gctaar  1882 
uugefd^r  1300000  ^ilo  §eitfd)rec!eueier  an  bte  S3cl)5r= 
beu31  abgeliefert32  uub  jerftort  toorben.  S)ie  ©tatiftiler33 
Jouuten  o^ue  3tt)eifel34  bie  faBelljafte3^  Slnga^se  bon 
@iern  au§re^uen37,  toeld)e  biefe§  ©eiDtdjt38  barftcdt39,  abet 
bie  @iubilbuug§!raft4o  §at  SJiii^e^i,  fic^  biefelbe  porjufteaen42. 
Subeffen43  §at  biefe  uuge^eure44  S^rftoruug  ba§  SSer= 
fc^tDtuben45  ber  §eufd)reclen  uic|t  ^erBeigefii^rt46.  S)a§ 
eiugige  SJlittel47  mug  in  ber  ©r^altung48  uub  5lu§be^nuug39 
ber  SSalbuugen  gefitdjt  toerbeu,  tt)ie  auc§  in  ber  SSer= 
me^ruug50  ber  35etiolferung51  uub  be§  2luBaue§18.  SSicbei 
etuer  ber  galjlreidjen52  SSemeife53  gegen  bie  ufcertriebene54 
5(u§rottuug55  ber 


1  the  locust,  die  Hcuschrecke,  2  Cyprus,  3  report,  4  commis- 
sioner, 5  pest,  6  island,  7  to  increase,  vermehren,  8  assumed  a 
terrible  magnitude,  9  at  home,  10  increase,  11  in  a  great  measure, 
12  destruction.  13  forests,  14  to  ascribe,  zuschreiben  irr.  (Dat.), 
15  soil,  16  is  fit,  17  cases,  18  cultivation,  19  generation,  20  in- 
sects, 21  government,  22  plague,  23  to  arrest,  24  considerable, 
25  rewards,  26  offered,  27  by  degrees,  28  tripled,  29  incredible, 
30  commencement,  31  authorities,  32  delivered,  33  statisticians, 
34  no  doubt,  35  fabulous,  36  number,  37  to  calculate,  axisrechnen, 
33  weight,  39  represents,  40  imagination,  41  a  difficulty,  42  to 
conceive,  43  however,  44  enormous,  45  disappearance,  46  effected, 
47  remedy,  48  preservation,  49  extension,  50  increase,  51  popu- 
lation, 52  numerous,  53  proofs,  54  excessive,  55  extermination, 
56  woods. 


264 

Fifty-seventh  Lesson.  ©iefcenmtbfunfetgfte  Seftion. 

On  Saffetu 

fioffen  (to  let,  to  leave}  used  as  an  auxiliary  of  another  verb  follows 
•the  rules  of  an  auxiliary  verb  of  mood  (see  pages  130,  194  &  258). 

To  have,  to  get,  with  an  Accusative  object  (noun  or  pronoun) 
followed  by  a  Past  participle,  are  rendered  faffen,  and  the  past  par- 
ticiple becomes  an  infinitive  in  German ;  as, 

3dj  IteS  einen  Sdjretbtifdj  madjen.  I  had  (got)  a  writing  desk 
made.  28o  lafjen  Ste  3ff)r  S3ilb  malen?  Where  do  you  have  (get) 
your  picture  painted?  $<f)  Ijobe  an  tljn  fdjreiben  laffen.  I  have  had 
him  written  to. 

To  cause,  to  make,  to  suffer,  to  allow  or  permit,  with  an  Ac- 
cusative object  followed  by  an  Infinitive,  have  the  same  translation 
of  faff  en;  as, 

©r  He&  midj  eitten  anbern  SBrief  fdjretben.     He  made   me  write 

another  letter.    £er  $6ntg  lafct  feine  SJiimfter  rufen.    The  king  causes 

his  ministers  to  be  called.      2Jiein  ®opfroelj   Ijat   mid)   nidjt  fdjreiben 

laffen.    My  headache  has  not  suffered  me  to  write.      Q£r   Itefj  fid) 

uberDortljetlen.    He  allowed  himself  to  be  taken  in. 

Note.— Observe  that  the  passive  Infinitive   is   in   German  rendered  by 

the  active  Infinitive  after  laffen;  thus  "to  be  called"  is  rendered  rufen,  etc. 

REMARK. — In  the  same  manner  laffen  is  sometimes  the  translation 
of  to  order  (befebjen),  to  bid  (Ijeifjen),  to  tell  (fagen);  however,  these  verbs 
can  always  be  rendered  literally ;  as, 

®er  2lnfub,rer  lief?  bie  ©olbaten  auf  ba§  SSoIf  fdjiefeen  (or  Befaljl 
ben  ©olbaten  auf  ba§  SBoII  ju  fdjiesen).  The  commander  ordered  the 
soldiers  to  shoot  at  the  people. 

On  To  Like. 

To  like,  to  like  better,  to  like  best  are  corresponding  to  the  German 
gern(e),  lie&er,  am  liebften  (see  page  176),  and  these  translations  are  used 
when  the  object  spoken  about  is  used  in  a  general  sense. — However,  if 
the  object  (noun  or  pronoun)  is  pointed  out,  to  like  is  usually  rendered 
as  follows : 

If  referring  to  the  sense  of  taste  the  translation  is  fdjmecfen 
(Dat.);  thus: 

SBte  fdjmetft  31)nen  btefer  28ein?  How  do  you  like  this  wine? 
®r  fdjmedt  mir  fetir  gut.  I  like  it  very  much.  28eld)e§  S3rob  fdjmetft 
Sfjnen  Beffer,  bos  fdjroarje  ober  ba§  meiBe?  Which  bread  do  you  like 
best,  the  brown  or  the  white?  Stefc  Sigarren  fdjmerfen  mir  am 
beften.  I  like  these  cigars  best. 

If  referring  to  other  things  the  translation  is  gefatteit  (Dat. 
irr.);  thus: 

®efant  3Ijnen  btefe§  Sud)?  Do  you  like  this  book?  (£§  gefattt 
mir  nidjt  gut.  I  do  not  like  it  much.  ®efiel  el  ^^nen  in  ^art§ 
(also:  waren  Sie  gerne  in  ^8ari§)?  Did  you  like  Paris?  Qa,  aber  in 
SBten  gepel  ei  mir  Beffer  (also:  in  SSien  mar  id)  lie&er).  Yes.  but  I 
liked  Vienna  better.  (Sine  foldje  Cper  geftiUt  mir  nidjt.  I  do  not  like 
such  an  opera. 

jfote. — In  all  the  cases  mentioned  the  verb  IteBen  (to  love),   and  mogen 
are  sometimes  used  for  translating  "to  like;"  thus: 

Steben  ©te  SJiuftf?    Do  you  like  music? 


to  arrest,  to  apprehend, 

toerfjaften  [(=SSein) 

the  claret,  bet  SBorbeaur. 

„       conversation,      bie 

ttrtterfjaltung 
,,   doctor,  ber  Softor 
<Decl.  see  page  16  No.  1) 
-to  drop,  to  let  fall,  fallen 

lafien  irr. 

to  furnish  (a  house,  etc.), 
mo&liren 


265 

the    hock     (wine),     bet 


„    impudence,    bie   tttt= 

tierfcfyciintfjett 
to   leave  (to  bequeath), 

Ijinterlaffen  irr. 
to  leave  (to  commit  to), 

itberlrtfien  irr. 
the  number  (of  a  book), 

bie  Sieferung 


the  passenger, 

gtcr 

to  persuade,  ii&embcn 
to  run  in  (a  port,   etc.), 

*cmtaufen  irr. 
sea-sick,  feefrunl 
to     send  -  back,     snrfirf • 

jdjicfen  firr. 

to  send  for,  fjtiten  Iaf[en 
the  suffering,  bal  fleiben 
to  suppose,  uermut&en 


Exercise  No.  57. 


1.  Let  it  not  fall.     He  has  the  book  printed  in  Germany.     I  had 
(Dat.)  him   telegraphed  to   yesterday.      He   will   get  all  his  house 
furnished.     I  have  had  a  new  coat  made  [for]  me  (Dat.)    That  makes 
me  think  of  (an  Ace.)  your  brother.     Your  confidence  makes  one  to 
hope  for  (auf  Ace.)  better  times.     I  shall  cause  the  children  to  be 
taken  (Iringen)  home.     I  do  not  allow  myself  to  be  sent  back.     The 
bad  weather  will  not  suffer  the  ships  to  run  in.     How  do  you  like  our 
tea  ?    I  do  not  like  it  so  much  as  your  coffee.     I  suppose  you  like 
coffee  better  than  tea.     Do  you  like  these  pears  ?     I  like  this  fish  very 
much.      How  do  you  like  our  theatre  ?      Do  you  like  Mr  N.  ?      I  do 
not  like  him  so  much  as  his  brother.     I  like  your  streets  much  better 
.than  ours.     Did  you  like  the  conversation  of  that  gentleman  ?    I  never 
like  to  converse  with  him.     I  do  not  like  this  weather. 

2.  ®er  (Sturm  Itefj  atfe  ^affagiere  feefran!  toerben.      TO  er 
mid)   tJerltefj,  roar  er  nod)  gang  gefunb  fan  good  health).      liefer 
IRfietmoetn  jdjmecft  mtr  beffer  al3  jener  SBorbeaur..    Qdj  fiatte  ben 
S)o!tor  fcolen  toff  en.     (Seine  SSetfe  p  fpredjen  (of  speaking)  ge* 
faHt   mtr  ntcfit.      28o  fiaben  @te  ftcrj  ba§  £aar  fdjneiben  laffen? 
©efSttt  e§  ^finen  in  Seiitfc^Ianb  beffer  al§  in    ©nglanb?     Seine 
Seiben   Hefeen  mtc^   fetn  friifiereg   fcf)Ied)te5   S3etrogen  Dergeffen. 

feiner 


You  would  not  like  (a)  such  impudence.  Who  has  dropped  this 
pocket-handkerchief  ?  How  many  rooms  can  you  let  (see  p.  138)  ?  Let 
us  (see  p.  132)  take  a  walk.  How  do  you  like  London  ?  He  did  not 
suffer  himself  to  be  persuaded.  How  much  did  his  father  leave  him  ? 
I  shall  send  for  the  next  number  of  the  magazine.  If  you  drop  any- 
xthing  you  must  pick  it  up.  I  got  the  thief  arrested.  How  do  you 
like  the  German  language  ?  Would  you  not  like  some  more  cherries  ? 
Leave  it  to  (Dat.)  me.  Why  did  he  no  longer  like  his  room  ?  I  do 
not  like  English  cigars.  Where  did  you  have  your  boots  made?  What 
-sort  of  beer  do  you  like  best?  An  uncle  of  hers  left  her  a  considerable 
fortune.  All  liked  the  dinner  (see  page  228)  very  much.  I  should 
like  such  a  country-house  as  well.  The  guide  did  not  allow  me  to  go 
-alone. 


German  Grammar 


9« 


266 


Conversational  and 

I  thought  of  you. 
I  think  he  will  come. 
Do  not  think  badly  of  me. 

What  do  you  think  about  it  ? 
I  do  not  know  what  to  think — 

to  make — of  it. 
What  do  you  think  of  him  ? 
What  do  you  think  that  this 

gentleman  is  ? 
I  think  he  is  a  doctor  —  I  take 

him  to  be  a  doctor. 
I  thought  you  were  ill 
I  (mis)took  him  for  a  waiter. 
He  thinks  himself  a  great  actor. 

Think  it  over. 

I  have  thought  better  of  it. 

Upon  second  thoughts. 

Thoughts  are  free. 

Put  the  book  on  the  table. 

Put  the  inkstand  here. 

Put  the  knife  in  your  pocket. 

Put  the  ring  on  your  finger. 

Do  not  put  the  dog  on  the 

chair. 

Put  on  your  hat. 
Put  on  your  spectacles. 
Put  on  your  coat. 
Put  on  this  neckerchief. 
Take  off  your  things. 
Take  off  your  hat. 
Take  off  your  spectacles. 
Take  off  your  coat 
Take  off  your  ring. 
Take  off  your  neckerchief. 

Have  you  your  overcoat  on  ? 

He  has  no  coat  on. 
He  has  no  hat  on. 


Idiomatic  Phrases. 
3d)  badjte  an  ©te. 

fcf)  glaube,  er  ttrirb  !ommen. 
enfen    ©ie  ntd)t  fdjledjt  Don 
mir. 

SSas  fatten  ©te  bafcon? 
3d)  toetB  ntd)t,  tt>a§  id)   bafcon 

fallen  foil. 

2Sa3  Ijalten  ©ie  toon  ifjrn? 
fyiir    n?a3    fatten    ©ie    btefen 


fjalte  ifjn  fiir  emeu  S)o!tor. 

3d)  Ijtelt  ©te  fiir  fran!. 

3d)  fjielt  tfjn  fiir  einen  £eHner. 

®r  ^alt  fic|   fiir   etnen   gro^en 

(5d)aufpteler. 

Ueberlegen  Sie  e§  ftd^  (Dot.). 
3d)   Ijabe  mic^   eine^   ^efferen 

befonnen. 

SBet  rciferer  Ueberlegung. 
©ebanfen  ftnb  goCfret. 
Se.qcn   ©te   ba^   ^u<^   auf  ben 


©teflen     @ie    ba§     Xintenfa^ 

^ier^er. 
Stolen  @ie  ba§  SKeffer  in   bie 

Sajdje. 
6tecfen   ©te   ben  fRing  an  ben 

ginger. 
©e^en  ©ie  ben  £nnb  nic^t  auf 

ben  ©tu^l. 

©efcen  ©te  3^ren  (ben)  ^ut  auf. 
©e£en  ©te  3f)re  (bie)  Grille  auf. 
©te  3^ren  (ben)  Diocf  an. 
©te  btefeS  ^al^tuc^  an. 
Segen  ©te  ab. 

©te  S^ren  (ben)  £ut  ab. 
re  (bie)  Grille  ab. 
teven  ©te  3^ren  (ben)  9?ocf  au^. 
(ben)  9?tng  au^. 
©te 


©te 

rocf  an? 
^at  fetnen  9Jocf  an. 
^at  f  etnen  '£ut  auf 


(ben)    Ikber- 


267 

(Erercise  Mo.  57. 


Jmrdj  eleftrtfdjeS 

ein  $)ampfer3  fiir§Iidj4  Bet  @t.  Sout§  JJtodjtS  ben 
$(ug  In'nauffuljr,5  ttwrben  ber  ®apitan,6  bie  Spaffagiere  imb 
bie  (Srfjiffgmannfcfjaft7  burdj  etn  eigentf)umlidje§,8  rau= 
fd)enbe§9  ®etofeio  erfrfirecft,  ba§  in  ber  Suftu  ganj  in  ber 
nadjften  -ftafiei2  be§  $)ampfer§  fjorbar13  tear.  Reiner 
ttmgte  ba3  ®erduf<f)10  jn  erllaren14,  ber  Sine  beittete15  e§ 
fo,  ber  5lnbere  mieber  anber^16,  ben  SRetften  erfdjten  e§ 
aber  itner!larltc§1'r.  ^)er  ®apttcn  Begab  fi^is  gn  ber 
eleftrtfd^en  SJlafd^tne19  unb  berme^rte  ba§  Stdjjt  um  etne 
Stcf)tftarfe*2i  ^n  800  ^erjen.  3n  bemfelben  2lugeitbltde22 
mar  ber  bt^er23  im  S^ebel  Itegenbe  ^tit§  JjeP4  erteu^tet25, 
unb  man  fa§  nnn,  bag  ba§  ©erdnft^  Don  etnem  unge= 
^euren26  ©djttmrm2?  toilber28  (Snten  ^errii^rle29,  bte  nad) 
@iiben30  jogen3^  ®er  btenbenbe32  (Scfjetn33  f^retfte3^  bie 
X^iere,  unb  in  grogen  SJlaffen35  ftogen  fie  in  baS-Sic^i 
^inetn,  fo  bag  in  jtDan^ig  TOnuten  ba§  S3oot  budjftablid)36 
mit  @nten  beberft3^  tear.  (Sinige  flogen  gerabe38  gegen  ba§ 
<$Ia§,  in  tt)elc§em  ba§  Sic^t  brannte,  unb  fielen  betaubt39 
auf§  SDec!,  anbere  flogen  ben  ^affagteren  an  ben  ®o£f  unb 
tuurben  niebergefdjlagen40  j  im  ©angen41  tDurben  meljrere 
©unbert  (Snten  erlegt42.  9Kan  fanb  36  [@til(f|  bet  ber 
Sanbung43  in  <St.  Soui§  in  ber  ®ajiitte44  berftecft45,  an= 
bere  im  ®effeI46=unb  2)lafc^inenraum4^»  S)ie  metften  (Snten 
tuaren  im  SBaffer  at§  ba§  SBoot  in  ben  @c^tt)arm  ^jn= 
einlief48,  unb  burc^  ba§  etettrtfrf)e  Std^t  irregefitfirt49,  flogen 
fie  gerabe  in  biefe§  ^inein. 

1  catching  of  wild  ducks,  2  electric,  3  steamer,  4  the  other 
day,  5  ascended,  6  captain,  7  crew,  8  peculiar,  9  rushing, 
10  noise,  11  air,  12  proximity,  13  audible,  14  to  account  for, 
15  explained,  16  otherwise,  17  inexplicable,  18  went,  19  machine, 
20  to  increase,  vermehren,  21  power,  22  moment,  23  hitherto, 
24  brilliantly,  25  lighted  up,  26  immense,  27  flock,  28  wild, 
29  proceeded,  30  South,  31  were  moving,  32  dazzling,  33  bright- 
ness, 34  frightened,  35  masses,  36  literally,  37  to  cover,  bedecken, 
38  directly,  89  stuimed,  40  to  strike  down,  niedersc^agw  irr., 
41  altogether,  42  killed,  43  arrival,  44  cabin,  45  hidden, 
46  boiler.  47  engine-room,  48  ran,  49  deceived. 


268 

Fifty-eighth  Lesson.  5lrf)tunbfiinf§tgfte  Seftion. 

On  the  Tenses  and  Moods  of  Verbs. 

The  Present  tense  is  often  used  instead  of  the  Future  (I)  when 
the  verb  is  accompanied  by  an  adverb  or  adverbial  expression  of 
"time  and  the  future  is  not  too  far  off;  as, 

3dj  reife  morgen  nad)  2.  I  shall  go  to  L.  to-morrow.  (Jr  lommt 
ttrieber  in  bret  SSodjen.  He  will  come  again  in  three  weeks. 

The  Present  tense  is  further  used  for  the  English  Perfect  tense 
when  the  latter  occurs  with  an  adverb  or  adverbial  expression  of 
time  and  is  describing  an  action  which  has  been  going  on  for 
some  time  and  is  still  going  on ;  as, 

SSie  longe  ftnb  @ie  fdjon  in  2onbon  ?    How  long  have  you  been  in 
London?     3d)  Bin  fdjon  2  3<*ijre  (or  fdjon  feit  23a|ren)  Ijier.    I  have 
been  here  for  (these)  two  years.    $ennen  @ie  biefen  §er»n  fdjon  lange? 
Have  you  known  this  gentleman  for  a  long  time?      9Jein,  id)  fenne 
iljn  nodj  nidjt  lange.    Sftein,  idj  fenne  iljn  erft  $nm  Sttonate.   No,  I  have 
not  known  him  long.    No,  I  have  known  him  for  two  months  only. 
Note.— The  verb  is  usually  accompanied  by  fdjon,  or  if  the  time  is  definite, 
also  by  ieit.  — If  there  is  a  negation  and  no  question,  nod)  is  used  with  in- 
definite time. 

In  the  Perfect  or  Pluperfect  tense  of  a  dependent  clause  the 
auxiliary  verb  tyabett  or  fein  is  often  omitted,  especially  for  the 
sake  of  euphony,  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  the  same  word,  and 
also  LQ  poetry  ;  as, 

3d)  toujjte,  ba§  er  ba§  ®elb,  toeldjeS  er  eroalten  (Ijatte),  terfoielt 
Ijatte.  I  knew  that  he  had  lost  the  money,  which  he  had  received, 
in  play.  Sefct  ba  &  i^nt  gelungen  (ift),  4ft  er  feljr  gliicfltdj  barufcer. 
Now,  as  he  has  succeeded,  he  is  very  happy  about  it. 

The  Subjunctive  Mood  is  used  in  the  oblique  narration;  as, 

1.  ®r  fagte,  bafj  er  Irani  fei  (or  toare).    He  said  that  he  was  ill. 
— 2.  3dj  fragte  iljn,   06  er  bort  geroefen  fei  (or  tpare).    I  asked  him 
whether  he  had  been  there.  —  3.   @r  fdjrieo  mir,   ba§  er  au§geljen 
nierbe  (or  ttwrbeX    He  wrote  that  he  would  go  out. 
Notes.— 1.   The  oblique  narration  occurs  if  the  speaker  relates  what  "he  or 
mother  person  said,  thought,  wrote,  etc.,  and  he  does  not  use  the  exact  words  of 
what  was  said,  etc.  —Thus  the  original  words  of  the  person  spoken  of  were  in 
sentence — 1.  /  am  ill,  in — 2.  Have  you  been  there?  and  in — 3.  I  shatt  go  out. 

2.  Instead  of  the  Imperfect  usually  the  Present  f Subjunctive J,  instead  of  the 
Pluperfect  usually  the  Perfect  (Subjunctive),  and  instead  of  the  Conditional  usually 
the  Future  (Subjunctive)  is  used  in  German. 

3.  £CB  may  also  be  omitted  if  the  first  sentence  does  not  contain  a  ne- 
gation ;  thus :  (£r  f ogte,  er  fei  Irani. 

The  verb  is  also  in  the  subjunctive  after  the  conjunctions  bamit 
(in  order  that),  bomtt  ...  nidjt  (lest),  al§  06  (al§  tcenn  or  uric  wenn)  (as 
if),  and  after  toenn  (if),  if  with  the  latter  the  verb  is  in  the  Im- 
perfect or  Pluperfect;  as, 

©djrei&en  @te,  bamit  er  lomme.  Write,  in  order  that  he  may 
come.  SBenn  ©ie  ju  $oufe  getcefen  roaren.  If  you  had  been  at  home. 

Verbs  signifying  a  vrish,  request,  hope,  fear,  command,  etc.,  are 
followed  by  ba§  with  the  verb  in  the  subjunctive,  if  doubt  or  uncer- 
'tainty  is  implied  ;  as, 

3d)  teiinfdje,  ba&  er  mid)  Befudje.  I  wish  him  to  visit  me.  34 
furdjte,  bafe  er  fterbe.  I  fear  lest  he  should  die. 


to  assure,  to  insure,  bcr» 

fid)  era 
the  brothers  and  sisters 

bie  ©efrfjnrifter 
„    cask,  barrel,  bo§  2fcfJ 
,,    case,  ber  gatt 
to    execute    (an    order), 

ftttSfiiljren 
the   foreigner,    bet   9lu8» 

ISnber  froeife 

fortunately, 


269 

to  go  out  of  town,  *bcr« 

reifen 

the  guest,  ber  ©aft 
to  inquire  of,  ftclj  erluit' 

btgen  Bet 

in  time,  redjtjetttg 
to  lecture,  bie  SBorlefung 
the    manager,    ber    ®e* 

fcpftSfiifjrer 
to  meet  with  an  accident, 

*tjerunglucfen 


the  order  (for  goods),  ber- 

Sluftrog 
„    porter   (carrier),    bet:. 

©epacftrager 
„    service,  ber  Stenft 
„    skiU,  bie  (BefdjidltdK 

leit 

,,    south,  ber  ©iiben 
to  storm  (to  attack),  et»-~ 

fturmen 


Exercise  No.  58. 

1.  We  shall  go   out  of  town  to-morrow.      They  will  be  here- 
presently.     I  shall  write  to  (an  Ace.)  you  in  a  fortnight.     Have  yoit 
been  long  in  England  ?    No  ;  I  have  been  here  for  half-a-year  only» 
Your  brothers  and  sisters  have  been  waiting  for  (auf  Ace.)  you  for 
two  hours.     His  wife  has  been  dead  for  a  longtime.     The  song  she 
has  sung  has  pleased  us  very  [much].      The  guests  who  had  arrived 
first  were  foreigners.     A  porter  told  me  that  our  train  had  already 
started.     I  asked  him  whether  he  could  go  with  me  to  the  lecture^. 
The  doctor  promised  that  hs  would  call  (come)  once  more  this  evening. 
Our  friend  informed  us  that  he  had  not  been  able  to  depart  because  he 
had  been  ill  several  days.     The  manager  inquired  of  me  what  kind  of 
man  he  was.     Do  it  in  order  that  he  [may]  pardon  (Dat.)  you.     You 
speak  as  if  you  could  not  rely  on  his  skill.     Do  you  not  wish  her  to- 
come  as  soon  as  possible  ? 

2.  3$  tetegropfiirte  if)tn,  bafj  id)  tfjm  fetn  $aJ3   SBetn    tnefnr 
fdjicfen  toerbe,  efje  er  md)t  fiir  ba3  Ie£te   begafilt   fiabe.    $dj   er* 
ttmrte  <Ste  in  einer  SBiertetftwtbe  auf  bent  SSafynfiof.    $er  ©enerat 
befiefilt,  ba&  bie  fMtung  bei  (at)   Sftacfit   erfturmt   roerbe.      SBte 
lange  ijaben  @ie  fc^on  btefen  |>unb?      3dj   fiobe  i^n   fc^on   eiit 
Sabr.    (Sie  gloubte,  i^r  SKann  fet  oerunglucft,  aber  glii(f(ic|ertt)eife 
tear  bie3  ni^t  ber  %aU.     @r  beeilte  fid),  bamit  er  nid^t  git  foot 
anfomme  (should  arr.).     Dbgteid)  ic^  gut  gegefjen,  fiatte  idj  nbdj 
Hunger  (was  hungry). 

I  could  have  executed  the  order  if  you  had  sent  it  sooner.     Did:: 
he  not  write  .that  he  was  still  in  the  South  of  Germany  ?    You  will 
not  arrive  in  time.     I  hardly  can  hope  that  my  health  will  improve.- 
(sick  bessern)  much.     Have  you  not  been  living  in  this  house  for  five- 
years  ?     I  have  been  living  there  since  I  have  been  in  London.     He 
assured  (Dat.)  me  he  would  never  forget  the  great  service  I  had 
rendered  (leisten)  him  (Dat.).     Do  you  fear  that  he  will  not  pay  the-, 
bill  of  exchange  ?      I  shall  be  with  you  presently.     We  heard  that  the  s 
doctor  would  not  be  in  town  (hier)  to-day.      How  long  has  this  house  - 
been  let?      I  told  her  that  I  had  sent  for  you.      He  thought  you  had,.  ' 
gone  out  of  town.     You  have  been  wearing  your  hat  much  longer  than*. 
I  [have]  mine. 


270 


Conversational  and 
Put  it  aside. 
Put  it  into  German. 
Shall  I  put  my  name  to  it  t 
He  put  a  question  to  me. 
I  cannot  put  it  off  any  longer. 

Did  I  put  you  to  any  incon- 
venience ? 
I  shall  put  things  right  for  you. 

Take  this  letter  to  Mr.  ...—to 
the  post-office. 

Take  this  letter  to  the  letter- 
box. 

"Will  you  take  a  walk— a  ride — 
a  drive? 


Where  does  it  take  place  ? 
He  took  it  away  from  me. 
I  take  you  at  your  word. 

It  took  no  effect  on  me. 

He  was  taken  ill 

You  were  taken  in. 

Take  pains. 

I  shall  take  pains. 

Do  you  take  snuff  ? 

Go  and  bring  me  my  umbrella. 

Who  dropped  this  glove  1 
What  do  you  wish  for  ? 
I  am  in  need — want  of... 
You  need  not  do  it. 

A  knife  is  wanting. 

What  is  the  news  ? 

There  is  no  news. 

Xo  matter  for  that. 

\Vhat  is  the  matter  ? 

What  is  the  matter  with  you  ? 

— what  ails  you  ? 
Nothing  is  the  matter  with  me. 
What  is  the  matter  with  your 

eye  ? — what  ails  your  eye  ? 


Idiomatic  Phrases. 

Segen—  fteflen  Sie  e£  Bet  ©cite. 
Ueberfefcen  Sie  e3  in£  3>eutfd)e. 
Sofl  id}  e3  unterfdjreiben  I 
(£r  fiettte  mir  erne  grage. 
3$   fann   e£  ntdjt  me§r    twf- 

fdn'eben. 
2fta<ijte  id)  ^Ijnen  Umftanbe? 

3d?   toerbe   bte   Sadje  fiir  Sie 

in  Drbnung  brhtgen. 
Xragen    Sie    btefen    23rief    511 

4?errn  ...  —  cmf  bte  $oft. 
SSerfen  Sie  btefen  83rief  in  ben 

SBrteffaften. 
SSoIIen    Sie  foagteren  gefjen— 

reiten,—  fasten  or  toollen  Sie 

etnen    Spajtergang  —  etnen 

S^agterrttt  —  eine  Spagterfa^rt 

—  madden  ? 
SSo  finbet  e§  ftatt? 
®r  na^m  e^  mir  toeg. 
Sc^'  ne^nte  —  Ijalte  —  Sie   betm 

SBort. 
(5£  moc^te  fetnen   StnbrudE   aiif 

mid). 

(£r  rtJitrbe  fron!. 
Sie  finb  angefiifjrt  toorben. 
@eben  Sie  fidj  ift&|e. 

tc^  merbe  mir  2ftiil}e  geben. 
d^nupfen  Sie? 

^>o[en  Sie  mir  metnen  9?egen* 
"  fdjirm. 

2Ber  Iie§  btefen  |)anbf(^u^  fallen  ? 
28a3  tuotten—  toiinfc^en—  Sie  ? 
Sdj  brattle  ... 
Sie  braud§en—  muffen-  e§  ntd^t 


fc^ft  em  9}?effer. 

l  gtebt 

giebt 

mac§t 

giebt 

fe^It 

fefjlt  mir 


Sie  am  2hige? 


271 

Hecbhtg  Ctord0e  Mo.  58. 


tBar&erettwtgen1  §ur 

tm  SJecem&er  1882* 


fammtlidjett4    aftronomifcfjen5 

toeldje  $nr  33eobad)tung  be§  23oriibergang§ 
"ber  23enn§  tor  ber  ©onnenfdjeibe?  an^gefanbt8  ttmrben,  finb 
je|t  ttofjlbefjalten9  an  iljjren  33eftimmnng§orten10  ober 
ttenigften§  in  ben  nadjft  getegenen*1  §afen12  angelangt13, 
itnb  jttmr14  bie  nac^  ^5unta  2lrena§  entfanbte15  nac^ 
funfnjo^entlic^er1^  9tetfe  am  17.  October,  bte  nacjj 
SSIanca  Beftimmte18  naci^  ettrm  tJterlDo^entlic^er  ^Reife  am 
22.  October,  nnb  bte  beiben  naci^  -ftorbamertfa  entfanbten 
nac^  Seeretfen19,  ttjetd^e  14,  bejiefmngStoeife  18  Xage  ge= 
t)auert20  §aben,  am  24.  October  unb  am  1.  9^ot)ember. 
Xte  bentfdfjen  aftroncpmtfc^en  ^pebtttunen  finb,  h?te  ftrir 
fd^on  fritter  erma^nten21,  itnter  beftmoglirfjer22  S3enn|nng23 
ber  bei  bent  SSenn^burd^gange24  biefe§  ga^r^nnbert^25  im 
3aljre  1874  gemadjten26  (Srfa^rnngen  anf§  SSoIIftanbtgfte2^ 
unb  @leic§artigfte28  au^geriiftet29  toorben.  S)a  uberbte^30 
bie  ton  i^nen  nnnme^r31  erreidjten  ©tattonen32,  foroett 
bie§  na^  ben  aftronomifc^en  SSebingungen33  ^u  ertangen34 
toar,  fo  getegen  finb,  bag  fie  atte  5lu§fic^t35  auf  gnnfttge§36 
^Better  barbteten3^,  fo  ift  gn  fjoffen,  bag  an^  bieSmat38, 
tote  im  Safjre  1874  ber  ©rfotg39  ben  bieSfeittgen40  @j^e* 
bitionen  ni(^t  feljlen  tutrb41,  unb  bag  bie  33eobad)timgen 
ton  1882  in  SSerftdr!ung42  ber  (Srgebniffe43  ton  1874 
einen  erfjebtirfjen44  SBeitrag45  §ur  Sofnng46  ber  toiffenfdjaft* 
(ic^en4^  gragen48,  urn  bie  e3  fid^  bei  biefen  ©jpebittonen 
Ijanbeit49,  tiefern50  tuerben. 

1  preparations,  2  the  observation,  die  Beobachtung,  3  transit  of 
Venus,  4  all,  5  astronomical,  6  expeditious,  7  sun's  disk,  8  to 
send  out,  smssendenirr.,  9  safely,  10  destinations,  11  situated,  12  ports, 
13  arrived,  14  namely,  15  sent,  16  about,  17  five  weeks',  18  de- 
stined, 19  sea  voyages,  20  to  last,  dauern,  21  to  mention,  erwdh- 
nen,  22  best  possible,  23  use,  24  transit  of  Venus,  25  century, 
26  acquired,  27  in  the  most  complete  manner,  28  all  alike,  29  to 
equip,  Siusriisten,  30  moreover,  31  now,  32  stations,  33  conditions, 
34  to  be  obtained,  35  prospect,  36  favourable,  37  offer,  38  this 
time,  39  success,  40  of  this  country,  41  be  wanting,  42  cor- 
roboration,  43  results,  44  considerable,  45  addition,  46  solution, 
47  scientific,  48  questions,  49  which  are  the  objects  of,  50  furnish. 


272 

Fifty-ninth  Lesson.  Steunimbfiinfatgfte  Sefttom 

The  Infinitive  and  the  Present  Participle. 

An  Infinitive,  generally  with  the  neuter  article  may  be  used 
as  a  substantive,  corresponding  then  to  the  English  Present  Par- 
ticiple; as, 

$o?  Xrtnfen  if!  nfitljtg,  a&er  511  toiel  SWnfen  ift  iingefunb.  Drinking 
is  necessary,  but  too  much  drinking  is  unwholesome.  @ic  ift  mube 
»om  STansen.  She  is  tired  with  dancing. 

The  Infinitive  without  ju,  after  the  auxiliary  verbs  of  mood 
(see  p.  130),  is  used  besides,  after  the  verbs  lafjen,  to  let,  etc.;  Ijeifceiv 
to  bid;  nennen,  to  call;  Ijelfen,  to  help;  leljren,  to  teach;  lernen,  to 
learn,  to  study;  madjen,  to  make;  fefjen,  to  see;  fjoren,  to  hear; 
fiifjlen,  to  feel;  ftnben,  to  find;  this  infinitive  corresponding  some- 
times to  the  English  present  participle;  as, 

Saffen  Sie  mid)  gefien.  Let  me  go.  SBcr  Ijilft  mtr  bie  Kifie  ofrnen? 
Who  helps  me  to  open  the  box?  $d)  fanb  iljn  fcfilafen.  I  found 
him  sleeping. 

Note.—  fiaffen,  fieijjen,  Ijetfen,  l)5ren  (sometimes  also  leljren  and  lernen), 
like  the  auxiliary  verbs  of  mood,  take  their  infinitive  form  as  a  past  participle  (see 
page  130),  and  if  in  a  dependent  clause  the  rule  on  compound  tenses  of  verbs  of 
mood  (see  page  194)  applies  to  them;  as, 

3d)  meine  ben  SSogel,  ben  id)  auf  ba3  35ad)  Ijabe  fttegen  feljen.  1 
mean  the  bird  which  I  have  seen  flying  on  the  roof. 

The  Infinitive  without  ju  occurs  also  with  the  verbs:  Itegen  —  ft&en 
or  fteljen  blciben,  to  remain  lying — sitting  or  standing;  fpajteren  gefjen — teitcn 
—  fotjren,  to  go  walking,  to  take  a  walk— a  ride — a  drive,  etc.;  fd)Iafen — 
betteln,  etc.  gcfjcn,  to  go  to  sleep,  to  go  begging ;  jdjlafen  legen,  to  lay  to  sleep. 

A  Present  participle  with  of,  dependent  on  a  preceding  noun 
must  be  rendered  by  the  infinitive  with  gu  ;  as, 

2)te  Oebulb  511  marten.  The  patience  of  waiting.  Sic  2l5ftd)t, 
@ie  511  beletbigen.  The  intention  of  offending  you. 

A  Present  Participle,  dependent  on  a  preceding  noun  of  which 
it  gives  a  description,  must  be  rendered  by  a  relative  clause,  which 
might  in  such  a  case  also  be  done  in  English  ;  as, 

G»  ift  eine  grau,  bie  triete  greater  Dak  It  is  a  woman  having  (i.e. 
who  has)  many  faults. 

A  Present  Participle,  dependent  on  a  preceding  verb,  is  ren- 
dered by  the  infinitive  with  ju  (the  above  verbs  requiring  the  in- 
finitive without  gu  excepted) ;  as, 

galjren  @ie  fort  ju  erjatyten.    Continue  relating. 
A  Present  Participle,  denoting  time,  cause,  reason  or  manner 
must  be  rendered  by  a  subordinate  clause  with  a  corresponding 
conjunction ;  as, 

9?acf)bem  id)  if)m  telegrapljtrt  fialte,  fdjrteb  id)  ifim.  (After)  having 
telegraphed  to  him,  I  wrote  to  him.  21I§  ber  geinb  in  bie  geftiing 
lam,  fanb  er  fte  toerlaffen.  The  enemy  on  arriving  at  the  fortress, 
found  it  deserted. 

A  Present  Participle,  following  without  or  instead  of,  may  be  ren- 
dered by  the  infinitive  with  ju  or  by  a  clause  with  bafj  (see  p.  210) ;  as, 
Gr  fdjicfte  feinen  So^n,  anftatt  felbft  511  fommen  (or  anftatt  i»a§  er 
fetbft  fam).    He  sent  his  son  instead  of  coming  himself. 


273 


fluent,  gelSuftg 
to     gamble,     to     play, 
fpielen 
the  honour,  bie  (Sfjre 
„    interpreter,  ber  3)ol> 
metfdjer 
„  judge,  bcr  SRtcfjter* 
„   leave,  ber  2I6jtf)ieb 
,    malady,    bie   ®ranf= 
*elt 
„     machine,    bie    9Ka» 
fdjtne 
only,  sole  (adj.),  ein^ig 
the  pear-tree,  ber  S3irn= 
Baum 

the    picture-gallery,     bie 

,,     pleasure,    ba§    SSer»- 
gniigen 
„    purse,  bie  936rfe 
to  rest,  ru^en 
to    run     away,     *tteg* 
laufen  irr. 
Russia,  Mlanb  n.   [irr. 
to  scream,  to  cry,  fcfyreierr 
the  secret,  bal  ©efieimnitj 
to  sentence,  DerurtfjeUen 
the  shoulder,  bie  Sdjuftet 
,,   steamer,  ber  35ampfer 
unruly,  ungejogen 

the  apple-tree, 

Bautn 

to  blush,  *err6ffjen 
celebrated,   famous,    fie* 

ruljmt 
the    clerk,    bcr   (£onttm3 

(bcr  ©djreiBer) 
to  contain,  entljalten  irr. 
the  count,  ber  ®raf 

(Decl.  see  page  15  c.) 
the      countryman,      ber 

2anb§monn 
Plur.:  bie  fianbSIeute 
to  cut  down,  umfiauen  irr. 
the  duchess,  bie  ^erjogin 

.Exercise  No.  59. 

1.  Quick  walking  always  makes  me  tired.  We  could  hear  the 
screaming  of  the  poor  child.  I  caused  him  to  write  to  (an  Ace.)  you. 
I  bade  the  gardener  to  cut  down  the  old  pear-tree.  You  make  me 
blush.  I  know  that  some  one  has  helped  (Dat.)  you  to  do  (machen) 
your  task.  I  felt  his  hand  resting  on  my  shoulder.  Remain  standing 
in  this  position  (Stellung  f.).  My  pleasure  of  meeting  a  countryman 
on  the  steamer  was  very  great.  His  manner  of  speaking  is  very  in- 
teresting. Here  is  an  interpreter  speaking  English6  fluently".  It 
has  left  off  (ceased)  raining.  (After)  having  been  to  Germany,  he 
went  to  Russia.  (When)  coming  home,  I  found  the  door  locked. 
Having  (since  he  had)  no  more  money  with  him,  he  left  off  (ceased) 
gambling.  Knowing  his  secret,  T  avoided  speaking  to  (with)  him. 

He  shook  his  head,  saying  (indem  er) While  waiting  (while  the 

boys  waited)  for  (aufAcc.)  the  train,  the  boys  (they)  were  very  unruly.. 

2.  SKoflen  @ie  nid)t  ntit  mir  ftmgteren  gefien?  -ftetn,  id)  ^iefie 
bor  jpagteren  gu  retten.  §et§en  (3te  ba§  orbetten?  -iftachbem  id) 
Don  alien  meinen  ^reunben  ^bfdjteb  genommen  fiatte,  retfte  id)  ab. 
|>termit  (hereivith)  babe  id)  bie  (£l)re,  @tc  511  benadjridjttgen  ... 
(lr  lefjrte  mid)  §od)beutd)  (High  German)  fprecfren.  (£r  ift  bei 
eingige  Kommt^,  ber  eine  fd)one  (round)  |>anb  )d)retbt.  (£r  setgtc 
mtr  eine  Heine  9ftafd)tne  §um  (for)  ^a^terfd)netben.  3<i)  ertnnere 
mid)  nid)t,  raetd)e^  Sieb  id)  fie  feabe  ftngen  f)6ren. 

The  last  prisoner  (after)  having  been  examined  (verhoren),  th< 
judge  sentenced  all  the  three  prisoners  to  (zu)  a  year  imprisonment 
(Gefdngniss).  He  is  learning  to  play  the  piano.  The  duchess  took  ? 
drive  in  an  open  carriage.  The  count  gave  (Dat.)  the  sick  [man]  hit 
purse,  asking  (indem  er  ...)  him  about  (nach)  his  malady.  Your  sing- 
ing does  not  disturb  me  at  all.  He  has  a  picture-gallery  containing 
paintings  of  most  the  celebrated  painters.  The  guests  having  (sinct 
the  g.  have)  arrived  all,  the  dinner  will  be  served  (see  p.  228)  directly. 
I  tried  doing  it  myself.  The  gardener  found  the  boys  sitting  in  (auf; 
an  apple-tree.  Have  you  not  seen  him  running  away  ?  That  is  n? 
matter  for  (zum)  laughing. 


274 


Conversational  and  Idiomatic  Phrases. 
I  have  a  headache — a  toothache 
— a  cold    in    the    head  —  a 
cough— a  sore  throat— a  cold. 


I  have  a  bad  headache — a  bad 

cough,  etc. 
I  have  a  sore  finger — sore  eves, 

etc. 
He  has  sprained  his  ankle. 

I  am  in  good  health — in  bad 

health. 

I  am  sick  of  it. 
Did  you  hurt  yourself? 

Have  you  good  eyesight  ? 

I  am  short  -  sighted  —  long- 
sighted. 

I  am  right  -  handed  —  left- 
handed. 

You  have  lost  much  flesh  dur- 
ing your  illness. 

He  is  confined  to  his  room — 
bed. 

He  has  indifferent  health. 

I  am  hungry — thirsty — sleepy. 


Take  care  of  it. 
I  do  not  care. 

What  of  that  ? 

I  do  not  mind  it. 

I  have  a  great  mind  to  do  it. 

He  follows  his  own  mind. 

She  alters  her  mind  constantly. 

He  has  a  great  mind. 

Mind — take  care — you  do  not 

fall. 

It  is  a  pity ! — What  a  pity ! 
It  answers  its  purpose. 
I  did  it  on  purpose. 


(n.}  (or 

fdjinerjen  pl.}—%afy\\Qfy  (n.) 
(or  gaimfdjmersen  pi.)  — 
©djnupfen  (m.)—  $uften  (m.) 
—  £>al$tt>d)  (n.)  —  eine  Sr* 
fdltung. 

3d)  §abe  ftarfe*  8opfttelj—  ftar- 
fen  £uften,  etc. 

3#  !jabe  einen  bofen  finger  — 
bofc  Slugen,  etc. 

6r   $at    ftc$    (Dot.)    ben    gu& 
berrenft. 

3d?  bin  gefunb—  franf. 

S3  ift  mir  fcerleibet. 

£aben    ©ie    fid)    (Dot.)    foe!)e 


£ie  gitte  STugcn? 
bin  !ur5|id}tig—  fernfid^tig. 


Sie  ^oben  fiber  S^re 

[far!  obgenommen. 
©r  mu§  ba^  Dimmer  —  Sett  — 

pten. 
6r  ftat  eine  fc^tttadje  ®e[unb^ett. 


also:  idj  bin  ^ungrig  —  burfttg 

-frfilafrig. 

ernja^ren  @ie  e^  —  Ijeben  Sie 

e^  auf. 

j   frage  ntdjfcS   barnac^  —  e§ 

Itejjt  mir  nidjt^  baron. 

'egt  baron? 
3d)  ntad^e  mir  nid^t^ 
3d)  ^obe  grofse  Suft,  e£  gu 
(Jr  folgt  feinem  eigenen 
2ie  a'nbert  immer  i^ren  Sinn. 
(Sr  ^at  einen  grofjen  ©eift  —  eine 

grofse  Seele. 
@eben    @ie    STd^t,    batnit    6ie 

nid^t  fatten. 

®$  ift  Sd)abe!—  2Bie  ©c^abe! 
6§  entfpridit  feinem 


275 

ReaMttg  dmtm  Wo.  59. 


2tt6a  cuf  bem  Sdjloffe  gu  SRuboIftabt, 

Sine  bentfc^e  Same  cm§  einem  §aufe,  ba§  fdjoi* 
efjebem1  bnrclj  §elbenmut§2  geglanjt3  unb  bem  beutfdjen 
SReidje4  einen  ®aifer  gegeBen  fjat,  ftmr  e§,  bte  ben  furdjiter* 
lidjen5  §erjog  5IlBa  bnrdjj  ifjr  entfc^Ioffene^6  93etragen 
betna^e  jum  Bittern  gebra^t^  ^atte.  5T(§  ®atfer  ^art  V. 
im  Sa^re  1547  tmdj  ber  (Sc^ta^t  Bet  90^ii^l6erg  aiif  f etnem 
3uge8  nac§  gran!en9  nnb  @d§n)aben10  aud^  bnr< 
gen11  lam,  n?tr!te  bte  t)errt)ttttt)ete12  ©raftn13 
t)on  @d^tnar§Bnrg,  etne  geborne14  Siirftin15  uon  §enneberg, 
einen  <Sc^u|brtef16  Bet  i^m  au8,  bafs  i^re  llntert^anen1^ 
t)on  ber  bttrd^tefyenben18  fpanifd^en19  Slrmee20  ntd^t§  jn 
letben  §aBen  fottten.  Sagegen21  berBanb22  fie  ftdfj,  33rob, 
53ier  unb  anbere  SeBen^mittel23  gegen  Btffige24  93eja^tung25 
an§  ^nbotftabt  an  bie  ©aaiBrnde2^  fdjaffen2?  ju  taffen, 
nm  bte  fpanifdjen  Xrn|3pen28,  bie  bort  iiBerfe|en29  ttmrben, 
511  tierforgen30.  Soi^  geBraud^te31  fie  baBet  bte  SSorfic^t32, 
bie  SBritde33,  tuelc^e  bt^t34  Bei  ber  @tabt  tear,  in  ber 
(55ef(^tt)tnbigleit35  aBBrec^en36  nnb  in  einer  grogeren  Gntt= 
fernnng37  itBer  ba§  Staffer  fdfjlagen38  jn  laffen,  bamtt  bie 
a^ugrofee39  m^  ber  (Stabt  i^re  ranBlnfttgen^i  @afte42 
nic^t  in  SSerfnc^nng43  fitfjrte.  B^gteid^44  JtJiirbe  ben  (Sin- 
tuofjnern  atter  Ortfc^aften45,  burd^  toelt^e  ber  $UQ  ging, 
oergonnt46,  i^re  Beften  §aBfe!ig!eiten47  anf  ba§  ^Rnbol= 
fta'bter  @^lo§  p  pc^ten48. 

(gortfe^ung  fotgt.) 

1  formerly,  2  heroism,  3  to  shine,  gldnzen,  4  empire,  5  ter- 
rible, 6  resolute,  7  made  tremble,  8  march,  9  Franconia, 
10  Suabia,  11  Thuringia,  12  dowager,  13  countess,  14  born, 
15  princess,  16  letter  of  protection,  17  subjects,  18  passing, 
19  Spanish,  20  army,  21  on  the  other  hand,  22  bound,  23  pro- 
visions, 24  equitable,  25  payment,  26  Saal-bridge,  27  to  convey, 
28  troops,  29  pass  over,  30  to  provide,  31  used,  32  precaution, 
33  bridge,  34  close,  35  hurry,  36  to  take  down,  37  distance, 
38  to  erect,  39  too  great,  40  proximityr  41  predatory,  42  guests, 
43  temptation,  44  at  the  same  time,  --4  villages,  46  allowed, 
'47  possessions,  48  to  shelter. 


276 

Sixtieth  Lesson.  (Sedfotgfte  Seftton. 

The  Government  of  Verbs. 

Many  verbs  want  a  complement  for  the  completion  of  their 
idea. — This  complement,  if  a  noun  or  pronoun,  is  joined  to  the 
verb  either  in  the  Nominative,  Genitive,  Dative,  or  Accusative  case, 
or  by  means  of  a  preposition. 

Note.—  The  complement  in  the  Nominative  is  called  the  Predicate  —  the  com- 
plement in  the  Accusative  the  Direct  object — and  the  complement  in  the  Genitive, 
Dative,  or  with  a  preposition  the  Indirect  Object  of  the  verb. 

The  following  verbs  require  their  complement  in  the  Nom- 
inative if  it  denotes  the  same  person  or  thing  as  the  subject: 

iletben  irr.,  to  remain      I  fdjeinen  irr.,  to  seem         I  iperben  irr.,   to   become, 
Ijeifeen  irr.,  to  be  called   |  jetn  irr.,  to  be  I     to  get 

Examples.— Sleiben  Sie  mein  gteunb.    Remain  my  friend.    25ie3  ift  3br 
£ut,  unb  ba3  ift  meiner.    This  is  your  hat  and  that  is  mine. 

Some  verbs,  if  followed  by  two  objects,  require  the  indirect 
object  in  the  Genitive  and  the  direct  object  (always  the  person)  in 
the  Accusative. — The  most  usual  are : 

attflagen,  to  accuse  of      I  befdjulbigen,tochargewith  I  tjerftdjern,  to  assure  of 
berouben,  to  rob  of  |  uberfiibren,  to  convict  of)  entfe|en,  to  discharge  from 

Example.— Sr  fiat  tnidj  feineS  SBobttooHenS  aerfidjert.    He  has  assured  me 
of  bis  favour. 

Some  reflective  verbs,  besides  having  their  refletiive  pronoun 
in  the  Accusative,  require  their  indirect  object  in  the  Genitive. — 
The  most  usual  are : 


ftdj  bebienen,  to  make  use  of 

fid)  bemacfatigen,  to  take  possession  of 

ftd)  entlebigen,  to  rid  one's  self  of 


etinnem,  to  remember 
rubmen,  to  boast  of 
fdjamen,  to  be  ashamed  of 


Example.— (Sin  Seerauber  bemadjttgte  [id)  unfeteS  ©djtffeS.    A  pirate  took 
possession  of  our  ship. 

Some  verbs  require  their  object  in  the  Dative.  —  The  most 
usual  are : 

onttnortcn,  to  answer  a  person 
*flu§njeidjen  irr.,  to  give  way,  to  evade 
befeblen  irr.,  to  command,  to  order 
beiftitnmert,  to  agree  with 
briroobnen,  to  be  present  at 
*bletben  irr.,  to  remain  to 
banfen,  to  thank 
broben,  to  threaten 
*entgeb/en  irr.,  to  escape  from 
*folgen,  to  follow 
gefaUen  irr.,  to  please 


in-.,  to  displease 
geb,ordjen,  to  obey 
gcboren,  to  belong  to  (a  personX*) 
geniigen,  to  suffice  for 
b,elfen  irr.,  to  help,  to  aid 
ratljen  irr.,  to  advise 
(toer)trauen,  to  trust 
mifetrauen,  to  mistrust 
fdjmetdjeln,  to  flatter 
tro^en,  to  defy 
*roiberfteben  irr.,  to  resist 


Examples.— SSorum  Ijoben  ©ie  metnen  SBefeblen  ntdjt  geljordjt?    Why  have- 
you  not  obeyed  my  orders?    golgen  Sie  mtr.    Follow  me. 


(*)  "To  belong  to"  having  a  thing  as  an  object  is  rendered  geborcn  3117 
thus :— Dcr  ©artcn  geljort  sum  $au§.    The  garden  belong  to  the  house. 


277 

the  captain  (in  the  army,  |  the  friendship,  bie  £5reuttb= 
except   cavalry),  ber 
^auptmann 
Plur.:  bie  ^auptleute 
„   ceremony,   bie  3reier= 

lidjleit  I    „    minister    '  (of      the 


generous,  grofemiitljig 
the  high  -  treason,       bet 


covetousness,  bie  £>a&= 
fwfc 

example,  bo§  23eifpiel 
fraud,  ber  SJetrvtg 
Synon.  Plur.:  bie  23e= 


crown),  ber  9D?inifter 
palace,  ber  SjBalaft 
Plur:  bie  $alafte 
,    personage,  bie   $e 
fonlic^feit 


triigereten  I  to  protect,  fcefdjiiijen 


the  pursuer,  ber  SSerfoIger 
,,   remark,    bie   Werner* 

lung 

rude,  raw,  rolj 
the  secretary,    ber    @el« 

retar 
,,    spendthrift,     ber 

SSerfdjioenber 
„    superior    (in    rank), 
ber  SSorg  effete  (decl. 
like  an  adjective) 
„   vanity,  bie  ©itelfeit 


Exercise  No.  6O.  . 

1.  He  remains  a  spendthrift.     The  king  was  called  the  Generous. 
This  building  is  the  palace  of  the  Duchess  of  N.     Of  what  crime  do 
you  accuse  this  man  ?     I  assured  him  of  my  friendship .     The  enemy 
took  possession  of  the  fortress.     I  shall  answer  you  as  soon  as  possible. 
The  captain  commanded  the  soldiers  to  protect  us.     I  thank  you  very 
{much].     Do  you  know  what  displeased  him  in  (an)  me  ?     I  cannot 
resist  your  kindness.     To  whom  does  this  stick  belong?    You  have  ad- 
vised me  well.     All  the  ministers  will  be  present  at  the  ceremony. 
Have  you  followed  his  example  ?    A  soldier  must  obey  his  superiors. 
Why  do  you  not  agree  with  me  ?      Such  a  remark  will  flatter  his 
vanity.     I  ought  to  be  ashamed  of  you.     This  will  not  suffice  for  his 
•covetousness. 

2.  $dj  toerbe  3f)ttett  fcertrcmen,  fcorcwSgefetjt,  bafj   (Sie   nttr 
ntdjt  miJ3trcmen.    Sftan  ii&erfiifyrte  £$ren  93mber  be3  ^oc&berratfig. 
3dj  brol)te  iljtien,  bafc  id)  2lHe3  tterratljen  ttiirbe.      (£r  entlebigte 
fid)   tneiner.      S)er   ©eneral  ftmr  eine  pricing  ber  erfte  Sftinifter 
be3  ®onig3.    (£3  gefang  ifjm  fautn,  feinen  SSerfoIgern  511  entgefjen 
(in  escaping).      S)er  ^rdfibent  I)at  jeitien  @e!cetar   feine^    ${mte£ 
(office)   entfe^t.      S)er  ^itabe  ttrirb  ein  gejd)t(fter  Staler  iDerben. 
3d)  !ann  mid)  feine^  9^ameng  nic&t  ertnnern* 

He  defied  all  his  enemies.  By  this  act  (Handlungf. )  he5  became"  a 
famous  personage.  He  boasts  of  his  knowledge  (pi.).  His  manner  of 
writing  does  not  please  me.  I  shall  help  nota  only6  you",  but  also  your 
friends.  The  robber  has  robbed  me  of  my  purse.  His  manager  is  a 
very  rude  man.  I  shall  charge,  you  with  fraud.  '  This  stove  does  not 
belong  to  the  room.  You  should  not  make  use  of  such  expressions. 
Nothing  but  a  small  house  remained  to  him.  The  gentleman,  to  whom 
all  the  country- estate  belongs,  wrote  to  (an  Ace.)  me.  Can  you  not 
remember  any  longer  the  words  of  which  he  made  use?  Nearly  half  N. 
was  present  at  the  opening  (JEroffnung  f.)  of  the  new  railway.  He 
mistrusts  everybody.  We  hardly*  escaped6  from  (the)  death.  I  must 
agree  with  your  opinion.  This  is  the  first  day  on  which  I  am  allowed 
to  go  out.  She  has  evaded  my  questions  (Fragen).  Do  not  thank  me. 
You  are  accused  of  murder.  This  hand-writing  displeases  me.  I  ad- 
vised her  to  learn  to  play  the  piano.  He  has  been  our  doctor  for  six 
years. 


278 


Conversational  and 

Do  not  take  so  much  trouble. 

Did  I    cause— give — you    any 

trouble  ? 
Don't  trouble  your  head  about 

it. 

With  no  great  trouble — ado. 
With  much  trouble. 
It  is  labour  lost. 
Send  me  word. 

I  shall  keep  word. 

Make  a  note    of   it — take    it 

down. 

That  will  render  you  unhappy. 
He  rendered  me  a  great  service. 

Render  that  into  German. 
Learn  it  by  heart 
Look  out  the  word  in  the  dic- 
tionary. 

Go  on — continue  ! 
It  is  my  turn. 

How  are  you  getting  on  with 
your  German  ? 

Where  do  you  come  from? — 
where  are  you  a  native  of  ? 

I  am  a  German  by  birth. 

He  is  a  native  of  England. 

To  the  best  of  his  remem- 
brance. 

I  am  inclined  that  way. 

Are  you  serious — in  earnest  ? 

I  wonder  what  he  his  doing. 

I  find  no  fault  with  it 

That  is  not  my  fault 

I  cannot  help  it 
What  was  I  going  to  say  ? 
That  does  not  signify. 
God  forbid ! 
No  apologies ! 
No  offence ! 

I  don't  mean  to  give  you  of- 
fence. 


Idiomatic  Phrases. 

@eben  ©ie  fidj  (Dat.)  ntdjt   fc- 
biel 


9Kad)en   ©ie  ftdj   (Dat.)  feine 

©ebanfen  bariiber. 
mit  leister  SSftiilje. 
2ttit  meier  Sttiifje. 
(£§  ift  Derlorene  SftiUje. 
5Benaa)rtd)tigen  ©ie  mid)  —  Soften 

©ie  e3  mir  fagen. 
3d)  merbe  SBort  fjatten. 
©dfjreiben  ©ie  &  fic§  (Dat.)  auf  . 

S)a§  ttnrb  ©ie  ungliicfttdj  madjen. 
Gh;   leiftete   mir    einen    grojjett 

Sienft. 

Heberfe^ett  (Ste  ba§ 
Senten  @ie  e 
©c^Iagen  @ie  ba§  SBort 


SSeiter  ! 

@§  ift  an  mir  —  2>ie  SReilje  ift 
an  mir. 

fiir  ^ortfd^ritte  madden  ©te 
tm  S)eutfdjen? 
finb  @ie? 

Sc^  Mn  tpon  ©eburt  ein  S)eutf  djer. 
®r  ift  ein  geborner  ©nglanber. 
©o  Dtel  er  ftc^  ertnnert. 

Sc^  bin  ba^ii  geneigt. 

3ft  ba§  %$x  ©rnjt? 

%$  modjte  tt?iffen,  »a§  cr  t^irt. 

Sdj   ^abe  nid^t^   baran  au^gu* 

fefcen. 
3d^  fann  ntc^t0  bafur  —  &  ift 

ntdjt  meine  ©dmlb. 
3c^  fann  e§  nid^t  dnbern. 
ttJoUte  td^  [bod^]  fagen? 
^at  nid^t0  gu  fagen. 
©ott  bepte! 

(Sntfd^ulbigung  ! 
furimgut! 
tutH  ©ie  ntdjt  beletbigen. 


279 

SeaMiuj  (E-rcrcisc  fto.  60. 


aitf  bem  Srfjloffe  §tt  9lubolftabt, 

(ftortfefcuttg.) 

nafjerte2  fidj  ber  fpanifdje  (General 
t)om  |jer§og  §etnrtd)  t?on  23raunfcljtt)eig3  unb  beffert  6of)nen 
Beglettet,  ber  (Stabt  unb  Bat4  ftdj  burrf)  einen  SBoten,  ben 
er  tjoranf^icfte5  bet  ber  ©rafin  ton  ©djftar^Burg  auf  ein 
SftorgenBrob6  §n  ©afte. 

Sine  fo  befd^eibene7  SBitte,  an  ber  (Spt|e8  eine§ 
§eere§9  get^an,  lonnte  ntrf)t  too^K  aBgefc^Iagen10  lt)erben. 
SUlan  toiirbe  geben,  tr)a§  ba§  §au§  termoc^te,11  tear  bte 
Slnttoort;  feine  (SjceHen§  mod^te  fommen  unb  bortieb  nef)= 
men12.  3u9^eic§  unterlie^13  man  tttcfjt,  be§  @c^u^Brtefe§ 
noc^  einmal  §u  gebenfen14  unb  bent  fpantfc^en  ©eneral  bte 
gett)tffen^afte15  SSeoBac^tung16  be^felben  an§  §er§  p  legen1^ 
(Sin  freunbltdjer18  (Sm^fang19  unb  etne  gut  Befe|te29  Xafel21 
eritJarteten  ben  §er§og  auf  bent  ©djloffe.  @r  mug  ge= 
fte^en,  ba§  bte  t^iirtngif^en22  $)amen  ein  fe^r  gute 
unb  auf  bie  @^re  be§  aJaftre^t§25 
man  fidj  !aum  niebergefelt2^,  at§  ein 
bie  ©rafin  au§  bent  ©aale29  rufU  @3  n;irb  ifjr  gemelbet30, 
ba§  bie  f^antfc^en  ©olbaten  ©eniatt31  geBrauc!§t  unb  ben 
SBauern32  ba§  SSie§33  raeggetrieBen34  fatten. 
(gortfefcwtg  folgt.) 

1  in  the  mean  time,  2  to  approach,  sich  nahern(Dat.),  3  Bruns- 
wick, 4  invited  himself,  5  sent  forward,  6  luncheon,  7  modest, 
8  head,  9  army,  10  to  refuse,  sibschlagen  irr.,  11  contained,  12  be 
considerate,  13  omitted,  14  to  mention,  15  conscientious,  16  ob- 
servation, 17  to  urge  upon,  18  friendly,  19  reception,  20  spread, 
21  table,  22  Thuringian,  23  kitchen,  24  keep,  25  honour  of  the 
house,  26  uphold,  27  sat  down,  28  courier,  29  hall,  30  she  is 
informed,  31  force,  32  peasants,  33  cattle,  34  driven  away. 


280 


Sixty-first  Lesson. 


Gmunbfedjgigfte  Seftton. 


ttttbieten  irr.,  to  offer 
tringen  irr.,  to  bring 
empfeljlen  irr.,  to  recommend 
erlauben,  to  allow,  permit 
eradfjlen,  to  relate 


The  Government  of  Verbs  (concluded). 

All  verbs,  having  two  objects  or  which  can  have  two  objects, 
require  the  direct  object  (i.e.  the  object  suffering  the  action)  in  the 
Accusative,  and  the  indirect  object  (usually  a  person)  in  the  Dative. 
— Such  are : 

fogen,  to  tell 
fdjenfen,  to  present  with 
fcevbteten  irr.,  to  forbid,  to  prohibit 
toerivrcdjen  irr.,  to  promise 
beticificn  irr.,  to  pardon 

irr.,  to  give  toorlcicn  irr.,  to  read  to 

Dergeben  irr.,  to  forgive  tJorfteUen,  to  introduce 

glauben,  to  believe  tumoerfen  irr.,  to  reproach  with 

letfjen,  to  lend  jeigen,  to  show 

neljmen  irr.,  to  take  from  (a  person) 

Examples.— 3d)  bot  if-m  meine  Stenfte  an.     I   offered  him  my  services, 
©eben  Sie  bem  Snaben  etmge  2lepfel.    Give  the  boy  some  apples. 

Most  other  Verbs,  not  belonging  to  the  groups  mentioned, 
require  their  object  in  the  Accusative;  as, 

3rfi  fiabe  ctncn  ©artcn  qefauft.  I  have  bought  a  garden.  SScf. 
d)cn  JBlcifttft  w  oil  en  Sie  neb,men?  Which  pencil  \\\\\  you  take?  2Bcn 
foljen  Sie?  Whom  did  you  see?  3d)  meine  fccn(jcmgcn)  Srief,  loci- 
d)tn  id)  3^nen  geftern  fdjrieb.  I  mean  that  letter  which  I  wrote  to 
you  yesterday. 

Many  Verbs  take  their  object  by  means  of  a  preposition. — 
The  most  usual,  where  the  use  of  the  preposition  differs  from  the 
English  equivalent,  are  : 


*abreifen  nad),  to  set  out,  to  leave  for 
Abrefftren  an  (.Ace.),  to  direct  (a  let- 
ter, etc.)  to 
anttoorten  auf  (Acc.X*),  to  answer, 

to  reply  to 

fid)    beflagen    fiber   (Ace.),    to   com- 
plain of 

befteljen  au»  irr.,  to  consist  of 
bitten  um  (Ace.)  irr.,  to  ask  (to  beg) 

for  (something) 

benfen  an  (Ace.)  irr.,  to  think  of 
erinnetn  an  (Ace.),  to  remind  of 
fid)  erfunbtgen  nad),  to  inquire  (for) 
ernennen  jum  m..  (jut  f.)  irr.,  to  ap- 
point (a  person)  a 

erftaunen  fiber  (Ace.),   to  be  aston- 
ished at 
fragen    nad),   to   asfc  about,   for   (a 

person) 

fid)  freuen  fiber  (Ace.),  to  rejoice  at 
fid)  ffird)ten  Dor  (Dat.),  to  be  afraid  of 
glauben  an  (Ace.),  to  believe  in 


tjalten  ffit  irr.,  to  consider,  to  think  or 
to  take  (a  person  or  thing  to  be 
something) 

Ijoffen  auf  (Ace.),  to  hope  for 
faufen  um  (Ace.),  to  buy  for  (a  price) 
toerfaufen  um  (Ace.),  to  sell  for  (a  price) 
ladjen  fiber  (Ace.),  to  laugh  at 
madjen  §nm  m.  (§ur  f.),  to  make  (a 

person)  a 
fdjicfen  (fenben  irr.)  on  (Acc.X**),   to 

send  to  (a  person) 

fdjreiben  an  (Ace.)  irr.(**),  to  write  to 
fptelen  um  (Ace.),  to  play  for  (some- 
thing) 

fpotten  fiber  (Ace*),  to  mock  at 
fpredien  nut  irr.,  to  speak  to 
*fter6en  an  (Dat.)  irr.,  to  die  of 
telegrop^iren  an .  (Acc.X**),   to  tele- 
graph to 

trtnlen  au3  irr.,  to  drink  from 
tear  ten  auf  (Ace.),  to  wait  for 
*toerben  au§  irr.,  to  become  of 


Examples.— 3d)  Ijalte  biefen  $errn  ffir  einen  Dfftjier.  I  take  this  gentle- 
man to  be  an  officer.  Sluf  roen  tparten  @ie?  For  whom  are  you 
waiting?  Sr  luurbe  jum  QJeneral  ernannt.  He  was  appointed  a 
general,  ©rftaunen  ©te  nidjt  barfiber  Do  not  be  astonished  at  it. 

<*)  "To  answer"  (a  person)  is  antworten  with  the  dative,  and  "to  answer 

(a  letter,  etc.)"  is  antioorten  auf,  or  beantroorten. 

{**)  With  fdjicfen  (fenben),  fdjretben  and  telegrapfiiren  the  Dative  may  be 
used  instead  of  the  preposition  an. 


281 


<the  actress,    bie  Sdjau* 
fpielerin 
„    corner,  bie  ©cfe 
,}   document,  ba§  SDoflt= 
mcnt 
,,    ear-ring,  ber  DIjrring 
„    fairy-tale,  ba»  3Jld^r= 
d)en 
„    goblet,  ber  SBecfjer 
,,    general,  ber  ©eneral 
Plur.:  bie  ©enerale 
„     goods,    bie  SBaaren 
(Plur.)  (bie  ©iiter) 

God,  ©ott 
the  heathen,  ber  |>eibe 
„    money  -  lender,    ber 
©elbtoerleiljer 
,,    narrative,  bie  ©r^d^5 
lung 
„    negligence,  bie  $fta<f)= 
IdBigteit 
„    nurse   (of  children), 
bie  $lmme 
„    the  pair,  couple,  ba§ 

„    part,  ber  Stjeil 

1  to  pluck,  pflittfen 
the  reward,bie  SeTotjnung 
savage,  wild,  ttnlb 
the  security,  bie  <Sid^er= 
^eit 
„    sheep's     skin,      ba8 
©c^affea 
,,    spy,  ber  ©pion 
,,    terms,  conditions,  bie 
SBebingungen 
,,    truth,  bie  SSaljrljeit 
„    watch  -  maker,     ber 
ttfirmodjer 

Exercise  No.  61. 

1.  He  offered  me  a  large  reward.     Shall  I  bring  you  anything  ? 
What  kind  of  book  have  you  recommended  to  your  pupils  f or  f,sw?ftj read- 
ing? To  whom  did  you  give  the  documents?  You  do  not  tell  me  the  truth. 
Do  not6  promise  them"  too  much.    What  part  of  the  newspaper  shall  I 
read  to  you  ?     It  is  the  same  lady  to  whom  I  have  been  introduced. 
Pardon  him  his  faults.     He  reproached  me  with  my  negligence.     All 
his  family  has  set  out  for  Paris.     He  has  not  answered  my  last  letter. 
Do  you  think  sometimes  of  me.      She  inquired  the  terms.     Did  you 
ask  the  watchmaker  about  my  watch  ?     I  think  her  an  actress.     Do 
not  mock  at  old  people.      Heathens  do  not  believe  in  God.    He  was 
appointed  a  general.  All  rejoiced  at  my  arrival.  Do  not  complain  of  it. 

2.  (£r  laufte  ba3  $ferb  urn  1000  SDZar!  unb  tterfaufte  e3  urn 
1200  SSJlar!.      ©ie  fcme  ergaljtte  ben  ®tnbern   2fttifircfien.      3dj 
•fdjenfte  jebent  Don  ben  £inbern  etn  ^oar  Dfirringe.     ©ie  Kleibung 
(dress)  be3  SSttben  Bcftanb  au£  etnent  ©djaffett.    S)er  ©clbDerlei^ei 
ttJtrb  Sf)tcm  grcunb  folcf)  eine  grofee  ©umme  nur  gegcn  (on)  gute 
©tdjerfjeit  lei^en.      9Jtemanb  glaubte  bem   (Spion  bie  ©rgafjlung. 
(Sr  ftarb   an   ben  ^ocfen.      Srlauben   @ie  mir,   S§nen  meinen 
greunb  borguftetten. 

What  has  become  of  your  cousin  ?  Forgive  me.  It  was  nota  this 
gentleman6  to  whom  I  showed  my  drawings.  Is  this  parcel  directed  to 
you  ?  They  (people)  took  the  child  from  the  poor  mother.  Wait  for 
me  at  the  next  corner.  To  whom  shall  I  send  the  goods  ?  May  I  ask 
you  for  a  ticket  ?  I  wrote  to  you  on  the  6th  of  May.  "Will  you  re- 
mind me  of  it  ?  Why  have  you  prohibited  the  children  to  pluck  any 
flowers  ?  I  was  astonished  at  his  courage.  I  shall  speak  to  you  about 
it  afterwards.  Be  not  afraid  of  him.  He  is  laughing  at  everything. 
I  never  play  for  money.  Let  us  hope  for  better  times.  Why  did  you 
not  telegraph  to  us  ?  He  drank  from  a  goblet.  May  I  offer  you  a 
ticket  for  (in  Ace.)  the  theatre?  He  presented  me  with  a  costly  watch. 
We  sold  him  our  garden  for  350  marks  (Mark).  I  asked  for  you,  but 
you  were  not  at  home.  Shall  I  show  you  your  room  ?  My  brothers 
and  sisters  have  left  for  Germany  yesterday.  I  take  him  to  be  an  ar- 
tist. The  first  letter  I  wrote  to  him,  was  lost  (ging  verloren).  Why 
do  you  not  believe  me  ? 


282 


Conversational  and 
Do  not  take  it  amiss. 
What  would  you  be  at  ? 
I  am  aware  of  it. 
That  depends  (upon    circum- 
stances). 

Is  he  to  depend  upon? 
That  won't  do — that  will  do. 
I  have  had  enough  of  it. 
That  is  a  matter  of  taste. 
In  my  opinion — judgment. 
He  got  me  to  do  it. 

As  you  like. 

It  is  much  the  same  thing. 

It  is  all  the  same  to  me. 

From  my  own  knowledge. 

I  have  no  objection  to  it. 

It  struck  me. 

Set  him  right. 

In  your  room — stead — place. 

I  say! 

You  don't  say  so  ! 

It  serves  him  right. 

I  lost  sight  of  you. 

At  first  sight.  " 

I  will  stand  to  it. 

He  met  with  bad  success. 

I  met  with  an  accident. 

Let  us  talk  it  over. 
I  was  told  so. 
As  I  am  informed. 
What  is  the  use  of  it  ? 
I  shall  do  my  utmost. 

It  is  not  worth  while. 

I  wish  you  well. 

I  would  not  for  all  the  world. 

I  would  not  do  it  for  anything. 

A  thing  agreed  on. 

According  to  my  apprehension. 

What  is  his  name  ? 

How  do  you  spell  your  name  ? 

Are  you  sure  of  it  ? 

He  can  do  me  no  harm. 


Idiomatic  Phrases. 
9iefjmen  ©te  el  [mtr]  nidjl  libeL 

fatten  ©te  Cor? 
roeifc  e§. 
fommt  barcmf  an. 


e3   $11 


$ann  man  fief)  auf  iijn  oertaffen  ? 
geljt  ntdjt  —  £a£  geniigt. 
I)abe  e£  fart. 
finb  ©ejdjmacfgfadjen. 
metner  Slnfidjt. 
©r    bradjte   mid)    bagu, 

tljun. 
25te  Ste  roollen—  SSte 

beliebt. 
&$  ift  gtemlidj  emeitci. 
S§  ift  mir  einerlet. 
5tuB  etgener  Srfa^rung. 
%d)  fjabe  ni^t^  bagegen. 
fe  fiel  mtr  auf. 
SSeifen  ©ie  i^n  gured^t 
9In  S^er  @tcHc. 
$5ren  ©ie  etnmaU 
2Ba§  ©ie  nic^t  fagent 
Gig  gefd^ie^t  tf)m  rerf)t. 
%>d)  Oerlor  ©te  au§  ben  Slug  en. 
23etm  erften  SInblicf. 
Sc^  bletbe  babei. 
er  ^atte  Ungtiicf. 
(£»   ift   mtr   ein   Unfaff 

ftoHen. 

25ir  tt?offen  c§  befpredjen. 
^cf)  ^abe  e^  ge^ort. 
28ie  id)  prte. 


%d)    wefbe    mein 

tfmn. 

&§  ift  nid^t  ber  9 
%$  metne  e^  gut  nut  Sftnen. 
34   moc^te  unt   Me3    in    ber 

SSelt  ntdjt. 
^(^  njiirbe  e^  urn  fetnen   $ret^ 

t^un. 

©ine  abgemad^te  ©arfje. 
SSte  ic^  mir  bte  ©adje  oorfteHe. 
9Bie  ^eifet  er? 
SSte  fc^reiben  ©ie 
SStffen  ©te  e§ 
6r  fann  mir  nic^t^ 


283 

UcaMng  <Eimi0e  tto.  61. 


2ttoa  auf  bem  (Sdjloffe  git  Sftubolftabt. 


®atf)artna  roar  ehte  Gutter  ifjrpS  SSoI!e§  —  ioa§  bem 
armften  tljrer  Untertljanen  toiberfufi.r,1  loar  ifjr  felBft  §u= 
geftogen.2  $uf3  togerfte3  iiBer  biefe  SBortBriidjtgfeit* 
entritftet,5  bod)  Don  t^rer  $eifte§gegentoart6  ttidjt  oerlaffen,7 
Befief)lt  fie  tfjrer  gangen  ^tenerfc^aft,8  fic^  in  affer  (^e^ 
f(^tt)inbtg!eit9  unb  Sttde10  511  Betoafftten11  itnb  bie 
pforten12  lt)o^l  jn  tjerriegeln13  ;  fie  felBft  begiebt 
wieber  in  ben  @aat;  too  bie  ^iirften15  nod)  Bet  Xifdje 
fi|en.  §ier  ffogt  fie  i^nen  in  ben  Betoegenbften16  3lu§= 
briicfen,  ma§  i^r  eBen  ^interBrac^t17  toorben,  nnb  tote 
}d)Ied)t  man  ba§  gegeBene  ^atfernjort18  gefjalten.  3Jlan 
ertoieberte  i^r  mit  Sadjen,  ba§  bte§  nnn  einmal19  ®rteg§* 
geBranc^20  fei,  unb  bag  Bet  einem  ^)nrc^marf^21  Oon 
©olbaten  bergletcfjen22  Heine  Unfa'Ite23  ntdjt  §n  oer^iiten 
ftanben2^ 

,,®a§  Gotten  toir  bo^  fe^en/'  antioortete  fie  auf* 
geBrac^t25.  ^^einen  armen  Untert^anen  mug  ba§  S^rig^26 
mieber  toerben27,  ober  Bei  (Sott  !  "  inbem  fie  bro^enb28 
i^rc  @timme  anftrengte29,—  „  jJilrftcuBIut  fitr  D^fenBlutso!" 
—  TOt  biefer  Bitnbigen31  @r!tarung32  oerlieg  fie  ba§  Qim= 
mer,  ba§  in  raemgen  SlugenBtiden33  Oon  S3en;affneten34 
erfiittt35  mar,  bie  fid),  ba§  ©d)raert36  in  ber  §anb,  boc§ 
mit  oieler  (SfjrerBietung37,  ijinter  bie  @titl;te  ber  giirften 
pflan^ten38  unb  ba§  gru^ftuc!  Bebtenten39. 

folgt.) 


1  befell,  2  happened,  3  at  the  utmost,  4  breach  of  faith,  5  ir- 
ritated, 6  presence  of  mind,  7  abandoned,  8  servants,  9  swiftness, 
10  silence,  11  to  arm,  bewaffnen,  12  castle-gates,  13  to  bar,  ver- 
riegeln,  14  betakes,  15  princess,  16  touching,  17  she  had  been 
reported,  18  emperor's  word,  19  cannot  be  helped,  20  custom  of 
war,  21  marching  through,  22  such,  23  accidents,  24  were  not 
to  be  prevented,  25  in  a  rage,  26  their  property,  27  returned  to. 
(DaL),  28  threatening,  29  raising,  30  princes'  blood  for  oxen 
blood,  31  concise,  32  declaration,  33  moments,  34  armed  men,. 
35  filled,  36  sword,  37  respectfulness,  38  planted,  39  served. 


284 

Sixty-second  Lesson.  S^ctunbfec^jtgfte  Sefiion. 

On  the  Passive  Voice. 

An  Infinitive  in  the  passive  voice  in  English  after  the  verb  to 
be,  must  be  in  the  active  voice  in  German  ;  as, 

Siefel  £aul  ift  511  tjermtetljen.    This  house  is  to  be  lei 

An  Infinitive  in  the  passive  voice  dependent  on  a  preceding 
substantive,  is  rendered  in  German,  by  the  present  participle  with 
•§tt,  which  is  declined  and  precedes  the  noun  ;  as, 

S)ie  311  erroortenbe  grnte.    The  harvest  to  be  expected. 

Intransitive  verbs  (see  p.  162)  cannot  have  a  passive  voice. — 
However  there  is  an  impersonal  passive  form  with  the  pronoun  e3 
is  subject,  corresponding  to  the  English  there  with  a  tense  of  to  be 
4iid  a  present  participle  of  an  intransitive  verb  following ;  as, 
£6  toirb  auf  ber  ©trafje  bid  gefungen.    There  is  much  singing  in  the  street 

In  the  same  way  the  passive  voice  is  formed  of  intransitive 
verbs  requiring  the  object  suffering  the  action  in  the  Dative  or  with 
%  preposition  ;  as, 

g§  nmrbe  bent  ©eneral  BefoMen.  The  general  was  ordered.  (£1 
loirb  auf  Sic  geroartet.  You  are  waited  for. 

Note  1. — Thus  the  English  subject  becomes  a  Dative  or  Accusative  in 
German  and  is  replaced  by  el  with  the  verb  in  the  singular. 

2. — As  in  English  the  passive  voice  is  often  replaced  by  man  fthey,  peoplej; 
43,— £1  rourbe  getanjt  or  man  tanjte.  There  was  dancing  or  they  (people) 
danced. 

On  e§,  there. 

As  with  e5  gtcbt,  c§  tfr,  etc.  (see  p.  166)  the  subject  is  sometimes 
placed  also  after  other  verbs  and  is  replaced  by  el,  which  usually  cor- 
responds to  there;  as, 

®l  lamen  feine  S?ettem  unb  feme  Srfiber.  There  came  his  cousins 
and  his  brothers.  6§  Hegt  ettoae  auf  bem  grufc&oben.  There  is  some- 
thing Ijing  on  the  floor. 

However  there  as  subject  in  the  sense  of  here  is  rendered  ba  and 
in  the  sense  of  yonder  or  in  that  place,  it  is  bort;  as, 

2>a  ift  Semanb.     There  (here)  is  some  one.      Sort  geljt  £err  £  ' 
There  (yonder)  walks  Mr.  X. 

If  there  refers  to  a  place  mentioned  before,  ba  or  bort  is  placed  at 
•the  end  and  e§  used  as  subject ;  as, 

3dj  mat  auf  ber  $oft,  after  el  tear  fetn  SBeamter  ba.  I  was  at 
the  post-office,  but  there  was  no  official. 

REMARK. — Besides  in  the  interrogative  and  inverted  forms,  el  oc- 
curring in  all  the  cases  mentioned  in  this  lesson  (except  in  eS  gie&t)  is 
omitted  in  a  dependent  clause;  as, 

SBirb  auf  ber  @tra§e  tiel  gefungen?  Is  there  mush  singing  in 
the  street?  S)em  ©eneral  nmrbe  beioljfen.  The  general  was  ordered. 
(Er  ift  etn  Sftonn,  bem  ii&erall  miBtraut  toirb.  He  is  a  man  who  is 
mistrusted  everywhere.  3dj  ging  fort,  roeil  9liemanb  im  Simmer  war. 
I  went  away  because  there  was  no  one  in  the  room. 


285 


to  apply,  antoenben 

the  condition,  state,  ber 

the  horse-race,  ba§  $ferbe« 

the   anus,    weapons,    btc 

3«ftanb 

rennen 

SBaffen 

dilapidated,  berttml)rloft 

„    ice,  bo§  (Si§ 

Sing.:  bie  SSaffe 

the  eloquence,  bie  S3ereb= 

„  opora-glass,berJDpern= 

to  arise,  *entftef)en  irr. 

fomfeit 

gilder 

to  beckon,  ttinjen 

everywhere,  iifieroE 

„    park,  ber  ^Sar? 

to  bet,  tuetten 

the  factory,  bie  gobrtt 

Plur  :  bie  ^JSorfe 

the  captain  (of  a  ship), 

„   famine,  ber  $iinger»= 

„    remedv,  means,  ba§ 

ber  $apitfin 

not^ 

SRittei 

„   cauliflower,  ber  23Iii' 

„    fine,  bie  (Strafe 

to  shoot  at,  fdiie&en  auf 

menfofjl 

„    fire-engine,  bie  geiter= 

(Ace.)  irr. 

charitable,  tooljttljatig 

f^ri^e 

to    skate,      ©djtittf^n^ 

the   cold   (temperature), 

golden,  golben 

*Iaiifen  irr. 

bie  ®cilte 

the  harvest,  bie  (grnte 

the  target,  bie  @d)et6e 

„   collection,  bie  @amnt' 

heartily,  ^ersli^ 

,,    zoological  gardens, 

lung 

ber  STljiergarten 

Exercise  No.  62. 

1.  Is  this  garden  to  be  sold  1    His  arrival  is  (steht)  to  be  expected 
to-morrow.     The  house  to  be  sold  is  in  a  very  dilapidated  condition. 
There  will  be  shooting  at  the  target.     You  were  advised  badly.     The 
artist  is  being  flattered  on  (von)  all  sides.     You  are  asked  for.    A  good 
harvest  is  hoped  for.      You  were  not  told  everything.      The  girl  was 
given  a  golden  ring.      I  was  written  a  long  letter*  about  (Ace,)  him6. 
There  were  many  people  taking  a  walk  in  the  -park6  in  spite  of  the 
intense  (stark)  cold*.      There  arose  a  great  famine.      There  is  your 
opera-glass.       There  (yonder)  is  a  gentleman6  beckoning  you*.      I 
was  at  the  market,  but  there  was  no  cauliflower  to  be  had.     "Was  there 
much6  betting  at  (bei)  the  horse-race*  ?     To-morrow  all  of  you  will  be 
aided  (helped).     I6  also*  have0  been  spoken  to  about  it.     "When  I  in- 
tended to  visit  the  Zoological  Gardens  I  was  told  that  they  (it)  were 
(was)  not  open.      He  does  not  know  yet  that  there  will  be  no  concert6 
to-day*. 

2.  (£<§  {ft  mir  berboten  toorben,  ben  95rtef  in  $fjrem  23etfettt 
(presence)  gu  offnen.    (£3  giebt  fjter  ntd)t§  p  fefien.    (Sr  tear  fefjr 
arm,   elje  tljtn  Don  feinen  fjreunben  geljolfen  ttmrbe.      &§  gtng 
(was)  bie  gange  Sfacfit  (all  night  long)  ein  ©turm.    ©einer  23ereb* 
famfeit  fonnfe  nidjt  anberftanben  toerben.    @£>  ift  eine  ©pmmtiing 
alter  SBaffen  an  i|n  gefanbt  toorben.    3>ort  ift  bie  gabrtf,  toeldje 
id)  Sljnen  geigen  tDoHte.      @£  tmrb  getangt  unb   gefungen.      ($^ 
ftjtrb  ifim  iiberatt  mifjtraut  toerben.    @^  njurbe  nid)t  mefor  an  mic^ 
gebac^t. 

The  remedy  to  be  applied  will  benefit  (help)  you.  Have  you 
been  threatened  with  a  fine6  as  well*  ?  There  was  much  gambling. 
Are  these  rooms  to  be  let  ?  Were  you  on  the  ice  ?  Yes,  and  there 
were  a  great  many  (sehr  viele)  people.  There  was  no  one  rescued  but 
the  captain  of  the  ship.  Have  I  been  asked  for  ?  There  (yonder)  is  a 
fire-engine  standing.  I  have  been  helped  by  charitable  people.  I 
heard  that  there  had  not  been  much  skating  yesterday.  The  cheated 
[persons]  were  laughed  at  heartily.  Is  this  the  horse  which  you  had 
been  offered  ? 


286 
Conversational  and  Idiomatic  Phrases. 


Wine  does  not  agree  with  me. 
Well,  and  what  of  all  this  ? 

Willing  or  unwilling  you  must 

doit. 
Do  you  think  to  come  off  so 

easily  ? 
It  would  be  of  no  advantage  to 

you. 

It  would  be  of  no  use  for  me. 
I  cannot  afford  it. 
There  is  some  mystery  about  it. 
It  is  not  at  all  right  about  it. 

You  cannot  get  at  it 

I  like  it  all  the  better. 
You  must  make  shift. 
It  is  of  no  consequence. 

No  one  can  blame  you  for  that. 
I  cannot  bring  it  about 

He  came  of  his  own  accord. 
He  will  turn  it  to  account 

Do  not  take  alarm  at  it 

He  is  the  best  man  living— in 
the  world. 

It  is  all  over  with  him— he  is 
done  for. 

Let  him  alone  to  do  it. 

I  was  under  great  apprehen- 
sion. 

Rich  as  he  is. 

As  I  live — as  sure  as  I  live. 

He  made  away  with  himseli 

Will  you  bear  me  company  ? 

You  are  before  hand  with  me. 
Shall  I  secure  a  seat  for  you  ? 

That  is  no  business  of  mina. 
Mind  your  own  business. 


SSeht  Befommt  tnir  tiidjt  gut 
9ta,    »al   foil   bieS   Me3  be* 

beuten? 
©ie  muff  en  e§  tfjun,  ©ie  mo  gen 

ttjoflen  obcr  nidjt. 
©lauben  ©ie,  fo  leidjt  baoongu* 

fommen? 
©ie    toiirben    nidjtS    babei   ge* 

ttrinncn. 

(§:§  nmtbe  mir  ntdjtS  nii^en. 
Sid)  bin  nidjt  reid)  genug  baju. 
(£»  ftedt  etiuag  ba^inter. 
G^  geljt  nidjt  mit  rec^ten  S)in* 

gen  §11. 
Wlan  fann  ntc^t  baljinter  fom* 

men. 

S»  ift  mir  urn  fo  Itebcr. 
Ste  muff  en  fid)  beljelfen. 
G5  Jat  nidjts  pnf  ftc^  —  e^  ijat 

nitfytS  gu  fagen. 
Sag  fann  Sfynen  91iemanb  »cr- 

benfen. 
%<fy  fann  'e§   nid^t  gu   (Stanbe 

bringen. 

@r  fam  an§  eigenem  2Intriebe. 
gr  tuirb  e0  fid)  (Dat.;  gn  9^ufec 

mac^en. 
©erat^en  Sic  nic^t  in  Unrul^e 

bariiber. 
Sr  ift  ber  befte  9#ann  auf  ber 

28elt. 
@5  ift  au§  (or  tjprbet)  mit  tfjm. 

— @g  ift  um  i^n  gcfrfjc^cn. 
Saffcn  @ie  i^n  nut  mac^en. 
%ti)  furc^tete  fe^t. 

So  reidj  cr  aud^  ift. 

@o  nmfjr  id^  lebe. 

gr  na^m  fidj  bag  Seben. 

2SoHen  ©ie  mir  ©efeHfc^aft  lei' 

ften? 

©ie  ftnb"  mir  §utiorge!ommen. 
©ott  ic^  Sfmen  einen  ^Ia|  be- 

legen? 

2)a3  ift  nid^t  meine  ©ac^e. 
$ummern  ©ie  fic^  um  %fyn  ei- 

genen  ©ac^en. 


287 

ReaMttcj  dmtm  Wo.  62. 


SHfca  auf  bcm  Sdjloffe  511  Sftubolftabt 


S3etm  Gftntritt1  biefer  fampflnfttgen2  (Sd^aar3  t>er= 
anberte4  ber  §ergog  5Uba  bie  Sarbe;  ftntnnt,  betreten5  fal} 
man  einanber  an.  5lbgefci)nitten6  t)on  ber  fcnee,  Don 
einer  nberlegenen,7  fjanbfeften  3ftenge8  nmgeben,9  toas>  btieb 
iljm  iibrtg,  al§  ftc^  in  ^ebnlb  §n  faffen10,  nnb  auf  nietrfje 
S3ebtngnng  e£  anc^  fei,  bie  Beleibtgte11  5)ante  gn  t)er= 
fo^nen12.  §einrtc^  fcon  93rannfc^n)etg  fa^te13  fic^  jnerft 
nnb  brad)14  in  ein  ftijaftenbeS15  (Madjter16  au§.  @r 
ergrtff1^  ben  fcerniinftigen18  5(n§n)eg19,  ben  gangen  SSor= 
gang20  in3  Snfttge2!  §n  le^ren22,  nnb  fjielt23  ber  ©rajtit 
eine  Sobrebe24  iiber  i^re  lanbeSmiitterli^e2^  (Sorgfalt26 
nnb  ben  entfdjloffenen  Sfaatfj)  ben  fie  betmefen27.  (Sr  bat 
fier  fidlj  rn^ig  §n  ber^atten28,  nnb  na^m  e§  anf  fi(^29,  ben 
5llba  gn  5lttem,  tDa§  bittig30  fei,  ju  bermogen31. 

bracfjte32  er  e§  bei  bent  Se|teren  it)ir!li(^33  ba^in, 
bag  er  anf  ber  SteUe34  einen  S5efe^I  an  bie  tatee  an§= 
ferttgte35,  ba§  geraubte36  SSief)  ben  @igent!§umem  o^ne 
S5erjng37  tuieber  an^jnliefern38.  @obalb  bie  (SJrafht  ber 
^uriicfgabe39  geit)i§  mar,  bebanlte40  fie  ftc§  anf§  Scfjonfte41 
bei  i^ren  ©aften,  bie  fefyr  ^oflic^  5lbfc^ieb  na^men.  D^ne 
.Stoeifel  tuar  e§  biefe  S3egeben^eit42,  bie  ber  ($rafin  ^a= 
tsarina  t)on  @c^rt)ar§bnrg  ben  S3einamen43  ber  §elben= 
miit^igen44  ermorben45  ^at. 


1  entrance,  2  warlike,  3  troop,  4  changed,  5  surprised, 
8  cut  off,  7  superior,  8  number  of  sturdj^  men,  9  surrounded, 
10  to  be  patient,  11  offended,  12  to  reconcile,  13  recovered,  14  to 
break  out,  *ansbrechen  irr.,  15  ringing,  16  laughter,  17  took, 
18  wise,  19  alternative,  20  occurrence,  21  mirth,  22  to  turn, 
23  pronounced,  24  panegyric,  25  maternal,  26  care,  27  evinced, 
28  to  keep,  29  undertook,  30  reasonable,  31  to  induce  to  do  every- 
thing, 32  persuaded,  33  really,  34  spot,  35  dispatched, 
36  stolen,  37  delay,  38  to  deliver  up,  auslie/em,  39  restitution, 
40  thanked,  41  in  the  most  agreeable  manner,  42  incidents,  43  cog- 
nomen, 44  Heroic,  45  acquired  for. 


288 

Sixty-third  Lesson.  3>reiimbfecfi§igfte  Sefttoiu 

Remarks  on  Verbs. 

In  English  (especially  in  replies)  a  phrase  is  often  not  completed 
and  the  verb  or  the  auxiliary  only  is  used,  the  remainder  being  un- 
derstood. 

In  German,  on  the  contrary,  the  sense  is  usually  completed 
either  by  using  the  principal  verb  or  a  corresponding  pronoun,  as  is 
shown  in  the  following  examples : 

®ommt  er?  $a  er  fontntt.  Does  he  come?  Yes,  he  does.  £afcen 
Sic  ein  23udj?  %a,  tdj  Ija&e  etne§.  Have  you  a  book?  Yes,  I  have 
(one).  Sonten  ®te  mil  bem  @elb?  ^a,  id)  font  banrit.  Did  you  come 
with  the  money?  Yes,  I  did  (come  with  it).  £ilft  er  bent  9Jlann? 
9tetn,  er  Ijtlft  tf)m  ntdjt.  Does  he  help  the  man?  No,  he  does  not 
(help  him).  ©tnb  @ie  nu'ibe?  $a,  bo§  Bin  tdj  (or  %a,  tdj  bin  e§). 
Are  you  tired?  Yes,  I  am.  3ft  er  <5olbat?  $a,  bag  ift  er.  Is  he 
a  soldier?  Yes,  he  is.  £a6en  Ste  iljn  gefeljen?  3a,  ba§  fjafie  id). 
Have  you  seen  him?  Yes,  I  have.  28tQ  er  bie  9ted)nung  fcejaljlen? 

?a,   ba§   null  er  (or  So,  er  toill  fte  fallen).    Will  he  pay  the  bill? 
es,  he  -will.      SSiirbe  fte  attein  !ommen?    -ftein,  bo§  roiirbe   fte  ntdjt. 
Would  she  come  alone?    No,  she  would  not. 

REMARK. — If  a  question  in  the  negative  is  ans\v«red(  in  the  af- 
firmative, yes  is  rendered  bodj ;  as, 

SBoHen  Sie  ntdjt  Ijerein  fommen?  ®odj  (ba§  iDtH  tdj).  Will  you 
not  come  in?  Yes,  I  will.  £a&en  <ste  nieinen  Sricf  nidjt  er^ollcn? 
Sod)  (id)  ^aBe  iljn  er^alten).  Have  you  not  received  my  letter  ?  Yes, 
I  have. 

Expressions  like :  is  it  not  ?  has  he  not  ?  must  you  not  ?  in  phrases 
similar  to  the  following,  are  rendered  by  ntdjt  toaljr?  which  may  be 
placed  first  or  last  in  the  other  phrase. — Thus : 

(5§  ift  fjeute  fd)5ne§  SBetter,  nid)t  roa^r?  It  is  fine  weather  to-day, 
is  it  not?  ®r  Ijat  Sfjnen  geidjrte&en,  nid)t  tnaljr?  He  has  written  to 
you,  has  he  not?  Sfttdjt  ttmljr,  fie  lann  fdjon  fingen?  She  can  sing 
beautifully,  can  she  not? 

A  verb  after  the  conjunction  at£  (than)  is  usually  not  re- 
peated in  German ;  as, 

Sal  SSerter  ift  Ijeute  fdjoner  al§  geftern.  The  weathi  r  is  finer  to- 
day than  it  was  yesterday.  (5ie  famen  frii^er  al»  id).  You  came 
earlier  than  I  did.  • 

Inversion. 

A  sentence  can  be  commenced  nearly  by  any  adverb  or  any 
word  or  words  on  which  more  stress  is  laid ;  but  in  such  cases  the 
subject,  if  preceded  by  such  adverb  or  word,  must  be  placed  after 
the  verb  or  auxiliary  in  German  ;  as, 

petite  $afce  id)  S^ren  SBruber  gefeljen.  To-day  I  have  seen  your 
brother.  SBtelletdjt  totrb  er  gar  nidjt  ba  fetn.  Perhaps  he  will  not  be 
there  at  all.  3n  btefent  ©arten  ftnb  feme  D&ft&anme.  In  this  garden 
there  are  no  fruit-trees,  ©inen  foldjen  £ut  fann  id)  ntdjt  tragen.  Such 
a  hat  I  cannot  wear.  @te  unb  igljten  Sruber  Ijobe  id)  gefeljen.  You 
and  your  brother  I  have  seen.  2tn  nttdj  Ijat  ber  2lbDofat  audj  ge- 
fdjrteben.  To  me  the  advocate  has  written  as  well. 

Notes.  1.— The  inversion  of  the  subject  does  not  take  place  if  preceded  by  an 
adverb  used  to  determine  it ;  as, 

9htr  id)  fonnte  3f»nen  ^elfen.     Only  I  could  help  you.      9Kdjt 
einmal  ietne  ©Item  luufeten  bauon.    Not  even  his  parents  knew  of  it, 
1-See  also  pages  80,  190  &  1»4. 


289 

Observe  also  the  inversion  of  the  subject  when  the  conjunction 
ftenn  (if)  is  omitted  ;  as, 

fatten   @te   e§   %u  nttr  gefagt.     Had  you  said  it  to  me  (If  you 
had  ...).     SBcite  id)  an  S^er  ©tefle.   Were  I  in  your  place  (if  I  were  ...). 


Position  of  the  Object  and  of  the  Negation  ntd)t  in  a 
sentence. 

If  in  a  sentence  there  are  two  objects,  one  in  the  Dative  and 
the  other  in  the  Accusative,  the  Dative  (usually  a  person)  pre- 
cedes the  Accusative  ;  as, 

3d)  Ijabe  metnent  greitnb  ein  fpldje§  SBitdj  empfoljlen.  I  have  re- 
commended such  a  book  to  my  friend.  3$  Ijafce  S^nen  ettoog  ju 
fagen.  I  have  to  tell  you  something. 

However,  if  the  two  objects  are  persons  the  Accusative  is 
better  first;  as, 

3d)  fja&e  ben  ®naben  metnem  greunbe  empfoljlen.  I  have  recom- 
mended the  boy  to  my  friend. 

If  two  personal  pronouns  meet,  the  Accusative  precedes  the 
Dative  or  Genitive;  as, 

(Sr  Jjot  e<3  ntir  gegefien.  He  has  given  it  to  me.  3d)  Ijobe  il)n> 
3Ijnen  empfoi)Ien.  I  have  recommended  him  to  you.  3d)  erinner.e 
mid)  feiner.  I  remember  him. 

Note.—  SDiir  or  bit  may  also  precede  the  pronoun  in  the  Accusative;  ast, 
6r  Ijat  mir  e§  gegeben. 

When  the  subject  is  placed  after  the  verb,  or  when  the  verb  is  re- 
moved to  the  end  of  the  sentence,  personal  pronouns  may  precede  the- 
subject,  if  it  is  not  a  personal  pronoun  itself  ;  as, 

$at  fid)  bet  $tembe  fieflagt?  Has  the  stranger  made  a  complaint? 
$ier  fann  @ie  Sftiemanb  fefyen.  Here  no  one  can  see  you.  SDer  §unb, 
tueldjen  Qtjnen  mein  SBater  fdjenfte.  The  dog  which  my  father  gave  you. 

The  negation  iticfrt  (not)  usually  follows  an  object  in  the  Ac- 
cusative, Dative  or  Genitive;  as, 

3d)  t)obe  ba§  SBudj  nidjt.  I  have  not  the  book.  ^>a&en  (Sie  ben, 
Sremben  3fi^em  SSater  ntdjt  borgeftellt?  Have  you  not  introduced  the 
stranger  to  your  father?  (£r  erinnerte  [id)  metner  nidjt.  He  did  not 
remember  me. 

JKtdjt  precedes  an  object  with  a  preposition  or  a  predicate;  as, 

3ft  3Ijr  OnM  nid)t  mit  einem  ©epadEtrciger  gefommen?  Has  your 
uncle  not  come  with  a  porter?  3ft  &err  ft.  nttfjt  ein  2(rat?  J.s'not 
Mr.  N.  a  physician?  3d)  6in  Hidjt  3§rer  SJleinung.  I  am  not  of 
your  opinion. 

^tdjt  usually  follows  adverbs  or  adverbial  expressions  of  time. 
or  manner  (but  not  those  of  quality  or  place);  as, 

(£r  ttrirb  nadjfte  SBodje  ntdjt  ^ier  fein.  He  will  not  be  here 
next  week.  3d)  lann  eBenfallS  nid)t  fontmen.  I  cannot  come 
likewise.  SBir  fonnten  toegen  be§  fd)led)ten  28etter§  nidjt  ou§ge^en. 
We  could  not  go  out  on  account  of  the  bad  weather. 

However,  nicfit,  negativing  any  particular  word,  must  pre- 
cede it  ;  as, 

3d)  Ija&e  nidjt  ba§  S3ucf),  fpnbern  bie  QeitunQ.  I  have  not  the  book 
but  the  newspaper.  $a&en  ntdjt  @ie  fo  gefagt?  Have  not  you  said  so? 


follows  a  personal  pronoun  in  answers,  if  both  stand  alone;  as, 
SBer  fjat  ba§  gettjan?    3d)  nidjt.    Who  has  done  that?    Not  I. 

German  Grammar  10 


290 


accidentally,  by  chance,  i 

juftifltg 

ihe  actor,  ber  ©djauipteler  i 
„  address,  bie  2ibtefje  j 
„  assistance,  ber  23et= 

ftanb 
by  return    of   post,   rait 

umgeljenbet  ^oft 
the  copy  (of  a  book),  ba§ 

(rjemplor 
^   difficulty,  bie  Sdjjroie* 

rigfeit 
die    divine    service,    ber 

©otteSbienft 


important,  ttridjtig 

the  library,  bie  3Ji6Iiot6eI 

married    (adj.),     t>erfjet« 

rat^et 

to  many,  ^etratljen 
now  and  then,  bann  unb 

tnann 
to  occupy  (a   place),    6e« 

ie&en 
out  of  fashion,   <w§  ber 


over,  past,  toorn&er 
fr  obably,  ioaljrjdjeinUclj 


really,  indeed,  tmrflidj 
to  reckon   upon,   redjnen 

auf  (Ace.) 

the  roll,  ba§  Srob^en 
„    sandwich,  ba?  belegte 

Srobc^en 

„    seat,  place,  ber  $?lafc 
„    sight  (curiosity),  bie 

Seljensttmrbiglett 
„    \\uy    of  living,     bie 

£eben§»eife 

„    writer  (author),    ber 
6i^riftfieaer 


Exercise  No.  63. 

1.  Does  the  child  sleep  ?     Yes,  it  does  (sleep).      Has  your  father 
a  library  ?     No,  he  has  not  (any).     Do  you  know  his  address  ?    Yes,  I 
do  (know  it).     Are  you  married?    Yes,  I  am.      Is  he  an  actor?     Yes, 
he  is.    Should  you  not  alter  your  way  of  living?    Yes,  (that)  I  should. 
Have  you  not*  two  copies6  of  this  book  ?      Yes,  I  have  (two).      You 
wished  for  a  sandwich,  did  you  not  ?      He  had  more  difficulty  than  I 
had.     Probably  all  the  seats  will  be  occupied.      On  the  left  there  was 
a  church,  and  on  the  right  there  was  a  theatre.      In  five  minutes  all 
will  be  over.     Even  you  would  not  have  been  able  to  do  it.     Had  you 
oome  a  little  later,  (so)  you  would  not  have  found  (treffen)  me  at  home. 
Shall  I  introduce  your  cousin  to  my  sister?      No,  thank  [you],  I  have 
already  introduced  him  to  her.     Where  did  your  sister  catch  cold?    Is 
not  his  uncle  a  famous  writer?      I  really  did  not  recogBiee  you.      He 
will  not  only  expect  you,  but  also  me,      I  do  not  come  [for]  the  first 
lime.     Am  I  to  go  ?    No,  not  you. 

2.  3ft  ^temanb  bart  getoefen?      $odj,    c§   fmb   oiete  Seute 
fcort  getoefen.    ©ein  S3ruber  fam  fiaiiftg  511  un§,   unb   barai  unb 
maim  befucbte  un§  audj   feme   ©djtcefter.     &mn   tcf)   auf   3&ren 
Betftanb  redjnen  ?    ^o.,  ba£  foniten  @ie  (or  ja,  Ste  fonnen  barauf 
redjnen).    SSarum  Baben  ©te  bent  ©otte^bienft  ntdjt  beigeroobnt? 
SRidjt  toafjr,  fie  ttrirb   balb   beiratben?      S)er   giibrer  seigte   ben 
9let|enben  atte  ©efien^roiirbigfeiten.     3$  nwfcte  nic^t,  ba§  3&nen 
bieje  ©ad^e  fremb  tear. 

We  could  not  skate  because  the  river  was  not  frozen  in  spite  of 
the  intense  (stark)  cold.  He  visits  you  more  frequently  than  he  visits 
me.  Did  you  take  a  walk?  No,  I  did  not.  I  wished  to  buy  some- 
thing, but  accidentally  I  had  no  money  with  me.  Bring  some  rolls 
[for]  the  children.  Have  you  found  (treffen)  your  cousin  (f.)  ?  Yes, 
I  have  (found  her).  Are  not  these  hats  out  of  fashion  ?  Yes,  (that) 
they  are.  Can  you  not  send  the  parcel  by  return  of  post?  The  matter 
»  important,  is  it  not  ?  We  had  not  to  wait  for  the  train. 


291 
Conversational  and  Idiomatic  Phrases. 


You  had  better 

I  was  sitting  by  myself. 
They  differed  in  opinion. 
There  was  nothing  to  be  done. 
I  cannot  do  without  it. 
Have  done  (with  you)  ! 
Take  it  easy. 
Make  yourself  easy. 
He  made  his  escape. 
He  had  a  narrow  escape. 

Do  the  windows  face  the  street? 
The  room  looks  into  the  garden. 

The  house  is  fitted  up. 

The  furniture  does  not  match 

the  paper. 

I  was  working  hard. 
That  is  hard  work. 
Take  courage  ! 
It  is  idle  talk. 
You  cannot  be  ignorant  of  it. 

He  is  well — ill  or  badly — off. 

It  is  a  bad  job. 

Keep  your  temper. 

Will  you  take  the  lead  ? 

Not  even  one — not  so  much  as 

one. 

They  parted  company. 
The  book  is  out  of  print. 
He  has  a  screw  loose. 
He  is  second  to  none. 
Stand  out  of  the  way  ! 
When  the  worst  comes  to  the 

worst. 

Not  a  bit — whit — better. 
Keep  your  distance— keep  off  ! 
Avoid  my  presence ! 
You  are  fit  for  nothing. 
He  does  not  listen  to  reason. 
With  the  naked  eye. 
I  have  no  relish  for  such  things. 

Do  not  let  go  your  hold. 


6ie  foflten  Itebcr  .... 

3d)  fafj  atfetn  [ba]. 

@ie  ftaren  tierf  djjiebener  Sftchtung  . 

(££  ttmr  ntd)t§  511  ntadjjen. 

3d)  fann  e3  nid)t  entbe^ren. 

£oren  @te  aiif! 

•ilftarfjen  <Ste  fid)  nid)t§  barait». 

23emf)tgen  <3ie  fid). 

($r  tft  entfontnten. 

(£r  tft  tntt  Inapper  -iftotf)  babon 

gefontmen. 
®el)en    bie    $enfter    ouf     btc 

©tra&e  ? 

umtt^    ge!)t    auf    ben 

Garten. 

>au3  tft  etngertdjtet. 
9Jiobet    pa^t    itidjt    jur 

Xapete. 

^(^  IjoBe  titd^ttg  gearBettet. 
®a§  tft  fc^trere  SIrbeit. 
gaff  en  @te  SWut^l 
®$  tft  leered  ®erebc. 
©g  !ann  Sfonen  ntc^t  unbefamit 

fein. 

(5r  tft  gut—  iiBet—  baran. 
@§  ift  eine  fdjlimme 
SSIeiben  <Sie  ru^ig. 
SBoKen  @ie  Dorange^en? 
etnmal  etner. 


trennten  ftc^. 

93udj  ift  bergriffen. 
^at  einen  ©Barren  git  t)iet. 
fteljt  ^einem  na^. 

bent  SSege! 

fc^ttmmften  gattc. 


urn  etn  |>aar  Beffer. 
93letben  6ie  nttr  bom  Setbe! 
^efjen  @te  nttr  an^  ben  3tugen! 
@ie  ftnb  §u  ntc^tg  gn  gebraiiclett. 
©r  nimntt  fetne  SSernunft  an* 
fflfcit  bloBent  5Titge. 
^d)  finbe  f  einen   (5Jefc§macE   an 

fotcfien  (Sadjen. 
Saffen  @tc  ntcf)t  Io0. 


292 

KraMng  (Enrctee  tto.  63. 


imb  Differ. 

$)iefe  Beiben  grogten  3)ic!jter  S)entfd()tanb§  tonrben  in 
bcr  SJlittel  be§  18.  3af)rf)nnbert32  geBoren3  :  —  go^ann 
SSotfgang  Don  ®otf)e  am  28.  5Ingnft  1749,  goljmra 
(^riftopf)  griebricfj  Don  ©djitter  am  10.  StoDemBer  1759. 

©otfje'S  ®eBnrt§ftabt±  toar  granffurt  am  Wain,  too 
fein  SSater  S)o!tor  ber  SRecIjte5  unb  faiferlid^er  SRatf)6  toar. 
Unter  Seitnng7  feineS  S3ater§  Bilbete  er  fid^8  burd§  ^rtt>at= 
unterricf)!9  fd^on  frii^e  Dtelfeittg10  au§,  befonberl11  in  ben 
S'latnrttJtffenfd^aften12,  in  ben  alien13  (Spradjen  nnb  im 
Sranjofifd^en,  ©ngltfc^en  nnb  3toliemfdj«i. 
bem  SBnnfc^e  feine§  ^Sater§  gemajj15  1765  bie 
2etp3tg,  nm  bort  bie  Stec^te17  jn  ftubtren.  9Zac§  einigen 
3a^ren  gtng  er  nad)  einem'fuqen  2(ufent^alt18  in  feinem 
elterltcfjen19  §aufe  anf  bie  Untfcerfitat  ©tragburg,  too  er 
feine  jnrifttfrfjen20  @tubien21  Beenbigte22  nnb  1771  al£ 
S)o!tor  ber  9led^te  promooirte23.  3)ann  leBte  er24  etne 
3eitlang  in  granffnrt  feinen  Dielfeitigen  Stnbien,  toar  etne 
furje  Qeit  Beim  9teicp!ammergertrf)t25  in  SBe^lar  praftifd^26 
Befd^aftigt27,  Bi£  er  1775  al§  ^e^eimer  SegationSrati)28 
nad^  SSeimar  Bernfen29  nnb  bort  ber  ^rennb  nnb  ^at^= 
geBer30  be§  trefflid^ensi  §erjog§  ^arl  $nguft  tonrbe.  3m 
ga^re  1797  jog  er  fidfj  Don  ben  (StaatSgefdfjaften32  ganj 
jnriic!,  nnb  totbmete33  feine  3)ienfte  nnr  nod^  ber  oBern 
Seitnng34  ber  toiffenf^aftlic^enss  unb  Shmft^nftitttte37, 
Befonber§  be§  2:^eater§.  1806  Dermcifjlte  er  fid^38,  Derlor  aBer 
feinen  eingigen  @o^n  5(uguft  1830  in  SRom  bnrc§  ben  Xob. 

(Sdn'tfer    erBlirfte39    in    2RarBad^    am    -Sftecfar,    einem 
in  SBurttemBerg,  ba§  Sid^t  ber 


1  middle,  2  century,  3  born,  4  native  town,  5  doctor  of  laws,  6  im- 
perial counsellor.  7  direction,  8  he  was  educated  in,  9  private  instruction, 
10  numerous  subjects,  11  especially,  12  physics,  13  ancient,  14  he  entered, 
15  according  to,  16  university,  17  law,  18  stay,  19  parents',  20  juridical, 
21  studies,  22  finished,  23  took  the  degree  of,  24  he  g:;ve  himself  up,  25  im- 
perial chamber,  26  practically,  27  employed,  28  counselor  in  the  foreign  office, 
29  called,  30  adviser,  31  excellent,  32  affairs  of  state,  33  to  devote,  widmtn, 
34  superintendence,  35  scientific,  36  art,  37  institutions,  38  he  was  married, 
89  saw,  40  a  small  country-town,  41  the  lucbt 


293 

<Sein  SSater  tear  bamate  Sieutenant,  riidte1  ftater 
gum  Sftajor  fcor  unb  tourbe  ®ommanbitnt2  bel  fjerjogltdjen 
£uftfdjloffe§3  (Solttube.  ®ie  erfte  SSorbilbung4  er^telt 
<5d)tffer  aitf  ber  ®arl§a!abemie5  in  (Stuttgart.  (£r  tooEte 
X^eologie  ftubtren,  gab  biefen  SSunfcl)  after  aitf  unb  toib* 
mete  fid)  ber  $Red}t§toiffenfd)aft,6  unb  nad^er  ber  SJlebt^in.7 
•ftadjbem  er  1780  SRegimentSarjt8  in  Stuttgart  getoorben 
toar,  erfjielt  er  in  Sotge9  ber  §erau§gabe10  feiner  „  dauber" 
*>om  iJer-jog  ben  SBefefjI,  nidjtS  $nbere§  bruden  gu  laffen 
«te  28erle  iiBer  bie  §ett!unbeii.  ®iefem  Sroange12  ent* 
£og  er  \itf)^  burd^  bie  gludjtu.  @r  lam  1782  nac§ 
^ann^eim,  rao  er  X^eaterbi^teris  ttjurbe,  begab  fic^16  bann 
nad^  9)latn§  unb  1785  nadj  Seipjig,  nac^^er  nadjj  ®re§ben 
unb  ftebelte17  1787  nad)  SBeimar  iiber18,  S'lac^bem  er 

1789  ^rofeffor  ber  ^ef^id^te  in  Sena  geroorben  unb  fic§ 

1790  fcermap  §atte;  lebte  er  Don  1794  ab  Big  §u  fetnem 
Xobe  in  tiertrautefter19  Sreunbfd^aft20  unb  ,8ufammennnr* 
fung21  mit  ©ot§e,  unb  nafjm    1799    feinen   bleibenben22 

in  2Beimar.  5Iu§  ber  tebenbtgen2^  28ed)fef= 
fotc§  augerorbentlic^er26  ^rcifte27  gtngen28  nun 
in  raf^er^o  golge3i  jene  reifftenS2  unb  ge^attt)ollften33 
^)ic^tungen34  Ijerfcor29,  bie  ba§  beutfci^e  SSolf  lute  feme 
beften  @c^a^e35  betoa^rt36.  5)er  jiingere  (Skitter  ftarb 
f^on  1805,  toctfjrenb  @ot^e  ein  ^atriar^enalter37  er* 
rei^te  unb  erft  1832  btcfc  SSelt38  berliefi.  SSeibe  ^Jtc^ter 
ru^en  neben  einanber39  in  ber  Siirftengruft40  ^u  SSeimar, 

3)lan  §at  §ur  S3eurt5eilung4i  @ot^e'§  unb  S^iaer'g 
Mdjer  gefc^rieben  unb  fi^  lange  fjerumgeftritten42,  roer  don 
i^nen  ber  (^rofjere  fei.  55er  ©treit43  §at  fid)  enblid)4*  be= 
rujigt45;  man  nwrbe  ein§46,  fie  mit  einanber  ju  fetern47, 
unb  fteHt48  nun  ifjre  33ilbniffe50  anf49,  tote  bie  Wen^i  mit 
§eroenbilbern52  i§re  SBo^nungen  §terten53. 


1  to  advance,  vorriicken,  2  commander,  3  ducal  pleasure-castle,  4  prepara- 
tory education,  5  academy  founded  by  duke  Charles,  6  science  of  law,  7  medi- 
cine, 8  regimental  surgeon,  9  in  consequence,  10  publication,  11  healing  art, 
12  compulsion,  13  he  freed  himself  from,  14  flight,  15  dramatic  poet,  16  went, 
17  &  18  settled,  19  most  intimate,  20  friendship,  21  co-operation,  22  per- 
manent, 23  stay,  24  active,  25  reciprocal  effect,  26  extraordinary,  27  facul- 
ties, 28  &  29  originated,  30  rapid,  31  succession,  32  most  matured,  33  most 
comprehensive,  34  poetical  works,  35  treasures,  36  guards,  37  patriarchal  age, 
38  world,  39  side  by  side,  40  ducal  tomb,  41  in  judgment,  42  disputed, 
43  controversy,  44  at  last,  45  calmed  down,  46  agreed,  47  to  celebrate,  feiern, 
48  &  49  are  put  up,  50  effigies,  51  ancients,  52  images  of  domestic  deities  and  of 
Heroes,  53  embellished. 


294 

APPENDIX. 

The  principal  rules,  &c.,  for  learning  the  German  language  in 
an  easy  and  practical  manner  having  been  given  with  numerous  exer- 
cises, it  only  remains  to  give  in  the  following  supplement  the  remaining 
rules  which  are  of  no  vital  importance,  but  which  a  student,  who 
wishes  to  study  the  German  language  thoroughly,  must  have  ready 
for  reference. 

We  also  give  full  lists  and  explanations  concerning  the  use  of 
German  cases  and  the  use  of  prepositions,  which  will  be  found  usefuL 


On  the  Article  and  the  Noun. 

(see  also  page  226.) 

1.  The  indefinite  article  is  omitted : 
a.)  In  many  a  and  no  less  a;  as, 

mandje  gamtlie,  many  a  family    fein  geringeter  IXann,  no  less  a  man 
b. )  In  expressions  like : 

in  SButlj,  in  a  passion  in  ©tie,  in  a  hurry  ntit  fdjnmdjer  ©ttmmc „ 
in  a  faint  voice.  Sdj  Ijabe  Kopftoei  £uften,  «.,  I  have  a  head-ache, 
a  cough,  etc. 

c.)  Before  nouns  denoting  the  profession  of  a  person  which  is  the 
subject  of  the  sentence  ;  as, 

©r  ifl  ©olbat.  He  is  a  soldier,  ©eine  ©djttefter  ttwrbe  @djau« 
fjrielerin.  His  sister  became  an  actress. 

2.  The  definite  article  is  omitted  before  names  of  the  cardinal 
points  when  preceded  by  the  prepositions  gegen  or  nacf) ;  as, 

gegen  Dften,  towards  the  East     nod)  SSeften,  to  the  West. 

3.  The  definite  article  is  used  : 

a.)  With  the  preposition  j»  after  verbs  denoting  to  make,  etc.,   a 
person  something  ;  as, 

©r  timrbe  sum  ®enerol  ernannt.  He  was  appointed  general, 
(fcr  ift  jiim  Surgermeifter  gerodljlt  njorben.  He  has  been  elected  mayor. 

b.)  In  expressions  like  : 

3ft  ba§  griififtucf  —  ba§  3Kittageffen  —  bo*  «6cnbc[fen  —  bcr  Zljet 
— fertig?  (see  page  228.) 

Also  in: 

in  bcr  ©tabt— fHrc^e— ©rfjule,  in  town— church— school  in  trie 
gtobt— ftirdje— €djule,  to  town — church— school. 

e.)  With  the  names  of  streets  ;  as, 

34  woljne  in  ber  g5nig?jrca&e.    I  am  living  in  King  street. 


295 

d.)  Usually  with  the  following  words  : 

ber  aftenfdj,  man  (mankind)  ba§  ©efefc,  law 

bie  Sftatur,  nature 
bie  gett,  time 
bie  Sitte,  custom 
bo§  ©cMcffal,  fate 


ba§  $arabie§,  paradise 
ber  £immel,  heaven 
bie  ^8tte,  hell 
ber  Smrft,  thirst 
ber  ^unger,  hunger 
bo§  2e6en,  life 
ber  Sob,  death 
ber  Stieg,  war 


ba§  ©liicf,  fortune,  happiness 
bo§  UnglM,  misfortune 
bie  SSoriefyung,  providence 


Examples.—  Ser  Slrjt  !om  ju  fpat,  ber  Sob  war  fcfjon  eingetreten.  Th« 
physician  came  too  late,  death  had  already  taken  place.  Sie  <5itte  tierbtetet  e8. 
Custom  prohibits  it. 

EXCEPTION.  —  No  article  with  the  above  words  is  used  in  : 

2)urft  —  ^unger  Ija&en,  to  be  thirsty  —  hungry.  ©liicf  —  UnglitcE  Ijaben 
to  be  lucky  —  unlucky.  2luf  (urn)  Seben  unb  Sob,  for  life  and  death. 
3n  ®tieg  unb  grieben,  in  war  and  peace.  QJen  ^tmntel,  towards 
heaven. 

e.)  Sometimes  with  the  Genitive  of  foreign  names  of  persons  ending 
in  §,  £,  a;  as, 

3)er  Sob  be§  SoIroteS.    The  death  of  Socrates. 

/.)  Occasionally  with  names  of  persons  for  the  sake  of  distmctness5 
or  in  an  emphatic  way  ;  as, 

%%  Stefie  ©Stfje  bem  ©fitter  tior.  I  prefer  Goethe  to  Schiller, 
2)0  ift  ber  Sett.  There  is  Tell  (that  well  known  man). 

4.  The  name  of  a  person,  preceded  by  a  noun  denoting  rank, 
title  or  profession,  or  by  the  words  £>err,  $rcm,  ^raiiteitt,  is  often 
used  with  the  article  ;  of  course  the  name  of  the  person  not  then 
being  declined  ;  as, 

bie  &rteg§!uttft  be§  gfelbntorfdiajlS  Sttoltfe,  the  strategy  of  field- 
marshal  Moltke.  3)iefe§  £au§  get)8rt  bent  ga&rifanten  (&errn)  Skaun. 
This  house  belongs  to  Mr.  Braun,  the  manufacturer.  (Sr  ift  eir 
©cljitter  be§  ^terrn  ^rofefforS  ^afyl.  He  is  a  pupil  of  professor  Pahl 

Notes.  1.—  The   word   §err  in  polite  society  is  placed  before  the  "title 
or  rank,"  etc.,  and  even  in  the  same  manner  the  words  2frau  and  Qfrauleitt;  asi 
ber  $err  $eraog  (S).),  the  Duke  of  D.     bie  grait   ©eneral  (91.), 
Mrs.  N.  (wife  of  General  N.) 

2.—  If  the  word  grautein  precedes  a  proper  name,  the  feminine  article 
to  preference  to  the  neuter  article  is  usually  employed;  as, 

3$  Begegnete  ber  (also  bent)  Sraulein  ©djmibt.    I  met  Miss  Schmidt 

5.  If  no  article  is  employed  with  the  name  of  a  person  pre- 
ceded by  a  noun  denoting  rank,  title  or  profession,  the  name  of  the 
person  only  is  declined  ;  as, 


Sprofeffot  $afir§  ©cfjrtften,  Professor  Pahl's  writings      mit  gurfe 
with  Prince  Bismarck. 


Note.—  However  the  word  $err  is  declined  as  well  ;  as, 
£errn  ©djmibt'S  ^ferbe.    Mr.  Schmidt's  horses. 

6.  According  to  the  rule  given  on  page  226  masculine  and 
neuter  nouns  expressing  measure,  number  and  weight,  are  only  used 
in  the  singular,  if  preceded  by  a  numeral  and  followed  by  a  noun  or 
adjective  whether  expressed  or  understood.  —  To  this  rule  the 
following  additions  are  to  be  made  : 


296 


•a.)  Feminine  nouns  of  this  kind  are  used  in  the  plural ;  as, 

brei  fjlofdjen  SBein,  three  bottles  of  wine      fed)§  Xonnen  ®ol)ten, 
six  tons  of  coal. 

6.)  Nouns  denoting  a  measure  or  division  of  time  are  also  used  in 
the  plural;  as, 
fedj§  Xage  lang,  for  six  daji    brei  Qaljre  alt,  three  years  old. 

c.)  The  German  coins  bet  pfennig  and  bie  Sftarf  with  a  numeral  are 
not  declined ;  as, 

20  pfennig,  twenty  pfennigs    jeljn  9ttorf,  ten  marks. 

7.  The  following  plural  nouns  cannot  be  used  in  the  singular : 


$ie  ©cbruber,  the  brothers 

irte    (Sefdjroifter,    the    brothers    and 

sisters 

bie'  ©Item,  the  parents 
bie  Seute,  the  people 
iie  93einfteiber,  the  trousers 
"bie  2Ityen,  the  Alps 
bie  ^?ocfen,  the  small-pox 
tie  inolfen,  the  whey 
•We- Ginfiinfte,  the  revenue 


bie  Soften,  the  expense 

(Unloften) 

bie  6peiett,  the  charges 

bie  SRdnfe,  the  intrigues 

bie  Drummer,  the  ruins 

bie  gmeit,  the  holidays 

bie  §aften,  Lent 

bie  Dftern,  Easter 

bie  ^Sfingften,  Whitsuntide 

bie  SBeiljnadjten,  Christmas 


8.  The  following  nouns  are  used  in  the  singular  if  denoting 
•one,  and  in  the  plural  if  denoting  more  than  one; — if  denoting  the 
whole  of  their  kind  they  may  be  used  in  the  singular  or  plural : 

bie  gorette,  the  trout 
&0§  SRel),  the  deer,  roe 
bo*  ©djaaf,  the  sheep 
ba§  Sdjttjein,  the  pig.  swine 
ba§  Sllmofen,  the  alms 
ba§  Uftittel,  the  means 
bie  ycflrorimt  )  ji 
bie  fteuigleit  f the  news 
ber  SRotljidjIag,  the  advice 

when  used  in  English  with  pair  of 


_  *,  the  beUows 
tie  SPriHe*,  the  spectacles 
iie  fiidjtpufce*,  the  snuffers 
bie  ©djere*,  the  scissors,  shears 
bie  gonge*,  the  tongs,  pincers 
ber  Birfel*,  the  compasses 
bie  grudjt,  the  fruit 
bie  Jbljle,  the  coal 
bie  Spargel,  the  asparagus 
ber  giidj,  the  fish 

Note.— The  above  nouns  marked  with  a 
do  not  require  these  words  in  German;  as, 

cine  ©djere,  a  pair  of  scissors     brei  23riHen,  three  pairs  of  spectacles. 

9.  The  following  nouns  may  be  used  in  the  singular  or  plural: 

"bie  £»oir,  the  breeches 

ber  £u!er.trfiger,  the  braces 

ic-5  (rmgetoeibe,  the  bowels 

bc^  ya-u-,  the  hair 

"ber  jtjorrjdjritt,  the  progress 

fco§  ©efcpft  business,  is  used  in  the  plural  in  expressions  like :— bie  ©efdjafte 

gety-n  frfjtedjt  (also  bo§  ©efdjaft  ge^t  fd)Ierf)t),  business  is  bad.      @r  ntodjt 

0ule  ®efdjdfte.    He  does  a  good  business. 

See  also  page  17,  No.  6. 

10.  If  derivative  or  compound  substantives  are  connected  by 
a  co-ordinative  conjunction  and  their  last  component  is  the  same 
noun,  the  latter  may  be  used  with  the  last  substantive  only  ;  as, 

ber  SIuf=iinb  Untergong  ber  ©onne,  the  rising  and  setting  of  the 
sun  SMef'ober  SonV-eipapier,  note  paper  or  foolscap  paper  fottjoljl 
bie  £au§=als  aud)  bie  ®artenti)itre,  both  the  street  :md  garden  door. 


bie  ®enntitifc  (PL:  bie  Senntniffe),  the 

knowledge 
ber  SReidjtljum  (PL:  bie  SReidjtljumer), 

the  riches 


297 
On  the  Preposition  OF  and  the  Genitive  of  Nouns. 

11.  The  preposition  of  is  rendered  by  Don  instead  of  by  the 
Genitive  in  the  following  cases  : 

a.)  With  names  of  countries  and  places  in  the  cases  mentioned 

on  page  44. 

b.)  Before  cardinal  numbers  as  mentioned  on  page  122. 
c.)  Usually  with    demonstrative,  interrogative,  and   indefinite  pro- 
nouns and  after  numerals  or  a  superlative  ;  as, 

ba§jenige  toon  biefen  S3ud)ern,  tt>eld)e§  ...,  that  of  these  books, 
which  ...  hjeldjer  Don  ^firen  $unben?  which  of  your  dogs?  igemanb 
ton  feinen  fieuten,  some  one  of  his  people  jtoei  Don  meinen  SSriibern, 
two  of  my  brothers  bo§  fcefte  toon  jeinen  ^Sferben,  the  best  of  his  horses. 

d.}  Before  abstract  nouns,  names  of  material  and  plural  nouns,  if 
they  qualify  or  determine  the  preceding  noun  ;  as, 

ein  Strati  toon  £offnuna,  a  ray  of  hope  etn  ©eraufdj  bon  SSaffer, 
a  noise  of  water  etne  Stette  Don  (or  au3)(*)  (Sifter,  a  chain  of 
silver  ba§  ©eraffel  toon  SMbern,  the  clattering  of  wheels  cin  SKantt 
tjon  jeltenen  gafiigfetten,  a  man  of  rare  qualities. 

Notes.  1.— The  greater  part  of  such  nouns  can  be  compounded,  the  second 
preceding  the  first  noun  and  taking  usually,  if  an  abstract  noun,  an  $  (or  e§) ;  as, 

ein  lioffnungSftrabl     eine  ©il&erfette. 

2. — Instead  of  the  noun  denoting  solid  material,  the  corresponding  adjective 
may  also  be  used;  as, 

eine  filberne  Kette,  a  silver  chain. 

3.— Many  of  these  and  other  nouns  are  even  used  in  the  compounded  form 
only,  then  haying  a  more  general  meaning;  as, 

bie  RricflStoiHenfdjaft,  the  science  of  war  ein  ®efdjaft§mann,  a 
man  of  business  ber  ©eridjtSfiof,  the  court  of  justice. 

12.  Of,  occurring  after  a  noun  derived  from  a  verb  or  an 
adjective  requiring  a  certain  preposition  in  German,  is  rendered 
by  the  same(**)  preposition  ;  as, 

ber  ©ebcmfe  an  ®ott,  the  thought  of  God  (from  benlen  on  (Ace.), 
to  think  of),  bie  SSerfiigung  ii&er  fein  SSermogen,  the  disposal  of  his 
fortune  (from  berfiigen  ii&er  (Ace.),  to  dispose  of),  bie  ©itelfeit  auf 
ityre  ©djonfieit,  the  vanity  of  her  beauty  (from  eitel  auf  (Ace.),  vain  of). 

13.  The  Genitive  is  not  expressed  in  German  with  nouns 
where  in  English  the  second  noun  is  understood  ;  as, 

3d;)  ttmr  &ei  feinem  Dnfel.  I  was  at  his  uncle's  (house),  ©eljen 
@te  jum  gleifdjer.  Go  to  the  butcher's  (shop). 

Note. — With  proper  names  denoting  public  places    the  second  noun  must 
be  put  in  German;  as, 

(Sinb  @ie  fcljon  in  ber  @t.  (Sonfr)  Spaul'l  ^ird^e  getoefen?  Have 
you  ever  been  to  St.  Paul's. 

14.  The  preposition  of,  as  the  sign  of  the  Genitive,  is  not 
rendered  in  German  : 

a.)  Before  names  of  months,  countries,  and  places  (towns,  villages, 
etc.},  preceded  by  a  word  descriptive  of  them,  the  proper  name 
being  not  then  declined  ;  as, 

ber  Sftonot  9Rai,  the  month  of  May  ber  13te  3ult,  the  13th  of 
July  (bie  ®tobt(t)  8«Itn,  the  city  of  Berlin  (ber  StooKt)  Men, 
the  state  of  Hesse  bie  geftung  UHaiitj,  the  fortress  of  Mayence. 

(*)  With  materials  also  auS  instead  of  Don  may  be  used. 
(**)  This  is  always  the  case  if  a  noun  is  derived  from  such  a  verb  or  adjective, 

whether  the  equivalent  of  the  preposition  be  in  English  of  or  not. 
(t)  bie  <8tabt,  ber  Staat,  in  this  position,  are  seldom  expressed  in  German 


Grammar  I0# 


298 

b.)  After  nouns  expressing  number,  measure,  weight  or  quantity  ;  as, 

brci  afleter   2ud&,   three  metres  of  cloth      brei  2age  SRaft,  three 

days  of  rest     em  $funb  Sutler,  a  pound  of  sugar     eine  Saffe  Sbee, 

a  cup  of  tea     ein  Dtegiment  ^nfanterie,  a  regiment  of  foot  (soldiers) 

cine  Slnjabl  Sufcijfluer,  a  number  of  spectators. 

Notes.  1. — The  second  noun  should  always  be  in  the  Genitive,  however,  it  is 
usually  considered  now  to  be  in  apposition  with  the  preceding  noun  and  therefore 
in  the  same  case  ;  as, 

@r  broc&te  einen  93edjer  alien  SBein.    He  brought  a  goblet  of  old 
wine.      m\t  biefer  glaftfce  SBter,  with  this  bottle  of  beer,      gflr  xaei 
9Keter  gutei  £udj,  for  two  metres  of  good  cloth.      9JHt  etnent  $aar 
neuen  £anbid)uben  (also  Genitive :  neuer  £anbfdjulje). 
2.— If  the  second  noun  is  accompanied  by  an  article  or  a  determinative 
adjective  "of"  is  usually  translated  Bon;  as, 

ein  @Ia§  toon  biefem  SSein,  a  glass  of  this  wine  ein  Sufcenb  bon 
Sbren  ®rfigen,  a  dozen  of  your  collars  btei  $funb  ton  bem  Coffee, 
ben  <5ie  mtr  geftern  empfoblen  b.aben,  three  pounds  of  the  coffee,  you 
recommended  me  yesterday. 


On  the  Qualifying-  Adjective. 

15.  Attributive  Adjectives,  in  poetry,  are  sometimes  found 
undeclined,  and  either  preceding  or  following  the  noun ;  as, 

ein  bormloS  SSoIf  bon  Bitten,  a  harmless  people  of  herdsmen 
ein  Sbelfnedjr,  fanft  unb  fedt,  an  esquire,  gentle  yet  daring  ein 
SR6§Iein  rotb,  a  little  red  rose. 

16.  Adjectives  used  as  nouns  and  having  a  general  meaning 
or  being  preceded  by  an  indefinite  pronoun  or  numeral,  are  of 
the  neuter  gender  and  follow  the  declension  of  adjectives;  as, 

bo§  ©d)5ne,  the  beautiful  ba§  35eut)"dje,  the  German  btei  (SuteS, 
much  good  ntit  ettoaS  9ieuem,  with  something  new  toentg  (SbleS, 
little  that  is  noble  nidjt§  ®roBe3,  nothing  great. 

17.  Such  adjectives,  if  having  a  more  definite  meaning,  do 
not  change,  except  in  the  Genitive,  when  they  add  §  (or  e§) ;  as, 

ba8  83Iau  beS  ^immelS,  the  blue  of  the  sky  bet  SHnblid  be* 
foftigen  OriinS,  the  sight  of  the  fresh  green.  @r  fprirfjt  ein  retne§ 
SJeutjdj.  He  speaks  a  pure  German. 

18.  If  two  adjectives  qualifying  a  noun,  imply  one  idea,  the 
second  is  declined  only;  as, 

ber  frans5ftfd)=beutid)e  ®rieg,  the  Franco-German  war  eine  fdjttmrj 
unb  toeifee  gafine,  a  black  and  white  flag. 

19.  Names  of  places  can  be  used  as  adjectives  by  adding  er, 
beginning  with  a  capital  letter  and  being  then  not  declined ;  as, 

bet  fiSIner  S)om,  the  cathedral  of  Cologne  bie  garbe  eine§  £on« 
boner  SlebelS,  the  colour  of  a  London  fog. 

Note.— Sometimes  they  are  also  formed  by  ifd)  instead  of  er,  in  which 
case  they  must  be  declined;  as,— ber  Solnifdje  S5om. 

On  the  Declension  of  Adjectives  if  preceded  by  de- 
terminative words. 

20.  On  pages  60,  64  &  68,  it  was  explained  how  an  attributive  ad- 
jective preceded  by  an  article  or  substitute  must  be  declined. — As  these 
rules   are,  however,  not  always  strictly  observed,    some  additional 
remarks  are  given : 


299 

a.)  After  the  words  fold)er  and  tncmdjer  the  adjective  is  some- 
times found  with  the  terminations  of  bicfcr;  as, 

foldjeS    fd)5ne§    (instead  of  jd)6ne)    2Beuer,    such   fine    weather 
monger  alter  (instead  of  alte)  2ttann,  many  an  old  man. 
Note.— It  is,  however,  often  preferred  to  abbreviate  foldjer  or  also  mondjet 
in  all  cases  into  fold)  or  mantf),  if   followed   by  an   adjective,    which  must 
take  the  termination  of  btefet  in  this  case ;  as, 

fold)  fdj5ne§  SBetter     mand)  alter  9Jlann. 

6.)  After  the  words  Dieter  (biete),  after,  etntger  (etttcfjer),  meljrere, 
the  adjective  is  sometimes  declined  as  if  preceded  by  the 
definite  article ;  as, 

alte  guten  (instead  of  gute)  Scute,  all  the  good  people  etntget 
neue  (instead  of  neuer)  SBein,  some  new  wine. 

e.)  If  foldjer  or  any  indefinite  numeral  is  preceded  by  an  article 
or  a  determinative  adjective,  they  take  the  termination  of 
an  adjective  preceded  by  such  word ;  as, 

in  cittern  foldjen  ©orten,  in  such  a  garden  toegen  fetner  totelen 
©djulben,  on  account  of  his  many  debts. 

21.  Adjectives,  like  articles,  and  other  determinative  words, 
must  be  repeated  before  each  noun  in  succession  if  the  nouns  are 
of  different  genders  or  numbers,   and  qualified  by  the  same 
adjective  ;  as, 

©r  f)at  cine  franfe  Srrau  iinb  franfe  ®inber.  He  has  a  sick  wife 
and  children.  $aben  @te  fdjon  ttnfer  neue§  $au?  iinb  unfern  neuen 
©arten  gefeljen?  Have  you  seen  our  new  house  and  garden  yet? 

On  the  Pronouns,  Determinative  Adjectives,  and 
Numerals. 

22.  On  page  238  it  was  shown  that  the  possessive  adjectives  (my, 
thy,  etc.)  if  occurring  with  parts  of  the  body  or  clothes,  etc.,  are  usually 
rendered  by  the  article,  a  personal  pronoun,  etc. 

Sometimes  these  parts  of  the  body,  etc.,  must  be  used  with  a 
preposition,  and  the  personal  pronoun  in  the  Accusative  or 
Dative. — If  my,  thy,  etc.  denote  the  same  person  as  the  subject, 
the  reflective  pronoun  must  be  employed. — Verbs  requiring  such 
prepositions  are : 


fdjneiben  in  (Ace.)  irr.,  to  cut  (into) 
fiedjen  in  (Ace.)  irr.,  to  prick  (into) 
tierfe^en  an  (Dat.),  to  hurt  (one's  ...) 
toerrounben    an    (Dat.),     to    wound 

(one's  ..,) 
inS  ©eftdjt— in  tie  $ugen— fdjlagen  irr. 

— feljen  irr.,  to  strike,  to  look  into 


auf  ben  Stitcfen— auf  bie  ©djutter,  etc. 

— fdjlagen  irr. — flopfen,  to  strike, 

to  pat  on  one's  back — shoulder,  etc. 
auf  bie  giifje,  etc.  treten  irr.,  to  step 

on  one's  feet,  etc. 
6et  ben  |>aaren  retfjen  irr.,   to  pull 

one's  hair 


one's  face — into  one's  eyes,  &c. 
Examples.— @§   ftadj   mid)   (also  ink)  in  ben  Slrnt.    He  pricked  my  arm. 
©r  berttmnbete  fid)   am  93ein.     He  wounded  his  leg.      3dj  trot  iljnt 
(also  iljn)  auf  ben  5u?3.    I  stepped  on  his  foot. 

Notes.  1.— ©dmeiben,  fiecfjen,  have  the  pronoun  usually  in  the  Accusative 
(or  also  Dative) ;  fd)Iogen,  Iloipfen,  treten,  usually  in  the  Dative  (or  also  Ao- 
cusative);  feljen  in  the  Dative;  toerlefcen,  toerrounDen,  reifjen  in  the  Accus- 
ative only. 

2  —The  pronoun  must  be  always  in  the  Dative  if  the  noun  with  a  prepo- 
sition is  preceded  by  an  object  in  the  Accusative  ;  as, 

3d)  natjnt  ifjm  ben  83rief  au3  bex  $anb.    I  took  the  letter  out  of 
his  hand. 


800 

23.  SDer  tneintge  or  bet  mehte,  etc.,  may  be  used  substantively 
in  cases  like  the  following : 

Etc  SHeinigen  (or  bie  9tteinen)  laffen  fid)  ben  3&rigen  (or  ben  3!jren) 
entyfeljlen.  My  people  (family1*  send  their  compliments  to  yours. 
SBir  ^aben  ba§  Unfrige  (or  llnfrc)  getljan,  bie  Slnbern  follen  ba3  Qljrige 
(or  Sljre)  tljun.  We  have  done  our  duty,  let  the  others  do  theirs. 
Seber  foU  bo§  ©cine  (or  ©einige)  Ijaben.  Let  everyone  have  his  own. 

24.  2ftein  £err  corresponds  to  the  English  sir,  and  mein 
ijrr&uletn  to  miss;  however,  they  are  not  so  frequently  used  in  con- 
versation as  in  English. — Sometimes  simply  £err  with  the  name 
or  title  following,  or  fjrauletn  with  the  name  following  are  used. 

Madam  is  rendered  by  9ftabam,  or  by  grau  with  the  title 
following. 

Gentlemen,  is  expressed  by  meine  ^erren;  Ladies,  by  meine 
Seamen;  Ladies  and  Gentlemen,  2fteme  Jerren  unb  Stamen. 

26.  In  polite  speaking  of  somebody's  relations,  in  German, 
the  words  £err,  $rau,  graulein  are  inserted  between  gfjr,  etc. 
and  the  noun  ;  as, 

Sljr  $ert  ©entaljl,  S^re  grau  ©ema^Itn,  3^re  2rr5ulem  Softer,  etc. 
Your  husband,  your  wife,  your  daughter,  etc. 

26.  The  demonstrative  biefer,  etc.  is  often  used  for  the  En- 
glish tlie  latter  (ber  lefctere),  and  jener  for  the  former  (ber  erftere) ;  as, 

S)er  JDfftjier  rief  bem  6olbaten,  aBer  biefer  ^5rte  i^n  ntc^t.  The 
officer  called  the  soldier,  but  the  latter  did  not  hear  him. 

27.  Such  as,  meaning  those  who,  are  rendered  by  btejeningen 
(or  bie);  toeldje  (see  page  108) ;  as, 

SJiejenigen,  toeldje  ungliicfltdj  ftnb.    Such  as  are  unhappy. 

28.  The  very  same  is  rendered  e&enberjelbe,  etc. ;  as, 

an  efcenbemienien  Zage,  on  the  very  same  day. 

29.  What,  if  subject  of  to  be,  and  referring  to  a  following  noun 
is  (rendered  roeldjeS ;  as, 

SSeldjeS  ftnb  3Ijre  SBebingungen?    What  are  your  terms? 
SO.  Which,  referring  to  whole  phrases  is  rendered  fi?a3 ;  as, 

SBa§  tuoHen  ©te  tljun,  fmgen  ober  ftlabter  f^ielen?  Which  will 
you  do,  sing  or  play  the  piano?  ©efyen  ©ie  in§  Ujeater  ober  tn8 
Concert?— 3dj  toeife  noi)  nicfjt,  ttm§  i%  t^un  tterbe.  Do  you  go  to  the 
theatre  or  to  the  concert?— I  do  not  know  yet  which  I  ahall  do. 

81.  The  relative  of  which,  standing  with  a  noun  which  de- 
scribes a  preceding  noun  is  rendered  by  the  Genitive  toeldje§  in 
the  masculine  or  neuter,  and  luetdjer  in  feminine  or  plural ;  as, 

(Stcero,  tteltfjeS  gro&en  StebnerS  ©djrtften  icf)  gelefen  ^a6e.  Cicero 
the  works  of  which  great  orator  I  have  read. 

82.  All  cardinal  numbers,  if  used  substantively,  are  declined 
according  to  the  common  rules. 

They  are  of  the  feminine  gender,  except  £unbert  and  !£cwfenb 
which  are  neuter  ;  as, 

bie  Kng,  bie  gtoei,  etc.    Plural :  bie  (Einfen,  hie  8»ei«t,  etc. 
ba§  fcunbert,  bo8  Xoufenb.    Plural:  $unberte,  Xaufenbe. 


301 

38.  Frequently  these  numbers  are  of  the  masculine  gender 
instead  of  the  feminine,  but  in  this  case  they  are  formed  by- 
adding  er;  as, 

bet  ©iner,  bet  Sfeeter,  etc.    Plural  :  bte  ©tner,  bie  Stueiet,  etc. 

34.  If  they  have  an  adjectival  meaning  (i.e.  if  the  noun  re- 
ferred to  is  understood  only),  they  add  e  in  the  plural  (en  in 
the  Dative)  ;  as, 

aHe  9leune  to  erf  en,  to  knock  down  all  nine  (ninepins)  auf  aflett 
SBieren,  on  all  fours  (hands  and  feet). 

85.  They  may  signify  the  age  of  a  person  by  adding  er;  as, 
ein  SSterjtger,  a  man  of  forty     ein  Sunfjiger,  a  man  of  fifty. 

36.  By  taking  er  they  may  also  signify  the  year  when  a  par^ 
ticular  event  took  place  ;  as, 

(£r  tft  ein  (Sldjtgeljntjimbert)  trierunbfiinfjiger.  He  was  born  in  1854. 
S)er  (^^tse^n^unbert)  funfunfefedjjtger  SBein  tear  gut.  The  1865  wine. 
was  good. 

37.  In  asking  for  the  number  of  a  person  or  thing  ber  tote* 
fcielte,  etc.  is  used  ;  as, 

3)er  hriebtelte  ift  31jr  ©oljn  in  ber  (adjure?  What  number  has 
your  son  at  school?  Stte  hrieirielte  Station  tft  eS  toon  fjier?  How 
many  stations  is  it  from  here?  Hence  :  ber  hrie&ielte  (STag  be§  2ftonat§) 
tft  f)eute?  What  is  the  date?  (see  page  121.) 

38.  9ltt  if  used  in  a  general  sense  is  3ltte3   (declined  like 
biefeS);  as, 

9lHeS  tft  berloren.  All  is  lost.  SSon  Mem  bem  toetfj  id)  nid)t§.. 
Of  all  that  I  know  nothing. 

39.  All  that  meaning  all  which,  used  in  a  general  sense  is 
rendered  $Ce3  ft>ct§,  whether  that  is  expressed  or  understood  ;  as, 


§,  toa§  er  fagte,  tuar  nidjt  njo^r.    All  that  he  said  was  not 
true.    2Bor  bie§  SlHe§,  loa§  er  fd)rie&?    Was  this  all  he  wrote? 

40.  2lfle§  is  sometimes  used  in  the  sense  of  everybody,  in- 
stead of  9HIe;  as, 

SineS  toerltefj  (or  Sltte  toerltejjen)  bo§  Stnttnet.    All  left  the  room. 

41.  5IH,  followed  by  a  demonstrative  or  possessive  adjective, 
may  be  declined  (like  biejer),  or  not  ;  as, 

alter  (or  att)  unfer  SBein,  all  our  wine      aHe  (or  aH)  btefe  SSutter, 
all  this  butter      oHeS  (or  all)  biefeS  ©elb,  all  this  money      oQe  (or 
aH)  fetne  ^inber,  all  his  children. 
Note.  —  SIK  is  found  undeclined  especially  in  the  masculine  and  neuter. 

42.  The  definite  article  instead  of  being  omitted  may  also- 
follow  oil,  which  in  this  case  is  not  declined  ;  as, 

oU  ba§  ©elb  (or  atte§  ©etb),  all  the  money      OH  bie   banner  (or 
aHe  banner),  all  the  men. 

43.  Stff  can  even  follow  the  noun,  in  which  case  it  is  always 
declined  ;  as, 

©etne  tfjunbe  fmb  aHe  berfauft  toorben.    His  dogs  have  all  beeo 
sold.    3^  gafie  ba§  ©etb  atte§  uertoren.    I  have  lost  all  the  money. 


302 

44.  Each,  preceded  by  a  noun  expressing  measure,  number,  or 
weight,  is  rendered  by  je  which  in  German  precedes  such  noun ;  as, 

3Me?e  ©tocfe  foften  ie  3  Sftarf.  These  sticks  cost  3  marks  each. 
S^  fd)i<fte  S^nen  2  ®iften  Sljee  toon  je  25  *Pfunb.  I  sent  you  2  cases 
of  tea  of  25  pounds  each. 

45.  Both,  used  without  a  noun,  is  beibe,  which  is  declined  like 
bieje  (plural);  as, 

Si)  Ijatte  jtcei  SBruber,  aber  Beibe  ftnb  al§  Jhtaben  geftorben.  I  had 
two  brothers,  but  both  died  when  boys. 

46.  23etbe(n)  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  §tuei  (two) ;  as, 

meine  beiben  (or  jtcet)  ©djroeftern,  my  two  sisters. 

47.  SStel  or  tuentg,  if  preceded  by  an  article  or  another  de- 
terminative word,  is  declined  like  an  adjective ;  as, 

ber  triele  28etn  fetn  triele?  ®elb  mit  biefer  iuenigen  Zintt,  with 
this  little  ink  meine  tcenigen  greunbe,  my  few  friends. 

48.  SStet  or  tuenig,  in  the  sense  of  many  kinds  of  or  few  kinds 
of,  is  declined  like  btefer;  as, 

SSieler  23ein  ift  nidjt  rein.  Much  wine  is  not  pure.  SBeniges 
SSaner  tntljalt  feine  Unreinigteiten.  Few  kinds  of  water  contain  no 
impurities. 

49.  SStel  or  toeing,  meaning  much  or  little  (of  the  same  sort), 
is  not  declined  in  the  singular ; — however,  in  the  plural  it  is 
usually  declined  ;  as, 

gii  triel  SBein  ift  fdjabltd}.  Too  much  wine  is  hurtful.  g§  ifi 
ttenig  Jinte  im  SHntenfaj}.  There  is  little  ink  in  the  inkstand. — But: 
e§  nnb  otele  (also  Die!)  2IepfeI  auf  biefem  SSaume.  There  are  many 
apples  on  this  tree.  SBentge  (also  ttenig)  2Jieni$en  njurben  fo  ^anbeln. 
Few  people  would  act  thus. 

50.  Sftandje  (plural)  is  sometimes  used  for  rendering  many 
or  some;  as, 

mondje  SJlen^tSen,  many  (some)  persons. 

61.  There  are  two  more  indefinite  numerals ;    viz : — fammt- 

Iid)er  or  ber  gefammte,  all  collectively,  all  togetlier,  and  fcerfdjiebener, 

some,  various,  sundry,  divers,  which  are  declined  like  adjectives ;  as, 

fammtltdjer  2Bein  or  ber  fammtltdje  or  ber  gefammte  SSein,  all  the 

wine  (together)      fammtlidje  greunbe  or  bie  fammtlidjen  or  bte   ge» 

fammten   greunbe,   all  the  friends  (together)      jjerfcftieDenel  papier, 

Borne   paper      berfdnebene  93idnner,   various  men      bie  oerfdjiebenen 

SWdnner,  the  various  men. 

52.  A  Monarch  in  writing  of  himself  or  herself  uses  the  first 
person  plural  of  the  personal  and  possessive  pronouns  or  adjec- 
tives, which  commence  then  with  a  capital ;  as, 

gomit  befdjten  SSir  (®aifer  SSilfielm)  Unierem  Pansier  ...,  there- 
fore We  (Emperor  William)  order  our  Chancellor  .... 

53.  The  possessive  adjectives,  occurring  with  nouns  denoting 
title  or  rank,  begin  with  a  capital  letter ;  as, 

3b,re  «Kaje[tat,  your  Majesty  Seine  (SjceEens,  ber  2Rinifter  »., 
his  Excellency,  Minister  X. 

Note.— Instead  of  3b,re  (your)  also  the  old  form  Ghtere  still  occurs,  which 
is  often  abreviated  into  (£n>.— Seine  is  sometimes  abreviated  into  ©e,  and 
Seiner  in  ©t. 


54.  Indefinite  numerals  or  adjectives,  with  which  the  noun  is 
understood,  referring  to  persons  of  both  sexes,  take  the  masculine 
gender  ;  as, 

SSon  ben  £erren  unb  ©omen  tooHte  jeber  juerft  im  Simmer  fein. 
Each  of  the  gentlemen  and  ladies  wished  to  be  first  in  the  room. 
$13  bet  lefcte  toon  b.er  ©efeUfdjaft  gegangen  war  ...,  when  the  last  of 
the  society  had  gone  ... 

Note.— Instead  of  the  masculine,  the  neuter  gender  is  sometimes  employed. 

55.  The  nominatives  of  the  personal  pronouns  id),  I;  bit,  thou; 
IDtr,  we,  and  @ie  or  tfjr,  yow;  if  followed  by  the  relative,  bet,  bie 
or  btt3(*),  etc.,  may  be  repeated  after  the  relative,  in  which  case 
the  verb  must  agree  in  number  and  person  with  the  personal 
pronoun.     Thus : 

id),  ber  idj,  I  who  I   Wit,  bie  ttrir,  we  who 

bit,  ber  bit,  thou  who  I    @ie,  ber  <Ste  (or  tfjr,  bie  iljr),  you  who 

Example :— id),  ber  id)  nie  an  SSerratJj  bente,  I  who  never  thinks  of  treason. 

Note.— If  the  personal  pronoun  is  not  repeated,  the  verb  agrees  with  the  reto- 
tive  pronoun,  as  in  English ;  as, 

id),  ber  nie  an  SSerratlj  benfr. 

56.  A  personal  pronoun  in  the  Genitive  may  precede  a  cardinal 
number,  meaning  then  a  party  of;  as, 

SBir  gingen  unferer  fed)§  ju  etner.i  ^Ijotograpljen.  Six  of  us  went 
to  a  photographer. 

57. — a.)  If  the  word  ever  (or  soever)  is  added  to  the  relatives 
who,  what,  etc.,  for  the  sake  of  emphasis ;  who,  what,  etc.,  are  ren- 
dered in  the  usual  way  by  tuer,  ttm§,  etc.,  and  ever  (or  soever)  by 
aitdj,  which  is  generally  placed  after  the  subject  or  object  of  the 
sentence ;  as, 

3dj  toitt  «jn  nidjt  feljen,  toer  er  and)  fein  mag.  I  will  not  see 
him  whoever  he  may  be.  3d)  blei&e  fein  2freunb,  tter  t^n  cud)  tier* 
laffen  mag.  I  remain  his  friend  whoever  may  abandon  him.  3d) 
glauBe  e§  nid)t,  h)a£  @ie  and)  fagen  mogen.  I  do  not  believe  it 
whatever  you  may  say. 

6.)  WTiatever  preceded  by  a  noun  is  rendered  by  toelrfjer  ... 
aiidj  or  toa§  fiir  (ein)  ...  aud) ;  as, 

SBeldje  Stit§fliid)te  Sie  aud)  geBraitdjen  mSgen.  Whatever  evasions 
you  may  make.  SSa§  fiir  SBein  Sie  aud)  trinlen  mfigen.  Whatever 
wine  you  may  drink. 

Note.— "Ever  or  soever"  in  these  positions  are  sometimes  rendered  also 
by  immer,  and)  immer  or  aud)  nur  instead  of  aud). 

c.)  Whatever  (or  at  all)  with  a  negation,  is  rendered  by  gar 
•which  must  precede  the  negation  ;  as, 

gar  SRiemanb,  nobody  whatever  (at  all)  gar  nid)t§,  nothing 
whatever  (at  all)  gar  fein  ©elb,  no  money  whatever  (at  all),  etc. 

(*)  After  these  pronouns  ber,  etc.  is  used  instead  of  tueldjer  etc. 


304 

On  the  Verbs. 

68.  Besides  the  cases  mentioned  on  page  268,  the  verb  is  in 
the  Subjunctive  if  a  wish  or  a  command  is  expressed  ;  a?, 

©ott  f  ei  mit  Mr  !  God  be  with  thee!  SDtogen  Sie  gludlitlj  feinf 
May  you  be  happy  !  SBare  id)  (bod))  6ei  ifjnt  !  That  I  might  be 
with  himl  2lHe§  oerlofje  bag  $au§.  Let  everybody  leave  the  house. 

59.  After  verbs  expressing  a  wish,  a  hope,  an  advice,  —  should, 
may  or  might,  with  another  verb  in  a  sentence  introduced  by  bafj, 
that  (expressed  or  understood),  are  not  rendered,  and  the  following 
verb  is  put  in  the  Subjunctive  in  German  ;  as, 

3dj  ratlje,  bafc  ba§  genfter  geidjlofien  tcerbc.  I  advise,  that  the 
window  should  be  shut.  (£t  Ijoffr,  bafc  er,  ba§  SSergniigen  IjaBe,  Sie 
auf  bent  S3aH  5x1  treffen.  He  hopes,  that  he  may  have  the  pleasure 
of  meeting  you  at  the  ball.  3d)  nmnfdjte,  bafj  Sie  er  3i)nen  dergabe. 
I  wished,  that  he  might  forgive  you. 

60.  However,  after  the  verbs  befdjlen,  fagen  and  others  of  a 
similar  meaning  should  is  rendered  by  fotteit  usually  ;  as, 

93efeI)Ien  Sie,  bafc  Sftiemanb  bte  Saferne  toerlaffen  fofl.     Order  that 
no  one  should  leave  the  barracks.      ©r  fagte,  bafc  3§nen  ba§   ®elb 
Joerben  foH.    He  said  that  the  money  should  be  paid  to  you. 


61.  After  the  verbs  fiirc^ten,  bitten,  toimfdjen,  and  similar  in 
the  past  tense,  should  or  might  is  rendered  modjte  in  preference  to 
the  subjunctive  of  the  other  verb  ;  as, 

3dj  furdjiete,  bajj  id)  ju  fpat  lommen  tnodjte.  I  feared,  lest  I 
ghould  come  too  late.  SSir  irunfdjten,  ba§  ba§  frfjone  SBetter  an^alten 
modjte.  We  wished  that  the  fine  weather  might  continue. 

62.  If  the  Infinitive  with  to  is  used  as  subject,  to  is  not  ren- 
dered in  German  ;  as, 

©eben  ift  feltger  ot§  nefimen.  To  give  is  more  blessed  than  to 
receive.  Seinen  geinben  tjerjetljeTT  ift  ehel.  To  forgive  one's  enemies 
is  noble. 

Note.—  It  will  be  seen  by  the  second  example  that  the  infinitive,  if  accom- 
panied by  a  complement,  must  follow  this  complement. 

63.  An  Infinitive  must  be  used  with  ttm  ...  511: 

a.)  If  an  intention  or  purpose  is  implied,  corresponding  then  to 
in  order  to,  or  for  with  a  present  participle  after  ;  as, 

3d)  t!jue  e§,  urn  3Ijrem  SBruber  etnen  ©efaHen  511  ernmfen.  I  do  i 
(in  order)  to  do  a  favour  to  your  brother.  3d)  mufete  in  bte  Stabt 
fdjiden,  urn  gteifdj  511  erljatten.  I  had  to  send  to  town  for  getting 
meat. 

6.)  If  occurring  after  an  adjective  preceded  by  ju,  too,  or  fol- 
lowed by  genug,  enough  ;  as, 

Sie  ftnb  511  franf,  tint  au?geljen  su  fSnnen.  You  are  too  ill  to 
be  able  to  go  out.  (Sie  ftnb  nidjt  fiarf  genug,  urn  biefen  Coffer  ju 
fragen.  You  are  not  strong  enough  to  carry  this  trunk. 


glaufcte,  b 
friend  to 


305 

64.  An  Infinitive  occurring  with  an  Accusative  after  the 
verbs  expressing  a  knowledge,  wish,  command,  etc.,  must  be  ren- 
dered by  a  clause,  introduced  by  bafj,  in  which  the  English  Ac- 
cusative becomes  the  subject  ;  as, 

3d)  roiinfdje,  bofe  er  nadj  9t.  gelje.    I  wish  him  to  go  to  N.     3$ 
baft  3fc  greunb  auf  bem  SBafl  gefoefen  fei.    I  expected  your 
o  have  been  at  the  ball.      @r  roeijj,   bofe  @ie  ju  £oufe   finb. 
He  knows  you  to  be  at  home. 
Note.—  After  verbs  governing  the  Dative  in  German,  the  Infinitive,  etc.  may 
also  be  rendered  literally  ;  as, 

3d)  rietfj  tljm,  nod)  §aufe  511  geljen.    I  advised  him  to  go  home. 

65.  An  Infinitive  after  words  of  interrogation,  not  used  in 
direct  questions,  is  rendered  by  a  subordinate  clause  with  fotteit 
as  an  auxiliary  ;  as, 

3d)  roetfs  md)t,  roann  id)  !omnten  foil.  I  do  not  know  when  to 
come,  ©agte  er  3f)nen,  rao  @ie  tljn  treffen  fotten?  Did  he  tell  you, 
where  to  meet  him?  2Bir  fatten  toergeffen,  mit  roeldiem  S"3  ttrir  torn* 
men  foHten.  We  had  forgotten  by  what  train  to  come. 

66.  If  several  Infinitives  with  gu,  are  governed  by  the  same 
verb,  511  must  be  used  with  each;  as, 

(Sr  Bat  mid)  in  etnen  2aben  §u  gefjen  itttb  ein  Sfteffer  gn  faufen. 
He  asked  me  to  go  to  a  shop  and  buy  a  knife. 

67.  A  Present  Participle,  except  as  an  adjective  (see  page  230), 
can  be  used  in  the  following  cases  only  : 

a.)  If  it  is  formed  from  an  intransitive  verb,  and  is  occurring  with  an- 
other verb  to  expres  a  manner  or  condition  ;  as, 

Sie  Struppen  jogen  fid)  fedjtenb  suri'td1.  The  troops  retired  fight- 
ingly.  (£r  ftcmb  toor  mir  jitternb  Dor  ®alte.  He  stood  before  me 
trembling  with  cold. 

6.)  Also  sometimes  as  participle  of  a  transitive  verb  in  poetry  ;  as, 
Seine  etgenen  2eiben  toergeffenb  ...    Forgetting  his  own  sufferings  ... 

68.  A  present  participle  used  in  English  to  form  a  compound 
substantive  with  a  following  noun  cannot  be  rendered  literally,. 
and  the  corresponding  noun  must  be  employed  in  German  ;  as, 

fein  Sterbetag,  his  dying  day  bet  SBartefoal,  the  waiting-room 
bo§  ©peijejinttner,  the  dining-room. 

Notes.  1.—  The  examples  will  show  that  the  German  first  component  is 
formed  from  an  infinitive  by  leaving  out  the  n  ;  viz.  from  :  fter&en,  tuarten, 
fpeifen  ;  but  no  fixed  rule  can  be  given. 

2.  —  Do  not  confound  the  above  words  like  :  waiting-room,  SBartefaal  (i.e. 
a  room  for  waiting),  with  words  like  :  a  waiting  child,  etn  toartenbe§  i^tnt> 
(i.e.  a  child  who  is  waiting),  "waiting"  being  in  the  latter  case  an  adjective. 

69.  Examples  showing  the  change  of  Present  Participles 
to  an  Infinitive  or  to  a  verb  of  a  dependent  clause  : 

1.  He  did  not  succeed  in  letting  his  house.  (£§  gelang  iljm  nidjt,  fein 
ju  bermtetljen.  2.  He  decided  on  going  to  France.  ($r  6efd)tof3  nad) 
gefjen.  3.  I  shall  insist  upon  selling  the  dog.  3d)  fterbe  barauf 
teftefjen,  ben  $unb  ju  berlaufen  (or  bafj  bet  4?unb  berfauft  ttnrb).  4.  I  went 
to  N.,  without  having  any  money  with  me.  3d)  ging  nod)  9t.,  ofine  (Mb  6et 
mir  ju  fjofcen  (or  o^ne  bafs  id)  ©elb  Bei  mir  ^atte).  5.  You  laugh  instead  of 
being  serious.  <Ste  ladjen,  anftatt  ernft  ^u  fein  (or  anftatt,  baft  <5ie  ernft  finb). 
6.  The  man  was  near  drowning.  ®er  iUlann  mar  na^e  baron  ju  ertrinfen  (or 
am  ©rtrinfen).  7.  He  grumbled  at  having  no  breakfast.  (£r  murrte,  roeil 
(or  borii&er,  bofe)  er  lein  Sfruljftiid'  ^atte.  8.  He  hinted  at  being  without 
means,  ©r  beutete  borauf  Bin,  ba§  er  oljne  SUiittel  fei.  9.  I  rejoiced  a* 


306 

finding  my  purse.  3d)  freute  midj,  toetl  (or  bariiber,  bafe)  id)  meine  235rfe  fanb. 
10.  He  complained  of  not  being  invited.  6r  Beflagte  fid),  roeil  (or  bariiber, 
baft)  er  nidjt  eingelaben  hntrbe.  11.  He  excused  himself  for  having  offended 
us.  ®r  entfdjulbigte  fid),  roeil  (or  bafur,  bafs)  er  un§  beletbigte  tjatte.  12.  He 
is  ready  for  starting  at  once,  ©r  ift  bereit,  fogletd)  oBjureifen.  13.  He  is 
irritated  at  having  received  no  answer.  Sr  tft  aufgebradjt,  roetl  (or  baruBer, 
bat?)  er  feine  Slntroort  erfialten  fjat.  14.  He  was  amused  at  having  fright- 
ened me.  ©r  roar  Beluftigt,  roeil  (or  bariiber,  baB)  er  mid)  erfdjredt  fjatte. 
15.  He  is  worthy  of  becoming  an  officer.  @r  tft  roiirbtg,  ein  Dffijter  5:1 
roerben.  16.  He  is  proud  of  being  able  to  receive  us.  ®r  tft  ftol*,  toeil  (or 
barauf,  baB)  er  nn»  empfangen  fann.  17.  We  have  nothing  against  his 
coming.  SBir  6,aben  ntdjtS  bagegen,  baB  er  fommt.  18.  He  came  to  me  on 
account  of  my  being  ill.  @r  fam  ju  mtr,  roetl  id)  franf  roar.  19.  I  heard 
your  knocking  at  the  door.  3d)  Ijorte,  ba&  (or  tme)  <5ie  an  bte  £fn'ire  flofcften. 

20.  I  did  not  think  of  your  coming.    3d)  badjte  ntdjt  baran,  bag  Sie  lommen. 

21.  I  rejoiced  at  your  visiting  my  parents.    3d)  freute  mid)  barii&er,  bafs  <5te 
meine  ©Item  befud)ten.     22.  We  approached  the  fortress  without  the  enemy's 
remarking  us     2Btr  najjerten  un§  ber  geftung,  oljne  bafs  ber  getnb  un§  bemerfte. 
23.  I  gratified  him  by  sending  him  a  basket  of  strawberries.     £$#)   erfreute 
i^n  baburd),  baf?  id)  t^m  ein  Sorbrfjen  (Jrbbeeren  fd)t(fte.      24.   You  will  be 
laughed  at  for  having  been  so  foolish.    Sie  roerben  auSgetodjt  toerben,   teetl 
®te  fo  tprtd)t  geroefen  roaren.      25.  (After)  having  been  to  France,  I  went 
to  Germany.    9tad)bem  id)  in  granfretdj  geroefen  roar,  gtng  id)  nad)  ®eutfd)Ianb. 
26.  Having  no  money  with  me,  I  must  walk,    ©a  id)  fein  ©elb  Bei  mtr  ^abe, 
miiB  id)  ge^en.      27.  This  story  being  read,  we  will  read  another.     ®a   biefe 
©efdjtdjte  gelefen  ift,  roollen  roir  cine  anbere  lefen.      28.  On  reaching  the  town, 
we  saw  a  conflagration.    21I§  roir  bie  Stabt  erreidjten,  fafjen  roir  etne  2feuer»= 
brunft.      29.   W^ien   crossing   the   bridge,   our  horses  were  frightened.     21I§ 
Wit  fiber  bte  SBriide  fitljren,  erfdjraden  unfere  ^Jferbe.     30.  While  going  to  N., 
I  met  an  old  woman  riding  on  a  donkey.    SBcifjrenb  id)  nod)  91.  gtng,  Begegnete 
id)   etner  alten  gran,  bte  auf  einem   Sjel  rttt.      31.   Besides  having  a  good 
situation,  he  has  a  large  fortune.    Stufjerbem  bofs  er  etne  gute  @teHe  {jot,  f)at 
er  ein  grofseS   SSermogen.      32.  He  pouited  to  me  with  his  finger,  saying  ... 
gr  seigte  mit  bent  ginger  auf  mid),  tnbem  er  fagte  ...   (or  unb  fagte).      33.   I 
asked  a  gentleman  sitting  next  me.    3d)  fragte  etnen  £errn,   ber  tteben  mir 
fafj.      34.  The  judge,  being  about  to  try  a  prisoner  ...    2)er  9Ud)ter,  ber  im 
sSegriffe  ftanb,  etnen  ©efangenen  ju  berpren  ...      35.  A  war  vessel  cruising 
off  Suez  ...    ©in  ®rieg§id)tff,   ba§  bet  ©uej  fren§te  ...      36.   He  is  a  young 
man,  anxious  of  perfecting  himself  in  the  German  language.     (£r  tft  ein  jungcr 
sIRann,  ber  fid)  gerne  in  ber  betitfdjen  @prad)e  bertoofflommnen  miid)te.     37.  The 
painter,  on  finishing  his  painting,  perceived  ...    21I§  ber  Staler  fein  ©emalbe 
beenbiflte,   bemerlte   er  ...      38.   The  doctor,  some  time  after  seeing  me,  said 
to  me  ...    ?II3  ber  Softer  mid)  eintge  geit  nadj^er  fab,,  fagte  er  ju  mir  ... 
39.   The   emperor,  esteeming   one   artist   as   much  as   the   other,  and  not 
knowing  to  whom  to  give  the  preference,  decided  ...     S)a  ber  Satjer  einen 
Sunftler  fo  fel)r  adjtete,  rote  ben  anbern,  unb  ba  er  nid)t  roufcte,  roeldjem  er  ben 
SSor^ug  geben  follte,  entfdjteb  er  ...     40.  One  day,  wishing  to  see  the  museum, 
your  brother  asked  me  to  accompany  him.     S)a  3b,t  Srubcr  eineS  3;age»  ba§ 
3Kufeum  fe^en  rooHte,  bat  er  mid),  il)n  ju  begleiten.    41.  The  first  said  this 
and  the  second  that,  and  having   disputed   for  some   time,   the   latter   ex- 
claimed: ...    2>er  Srfte  fagte  bie§  unb  ber  9lnbere  baS,  unb  nad)bem  pe  ftd>  cine 
geitlang  b,erumgeftritten  fatten,  rief  ber  Befctere  au2:  ...      42.  Your  father,  in 
sending  for  another  doctor  offended  Dr.  X.     Saburd)   bojj   3b,r   SBater   etnen 
anbern  Softer  b,olen  Itefs,  beletbigte  er  Sr.  9Z. 


307 

70.  The  Present  Participle  of  an  intransitive  verb  expressing 
-motion,  used  with  to  come,  fommett,  is  replaced  by  the  Past  Par- 
ticiple in  German  ;  as, 

@r  font  gelcwfen,  gerttten,  gefatjren,  ic.    He  came  running,  riding, 
driving,  etc. 

71.  In  a  similar  manner  the  past  participle  bertoren  is  used 
in  the  expression  tier  lor  en  geijen,  to  be  lost ;  as. 

©in  §unb  ift  toetloren  gegangen.    A  dog  has  been  lost. 

72.  The  Past  Participle  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  Im- 
perative in  German ;  as, 

SCuSgetrunfen !     Empty   your   glasses !       SogeBUeoen !     Remain 
here!      SRidjt  toerjtBeifeUl    No  despairing! 


Agreement  of  Verb  and  Subject. 

73.  The  verb  agrees  with  its  subject  in  number;  thus  a  subject 
in  the  singular  takes  the  verb  in  the  singular,  and  a  subject  in  the 
plural  takes  the  verb  in  the  plural  ;  as, 

SDte  ganje  Sttannfdjqft  bei  ©djtffeS  hmr.be  gerettet.  All  the  crew 
of  the  ship  were  rescued.  S)a§  SJlimftertum  I)at  feine  (Sntlaffung  ein» 
gereidjt.  The  ministry  have  tendered  their  resignation,  ^fjre  SriHe 
Itegt  auf  bent  SEtfdje.  Your  spectacles  lie  on  the  table.  2Die  Soften 
finb  511  grofj.  The  expense  is  too  great. 

74.  Nouns  denoting  a  quantity  or  number,   followed  by   a 
plural  noun,  may  take  the  verb  in  the  plural  or  singular  ;  as, 


(Sine  Slnjalji  ©olbaten  fteJien  (or  ftefjt)  Dor  bent  38a$n$of.  A  num- 
ber of  soldiers  stand  before  the  railway-station. 

75.  If  several  subjects  standing  together,  have  the  same  verb, 
the  verb  must  be  in  the  plural  ;  as, 

Sftein  SSater  ttnb  ntetne  9Kutter  lommen.  My  father  and  my  mother 
come.  Ser  £otre,  ber  Siger  unb  ber  spantljer  finb  9?au&tfjiere.  The 
lion,  tiger  and  panther  are  animals  of  prey.  @ie  unb  er  folten  5U> 
fammen  retjen.  You  and  he  are  to  travel  together. 

76.  However,  it  occurs  sometimes,  that  a  verb  having  several 
singular  nouns  as  subjects,  may  be  in  the  singular,  especially  if 
the  nouns  can  be  thought  to  signify  a  whole  idea  ;  as, 

SJteer  unb  Sonb  ntufj  iljm  gefyordjen.  Sea  and  land  must  obey 
him.  Uftetn  £eBen  unb  Slut  geprt  Sljnen.  My  life  and  blood  be- 
long to  you. 

77.  If  the  subjects  are  connected  by  the  conjunctions   ober, 
...  al§  cmcE),  nidjt  nur  ...  fonbern  aud^,  t^eit^  ...  t^eiB,  fort* 

bern,  entmeber  ...  ober,  toeber  ...  noc^,  the  verb  takes  the  number 

and  person  of  the  subject  next  to  it  ;  as, 

©tittteber  3ff)te  SBtuber,  obcr  3^r  SSoter  mufe  antoefenb  fetn.  Either 
your  brothers  or  your  father  must  be  present.  9Ztd)t  nur  bte  5lt)ure, 
fonbern  audj  bte  §enfter  ftanben  offen.  Not  only  the  door,  but  also 
the  windows  were  open.  SSeber  er,  nod)  id)  njerbe  <3te  Befudjen, 
Neither  he  nor  I  will  visit  you. 


308 
On  Separable  Verbs. 

78.  Verbs,  the  prefixes  of  which  consist  of  prepositions  or  ad- 
verbs, as  a  rule  are  separable  (see  page  142). 

Besides  these,   verbs  having  adjectives  as  prefixes  are   se- 
parable; as, 

fefjl]"d)Tagen  irr.,   to  fail,   to   miscarry      feftbinben  irr.,  to  Wnd 
tightly      freiforedjen  irr.,  to  acquit      tobtfdjiefjen  irr.,  to  shoot  dead. 

79.  Excepted  are  the  following,  which  are  not  separable  : 


orgroSIjnen,  to  suspect 
frofjlocfen,  to  exult 
fruliftuclen,  to  breakfast 
furjtoeilen,  to  divert,  amuse 


liebfofen,  to  caress 
offenbaren,  to  reveal 
redjtfertigen,  to  justify 
toeiSfogen,  to  prophecy 


longtoetlen,  to  tire 

Note.— These  verbs,  although  they  are  inseparable,  have  the  accent  on 
the  first  syllable,  and  form  their  past  participles  in  the  regular  way,  like: 
gefrufjftiicft,  geredjtfertigr,  etc.— But  frob,Ioden,  having  the  accent  on  the  second 
syllable,  has  the  past  participle  frof)Ioctt. 

80.  The  following  verbs,  the  prefixes  of  which  are  substan- 
tives, are  also  separable  : 


adjtgeben  irr.,  to  pay  attention 
bunfiagen,  to  return  thanks 
glutfrounfdjen,  to  congratulate 
ijausljalten  irr.,  to  keep  house 

irr.,  to  reside  (of  princes) 


prei§geben  irr.,  to  give  up 
ftattfinben   irr.    (ftattljaben   irr.),   to 

take  place 

tI)eHf)aben  irr.,  to  share 
tljetfneljmen  irr.,  to  participate 
Note.— The  prefixes  of  these  verbs  are  often  not  joined  to  the  verb  and  then 
commence  with  a  capital  letter;  as, 

2ld)t  geben,  2)onl  fagen,  etc. 

81.  If  several  separable  verbs  of  the  same  mood,  tense  and 
person,  and  having  the  same  root  verb,  occur  together,  the  root 
verb  is  not  usually  repeated  ;  as, 

3>ie  8onne  geljt  2ftorgen§  ouf  unb  2fi>enb§  unter.  The  sun  rises 
in  the  morning  and  sets  in  the  evening.  Sftarfjen  @te  bie  Xljure  ouf 
unb  ba§  genfter  ju.  Open  the  door  and  shut  the  window. 

On  to  have. 

82.  To  have  rendered  by  miiffen  see  page  258,  and  by  laffen 
see  page  264. 

83.  Phrases  like  the  following  have  to  be  changed  in  trans- 
«ation  ;  thus  : 

He  had  a  large  fortune  left  him  *  a  large  fortune  was  left  to  him. 
6§  tourbe  il)m  ein  grose»  SJermogen  Ijtnterlaffen.  My  uncle  often  had 
princes  visit  his  hotel  *  my  uncle's  hotel  was  often  visited  by  princes. 
2a§  £otet  tnetnes  Cnfel§  tourbe  oft  Don  t5u^en  befudjt.  She  had 
her  dress  trimmed  with  flowers  *  her  dress  was  trimmed  with  flowers. 
3b,r  $Ietb  toot  ntit  SBIumen  gefdjmucft. 

84.  Note  the  translation  of  the  following  and  similar  phrases  : 

All  kinds  of  playthings  can  be  had  there.  StUerlei  6pieltoaaren 
ftnb  bort  ju  fyaben  (or  3Kan  fann  bort  aHerlei  Spieltoaaren  befontmen). 
Nothing  was  to  be  had.  (£§  roar  md)t§  ju  baben  (or  Wait  fonnte 
ntd)ts  befommen).  I  would  have  you  to  go  there.  3d)  tounid)te,  bofj 
Sie  ^ingingen.  I  had  better  wait.  (£§  tociie  beffer,  toenn  id)  roarten 
tourbe  (or  roortete  or  id)  fottte  lieber  toarten).  I  had  rather  read 
another  book.  3$  tourbe  lieber  ein  anbereS  S9udj  Tefen.  I  had  as 
lieve  go  to  Germany.  3d)  tnodjte  (or  tourbe)  ebenio  gent  nod)  ®eutfd)« 
lanb  geb,en.  I  had  like  to  have  fallen  into  the  river.  3d)  ware 
fcetnaije  in  ben  5fujj  gefaflen. 


309 

On  to  be. 

85.  /  am  to,  etc.,  rendered  by  id)  jott,  etc.,  see  page  259,  and 
for  the  translation  of  to  be  with  a  Passive  Infinitive  following, 
see  page  284. 

^86.  I  am  likely  to,  etc.,  is  rendered  idj  tuerbe  tooljrjcljeintid) 
(or  iboljl) ;  as, 

3d)  toerbe  toal)rfd)etnlid)  (or  tt>of)l)  fommen.  I  am  likely  to  come. 
SBir  floerben  toafjrfdjeutUd)  (or  tuol)l)  feiue  Slnttuort  erljalten.  We  are 
not  likely  to  receive  an  answer. 

87.  He  was  likely  to  die,  etc.,  is  rendered  :  (£r  toor  nolje  boron 
gu  fterben  or  6r  ftarb  bemofje. 

88.  For  indicating  the  place  where  the  subject  is,  in  English 
usually  the  verb  to  be  is  employed,  whereas  in  German  it  is  pre- 
ferable to  use  the  verb  showing  the  exact  position  of  the  subject ;  as, 

3>er  £ifd)  ftef)t  (also  ift)  im  anbern  Simmer.  The  table  is  in  the 
other  room.  So§  93ud)  Itegt  (also  ift)  auf  3f)rem  $ult.  The  book 
is  on  your  desk  Ser  Sftagel  fterft  in  ber  SSanb.  The  nail  is  in  the 
wall.  $ie  ®aije  fiijt  auf  bem  ©tittle.  The  cat  is  on  the  chair. 

89.  If  the  subject  is  a  person,  fid)  befmben  is  often  employed 
to  indicate  the  place,  which  is  also  used  for  indicating  a  condition 
of  a  person  or  thing  ;  as, 

@§  Befanben  fid)  (also  e§  toaren)  triete  Dfftatere  auf  bem  SBotte. 
There  were  many  officers  at  the  ball.  SSie  Befinbet  fidj  ^^r  SBruber 
Seute?  How  is  your  brother  to-day?  S)a§  £au§  Befinbet  fi^  in  etnetn 
fd)Iedjten  guftanb.  The  house  is  in  a  bad  condition. 

90.  Note  the  following  expressions  : 

I  am  late— early,  etc.  ftdj  fomme  foat— frill),  etc.  I  am  right- 
wrong.  3d)  I)at>e  9ied)t— Unredjt.  I  am  in  a  hurry,  ftd)  §aBe  ©tie. 
I  am  in  earnest.  ®§  ift  mein  ©rnft.  I  am  hungry— thirsty— sleepy. 
Sd)  ^abe  ^unger— 2)urft— Sdjlaf  (also  Qd)  Bin  Ijungrtg— burftig— fdjlcifrig). 
I  am  feverish,  ftd)  ^aBe  gieBer.  I  am  anxious  to  ...•  Qd)  mod)te 
gern  ...  I  was  anxious  to  ...  3d)  tuottte  gern  ... 

See  also  impersonal  verbs  on  page  166. 

91.  Note  further  the  following  verbs : 


to  be  afraid,  to  fear,  Befiirdjten 
to  be  afraid  of,  fid)  furdjten  Uor 
to  be  ashamed,  fid)  fdjdmen 
to  be  asleep,  fd)Iafen  irr. 
to  be  astonished,  *erftaunen 
to  be  aware  of,  totffen  irr. 
to  be  called,  fjeijjen  irr. 


to  be  drowned,  *ertrtnlen  irr. 
to  be  frightened,  *erfd)reden  irr. 
to  be  mistaken,  fid)  irr  en 
to  be  silent,  fdjroetgen  irr. 
to  be  worth,  getten  irr. 
to  be  of  weight,  nriegen  irr. 
to  be  wrecked,  *jd)eitern 


On  to  do. 

92.  To  do  as  an  auxiliary  not  expressed,  see  page  133. 

93.  To  do  with  an  Infinitive  is  in  English  often  used  to  make 
the  sense  more  emphatic. — In  German,  in  such  a  case,  to  do  is  not 
rendered,  and  the  following  adverbs  are  employed  instead  : 


310 

a.)  In  the  Imperative,  ja  is  used  ;  as, 

©efien  Sic  ja  Ijeute  SIBenb  ju  iljm.  Do  go  to  him  this  evening. 
Seten  <5te  ja  nidjt  untyoflidj.  Do  not  be  impolite. 

b.}  In  the  Present  and  Imperfect  the  emphasis  is  expressed  by 
luirflid);  as, 

8dj  roeifc,  fte  fommen  tmrflid).  I  know,  they  do  come.  (£§  tft 
nirf)t  mogltd),  ban  er  e§  tDtrflid)  tfjat.  It  is  not  possible  that  he  did  do  it. 

c.)  In  answers  frettidj  or  aHerbingS  are  used  for  expressing 
the  emphasis  ;  as, 

gagten  Ste  el?  fyreiltdj  or  afferbtngS  (fagte  id)  e§).  Do  you  say 
it?  I  did  (say  it).  SSarten  Sie  auf  t^n?  g-retlid)  or  atterbtng§  (toarte 
id)  auf  tfi,n).  Do  you  wait  for  him?  I  do  (wait). 

94.  To  have  done  with  a  present  participle  following  is  ren- 
dered as  follows : 

Have  they  done  singmg?  @inb  fte  fertig  mit  Stngen?  I  have  not 
yet  done  writing.  5$  Bin  nod)  ntdit  fertig  mit  6d)rei6en. 

95.  To  have  done  with  a  thing,  is  rendered  fertig  fein;  as, 
©inb  6ie  fertig  mit  ^fjrem  SSrief?    Have  yon  done  with  your  letter? 

96.  However,  in  the  Imperative  to  have  done  in  the  cases  94 
&  95  is  rendered  thus  : 

Have  done  lamenting!  ^oren  @te  auf  ju  flagen!  Have  done  it! 
$oren  6te  bamit  auf! 

97.  To  do  in  the  sense  of  to  make  (i.e.  meaning  to  manufacture, 
to  do  by  work)  is  usually  madjen ;  as, 

83tl  roonn  fonnen  @ie  meine  ©tiefel  modjen?  How  soon  can  yon 
do  my  boots?  £a6en  ©ie  g^rc  SlufgaBe  gemadjt?  Have  you  done 
your  task? 

98.  Note  the  following  expressions  : 


to  do  business,  ©eidjafte  madjen 

to  do  honour  (credit,  kindness),  (Sljre 

(greunbidjaft)  erttjeifen  irr. 
to  do  justice  to,  ©eredjtigleit  tt)iber= 

fasten  laffen  irr. 
to  do  one's  duty,   fettte   ^fttdjt   er= 

fuHen  (or  tljun) 
to  do  one's  haur,  fein  £aat  (juredjt) 

mndjcn 
to  do  one's  self  the  pleasure,  fid)  bag 

2?ergniigon  madjen 
to  do  a  commission,   order,  etc,    etn 

(Scfdjdft,    einen   Sluftrag,    etc.,   Be* 

forgen 
to  do  a  picture,  ein  SBitb  malen 


to  do  an  order,  command,  einen  S8e= 
feljl  tioHste^en  irr. 

to  do  like  for  like,  ©tetdjeS  mit  ©let* 
djem  uergelten  irr. 

to  do  away,  megtljun,  toegfdjoffen 

how  do  you  do?  toie  geljt  e§  S^nen? 

that  will  do,  bal  genfrgt 

that  will  not  do,  ba§  barf  nid)t  fein 

it  will  not  do  (it  is  of  no  avail),  e§ 
^ilft  nidjtS 

I  cannot  do  without  it,  id)  faun  e§- 
ntdjt  entBe^ren 

what  did  you  do  all  day  with  your- 
self? 2Ba3  IjaBcii  6ie  ben  gangett 
2ag  get^an? 


On  to  make. 

99.  To  make  rendered  by  foffen  see  page  264. 

100.  To  make  as  a  rule  is  rendered  madjett  (also  sometimes 
perfertigen  or  anfertigen). 


311 


101.  However,  note  the  following  expressions  : 


to   make   account    of,    adjten,    fjod)* 


to    make  an  alliance,   etn  SBunbntfe 

fdjUeften  irr. 
to  make  allowance  for,  9iarf)fid)t  fiaBen 

mit 
to  make  amends,   to   make   up   for, 

(Srfafc  leiften 
to   make   an   apology,    fid)    entfdjut* 

bigen 
to  make  a  good  (bad)   appearance, 

gut  (fdjled&t)  auSfefien  irr. 
to  make  a  brtrgain,  etn  ®e)d)aft  (cinen 

&cmbel)  afcfd)IieBen  irr. 
to  make  the  best  of  one's   way,   fid) 

Beeilen 
to   make   a   boast    of,    fid)    rufjmen 

iiBer  (Ace.) 
to  make  a  change,  eine  aSeranberitng 

treffen  irr. 

to  make  choice,  eine  SBafjt  treffen  irr. 
to  make  complaint  of,   $Iage  fiiljren 

fiber  (Ace.) 
to  make  one's  escape,  *entfdjlii:pfen, 

*entfommen  irr. 
to  make  haste,  fid)  Beeilen 
to  make  head  or  tail  of  a  thing,  au§ 

etnm§  flug  *roerben  irr. 
to  make  a  mistake,  fid)  irren 
to  make  money  of  a  thing,  ettoa§  ju 

©etb  madjen 
to  make  oath  (to  take  oath),   einen 

(Sib  c&Iegen 


to  make  a  request,   eine  93itte  Jjor^ 

tragen  irr.  or  toorBringen  irr. 
to  make  shift,  fid)  Befyelfen  irr. 
to  make  a  sign,  etn  3etd)en  geBen  irr. 
to  make  a  good  soldier,    etc.,    einen 

guten  ©olbaten,  etc.,  abge&en  irr. 
to  make  a  speech,  eine  Slebe  gotten  irr. 
to  make  a  trial,   einen   SSerjitd)  (eine- 

$roOe)  anftetten  or  tnadjen 
to  make  use  of,  ftd)  Bebtenen  (Gen.) 
to  make  war  upon,  Befrtegen 
to  make  way,  room,  ^3la£  madjen 
to  make  after,  *norf)fe|jen  (Dat.)x  bet' 

folgen  (Ace.) 
to  make   away   with   one's   self,   fid) 

umfiringen  irr. 

to  make  off,  away,  fid)  bction  ntadjen 
to  make  out,  fid)  (Dat.)  erfliiren 
to  make  over,  bermodjen 
to  make  up  one's  losses,  feinen  9Ser-- 

Iitft  toieber  clnBringen  irr. 
to  make  up  a  letter,  etn  S3rief  folten 

or  jitfammcnlegen 
to  make    up   one's  mind,    fid)    ent» 

fdjtiefeen  irr. 
to  make  up  a  quarrel,   einen   ©ttett 

Beilegen 

to  make  angry,  (fid))  argern 
to  make  free  with  any  one,  nidjt  titet 

llmftanbe  mit  (Stnem  mad)en 
to  make  merry  at,  fid)   luftig   ntadjen 

iiBer  (Ace.) 
to  make  nice,  (Stntoenbungen  mad)en 


On  to  get. 

102.  To  get  is  very  frequently  used  in  English,  and  has  such 
various  meanings,  that  no  equivalent  can  be  given  in  German, 
and  in  rendering  it,  always  a  corresponding  other  verb  must 
be  used  ;  thus  : 
to   get   (to   receive,    to   obtain),    et» 

fatten  irr.,  Befomnten  irr.,  erlangen 
to  get  (to  induce),   fceranlaffen  (reg.) 

fcetnegen 

to  get  (to  become),  *tt)etben  irr. 
to  get  (to  come),  *Iommen  irr. 


to  get  (to  arrive),  *ftttfontmen  irr. 
to  get  (to  buy),  foitfen 
to  get  (to  incur),  fid)  5tt§ief)en  irf. 
to   get   (to   procure   one's  self),    ftd) 

anidjaffen 
to  get  (to  take),  neljmett  irr.,  eto. 


103.  Note  the  following  expressions  : 


to  get  into,  *gerotl)en  in  (Ace.)  irr. 
to  get  into  (a  carriage,    etc.),   *cilt» 

fteigen  irr. 
to  get  out  of  (a  carriage,  etc.),  *<w§« 

fteigen  irr. 
to  get  into  favour  of,   fid)  in   ©unft 

fejjen  Bei 

to  get  above,  iiBerttcffen  irr. 
to   get   away,   toegBcingen  irr.   (fid)) 

entfernen 


to  get  between,  (ba)3tmfd)en  >?geratl)en 

irr. 
to   get   down,   *fltttUttterfteigen   irr., 

*f)ittuntergel)en      irr.,      Ijtnnutcr^ 

Bringen  irr. 
to  get  up,  *(l)tn)aufftetgen  irr.,  *auf> 

fteljen  irr. 
to   get   upon    a    horse,    311    $ferbe 

*fteigen  irr. 


812 


to  get  off,  toegfdjaffen,  *Jm&onfommen 

irr. 

to  get  on  in,  gortfdjrttte  madjen  in 
to  get  out  of  one's   depth,    SSoben 

toerlttren  irr. 
to  get  out  of  one's  sight,  (Sinem  auS 

ben  8lugen  *geb,en  irr. 
to  get  abroad,  befonnt  (rudjbar)  :?njer« 

ben  irr. 
to  get  the  better  of,  uBertreffen  irr. 


to  get  one's  bread,   fein  SBcob  toer» 

bienen 

to  get  clear  of,  fret  ^tperben  uon  irr. 
to  get  drunk,  fid}  betrinfen  irr. 
to  get  friends,  fid)  grreimbe  madjen 
to  get  riches,  SReidjtljumer  erroerben 

irr. 
I  could   not  get  him   to   do   it,    id) 

fonnte  iljn  nidjt  baju   fcrtngen,    e3 

ju  tljun 


104.  The  past  participle  got,  if  used  pleouastically  after  to 
-have,  is  not  expressed  in  German  ;  as, 

£aben   Ste   ©elb   Bet   ftd}?    Have  you  got  any  money  with  you? 
3d)  fjabe  fiinf  SJiarf.    I  have  got  five  marks. 

105.  To  get,  rendered  by  laffen,  see  page  264. 


On  the  Cases. 

As  mentioned  on  page  12  there  are  four  cases  in  German ;  viz. : 
•the  Nominative,  the  Genitive,  the  Dative,  and  the  Accusative. --Besides 
these  four  cases  there  is  also  a  fifth  case — seldom  used — the  Vocative, 
which  is  the  same  as  the  Nominative. 

The  case  in  which  a  declinable  German  word  has  to  be,  is  always 
dependent  on  the  word  by  which  it  is  governed,  or  on  the  position 
-which  it  occupies  in  the  sentence. 

The  following  are  full  lists  and  rules  about  the  German  cases. 

I.    The  Vocative. 

106.  All  declinable  words  used  in  exclamations  and  addressing 
are  in  the  vocative,  which  is  the  same  as  the  nominative ;  as, 

O  Qfrcttttb!  ttm§  Ijaben  @te  getljan?  0  friend!  what  have  you 
been  doing?  SJleitt  Iteber  JBatcr!  My  dear  father!  SSoKen  ©te 
ntdjt  ^erouffommen,  $err  SdjmtDt?  Will  you  not  come  upstairs, 
Mr.  Schmidt?  SBa§  fdjft  bir,  gutcr  Altaic?  What  is  the  matter 
with  you,  good  boy? 

II.    The  Nominative. 

107.  All  nouns  and  pronouns  which  are  the  subject  of  the 
sentence,  are  in  the  Nominative  case ;  as, 

2>er  Xtgcr  tft  groufam.    The  tiger  is  cruel.     3d)  l)abe  gefdjlafen. 
have  been  sleepi  ng.      ZBer  fommt?    Who  is  coming? 

108.  Verbs  governing  the  Nominative. 

a.)  The  following  verbs  require  their  predicate  (noun  or  pro- 
noun) in  the  nominative;  as, 

fcleiben  irr.,  to  remain      I  fdjeinen  irr.,  to  seem       I  "tterbett  irr.,  to  become 
{jetBcn  irr.,  to  be  called    |  fein  irr.,  to  be 

For  examples  see  page  276. 

EXCEPTION. — The  nominative  is  not  used  if  the  noun  is  in  the 
jGenitive  (see  No.  110)  or  if  it  is  preceded  by  a  preposition ;  as, 

3d)  bin  3b,rer  SRetnung.  I  am  of  your  opinion.  3>ie  Sodje  tft 
toon  SStdlttQfeit.  The  matter  is  of  importance. 


313 

6.)  The  following  verbs,  if  used  passively,  require  also  the  nom- 
inative case : 

tjeifjen  irr.   )  .        ..  fcfiimpfen,  to  insult 

nennen  irr.  ) to  cal1  rufen  irr.,  to  call 

fdjelten  irr.,  to  abuse,  to  call  names         taufen,  to  baptize 

Example.— (Sr  ttwrbe  ber  alte  %ja$ct  geljeijjen.     He  was  called  the  old 
hunter. 

c.)  A  noun,  preceded  by  al3,  is  in  the  nominative  after  any  verb, 
if  the  noun  denotes  the  same  person  as  the  subject ;  as, 

(Sr  ftarb  alS  £elb.  He  died  a(*)  hero.  SSir  ftfieben  att  ftrewtbe. 
We  departed  as  friends. 

III.    The  Genitive. 

109.  The  Genitive  is  used  when  possession,  origin,  or  partition 
is  implied  ;   therefore  it  generally  corresponds  to  the   English 
possessive  (see  also  page  297) ;  as, 

Sa§  £au§  unfere§  9?a<ij6ar§.  Our  neighbour's  house.  2>ie  £ap= 
ferleit  ber  ©partaner.  The  bravery  of  the  Spartans.  5Der  ®opf  eine§ 
(Slep^anten.  The  head  of  an  elephant.  ©emitter's  SBerfe.  Schiller's 
works.  SSefjen  $itt?  Whose  hat?  ©in  ©arten,  beffen  SBaitme  ... 
A  garden,  the  trees  of  which  ...  (Sin  ©Ia§  be§  beften  2Betne§.  A 
glass  of  the  best  wine. 

110.  The  Genitive  occurs  generally  after  the  verbs  jein,  toer* 
ben,  ft^einen  (see  No.  108  a.),  if  in  English  these  verbs  are  followed 
by  a  noun  with  of,  and  the  subject  of  the  verb  denotes  a  person ;  as, 


Sdj  Bin  Stym  SOteinung.  I  am  of  your  opinion.  S)er  -Jftenfclj  ift 
gottlicfyer  Stfatur.  Man  is  of  divine  nature. 

111.  Adverbal  expressions  denoting  indefinite  time  are  in  the 
Genitive,  which  is  also  used  with  some  other  adverbial  ex- 
pressions ;  as, 

S)er  SBrteftrager  lontntt  nut  be§  -Jftorgensi  (or  9Korgen§).  The  post- 
man comes  in  the  morning  only.  3$  fomme  gcrabe^  28ege§  ou§  ber 
©tabt.  I  am  coming  straight  from  town.  28ir  folgten  i^ucn  fte^enbcn 
gufeeS.  We  followed  them  without  hesitation. 

NOTE. — Adverbial  expressions  denoting  definite  time,  are  in  the 
accusative  (see  page  318). 

112.  Adjectives  governing  the  Genitive  are: 


f-in  want  of,  in  need  of 


onftdjttg,1  getting  a  sight  of 
baar,  barren  of 
bebiirftig 
benStfiiflt 

beitmfjt,  conscious  of  (see  No.  115) 
etngebenf,  mindful  of 
gettiofjr,1  aware  of 
gettjcirtig,  expecting 
gettiiB/2  certain  of 
gettioljnt,1  used,  accustomed  to 
fjabljaft,  getting  possession  of 
•funbig,  acquainted  with  (something) 

For  rules  and  examples  see  page  234. 

Notes.  1. — The  adjectives  marked  with  1  are  used  in  common  life  often 
with  the  accusative,  like :  id)  ttwrbe  ifyn  geroaljr,  I  became  aware  of  his  presence. 

2.— ©ettnjj  and  Io§  sometimes  take  the  preposition  Don  instead  of  the  Genitive. 

(*)  The  indefinite  article  is  ofto»          expressed,  and  ol§  only  used. 


Io§,i  &  2  rid  of 

macfjtig,  master  of 

tniibe,1  tired  of,  weary  of 

fatt,1  satiated  with 

fclmlbig,  guilty  of 

ftcfjer,  sure  of,  on 

tfyetltiaftCig),  partaking  of 

uberbruffig,!  weared,  disgusted  with 

toerbcicijtig,  suspected  of 

berlufttg,  having  forfeited 

of 


314 


113.  Verbs  governing  the  Genitive. 
a.)  The  following  verbs  require  their  object  in  the  Genitive: 


bebfirfeni  irr.,  to  want,  to  need 
begeb,ren,i  to  desire 


ermangeln,  to  be  void  of 
erroaljnen,1  to  mention 
geniefcen1  irr.,  to  enjoy 


(ge)benfen   irr.,    to   think   of,    to   re- 
member 

geroaljren,1  to  perceive 
pflegen,1  to  take  care  of,  to  attend  to 
fdjonen,1  to  spare 
bergeffen1  irr.,  to  forget 
ttwijrneljmen  irr.,  to  see  to 


Example.—  3d)  gebadjte  feineS  93ater».    I  thought  of  his  father. 

Note.—  Most  of  these  verbs,  except  in  poetry,  are  seldom  used  with  the 
Genitive  ;  thus  those  marked  with  the  figure  1  have  generally  their  object  in 
the  Accusative. 

6.)  For  the  Genitive  after  fetn,  tuerben,  fdjehteit,  see  No.  110. 

c.)  The  following  verbs,  if  followed  by  two  objects,  require  the  in- 
direct object  in  the  Genitive,  and  the  direct  object  (i.e.  the  per- 
son) in  the  Accusative  : 

entlofTen1  in-.,  entieljen,   to  discharge 

from  (employment) 
fiBerfttljren,  to  convict  of 
berftdiern,2  to  assure  of 
tinirbigert,  to  hold  worthy  of 
jeifjen  irr.,  to  impeach  of 


<m!Iagen,  to  accuse  of 
berauben,  to  rob  of 
bei'djulbtgen,  to  charge  with 
entbinben1  irr.,  to  release  from 
entbloBen,1  to  deprive  of 
entbeben1  irr.,  to  exempt  from 
entfleiben,  to  divest  of 


For  examples  see  page  276. 

Notes.  1.— Those  verbs,  marked  with  the  figure  1,  may  also  be  used 
with  toon,  instead  of  with  the  Genitive. 

2. — SBerfidjem  may  also  take  the  person  in  the  Dative,  and  the  thing  in 
the  Accusative. 

Remark.— In  the  passive  voice  the  indirect  object  must  remain  in  the 
Genitive ;  as, — S)er  ©efangene  ttwrbe  be*  £oc&»erratb§  angeflagt.  The  prisoner 
was  accused  of  high-treason. 

<Z.)  The  following  reflective  verbs,  besides  having  their  reflective 
pronoun    in    the    accusative,    require    their    object   in   the 

Genitive : 


fid)  atmeb,men  irr.,  to  take  care  of 
fidj  bebtenen,  to  make  use  of 
fid)  befleiBtgen,  to  apply  one's  self  to 
fid)  bemddjtigen,  to  take  possession  of 
fid)  crbarmen,2  to  have  mercy  upon 
fid)  entaiiBcrn,  to  get  rid  of,  to  dis- 
pose of 

fid)  entljalteni  irr.,  to  abstain  from 
fid)  entlebtgen,  to  rid  one's  self  of 
fid)  enttt>6b,nen,  to  break  the  habit  of 
fid)    entidjlogen   irr.,    to    throw    off 
(thoughts) 


ftdj  erbretften,  fid)  erfrerfjcn,  fid)  er» 
ruljnen,  to  be  emboldened,  to  dare 

fid)  erinnern,  to  remember 

fid)  ertt>eb,ren,  to  keep  off 

fid)  freiten,2  to  rejoice 

fid)  geliiften  Iaf|en  irr.,  to  covet  to 

fid)  rub,nien,  to  boast  of 

fid)  fdjamen,2  to  be  ashamed  of 

fid)  ttermejjen  irr.,  to  arrogate,  to 
presume 

fid)  berfidjern,  to  make  sure  of 

fid)  wetgern,  to  refuse 


For  examples  see  page  276. 

Notes.  1.— (Bid)   entfiuBern,    fid)   entfjalten  may  take  the  preposition  bon 
instead  of  the  Genitive. 

2.— Sid)   crbortnen,  fid)  freuen,  fid)   fdjamen  take  usually  the^ preposition 
fiber  (Ace.)  instead  of  the  Genitive. 


315 


e.)  The  Genitive  occurs  in  the  following  expressions: 

fid)  etne§  SSeffern  beftnnen  irr.,  to  think  of  something  better 
feine§  28ege§  *gef>en  irr.,  to  go  one's  way  ber  SRulje  pflegen,  to  take  one's 
ease,  to  rest  £itnger§  *fterben  irr.  (also :  bor  |>unger  fterben),  to  die  of 
hunger  eineg  blo^Udjen  5tobe§  '"fterben  irr.,  to  die  a  sudden  death  (Sinen 
be§  2anbe§  bertseifen  irr.,  to  exile  some  one  fetne§  9lmte3  roarten,  to 
attend  to  one's  office  or  business  be§  5Tobe§  fein,  to  be  a  dead 
man.  (£§  ift  nidjt  ber  SDtiilje  roert^  (also :  e§  berlot)nt  fidj  nidjt  bet 
SMIje).  It  is  not  worth  the  trouble.  @§  ift  nidjt  ber  9?ebe  roertb,. 
It  is  not  worth  mentioning. 

114.  Prepositions  governing  the  Genitive. 

(See  page  180.) 

IV.    The  Dative. 

115.  Adjectives  governing  the  Dative  are: 

gram  (fein),  to  dislike 

giinftig,  favourable  to,  for 

gut  (fein),  to  like 

ijetlfam,  salutory,  healing  for 

Iiolb,  benignant  to 

Uiftig,  troublesome  to 

leidjt,1  easy  to,  for 

Iteb,  dear  to 

moglidj,1  possible  for 

nacfyrfyeiHg,1  prejudicial,  disadvanta 

geous  to 
nafye,  near  to 
natiirlid),  natural  to 


afigenetgt,  averse  from,  to 
afynlid),  like,  resembling 
angeboren,  innate  in 
cmgemeffen,  suitable  to 
(an)geneb,m,  pleasant,  agreeable  to 
annefjmbar,1  acceptable  to 
anftofjig,  scandalous  to 
crgerlidj,1  vexatious  to 
oitSgeje^t,  liable  to 
begretflidj,  comprehensive  to 
fcefcmnt3  known  to 
Be^iitflid)  (fein),  to  assist 
beqitem,  convenient  to 
befdjroerlid),1  troublesome  to 
(fid)  Dat.)  behmfet  (Gen.  fein), 

conscious  of 
bcmfbar,2  grateful  to 
benfbor,  conceivable  to 
bienlid),  serviceable  to 
btenftbor/  subject  to 


to  be 


shocking  to 
entferedjenb,  correspondent  to 
ergeben,  devoted,  attached  to 
erinnetiid)  (fein),  to  remember 
ertuitnicijt,  wished  for,  desirable  to 
feinb(Iidj),  hostile  to 
fretrtb,1  strange,  foreign  to 
freunbdid)),  friendly,  kind  to 
folgfam,  obedient  to 
furdjtbar,1  awful  to 
fiirditerlidj,1  frightful  to 
dangerous  to 
eniiberticgenb,  opposite  to 
geprfam,  obedient  to 
getduftg,  familiar  to 
gemafj,  persuant  to 
gemein(fomX  common  to 
geneigt,  inclined  to 

abgeneigt  disinclined  to 
gefunb,1  healthy  for 
getuadjien  (fcin),  (to  be)  equal  to,  (to 

be)  a  match  for 
gettiogen,  favourable  to 
gleid),  like  to,  even  with 
gleidjgiiltig,2  indifferent  to 
gnabig,2  gracious  to 


neu,1  new  to 

!StflenM9. 

nu^Hdj,1  useful  to,  for 

offen,  free  to 


to,  for 


. 

(fdjtnet^tid)1),  painful  to,  for 
redjt,  agreeable  to 
fdjabltdj,1  hurtful,  injurious  to 
fdjrecflid),1  terrible,  horrible  to,  for 
fd)ulbig,  owing  to 
fdjnjer,1  difficult  to,  for 
tfyeiier,  dear  to 
treu,2  faithful  to 
iiberlcgen,  superior  to,  (in  knowledge 

or  strength) 

nnentbefjrtid),  indispensable  to 
unterworfen,  amenable,  subject  to 
unbergeRUd),  memorable  to 
beranttuortlid),  accountable  to 
berbunben,  obliged,  indebted  to 
berberbtid),1  fatal,  ruinous  to 
berfjafjt,  hateful,  odious  to 
berttjanbt,3  related  to 
borait?,  beforehand  with 
roertf),  dear  to 
ttnrfjttfl,1  important  to,  for 
roiberlid),  abominable  to 
nnflfo  mitten,  welcome  to 
gitgcinglidj,1  accessable  to 
jutrdglid),1  benificial  to,  for 
juttriber,  abhorrent  to 
jttjeifelljaft,  doubtful  to 


316 


And  all  of  these  adjectives  with  the  prefix  un  having  an  op- 
posite meaning,  as  well  as  participles  of  verbs  governing  the 
dative,  used  as  adjectives. 

(For  examples  see  page  234.) 

Notes.  1.— The  adjectives  marked  with  the  figure  1  occur  sometimes  with 
the  preposition  fur,  instead  of  with  the  Dative. 

2.— Those  adjectives  marked  with  2  may  also  take  the  preposition  gegen 
instead  of  the  Dative. 

3. — SBefannt  with  the  Dative  means  "known  to,"  whilst  befannt  nut  is 
corresponding  to  "acquainted  with."— SSerioanbt  usually  takes  the  prepo- 
sition mit,  instead  of  the  Dative. 

116.  Verbs  governing  the  Dative. 

a.)  The  following  verbs,  when  having  one  object  only,  require  it 
in  the  Dative : 


ttbratljen  irr,  to  dissuade 

«ngel)5ren,  to  appertain  to 

*anfjangen  irr.,  to  adhere  to 

onttnorten,  to  answer 

anftefjen  irr.,  to  suit 

auf&inben  irr.,  to  impose  on 

aufbrangen,  to  force  upon 

*auf fallen  irr.,  to  strike,  surprise 

aufpaffen,  to  waylay 

auftnarten,  to  attend  to,  wait  on 

ouC'fjelfen  irr.,  to  give  a  hand,  assist 

*au*tt>eid)en  irr.,  to  give  way,  evade 

befefjlen  irr.,  to  command 

*begegnen,  to  meet  (in  passing  by) 

befyagen,  to  please 

*betfteljen  irr.,  to  help,  assist 

betftimmen  \  to  agree  with  (some  one) , 

betpflidjten  J     to  assent  to 

bctrooljnen  (antooljnen),  to  be  pre- 
sent at 

*befoimnen  irr.,  to  agree  with  (some 
one's  health) 

*beo0rfteb,en  irr.,  to  impend 

*blei&en  irr.,  to  remain  to 

tonfen,  to  thank 

btenen,  to  serve 

brofjen,  to  threaten 

etnprcigen,  to  impress  on 

-*citifaHeu  irr.,  to  occur  to  (one's  mind) 

einijflansen,  to  ingraft  in 

«ittleud)ten,  to  be  clear,  obvious  to 

einidjiirfen,  to  enjoin  upon 

*entfaHen  irr.,  to  escape,  to  slip  out 
(of  one's  memory) 

entfremben,  to  alienate,  estrange  from 

*entflie^en  irr.,  *entgef)en  trr.,  *ent« 
fommen  irr.,  *entlaufen  irr.,  *ent« 
rtnnen  irr.,  to  escape  from 

*entttrifdjen,  to  slip  away,  to  escape 
from 

tntiagcn,  to  renounce 

€ntipred)en  irr.,  to  answer  (a  pur- 
pose, etc.) 

*entgcgettgef)en  irr.,  to  go  to  meet 

*cntgcgcnfommen  irr.,  to  come  to 
meet,  to  meet  (figuratively) 


ftttgegenfdjauen,  to  gaze  against 
"ctttgegeitfteljen  irr.,  to  stand  against 
enttetBen  irr.,  to  wrest  from 
*entftammen,  to  spring  of  (a  family) 
enttoenben,  to  filch  from 
entnrinben  irr.,  to  wrench  from 
erlauben,  to  allow,  permit 
*erliegen  irr.,  to  succumb  to 
*erf$einen  irr.,  to  appear  to 
fefylen  (mangeln),  to  be  wanting  to 
flu  d)  en,  to  curse,  execrate 
*iplgen,  to  follow 
froljnen,  to  indulge  in  (a  passion) 
ftcf)  fugen,  to  buckle,  defer  to 
getmfiren,  to  be  due  to 
gef alien  irr.,  to  please 

mtBfftHen  irr.,  to  displease 
gcgenttbcrfteHen  irr.,  to  confront  with 
gefyordjen,  to  obey 
gel)  or  en,  to  belong  to  (some  one) 
*geltngen4  (imp.)  irr.,  to  succeed  in 

'•''miBungen4  (imp.)  irr.,  to  fail  in 
geniigen,  to  suffice 
^geratfien   irr.,    to   turn   out    (well, 

etc.)  for 

*mti3ratfjen  irr.,  to  turn  out  ill  for 
geretdjen,  to  redound  to 
getpaljren,  to  bestow  upon,  on 
gleidjen  irr.,  to  resemble 
gtaiiben,  to  believe 
*glficfen,'*  to  succeed  (in) 

*mifegliicfen,4  to  fail  (in) 
Ijelfen  irr.,  to  help 
Ijulbtgen,  to  do  homage  to,  to  swear 

allegiance 

ftingeln,  to  ring  for  (some  one) 
*ur  £aft  leg  en,  to  charge  against 
leud&ten,  to  light  (some  one) 
©egentiorfteHungen  mat^en,  to  remon- 
strate with 

ntelben,  to  announce  to 
tnittljeilen,    to   communicate    to,    to 

inform 

tttttfiafjmen,  to  imitate  (some  one) 
nartitn-iingen,  to  throng  after 
to  ennulate 


317 


*narfjfoTgen,  to  succeed  (some  one),  to 

folloV  after 

ttddjgeBen  irr.,  to  yield,  to  submit  to 
*ttad)gef)en  irr.,  to  go,  walk  after 
*ttftrf)ia£ien,  to  hunt  after 


itarfjiagen,  to  say  of  (some  one) 

nattyfefjen  irr.,  to  look  after 

*ttftd)fte{jen  irr.,  to  be  inferioi  to 

JtadjfteHen,  to  lay  snares  for 

fidj  nafjern  (fid)  naljen),  to  approach 

nitijen,  to  be  of  use  to 

paffen,  to  fit,  suit  (some  one) 

rotten  irr.,  to  advise 

rufen1  irr.,  to  call 

fagen,  to  tell 

fdjaben,  to  hurt 

fdjeinen  irr.,  to  seem  to 

fdjmeid)etn,  to  flatter 

fteuern,2  to  check 

(tier)  trait  en,3  to  trust 

mifetrauen,  to  mistrust 
trofcen,  to  defy 

'•'unterliegen  irr.,  to  succumb  to 
fidj  imtertperfen  irr.,  to  submit  to 
tjerBteten  irr.,  to  forbid,  prohibit 
tietpflidjten,  to  oblige  to  (some  one) 
tierfpredjen  irr.,  to  promise 
irr.,  to  pardon 


*t»orftttgefjen  irr.,  to  lead  the  way,, 

to  precede 

tiorfceljatten  irr.,  to  reserve  for 
fcorfieitgen,  to  obviate,  prevent 
toorleien  irr.,  to  read  to 
*jjorfommen    irr.,    to    occur    to,    to 

seem  to 
*t»orfte^en    irr.,    to    administer,    to 

survey 

toeliren,  to  check 
*nriberfa'fjren  irr.,  to  happen  to 
fid)  nriberfeljett,  to  resist,  to  oppose 
ttribertyredjen  irr.,  to  contradict 
*nnberftel)en  irr.,  to  resist 
ttrillfaljren  irr.,  to  comply  with 
hnnfen,  to  wink,  beckon 
U>0f)ltt)oHen   irr.,  to  favour,  to  wish 

well 
(ge)siemen,  to  suit,  to  be  suitable  to, 

to  become 

gttfjbren,  to  hearken,  to  give  ear  to 
*5Ufommen  irr.,  to  fall  to  one's  share 
Sttlacfieln,  to  smile  to 
junicfen,  to  nod  at,  to  (some  one) 
Surufen  irr.,  to  call  to 
jufagen,  to  promise 
jufefyen  irr.,  to  look  on 
jutrinfen  irr.,  to  drink  to  (some  one) 
*jtt&otfommen  irr.,  to  be  beforehand 

with  (some  one) 
Stthrinfen,  to  wink  at  .(some  one) 


(For  examples  see  page  276.) 

Notes.  1. — SRltfen  in  common  governs  the  Accusative. 
2. — (Steuern  in  the  sense  of  "to  direct,  to  steer,"  governs  the  Accusative, 

3. — SErouen  in  the  sense  of  "to  be  married  by  some  one"  governs  the- 
Accusative. 

4.— ©elingen  and  tnifclingen  if  speaking  of  a  person  are  used  as  follows : — 
(£§  gelingt  mir,  e§  mifcltngt  mir,  I  succeed,  I  fail ;— bie  ©adje  gelingt  mir,  bie 
(Saofe  mi&Iingt  mir,  I  succeed  in  the  matter,  I  fail  in  the  matter.— However 
if  the  subject  is  a  thing  in  Englisn,  geiingen  and  mi&Hngen  are  used  as  in 
English;  as,— bo»  23ilb  tft  gelungen  (mt&Iungen),  the  picture  has  succeeded 
(failed).  ®(uden  and  mifjglitcfen  are  sometimes  used  instead  of  geiingen  and 
tm&Iingen,  and  follow  the  same  rules. 

&.)  All  verbs  having  two  objects  or  which  can  have  two  objects,  re- 
quire the  direct  object  (i.e.  the  object  suffering  the  action)  in 
the  Accusative,  and  the  indirect  object  (generally  a  person)  in. 
the  Dative. 

(For  examples  see  page  280. ) 

c.)  The  following  impersonal  verbs  require  the  Dative : 

e§  biinft  mir,  methinks  C8  traumt  mir,  I  dream 

e§  efett  mir,  I  am  disgusted 

e§  atynt  mir,  my  heart  misgives 

e§  gefaUt  (irr.)  mir,  I  am  pleased 

e§  oeliebt  mir,  I  like 

e§  fetylt  mir,  I  miss 

e§  grant  mir,  I  am  afraid  of 

e§  idjftrinbelt  mir,  I  am  giddy 


e§  ift  mir  Slngft,  I  am  in  fear 
e§  tft  mir  betiaglidj,  I  am  comfortable 
e§  ge&ridjt  (irr.)  mir  on  \I  am  want- 
e§  mangelt  mir  J    ing 

e2  Hegt  mir  baron,  it  is  important 
for  me 

(See  also  page  166.) 


318 

V.    The  Accusative. 
IV*.  A  noun  must  be  in  the  Accusative: 

a.)  If  denoting  definite  time  and  it  is  not  the  subject,  or  governed 
by  a  verb  requiring  the  nominative  ;  as, 

$6)  6,aBe  ben  ganjen  £ag  gearBeitet.  I  worked  the  whole 
day.  ®ommen  ©te  ben  nadjften  Sftorgen  511  ntir.  Come  to  my  house 
the  next  morning.  3d)  fefje  iljn  jeben  @atn§tag.  I  see  him  every 
Saturday. 

NOTE.  —  Xouns  denoting  indefinite  time  and  being  in  the  Genitive 
«*ee  page  313. 

6.)  If  denoting  measure,  weight,  value,  if  with  an  adjective  or  with 
the  verbs  foften,  miegen  (irr.),  meffen  (irr.),  *ttmd))~en  (irr.), 
and  similar  ones  ;  as, 

Stfefe  SKauer  ifl  einen  gufj  Breit.  This  wall  is  a  foot  broad. 
SJteier  $ut  ift  einen  Xljalet  BtHiger  all  jener.  This  hat  is  one  dollar 
cheaner  than  that  one.  3>a§  Befte  ^amtnelfleiidj  foftet  einen  8d)iHnig 
bae  <)3funb.  The  best  mutton  costs  one  shilling  a  pound.  3>er  Sad 
nriegt  einen  (Eentner.  The  sack  weighs  a  hundred  weight. 

118.  a.)  Adjectives  formed  from  participles  of  transitive  verbs  re- 
quire their  complement  in  the  Accusative;  as, 

©in  mid)  Befudjenber  greunb.    A  friend  visiting  me. 

b. )  The  Accusative  is  sometimes  used  with  the  adjectives  mentioned 
on  page  313,  No.  112  (note  1). 

119.  Verbs  governing  the  Accusative. 

a.)  All  transitive  verbs  require  their  object  in  the  Accusative 
(i.e.  all  those  verbs  not  requiring  another  case  or  a  pre- 
position). 

(For  examples  see  page  280. ) 

6.)  After  verbs,  requiring  two  objects  both  of  which  denoting  tJie 

same  person  or  thing,  these  objects  must  be  in  the  Accusative;  as, 

SRan  nannte  i6n  ben  alien  3fager.    They  called  him  the  old  hunter. 

®r  fc6,alt  metnen  iBritber  einen  Barren.    He  stigmatised  my  brother 

as  a  fool. 

Such  verbs  are :  fjeijseit  (irr. ),  nennen  (irr.)f  fdjetten  (irr.), 
jdjim^fen,  tauten. 

Xote. — After  some  verbs  the  two  accusatives  are  connected  by  the  con- 
junction al§;  as,— 3$  fenne  iB,n  al§  einen  guten  ®efdjaft§mann.  1  know  him 
to  be  a  good  man  of  business. 

c.)  The  verbs  fragen  and  fefjren  if  having  two  objects  require  them 
in  the  Accusative;  as, 

®t  fragte  micfi  2lHe3.  He  asked  me  everything.  3dj  lefcrte  iljn 
bie  beuti$e  gpradje.  I  taught  him  the  German  language. 

d.)  Intransitive  verbs,  requiring  in  ordinary  no  object,  are  some- 
times followed  by  an  Accusative,  which  signifies  in  a  noun 
form  what  the  verb  signifies  in  a  verb  form ;  as, 

(Er  fd)Ia?t  ben  6rf)taf  beg  Oerediten.  He  sleeps  the  sleep  of  the 
just.  Crr  ipielt  tin  gefaljrlidjeS  8piel.  He  plays  a  dangerous  play. 


319 

120.  Verbs  governing  the  Accusative  in  German,  and 
-a  preposition  in  English. 

erratfien  irr.,  (bermutljen),  to  guess  at 


afcfjolen,  to  call  for 

anfietten,  to  bark  at 

anf alien  irr.,  to  fall  (run)  foul  of 

angaffen,  to  gape  at 

anlacfjeln,  to  smile  at  (some  one) 

«ntnef)men  irr.,  to  accept  of 

flttfd)reien  irr.,  to  hoot  at 

anfeljen  irr.  (betrad)ten),  to  look  at 

fdjeel  anf  efi.cn  irr.,  to  scowl  at 

Otttyeien  irr.,  to  spit  at,  upon 

anftorren,  to  gaze  on,  upon 

aitftaunen,  to  gaze  at 

anfiieren,  to  stare  at 

antreten  irr.,  to  proceed  on 

au§sifd)en,  to  hiss  at 

Bereuen,  to  repent  of 

Befteigen  irr.,  to  mount  on,  upon 

Betragen  irr.,  to  amount  to 

Bifligen,  to  approve  of 


&u  2n>enb  effen  irr.,  to  sup  on 

au  Sftittag  effen  irr.,  to  dine  on 

friit)ftucfen,  to  breakfast  on 

Ijerabfeijen,  to  detract  from 

Ijolen  faff  en  irr.,  to  send  for 

fid)   jit   SJhtjje  ntadjeit,  to  avail  one's 

self  of 

nufsBittigen,  to  disapprove  of 
fonnen,  to  bask  in  (the  sun) 
Garten,  etc. ,  ftrielen,  to  play  at  cards, 

etc. 

fuel)  en,  to  look  for 
fiiljnen,  to  atone  for 
berfiinben,  to  augur  of 
toer§eifi,en  irr.,  to  forgive  for 
aninidjen,  to  wish  for  (something) 
juge&en  irr.,  to  allow  of 


Examples.— Set  £unb  Bettte  mitf)   an.     The  dog  barked  at  me.      SBen 
•fud^en  <5ie?    Whom  are  you  looking  for? 

121.  Prepositions  governing  the  Accusative. 
(Seepage  181.) 


Remarks  on  some  Prepositions. 

ABOUT. 

122.  About  is  usually  rendered  iifrer;  as, 

3d)  nritl  mit  ftljnen  iiBer  bte  @ad)e  fpredjen.    I  will  speak  to  you 
about  the  matter. 

123.  It  is  rendered  wn  if  meaning  round;  as, 

3)er  SBinb  6Ue§  un§  urn  ben  ®otf.    The  wind  blew  about  our  heads. 

124.  It  is  translated  nttt  if  meaning  with;  as, 

<3ie  Stgarren  bei  fid)?    Have  you  any  cigars  with  you? 


125.  About  meaning  near  to,  in  time,  quantity,  etc.  or  nearly, 
is  rendered  by  the  adverb  ungef  cifyr  ;  as, 

(58  tft  ungefa^r  8  U^r.  It  is  about..  8  o'clock.  SSann  hjerben  @ie 
ungefafjr  t)ier  fein?  When  about  will  you  be  here?  3d)  §al&e  «n» 
gefd^r  6  9Jlarf  Bet  tntr.  I  have  about  6  marks  with  me.  $d)  Be* 
gegnete  if)m  ungefaftr  an  berfelBen  ©teQe.  1  met  him  about  the  same 
place.  S)a§  tft  e§  ungefa^r,  tt)a§  er  tnir  fagtc.  That  is  about  all 
he  told  me. 

BY. 

126.  By  is  rendered  nadj  if  standing  with  a  noun  denoting 
time,  measure,  quantity  or  weight  ;  as, 

28ir  roerben  nod)  ber  ©tunbe  Bejafjlt.  We  are  paid  by  the  hour. 
2>ie  93ofynen  toerben  nadj  bem  ©enndjt  tierlauft.  The  beans  are  sold 
by  the  weight. 


320 


127.  By  after  a  comparative  is  rendered  urn  which  with  it* 
noun  precedes  the  comparative  in  German  ;  as, 

©r  ift  urn  SSieleS  retdjer  al§  id).  He  is  richer  by  far  than  I  am. 
Sfcr  $ut  ift  urn  2  SKarf  tljeurer  alS  meiner.  Your  hat  is  dearer  by 
2  marks  than  mine. 

128.  Note  the  following  expressions: 


by  land,  ju  fianb 
by  water,  ju  SSaffer 
by  day,  Bet  Sag 
by  night,  Bei  9ladjt 
What  is  the  time  by  your  watch? 


one  by  one,  giner  nad)  bent  Unbent 
by   degrees,   nad)    unb    nad)    (ffufen- 

toeife) 

by  8  o'clock,  gegen  8  Ufjr 
SSie  triel  Ufjr  IjoBen  @ie  (SSic  triel  Wjr  ift 


nod)  36,rer  Uf)r)?      A  carpet  six  metres  by  five.    Sin  Seppid)  fedj§  SJteter 
long  unb  funf  TOeter  Breit. 

IN. 

129.  Note  the  following  expressions : 


in  the  street,  auf  ber  ©tra&e 

in  the  university,  auf  ber  Unitoerfttat 

in  the  island,  auf  ber  Snfel 

in  the  world,  auf  ber  SBelt 

in  this  page,  auf  btefer  ©cite 

in  his  hat  (outside),  auf  feinent  £ute 

in  this  manner,  auf  biefe  SBeife 

in  your  place,  an  Sfirer  ©tette 

in  my  opinion,  nadj  metner  2lnfid)t 

(SKeinung) 
in  love,  au§  2ieBe 

130.  Verbs  and 

*2t&Ijangen  (irr.)  toon,  to  depend  on 
fid)  abfyarmen  ufier  (A.)  urn,  to  pine 

at,  after,  for 

oBprten  gegen,  to  inure  to 
ob^auen  (irr.)  an,  (D.)  to  cut  up  by 
SRedjnung  aBIegen  toon,  to  account  for 
oBneiimen  (irr.)  on  (D.),  to  decrease  in 
abridjten  su,  to  train  to 
*abreifen  nad),  to  depart,  set  out  for 
oBjtelen  auf  (A.),  to  tend  to 
adjten  auf(v)  (A.),  to  attend,  to  pay 

attention  to 

abreffiren  an  (A.),  to  address,  direct  to 
onbrdngen  gegen,  to  press  on 
onfangen  (irr.)  an  (D.)  (mit),  to  com- 
mence, begin  from  (with) 
Ottfcatten  (irr.)  Bei,  to  stop  at 
on^eften  an  (A.),  to  affix  to 
unflagen  bei,  to  accuse  before 
onllogen  toegen,  to  impeach  for 
ftd)  onflammern  an  (A.),  to  cling  to 
atifnupfen  an,  to  annex  to 
onloden  ju,  to  allure  to 
onreiaen  ju,  to  incite  to 
an)d)tt)ellen  ju,  to  swell  to 
anjpielen  auf  (A.),  to  allude  to 
aniporuen  su,  to  spur  to 
SSermut^ung.en  anftelleTi  uBer  (A.X  to 

form  conjectures  of 
ontreiBen  ju,  to  impel  to 


in  love  with,  toerlieBt  in  (Ace.) 
in  justice  to,  au§  (Seredjtigfeit  gegen 
in  this  weather,  Bei  biejem  SBetter 
in  a  heavy  rain,   Bei  einem  ftarfen 

fRegen,  etc. 

in  the  day  time,  Bet  Sage 
in  print,  gebrurft 
in    silence,    mit    Sdjnjetgen    (id)tt)et» 

genb) 

in  itself,  themselves,  an  fid) 
black  in  white,  fdjtoars  auf  t°ei§ 

Prepositions. 

antttiorten  auf  (A.),  to  answer  (s.p.280^ 
ottttienben  ju,  to  employ  upon,  on 
fid)  argent  uBer  (A.),  to  be  vexed  at 
*ttttffa^ren  (irr.)  Bei,  to  start  at 
cufforbern  ju,  to  summon  to  (some- 
thing) 

cuffje&en  (irr.)  gegen,  to  uplift  at 
fid)  oufmadjen   nad),  to  set  forward 

for 

aufregen  ju,  to  rouse  to 
aufftadjeln  ju,  to  instigate  to 
*ftuftaud)en  au§,  to  emerge  from 
aufroenben  fiir,  to  spend  in 
auftmegeln  §u,  to  stir  to 
aus&reiten  iiBer  (A.),  to  spread  upon, 

on 

ttuSbeljnen  auf  (A.),  to  extend  to 
auSgeben  (irr.)  fur  (toerttenben  auf), 

to  expend  on 

UttSgiefeen  (irr.)  au§,  to  pour  from 
att§gietjen  (irr.)  iiBer  (A.),  to  pour  on 
auSgraBen  (irr.)  au§,  to  dig  from 
au»ruften  ju,  to  fit  for 
au§fdjelten  (irr.)  iuegen,  to  upbraid 

for 
au§fd)Iagen  (irr.)  nad),  to  kick  at  (of 

animals) 

au§fef>en  (irr.)  nad),  to  show  of 
a»§l>red)en  (irr.)  iiBer  (A.),  to   pro- 
nounce on 


(*)  This  verb  occurs  sometimes  in  the  Genitive,  especially  in  poetry. 


321 


rw§ftrecfen  nod),  to  stretch  to 
au§touid)en  gegen,  to  (ex)change  for 
ou§t^eilen  on  (A.),  to  distribute  to 
fidj  Bolgen  urn,  to  grapple  for 
BeBen    tjor   (D.),   to    quiver,   shiver 

with 

Bebeuten  fur,  to  signify  to 
Befciljigen  511,  to  qualify  for 
Befeftigen  an  (D.),  to  fasten  to,  against 
Befrogen  iifier  (A.)/  to  question  on, 

upon 

BegludEhwnfdjen  311,  to  compliment  on 
*BeIjorren  Bet,   to   persevere   in,   to 

stand  to 
ieitrogen  (irr.)  gu,  to  contribute  to, 

towards 

fid)  Betlogen  Bei— iiBer  (A.),  to  com- 
plain to— of 

Befleiben  mit,  to  invest  in 
fid)  Befummern  um,  to  concern  one's 

self  about 
Belaftigen    (quaten)    toegen    (mit),    to 

trouble  about 
fid)  Beloufen  (irr.)  auf  (A.)  (Betrogen 

irr.  A.),  to  amount  to 
fid)  Belufttgen  mit,  to  divert  in 
Bemerfen  ii&er  (A.),   to  remark  on, 

upon 

fid)  Betmifjen  urn,  to  endeavour  after 
Benennen  (irr.)  nod),  to  name  from 
fid)  Berrotijen  (irr.)  iiBer  (A.),  to  con- 
sult, confer  on 
Beratfifdjlogen  iiBer  (A.),  to  deliberate 

on 

Beredjtigen  ju,  to  entitle  to 
*Berften   (irr.)    Dor,    to    burst    with 

(anger,  etc.) 

fid)  Berufen  (irr.)  ouf  (A.),  to  appeal  to 
Befdjirmen  Dor,  to  screen,  shield  from 
Befdjrcinf  en  ouf  (A.),  to  confine,  limit  to 
Bejdjiifcen  Dor  (D.),  to  protect  from 
befdjtpoijen  urn,  to  talk  out  of 
Beidjtofiren  Bet,  to  conjure  by 
fid)  Befinnen  (irr.)  ouf  (A.),  to  bethink 

one's  self  of 
*6efteljen  (irr.)  auf  (D.),  to  persist  in, 

to  insist  on 

*BefteIjen  (irr.)  au§,  to  consist  in,  of 
Beftellen  Bei,  to  bespeak  of 
Beftimtnen  iiBer    (A.),    to    determine 

about 

Beftimmen  p,  to  design,  destine  for 
Beten  urn,  to  pray  for  (something) 
Betljoren  urn,  to  fool  out  of 
fid)  BetritBen  iiBer  (A.),  to  grieve  at, 

for 

fcetritgen  (irr.)  um,  to  cheat  of,  out  of 
Betteln  lint,  to  beg  for  (alms) 
fid)  Beugen  tor  (D.),  to  bend  to 
BeiDoIjren  bor  (D.),  to   guard,   pre- 
serve from 

fid)  BewerBen  (irr.)  (narfjjudjen)  urn,  to 
apply,  sue  for 


Behmnbern  tuegen,  to  admire  for 
fid)  BejieB/en  (irr.)  auf  (A.),  to  refer, 

relate  to 

Binben  (irr.)  on  (A.),  to  tie  to,  against 
Bilben  ou§,  to  form,  frame  of,  from 
Btlben  nod),  to  mould  from 
Bitten  urn,  to  ask,   beg  for   (some- 
thing) 

fteljen  *BIc!Bcn  (irr.)  Bei,  to  stop  at 
BHden  ouf  (A.),  to  look  on 
Broudjen  gu,  to  want  for 
Brennen  (irr.)  toor  (D.),  to  burn  with 

(desire,  etc.) 

Bringen  (irr.)  iiBer  (A.),  to  bring  upon 
Bringen  (irr.)  utn,  to  deprive  of 
Briinen  nod),  to  roar  for 
fid)  Bitden  tior  (D.),  to  stoop  to 
beden  gegen,  to  cover  from 
beflomiren  iiBer  (A.),  to  declaim  on 
benfen(*)  (irr.)  on  (A.),  to  think  of 
ftdj   brefyen  utn,   to  hinge,  turn,  on, 

upon 
briiden  on  (A.)  (gegen),  to  press  to, 

against 

buften  nod),  to  redolent  of 
biirften  nod),  to  thirst  for 
fid)   etnbrongen  Bei,  to   intrude   on, 

upon 
einfiiljren  Bei,  to  introduce  to  (some 

one's  house) 

*etngef)en  (irr.)  ouf  (A.),  to  enter  on 
fid)  einigen  iiBer  (A.),  to  agree  upon 
Ctnloben  (irr.)  p,  to  invite,  ask  to 
fid)  eintofjen  (irr.)  in  (A.),  to  engage 

upon 

fid)    einmengen    in    (A.),    to    inter- 
meddle with 
fid)    einfdjiffen   nod),   to  embark  for 

(of  persons) 

einfdjreiBen  (irr.)   ouf    (A.),    to    in- 
scribe on 

etitttenben  gegen,  to  object  to 
eiithnu'igen  in  (A.),  to  consent,  agree  to 
(gdel    cm^finbcn  (irr.)   Dot  (D.),    to 

sicken  at 

*cmtoptfteigen  (irr.)  ju,  to  ascend  to 
*entflieljen  (irr.)  bor  (D.),  to  flee  from 
entloffen  (irr.)  ou§,  to  discharge  from 
entneljtnen  (irr.)  ou§,  to  gather  from 
fid)  entfdjeiben  (irr.)  fur,  to  fix  upon 
entfdjeiben  (irr.)  iiBer  (A.),  to  de- 
termine, decide  on,  upon 
fid)  entfdjliefcen  (irr.)  ju,  to  resolve 

upon,  on 
fid)  entfdjulbigen  Bet,  to  apologize  to, 

to  make  excuse  to 
cnt|d)ulbigen  to  eg  en,  to  excuse  for 
*enttyringen  (irr.)  ouS,  to  issue,  es- 
cape from 

*entfteljen  (irr.)  ou§,  to  arise  from 
cntaiid'en  burd),  to  delight  with 
fid)    erBormen    iiBer    (A.),    to    have 
mercy  upon 


(*)  This  verb  occurs  sometimes  with  the  Genitive,  especially  in  poetry. 
German  Grammar.  11 


322 


Befijj  ergrcifcn  (irr.)  bon,   to   seize 

on,  upon 

erfteBen  (irr.)  toon,  to  levy  on 
nr^ellen  (*fjeruorgeljen    irr.)  au8,  to 

appear  by,  from 
vjcinnern  on  (A.),  to  remind  of 
fid)   erinnern  an  (A.)  or  Gen.,  to  re- 
collect, remember 
erfennen  (irr.)  an  (D.),  to  know  by 
^erflingen  (irr.)  toon,  to  ring  with 
ftdj  erfunbigen  Bet,  to  inquire  of 
fid)  erfunbigen  nadj,  to  inquire  for, 

about 

ermaljnen  ju,  to  exhort  to 
ernennen  (irr.)  jum  m.   (jur  f.),  to 

appoint  (.a  person)  a... 
errotljen  (irr.)  oui,  to  guess  by 
*err6t^en  iiBet  (A.)—  bor  (D.)— toegen, 

to  blush  at— with— for 
*erfdjaflen  bon,  to  resound  with 
*erfd)reden  (irr.)  Bet,  to  be  terrified, 

frightened  at 

'•'erftaunen   fiber  (A.),   to   be   aston- 
ished at 

*erhjadien  au§,  to  awake  from 
*erh>ad)fen  (irr.)  au§,  to  accrue  from 
nut   Sftanten    ertoaljncn,    to   mention 

by  name 

ertoerfen  ou§,  to  awaken  from 
*foUen  (irr.)  an  (A.),  to  fall  to 
*faHen  (irr.)  auf  (A.),  to  fall  (down) 

on 

fetlfdjen  urn,  to  bargain  for 
fefieln  on  (A.),  to  fetter  to 
feftfjalten  (irr.)  an  (D.),  to  stick  to 
feuern  auf  (A.),  to  fire  at 
SSergnugen  ftnben  (irr.)  an  (D.),    to 

delight  in 

fijdjen  nad),  to  fish  for 
fle^en  urn,  to  crave  for 
*folgen  auf  (A.),  to  succeed  to 
*folgen  au§,  to  ensue,  follow  from 
folgern  au»,  to  infer  from 
foridjen  nadj,  to  search,  inquire  for 
fragen   nad),   to   ask   about,    for   (a 

person) 
urn  SRatt)  frogcn  ttegen,   to  consult 

about 
frciipredjen  (irr.)  bon,  to  absolve  from, 

acquit  of 

frefien  (irr.)  (nagen)  an  (D.),  to  prey  on 
ftd)  freuen  fiBer  (A.),  to  rejoice  at,  for 
frofjloden  iiBer  (A.),  to  exult  at 
fid)  fugen  (fid)  frfjufen)  in  (A.),  to  ac- 
commodate one's  self  to 
fufyren  511,  to  conduce  to 
fid)  furojten  bor  (D.),  to  be  afraid  of 
unter  ©egeln  *gel)en  (irr.)  nadj,  to  set 

sail  for 

ge^Sren  ju,  to  belong  to  (a.  p.  2<6) 
getninnen  (irr.)  an  (D.),  to  gain  in 
geroo^nen  an  (A.),  to  accustom  to 
glauBen  an  (A.),  to  believe  in 
gtii&en  bor  (D.),  to  glow  with  (joy,  etc.) 
graben  (irr.)  nad),  to  dig  for 
fid)  gratnen  iiBer  (A.),  to  repine  at 


gratuliren  ju,  to  congratulate  on 
grabiren  (cingraBen  irr.)  in  (A.),  to 

engrave  on 
flteifen   (irr.)  nad),  to  reach,  grasp, 

snatch  at 
grenjen   on   (A.),   to   adjoin  to,    to 

border  on 

griiBeln  itBer  (A.),  to  ponder  on,  upon 
griinben  auf  (A.),  to  found  upon,  on 
gucfen  nad),  to  peep  at 
Sflongel  IjaBen  an  (D.),  to  want  in 
bie   DBerfjanb   Ijabcn   iiBer    (A.),    to 

prevail  against 
£b,eil  ()aiicn  an  (D.),   to  share,    to 

participate  of 
UeBerflufc  IjaBcn   an  (D.)  to  abound 

with,  in 

in  SSerbadjt  ^«Ben  megen,  to  suspect  of 
Ijalten  (irr.)  an  (D.),  to  hold  to 
fallen  (irr.)  fur,  (s.  p.  280) 
f)anbeln  mir,  to  deal,  trade  in 
Ijfingen  (trans.)  on  (A.),  to  hang  on, 

upon 
Ijangen  (intr.   irr.)  an  (D.),  to  hang 

on,  upon 

fiafdjen  nad),  to  catch,  scramble  at 
riaffen  ttegen,  to  hate  for 
1)  eft  en  an  (A.),  to  fix  to 
peimfudjen  an  (D.),  to  visit  on 
B  elf  en  (irr.)  Bei,  to  aid  in 
pcraBIadjeln  auf  (A.),  to  smile  upon 
fid)   Ijera&Iafjen  (irr.)  ju,  to  condes- 

cend to 

IjerauSforbern  ju,  to  provoke  to 
IjcrauShncfeln  au§,  to  extricate  from 
f)erau§ste!)en   (irr.)   au§,   to    extract 

from 
*^crcinBred)en    (irr.)    fiBer    (A,),    to 

burst  on 
*f>erfaHen  (irr.)  iiBer  (A),  to  fly  at,  to 

fall  on,  to  attack 
b,errfd)en  iiBer  (A.),  to  reign  over 
*t)crumgel)ett  (irr.)  urn,  to  walk  round 
*Jjcr&or6red)en  (irr.)  ou§,    to   break 

from 

*I)er»orge^en  (irr.)  au§,  to  result  from 
*l)crt)0rfd)tef3en  (irr.)  au§,  to  dart  from 
*I)erbor[trubeIn  ou§,  to  gush  from 
fjeulen  (fdjreien  irr.)  Ijinter  (D.)  ...  ^er, 

to  hoot  after 

*(jina&fteigen  (irr.)  ju,  to  descend  to 
IjinarBetten  auf  (A.),  to  vrork  towards 
*^)inattffteigen  (irr.)  ju,  to  mount  to 
Ijinbern  an  (D.),  to  hinder  from 
Ijtnbeuten  auf  (A.),  to  hint  at,  about 
ijinbrdngen  nod),  to  press  towards 
*{jtnfied)en  on  (D.),  to  languish  under 
Ijinsufitgen  ju,  to  add  to 
^offen  auf  (A),  to  hope  for,  in 
Ijordjen  auf  (A.),   to  hearken  to,  to 

listen  after 

Boren  auf  (A.),  to  listen  to 
I)  or  en  iiBer  (A.),  to  hear  about 
fiungern  nad),  to  hunger  for 
•  bor  (D.),    to   bound,   jump 


with  O'oy,  etc.) 


323 


fid)  fjitten  Dor  (D.),  to  beware  of 
jagen  nad),  to  hunt  for 
jaud^en  iiBer  (A.),  to  exult  in 
fambfen  um,  to  combat,  struggle  for 
faufen  ^u,  to  buy  at  (a  price) 
fetten  an  (A.),  to  chain  to 
*feudjen  fjinter  (D.)  ...  Ijer,  to  pant 

after 

feudjen  bor  (D.),  to  gasp  with 
Hog  en  gegen,  to  lament  to 
flogen  iiBer  (A.),  to  complain  of 
fleBen  an  (D.),  to  cleave  to 
fleBen  an  (A.),  to  paste  to 
tltngeln  nad),  to  ring  for  (something) 
flop  fen  an  (A.),  to  knock  at 
*fnteen  bor,  to  kneel  to 
fniibfen  on  (A.),  to  tie  to 
fnurren  iiBer  (A.),  to  snarl  at 
fodien  bor  (D.),   to  boil  with  (rage, 

etc.) 
*fomnten   (irr.)  iiBer   (A.),   to    come 

upon,  on 

*fommen  (irr.)  njegen,  to  call  for 
*fommen  (irr.)  511,  to  call  on  (some 
one) 

(onrufen  irr..  to  call  on  (with  the 
voice) 

f often  bon,  to  taste  of 
fid)  fummern  um  (frogen  nod)),  to  care 

about,  for 

ladjeln  iiBer  (A.),  to  smile  at  (some- 
thing) 

ladjeln   bor  (D.),  to  smile  with  (de- 
light etc.) 

Iad)en(*)  iifier  (A.),  to  laugh  at 
ftn!en  luffen  (irr.)  auf  (A.),  to  sink 

upon 

lauern  anf  (A.),  to  watch  for 
loufdjen  auf  (A.),  to  listen  for 
leBen  bon,  to  live  on,  by 
ledjjen  nad),  to  pant  for 
Bet  <5ette  tegen,  to  lay  aside 
(fid))  leljnen  on  (A.),  to  lean  against 
leiben   an  (D.),  to  labour  under,  to 

suffer  from 

letmen  an  (A.),  to  glue  to 
lieBen  (gern  IjaBen,   etc.)   toegen,    to 

like  for 

IteBen  um  ...  mitten  (ttegen),  to  love  for 
toor  Sinter  *Hegen  irr.,   to  ride   at 

anchor 

tofien  roegen,  to  praise  for 
*lo§6redjen  (irr.)  gegen,  to  burst  upon 
*Io3ge$en  (irr.)  auf  (A.),  to  make  at 
loSIjqden  auf  (A.),  to  peck  at 
logfturjen  (fid)  ftfirjen)  auf. (A.),  to 

rush  against 

fid)  madjen  an  (A.),  to  set  about 
mad)  en  au§,  to  make  of 
mad)  en  sum  m.  (jur  f.),  (s.  p.  280) 
fcetannt  mncfjcu  mtt,  to  acquaint  of 
Sogb  mncfjCtt  auf  (A.),  to  give  chase  to 
9teuerungen  madjcn  in  (D.),  to  inno- 
vate on 


unfcUjig  ntadjen  su,  to  disqualify  for 
fid)   berbient   mad) en   um,   to    make 

one's  self  deserved  of 
bertraut  tncttijcn  mtt,  to  familiarize  to 
Cortoftrfc  tnadjcn  roegen  (ttorroerfen 

irr.  A.),  to  reproach  with 
fid)  mengen  in  (A.),  to  meddle  with 
meffen  (irr.)  nad),  to  measure  by 
fid)  tnifdjen  unter  (A.),  to  mingle  Avith 
Mtitftrirten  Bei,  to  co-operate  in 
murren  iiber  (A.),  to  murmur,  grum- 
ble at 
nadjbenfen  (irr.)  uBer  (A.),  to  meditate 

on,  upon 

nadjtaffen  (irr.)  on  (I).),  to  abate  in 
ttai^finnen  (irr.)  iiBer  (A.),  to  muse 

upon,  on 

ttodjfudjen  um,  to  sue  for 
nagetn  an  (A.),  to  nail  to 
fid)  nfiljren  bon,  to  feed  upon 
nef»men  (irr.)  Bet,  to  take  at 
neljmen  (irr.)  auf  (A.),  to  take  on,  upon 
fid)  in  Sldjt  ttcl)mcn  (irr.)  bor,  to  be- 
ware of 

2lnftanb  nefjmcn  (irr.)  Bei,  to  demur  at 
Slnftofa  ncfimen  (irr.)  an  (D.),  to  be 

offended  at 

SI)eU  nc^mcn  (irr.)  an  (D.),  to  par- 
take in,  of,  to  join  in 
(fid))  neigen  auf  (A.),  to  bend  down  on 
(fid))  neigen  ju,  to  incline  to,  towards 
fid)  niebcrloffen  (irr.)  o!8  (conj.),  to 

set  up  for 

fid)  nieberfetjen  (irr.)  ju,  to  sit  down  to 
nieten  an  (A.),  to  rivet  to 
fid)  Bffnen  nad),  to  open  to  (a  place), 

on,  upon 

tofufdjen  in,  to  dabble  with,  in 
jjloubern  iiBer.  (A.),  to  chat  on 
profile!!  mtt,  to  boast,  brag  of 
^rcifibiren  Bei,  to  preside  at 
propljeseten   iiBer  (A.),   to   prophecy 

upon 
rod) en  an  (D.),  to  revenge,    avenge 

on,  upon 

raudjen  bon,  to  reek  with 
redjnen  auf  (A.),  to  count,  reckon  upon 
red)ten  mtt,  to  reply  against 
redjtfertigen  mtt,  to  account  from 
reben  iiBer  (A.),  to  discourse  upon 
retBen  (irr.)  an  (D.),  to  rub  against 
reidjen  Bt§  on  (A.),  to  reach  to 
*retfen  nod),  to  quit,  leave  for 
*retfen   iiBer   (A.),  to   travel   by   (a 

place) 
rtdjten    auf    (A.)    (nadj),    to    direct, 

point  at 

fid)  ridjten  nad),  to  conform  to 
riedjen  (irr.)  nad),  to  smell  of 
ringen  (irr.)  um,  to  wrestle  for 
rufen  (irr.)  nad),   to  call  for  (some- 
thing) 

ju  Criilfe  rnfen  irr.,  to  call  in  aid 
riiljmen  al§  (conj.),  to  renown  for 


To  laugh  at   someone)"  may  also  be  rendered  by  auSIadjen  (A.). 


ll1 


324 


Me  9Zafe  rwntofett  fiber  (A.),  to  sneer  at 
bie  Stirne  runjeltt  fiber  (A.)  to  frown 

at 
fagen  fiber  (A,),  to  say  upon,  about 

§m  (erjfifilen)  bon,  to  tell  about 
?n  §u,  to  say  to 
ffen  (irr).  au§,  to  create  of 
fdjamen  fiber  (A.)  or  Gen.,  to  be 
ashamed  of,  at 

fdjafcen  auf  (A,),  to  value,  estimate  at 
fdmtjen  roegen,  to  value  on 
fdjoubern  bor  (D.),  to  shudder  of 
*fd)etben  (irr.)  Don,  to  part  with 
fdjeinen  (irr.)  auf  (A.)  (bejdjetnen  iir. 

A.),  to  shine  on 

fdjelten  (irr.1)  fiber  (A.),  to  scold  at 
fdjelten   (irr.)  roegen,   to   scold,    up- 
braid for 

fdjtden  (fenben  irr.)  on(*)  (A.)— nod), 

—  511,     to     send     (something     to 

someone) — (to  a  place) — (someone 

to  a  person) 

in  einem  Slufrrog  fdjtcfcn  (fenben  irr.), 

to  send  on  an  errand 
fdjtelen  nad),  to  leer  at 
fd)ief;en  (irr.)  auf  (A.),  nad),  to  shoot  at 
*fd)tefeen  butter  (D.)  ...  fcer,  to  dart 

after 

fdjlagen  (irr.)  an  (A.),— auf  (A.)— nad) 
— roegen,  to  strike  against, — on — 
at — about 

'  djIteBfn  (irr.)  ou§,  to  conclude  from 
'djleubern  nad),  to  fling,  hurl  at 
djmodjten  nad),  to  languish  for 
djmdfien  auf  (A.),  to  inveigh  against 
'djmed'en  nad),  to  taste,  savour  of 
id)  fdjntiegen  bor  (D.),  to  crouch  to 
'  djnopten  nad),  to  snap  at,  to  gasp  for 
djrauben  an  (A.),  to  screw  to 
djretben    (irr.)    an(*)   (A.)— nad),   to 

write  (to  a  person) — (to  a  place) 
fdjretben  (irr.)  fiber  (A.)— um,  to  write 

(on  a  subject) — (for  something) 
fdjreten  (irr.)  nad),  to  bawl,  cry  for 
*fd)reiten  (irr.)  ju,  to  proceed  upon 
fdjfitteln  gegen,  to  shake  at 
fdjfitten  auf  (A.),  to  empty  on 
fdjfifcen  bor  (D.),  to  shelter  from,  pro- 
tect against 

fdjtoarmen  oon,  to  swarm  with 
*fegeln  nad),  to  sail  for 
feben  (irr.)  nod),  to  see  to,  about 
jtd)  fefynen  nod),  to  long  for 
mifjbergnfigt  *fetn   fiber  (A.),   to  re- 

re  at 
.  ^iein  auf  (A.),  to  pride  in 
itd)Jfe^en  auf  (A.),  to  settle  on 
(au§fe^en  ffir,  to  settle  something  on) 
an  bie  ©teUe  fefeen  oon,  to  substitute 

for 

feufjen  nad)  (um),  to  sigh  for 
fidjern  tior  (D.),  to  secure  from,  against 


finnen  (irr.)  auf  (A.),  to  think  upon 
ftrielen  um,  to  play  for  (something) 
fpotten  fiber(t)  (A.),  to  mock,  jeer  at 
fpredien  (irr.)  mtt,  to  speak,  talk  to 
fpredjen  (irr.)  fiber  (A.),  to  talk,  speak 

upon,  about 

ftedjen  (irr.)  nad),  to  stab  at 
in  93ranb  ftcrfen,  to  set  on  fire 
*fterben  (irr.)  an  (D.)  to  die  of 
*fterben  (irr.)  burdj,  to  die  by 
ftinfen  nad),  to  stink  of 
*ftofsen  (irr.)  an  (A.),  to  push  against 
ftoBen  (irr.)  nad),  to  butt  at 
ftreben  nod),  to  strive  for,  aspire  to 
ftreiten  (irr.)  (janfen)  um  (toegen),  to 

dispute,  quarrel  for 
fid)  ftufcen  auf  (A.),  to  lean  upon,  on 
fudten  nad),  to  seek  for 
tabeln  ttegen,  to  blame,  censure  for 
taugen  w,  to  be  fit  for 
telegrapljiren  an(*)  (A.) — nad),  to  tele- 
graph (to  someone)-— {to  a  place) 
Gingriffe  tljwt  (irr.)  in  (A.),  to  en- 
croach upon 

tradjten  nad),  to  strive  for,  aspire  to 
SBebenlen  rrogen  (irr.)  bet,  to  scruple 

at 
trauera  nm  (betrauern  A.),  to  mourn 

for 

traunten  bon,  to  dream  about 
treffen  (irr.)  auf  (A.),  to  hit  upon 
trinfen  (irr.)  au§,  to  drink  from 
triumpljtren  fiber  (A,),  to  triumph  in, 

upon 

fid)  fib  en  iu  (D.),  to  practise 
*uberetnfommen     (irr.)     uber     (A.), 
iibcrctnfttntmen  in,  to  agree  about 
flberrcben  $u,  to  persuade  to 
fiberic^en  au»,  to  translate  from 
ubertrcpen  an  (D.),  in  (D.),  to  sur- 
pass in 

tttnJjerreidjen  in  (D.),  to  hand  about 
*tttntjcrftreiien  in  (D.),  to  stroll  about 
ttmfierftreuen  in  (D.),  to  strew  about 
*untfommen  (irr.)  burd),  to  perish  of 
fid)   unter^alten   (irr.)  fiber   (A.),  to 

converse  about 
urtljeilen  nad)— fiber  (A.),   to  judge 

from,  by — of 
berbergen  (irr.)  bur  CD.),  to   conceal 

from 

fid)  berbeugen  bor  (D.),  to  bow  to 
berbinben  (irr.)  mtt,  to  join,  link  to 
fid)  berbretten  fiber  (A.),  to  enlarge 

upon 

berbrennen  (irr.)  ju,  to  burn  to 
berbiinben  mtt,  to  ally  to 
berbrangen  au§,  to  dispossess  of 
beremtgen  mtt,  to  unite  to 
fid)  beremtgen  mit,  to  join  (someone) 
bererben     auf    (A.),    to    entail    on, 
upon 


(*)  It  may  also  take  the  object  in  the  Dative,  instead  of  with  the  preposition  an. 
(t)  This  verb  occurs  sometimes  in  the  Genitive,  especially  in  poetry. 


325 


bevfoljren  (irr.)  nod),  to  act  by 
berfiigen  iiBer  (A.),  to  dispose  of 
bergelten  (irr.)  an  (D.)/  to  retaliate  on 
bergleidjen  (irr.)  mit,  to  compare  to 
berfyoften  roegen,  to  arrest  for 
berljanbeln  iiBer  (A.),  to  debate  upon 
bertjcingen  iiBer  (A.),  to  inflict  upon 
berljeirotfyen  mit,  to  marry  to 
berfielfen  (irr.)  gu,  to  help  to 
berfjinbern  an  (D.)/  to  hinder,  prevent 

from 
tjerpflen   gegen   (bor  D.),  to  shroud 

from 

bertoufen  um,  to  sell  at  (a  price) 
berfleinern  gn,  to  diminish  to 
berfiirjen  um,  to  abridge  from 
berloben  (irr.)  nod),  to  ship  (goods) 

for 

berlangen  nadj,  to  long,  sicken  for 
fid)  berlaffen  (irr.)  auf  (A.),  to  rely, 

depend  on 

berleiten,  beranlaffen  (reg.)  gu,  to  in- 
duce to 
fid)  berliefien  in  (A.),  to  fall  in  love 

with 
berlieren  (irr.)   on  (D.)— on  (A.),  to 

lose  on,  in — to 
(fid))  berlofien,   berfaredjen  (irr.)  mit, 

to  betroth,  engage  to 
berloden  gn,  to  entice  to 
bermafjlen  mit,  to  wed  to 
bermogen  (irr.)  iiBer  (A.),  to  prevail  on 
berrotljen  (irr.)  on  (A.),  to  betray  to 
berjdjtcenben  an   (A.),  to  lavish  on, 

upon 
*berfd)tt>inben  (irr.)  bor  (D.)  ou§,    to 

vanish  from 

berfoljnen  mit,  to  reconcile  to 
berfteden  bor  (D.),  to  hide  from 
berftefjen  (irr.)  ou§,  to  understand  by 
tertogen  ouf  (A.),  to  adjourn  to,  for 
bertoufdjen  gegen,  to  exchange  for 
bertfyeibigen  gegen,  to  defend  from 
bertrauen  auf  (A.),  to  trust  in,  to 
berurtljeifen  gu,  to  sentence  to 
berroanbeln  au§,  to  change  from 
berroanbeln  in  (A.),  to  alter,  change  in 
''•'berroeilen  Bet,  to  dwell,  harp  upon, 

on 

berttenben  auf  (A.),  to  spend  upon 
toergidjten  auf  (A.),  to  dispense  with, 

to  renounce 

bergroeifeln  an  (D.),  to  despair  of 
(fid))  ttor&ereiten  ju,  to  prepare  for 
Jjorijcrfogen  ou§,  to  presage  from 
*»orr:itcten  gegen,   to  advance  (to  go 

forward)  upon 
aovfdiiefjen  (irr.)  auf  (A.),  to  advance 

(money)  upon 


t)orf»red)en  (irr.)  Bei,  to  call  on,  to 

visit 

fid)  roogen  auf  (A.),  to  venture  on 
roarnen  bor  (D.),  to  warn  of,  against 
h>arten(*)  auf  (A.),  to  wait,  stay  for 
ttjcgtoerfen  (irr.)  on  (A.),   to  throw 

away  on 

roefjflagen  nm,  to  lament  for 
Joetnen  iiber  (A.)— um,  to  weep  at— 

for 
treinen  bor  (D.),  to  weep  with  (joy> 

etc.) 

fid)  raenben  on  (A.),  to  apply  to 
(fid))   roenben  gegen,  to  turn  (round) 

to,  on 

*roerben  (irr.)  on§,  to  become  of,  from 
fett  *tt>erben  (irr.)  bon,  to  fatten  on 
roerfen  (irr.)  nad),  to  cast,  throw  at 
roerfen  (irr.)  p,  to  cast  to 
roetten  auf  (A.),  to  bet  on 
ibieberfjatfen  bon,  to  echo  with 
toirfen   auf  (A.),  to  act,  operate  on, 

upon 
fid)   rounbern   nfier   (A.),  to   admire, 

wonder  at 
©Hid  hwttfdjeit  ju,  to  congratulate, 

felicitate  on,  upon 
jaljlen  auf  (A.),  to  count  on 
5af)Ien  bi§  (auf  A.),  to  count  to 
jeigen   ouf   (A.) — nod),   to   point  at 

—to 

jerfjauen  (irr.)  in  (A.),  to  cut,  chop  to 
aerreijjen  (irr.)  in  (A.),  to  rend,  tear 

to 

gerfdjmettern  in  (A.),  to  dash  to 
Siet)en  (irr.)  auf  (A.),  to  draw  on 
Stelen  auf  (A.),  to  aim,  level  at 
Bittern  Bei — bor  (D.)/  to  tremble  at 

—with 

gogern  Bei,  to  hesitate  at 
guden  bor  (D.),  to  palpitate  with 
julaffen  (irr.)  gu,  to  admit  to 
SurccJjtroeifen    (irr.)    roegen,    to    re- 
prove for 

*5urucffe^ren  ju,  to  revert  to 
*5uriirffommen  (irr.)  ouf  (A.),  to  re- 
cur to 
*8ururfroeidjen    (irr.)    bor    (D.),    to 

shrink  at 
*5«fammcnfd)rumbfen  §u,  to  shrink 

to 

Sttfnmntcnfe^en  au§,  to  compose  of 
Sitfdjliefjen  (irr.)  B,inter  (D.),  to  close, 

shut  upon,  on 

5Utret6en  (irr.)  auf  (A.),  to  drive  at 
jroeifeln  on  (D.),  to  doubt  of,  about 
groingen  (irr.)  ju,  to  force  to 
gurnen(t)  iifier  (A.),  auf  (A.),  to  be 

angry  at 


(*)  This  verb  occurs  sometimes  with  the  Genitive,  especially  in  poetry. 

(t)  This  verb  may  also  take  the  object  in  the  Dative,  instead  of  with  a  prepo- 
sition. 


826 


132.  Adjectives  with  Prepositions. 


obljangig  toon,  dependent  on,  upon 
odjtlo»  auf  (A.),  regardless,  thought- 
less of 

odjtiant    auf    (A.),    heedful,    regard- 
ful of 

ongcefelt  Don,  disgusted  at,  with 
angeftccft  Don,  infected  with 
dngftftdj  ttjegen,  anxious  about 
anftoBenb  an  (A.),  contigous  to 
anftofjig  fur,  offensive  to 
amuenbbar  auf  (A.),  appliable  to 
firgerlt^  fiber  (A.),  vexed  at 
crgttjoljmfdj  tt>egen,  suspicious  of 
arm  an  (D.),  poor  of 
aufgeblafen  Don,  elated  with 
cufgebrorfjt  iiber  (A.),  irritated,  exas- 
perated at 

cufgeregt  burdj,  excited  by 
aufmertfam  auf  (A.),  attentive  to 
ouBer    ftd)    fiber    (A.),    exasperated 

with 

au§geborrt  burdj,  parched  with 
ouSgeljungert  burd),  famished  with 
bange  bor  (D.),  fearful,  afraid  of 
banferott  an  (D.),  bankrupt  in,  of 
barmfjerjig  gegcn,  merciful  to 
bebrdngt  butd),  pressed  with 
befrtebigenb  fur,  satisfactory  to 
befrtebigt  Don,  satisfied  with 
begietig  nadj,  eager  for,  on 
befannt  mit,  conversant   about,    ac 

quainted  with 

befannt  unter  (D.),  known  by 
befannt  ioegen  (burdj),  noticed  for 
befummert  fiber  (A.),  afflicted  at 
befummert  urn,  concerned  about 
beleibigt  burrf),  affronted  at,  with 
betuftigt  burdj,  amused  at 
bemerfenSttJertb,    roegen,     remarkable 

for 

beraufdjt  toon,  intoxicated  with 
bercdjnet  auf  (A.),  calculated  for 
bereit  ju,  ready  for 
beriljmt  burdj,  famed,  famous  for 
berfitymt  wegen,  celebrated  for 
beid)dmt     fiber    (A.),     abashed    at, 

ashamed  of 

beidjttjerlidj  fur,  burthensome  to 
beiorgt  urn,  afraid,  anxious  for 
beforgt  tuegen,  anxious  about 
beftimmt  nac^,  bound  for 
beftfirjt  fiber  (A.),   confounded,  per- 
plexed at 

betdubt  con,  stunned  by 
betfjeiligt  bei,  concerned  in 
betb,6rt  Don,  infatuated  with 
betroffen  Don,  struck  with 
beunrufjtgt  fiber  (A.),  vexed  with 
beunruljtgt  toon,  troubled  at 
beroegt  burdj,  affected,  agitated  by 
iejaubert  Don,  enchanted  with 


blafj  bor  (D.),  pale  with 

blinb  auf  (D.)— gegen— uor  (D.),  blind 

of—to—with 
bluttg  Don,  bloody  with 
boje  auf  (A.),  cross  at 
bo|e  gegen,  evil  towards 
Boie  tnegen,  angry  about 
bunt  an  (D.),  varied  in 
banlbar  gegen,  thankful  to 
bid&t  an  (D.),  close  to 
bid  toon,  thick  with 
bienlitf)  ju,  serviceable  to 
burc^bringlid)  fur,  pervious  to 
ebjgetiig  nac^,  ambitious  of 
eiferiud)tig  auf  (A.),  jealous  of 
eigen  in  (D.)/  particular  about,  on 
eingebtlbet  auf  (A.),  conceited  about 
emgenotnmen  fur,  partial  to 
eingenommen  toon,  captivated  with 
eitel  auf  (A.),  vain  of 
empfdnglidj  fur,  sensible  to 
empftnblto^  fiber  (A.),  sensible  of 
entruftet  fiber  (A.),  indignant  at 
entfrfjeibenb  in  (D.),  decisive  of 
cntidjetbenb  fiber  (A.),  decisive  on 
entsficft  fiber  (A.),  delighted  at 
entsutft  toon,  delighted  with 
erfa^ren  in  (D.),  expert  at 
erfreut  burt^,  pleased  at 
ergriffen  Don,  seized,  taken  with 
er^aben  fiber  (A.),  paramount  to 
erljeitert  burt^,  cheered  with 
ermiibet  Don,  fatigued  with 
erptdjt  auf  (A.),  intend  upon 
ericforecft  burd^,  frightened  at 
erjc^rectt  fiber  (A.),  dismayed  at 
eridjrorfen  fiber  (A.),  frightened  with 
erftount  fiber  (A.),  astonished  at 
erfticft  Don,  suffocated  with 
fdi)tg(*)  5U,  capable,  able  of 
faljd)  gegen,  false  to 
feudjt  toon,  moist  with 
forberltdj  ju,  conducive  to 
frecf)  gegen,  insolent  to 
fretgebig  gegen,  liberal,  bountiful  to 
freunbliclj  gegen,  friendly  to 
frobX*)  fiber  (A.),  glad  of,  at 
frurfitbar  an  (D.),  fertile,  productive 

of 

frfib,er  al§  (conj.X  P«°r  to 
furdjtlof  Dor,  fearless  of 
gebieterijc^  fur,  imperative  on 
geblenbet  Don,  dazzled  with,  by 
geboren  511,  born  to 
gebulbig  gegen,  patient  with 
geeignet  ^u,  proper,  qualified  for 
gefiibllo§  gegcn,  insensible  of,  to 
gcffiljlDoII  fur,  sensible  of,  to 
get5tg  mit,  avaricious  of 
geneigt  511,  prone,  inclined  to 
genug  an  (D.),  enough  of 


(«)  It  takes  sometimes  its  compliment  in  the  Genitive,  instead  of  with  a  pre- 
position. 


327 


getedjt  gegen,  just  to 
geretjt  burd),  provocated  by 
gereist  iiBer  (A.),  irritated  at 
geringer  an  (D.),  inferior  in 
geriiljrt  iiBer  (A.),  moved  with 
gerii^rt  bon,  touched  at,  -with 
gefcitttgt  Don,  sated  with 
gefdncft  in  (D.),  apt,  skilful  at 
gefdjidt  ju,  apt  for 
gejegnet  burd),  blest  in 
gefunb  an  (D.),  healthy  in 
getaufdjt  in  (D.),  disappointed  of 
getooljlt  in  (D.)/  choice  of 
getoofjnUd)  Bet,  usual  with 
getb56,nt  an  (A.)/  used  to 
gierig  nod),  greedy  for 
gleid)  an  (D.),  equal  in 
gleidjgiiltig  gegen,  indifferent  to 
gliidlid)  iiBer  (A.),  happy  at 
gncibig  gegen,  gracious  to 
gran  bor  (D.),  grey  with 
graufant  gegen,  cruel  to 
greifBar  fur,  palpable  to 
gren§enb  on  (A.),  adjacent  to 
gtojjtmitfitg  gegen,  generous  to 
gut  gegen  (511),  good  to 
giitig  gegen,  kind  to 
fjoBgierig  nadj,  covetous  of 
ijerborragenb  bnrd),  eminent  for 
ijoflidj  gegen,  polite,  civil  to 
tntereffant  (anatefjenb)  fur,  inter  sting 

to 

flein  (gertng)  an  (D.),  little  in 
fnabto  an  (1).),  scant,  short  of 
fronf  an  (D.)  —  bor  (D.),  sick  in, 

—with 

langmiit^tg  gegen,  forbearing  towards 
leer  an  (D.),  empty,  void  of 
leutfelig  gefien,  affable  to 
IteBebott  gegen,  affectionate  to 
liiftern  nod),  eager  for,  lusting  after 
mtlb  gegen,  gentle  to 
nu'Ibtljatig  gegen,  charitable  to 
mtfjirauiid)  gegen,  diffident,  distrust- 
ful of 

mttletbig  gegen,  compassionate  to 
ntorberifdj  fiir,  murderous  to 
ntiibe  toon,  weary  with 
nad)Iafetg  in  (D.),  neglectful  of 
nadiftdjtig  gegen,  indulgent  to 
nad)tf>eilig  fiir,  derogatory  to 
nafe  bon,  wet  with 
netbtfd)  auf  (A.),  envious  at,  of 
neugierig  iu  (D.),  inquisitive  about 
notfjig  an,  requisite  to 
not^roenbig  §u,  essential  to 
offen  fiir,  open  to 
paffenb  fiir,  convenient  to" 
}>affenb  ju,  fit  for 
rafenb  toor  (D.),  frantic  with 
teidj  on  (D.),  rich  in,  with 
retf  511  (fiir),  ripe  for 
rotfi  tior  (D.),  red  with 
tut)ig  Bet,  calm  at 
fdEjimpflid)  fiir,  disgraceful  to 
td)meraltdj  fitr,  painful  to 


fd}fld)tern  gegen,  shy  to 
td)iid)tern  bor  (D.),  shy  of 
jdjulbig  gegen,  guilty  to 
frf)ulblo§  on  (D.),  guiltless  of 
fenlredjt  auf  (A.),  perpendicular  to 
fidjer  ii6er  (A.),  sure  of 
fidjer  tior  (D.),  secure  against,  from 
fparfam  mit,  frugal,  saving  of 
footer  al§  (conj.),  posterior  to 
ftolj  auf  (A.),  proud  of 
ftrenge  gegen,  severe  on,  strict,  to 
ftumm  ufcer  (A.),  dumb  on 
ftumm  toor  (D.),  dumb  with 
fii§  fiir,  sweet  to 
tauB  auf  (D.),  deaf  hi 
touB  gegen,  deaf  to 
tobt  fiir,  dead  to 
toE  Dor  (D  ),  mad  with 
traurig  wcgen,  sorry  for 
treuto§  gegen,  perfidious  to 
uBeretnftimmenb  mit,  according  to 
iiBerlcgen  an  (D.)/  superior  in 
iiBerrafdjt  burdj,  surprised  at 
iiBerbott  Don,  replete  with 
iifiertolitttgt  ton,  overwhelmed  with 
itmroblft  Don,  clouded  with 
nnBelannt  wit,  ignorant  of 
unBefiimmert  ntn,  reckless  of 
unBemerlBar  fiir,  inperceptible  to 
unbitrdjbrtnglid)  fur,  inpenetrable  to 
unempfinblid)  gegen,  insensible  of,  to 
unfdljig  geroorben  p,  disabled  from 
unfreunblid)  gegen,  ill-natured  to 
ungebulbtg  iiBer  (A.),  impatient  at 
nnglittflid)  burd),  distressed  with 
unrut)ig  to  eg  en,  uneasy  about 
unfdjittbig  on  (D.),  innocent  of 
imfitfitbar  fiir,  invisible  to 
unterBrodjen  ton,  broken  with 
unterttmrfig  gegen,  submissive  to 
untieretnBar  wit,  abhorrent  to 
unjufrieben  iiBer  (A.),  displeased  at 
terBunben  mil,  adjunct  to 
berberBItd)  fiir,  ruinous  to 
tiergefelid)  in  (D.),  forgetful  of 
DergleidjBar  ntit,  comparable  to 
toerle&enb  fiir,  injurious  to 
berlteBt    in    (A.),     in    love    with, 

amorous  of 
toeridjroenberifd)  ntit,   lavish,   profuse 

of 

toertrdglid)  mtt,  compatible  to 
fcertrauenStoott  gegen,  confident  to 
bertraut  mit,  familiar  to 
toertoanbt    mit,    related,    akin,    con- 
genial to 
berimrrt    burd) — bon,    distracted   at, 

—with 
ber&efirt  burd),  worn  with 


328 


»oH  ton  (t>oHer),(*)  full  of 
Borfidjttg  in  (D.),  cautious  about 
Dortljeilijaft  fur,  advantageous,  profit- 
able to 

ttjacfjfant  auf  (A.),  watchful  of 
toolbar  gu,  eligible  to 
ttei entli^  fur,  material  to 


toofiltfjatig  fiir,  beneficial  to 
ttriitfienb  iiber  (A.),  enraged  at,  with 
jornig  gegen,  angry  -with 
gorntg  (bofe)  u6er  (A.),  angry  at 
Siifammengefetjt  au§,  composed  of 
jtteifelljaft  in  (D.),  dubious  of 


(*)  SSpH  usually  governs  the  Genitive ;  as,— tioH  fufjen  SSeineS,  full  of  sweet 
wine;  however  the  Genitive  is  seldom  expressed  if  tioH  is  directly  fol- 
lowed by  the  noun ;  as,— eine  Xafdje  »oU  ©elb,  a  pocket  full  of  money. 
—Instead  of  tiott  also  DoHer  is  occurring,  especially  in  the  scriptures. 


329 


How  to  write  a  Letter  in  German  with  the 
assistance  of  Hossf eld's  English- German 
Commercial  Correspondent. 


For  the  direction  of  persons  wishing  to  correspond  in  German, 
we  give  in  the  following  pages  specimens  of  letters,  &c.,  in  Eng- 
lish, taken  from  HOSSFELD'S  English-German  Commercial  Corres- 
pondent ;  these  letters,  constructed  from  paragraphs  or  clauses 
from  this  work,  have  in  juxtaposition  the  exact  translation,  and, 
by  joining  these  together,  the  letter  is  translated  into  good 
German. 

The  small  figures  in  these  specimens  indicate  the  page  of  the 
oook  on  which  the  paragraph  or  sentence  is  to  be  found  ;  the 
translation  of  it  is  opposite. 

The  words  marked  in  italics  are  to  be  found  in  the  vocabulary 
given  at  the  end  of  the  Correspondent,  and  are  variations  intro- 
duced in  the  text,  thus  enabling  the  writer  to  subdivide  the 
phrases  to  an  unlimited  extent. 

Therefore,  the  pupil  who  wishes  to  learn  to  correspond  in 
German  by  this  method,  has 

First  to  select  the  phrases  from  the  English  part  of  the  Cor- 
respondent, put  them  together  from  the  beginning  to- 
the  end,  so  that  they  form  the  letter  he  wishes  to 
write  ; 

Second  to  copy  the  translation  of  these  phrases. 

By  doing  so  he  will  have  the  correct  translation  of  his  lettei 
into  German  ;  and,  by  using  the  Correspondent  in  this  way  daily 
for  a  few  months,  he  will  be  able  to  correspond  in  German  without 
further  assistance. 


1  1 


330 

Edinburgh,  5th  May,  18... 8* 
Messrs.  DUVAL  &  Co.,  Merchants,  Rouen.89 

Gentlemen,38 

It  is  with  deep  sorrow  that38  we  hasten  to  inform  you  that41 
your  ship,  the  "Hardy,"  disabled  by  a  furious  gale,121  strum  led 
yesterday  at  noon  on  the  rocks  of121  Ardrossan.  Her  hull  is 
staved  in  in  several  places,  and  her  masts  are  severely  damaged.1-1 
The  work  of  salvage  is  actively  proceeding,122  under  the  direction 
of  the  marine  authorities.122  Half  of  the  cargo,  at  least,  must  be 
considered  as  lost,122  the  remainder  will  be  seriously  damaged.1- 

The  crew,  worn  out  with  fatigue,123  were  objects  of  the  most 
assiduous  care.123  To-morrow  the  authorities  of  this  port  will 
forward  to  their  respective  places  of  registration  such  of  them  as 
may  wish  to  return  thither.123 

We  have  the  honour  to  remain,  yours  respectfully,70 

Rt.  P.  BLACKWALL  &  MERTENS. 


Birmingham,  7th  July,  IS...33 
Messrs.  THOMPSON  &  Co.,  Calcutta.35 

Gentlemen,38 
In  consequence  of  the  high  recommendations  with  which  my 

friend  Mr has  furnished  me  in  regard  to  your  house,  I 

should  be  inclined  to  make  some  consignments  to  you,26-  but  as  I 
am  (sehe  aber  ...)  very  little  decided  as  to  the  kind  of  transactions 
to  be  carried  out262  in  your  market,262 1  should  desire  (uiid  u'iinli- 
ich),  as  a  preliminary,  to  be  informed  by  you  upon  the  following 
points,  viz.  : — 26S 

1.  To  (zu)  furnish  us  with  the  necessary  information263  with 
a  view  to  enlightening  us  as  to  transactions  of  this  kind  in  your 
country.263 

2.  What  is,  in  your  estimation,  the  maximum  net  price,  all 
charges  included,  at  which  it  would  be  possible  to  act  here,  so  as 
to  maintain,  under  normal  conditions,  a  fair  prospect  of  success 
in  reselling  in  your  market?264 

3.  What  periods  of  the  year  are  the  most  favourable  for  the 
arrival  of  these  goods  at  your  port?  ^ 

Awaiting  your  reply,  I  beg  you  to  believe  me  your  devoted 
servant.75 

J.  HARRISON. 


331 

Dover,  April  4th,  18... ** 
Mr.  JULES  GAUDIN,  Bordeaux.34 

Dear  Sir,38 

In  reply  to  your  favour  of53  the  3rd  inst.,51  we  beg  to  inform 
you  that56  the  steamer  "  Wilhelm  "  is  a  magnificent  boat.92  She 
has  just  been  careened,  and  is  in  excellent  condition.93  Her  sails, 
chains  and  rigging  are  entirely  new.93  The  vessel  has  a  capacity 
of  800  tons  official  measure,  but  can  carry  up  to  980  tons.9*  It 
would  be  impossible  to  make  a  better  choice97  for  the  rough  voyage 
in  question.97  Our  price,  which  has  been  calculated  with  exact- 
ness, and  from  which  we  cannot  deviate,  would  be  «£17,650.238 

Requesting  you  to  give  us  an  early  answer,76  we  remain,  with 
the  most  sincere  regard,70 

A.  RUMBOLDT  &  Co. 


London,  April  9th,  18...33 
Messrs.  A.  PATERSON  &  Co.,  Paris.90 

Gentlemen,38 

In  accordance  with  the  contents  of  our  last51  we  have  the 
pleasure  of  transmitting  you  herewith  a  little  order  respecting47 
different  articles. 

3  dozen  cloth  brushes 
3     „       bone  tooth  brushes 
2     „       ivory  hair  brushes 
2     „       alarum  clocks 
2  bronze  clocks 
2  gilded  copper  clocks 
2  dozen  combs,  assorted.      Tortoise-shell,  metallic,  india- 
rubber  and  horn. 

A  later  advice  will  inform  you  as  to  the  destination  of  the 
goods  in  question,  as  well  as  the  mode  of  conveyance.227 

Should  you  deem  it  necessary  to  make  inquiries  respecting 
us,  you  could  do  so  of  Messrs.  D...  and  S...47  of  your  place,47  with 
whom  we  have  transacted  business  for  upwards  of  ten  years.47 

Be  so  good  as  to  make  the  necessary  arrangements  for  pro- 
curing these  articles  within  a  reasonable  time.22 

Hoping  that  you  will  favour  us  with  an  early  reply,"5  we 
remain,  [gentlemen],  yours  respectfully,71 

DONALD  HERO  us  &  Co. 


332 

Calcutta,  30th  August,  18... 
Mr.  J.  HARRISON,  Birmingham.34 

Sir,3* 

In  acknowledging  the  receipt  of  your  favour  of  the56  20th  of 
last  month,51  we  beg  to  inform  you  that50  we  accept  without 
hesitation  the  proposal  which  you  address  to  us.'267  Subject  to 
the  conditions  which  you  prescribe,  the  transaction  appears  to  us 
to  present  little  difficulty,  at  the  same  time  that  it  offers  consider- 
able advantages.267  In  order  that  the  result  may  answer  our  ex- 
pectations (Damit  nun  der  Erfolg  unsercn  Erwartungen  entspreclie 
so)  we6  forward"  you  herewith169  a  detailed  list227  of  sundry  goods 
in  your  department  of  trade.236 

1. — Needles,  sewing  and  knitting. 

2. — Steel  pens. 

3. — Pencils,  pencil  holders,  penholders. 

4. — Pins,  liair-pins. 

5.— Pocket-looks. 

6. — Purses;  red,  scarlet  and  purple;  and 

7. — Rings. 

As  to  the  net  price  (Hinsichtlich  des  Netto-Preises),  all  charges 
included,  at  which  it  would  be  possible  to  act  here,264  we6  are"  notc 
in  a  position  to  fix  any  price  for  these  goods,244  but  used  to  this 
sort  of  business,  we  know  what  is  necessary  in  order  to  attain 
favourable  results,248  and  you  may  be  certain  that  nothing  will  be 
neglected  in  order  to  second  the  views  of  our  constituents.248  The 
periods  of  the  year  which  (welche)  are  the  most  favourable  for  the 
arrival  of  these  goods  at  our  (unserem)  port264  would  be  (waren) 
January  and  February.351 

Placing  our  services  at  your  disposal,75  we  shall  feel  attered 
should  you  find  frequent  occasion  to  make  use  of  them."4 

T.  THOMPSON  &  Co. 


Barcelona,  February  2nd,  18.... 
Messrs.  ELLIOTT  BROTHERS,  London. 

I  remit  you  with  this  ten  bills  upon  Messrs of  Liver- 
pool, and  Messrs of  Bristol,  at  three  months'  date,190  and 

request  the  favour  of  you  to  effect  the  negotiation  of  them  to  the 
best  of  my  interests,190  crediting  me  the  proceeds  and  advising  me 
of  the  result.190  •  Hoping77  that  you  will  use  in  this  respect  the 
greatest  promptitude,77  believe6  mea  to  be  your  most  devoted 
servant,69  J.  BARBER. 


333 

London,  April  26th,  18..  .* 

Messrs.  J.  DOMINGUO  &  Co.,35  Buenos  Ayres. 
Gentlemen,38 

We  have  to  apologise  for  not  having  written  to  you  sooner,64 
but  we  were  so  busy  at  the  time  of  the  departure  of  the  last 
mail64  that  it  was  impossible  for  us  to  write  to  you  fully.64 

Desirous  of  meeting  your  wishes,  we  have  collected  infor- 
mation194 which  (welclie)  we  have  the  pleasure  of  remitting  you.171 

The  last  political  changes  have  met  a  very  indifferent  recep- 
tion here ;  for  a  moment  it  might  have  been  expected  that  business 
would  be  affected  thereby,198  but  this  bad  feeling  fortunately  did 
not  last  long,198  and  although  the  demand  has  diminished  slightly, 
prices  have  not  given  way,196  and  the  firmness  of  the  market  has 
not  been  disturbed  for  a  moment.196 

English  consols  remain  very  firm  at192  99|,  100J  for  money 
(gegen  baar)  and  at  100£,  £,  for  the  account  (auf  Zeit\ 

Cotton  is  firm  ;208  the  demand  has  assumed  great  dimensions 
within  the  last  fortnight,201  and  (und  die)  prices  have  risen  con- 
siderably in  the  last  few  days.201 

The  supply  in  coffees  greatly  exceeding  the  demand,  there  has 
naturally  followed  a  serious  decline,  which  threatens  to  assume 
etill  larger  proportions  ;206  800  bags  Porto  Kico  coffee  have  been 
disposed  of  at  16s.  3d.209 

Prices  for  sugar  have  been  well  sustained  hitherto,  but  they 
begin  to  waver.205 

All  our  works  are  in  full  operation.221  Industrial  activity 
does  not  flag  for  a  moment;  it  is  passing  through  a  period  of 
prosperity.221  If  the  demand  continues  to  keep  thus,  manufac- 
turers will  soon  be  overdone  with  orders,  and  will  run  short  of 
means  of  executing  them.222 

We  avail  ourselves  of  this  opportunity  to  place  our  services 
at  your  disposal,  and  in  the  hope  that  you  will  reserve  us  a  few 
orders,  we  present  you74  our  most  sincere  regards.70 

MORENO  &  NEPHEW. 


334 

Rouen,  August  30th,  18.., 
Messrs.  L.  ROTHE  &  Co.,  Berlin. 
Gentlemen,38 

Permit  us  to  introduce  to  you  the  bearer  of  this  letter,  Mr. 
K...,  of  ...,  one  of  the  most  important  manufacturers  in  ...*•  The 
principal  object  of  his  journey  is  to  revive  old  connections  and 
form  new  ones,  with  a  view  to  extend  the  sale  of  his  (seiner) 
irticles  of  manufacture.181 

We  therefore  venture  to  request  your  kind  assistance  in  the 
furtherance  of  his  object,  as  we  feel  persuaded  that  you  will  not 
/efuse  him  your  advice,  especially  in  any  case  of  credit  to  be 
granted,  agreements  to  be  made,  etc.181 

With  respect  to  the  funds  placed  at  Mr.  R.'s  disposal,181  we> 
oeg"  to  open  a  credit  with  you  in  his  favour  (fur  ihri)  of  ...,  and 
request  you  to  forward  us  his  receipts,  that  we  may  meet  them 
forthwith.191 

Accept  our  thanks  (und  dariken  wir  Ihneri)  beforehan  i  for  the 
marks  of  civility  which  we  are  sure  you  will  show  him,180  and 
believe  us6  to  be,a  gentlemen,  your  obedient  servants,71 

GEO.  FLEURY  &  ^ 


Paris,  March  6th,  18.., 
Messrs.  J.  T.  BARKER  &  Sox,  London. 

Gentlemen, 

My  object  in  writing  you  this  is  to  inform  you  that,148  under 
yesterday's  date,1*3  /  have  drawn  on  you  the  following  drafts : 
Frs.  3,000  at  8  days'  date,  to  the  order  of  J.  Ferrier. 
Frs.  2,500  at  10  days'  date  to  the  order  of  A.  Martin. 


Frs.  5,500  total.143 

Which  I  request  you  kindly  to  honour  with  your  acceptance.150  I 
shall  (werde  ich)  take  care  to  remit  the  necessary  funds  to  you 
before  maturity.'30 

I  shall  write  you80  more  at  length  on  this  subject,81  pressed 
as  I  am  for  time  by  the  departure  of  the  mail  (da  ich  durch  den 
Abgang  der  Post  zur  Eile  gezwungen  bin). 

Accept,  gentlemen,  the  assurance  of  my  sincere  attach- 
ment,69 yours  truly,69 

A.  LEFAURE. 


335 

London,  March  20th,  18... 
Mr.  A.  LEPAURE,  Paris. 

Dear  Sir, 

We  are  in  receipt  of  your  letter  of 56  the  6th  o'i  March,57  by 
which  you  advise  us  of  having  drawn  on  us163  for  the  sum  of 153 
Frs.  5,500. 

It  is  almost  superfluous  to  say  that  these  drafts  will  meet 
with  due  acceptance  on  our  part  ;154  pray  take  care  (und  bitten)  to 
€over  us  at  the  proper  time  for  the  amount.169 

Reiterating  our  offers  of  service,  we  tender  you  our  sincerest 
and  most  cordial  respects.75 

Yours  faithfully,69 

J.  T.  BARKER  &  SON 


Leipsic,  June  2nd,  18... 
Mr.  ADOLPH  HOSSFELD,  Stettin. 

Sir, 

Be  so  good  as  to  do  what  is  necessary  in  order  to  effect  a 
policy  of  insurance  upon  our  vessel,128  the  brig  "  Gaston,"  bound 
for  Havannah  from  Stettin,128  subject  to  the  ordinary  clauses  and 
conditions.128  We  fix  upon  the  round  sum  of  Marks  41,500  as 
the  amount  of  insurance.129 

We  also  beg  you  to  open  a  policy  upon  the  goods  in  course  of 
shipment,  for  our  account  on  her  board129  (mit  diesem  Schiffe)  and 
of  which  you  will  find  annexed  a  complete  inventory.130 

The  insurance  is  intended  to  cover  the  entire  voyage ;  that  is 
to  say,  it  is  to  extend  to  the  discharge  in  this  last-mentioned 
port,130  and  we6  confide"  in  your  uniform  attention  to  carefully 
protect  our  interests  in  treating  with  the  company.132 

Hoping  that  you  will  favour  us  with  an  immediate  reply/7 
we&  have"  the  honour  to  remain  yours  respectfully,70 

H.  BACKHAUS  &  Co. 
Inventory — 13° 

25  cases  (Kisteri)  buttons,  assorted  (assortirt);  silk,  mother- 
of-pearl,  wood  and  metal ;  brushes  and  combs. 
20  cases  muslin,  embroidered,  checked  and  printed, 
20  cases  silk  goods. 

9  cases  stationery,  including  (enthaltend)  print  i, iff  paper, 
writing  paper,  buff  paper,  packing  paper. 


336 

London,  February  5th,  18... 
Messrs.  ROBERT,  Sox  &  Co.,  rue  des  Marais,  Paris.85 

Gentlemen, 

We  have  (wir  haben)  the  pleasure  of  sending  you  annexed  a 
note  comprising  tliree  articles,  which  we  shall  feel  obliged  by 
your  purchasing  on  our  account  in  your  market,2-7  observing  our 
instructions  as  to  form  and  dimension.228 

In  case  there  should  be  no  stock  of  them  in  the  market  of 
the  required  size,  they  will  have  to  be  ordered  at  once  from  the 
manufactory.228 

Six  dozen  gentlemen's  kid  gloves :  Nos.  7,  7j,  7|,  two  dozen 
each,  black,  deep  black,  blue  black. 

Twelve  dozen  ladies'  kid  gloves :  Nos.  6,  65,  6£,  long. 
Twelve  dozen  ditto  ditto :  same  Nos.,  slwrt. 
The  ladies1  kid  gloves  to  be  well  assorted  (miissen  gut  assortirt 
sein)  in  yellow,   bright  yellow,   lime  yellow,  canarian  and  straw 
colour. 

Two  dozen  mittens,  netted. 
One        „         „       fine  woollen. 

Trusting  (hoffend)  that  you  will  follow  our  instructions  with 
judgment  and  promptitude,230  we6  offer*  you,  gentlemen,  our  best 
regards.70 

THOMPSON  BROTHERS. 


London,  February  20th,  18... 
Mr.  L.  CARLITO,  Manufacturer,  Burgos.90 

Dear  Sir,38 

We  regret  to  have  to  inform  you  that42  your  draft,  dated 
November  6th,  18...,  to  the  order  of  J.  B.,  has  not  been  taken  up 
by  the  drawee.176 

Desirous  of  protecting  the  honour  of  your  signature,  we 
have  taken  upon  ourselves  to  intervene,  and  have  accepted  this 
draft  under  protest.176  Be  so  good  as  to  favour  us  with  the 
remittance  (den  Betrag)  without  delay.168 

Not  doubting  that  you  will  reply  with  your  usual  promp- 
titude,76 we6  havea  the  honour  to  remain, 

Yours  respectfully,70 

A.  PATERSON  &  Co. 


337 

Burgos,  February  28th,  18... 
Messrs.  A.  PATERSON  &  Co.,  London. 

Gentlemen, 

I  (ich)  rely  on  your  kindness  to  excuse  the  slight  delay  that 
has  arisen  in  answering62  your  favour  of  the  20th  inst.,59  respecting 
my  draft,  dated  (wegen  meines  Wechsels  vom)  6th  of  November, 
18...33 

I  forward  you  herewith,175  in  two  cheques  upon  Mr.  Holmes, 
banker,  of  your  town,  the  sum  of  £..."°  with  which  you  will 
have  the  goodness  to  do  the  needful.172 

I  am  causing  you  a  great  deal  of  trouble :  pray  excuse  this, 
and78  believe  'me  to  be  your  most  devoted  servant,69 

L.  CARLITO. 


London,  November  IQth,  18... 
Mr.  J.  LYONS,  Manchester. 

Sir, 

Your  credit  balance  amounts  at  present  to  the  sum  of  ..., 
representing  about  one  half  the  amount  of  your  draft  of  ...,  to 
the  order  of  X.  Z.,  which  falls  due  the  22nd  inst.168 

We  beg  of  you  to  favour  us  by  completing  the  provision  for 
this  in  due  time.168 

In  the  hope  of  receiving  favourable  news  from  you,76  we6 
remain,"  yours  most  respectfully,'1 

J.  BARKER  &  SON. 


Brussels,  November  5th,  18... 
Mr.  JULES  GAUDIN,  Bordeaux.34 

Sir, 

We  beg  to  inform  you  that,41  the  rate  of  exchange  being  at 
present  advantageous,  we  propose  availing  ourselves  of  it  by 
realising  the  balance  in  our  favour  which  you  show  in  your  last,145 
and  we  propose  drawing  upon  you  for  £...  (Wvr  beabsichtigen 
deshalb  fur  £...  auf  Sie  zu  zieheri),  not  doubting  that  you  will 
accept  our  drafts  as  you  have  done  in  form&.  ^es.146 

We  have  the  honour  to  assure  you  of  our  high  esteem.70 

LEON  VALIN  &  DUMAS. 


338 

Brussels,  February  2nd,  18... 
Messrs.  ROGER  &  SON,  Marseille.35 
Dear  Sirs,33 

The  sole  object  of  this  letter  is  to  inform  you  that38  in  com- 
pliance with  the  desire  expressed  in  your  favour  of  the39  22nd 
of  January,  we6  have"  done  our  utmost,  but  without  success,  to 
overcome  the  objections  raised  upon254  the  periods  of  delivery 
and  of  payment  which  you  propose,  and  which  are  deemed  inad- 
missible.-04 

In  the  actual  condition  of  the  market  your  prices  will  not  be 
practicable  (ausfuhrbar)  j254  a  term  of  six  months  is  excessive,  and 
altogether  beyond  the  established  usage  in  transactions  of  this 
sort252 

It  will  accordingly  be  necessary  for  you  to  modify  your  first 
conditions  in  this  sense.254 

If  you  are  therefore  (deshalb)  decidedly  unable  to  admit  any 
modification  of  the  prices  indicated,  everything  leads  us  to  the 
conclusion  that  the  transaction  will  not  be  practicable.253 

We  await  your  reply  with  impatience,77  and  remain,  with 
the  most  sincere  regard,70 

R,  LESLIE  &  Co. 


Paris,  March  4th,  18... 
Messrs.  THOMPSON  BROTHERS,  London.35 

Gentlemen, 

According  to  instructions  contained  in  your  favour  of52  Feb, 
5th,93  and  the  orders  which  accompanied  it,230  we6  have0  sought  in 
vain  the  warehouses  and  stores  for  the  articles  in  question.255  We 
have  therefore  been  obliged  to  order  them  expressly  from  Lyons 
(in  Lyon),^5  and  this  is  the  reason  of  the  short  delay  which  has 
occurred  in  our  reply.62 

We  fear  that,  notwithstanding  our  sincere  wish  and  most 

active  exertions,254  it  will  necessitate  (doss  es  verursachen 

wird)  a  delay  of  a  month.255 

You  will  receive  very  shortly  from  us  the  most  ample  infor- 
mation (Auskunft)  on  this  subject.81 

Faithfully  yours, 

ROBERT,  SON  &  Co. 


339 

Berlin,  August  29th,  18... 
Messrs.  BLUNT  &  SONS,  Bristol. 

Gentlemen, 

It  is  of  importance  to  us  to  be  informed  as  to  the  position 
and  responsibility  of  the  house  of  Mr.  J.  B...,  of  your  place.192  We 
have  been  informed  that  it  (das  Haus)  has  been  severely  tried  by 
recent  financial  disasters,  and  that  it  is  at  present  seriously 
embarrassed.193 

Your  opinion  on  this  subject  would  be  of  great  value  to 
us,193  and  we6  beg«  you  to  favour  us  with  it  in  perfect  frank- 
ness,193 assuring  you  that  your  communication  will  be  used  with 
the  utmost  discretion.193 

Trusting  that  you  will  reply  to  us  with  your  usual  prompti- 
tude,77 we6  have*  the  honour  to  remain, 

Yours  respectfully,70 

KLEIN  &  Co. 


Manchester,  November  22nd,  18... 
Messrs.  J.  BARKER  &  SON,  London. 

Gentlemen, 

I  remit  to  you169  herewith,  in  two  drafts  to  your  order, 
payable  at  sight,  the  sum  of  ...169;  in  order  to  complete  the 
necessary  provision  for  my  (meinen)  draft  to  the  order  of  X.  Z.169 

I  have  the  honour  to  be,  with  great  respect,  your  most 
obedient  servant,70 

J.  LYONS. 


Manchester,  December  25th,  18... 
Messrs.  LAMBERT  &  Co.,  Paris. 

Gentlemen, 

Your  draft  of  Frs.  12,280,  to  the  order  of  K.  S.,  falls  due  the 
5th  proximo.168  Reminding  you  of  this  circumstance,168  (and), 
according  to  your  promise,  we  positively  expect  that  you  will  in 
due  time  cover  us  for  the  amount  of  this  (diesen)  draft.169 

It  will  be  a  great  pleasure  to  us  to  receive  an  immediate 
answer.78 

Yours  respectfully,70 

J.  W.  BROWN  &  Co. 


340 

Barcelona,  November  26th,  18... 
Messrs.  JOHN  BECK  &  Co.,  London.89 

Gentlemen,38 

We  have  just  received  your  letter  of-53  the  20th  inst.55  by 
which  you  advise  us  of  having  drawn  upon  us153  for  Rvn.  60,000, 
at  60  days'  date,  to  the  order  of  Pedro  Fernandez.148 

It  is  almost  superfluous  to  say  that  these  drafts  will  meet 
with  due  acceptance  on  our  part,154  and  salute  you,  gentlemen, 
most  cordially.70 

RODRIGUEZ  &  HERMANO. 


Barcelona,  January  25th,  18... 
Messrs.  McPHERSON  &  Co.,  Dublin.35 

Gentlemen,38 

"We  beg  leave  to  recommend  to  your  kind  office  the  bearer  of 
this  letter,  Mr.  ...,  and  hope  that  his  stay  in  your  metropolis  will 
not  only  be  an  agreeable  one,  but  will  also  prove  of  mutual 
advantage  to  our  houses.184  We  have  fully  prepared  and  equipped 
our  young  traveller,  whom  you  will  find  not  inexperienced  in 
business,  so  that  you  may  consult  and  decide  with  him  on  every 
point.184  He  has  samples  of  goods  of  every  description  with  him, 
for  which  he  hopes  to  find  a  good  market.184  We  shall  consider 
ourselves  greatly  obliged  by  any  services  you  may  be  able  to 
render  our  young  friend,  who,  we  doubt  not,  will  endeavour  to 
show  himself  worthy  of  your  kindness.182 

We  have  the  honour  to  assure  you  of  our  high  esteem,70  and 
remain  yours  respectfully,70 

MAJO  &  CARLOS. 


Paris,  December  29th,  18... 
Messrs.  J.  W.  BROWN  &  Co.,  Manchester. 

Gentlemen, 

Messrs  Lambert  &  Co.  instruct  us  to  remit  you  the  balance  of 
their  account.171  In  accordance,171  you  will  find  enclosed  three 
bills,  amounting  together  to  the  sum  of  £...,172  with  which  (mtt 
wekheri)  we  beg  you  to  do  the  needful,  and  to  credit  their 
account.172 

Believe  us  to  be  faithfully  yours,69 

DUMAINE,  SON  &  Co. 


341 

CIRCULARS. 


Liverpool,  November  14th,  1883. 
Dear  Sir  (Dear  Sirs), 

I  beg  to  inform  you  that  I  have  established  a  general  com- 
mission business  in  this  town. 

Having  ample  means  and  good  commercial  connections,  I 
am  in  a  position  satisfactorily  to  attend  to  any  orders  that  may 
be  entrusted  to  me. 

I  therefore  take  the  liberty  to  offer  you  my  services,  assuring 
you  beforehand  that  I  shall  always  devote  my  best  attention  to 
your  interest. 

I  subjoin  my  signature,  of  which  please  to  take  note. 
I  remain,  Dear  Sir, 

Your  obedient  servant, 

W.  SANTON. 
References : 

Liverpool:  Messrs.  ... 
London;  Messrs.  ., 


London,  November  30th,  1883. 
Sir  (Gentlemen), 

We  beg  to  inform  you  that  we  have  commenced  business 
here  under  the  firm  of 

BKOWN,  JACKSON  &  LOMAN. 
We  intend  to  operate  in  colonial  produce  on  a  large  scale 
especially  in  coffee  and  cocoa. 

We  shall  have  great  pleasure  in  receiving  your  business  pro- 
posals or  orders  to  any  extent. 

In  requesting  you  to  enter  into  business  relations  with  us, 
we  beg  you  will  rely  on  the  conscientious  care  which  we  shall 
always  give  to  any  transaction  confided  to  us. 

Please  to  take  note  of  our  signatures  at  foot,  and  believe  us, 
Sir  (Gentlemen), 

Yours  respectfully, 

BROWN,  JACKSON  &  LOMAN. 
Mr.  BROWN  will  sign  ... 
„    JACKSON,,      „    ... 
„    LOMAN    


342 

Runcorn,  December  3lst,  1883 

Sir  (Gentlemen), 

I  beg  leave  to  inform  you  that  on  the  first  of  January  next 
I  shall  make  over  my  wholesale  business  in  chemicals  and  drugs 
to  my  nephew,  Mr.  LONGWOOD,  who  has  been  in  my  employ  for 
the  last  ten  years,  and  to  Mr.  ALLEN. 

The  means  at  the  disposal  of  these  gentlemen,  added  to  the 
capital  I  shall  put  into  the  concern,  will  enable  them  to  carry  on 
the  business  satisfactorily. 

I  thank  you  for  the  confidence  you  have  had  the  kindness  to 
show  me,  and  beg  of  you  to  transfer  the  same  to  my  successors, 
who  will  do  their  utmost  to  deserve  the  same. 

I  am,  Sir  (Gentlemen), 

Yours  faithfully^ 

JAMES  SULLIVAN. 


(Annexed  to  the  preceding.) 

Runcorn,  January  1st,  1883. 

Sir  (Gentlemen), 

"Referring  to  the  annexed  circular,  we  beg  to  inform  you  that 
we  have  this  day  taken  over  the  wholesale  chemical  and  drug 
business  of  Mr.  JAMES  SULLIVAN. 
The  style  of  the  new  firm  will  be 

LONGWOOD  &  ALLEN. 

We  entertain  the  hope  that  you  will  continue  to  favour  us 
with  the  same  confidence  you  accorded  to  our  predecessor,  and 
which  it  shall  be  our  endeavour  to  prove  ourselves  worthy  of. 

We  request  you  to  take  note  of  our  signatures  at  foot,  and 
remain,  Sir  (Gentlemen), 

Your  obedient  servants^ 

LONGWOOD  &  ALLEN. 

Our  Mr.  LONGWOOD  will  sign  ... 
ALLEN  „ 


343 

Glasgow,  December  15th,  1883. 
Sir  (Gentlemen), 

We  beg  to  inform  you  that  we  have  taken  into  partnership 
Mr.  A  HARPER,  who  has  taken  an  active  part  in  our  business  for 
more  than  10  years. 

Underneath  you  will  find  his  signature,  of  which  please  take 
note 

LAWRENCE  &  Co. 

Mr.  A.  HARPER  will  sign  ... 

Southampton,  December  31st,  1883. 
Sir  (Gentlemen), 

I  have  much  pleasure  in  announcing  to  you  that  I  have  taken 
into  partnership  Mr.  JOHN  SAUNDERS,  my  nephew,  who  has  been 
brought  up  in  my  office,  and  who  has  assisted  me  in  the  manage- 
ment of  my  business  since  1865. 

The  style  of  the  new  firm  will  be 

PAKKHURST  &  NEPHEW. 
I  am,  your  obedient  servant,- 

W.  PARKHURST. 

Mr.  SAUNDERS  will  sign  ... 

Leeds,  December  31st,  1883. 
Sir  (Gentlemen), 

We  beg  leave  to  inform  you  that  we  have  agreed  to  amalga- 
mate into  one  concern  the  two  houses  doing  business  in  this  town 
under  the  firms  of  F.  WARNER  and  W.  BLUNT. 
The  new  firm,  under  the  style  of 

WARNER  &  BLUNT, 

will  attend  to  the  liquidation  of  the  above-named  two  firms. 

F.  WARNER.    W.  BLUNT. 


Portsmouth,  December  31st,  1883. 
Sir  (Gentlemen), 

We  beg  to  inform  you  that  the  partnership  existing  between 
W.  LONGTREE  and  L.  GARDINER,  having  reached  the  term  originally 
fixed,  it  has  been  decided  by  the  co-partners  to  dissolve  the  same 
from  this  day  forward. 

Mr.  LONGTREE  undertakes  the  liquidation ;  he  will  sign  as 
follows:  ...264 


344 

COMMERCIAL    BILLS. 

DRAFTS. 
No.  583.     Rvn.  16,600.  Marseilles,  March  6th,  1884. 

At  presentation,  please  pay  this  second  of  exchange  (the  first  not 
having  been  paid),  to  Mr.  GUERRERO  or  order  the  sum  of  Rvn.  Sixteen 
thousand  six  hundred,  value  received,  and  place  the  same  to  account, 
with  or  without  further  advice,  of  W.  S.  HARRIS  &  Co. 

To  Mr.  J.  SERRANO,  Madrid.  (Signature.) 

No.  6341.     F.  19,070.  75cs.  Manchester,  2nd  March,  1884. 

Two  months  after  date,  pay  this  "bill  of  exchange  to  our  order,  the 
sum  of  Nineteen  thousand  and  seventy  Francs  75  cs.,  value  received, 
which  place  to  account  as  per  advice. 

To  Mr.  LELONG,  Lyons.  (Signature.) 

No.  397.     £443  10s.  Vera  Cruz,  15th  January,  1884. 

Three  months  after  date,  pay  this  first  of  exchange  (the  second 
and  third  not  paid)  to  the  order  of  Messrs.  MARSALA  &  Co.  the  sum  of 
Four  hundred  and  forty-three  Pounds  ten  shillings,  at  the  exchange  rate 
as  per  endorsement,  value  received,  and  which  place  to  the  account  of 
Messrs.  J.  FERNANDEZ  &  Co.,  as  per  advice. 

To  Mr.  BANNER,  Manchester.  (Signature.) 

Payable  in  London. 


PROMISSORY  NOTES. 
£460  15s.  Dublin,  December  17th,  1883. 

Three  months  after  date,  I  promise  to  pay  to  Messrs.  MACKEY  & 
Co.,  or  order,  the  sum  of  Four  hundred  and  sixty  Pounds  15  Shillings, 
value  received  in  goods,  with  interest  computed  upon  the  said  sum 
from  this  day,  at  five  per  cent,  per  annum. 

PATRICK  O'CONNOR. 

Rvn.  3,500.  Barcelona,  November  3Qth,  1883. 

One  year  from  this  date  we  promise  to  pay  to  Mr.  ROVIGO,  or 
order,  the  sum  of  Rvn.  Three  thousand  five  hundred,  value  received 
in  cash.  L.  ARMIGO  &  Co. 


RECEIPTS. 

Liverpool,  December  31st,  1883. 

Received  of  Mr.  MORETON  the  sum  of  One  thousand  Pounds  Ster- 
ling, on  account  of  credit  opened  in  my  name  by  Messrs.  MILLOT 
BROTHERS  of  Rouen,  as  per  their  letter  of  advice  of  the  27th  inst. 

HENRY  PARKER. 

Received  of  Mr.  HAYES  the  sum  of  Six  hundred  and  fifty  Pounds, 
advanced  upon  deposits  of  title  deeds. 
Leeds,  November  16th,  1883.  SALOMON  ROSENBERG. 


CONJUGATION 


GERMAN  VERBS 


AND 


ALPHABETICAL    LIST 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


CONTENTS. 


Conjugation  of: 

The  Auxiliary  Verbs  : 

Ijafcett           page 

2 

fein                „ 

4 

tucr&cn            „ 

6 

The  Auxiliary  Verbs  of 
Mood: 

mujfcn          page 

8 

tinmen             „ 

9 

fooflen           „ 

11 

fottcn             „ 

12 

burfcn            M 

14 

moflcn             „ 

15 

The  Regular  Verb  loBcn 

I.  Active  voice      page 

17 

II.  Passive  voice       „ 

19 

Conjugation  of: 
The  Separable  Verb 

afcljolett  page     21 

The  Intransitive  Verb 

lunben  (conjugated 

with  jein)         page    22 
The  Reflective  Verb 

firf)  erfSUctt      page    24 
The  Impersonal  Verb 

fdjneien  page    26 

The  Irregular  Verb 

gefcen  page    27 

List  of  the  Irregular 

Verbs  page      29 


THE    AUXILIARY    VERBS. 

,  to  have. 

Present.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

id)  Ijobe,  /  have  or  (that)  I  may 
bu  ijabefit,  thou  liast  \liave,  etc. 
er  (fie,  eg)  Jjabe,  he  (she,  it)  Jms 
tt>tr  Ijabeit,  we  have 
©ie  Ijaben  or  iljr  fjabet,  you 
fie  fjaben,  they  have  [have 


INDICATIVE. 

id?  Ijabe,  /  have 

bu  Ijaft,  thou  Jiast 

er  (fie,  eg)  Ijar,  he  (she,  it)  has 

totr  fjaben,  we  have 

©ie   Ijaben  or  iljr    Ijabt,    you 

fie  fjaben,  th?y  have       [have 


id)  fjatte,  /  had 

bu  Ijatteft,  f/w)w 

er  (fie,  eg)  Ijatte,  /w  (she,  it)  had 

ttrir  fatten,  we  had 

©te  fatten  or  tljr   ^attet,   you 

fie  fatten,  they  had         [had 


IU.J        i/Ul 

bu  fjtitreft, 
er  (fie, 


Imperfect. 

ptte,    I  had   or 
thou  hadst 

eg)  fjdtte,  Ae  Cs^e,  ^  had 
totr  fatten,  ^c«  A^wi 
@ie  fatten  or  i^r  pttet,   you 
fie  fatten,  <Ae«/  /i^wi        [had 


id^  roerbe  Ijaben,  /  shall  have 
bu  ftnrft  l^aben,  thou  wilt  have 
er  (fie,  eg)  tt»irb  ^aben,  he  (she, 

it)  will  have 

toir  toerben  l^aben,  we  shall  Jiave 
©ie  toerben  ^aben  or  iljr  tterbet 

^aben,  you  will  have 
fie  foerben  ^aben,  tJiey  will  have 


id)  toerbe  ^aben,  (that)  I  shall 
bu  ttierbcft  Ijaben,  thou  wilt  have 
er  (fie,  eg)  tuerbe  Ijaben,  he 

(she,  it)  will  have 
ttrir  roerben  I)aben,  we  shall  have 
©ie  toerben  ^aben  or  i^r  tuerbet 

!§aben,  you  will  have 
fie  toerben  ^aben,  they  will  have 


CONDITIONAL  (I). 

id)  toiirbe  fjabeit,  I  should  have 

bu  miirbeft  ^aben,  thou  wouldst  have 

er  (fie,  eg)  toiirbe  tyaben,  he  (she,  it)  would  have 

totr  ttwrbeu  ^aben,  we  should  have 

©ie  murben  |aben  or  iljr  tuiirbet  ^abeu,  you  would  have 

fie  ttwrben  ^aben,  they  would  have 


id)  ^abe  geljabt,  /  have  had 

bu  Ijaft  ge^abt,  thou  hast  liad 
er  (fie,  eg)  fjat  ge^abt,  he  (she, 

it)  has  had 

ItJtr  ^aben  ge^abt,  we  have  had 
©ie  f)abett  gefjabt  or  tljr   ^obt 

ge^abt,  you  have  had 
fie  fjaben  ge^abt,  they  have  had 


Perfect. 


id)  Ijabe  geljabt,  /  have  had  or 

(that)  I  may  have  had,  etc. 
bu  fyabeft  ge^obt,  thou  liast  liad 
er  (fie,  eg)  fafce  ge^abt,  he  (she, 

it)  has  had 

ttnr  ^aben  g«J|abt,  we  iiave  had 
©ie  ^aben  ge^obt  or  i^r  ^abct 

getjabt,  you  have  had 
fie  fjaben  qeljabt,  they  have  had 


INDICATIVE.  Pluperfect.         SUBJUNCTIVE. 


id)  Ijatte  gefjabt,  I  had  had 

bit  fjatteft  gefjabt,  ihou  hadst  had 
er  (fie,  c§)  fjatte  gefjabt,  he  (she, 

it)  had  had 

ttrir  fatten  gefjabt,  we  had  had 
@te  natten  gefjabt  or  tljr  ijattet 

gefjabt,  you  had  had 
fie  fatten  gefjabt,  they  had  had 


id)  ptte  gefjabt,  /  had  had  or 

(that)  I  might  have  had,  etc. 

bit  ptteft  gefjabt,  ihou  hadst  liad 

er  (fte,  e8)  fjatte  geljabt,  he  (she, 

it)  had  had 

ftrir  gotten  gefjabt,  we  had  had 
@ie  ptten  geljabt  or  iljr  ^attet 

geljabt,  you  had  had 
fie  ptten  ge^obt,  they  had  had 


Future  Perfect  (II). 


td)  tnerbe  ge^obt  Ijaben,  /  shall 
have  had  \have  had 

bu  tutrft  ge^obt  fyabett,  thou  wilt 

er  (fie,  e£)  tctrb  ge^abt  ^aben, 
he  (she,  it)  will  have  had 

tirir  toerben  ge^abt  ^aben,  we 
shall  have  had 

<5ie  trerben  gefjabt  l^oben  or  i^r 
tucrbet  gefyabt  Jjaben,  you  will 
have  had  \have  had 

fie  tuerben  gefjabt  ^aben,  they  will 


id)  toerbe  ge^abt  fjaben,  (that)  I 
shall  have  had  \have  had 

bit  nierbeft  gefjobt  ^aben,  thou  wilt 

er  (fie,  e3)  wcrbe  gefjabt  ^aben, 
he  (she,  it)  will  have  had 

ttrir  tuerben  gefjabt  ijaben,  w 
shall  have  had 

@te  ftjerben  gefjabt  ^aben  or  i^r 
tuerbet  ge^abt  ^aben,  you  will 
have  had  [have  had 

fie  foerben  geljabt  ^aben,  they  will 


CONDITIONAL  PERFECT  (II). 

id)  foitrbe  geljabt  ^aben,  I  should  have  had 

bit  toiirbeft  gefjabt  ^aben,  thou  wouldst  have  *id 

er  (fie,  cS)  tritrbe  gefjabt  !§aben,  he  (she,  it)  would  have  had 

ttrir  tuiirben  geljabt  fjabeit,  we  should  have  had 

@ie  luiirben  ge^abt  |aben  or  ttjr  tourbet  ge^abt  ^aben,  you  would 

fie  ttJitrben  gel)abt  Ijaben,  they  would  have  had  [have  had 

IMPERATIVE. 


$abe,  have  (thou) 

er  (fie,  e3)  foil  ^aben,  let  him  (her,  it) 

tt)tr  rnoHen  ^aben  (fjaben  toir,  Ia§t  itnl 

fjaben  @ie  or  Ijabt,  have  (you) 

fie  fotlen  tyaben,  let  them  have 


Ut  us  have 


INFINITIVE. 
Present:  Ijaben,  to  Aaw  |  Per/<?c£:  getjabt  fytfcen,  to  have  had 

PARTICIPLES. 
Present:  ^abenb,  having  \  Past:      ge^ab?,  Aad 


INDICATIV] 


®eitt,  to  be. 

Present.          SUBJUNCTIVE. 


idj  bin,  /  am 

bu  bift,  thou  art 

er  (fie,  e§)  ift,  he  (she,  it)  is 

tt)tr  finb,  we  are 

(Bte  finb  or  iijr  feib,  you  are 

fie  finb,  they  are 


tdj  f ei,  I  be  or  ftifarfj  J  may  be, 
bu  feieft,  </w>w  oe  [etc. 

er  (fie,  e3)  fei,  Tie  (she,. it)  be 
ttrir  feien,  we  fo 
<5ie  feien  or  iijr  fetet,  yoi*  oe 
fie  feien,  they  be 


Imperfect. 


idj  ttmr,  /  IPOS 

bu  toarft,  thou  wast 

er  (fie,  e3)  war,  he  (she,  it)  was 

nrir  nmren,  we  were 

Sie  tuaren  or  ifyr  ttwret,  2/ow.  were 

fie  tuaren,  <Ae 


tdj  lucre,  /  u'ere  or  (that)  1 
bu  tua'reft,  i/iow  wert  [might  be,  etc. 
er  (fie,  e3)  lucire,  he  (she,  it)  were 
fair  tt)a'ren,  we  were 
<5ie  hjaren  or  i^r  toaret,  you  were 
fie  toaren,  they  were 


Future  (I). 


idj  toerbe  fein,  /  shall  be 
bu  tmrft  fein,  thou  wilt  be 
er  (fie,  e3)  tt)irb  fein,  he  (she, 

it)  will  be 

mir  toerben  fein,  we  shall  be 
©ie  toerben  fein  or  i!^r  tuerbet 

fein,  you  will  be 
fie  toerben  fein,  they  will  be 


id)  tt)erbe  fein,  (that)  I  shall  be 
bu  werbeft  fein,  thou  wilt  be 
er  (fie,  e3)  ttierbe  fein,  he  (slie, 

it)  will  be 

toir  toerben  fein,  we  shall  be 
<5ie  ttjerben  fein  or  i^r  luerbet 

fein,  you  will  be 
fie  toerben  fein,  they  will  be. 


CONDITIONAL  (I). 

tdj  ttJiirbe  fein,  /  should  be 

bu  ttmrbeft  fein,  thou  wouldst  be 

er  (fie,  e3)  foiirbe  fein,  he  (she,  it)  would  be 

toil  hjiirben  fein,  we  should  be 

<5ie  ftjiirben  fein  or  iljr  njiirbet  fein,  you  would  b« 

fte  njiirben  fein,  they  would  be 


Perfect. 


id)  Mtt  genjefen,  /  have  been 

bu  bift  genjefen,  thou  hast  been 

er  (fie,  e§)  ift  genjefen,  lie  (she, 

it)  has  been 

tt)ir  finb  genjefen,  we  have  been 

@ic  finb   genjefen  or   i^r  feib 

genjejen,  you  have  been 

fie  finb  geroefen,  they  have  been 


id)  fei  getoefen,  I  have  been  or 

(that)  I  may  have  been,  etc. 
bu  feieft  getoefen,  thou  hast  been 
er  (fie,  e£)  fei  getoejen,  he  (she, 

it)  has  been 

luir  feien  getoefen,  we  have  been 
@ie  feien  gefoefen   or  i^r  feiei 

getpefen,  you  have  been 
fie  feien  getoefen,  they  have  been 


INDICATIVE.          Pluperfect.         SUBJUNCTIVE. 


id)  ttwr  geiuefen,  /  had  been 

bit  luarft  geiuefen,  thou  hadst  been 
ti   (fie,   e§)   luor    geiuefen,    he 

(she,  it)  had  been 
ftrir  luaren  getuefen,  we  had  been 
@ie  luaren  geiuefen  or  iljr  luaret 

geiuefen,  you  had  been 
fie  luaren  geiuefen,  they  had  been 


idj  toifre  geiuefen,  /  had  been  er 

(that)  I  might  have  been,  etc. 

bit  luareft  geiuefen,  thou  hadst  been 

er  (fie,   e3)   tuare  getuefen,   he 

(she,  it)  had  been 
tuir  tuaren  geiuefen,  we  had  been 
@ie  tuaren  getoefen  or  ifjr  toaret 

getoefen,  ?/oit  hud  been 
fie  ftmren  getoefen,  they  had  been 


Future  Perfect  (II). 


tdj  tterbe  getoefen  fcin,  I  sliall 
have  6eew-  fAave  been 

bit  tmrft  gettefen  fein,  thou  wilt 

er  (fie,  e3)  tmrb  getoefen  fein, 
he  (she,  it)  will  have  been 

ttrir  toerben  getuefen  fein,  we 
shall  have  been 

Sie  tuerben  getuefen  fein  or  tf>r 
tuerbet  getoefen  fein,  you  will 
have  been  \will  have  jbeen 

fie   toerben  getoefen  fein,   they 


id^  ttierbc  getoefen  fetnr  ( that)  1 
shall  have  been  \have  been 

bit  toerbeft  getoefen  fein,  thou  wilt 

er  (fie,  e§)  tuerbc  getoefen  fein, 
he  (she,  it)  will  have  been 

nrir  werben  geiuefen  fein,  we 
shall  have  been 

@ie  tuerben  getoefen  fein,  or  tf)r 
tuerbet  getoefen  fein,  you  will 
have  been  \will  have  been 

fie   ttjerben   getoefen  fein,   they 


CONDITIONAL  PERFECT  (II). 

idj  toiirbe  gehjefen  fcitt,  /  should  have  been 

bit  tpiirbeft  getoefen  fein,  thou  wouldst  have  been 

er  (fie,  e3)  ttJiirbe  geiuefen  fein,  he  (she,  it)  would  have  been 

tore  toiirben  geiuefen  fein,  we  should  have  been 

<Bie  ttriirben  geiuefen  fein  or  tljr  toiirbet  geiuefen   fein,  you  would 

fie  ttwrben  gemefen  fein,  they  would  have  been  [have  been 

IMPERATIVE. 

fet,  be  (thou) 

er  (fie,  e§)  foE  fein,  let  him  (her,  it)  be 

tuir  luotten  fein  (feien  luir,  la^t  un§  fein),  let  us  be 

feien  @ie  or  feib,  be  (you) 

fie  fotten  fein,  let  them  be 


Present:  fein,  to  be 
Present:  feienb,  being 


INFINITIVE. 

|  Per/ec£:  geiuefen  fettt,  to  have  foen 

PARTICIPLES. 

|  Past:  geiuefen,  been 


6 
SBerbctt,  to  become  (to  get,  to  grow.) 

INDICATIVE.  Present.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

id)  merbe,  7  become 

bu  toirft,  thou  becommst 
er  (fie,  e3)  ttrii'b,  /«?  (she,  it)  be- 
tt)ir  luerben,  ue  become     [comes 
Sie  merben  ar  i£>r  njerbetf   you 
fie  tuerben,  tliey  become  [become 


id)  toerbe,  I  become  or 

may  become,  etc. 
bu  tuerbeft,  tlwu  becomest 
er  (fie,  e§)  toerbe,  lie  (she,  it)  be- 
ttrir  roerben,  we  become     [comes 
Sie  tterben  or  ifjr  tterbeiy    you 
fie  toerben,  tfoy  oeomie  [become 


ftjurbe,  (old  form  :  tnarb),  7 


Imperfect. 


bu   ttwrbeft   (toorbft), 

camest  \(she,  it)  became 

er  (fie,    e$)    tcurbe   (toorb),   ^ 
mir  ttmrben,  we  became 
Sie  tuurben  or  i^r  tuurbet,  you 
fie  ttmrben,  they  became  [became 


ttmrbe,  7  became  or  (that)  I 

might  become,  etc. 
bu  ttmrbeftr  thou  becamest 
er  (fie,  e§)  toiirbe,  Ae  ("s/i«,  it) 

became 

ft)ir  trurbeu,  u-e  became 
@ie  teiirben.  or  i^r  ttwrbei,  you 
fie  tnurben,  i/»e?/  became  [became 


»erbe  toerben,  7  sftaW  become 


Future  (I). 


id)  raerbe  toerbeu,  (that)  J  shall 

become  \become 

bu   toerbcft  icerben,   ^ou   wilt 
er   (fte,  eg)    »erbe   toerbeit,  he 

(she,  it)  will  become  Become 
tt)ir  tuerbeu  toerben,  we  shall 
@ie  toerben  tuerben  or  tfjr  tuer* 

bet  tuerben,  you  will  become 
fie    tuerbeu    tuerben,    they  will 

become 


bu  ttnrfttoerben,  thou  wilt  become 
er  (fie,  e£)  tuirb  irerben,  he  (she, 
it)  will  become  \become 

tirir    tcerbeu   tcerben,    we   shall 
@ie  fterben  tuerben  or  i^r  toer- 
bet  tnerben,  you  will  become 
fie    toerben    toerben,    they   will 
become 

CONDITIONAL  (I). 
idj  ttmrbe  toerbeu,  7  should  become 
bu  ttmrbeft  tt?erben,  thou  wouldst  become 
er  (fte,  e3)  tt)urbe  toerben,  he  (she,  it)  would  become 
tt)ir  ttJiirben  toerben,  we  should  become 
@ie  ttjurben  ttjerbeu  or  tfjr  ttJiirbet  ttjerben,  you  would  become 
fie  ttmrben  toerben,  they  would  become 
Perfect. 


\dj  tint  getoorben  (...toorben),  7 
have  become 

bu  bift  gettjorben,  thou  hast  become 
er    (fie,    e»)   ift   getoorben,    he 

(she,  it)  has  become 
ttrir  finb  getuorben,  we  have  become 
Sie  finb  or  ifjr  feib  gemorben, 

you  have  become 
fie  finb  aetuorben,  they  have  become 


id)  fci  gemcrben  (...morben),  7 
have  become  or.  (7/utf,)  7m«y 
^atv?  becomej  etc.  \come 

bu  feieft  geluprben,  thou  hast  be- 
er  (fie,  e§)  fei  geroorben,  /ie  («//«, 
tO  ^05  become  \come 

ttJtr  feien  gelcorben,  toe  A«?^?  6«- 
@ie  feien  or  i^r  feiet  getoorben, 

you  have  become 
fiefeiengetuorben,  theyhavebecome 


INDICATIVE*  Pluperfect. 

(...toorben), 


id)  ttmr  getoorben 
I  had.  become 

[become 

bit  toarft  getoorben,  $fam  hadst 

er  (fie,  c§)  tear  getrorben,  he 
(she,  it)  had  become  \become 

rotr  ftmren  getoorben,   we   had 

Sie  toaren  getoorbeir  or  ifyr 
ttmret  getoorben,  ^/ow  had  be- 
come [become 

fie  ttmren  gefoorben,   they  had 

Future  Perfect  (II). 

id)  toerbe  getoorben  (...toorben) 
fetit,  I  shall  have  become 


id)  toiirc  geftorben  (...toorben), 
/  had    become    or    (that)    I 
might  have  become,  etc..  [.become 
bii  tncireft  geluorben,  thou  hadst 
er  (fie,  c§)  toare   getuorben,   ^« 
fs/ig,  ii^  /ia(Z  become    [become 
Itrir  tt)dren  geinorben,   we    had 
@te    luaren    getroiben   or   i^r 
tnaret  gertjorben,  yow  had  be. 
come  [become 

fie  'maun  gettorben,   they  ha^ 


bn  ttrirft   getoorben   fein,    thou 

wilt  have  become 
er  (fie,  e3)  rtnrb  gctoorben  fetn, 

he  (she,  it)  will  have   become 
hrir    toerben  getoorben  fetn,  we 

shall  have  become 
@ie   toerben   gertjorben  fetn   or 

i^r    tuerbet    gem  or  ben    fein, 

you  viill  have  become 
fie  merben  gemorben  fetn,  they 

will  have  become 


id;)  it>erbe  genjorben  (...motben) 

feitt,  (that)  I  shall  have  be- 

come 
bn  tycrbcft  getuorben  fein,  thou 

wilt  have  become 
er  (fie,  e3)  mcvbc  gettjorben  fetnr 

he  (she,  it)  will  1mm  become 
ttrir  toerben  getuorben  fern,   we 

shall  have  become 
@ie  tcerben  geirorben  fein  or  ityr 

toerbet    gemorben    fein,    you, 

will  have  become 
fie  ftierben  getnorben.  fein,   they, 

will  have  become 


CONDITIONAL  PERFECT  (II). 

idj  toiirbe  g£tt)j>rben  (...toorben)  feitr,  /  sJiould  have  become 

bit  ftwrbeft  genjorben  fein,  thou  wouldst  have  become 

er  (fie,  e3)  rtjiirbe  gertorben  fein,.  he  (she,  it)  would  have  become 

nnr  toiirben  gettjorben  fein,  we  should  have  become 

(Sic  tmirben  geftorben  fein  or  i^r  wiirbet  getrorben  fein-,  you  would 

fie  ftwrben  gemorben  fetn,  they  would  have  become      [have  becomt 

IMPERATIVE. 

merbe,  become  (thou) 

er  (fie,  e<§)  foil  merben,  let  him  (her,  it)  become 

ftrir  njollen  toerben,  (fterben  n)ir,  Ia§t  ttn^  toerben),   let  us  become 

iperben  (Sie  or  ttjerbet,  become  (you) 

fie  foflen  tuerben,  let  them  become 

INFINITIVE. 

Present:  loerben,  to  become          [  Perfect:   gettjarben    (...tootben) 

fetn,  to  have  become- 

PARTICIPLES. 
Present:  tuerbenb,  becoming          \  Past:  genjorbenorn)orben.&eco?7tt* 


8 

THE  AUXILIARY  VERBS  OF  MOOD. 
1)  SWitffett,  (must)  to  be  obliged,  to  have  to. 

INDICATIVE.  Present.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


id)  mills,  I  must  (I  am  obliged, 

etc.) 

bu  mufjt,  thou  must 
er  (fie,  e3)  mufj,  he  (she,  it)  mmt 
ttir  miiffen,  we  must 
@ie  miiffen  or  ifjr  mufyt,  you 
fie  miiffen,  they  must        [must 


id)  tttuffe,  (that)  I  must  (I  be 

obliged,  etc. 

bit  miiffeft,  thou  must 
er  (fie,  e§)  muff e,  he  (she,  it)  must 
toir  miiffen,  we  must 
@ie  miiffen  or  i§r  miiffet.  you 
fie  miiffen,  they  must        [must 


Imperfect. 

id)  mufete,  /  was  obliged 
ill  mufteft,  thou  wast  obliged 
er  (fie,  e3)  mufcte,  he  (she,  it) 

was  obliged 

tt)ir  muftten,  we  were  obliged 
8ie  miiiten  or  i^r  mufetet,  you 

were  obliged 
fie  mufjten,  they  were  obliged 


id)  miifete,  I  were  obliged 
bu  mii|teft,  thou  wert  obliged 
er  (fie,  e§)  miifete,  A«  ("s^,  t^ 

ioere  obliged 

roir  miifeten,  we  were  obliged 
@ie  miiiten  or  iljr  mii^tet,  you 

were  obliged 
fie  mufjten,  f/tey  were 


Future  (I). 

toerbe   miiffen,    I  shall  be 
obliged  [obliged,  etc. 

i  tttrft  miiffen,    thou  wilt  be 


id)  tterbe  miiffen,  (that)  I  shall 
be  obliged          \be  obliged,  etc. 
bu   wcrbcft  miiffen,    thou  wilt 


CONDITIONAL  (I). 

id)  tnii^te  (or  id)  ttmrbe  miiffen),  /  should  be  obliged 

ill  miifjteft  (or  bu  nmrbeft  miiffen,  thou  wouldst  be  obliged,  etc. 

Perfect. 

idj  Ijabe  gemufet  (...miiffen),  I  \  id)   Ijafce    gemufct    (...ntiiffen), 

have  been  obliged  (that)  I  have  been  obliged 

&u  Ijaft  gemufet  (...miiffen),  etc.  \  bu^abeft  gemu|t(... miiffen), etc. 

Pluperfect. 

id)    Ijatte    gemufet    (...miiffen), 

(that)  I  had  been  obliged 
bu  fjatteft  gcmufet  (...miiffen), etc. 


id)  $atte  gemufet  (...tniiffen),  I 

had  been  obliged 
cu  ^atteft  gemufct  (. .  .miiffen),  etc. 

Future  Perfect  (II). 

idj  roerbe  gemujjt  ^aben  (...^aben 
miiffen),  (that)  I  shall  have 
been  obliged 


i^  roerbe  gemu§t  Ijaben  (. . .^oben 
I  shall   have    been 


obliged 

bu  fcirft  gemufct  ^oben  (...Ijaben 
miiffen),  etc. 


bu  raerbcft  gemuBt  ^aben  ( . .  .Ijaben 
miiffen),  etc. 


CONDITIONAL  PERFECT  (II). 

id)  fjiitte  gemufct  (...miiffcn)  [or  idj  foiirbe  gemu&t  Ija&en  (...ijaben 

muff  en],  /  should  have  been  obliged 
fou  ptteft  gemujjt  (...tniiffen)  [or  bu  ttmrbeft  gemuBt^oben(.,.^aben 

mitffen],  etc. 

INFINITIVE. 

Present:  tniiffen,  to  be  obliged      \  Perfect:  getnufct   fja&en   (IjaBett 

tttiiffen),  to  have  been  obliged 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present:  tnitffenb,  being  obliged  \  Past:  gentuBt  or   tttttffett,   beert, 

obliged 


&)  &omtcn,  (can)  to  be  able. 
INDICATIVE.  Present.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

id)  fann,  I  can  (1  am  able,  etc.)     tdj  fimtte,  (tJiat)  I  can  (1   be, 

able,  etc.) 


bit  fanttft,  thou  canst 

er  (fie,  el)  fantt,  he  (she,  it)  can 

tmr  !onnen,  we  can 

<5ie  !onnen  or  ti)r  fonnt,  you  can 


fie  fonnen,  they  can 


bu  fonneft,  thou  canst 

er  (fie,  e£)  fonttc,  he  (she,  it)  can 

fair  fonnen,  we  can 

@tc  fonnen  or  i^r  fonnet,  you  can 


fie  !6nnen,  they  can 
Imperfect. 


id)  fonnte,  /  could  (I  was  able, 

etc.) 

bu  fpnnteft,  thou  couldst 
(fie,  eS)  fonnte,  /ie  ('s/ie,  i^ 


tt)ir  fonnten,  we  could 

<5te  f'onnten  or  ifjr  fonntet,  you 

could 
fie  fonnten,  they  could 


id)  f  b'nnte,  /  could  (I  were 

etc.) 

bu  fpnnteft,  thou  couldst 
er  (fie,  e3)  fonnte,  /i 


toir  fonnten,  we  could 

@ie  fonnten  or  t^r  fonntet,  you 

could 
fie  fonnten,  they  could 


Future  (I), 
id)  toerbe  fonnen,  I  shall  be  able  i  id}  ftjerbe  fonnen,  (that) 


bu  n)irft  fonnen,  thou  wilt  be 
able,  etc. 


bu  nicrbcft  fonnen,    thou  unit 
be  able,  etc. 


German  Grammar 


14 


10 

CONDITIONAL  (I). 

tdj  fotntte  (or  idj  nwrbe  fSnnen),  /  should  be  able 

bu  fnnnteft  (or  bu  rourbeft  fonnen),  ihou  wouldst  be  able,  etc. 

INDICATIVE.  Perfect.          SUBJUNCTIVE. 


id)  f)abe  ge!onnt  (...lonnen),  I 

have  been  able 
fcu  Ijaft  gefonnt  (...fonnen),  etc. 


id)    I)abe   gefonnt   (...fSnnen), 

(that)  I  have  been  able 
bu  Ijabeft  gefonnt  (...Idnnen),  etc. 


Pluperfect. 


tdj  ^atte  gefonnt  (...louncu),  / 

liad  been  able 
bu  l^atteft  gefonnt  (. .  .fonnen),  etc. 


id)  ^fitte  gefonnt  (...fonncn), 
(that)  I  had  been  able 

bu  Ijatteft  gefonnt  (...fonnen), 
etc. 


Future  Perfect  (II). 


id)  ttjerbe  gefonnt  Ijaben 

...lonnen),  /  shall  have  been 
able 

bu  tt)irft  gefonnt  f)aben  (^aben 
...fonnen),  etc. 


idj  merbe  gefonnt  ^aben  (^aben 
...fonuen),  (that)  I  shall  have 
been  able 

bu  tterbeft  gefonnt  ^aben  (Ijaben 
...fonnen),  etc. 


CONDITIONAL  PERFECT  (II). 

id)  Ijfftte  gefonnt  (...lonnen)  [or  id)  njiirbe  gefonnt  ^aben   O&abeit 

...fonnen],  /  should  have  been  able 
bu  fjatteft  gefonnt  (...fonnen)  [or  bu  nwrbeft  gefonnt  Ijaben  (^aben 

...fonnen],  etc. 

INFINITIVE. 

Present:  fonnen,  to  be  able          \  Perfect:  gefonnt  Ijaben   (Jjaben 

...fonnett),  to  have  been  able 

PABTICIPLES. 

Present:  fonnenb,  being  able       \  Past:  gefonnt  or   fonnen,   been 

able 


11 


3)  SSottett,  (will)  to  fie  willing  (to  wish,  to  like). 

INDICATIVE.  Present.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

icft  miff,  I  wiAl  (I  am  willing, 


bit  toittft,  thou  wilt 

er  (fie,  eg)  ttritt,  he  (she,  it)  will 

ttnr  tooflett,  we  will 

@ie  tooHen  or  i] 

fie  tooHen, 


idj  tpofle^  fOot)  I  will  <T  6e 

willing,  etc.) 
bit  toofleft,  thou  will 
er  (fte,,  e3)  toofle,  to?   («&«, 
ttrir  tooflen,  we 


fie  tootten, 


id)    tooUte,  I   would    (I    was 

witting,  etc.) 
bit  tt>ottteft,  thou  wouldst 
er  (fie,  eg)  tooUte,  fo  fs^e,  it) 
ftrir  tuoHten,  we  wowW    [would 
@ie  tDottten  or  i!§r  toofltet,  2/ow 
fie  tooEten,  f^ey  would   [would* 


id^    njottte,    (i/ia<)  I 
were  willing,  etc.) 
bit  toottteft,  i^ou  wow/(i 
er  (fie,  eg)  tooUte,  fc«  (s/i-e,  t«; 
tuir  tuoHten,  we  would    [wowW 
@ie  toottten  or  i^r  tDotltet, 
fie  ttt0Eten,,  they  would 

(I). 


ttjietbe  ttrotten,    I  shall  be.  ,  tc^  tuerbe  tooHen, 
willing  be  willing 

bit  ttnrft  hjofieir,.  tkou  wilt.  be.     bit  nicrbeft  todte, 
7,  efe.  willing,  etc.. 


CONDITIONAJ*  (I). 

id)  ftottte  (or  t^  nriirbe  tooHeit),  /  s/iowW  oe  willing 

bit  tooflteft  (or  bit  tuiirbeft  tooKen),  ^w  wouldst  be  willing,  etc. 


Perfect. 


id)  Ijabe  g«t»ottt  (...tooflett),  /' 


6eew  willing, 
bit  fjajt  (jemaUt  (...tootten)^ 


id)    I)a&e    gettrofff 


/  have  been  willing 
bit  Ijabeft  gettoE  (...njoHen), 


Pluperfect. 


^atte  ptwll; 
iarf  oeen  willin 


bit  ^atteft  gettjottt  (... 


id)  tocrbe  getoottt  Ijabeu  (fjoieit 
...luoHcit),  I  shall  have  been 
wiliiny 

bit  mirft  getpolft  ^aben  (fjaben 


t$    ptte    getuuGt 

"  A. a 


7  nod  been  willing 
bit  Ijatteft  setoQtti  (.. 


Perfect  (II). 

idj  tuerbe  getooflt  ^aben  (^r 
...tteffe»)r  (that)  I  shall  haw 
been  willing 

bu  meriref!'  gemoKt  Ijafcen 
...tt)otten),  eic. 


12 


CONDITIONAL  PERFECT  (II). 

tcfc  $otte  getooflt  (...fcoflen)  [or  idj  nmrbe  getuoflt  Ija&en]  (§aben 

...tuoflen),  /  should  have  been  willing 
bu  $atteft  aettJoflt  (...tooflen)  [or  bu  ttwrbeft  getooflt  fjaben]  (Ijaben 

...tooflen],  etc. 

INFINITIVE. 

Prttent:  tooflen,  to  be  wiUing      \  Perfect:  gewoflt  Ijaben  ftobett... 

to  fawe  6een  willing 


:  tooHenb, 


PABTIOIPLES. 

|  P^:  geluoUt   or   ttoHett,    6een 


4)  Sottett,  shall,  ought. 
INDICATIVE.  Present  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


foil,  I  */wiZZ  (I  am  to,  etc.) 
bu  foUft,  thou  shall 


,  i^  shall 


@ie  foflen  or  t§r  foflt,  you  shall 


er  (fte,  eg)  foil, 
fair   ollen^  tee 


fie  foflen,  they  shall 


it)  fofle,  r^O  /  shall  (I  be 

to,  etc.) 

bu  fofleft,  thou  sliall 
er  (fie,  tf)  fotte,  A«  fs^e,  t«;  sAaW 
totr  fotten,  ife  shall 
@ie  fotten  or  i^r  foflet,  you  s/w« 


fie  fotten,  they  shall 
Imperfect. 


id^  fottte,  (that)  I  should  (1 
ought,  I  were  to,  etc.) 

bu  foUteft,  thou  should 

er  (fte,  e3)  fottte,  /ie  (she,  it) 
should 

tutr  foflten,  we  should 

@ie  foflten  or  t^r   fofltet,   you 


idj  foflte,  /  should  (I  ought,  I 

was  to,  etc.) 

t)U  foflteft,  thou  shouldst 
<r  (fie,  eg)  foflte,   he  (she,  it) 

should 

toil  foflten,  we  should 
€He  foflten  or  i§r  fofltet,   you 

should 
fte  foflten,  they  should  fte  foflten,  they  should 

Future  (I). 

idj  tuerbe  foflen,  /  shall  be  to     i   id)  hjerbe  foUen,  (that)  I  shall 

be  to 

bu  nrirft  foflen,  thou  wilt  be  to,     bu  werbeft  foflen,  thou  will  be 
etc,  \       to,  etc. 


13 


CONDITIONAL  (I). 

id)  foflte  (or  idj  ttwrbe  f olden),  /  should  be  to 

bu  fottteft  (or  bit  ftmrbeft  fotten),  thou  wouldst  be  to,  etc* 


INDICATIVE. 


Perfect. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


id)  $aBe   gefottt    ( 

have  been  to 
bit  fjaft  gefottt  (...fotten),  etc. 


idj  IjaBe  gefottt  (...foflen),  (that) 

I  have  been  to 
bu  Jjafceft  gefottt  (...fotten),  etc. 


Pluperfect. 


id)  ijatte   gefotft   (...foKen),   / 

had  been  to 
bu  Ijatteft  gejoflt  (...foHen),  etc. 


i%  fiatte  gefoKt  (...follcn),  (that) 

I  had  been  to 
bu  iiatteft  gejottt  (... fatten),  etc. 


Future  Perfect  (II). 


idj  toerbe  gefottt  ^aBen 

foUen),  /  shall  have  been  to 


bu  ttrirft  gefottt  ^ooen 
fotten),  etc. 


id)  ttjerbe  gefottt  fjaBen 

fallen),  (that)  I  shall   have 

been  to 
bu  foerbeft  gefottt  !>aBen  (fjaBert 

...fotten),  etc. 


CONDITIONAL  PERFECT  (II). 

njiirbe   gefottt  tyaBen 


idj  ^8tte  gefottt  (...foUcn)  [or  id 

fotten],  /  should  have  been  to 
bu  ptteft  gefottt  (...fotten)  [or  bu  toilrbeft  gefottt  IjaBen 

fotten],  etc. 


INFINITIVE. 


Present:  fotten,  shall,  ought 


Perfect:  gefottt  IjaBen  (Ijabeit... 
foUen),  to  have  been  to 


PABTIOIPLES. 
Preurnt:  foflenb,  being  to  \  Past:  gefottt  or  fotten,,  been.  t& 


14 


5)  Stiff ettr  to  be  allowed  (to  dare). 


INDICATIVE. 


Present. 


id)  barf,  /  am  allowed 
bu  barfjf,  thou  art,  allowed 
er  (fie,  e§)  barf,  he  (she,  it)  is 

allowed 

nnr  biirfen,  we  are  allowed 
@ie  Mrfen  or  i^r  biirft,   you 

are  allowed 
fte  biirfen,  they  are  allowed 


id)  bfirfe,  /  be  allowed 
bu  biirfeft,  thou  be  allowed 
er  (fie,  cfj  biirfe,  fee   (ate, 

6e  allowed 

ttnr  burfen,  i^e  fee  allowed 
Sie  biirfen  or  tfjr  biirfe, 


allowed 
fie  biirfen,  t 


allowed 


Imperfect. 


id)  burfte,  J  too*  allowed 

bu  burfteft,  ^ow  TWW^  allowed 

er  (fie,  e*)  burfte,  *«  CsA€,   ^; 

IPOS  allowed 

toil  burften,  we  were  allowed 
Sie  tiurftett  or  i^r  birrftet,  you 

were  allowed 
fie  burften,  they  were  allowed 


id)  burfte,  J  tpere  allowed 
bu  burfteft,  &0u  i^«ri  allowed 
er  (fie,  e3)  burfte,  7w  (^   ii 

to«r€  allowed 

ttJtr  burften,  we  were  allowed 
©ie  biirften  or  ifjr  biirfiet,  yo 

t«ere  allowed 
fie  burften,  iA^y  were  allowed 


Future  (I). 

id)    ttjerbe    burfen,   /  shaU  be  \   ifi  toerbe  burfen, 

allowed  be  allowed 

bu  ttrirft  barf  en,    thou  wilt  be      bu  ttcrfceft  burfen,  tiuw  wilt  be 

allowed,  etc.  allowed,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL   (I). 

tdj  Ijatte  biirfen  (or  id)  ttmrbe  biirfen),  I  should  be  allowed 

bu  fyatteft  burfen  (or  bu  tuiirbeft  biirfen),  thou  wouldst  be  allowed, 


tic. 


Perfect. 


id)  ^abe  geburft  (... burfen),  1 

have  been  allowed 
bu  Ijaft  g?burft(... burfen),  etc. 


id)    §aBe    geburft    (...biirfen), 

(that)  I  have  been  allowed 
bufyibeft  geburft  (...bKrfm),efc 


Pluperfect. 


i$  $atte  geburft  (...burfen),   / 

had  been  allowed 
bu  $atteft  geburft  (...burfen),efc. 


i(^  ^fitte  geburft  (...burfen), 
(that)  I  had  been  allowed 

bu  fja'tteft  geburft  (...burfen), 
etc. 


15 

Future  Perfect  (II). 


id)  ttJerbc  geburft  Ijaben  (Ija&ett 
...biirfett),  /  shall  have  been 
allowed 

bit  tuirft  geburft  Ijabeu  (Ijabeu 
...biirfeu),  etc. 


idj  toerbe  geburft  Ijaben  djafccn 
...biurfett),  (that)  I  shall 
have  been  allowed 

bu  tterbeft  geburft  Ijaben  (f>aben 
...biirfeu),  etc. 


CONDITIONAL  PERFECT  (II). 

id)  Jjatte  geburft  (...bftrfen)  [or  idj  toiirbe  geburft  Ijaben  (fjabeu... 

biirfeu],  /  should  have  been  allowed 
bu  fjatteft  geburft  (...biirfeu)  [or  bu  ftwrbeft  geburft  Ijobeu  (fjaben 

..  bitrfeu],  etc. 

INFINITIVE. 

Present:  biirfen,  to  be  allowed     \  Perfect:  geburft  !)aben  (^oBen... 

biirfctt),  to  have  been  allowed 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present:  biirfenb,  being  allowed     \  Past:    geburft  or  biirfctt,   been 

allowed 


6)  3tt0gen,  (may)  to  like. 


INDICATIVE. 


Present. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


tcij  mag,  I  may  (I  like,  etc.) 

fcu  ntagft,  thou  mayest 

er  (fie,  e^)  mag,  he  (she,  it)  may 

totr  mogeu,  we  may 

@ie  mogen  or  ifjr  mogt,   you 

may 
fie  mogen,  they  may 


id)  moge,  (that)  I  may  (I  like, 

etc.) 

bu  miigeft,  thou  may 
er  (fie,  e£)  tttiigc,  he  (she,  it)  may 
toil  mogeu,  we  may 
(5ie  mogeu  or  iljr  moget,  you 

may 
fie  mogeu,  they  may 


id)  mod^te,  /  liked 

bu  moi^teft,  thou  likedst 


Imperfect. 

id)  modjte,  (that)   I  might   (I 
~    I,  etc.) 


(fie,  e§)  mod&te,  he  (she,  it) 

liked 

ttrir  modjten,  we  liked 
@te  moc^teu  or  i§r  mod^tet,  you 

liked 
fie  molten,  they  liked 


bu  modjteft,  thou  might 

er  (fie,  e§)  mod^te,  ^e  ^«^,  t<^ 

might 

toir  m5c§ten,  we  migr^ 
<5ie  molten  or  i^r  moc^tet,  you 


might 
fie  modjten, 


might 


16 


INDICATIVE.          Future  (I).         SUBJUNCTIVE. 


id)  toerbe  mogen,  /  shall  like 

bu  toirft  mogen,  thou  witt  like, 
etc. 


idfj  toerbe  mogen,  (that)  I  shall 

like 
bu  tterbeft  mogen,   thou  wilt 

like,  etc. 


CONDITIONAL  (I). 

id)  ntpdjte  (or  id)  ttwrbe  mdgen),  I  should  like 

bu  modjteft  (or  bu  ttwrbeft  mogen),  thou  wouldst  like,  etc. 


Perfect. 


i$  |abe  gemocfjt  (...tnogen),   / 

have  liked 
bu  Ijaft  gemoc^t  (...mogen),  etc. 


idj   ^obe   gemoc^t    (...mogcn), 

(that)  I  have  liked 
bu  Ijabeft  gemodjt  (...mogen), 

etc. 


Pluperfect. 


\$  Ijatte  gemoc^t  (...tnogen),  / 

had  liked 
bu   Ijatteft  gemod^t  (...mogen), 


etc. 


it^  teerbe  gcmod^t  Ijaben 

... ntogen),  I  shall  have  liked 

bu  toirft  gemoc^t  Ijaben  (Ijaben 

...mogen),  etc. 


etc. 
Future  Perfect  (II). 


it)   Ijatte   gemodjt    (...m3gcn), 

(that)  I  had  liked 
bu  Ijatteft  gemodjt   (...mogen), 


it)  frerbe  gemocfjt  Ijaben  (fjabeit 
...ntogen),  (that)  I  shall  have 
liked 

bu  toerbcft  gemocfjt  ^aben  (|aben 
...mogen),  etc. 


CONDITIONAL  PERFECT  (II). 

K$  ptte  gemo^t  (...ntogcn)  [or  idj  tourbe  gemoc^t  ^aben  (^aben 

...mSgen],  /  should  have  liked 
bu  fjatteft  aemoc^t  (...mogen)  [or  bu  tourbeft  gemod^t  ^aben  (^aben 

...mogcnj,  etc. 


INFINITIVE. 


Prctcnt:  m5gen,  to  like 


\  Perfect:  gemodjt  Ija&en 
...mogen),  to  have  liked 


PABTICIPLES. 

f 

Present:  mSgenb,  liking  \  Past:  gemoc^t  or  mSgen,  liked 


17 

THE  REGULAR  VERB  So&ett,  to  praise. 

I.  Active  Voice. 

INDICATIVE.  Present.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

id)  lobe,  /  praise  (I  am  prais- 
ing, I  do  praise,  etc.) 
bit  tobft,  thou  praisest 
er  (fie,    e3)  tobt,  he  (she,  it) 
toil  toben,  we  praise      [praises 
@ie  toben  or  itjr  lobt,  you  praise 
fie  toben/  they  praise 


id)  tofce,  7  praise   or   (that)   I 

may  praise,  etc. 
bu  lob  eft,  thou  praise 
er  (fie,  e3)  tobe,  fce  («fo,  i«> 
loir  toben,  we  praise       [praise 
(Ste  toben  or  ifjr  tobet,  you  praise 
fie  toben,  £A 


Imperfect. 


idj    tobte,    J  praised    (I    was 

praising,  I  did  praise,  etc.) 
bu  tobteft,  thou  praisedst 
er  (fie,  e§)  tobte,   fce  (sfo?,  it) 
toir  tobten,  we  praised  [praised 
@ie  tobten  or  itjr  tobtet,  you 

praised 
fte  tobten,  they  praised 


idj  tobte,  /  praised  or 

might  praise,  etc. 
bu  tobteft,  ^/iow  praised 
er  (fie,  eg)  tobte,  he  (she,  it) 
ftnr  tobten,  we  praised  [praised 
<5ie  tobten  or  iljr  tobtet,   you 


shall 


fie  tobten,  they  praised 
Future  (I). 


id)  toerbe  toben,  J  shall  praise 

(I  shall  be  praising,  etc.) 
bu  ttrirft  toben,  thou  wilt  praise 
et  (fte,  e3)  ttnrb  toben,  he  (she, 

it)  will  praise 

ttrir  toerben  toben,  we  shall  praise 
@ie  njerben  toben  or  iljr  nierbet 

toben,  you  will  praise 
fie  toerben  toben,  they  will  praise 

CONDITIONAL  (I), 
td^  toiirbe  toben,  /  should  praise 
bu  toiirbeft  toben,  thou  wouldst  praise 
er  (fte,  e§)  Wiirbe  toben,  he  (she,  it)  would  praise 
toir  ttmrben  toben,  we  should  praise 
@te  toitrben  toben  or  if)r  toiirbet  toben,  you  would  praise 
fie  ttwrben  toben,  they  would  praise 

Perfect. 


id)  tuerbe  toben,  (that)  I 

praise 

bu  werbeft  toben,  thou  wilt  praise 
er  (fie,  e3)  luerbe  toben,  he  (shet 

it)  will  praise 

nrir  merben  toben,  we  shall  praise 
<Sie  tuerben  toben  or  ijr  toerbet 

toben,  you  will  praise 
fie  toerben  toben,  they  will  praise 


fdj  babe  getobt,  /  have  praised 

(1  have  been  praising,  etc.) 
bu  Ijaft  getobt,  thou  hast  praised 
er  (fte,  e3)  Ijat  getobt,  he  (she, 

it)  hot  praised 

ttnr  IjaBen  getobt,  we  have  praised 
@ie  ^aben   getobt  or  ijjr  ^abt 

getobt,  you  have  praised 
fie  $aben  getobt,  they  havepraised 


\fy  !^abe  getobt,  I  have  praised  or 

(that)  I  may  have  praised,etc. 

bu  fjnbeft  getobt,  thou  hast  praised 

er  (fie,  e§)  fyabe  getobt,  he  (slu, 

it)  has  praised 

hnr  ^oben  getobt,  we  havepraised 
@te  ^oben  getobt  or  iljr  ^abct 

getobt,  you  have  praised 
fie  fjaben  getobt,  they  have  praised 


INDICATIVE.  Pluperfect.          SUBJUNCTIVE. 


id)  fjatte  gelobt,  I  had  praised 

(I  had  been  praising,  etc.) 
bn    ^attejl    getobt,    thou  hadst 

praised  [it)  had  praised 

€t  (fie,  e§)  fjatte  gelobt,  he  (she, 
nrir    fatten     gelobt,    we    had 

praised 
(Sie  fatten  gelobt  or  iljr  potter 

gelobt,  you  had  praised  \praised 
fie    fatten    gelobt,    they    had 


id)  Ijatte  gelobt,  /  had  praised  or 

(that)  I  might  have  praised,  etc. 
bit    fjatteft    gelobt,    thou   hadst 

praised  [it)  had  praised 

er  (lie,  eg)  Ijatte  gelobt,  he  (she, 
hrir    fatten    gelobt,     we    had 

praised 
Ste  fatten  getobt  or  iljr  Ijattet 

gelobt,  youhadpraised  \praised 
fie    Ijatten    gelobt,    they    had 


Future  Perfect  (II). 


id)  roerbe  getobt  Ijaben,  I  shall 
have  praised  (I  shall  have 
been  praising,  etc.) 

tm  tuirft  gelobt  l^aben 

er  (fte,  e§)  ft)trb  gelobt  ^aben 

nrir  merben  gelobt  ^aben 

Sie  trerben  gelobt  ^aben  or  tyx  \ 
luerbet  gelobt  ^aben 

fte  toerben  gelobt  ^abeu 


merbe  gelobt  I)qben,   (that) 
I  shall  have  praised,  etc. 


bu  rterbeft  gelobt  fjaben 
er  (^fte,  es)  merbc  gelobt 
luir  luerben  gelobt  fjaben 
Sie  tuerben  gelobt  fyaben  or 

tuerbet  gelobt  IjaBen 
fte  toerben  gelobt 


CONDITIONAL  PERFECT  (II). 

id)  luiirbe  gelobt  fjaben,  /  should  have  praised,  etc. 

bit  ruiirbeft  gelobt  fjaben 

er  (fte,  e§)  toiirbe  gelobt  Ijaben 

tutr  tuiirben  gelobt  fjaben 

©te  tuiirben  gelobt  l^aben  or  ttjr  ifiirbet  gelobt  ^oben 

fie  ttwrben  gelobt  ^aben 

LviPERATIVB. 

lobe,  praise  (thou) 

er  (fie,  eg)  foil  loben,  let  him  (she,  it)  praise 

roir  rooHen  loben  (loben  tmr,  Ia§t  ung  loben),  let  us 

loben  Sie  or  lobet,  praise  (you) 

fte  foUen  loben,  let  them  praise 

INFINITIVE. 


Present:  loben,  to  praise  (to  be 
praising) 


Perfect:  gelobt  Ijaben,    to   have 
praised  (to  have  been  praising) 


PARTICIPLES. 


Present:  lobeilb,  praising 


Past:    gelobt, 
praising) 


praised     (been 


19 


II.  Passive  Voice*. 

INDICATIVE.  Present.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

idj   toerbe  gelobt,  /  be  praised 

or  (that)  I  may  be  praised 
bu  rtievbcft  gelobt,  thou  be  praised 
er  (fie,    e3)  toerbe   gelobt,   he 

(she,  it)  be  praised 
toir  toerben  gelobt,  we  be  praised 
@ie  toerben  gelobt  or  iljr  toerbet 

gelobt,  you  be  praised 
fie  toerben  gelobt,  ftfogr  be  praised 


id)  toerbe  gelobt,  /  a 

(T  am  Ztetngr  praised,  etc.) 
bu  totrft  gelobt,  2/tow  ar£  praised 
er  (fie,  e$)  tpirb  gelobt,  he  (she, 

it)  is  praised 

totr  toerben  gelobt,  we  are  praised 
@te  toerben  gelobt  or  ijr  merbet 

gelobt,  you  are  praised 
fie  toerben  gelobt,  they  are  praised 


Imperfect. 


id)  tourbe  gelobt,  /  was  praised 
(I  was  being  praised,  etc.) 


bu  ttwrbeft  getobt,  thou  wast 
«r  (fie,  e0)  tourbe  gelobt,  he  (she, 

it)  was  praised  Ipraised 

tt)ir  ^njurben  gelobt,  we  were 
@ie  tourben  gelobt  or  iljr  tuurbet 

gelobt,2/ow  werepraised  ^praised 
fie  tourben  gelobt,  they  were 


tc^  toerbe  gelobt  toerben,  I  shall 

be  praised 
bu   toirft  gelobt  toerben,    thou 

wilt  be  praised 
er  (fie,  e3)  toirb  gelobt  toerben, 

he  (she,  it)  will  be  praised 
toir  toerben  gelobt  toerben,  we 

shall  be  praised 
<Sic   toerben   gelobt  toerben  or 

iljr    toerbet    gelobt    toerben, 

you  will  be  praised 
fie  toerbtn  gelobt  toerben,   they 

will  be  praised 


id)  tourbe  gelobt,  I  were  praised 

or  (tliat)  I  might  be  praised, 

etc.  [praised 

bu    toiirbeft    gelobt,   thou  wert 

er  (fie,  e£)  tourbe  gelobt,  he  (she, 

it)  were  praised          [praised 

toir    toiirben    gelobt,    we    were 

(Sie  tourben  gelobt  or  i§r  toiirbet 

gelobt,2/ow  werepraised  [praised 

fie    tourben    gelobt,    they   were 

a). 

tdj  toerbe  gelobt  toerben,  (that)  I 

shall  be  praised 
bu  tperbeft  gelobt  toerben,  thou 

wilt  be  praised 
er  (fie,  e3)  toerbe  gelobt  toerben, 

he  (she,  it)  will  be  praised 
toir  toerben  gelobt  toerben,  we 

shall  be  praised 
@ie   toerben   gelobt  toerben  or 

t^r    toerbet    gelobt    toerben, 

you  will  be  liaised 
fie  toerben  gelobt  toerbea,  they 

will  be  praised 


CONDITIONAL  (I). 

idj  toiirbe  gelobt  toerben,  I  should  be  praised 

bu  toiirbeft  gelobt  toerben,  thou  ivouldst  be  praised 

er  (fie,  e3)  toiirbe  gelobt  toerben,  he  (she,  it)  would  be 

toir  toiirben  gelobt  toerben,  we  slwuld  be  praised 

@ie  toiirben  gelobt  toerben  or  ifyr  ttmrbet  gelobt  toetben,  you 

fie  tourben  gelobt  toerben,  they  would  be  praised  [be  pmisea 


20 

INDICATIVE.  Perfect.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

tdj  bin  getobt  tuorben,  I  have  ,  id)  fei  gelobt  toorben,   (that)  I 


been  praised 
bit  bift  gelobt  toorben,  thou  hast 

been  praised 
er  (fte,  e3)  ift  gelobt   toorben, 

he  (she,  it)  has  been  praised 
ttnr  finb  gelobt  toorben,  we  have 

been  praised 
@te  finb  gelobt  toorben   or  iljr 

feib  gelobt  ftorben,  you  have 

been  praised        \been  praised 
fie  finb  gelobt  toorben,  they  have 


have  been  praised 
bu  feieft   gelobt  toorben,    thou, 

hast  been  praised 
er  (fie,  e§)  fei  gelobt  toorben, 

he  (she,  it)  has  been  praised 
ton  feien  gelobt  toorben,  we  have 

been  praised 
@ie  feien  gelobt  toorben  or  \fy 

feiet  gelobt  trorben,  you  have 

been  praised  [have  been  praised 
fie   feien   gelobt   foorben,    they 


Pluperfect. 

id)   »ar  getobt  roorben,  /  had  •  id)  nmre  gelobt  tporben,  (that)  I 

had  been  praised 


thou 


been  praised 
bu  toarft  gelobt  ttorben, 

hadst  been  praised 
er  (fie,  e§)  tear  gelobt 

he  (she,  it)  had  been  praised 
ttrir  ttioren  gelobt  toorben,   we 

had  been  praised 
Sie  njoren  gelobt  morben  or  i!jr 

toaret  gelobt  morben,  you  had 

been  praised  \had  been  praised 
fte  toaren  gelobt  toorben,  they 


bit  tuareft  gelobt  toorben,   thou 

hadst  been  praised 
er  (fie,  e3)  toare  gelobt  iDorben, 

he  (she,  it)  had  been  praised 
toir  ttiaren  gelobt  toorben,   we 

had  been  praised 
<Sie  tt)aren  gelobt  tuorben  or  ifjr 

traret  gelobt  trorben,  you  had 

been  praised    \had  been  praised 
fie  toaren  gelobt  tcorben,  they 


Future  Perfect  (II). 
id)  toerbe  gelobt  ttjorben  fein,  I     id)    toerbe  jelobt  tuorben  fein. 


(that)  I  shall  have  been  praised 
bit  toerbeft  gelobt  fcorben  fetn, 
thou  wilt  have  been  praised,  etc. 


shall  have  been  praised 
bit  toirft  gelobt  morben  fein,  thou 
wilt  have  been  praised,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL  PERFECT  (II). 

id)  ttmrbe  gelobt  toorben  fein,  /  should  have  been  praised 
bu  toiirbeft  gelobt  tporben  fein,  thou  wouldst  have  been  praised,  et*» 

IMPERATIVE. 

ttjerbe  (or  fei)  gelobt,  be  (thou)  praised 
er  (fie,  e3)  foU  gelobt  tterben,  let  him  (she,  it)  be  praised 
tmr  woflen   gelobt  toerben  (toerben   toir  gelobt,  Ia§t  wt3  gelobt 

tterben,  let  us  be  praised 

werben  (or  feien  @ie)  gelobt  or  njerbet   (or  feib)   gelobt,   be  you 
fte  foflen  gelobt  toerben,  let  them  be  praised  [praised 

INFINITIVE. 

Pretent:   gelobt   toerben,    to  be  \  Past:    aelobt   tuerben   fetn,    to- 
praised  \      have  been  praised 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pretent:  (§u  loBenb,  to  be  praised  \  Past:     gelobt     toorben,      been 
occurs  aa  adjective  only)        j      praised 


21 


THE  SEPARABLE  VERB 
3(b'f)0fctt,  to  fetch  off,  to  call  for. 
INDICATIVE.  Present.          SUBJUNCTIVE. 

id)  fjole...ab,  I  fetch  off 

bu  Ijolft  ab,  thou  fetchest  off 
«r  (fie,  e§)  l)olt  ab,  he  (she,  it) 

fetches  off 

tmr  Ijolen  ab,  we  fetch  off 
<5ie  fjolen  ab  or  iljr  Ijolt  ab, 

you  fetch  off 
fie  Ijolen  ab,  they  fetch  off 


id)    f)ote...a&,    -T  /efc/i.  off  or 

(tfictf)  7  wai/  fetch  off,  etc. 
bu  Ijoleft  ab,  thou  fetch  o 
er  (fie,  e3)  Ijole  ab,  Ae  ( 


tuir  ^olen  ab,  we  fetch  off 
@te  ijolen  ab  or  t^r  ^olct  ab, 

you  fetch  off 
fie  Ijolen  ab,  they  fetch  off 


Imperfect. 


id)  I)otte...ab,  I  fetched  off 

tit  Ijolteft  ab,  thou  fetchedst  oft 
er  (fie,  e3)  ^otte  ab,  /ie  (sfc«,  ft) 

/«teA«d  off 

ttnr  gotten  ab,  we  /e«c/ie^  o/ 
6ie  gotten  ab  or  i|r  ^oltet  ab, 

^/ow  fetched  off 
fie  $  often  ab,  they  fetched  off 


id)  f)ofte...ab,  1  fetched  off  or 
(that)  I  might  fetch  off,  etc. 
bu  Ijofteft  ab,  thou  fetched  off 
er  (fie,  eS).Ij0fte  ab,  he  (she,  it) 


toir  gotten  ab.  we  /e«c/i^  off 
@ie  gotten  ab  or  tl)r  ^ottet  ab, 

you  fetched  off 
fie  gotten  ab,  they  fetched  off 


Future  (I). 

id)  toerbe  ab^oten,  I  shall  fetch  .  ic^  tuerbe  ab^oten,  (^0  I  shall 
off  \off,  etc.         fetch  off  [fetch  off,  etc. 

bu  ttrirft  abljolen,  thou  wilt  fetch  \  bit  toerbeft  abijoten,  thou  wilt 

CONDITIONAL  (I). 

id)  rourbe  ab^olen,  1  should  fetch  off 

bu  toiirbeft  ab^olen,  thou  wouldst  fetch  off,  etc. 


Perfect. 


id)  fjabe  abgeljoft,  I  have  fetched 

off  \fetched  off,  etc. 

bu    ^aft    abge^oft,    thou  hast 


ic^  ^abe  abgefjolt,  (that)  I  have 

fetched  off       [ fetched  off,  etc. 

bu  Ijabeft  abge^oft,  thou  hast 


Pluperfect. 


id)  Ijatte  abgeljott,  I  had  fetched 

off  [fetched  off,  etc. 

bu  Ijatteft  abgeljoft,  thou  hadst 


id)  ptte  abge^ott,  (that)  I  had 
fetched  off       [fetched  off,  etc, 
bu  ptteft  abge^olt,  thou  had 


22 

INDICATIVE.     Future  Perfect  (II).   SUBJUNCTIVE. 

id)  ,  toerbc    abgefyott    f)aben,    J|  tdj_toerbe  abgeljolt 


shall  have  fetched  off  I  shall  have  fetched  off 

bu  ttrirft  abgeljolt  Ijaben,   thou     bu  tterbeft  abgefyolt  f)aben,  thou 
wilt  have  fetched  off,  etc.  wilt  have  fetched  off%  etc. 

CONDITIONAL  PERFECT  (II). 

id)  ttmrbe  abge^olt  fjaben,  /  should  have  fetched  off 

bu  ttwrbeft  abgeljolt  tyaben,  thou  wouldst  have,  fetched  off,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

f)ofe...oB,  fetch  (thou)  off 

er  (fie,  e§)  foil  abfjolen,  let  him  (she,  it)  fetch  off  \off 

luir  ttJoKen  ab^olen  (fyolen  tpir...Qb,  lafet  im§  abfjolen),  tat  us  fetch 

Ijolen  @ie...Qb  or  ^olet...ab,  fetch  (you)  off 

fie  follen  ab^olen,  let  them  fetch  off 

INFINITIVE. 

Present:  abljolen  (abju^olen),  to  \  Perfect:  abgefjolt  ^aben,  to  have 
fetch  off  |      fetched  off 

PAKTICIPLES. 
Present:  ab^olenb,  fetching  off    \  Pent:  abge^olt,  fetched  off 


THE  INTRANSITIVE  VEKB  8anbettf  to  land. 
Conjugated  with,  feim 

IKTOICATIVB.  Present.          SUBJUNCTIVE. 


tdj  tonbe,  /  land 

bu  Icmbeft,  thou  landest 

er  (fie,  e*J  lanbet,  he  (she,   it) 


lands,  etc. 


id)  tanbe,  J  land  or  (that)  I  mm, 
bit  lanbeft,  thou  laiid  [land,  et<-.. 
et  (fie,  eg)  lanbe,  he  (she,  it; 


land,  etc. 


Imperfect. 


id)  lanbete,  I  landed 

bu  lanbeteft,  thou  lancl&dsi 
er  (fie,  ed)  loabete,  he  (&*, 


landed,  etc. 


tdj  tuerbe  lanbeit,  / 
bu  nrirfl  fanbtn,  thou 


id)  Icmbete,  I  landed  or  (that)  1 

might  land,  etc. 
bu  laitbeteft,  thou  landed 
ei  (fie,  eS)  lanb^U,  he  (she,  ?/> 


landed,  etc. 


Future  (I). 


it§  trerbe  fanben,  (thai)  I  shcttt 

land  [land,  etc. 

bn   tocrbffl   lanben,    thou    will 


CONDITIONAL  (I). 

tdj  toiirbe  lanben,  I  should  land 

bu  ttmrbeft  lanben,  thou  wouldst  land,  etc. 


INDICATIVE.  Perfect. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


id)  bin  getanbet,  /  have  landed 

bu  bift  getanbet,  thou  hast  landed 
er  (fie,  efc)  ift  getanbet,  he  (she, 

it)  has  landed 

fair  finb  gelanbet,  we  have  landed 
@tc  ftnb   gelanbet  or  il)r  feib 

gelanbet,  you  have  landed 
fie  finb  gelanbet,  they  have  landed 


id)  fct  gelanbet,  (that)  I  have 

landed  [landed 

bit    feieft    gelanbet,    thou    hast 

er  (fie,  cS)  fet  gelanbet,  he  (she. 

it)  has  landed  [landed 

toir    feien    gelonbet,    we   have 

(3ie  feien  gelanbet  or  ifjr  feiet 

gelanbet,  you  have  landed 
fie  feien  gelanbet,  they  have  landed 


Pluperfect. 


id)  mar  gelanbet,  I  had  landed 
[landed 

bn  itmrft   getanbet,   thou  hadst 
er  (fie,    el)    tear   gelanbet,   he 

(she,  it)  had  landed  [landed 
tt)ir  ftmren  gelanbet,  we  had 
<5ie  toaren  gelanbet  or  iljr  maret 

gelanbet,  you  had  landed 
fie    toaren    gelanbet,    they  had 

landed 


td^  mare  getanbet,  (that)  I  had 

landed  [landed 

bn  ttmreft  gelanbet,  thou  hadst 
er  (fie,   e3)  ttmre  gelanbet,  he 

(she,  it)  had  landed  [landed 
tt)ir  toaren  gelanbet,  we  had 
@ie  njaren  gelanbet  or  if)r  n)aret 

gelanbet,  i/ow  7iacZ  landed 
fie   toaren    gelanbet,    i/ie?/   had 

landed 


Future  Perfect  (II). 

idj  toerbe  gelanbet  feiit,  /  shall 

have  landed 
bu  ttrirft  gelanbet  fein,  etc. 


idj  trerbe  gelanbet  fetit,  (that) 

I  shall  have  landed 
bu  toerbeft  gelanbet  fein,  etc. 


CONDITIONAL  PERFECT  (II). 

tdj  toiirbe  getanbet  fein,  /  should  have  landed 

bu  rtmrbeft  gelanbet  fein,  ^ow  wouldst  have  landed,  etc. 


IMPERATIVE. 

lanbe,  Za?irf  (thou) 

lanben  @ie  or  tanbet,  land  (you),  etc 

INFINITIVE. 


Present:  lanben,  to  land 


\  Perfect:  getanbet  fein,  to  have 
landed 


PARTICIPLES. 
Present:  fanbenb,  landing  \  Past:  getanbet,  landed 


24: 


THE  REFLECTIVE  VERB 
Sidj  erfalten,  to  catch  cold 

INDICATIVE.  Present.          SUBJUNCTIVE. 

erfdlte  mid),  /  catch  cold 

,    thou   catcliest 


l)tt  erfdlteft  b 

cold 
«r  (fie,  eg)  erfdltet  fidj,  he  (she, 

it)  catches  cold 

Urir  erfdlten  un§,  we  catch  cold 
@ie  erfdlten  fic$  or  if)r  erfaltet 

eud),  ?/ow  ca£c/fr  coW 
fie  erftilten  fid),  they  catch  cold 


id)  erfdlte  mid),  /  catch  cold  or 

(that)  I  may  catch  cold,  etc. 
bu   erfdlteft    bid),    thou    catch 

cold 
er  (fie,  eS)  erfalte  fic^,  he  (she, 

i,t)  catch  cold 

ttJtr  erfalten  un§,  «?e  cafcA  cold 
@ie  erfalten  fid^  or  ifjr  erfaltet 

eud^,  i/ow  caic/i  cold 
fte  erfalten  fid),  tf^y  catch  cold 


Imperfect. 


idj  erfdltete  mid),  /  caught  cold 

bit  erfdlteteft  bid),  tfiou  caughtest 

cold 
er  (fie,  e§)  erfdltete  ftc^,  he  (she, 

it)  caught  cold 

toir  erfalteten  un§,  tp«  caught  cold 
@ie  erfalteten  fic^  or  i§r  erfdltetet 

eud^,  you  caught  cold 
fie  erfalteten  fid),  they  caught  cold 


idj  erfattete  mtc^,  /  caught  cold 

or  (that)  I  might  catch  cold,  etc. 
bu  erfdlteteft  bidj,  tlwu  caught 

cold 
er  (fie,  e*)  erfattete  ftd^,  he  (she, 

it)  caught  cold 

ttrir  erfalteten  un§,  we  caught  cold 
@ie  erfalteten  fid^  or  iljr  erfdltetet 

eud§,  yow  caught  cold 
fie  erfalteten  fid),  they  caught  cold 


Future  (I). 


id)  toerbe  midj  erfalten,  I  shall 

catch  cold 
bii  mirft  bid)  erfalten,  thou  wilt 

catch  cold,  etc. 


id)  tr-erbe  mid)  erfdlten,   (that) 

I  shall  catch  cold 
bu  tperbeft  bid)   erfalten,  thou 

will  catch  cold.  etc. 


CONDITIONAL  (I). 

id)  toiirbe  mid)  erfalten,  I  should  catch  cold 

bu  ttiirbeft  bid)  erfalten,  tfww  wouldst  catch  cold,  etc. 


Perfect. 


id)  tja&e  mtc&   erfaltet,   I  have 

caught  cola 
<bu  ^aft  bid)  erfaltet,   thou  hast 

caught  cold,  etc. 


id)  I)abe  mid)  erfaltet,  (that)  I 

have  caught  cold 
bu  Ijabeft  bid)  erfaltet,  thou  hast 

caught  cold,  etc. 


25 


INDICATIVE.          Future  (I).         SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Ijatte  mid)  ertdltet,   I  had 
caught  cold 

im    fjatteft   bid)   erfaltet, 
caught  cold,  etc. 


idj  ptte  mid)  erfdltet,  (that)  I 

had  caught  cold 
bu   ptteft    bidj   erfaltet,    thou 

hadst  caught  cold,  etc. 


Future  Perfect  (II). 


idj  toerbe  midj  erfaltet  Ijaben,  I 
s^a^  have  caught  cold 

im  foirft   bidj   erfaltet    Ijaben, 


etc. 


ify  tuerbe  mid^  erfaftet 

(that)    I   shall   have   caught 

cold 
bu  merbcft  bid^  erfaltet 

etc. 


CONDITIONAL  PERFECT  (II). 

idj  toiirbe  mic^  erfattet  ^aben,  /  should  have  caught  cold 
bu  toiirbeft  bii^  erfaltet  ijaben,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

«r!alte  bid£),  cate^  (thou)  cold 

er  (fie,  e§)  [ott  fid)  erfalteti,  let  him  (she,  it)  catch  cold 

tirir  tuoHen  un3  erfdlten  (erfalten  toir  un^,  kfjt  iin§  erfdlten),  let 

us  catch  cold 

erfdlten  @ie  fic^  or  erfaltet  eudj,  catch  (you)  cold 
fie  foHen  fid^  erfdlten,  let  them  catch  cold 

INFINITIVE. 

Present:  fid)   erfdlten.   to  catch  \  Perfect:  fidj   erfaltet  fjaben,   to 
cold  i       nave  caught  cold 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present:  fid)  erfdltenb,  catching  \  Past:  fidj  erfdltet,  caught  cold 
cold 


26 

THE  IMPERSONAL  VERB 

3d)ncicn,  to  snow. 

INDICATIVE.  Present.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

t£  fcijneit,  it  mows  (it  is  snow-  \  e§  fdfjnete,  (that)  it  may  snow 
ing) 

Imperfect. 

e§  fcfjiteite,   it  snowed   (it   was  \  t$  \ djnette,  (that)  it  might  snow 
snowing) 

Future  (I). 

e3  toirb  fdjneien,  it  will  snow    \  &  toerbe  fdjneien,  (that)  it  will 

|       snow 

CONDITIONAL  (I). 

e3  toiirbe  fdfjneten,  it  would  snow 

Perfect. 

e3  ^ot  gefd^nett,  it  has  snowed  \  e§  Ijabe  gefd^neit,  (that)  it  has- 
(it  has  been  snowing)  \       snowed 

Pluperfect. 

e§  ^atte  gejc^nett,  it  had  snowed  \  &  ptte  gefc^ncit,  (that)  it  had 
(it  had  been  snowing)  \       snowed 

Future  Perfect  (II). 

er  hrirb  gefdjneit  fjaBen,  it  will  \  el  luerbe  gejc^nett  ^aben,  (that) 
have  snowed  \       it  will  have  snowed 

CONDITIONAL  PKEFECT  (II). 
e3  luurbe  gefd^neit  ^aben,  it  would  have  snowed 

v 

INFINITIVE. 

Present,  jc^neten,  to  snow  \  Perfect:  gefd^neit  ^obeit,  to  have 

j       snowed 

PARTICIPLES. 
Present:  jcfynetenb,  snowing          \  Past:  gefd^neit,  snowed 


27 


THE  IRREGULAR  VERB 

,  to  give. 


INDICATIVE. 
tdj  gebe,  /  give 


Present. 


bu  flie&ft,  thou  givest 

er  (fie,  e3)  gtebt,  fo  (s 

ftrir  geben,  we  #we 

@ie  geben  or  ifjr  gebt,  2/ow  give 

fie  geben,  J/iei/  o;m 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

(that)  I  may 


id)  gebe,  I 
give,  etc. 

bu  gebeft,  thou  give 
er  (fie,  e§)  gebe,  Ae  ( 
toir  geben,  we  give 
@ie  geben  or  iljr  gebet,  yow  gfw'e 
fie  geben,  they  give 


Imperfect, 


\§  gab,  I  gave 

bit  gabft,  thou  gavest 

er  (fie,  cS)  gab,  he  (she,  it)  gave 

ttrir  gaben,  we  gave 

(Sic  gaben  or  iljr  gobt,  ^ow  gave 

fie  gaben,  to 


tc^    gabc,   I  gave   or   (that)  I 

might  give,  etc. 
bit  gabeft,  thou  gave 
er  (fie,  e8)  ga'be,  Ae  ('sfte,  t^  grave 


toir  gaben, 

(Sic  gaben  or  ifjr  gabet,  you  gave 

fie  gaben,  they  gave 


Future  (I). 

id)  toerbe  geben,  I  shall  give 
bu  ttrirft  geben,  thou  wilt  give,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL  (I). 


id)  toerbe  geben,  (that)  I  shall 
give  [etc. 

bu  tuerbeft  geben,  thou  wilt  givef 


id)  ftmrbe  geben,  I  should  give 

bu  toiirbeft  geben,  thou  wouldst  give,  etc. 


Perfect. 


^abe  gegebctt,  I  have  given 
[etc. 


id)  Jabe  gcgcbcn,  (that)  I 


bu  Ijaft  gegeben,  thou  hast  given, 

Pluperfect. 


given  [etc. 

bu  gabeft  gegeben,  thouhastgivenr 


ify  ^attc  gcgebcn,  I  had  given 

[given,  etc. 

bu  f)atteft  gegeben,  tlwu  hadst 


idj  fjatte  gegeben,  (that)  I  had 

given  [given,  etc. 

bu  ptteft  gegeben,   thou  hadst 


28 
INDICATIVE.     Future  Perfect.      SUBJUNCTIVE. 


tdj   toerbe    gege&en    fyaben,    I 

shall  have  given 
bit  nrirft  gegeben  Ijaben,  etc. 


idj  tuerbe  gegeben  Ijaben,  (that) 

I  sliall  have  given 
bu  toerbeft  gegeben  Ijaben,  etc. 


CONDITIONAL  PERFECT  (IT). 

id)  toiirbe  gegeben  ^aben,  /  should  have  given 

bu  UJiirbeft  gegeben  Ijaben,  thou  wouldst  have  Driven,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

gic!if  give  (thou) 

er  (fie,  es)  fott  geben,  let  him  (her,  it)  give 

nMr  njoflen  geben  (geben  ttrir,  Ia|t  un^  geben),  let  us  give 

geben  Sie  or  gebet,  give  (you) 

fie  follen  geben,  let  them  give 

INFINITIVE. 

Present:  geben,  to  give  '  Perfect:  gegefcen  Ijaben,  to  hav* 

|       given 

PARTICIPLES. 
Present:  gebenb,  giving  \  Past:  gegeien,  given 


of  ffle  grrepfar 


REMARKS. 

1.  Compound  verbs  are  not  given ;  they  are  in  general  conjugated  like  their  root- 
verbs. 

2.  Verbs  marked  with  a  *  are  conjugated  with  fcin. 


INFINITIVE. 

2nd  &  3rd  Person  singular 
INDICATIVE    PRESENT 
if  changed  from  1st  Person. 

IMPERFECT 

IMPERA- 
TIVE. 

PAST  PAR- 
TICIPLE. 

SBoden,  to  bake 

bu  Bocfft  (Badft),  erBadt(Bacft) 

tdjBadte(Bu!)Bade 

geBaden 

SSefefylen,  to  command 

bu  Befteljlft,  er  BefteB/It 

id)  BefaB,! 

Befieljl 

Befofijen 

SBefletfeen  (fid,),  to  apply 

id,  Befti§  mid, 

Befletfee  bid) 

Befltffen 

one's  self  to 

SSegtnnen,  to  begin 

id,  Begann 

Begtnne 

Begonnett 

83etBen,  to  bite 

id,  6t§ 

Betfee 

geBifien 

SBellenunen,  to  oppress 

;d]  BeflemntteBeflemnte 

Seftemmt 

1 

(Betlommen-) 

SBergen,  to  hide 
*S3erften,  to  burst 

bu  Btrgft,  cr  Btrgt 
bu     Berfteft     (Btrfteft),     cr 

:d)  Barg 
id)  Barft 

Btrg 
Berfte  (Btrft) 

jefiorgen 
jeBorften 

Berftet  (Birft) 

SSewegen,  to  induce 
SBiegen,  to  bend 

:d)  Betuog 
4  Bog 

Betuege 
Btege 

Behjogen 
jefiogen 

93teten,  to  bid 

4  Bot           Btete 

jeBoten 

SStnben,  to  bind 

tdj  Banb         Btnbe 

jeBunben 

SBttten,  to  beg 

td.  Bat           Bttte 

jeBeten. 

SSIofen,  to  blow 
*93IetBen,  to  stay 

bu  Blafeft,  er  Blaft 

4  BIte§         !6Iafe 
d)  BIteB         BletBe 

jeBIafen 
jeBIteBen 

SSraten,  to  roast 

bu  Brateft  (Brdtft)   er  Bratet 

d)  Brcttete 

Brate 

jeBraten 

(Brat) 

(Brtet) 

SBredjen,  to  break          bu  Bridjft,  er  Brtdjt 

:d.  Brad) 

Brtd) 

geBrodjen 

93rennen,  to  burn 

d)  Brannte 

Brenne 

jeBrannt 

SBrtngen,  to  bring 

4  Bradjte 

Brtnge 

SDenfen,  to  think 

di  badjte 

benfe 

jebad)t 

SDtngen,  to  hire  (a  ser- 

4 btngte 

binge 

jebtngt 

vant) 

(bang) 

(gebungcn) 

2)refdjen,  to  thrash 

bu  brtfdjeft,  er  brtfd)t 

d)  brofdj 
(braid,) 

brtfd) 

gebroidjen 

*£>rtngen,  to  press  for- 

d, brang 

brtnge 

gebrungen 

ward 

SJitrfen,  may 

see  auxil.  verbs  of  mood  p.  14. 

©mpfeljlen,    to    recom- 

bu enttofteljlft,  er  empftefitt 

d)  entpfaljt 

cmppefi,! 

empfo^Ien 

mend 

*(£rBIetd)en,  to  turn  pale 

td)  erBItd, 

erBIetd)e 

erBItdjen 

*®rlofd)en,  to  be  extin- 

see SSerI5fd,en 

guished 

Srfdjaflen,  to  resound 

td,    erfdjaHte 

erfdjatle 

erfrfjaUt 

"(SrfdjrecfeH,  to  be  frigh- 

bu erfdjrtdft,  cr  erfdjrtdt 

(erfdjott)     1 
td,  erfdjraf    lerfdjrid 

(erfdjotlen) 
erfdjroden 

tened 
©ffen,  to  eat 

bu  tffeft,  er  t§t 

td)  af5             ifi 

gegeffen 

*gal)ren,  to  drive  (in  a 

bu  fafyrft,  er  fa^rt 

td,  fu^r 

fa^re 

carriage) 

*gaO"en,  to  fall 

bu  faHft,  er  fattt 

td,  ftel 

affc 

gefaHen 

fjfangen,  to  catch 
3ed,ten,  to  fence 

bu  fangft,  er  fangt 
bu     fidjft    (fedjteft),    cr   ftdjt 

td,  ftng 
td,  fodjt 

ange 
ed)te  (Pd)t) 

icfangen 
iefod,ten 

(fedjtet) 

iJinben,  to  find 

td,  fanb 

pnbc 

lefitnbew 

gledjten,  to  twist 

bu  fftdift  (fledjteft),    er  fltdjt 
(fleditet) 

d)  flod)t 

fled)te  (fltdjt) 

geflod)ten 

INFINITIVE. 

2nd  &  3rd  Person  singular 

INDICATIVE  PRESENT 
if  changed  from  1st  Person. 

IMPERFECT    IM1*21^- 

TIVE. 

PAST  PAR. 

TICIPLE. 

*5Iiegen,  to  fly 

irf)  ffog          ifUege 

geflogen 

*3flieben,  to  flee 

id)  ffob          Ifliebe 

gefloben 

^He§<n,  to  flow 

id)  ffoB          'flteBe 

geffoiien 

greffen,  to  eat  (of  ani-  bu  friffefl,  er  frtfjt 

id)  frafs          friB 

flefteffen 

mals) 

grieren,  to  be  cold 

tdj  fror          friere 

jefroren 

®dbren,  to  ferment                                                   .id)  gobr         gabre 

aeaobren 

Oebaren,  to  bring  forth  bu   geflarft  (gebterft),  er  ge=  id)  gebar        gebare(gebter)lgtboren 

bdrt  (gebiert) 
©ebeu,  to  give               ,bu  giebft,  er  giebt 
*©ebeiben,  to  thrive 

id)  gab           gieb               gegeben 
id)  gebteb       gebeibe           gebieben 

*®efien,  to  go 
*@eltngen,  to  succeed    e»  gelingt 
to  be  worth       bu  gilrft,  er  gilt 
••'•®eneien,  to  recover 
on-itieBcn,  to  enjoy 

id)  ging          gebe 
e*§  gelang       geltnge 
id)  gait          qilt 
id)  gtnaS        genefe 
id)  genoB       tgemefce 

gcgangen 
gelungen 
gcgolteu 
genefcn 
genoffen 

-$eid)eben,  to  happen    e§  gefdjieljt 

e5  gefdjab,      ^efd)ebe 

tjeldjtben 

(Seroinnen,  to  win 

id)  getrann     gerointie 

geroomten 

(SteBen,  to  pour 

id)  goB           gieBe 

gegofien 

<j>ietd)en,  to  be  like 

id)  gtidj          gletdje 

q  eg  lid)  en 

*©Ieiten,  to  glide 

id)  glitt         iglette 

gcglitten 

©limmen,     to    burn 

id)  glomtn      glimrne 

geglommen 

faintly 

©raben,  to  dig               bu  grabjl,  er  grdbl 
©reifen,  to  grasp 

id)  grub         grabe 
id)  griff          greife 

gegraben 
gegnffen 

.naben,  to  have                see  auxiliary  verbs  p.  2. 
fallen,  to  hold              bu  bdltft,  er  bait 

idi  bielt         balte 

gtbalten 

:.{-»angen,  to  hang          bu  bangft,  er  bdngt 

id)  ^ing          bange             geb^angcn 

£auen,  to  hew 

id)  ^ieb          baue 

gebauen 

£cben,  to  lift 

id>  bob           bebe 

geboben 

/oeiBen,  to  be  called 

id)  bieB          'beifje 

^,-t.   •  ri-— 

genetBen 

^elfen,  to  help 
ftennen,  to  know 

bu  bilfft,  er  bilft                   i*  balf          .b'ilf 
id)  ramtte      fenne 

gebolfen 
gelannt 

*£Hintmen,  to  climb 

id)  nomm       fUmme 

geftoimtten 

itlingen,  to  tinkle 

id)  Hang        flinge 

gettungen 

fineifen,  to  pinch 

id)  fniff         fneife 

gefniffen 

"ftommen,  to  come 

id)  fam          ifomme 

gefcmmen 

Sonnen,  can 

see  auxil.  verbs  of  mood  p.  9. 

*£ried)en,  to  creep 

id)  frod)         jfriedje            gefrodjen 

fturen,  to  choose 

id)  turte  (f  or)  fure              [fletnrt 

(aeforen) 

Saben,  to  load  (a  gun)  bu  labefl  (I»1i),  er  labet  (Idbt) 
Safien,  to  let                  bu  Idffeft,  er  IdBt 

id)  lub           Ia^c                gelaben 
id)  liefj           Ii  fje               gelafTen 

•'-i!aufen,  to  run 

bu  Idufft,  er  Iduft 

id)  lief           lame 

gelaufeu 

iieiben,  to  suffer 

id)  Htt           letbc 

geltrten 

Seiben,  to  lend 

id)  Iie§          leibe 

gelieben 

iiefen,  to  read 

bu  liefeft,  er  Ueft 

id)  Ia§           Ite§ 

gelefen 

'  ijiegen,  to  lie 

id)  lag           'liege 

gelegen 

2ugen,  to  tell  a  lie 

id)  log            luge 

gelogen 

^Jiabten,  to  gruid 

id)  mablte      mable 

gentablen 

Sfteiben,  to  shun 

id)  mieb         meibe 

flemteben 

3KeIfen,  to  milk 

id)  melfte       melfe              gemolfen 

9)?effen,  to  measure 
SKogen,  may 
Mullen,  must 

bu  mtffeft,  fr  mifjt 
see  auxil.  verbs  of  mood  p.  15. 
tee  auxil.  verbs  of  mood  p.  8. 

(molt) 
id)  maB          mife               gemeffen 

^ebmen,  to  take 

bu  nimmft,  er  nimrat 

id)  ttabm        nimm 

grnonnnfn 

ftennen,  to  name 
«Pfeifen,  to  whistle 

id)  nannte      nenne            'geitannt 
id)  pfiff          pfeife             gepfiffen 

SJJftegen,    to   be    accus- 

id) pffegte      pflege 

gepflegt 

tomed 

(Pflog) 

(gepftogen) 

$reifen,  to  laud 

id)  prie*        greife 

gepriefen 

INFINITIVE. 

2nd  &  3rd  Person  singular 

INDICATIVE    PRESENT 

if  changed  from  1st  Person. 

IMPERFECT 

IMPERA- 
TIVE. 

PAST  PAR- 

TICIPLE. 

*CueHen,  to  spring  forth 
SRcitfien,  to  advise 

bu  quiUft,  er  quittt 
bu  rattift,  er  ratlj 

id)  quott 
id)  net!) 

quelle  (quiE)  jgequollen 
rat^e             'geratijen 

SReiben,  to  rub 

id)  rieb 

reibe             Igerieben 

iReifeen,  to  tear 

id)  ri§ 

reifee              geriffe« 

*3ieiten,  to  ride 

id)  ritt 

reite              geritten 

*SRennen,  to  run 

idi  rannte 

renne             gerannt 

SRiedjen,  to  smell 

id)  rod) 

riedjf             gexod)en 

Stingen,  to  wring 

id)  rang 

ringe 

gerungen 

SRinnen,  to  leak 

id)  rann 

rinnr 

geronnen 

SRufen,  to  call 

tdi  rief 

:ufe 

gerufen 

©aljen,  to  salt 
©aufen,    to    drink    (of 

bu  fauf  ft,  er  ffiuft 

id)  fahte 
i?  foff 

aufe 

gefalsen 
gefoffen 

animals) 

©augen,  to  suck 

id)  faugte(fog 

aug/ 

gefaugt  (gefo« 

©d)  off  en,  to  create 
*©djeiben,  to  part 

id)  i"djiif 
id)   diieb 

djaffe 
djeibe 

gen) 
gefdjaffen 
gefdiieben 

©djeinen,  to  shine 

id)   djien 

djeine 

gefdjienen 

©djelten,  to  scold 

bu  fdjiltft,  er  fdjilt 

id)    djalt 

diilt 

gefdjolten 

©d)eren,  to  shear 

id)    djor 

djere 

gefdioren 

©dneben,  to  shove 

idj   djob 

djiebe 

aefdioben 

©d)iefeen,  to  shoot 

idi    mo§ 

djiefee            gefdjoffen 

©djinben,  to  flay 

id)  fdjitnb 

minbe           gefdjunben 

©d)lofen,  t®  sleep 

bu  fdjlafft,  er  fdjttft 

iro  fdjltef 

ralafe            gefdjlafen 

©d)  lag  en,  to  beat 

bu  fdjlagft,  er  fdjlagt 

id)  fdjlug 

djlage           ;ge|d)Iagen 

*©d)Ieidjen,  to  sneak 

;d)    djlid) 

dileidje         |gefdilid)en 

©djleifen,  to  sharpen 

;dl    djltff 

djleife           gefd^Iiffen 

©djleifeen,  to  slit 

:dj    djlife 

djleiBe          gefStiffen 

©djliefjen,  to  shut 

:dj    d)lo& 

mlieBe          Igefdjloffen 

©d)Hngen,  to  twine 

.d)   djlang 

mlinge         |gefd)Iungen 

©djmeifeen,  to  fling 

dj   djmife 

d)mei§e          aefdintifien 

©djmeljen,  to  melt 

bu   fdjineljeft  (fcfjmUaejl),  er 

id)   djmols 

djmelje 

gefdjmoljen 

©djnauben,  to  snort 

jdjnte  s   (jd)tm  jt) 

id)   fdjnaubte 

djnaube 

gefd)naubt 

(fdjnob) 

(gefdjnoben) 

©djneiben,  to  cut 

d)   djnitt 

d)neibe 

aefdmitten 

©d)reiben,  to  write 

.m  fdjrieb 

d&reibe          Igefdjrieben 

©djreien,  to  scream 

d)  fdjrie 

mreie            gefdjrieen 

*©djreiten,  to  stride 

d)  fdiritt 

mreite          'aefdirttten 

©djtoeigen,  to  be  silent 

td)  fd)iuieg 

djtoeige 

(fdjtoeig) 

*©djraeu'en,  to  swell 

bu  fdjiuiflfi,  et  jdjtDiHt 

id)  fd)tooU 

d)n)eQe 

gefd)tt>oHen 

(fd)h)iH) 

*©djhrimmen,  to  swim 

id)  fd)tt)amm 

d)tt)tmme 

gefdjnjommen 

(fdjnjtmm) 

*@d)ttnnben,  to  vanish 
©djnringen,  to  swing 
©djtoSren,  to  swear 

d)  i~d)iucntb 
dj  fdjn)ang 

d)h)inbe 
djnjinge 

gefdittjunben 
gefdjrtJungen 
gefc^tuoren 

(fdjtour) 

©el)  en,  to  see 

bu  fieltft,  er  fle^t 

dj  fal) 

.e^ 

flefe^en 

*@ein,  to  be 
©enben,  to  send 

see  auxiliary  verbt  p.  4 

d)  fanbte 

enbe 

gefanbt    (get 

(fenbete) 

fenbet) 

©ieben,  to  boil 

d)    ott 

ebe 

jefotten 

©ingen,  to  sing 
*©infen,  to  sink 

do   ang 
dj   an! 

jefungen 
gefunfen 

©innen,  to  muse 
*©it>en,  to  sit 

dj  ann 

nne 

jefonnen 

©ollen,  shall,  oyght 
.Spalten,  to  split 

eee  auxU,  vtrbt  of  mood  p.  12. 

di  fpaltete 

patte 

}6|€|]61t 

gefpalten 

©peien,  to  spit 

9  fpie 

>eie 

jcfpieen 

©pinnen,  to  spin 

d)  fpann 

lUnti 

icfponnen 

j   2nd  &  3rd  Person  singular 
INFINITIVE.           INDICATIVE  PRESENT 
if  changed  from  1st  Person. 

IMPERFECT 

IMPERA- 
TIVE. 

PAST  PAR- 
TICIPLE. 

SpIeiBen,  to  split 

id?  fplife 

tytCtJ3C                     'ft*>fViftfTf»ri 

£pred?en,  to  speak         bu  fpridjft,  er  fpridjt 
*Spriefeen,  to  sprout     I 
*Springen,  to  spring 
Steven,  to  sting            bu  ftid?ft,  er  fHd?t 
*Ste«fen,  to  stick 

id?  fpradj 
id^  fprofe 
id^  fprong 
i$  ftoc!^ 
id?  ftecEte(ftal) 

fpriefee 
fprtnge 
frid? 
ftecfe 

D*-^**!!*-" 

gefprod?en 
geiproffen 
gefprungen 
geftod?en 
geftecft 

*8tep,en,  to  stand 

id?  ftanb 

fte^e 

D    1  *vv** 

geftanben 

Steven,  to  steal            bu  fheljlfi,  er  ftieljlt  - 

id?  ftab,! 

ftie^I 

gefto^Ien 

*Stetgen,  to  mount 
*8terben,  to  die 
*£tieben,    to   be    scat- 
tered 

bu  ftirbft,  er  ftirbt 

idj  ftteg 
id)  flarb 
id)  ftob 

fteiae 
ftirb 
[tiebe 

geftiegen 
geftorben 
geftoben 

etin!en,  to  stink 
Stojjen,  to  push 
Srreidjen,  to  stroke 
©tret  ten,  to  strive 

bu  jJoBeft,  er  ftofjt 

id?  ftonl 
id?  fties 
iro  ftiriOQ 
id)  ftritt 

ftinfe 
Me 

frreid5e 
ftrette 

geftunfen 
geftoBen 
geftridjen 
gefrritten 

2b,un,  to  do 

id?  t^ue,  bu  tljitft,   er  tb,ut, 

id?  tb,at 

get^an 

r 

wir  tb,un,  etc. 

Xragen,  to  carry 
Xrefren,  to  hit 

bu  tragft,  er  tragt 
bu  triffft,  er  trifft 

id?  trup 
id)  trttt 

trage              getragen 
trtff                getroffen 

Xreiben,  to  drive 

id?  trieb 

treibe             getrieben 

Xreten,  to  kick 

bu  trittft,  er  tritt 

id?  trot 

tritt               gerreten 

Xriefen,  to  drip 

id?    triefte 

triefe             'gerrieft 

(trof) 

Xrtnfen,  to  drink 

idj  tranl 

trinfe             gerrunfen 

Xrugen,  to  cheat 
SSerberben,  to  spoil 

bu  nerbirbfl,  er  berbirbt 

id)  trog 
id^  Uerbarb 

rriige             getrogen 
perbirb           perborbcn 

SerbricBen,  to  vex         e§  perbrie&t 
SSergefien,  to  forget        bu  Pergiffeft  er  Pergifjt 

e§  toerbroB         —              uerbroffen 
id?  pergafe      IbergiB            Perqefien 

SSerlteren,  to  lose 

id)  per  lor 

perliere          Perloren 

*S5erI6fd?en,   to   be  ex- 
tinguished, to  go  out 
*25erid?aHen,    to   disap- 

bu »erlofd?efi  (t)erltfd?eft),  er 
»erlofd?t  (berlifd?t) 

id?  perlofd? 
id?  Perfd?oH 

perlofd?e         perloidjen 
(Perlifd?) 
Perfd?atte        PerfdjoUen 

pear  (a  person) 

*2Bad?jen,  to  grow 

m  toadjieft,  er  toadift 

id?  toud)§ 

itjotfiie 

qetradiien 

28afd3en,  to  wash 

bu  »afd?eft,  er  toafdjt            jt^j  Juuidj 

tuafdje            getDdfd?en 

SBdgen,  to  weigh 

td?  n)OQ 

roage              getnogen 

SBeben,  to  weave 

id)  roebte 

tnebe              aeroebt     (ae» 

(»ob) 

rooben) 

*2Beidjen,  to  yield 

tdb  toidb 

tteidje            gen?id?en 

SBeiien,  to  show 

[it  nrie3 

toeife              getmefen 

28enben,  to  turn 

id?  toenbete 

tnenbe            geroenbet  (ge= 

(ttanbte) 

roanbt) 

SBerben,  to  sue  for 

bu  toirbfl,  er  tmrbt 

id?  tuarb 

Wirb              geroorben 

*S8erben,  to  become 
SBerfen,  to  throw 

see  auxiliary  verbs  p.  7. 
bu  ttnrfft,  er  toirft 

id?  toarf 

tt)irf               gettorfen 

SBiegen,  to  weigh 

id?  tt)og 

wiege             getoogen 

SBinben,  to  wind 

id?  toanb 

winbe            gfrounben 

SBiiTen,  to  know 

id?  tteife,  bu  njeiBt,  er  toeijj 

id?  tuuBte 

toiffe              gerouBt 

SBotten,  will 
Settyen,  to  accuse  of 

seeaKxilverbsoJinoodp.!!..^^ 

ieilje 

gejieb,en 

Bteb,en,  to  draw 

P**  jog 

^iepe             igejogen 

Bttingen,  to  force 

jroang 

3»inge          jge^mungen 

RETURN     CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 

TO—  •+      202  Main  Library 

LOAN  PERIOD  1 
HOME  USE 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

RENEWALS  AND  RECHARGES  MAY  BE  MADE  4  DAYS  PRIOR  TO  DUE  DATE. 
LOAN  PERIODS  ARE  1-MCNTH.  3-MONTHS.  AND  1-YEAR. 
RENEWALS:  CALL  (415)  642-3405 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 
FORM  NO.  DD6,  60m,  1/83          BERKELEY  CA  94720 


I 


U.C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


coeaaaotOM 


926682 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


r_ 


i 


